ve THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY NEw SOUTH Vy AEs FOR THE YEAR Lee VOL. LITI. WITH THIRTY-NINE PLATES, ONE PORTRAIT and 173 Text-figures SYDNEY: PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY THE AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO., LTD., Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney, and SOLD BY THE SOCINTY. 1928-1929. A ry re sli ie CONTENTS OF PROCEEDINGS, 1928. PART I (No. 215). (Issued 16th April, 1928.) Pages. Chairman’s Address, delivered at the Fifty-third Annual Meeting, 28th March, 1928 . Brat a iicio an i-viii Presidential Address, a the late PrOeseor co eee B. Is B. ice We ix-xxxi Hlections Ae Hie ORS as RNR ae Xxxi Balance Sheets foe ines year tended 31st Decemben 1927 . Soo) oo oo OSI Go-ahy PART II (No. 216). (Issued 15th May, 1928.) Notes on Australian Coleoptera, with Descriptions of New Species. Part i. By Charles Oke .. .. Basta eh ai er eeMc i Ah) cea i avn © baths aetna Cake 1- 30 The Loranthaceae of Ani Patias Patt vii. By W. F. Blakely. (Plates i-ix) ante 50 Crane-flies (Tipulidae, Diptera) from Barrington Tops, N.S.W. By Charles P. Alexander, F.E.S. (Communicated by I. M. Mackerras, Wilby Citelilog IB0SCo)) 60 0 5 a 51- 70 The Growth Rings in the Wood oe Australian ‘Avaucariant Goaitere: By W. D. Francis. (Plates x-xi.) esl or aa A 71- 79 A Review of the Australian Species of Ganysanines iGrehidaccaens By the Rev. H. M. R. Rupp, B.A., and W. H. Nicholls. (Plate xii.) .. .. 80- 89 A Revision of the Australian Bombyliidae (Diptera). Part i. By Frederick H. S. Roberts, M.Se. (Four Text-figures.) .. . 90-144 Fossil Plants from Plutoville, Cape York Peninsula. By A. B. Wallon D.Sc. (Plates xiii-xiv and two Text-figures.) .. .. .. .. .. .. 145-150 PART III (No. 217). (Issued 16th July, 1928.) The Geology of the South Coast of New South Wales. Part i. The Palaeozoic Geology of the Moruya District. By Ida A. Brown, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology. (Plates xv-xviii and four Text-figures.) .. are piuhal eMart deters amd Lay bea Le The Larva of Hemiphlebia poteciiiis Shine Oden Be R. J. Tillyard, M.A., Se.D. (Cantab.), D.Se. (Sydney), F.R.S:, F.N.Z. Inst., F.L.S., F.G.8., F.E.S., C.M.Z.S. (Thirteen Text-figures. ) Meas ts 193-206 The Physiography of the Cox River Basin. By Frank A. Craft, “BSc. (Plates xix-xx, and seventeen Text-figures.) Sid, PAREN ak . .. 207-254 Fossil Plants from the Upper Palaeozoic Rocks of New South Wales. By A. B. Walkom, D.Sc. (Plates xxi-xxiii and one Text-figure.) .. .. 255-269 DOS tig Aue li TD fel { é iv. CONTENTS. Revision of the Australian Species of the Genera Curis, Neocuris and Trachys, together with Notes and Descriptions of New Species of other Coleoptera. By H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S. .. ell) eas eet ater Sen ts The Australasian Species of the Genus Nemopalpus (Psychodidae, Diptera). By Charles P. Alexander. (Communicated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) (Two Text-figures.) . Ramin Le ARY ih ice, Notes on Australian Diptera. No. xiv. By J. R. ‘Malloch. (Communicated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) iets Lepidodendroid Remains from Yalwal, N. SW. Ba wN. ‘B. Wallon: D.Sc. (Plate xxiv.) ae Pee re eee erm ten A Gla) cee Rint ae glace On the Life-history of Conn o ahs By Thos. L. Bancroft, M.B., Ch.M. (Edin.). (Communicated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) PART IV (No. 218). (Issued 15th October, 1928.) Notes on Australian Diptera. No. xv. By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) (Five Text-figures.) : Terrestrial Orchids of Barrington Tops, N-S-W. By ie Ban H. M. R. Rupp, B.A. (Five Text-figures. ) Notes on Australian Diptera. No. xvi. By I. R. Moloch: (Communtgnren by I. M. Mackerras.) (Four Text-figures.) PUP rs ween Oho eniy PbS The Tanyderidae of Australia (Diptera). By Charles P. Alexander. (Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) (Four Text-figures. ) New Species of Australian HErirhinides (Curculionidae). By Weenie M. Lea, F.H.S. ; i aa Rees a aR Notes on four little- enepain Siecics of Kanes nos By A. S. Le Souef, C.M.Z.S. (Four Text-figures.) Ate Uncen) MScaUNCIDUE MEH a'r Di eee Notes on Australian Lycaenidae. Part vi. By G. A. Waterhouse, D.Sc., B.E., F.H.S. (Plate xxv.) ; ; eds, wala Senna aes A Revision of the Australian Bomibulidae TCpiptenay” Part ii. By Frederick H. S. Roberts, M.Sc. } MR ACH Ona re ERY Vetes atte, A new Buprestid from Australia. By A. Thery. (Conanamnilenied by AH. J Carter.) (One Text-figure.) : Fossil Plants from the Esk District, Gusensland By fe B. Walkom, D. Se. (Plates xxvi-xxviii and four Text-figures.) j Third Contribution towards a new Classification of oniralian Dreniaael By G. Hy Hardy |. Features of the Vegetative tony ae iho) Wustralian White Baw (Gmelina Leichhardtii). By W. D. Francis. (Plates xxix-xxxi and nine Text-figures.) BEBO Te GL CELI LoTR O? GRR OO eTA ASTRA GIN wesecrnt (Bs William Aitcheson Haswell. Memorial Notice. (With Portrait.) .. RARE WViCNone Zito) e (Issued 14th December, 1928.) The Life History of Doryanthes excelsa. Part i. Some Heological and Vegetative Features and Spore Production. By I. V. Newman, M.Sc. (Plates xxxii-xxxvy and forty-three Text-figures.) Pages. 270-290 291-294 295-309 310-314 315-317 319-335 336-342 343-366 367-374 375-396 397-400 401-412 415-455 456-457 458-468 469-473 474-484 485-498 499-538 CONTENTS. New Australian Mydaidae (Diptera). By I. M. Mackerras, B.Sc., M.B., Ch.M. ‘ Revision of Hesthesis (oabem Gurainyeidaen Vipeether ann an Mesexintion of a new Genus and Species of the Buprestidae. By H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S. (One Text-figure. ) Notes on Corysanthes and some Species of Pter Oeeuiin aml Ghitostontn: By the Rey. H. M. R. Rupp, B.A. (Four Text-figures. ) Eek Fa Notes on some Additions to the Glossopteris Flora in New South venleet By A. B. Walkom, D.Se. (Plate xxxvi and thirteen Text-figures. ) The Carboniferous Rocks between Glennies Creek and Muscle Creek, Hunter River District, New South Wales. By G. D. Osborne, B.Sc. (Plate xxxvii and seven Text-figures. ) The Carboniferous Rocks in the Muswellbrook-Scone District, ath Saecial Reference to their Structural Relations. By G. D. Osborne, B.Sc. (Plate xxxviii and two Text-figures. ) Notes on Australian Diptera. No. xvii. By J. R. Malloch. (Communi- cated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) (Twelve Text-figures. ) ‘ The Physiography of the Wollondilly River Basin. By F. A. Craft, B. Sp, (Plate xxxix and twelve Text-figures. ) Be A RUN edna TARR Notes on Australian Diptera. No. xviii. By J. R. Malloch. (Communi- cated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) PART VI (No. 220). (Issued 15th February, 1929.) Abstract of Proceedings Donations and Exchanges List of Members v. Pages. 539-543 544-550 591-554 555-564 565-587 588-597 598-617 618-650 651-662 XXXV-Xl Vi xlvii-lxiv lxv-lxix Index Sg HE, — Sint His enc ok TERRE RC Mant). | seo) Ske te OCD Oo aint vi. CONTENTS. LIST OF NEW TRIBES, GENERA AND SUBGENERA DESCRIBED IN THIS VOLUME (1928). Page. AC OMUOSTINA s (CASIITEAGC)) | 2 eon. sen aha ss Bah te ekeneiy Boies g)-akiais ark bene Mic d Nue ed ee RM A Anthracomyza (Calliphoridae) Sy een ee AT hh eer ye ken | aah) Berisina (Beridinae) pseyl 2 Us gatrcUr y irombatertel u's -on Lusch St Nee REE ETS od RL EO OLE Bitrephes (Ptinidae) BUD aaa CE We Ree ee ey Las te hctts Ma Poem RE Ralam Rin wn ACL Calliplatyura (Ceroplatinae) .. .. .. ete wea ia Tue RAN eR a eels PL OULO) Chaetopiophila (Piophilidae) Be EE RN Rea Soe 0K TAURI a MENT SEPP Rac sy ae Ne aaeapee Naty D. mer (0) CHU RCLIFG (SEO wos) 5, coe oe 66 on a6 a0 od) oo oc oo GH Eupinion (Brachyglutini, Coleoptera) Dah oN pee fh i UAT MCW A gua falta al oc 14 Hupinolus (Brachyglunini, Coleoptera) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. so. 11 Butanyderus’ (Banyderidae iy) Mapa ee in) chy) ee Ie Ut Se) a a eam Limnella (Muscidae) Fou paeiacchelas pis, opqat Ledge Sh aie Gabel aps Weeea ee Limnina (Muscidae) A an ee hoe S Pen Lu Rin ToAPeC Ma RG t.., Beall Matlleecola (Brachyglutini, Coleoptera) AO a OR IG, SAR Ue ee rae 15 NEON ALI NUDOL USI (lay Aiibas COLE OECTA) een nn nnn 22 MN COMUDEL ORG (CEO MENGIMBAQ) 955 se) go 68 660 ba Go, do oo oo. ae oo GOO INGOSOGROVOG OM (CSAS ODOON) 665 co 65 06 20 06 6 ao eo ac oo (GU Neosepedon (Dichaetophora) Dee bs) ER Oe aaa der ay ERROR T Oe Fike So ea) LADO UGS (NMEA TMIMEYS)) 5 kg ng kw op oe oe oon ABE Podanema (Sepsidae) SE TAREE cay, Wied ag BUaNt Sheen Nee Pec Ria: yah st Slee oe eS IESGUUODEDRANES (LDPOROSO ONES) 5, op oc oo on oa ae ao no os oo UY MERU AO CRN UO NEMS) 65 6 so ok eo oe eo . ROR Theryaxia (Buprestidae) S See iles ) aint Ree Tn or cata denim ad rte 7.0) Oa Renn 1.0) Xenoplatyura (Ceroplatinae) 6 oy WEA MID 1 ateg Metis aia oA A a a (1) () CONTENTS. Vii. LIST OF PLATES. PROCEEDINGS, 1928. i-iii—Species of Korthalsella. iv-vii—Species of Notothizos. vii-ix.—Species of Viscum. x-xii—Sections of Araucaria and Agathis. xii.—Species of. Corysanthes. xiii-xiv.—Fossil plants from Plutoville, Cape York Peninsula. xv.— Geological sketch map of the Moruya District. xvi-xviiiimRocks of the Moruya District. xix-xx.—Physiography of Cox River Basin. . xxi-xxiii.—Carboniferous and Permian fossil plants from New South Wales. xxiv.—Devonian fossil plants from Yalwal. xxv.—Subspecies of Pseudalmenus and Miletus. XXVi-xxviliimFossil plants (Triassic) from Hsk. XXix-xxxi.—Sections of Gmelina Leichhardatii. XXxXii-xxxv.—_ Doryanthes excelsa. xxxvi.—Glossopteris shoots, and seeds from N.S.W. xxxvii.—Geological map of the Carboniferous system between Glennies Creek and Muscle Creek. XxXxXviilii—Geological map of the Carboniferous rocks in the Muswellbrook-Scone District. xxxix.—Block diagram of the Wollondilly Basin. Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page CORRIGENDA. 14, line 22, for Tyramorphus, read Tyromorphus 35, line 39, for australe, read australis 101, 336, 526, 521, 533, 538 601, line 40, for sinwatifscia, read sinuatifascia line 28, for Prasophylum, read Prasophyllum line 2, for larger, read smaller line 8 for placenta in column “Megasporogenesis”’ i or placental explanation of Plate xxxv, Figs. 23, 28 read receptacle. line 7, for Calloplatyura read Calliplatyuwra (Note: Calliplatyura takes precedence, appearing in the key on Page 600) THE PROC re ENG.S OF THE LINAEAN SOCIETY OF feo, New SoutH WALES Z We < WEDNESDAY, 28TH Marcu, 1928. The Fifty-third Annual General Meeting, was held at Macleay House, 16 College Street, Sydney, on Wednesday evening, 28th March, 1928. ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING. Mr. R. H. Cambage, C.B.E., F.L.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. The minutes of the preceding Annual General Meeting (30th March, 1927) were read and confirmed. CHAIRMAN’S ADDRESS. A sad and melancholy circumstance is responsible for the delivery of a Presidential Address to-night when the Society has no President. It was characteristic of the enthusiasm and thoroughness of Professor Harrison that he had completed the manuscript of his Address nearly three months before the time for its delivery and so we are able to listen to his able summary of his own work in connection with some important problems concerning host and parasite. For the second time in the history of the Society death has snatched a President before the completion of his term of office. In November, 1890, some nine weeks before the Annual Meeting, Professor W. J. Stephens, President of the Society, died after a short severe illness; this year, some five weeks before this Annual Meeting, we were all appalled by the news of the sudden death of Professor L. Harrison whilst enjoying a well-earned holiday at Narooma. The parallelism of the two losses is strikingly lose; each occupied a professorship of Natural History, Professor Stephens havirg the wider designation of Professor of Natural History, Professor Harrison the more specialized one of Professor of Zoology; each had made extremely valuable contributions to Australian Natural History; each had served this Society with distinction in the office of President; and each was revered and beloved by colleagues and friends. It is a remarkable fact that during a short period of three years, seven deaths have occurred of members who have occupied our Presidential Chair—mere contemplation of their names makes us realize our losses: Haswell, Steel, Maiden, Fletcher, Hedley, Ferguson, Harrison. In March, 1927, Mr. M. F. Albert, who had purchased from the Society the land: on which stood the Linnean Hall at Elizabeth Bay, approached the Council A ~ 7J5) fi ii CHAIRMAN’S ADDRESS. with the object of obtaining possession of the land before the Society’s lease expired in November, 1928. His proposals were accepted by the Council and arrangements were made to house the Society’s library at the Macleay Museum and to store the bacteriologist’s apparatus and equipment. On 25th May, 1927, the property was formally handed over to Mr. Albert, the Society thus finally relinquishing all title to the land which Sir William Macleay presented to it in October, 1885, for the unexpired balance (about 89 years) of his original lease, and of which the Society purchased the freehold about the end of 1910. For some time past the possibility of providing a building in which most, if not all, of the scientific societies of Sydney could be housed has been under consideration by a committee composed of representatives of the Institution of Engineers, the Royal Society of New South Wales and our Society. As a first step representations were made to the Government of New South Wales, which has expressed its willingness to provide a site and has offered a piece of land at the corner of Essex and Gloucester Streets. A practicable proposal appears to have been put forward, but negotiations have not yet approached the final stages. In the meantime the Society’s library remains at the Macleay Museum, and until some final decision has been arrived at, your Council will not further consider the plan which it had in view of providing a new building for a hall and library at 16 College Street. The nineteenth meeting of the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science was held at Hobart in January last and proved highly successful, indicating that the good done by the meetings is appreciated both by the public and by scientific workers. Hach of the fifteen sections of the Association held well attended meetings and was fully occupied with papers and discussions. About June, 1927, the Government of New South Wales issued a proclamation protecting, for a period of one year, certain of the wild flowers. The Govern- ment is to be congratulated on taking this step; it is, however, only a step towards giving our beautiful flowers an opportunity to recover from the many years of unrestrained picking to which they have been subject, and it is to be hoped not only that the period of protection will be extended but that, as necessity arises, the protection will be extended to other species that may be in danger of extermination. The concluding part of Volume lii of the Society’s Proceedings has been issued. The complete volume (571 plus xcv pages, 50 plates and 372 text-figures) contains thirty-seven papers from twenty-six authors, five of the papers being. contributions from the Society’s research staff. In view of the fact that for the last two years there has been a big accumulation of papers towards the end of the year, as a result of which a number have had to be held over till the following year’s Proceedings, the Council has decided to increase the size of the volume by the issue of an additional part each year. There will now be four parts devoted to the publication of papers, the months of issue being probably May, July, October and December. In this way the Council hopes to keep abreast of the increasing activity of members of the Society. The addition to Rule vi, agreed to and confirmed at Special General Meetings on 30th March and 27th April, 1927, makes provision for Life Membership of the Society which may be taken advantage of by members who wish to compound their annual subscription. Exchange relations with scientific societies and institutions have continued to be normal. The number of receipts for the session shows a large increase due, CHAIRMAN’S ADDRESS. ili. in part, to the resumption of exchanges with some Russian societies and to the receipt of some long series of periodicals in exchange for the Proceedings. The receipts total 2,540 as compared with 1821, 1409 and 1457 for previous sessions. Applications for the establishment of exchange relations continue and during the past twelve months the following societies and institutions have been added to our exchange list:—Department of Mines, Adelaide; Mines Department, Hobart; Geological Survey of the Netherlands Hast Indies, Bandoeng, Java; Musée Royale d’Histoire Naturelle, Brussels; Agricultural Experiment Station, Stockholm; Société des Naturalistes de Kiew, Kiew; State Institute of Experimental Agronomy, Bureau of Applied Entomology, Leningrad; Kossino Biological Station, Moscow; Agricultural Experiment Station, Saratov; Société Hntomologique de Stavropol, Stavropol; San Diego Society of Natural History, San Diego. One exchange—with the American Entomological Society—has been discontinued. The vacancy on the Council caused by the death of Dr. E. W. Ferguson was filled by the election of Mr. A. J. Nicholson, M.Sc. I have much pleasure in offering the Society’s heartiest congratulations to:— Mr. E. GC. Andrews on his election as President-elect of the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science; Dr. W. G. Woolnough on his appointment as Geological Adviser to the Commonwealth Government; Mr. A. H. K. Petrie on his election to an 1851 Exhibition Travelling Scholarship; Dr. R. J. Tillyard on his appointment as Chief Commonwealth Entomologist; Mr. C. A. Sussmilch on his appointment as Principal of the East Sydney Technical School and Assistant Superintendent of Technical Education; Mr. C. Barnard on his appointment as Assistant Botanist to the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research; Professor T. G. B. Osborn on his appointment to the Chair of Botany in the University of Sydney; Sir Douglas Mawson on the award to him of the medal of the Société de Géographie, Paris, in recognition of the oceanographical work of the Australasian Antarctic Expedition. During the past year the names of sixteen members have been added to the list and four names have been removed, two members have resigned and death has taken five members. The number of ordinary members now on the roll is 168. The losses by death have again been very severe, the names being D. F. Cooksey, E. W. Ferguson, L. Harrison, John Mitchell and R. Greig Smith. In addition to these, four former members have died during the year, viz.: Professor A. Liversidge, an original member who continued his membership till 1907, Messrs. E. R. Waite and T. Whitelegge, both of whom had been members of Council, and Dr. J. M. Petrie, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Biochemistry from 1907 to 1925. Mr. Waite was a member of the Society from 1893 to 1914 and a Councillor from 1904 to 1906; Mr. Whitelegge was elected a member in 1883 and served on the Council from 1890 to 1896. DANIEL FREDERICK CoOKSEY, who died on 16th September, 1927, after a short illness, was born in London on 10th June, 1864. With his wife and family he came to Australia about seventeen years ago, residing in Victoria for nearly three years. He then came to Sydney and afterwards removed to Mayfield, Newcastle. For the past five years he had been employed in the drawing office of the Broken Hill Proprietary Company in Newcastle. He joined this Society in 1926 but as his residence was so far away he was able to attend few meetings. Whilst in Newcastle he took a keen interest in relics of the aboriginals and being an assiduous collector, he had gathered together a very large number of aboriginal implements and had carefully mapped the areas in the Newcastle District where iv. CHAIRMAN’S ADDRESS. they occurred. He was a man of some artistic ability and achievement, having studied decorative art in his younger days. EUSTACE WILLIAM FrErRGusoN, son of the late Rev. John Ferguson, was born at Invercargill, New Zealand, in 1884, and came to Sydney in 1894. He received his early education at various schools in Sydney and entered the University in 1903. In 1908 he graduated M.B., Ch.M., with honours, having, during his course, won Professor Haswell’s prize for Zoology, the Collie prize for Botany and Professor Anderson’s prize for Logic. After graduation he was appointed Resident Medical Officer at Sydney Hospital, and during 1909-10 he served as Pathologist to the Hospital. In 1911 he went into private practice with Dr. Walton Smith, but after a short time he entered the Public Service, being appointed, in 1912, a medical officer at the Rydalmere Hospital for the Insane. In 1913 he was transferred to the Micro- biological Laboratory of the Department of Public Health but soon afterwards (in 1915) he volunteered for service overseas during the Great War and was for four years attached to the Australian Army Medical Corps in England, France and Palestine. He was for some time in charge of the Anzac Field Laboratory in the Jordan Valley. In 1920, shortly after resuming his work at the Health Department, he was appointed Principal Microbiologist in succession to Dr. J. B. Cleland, who had been appointed to the Chair of Pathology in the University of Adelaide. He was taken ill on 27th November, 1926, and after suffering severely from Bright’s disease for nearly eight months, he died on 18th July, 1927. Harly in life he evinced a keen interest in entomology and whilst an under- graduate succeeded in collecting many rare beetles on the Blue Mountains and around Sydney. He retained this interest for the remainder of his life, studying particularly a family of ground-weevils (Amycteridae) on which he contributed a series of ten papers to our Proceedings during the years 1909 to 1923, in addition to one paper dealing with the Amycteridae of the Voyage of the Astrolabe, 1835, in 1911. He also combined his entomological interests with his medical work and in this connection became an authority on Australian flies and mosquitoes, and one of the outstanding authorities of his day on medical entomology. He had a very wide knowledge of insects in general, but confined his published original work to a few special groups. His contribution to the study of other groups, however, was no mean one, for he collected widely and submitted many of his collections to other specialists who studied them and published the results of their study. Amongst such may be mentioned the series of Studies on Australian Diptera in our Proceedings, by J. R. Malloch; a large proportion of the material there described was forwarded to Mr. Malloch by Eustace Ferguson. He was a gifted collector, his keen eye and unusually developed powers of close observation making possible for him what would have been impossible for many, namely the collection of groups of insects, so minute in size and so swift in flight that their capture is a matter of no little difficulty. He had also a wide knowledge of Australian birds and often astonished his colleagues by his familiarity with birds which he met for the first time, having previously only known them from books. He joined our Society in 1908, was elected a member of Council in 1921 and was President for the Session 1926-1927. He was a member of the Royal Society of New South Wales and a Councillor of the Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales, of which he was President for the year 1922-23. He was also a Fellow of the Royal Institute of Tropical Medicine. In addition to his eleven papers on Amycteridae he contributed to our Proceedings one on a new species CHAIRMAN’S ADDRESS. v. of Mycetophilidae and three (in conjunction with colleagues) on Australian Tabanidae. RoBert GREIG-SMITH, who died at Darlinghurst on 6th August, 1927, was born at Edinburgh in 1866. He was educated at George Watson’s College and in 1890 obtained the degree of Bachelor of Science at the University of Edinburgh, where he had a distinguished course, especially in botany and chemistry. In 1891 he was appointed Lecturer in Agricultural Chemistry at the Durham College of Science at Newcastle-upon-Tyne where, later, by vote of convocation he was awarded the degree of M.Sc. Whilst he was at Durham College he was additional examiner in Agricultural Chemistry in the University of Edinburgh and also in Chemistry and Physics to the Highland and Agricultural Society of Scotland. He obtained continental experience in his subject by studying in the laboratories of Professor Stutzer of Bonn, and Herr Alfred Jorgensen of Copenhagen. He was appointed Macleay Bacteriologist to this Society at a special meeting of Council on 4th March, 1898, and arrived in Sydney in September of the same year, taking up his duties immediately. The fitting up of a laboratory, which had been delayed until his arrival, took some time but it was not long before he was able to settle down to his research, his first paper appearing in Part 4 of the Proceedings for 1899. During the twenty-nine years for which he was Macleay Bacteriologist he contributed 81 papers to the Proceedings, covering a wide range of bacteriological problems, amongst which may be noted those dealing with the Bacterial Flora of the Sydney Water Supply (1900), the Bacterial Origin of Gums of the Arabin Group (1902-04), Contributions to our Knowledge of Soil Fertility (1910-18), the Germicidal Activity of Eucalyptus Oils (1919), the High Temperature Organism of Fermenting Tan-bark (1921-23), the Influence of Colloids upon Fermentation (1924-27), and numerous smaller papers dealing with Slime Bacteria, and the Formation of Slime, and also the Fixation of Nitrogen. In 1903 he attained his doctorate in Science of the University of Edinburgh. Apart from his research work he took a Keen interest in scientific societies whose range of work covered his own subject, and held office in a number of them. In 1906 he was President of the Pathological Club of Sydney; 1907, President of Section I of the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science; 1906-08, Chairman of the Sydney Section of the Society of Chemical Industry; 1915, President, 1925-27, Hon. Secretary, and 1906-1927, member of Council of the Royal Society of New South Wales. During his term of office he was twice granted extended leave to enable him to visit Europe to keep in touch with the progress of bacteriological work by establishing personal contact with colleagues working on subjects similar to his own. He became ill in the early part of 1927 and the Council granted him six months’ leave in the hope that the rest would enable him to recover but he passed away quietly on 6th August. He leaves behind him a large bulk of research in bacteriology which cannot but be of considerable value to future workers in a subject in which at the present time there are far too few research workers in Australia. : LAUNCELOT Harrison, the eldest son of the late Dr. Thomas Harrison, of Sydney, was born at Wellington, N.S.W., in 1880. He was educated at the King’s School, Parramatta, where he was head of the school and Broughton Scholar for two years. In 1911 he entered the University of Sydney and in 1913 graduated Bachelor of Science with first-class Honours and the University Medal in Zoology and Honours in Botany. He won Professor Haswell’s prize for Zoology and Mr. vi. CHAIRMAN’S ADDRESS. W. S. Dun’s prize for palaeontology during his course. During 1913 and 1914 he was Junior Demonstrator in Zoology and Botany and in 1914 was awarded the John Coutts Scholarship. In the same year he was elected to an 1851 Hxhibition Scholarship and proceeded to Cambridge where he won an exhibition for research at Emmanuel College. In 1916 he gained the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Research), Cambridge. He did a large amount of scientific work in connection with the Great War, working for about fifteen months in the laboratory under Professor Nuttall and in 1916 he went as Advisory Entomologist to the Expeditionary Force in Mesopotamia with the rank of Lieutenant, later being promoted to Captain. The work accomplished in preventing the communication and spread of insect-carried diseases was of the greatest importance and undoubtedly saved a large number of valuable lives. While still on active service he was appointed Lecturer and Demonstrator in Zoology in the University of Sydney in 1918, the position being held for him until he resumed duty in July, 1919. In September, 1920, he was appointed Acting Professor of Zoology and in 1923 became Professor of Zoology, succeeding the late Professor S. J. Johnston. In 1920, he was also appointed Lecturer in Veterinary Parasitology. He took the keenest interest in University affairs apart from his own subject and was President of the Union in 1920-21, and held office in the University Science Society and University Dramatic Society. While he was at Cambridge he took an active interest in University life and in scientific matters; he was a Vice-President of the Cambridge Union Society and President of the Cambridge Natural History Society. In 1915 he was invited to open a discussion before Section D (Zoology) of the British Association on the general question of host-parasite relations, and in the following year to address the British Ornithologists’ Club, when he propounded a classification of petrels based entirely upon their Mallophagan parasites. For many years before he entered the University he was interested in Natural History and was an active member of the Field Naturalists’ Club. He was interested in his earlier life especially in external parasites—the Mallophaga in particular—and in birds, but later he had the widest possible interest in general zoology, though perhaps the subject of the relation between host and parasite, in its many aspects, held first place with him till the end. During the last year or two he was specially interested in the evidence contributed by host-parasite occurrences to the solution of problems of former land connections, particularly between Australia, Antarctica, and South America and made this the subject of a fine address to Section D of the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science at Perth in August, 1926. Harrison had all the attributes which go to make a successful University Professor in the widest sense, amongst them a thorough knowledge of his subject and the capacity for imparting that knowledge to others, ability of the highest order for carrying out research, combined with the rare faculty of inspiring and stimulating research in his students, and finally the possession of administrative ability far above the average. He has left his mark on Australian Zoology, not only in his wide accomplishment in research but also in an enthusiastic group of students who have done much research already and give promise of attaining high places among Australian zoologists. His published work, chiefly on Mallophaga and the relations between host and parasite, is scattered widely in scientific journals; he contributed papers at various times to The American Naturalist, Parasitology, The Ibis, The Proceedings CHAIRMAN’S ADDRESS. Vii. of the Cambridge Philosophical Society, and The Report of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, in addition to many of the Australian scientific societies. To our Proceedings he contributed only four papers, two of them in conjunction with colleagues. Joun MircHett, who died on 14th January, 1928, at the War Memorial Hospital, Waverley, Sydney, after having undergone an operation the previous day, was born at Ballieston, near Glasgow, Scotland, in 1848, and came to Australia a year later with his parents, who settled in the Newcastle District, his father having been appointed Under Manager for the Coal and Copper Company’s mine at Victoria Tunnel, Glebe, Newcastle. In 1873 he joined the Department of Public Instruction and received his training at the Fort Street Training School. After teaching for a short time in the Newcastle district he was transferred to Balranald, where he remained for nine years and in 1883 he was moved to Bowning. In 1898 he was appointed to take charge of the Technical College and School of Mines at Newcastle where he remained until his retirement about sixteen years later. Besides administering the affairs of the College, he lectured on a wide range of subjects including Geology, Mineralogy, Chemistry, Assaying and Botany. In 1910 he visited Europe, visiting a number of Technical Colleges and also accompanied the late Sir George Reid to an educational conference in Belgium. He was a gifted collector, and his collecting days commenced at Balranald where he gathered together a collection of beetles and butterflies. But on his removal to Bowning, a district rich in geological and palaeontological interest, he commenced to turn his attention seriously to Geology and occupied all his spare time in collecting fossils. Spending many years in a locality so rich in fossils he soon amassed a fine collection, which he studied seriously, the results of his studies being published in a series of valuable papers in our Proceedings. His published work was chiefly confined to the two groups Trilobita and Brachiopoda, though in addition he contributed occasional papers on Gasteropods, Pelecypods and more recently he turned his attention to Leaia and the Estheriae. It was on the Trilobites and Brachiopods, however, that his best work was done and on which he was regarded as an authority. On the Trilobites he worked for many years in collaboration with the late R. Etheridge, Jr., and together they published a series of seven important papers in these Proceedings between the years 1890 and 1917. His own papers in the Proceedings numbered seventeen between the years 1886 and 1927, his last paper having been published after he attained the age of 79 years and less than a year before his death. After his retirement he lived at Waratah in the Newcastle district, and devoted a great deal of time to the collection of fossil insects in the Newcastle Coal Measures. These fossils are not plentiful and a keen eye was necessary for their discovery, but with the born collector’s instinct and patience he managed to gather a fine collection; he also had extensive collections of fossil plants, particularly from the Wianamatta Shales in the vicinity of Narellan and Glenlee and from the Glossopteris-bearing rocks of the Newcastle district. The year’s work of the Society’s research staff may be summarized thus: The late Dr. R. Greig-Smith, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society, continued his investigations into the activity of mineral colloids upon fermentation; a paper containing three further parts of this work appeared in the Procreprnes for 1927. Having been in indifferent health for some time he was, in May, 1927, granted six months leave of absence in the hope that he would regain his normal health, put his illness was terminated suddenly by his death on 6th August, 1927. Vili. CHAIRMAN’S ADDRESS. Dr. I. M. Mackerras, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Zoology, was given leave of absence in January, 1927, to carry on work at the Bureau of Microbiology during the absence of Dr. E. W. Ferguson. After Dr. Ferguson’s lamentable death, Dr. Mackerras was offered a permanent appointment which he accepted and resigned his Fellowship on 30th September. Actually then he did not carry out any research as a Linnean Macleay Fellow during the past year, but he submitted two papers on mosquitoes containing the results of his previous year’s research as a Fellow and these appear in the ProcreEpines for 1927. Miss May M. Williams, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Botany, has continued her observations on the gametogenesis and life-history of Bryopsis plumosa. She was successful in obtaining fertilization of the female gamete and germination of the zygospore thus formed, and was able to study the various stages in detail. She also commenced a study of Hctocarpus, spending some time on the literature relating to this and allied genera, having in view an investigation of the formation of unilocular and multilocular sporangia. Miss Ida A. Brown, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology, spent the earlier part of the year in the laboratory, working on specimens collected previously in the Moruya district and on the preparation of her geological map. She then spent some time in the district in order to complete the mapping, and studied in particular the relationships of the Early Palaeozoic sediments and the occurrence of the Tertiary beds. Further field work was done in the Tilba-Mt. Dromedary area, to the south of Milton, where she did some preliminary mapping and collecting. Part of the work on the Moruya district dealing with the Palaeozoic geology has now been completed and the results embodied in a paper which will appear in the Procrrpines for 1928. A further paper on the Cainozoic geology of the area is to form a later part of the work. Miss Brown proposes this year to continue the work on the geological history of the South Coast of New South Wales, paying special attention to the problems of the geological age, conditions of sedimentation, mutual relationships and subsequent tectonic history of the sedimentary rocks, and the relationships, petrogenesis and correlation of the associated igneous rocks, south of Moruya. Miss H. Claire Weekes, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Zoology, commenced her work by studying four species of scincid lizards, her results being included in a paper, “A note on reproductive phenomena in some Lizards’, which appeared in the ProcEepines for 1927. In this paper she dealt with placentation, the growth of corpora lutea, and the extraordinary growth of extra-embryonic mesoderm in these lizards. She has also studied in detail placentation in Lygosoma (Hinulia) quoyi and placed the results on record in the PRocEEDINGS, with discussion of their bearing on the placentation of the Mammalia. Placentation has also been studied in two viviparous snakes and the results of this will probably be the first record of placentation among snakes. Miss Weekes proposes, during the coming year, to continue the investigation of reptilian placentation with the ultimate aim of making a study of the evolution of the reptilian placenta and of the extent of its bearing upon the placentation of the Mammalia. Three applications for Linnean Macleay Fellowships, 1928-29, were received in response to the Council’s invitation of 28th September, 1927. I have pleasure in reminding you that the Council re-appointed Miss Ida Alison Brown and Miss Hazel Claire Weekes to Fellowships in Geology and Zoology respectively for one year from 1st March, 1928. \ IY f PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. ¥ Dra a, ey ix. i by as Ne ~~ ee PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Host AND PARASITE. By the late Proressor L. Harrison, B.A., B.Sc. i—Introductory. I have chosen for the subject of my address the relation between organisms in obligate association under what I call here the host-parasite relation, a matter in which I have been interested for a good many years. The term parasite should, in strict accuracy, be confined to such organisms as live at the expense of their hosts, but I propose to use it loosely to indicate any obligate association, whether parasitic, commensal or symbiotic. Such an association links the parasite to its host in space, as is quite well realized, but curiously little attention has been given to the fact that there is also a linkage in time. For many groups of parasites host and parasite have come down the ages together. I have dared to fix the origin of bird-lice from psocids as far back as the Jurassic, since there is strong evidence that these existed upon birds and mammals from their very origins, so soon as there were feathers and hair to be eaten. Down that long period of time each generation of hosts has handed on its parasites to its successors. Mammals and birds have changed their forms under the continuous process of evolution, and their lice have changed, too. But parasites in general live under conditions which afford little stimulus to evolutionary change, and so tend to differentiate at a slower rate than their hosts, suffering what I have called elsewhere a retarded evolution. This relation can be made to serve several useful purposes. The ostriches of Africa and the rheas or nandus of South America are commonly supposed by ornithologists to have arisen from quite distinct stocks. But their lice are so similar, and so different from all other bird-lice, that these must have evolved from a common ancestor, and so also must the birds themselves. Evidence derived from lice is confirmed by the cestode and nematode parasites of the two groups of birds. Thus a phylogenetic relationship may be established by means of parasites. Equally, a supposed relationship may be refuted. Their lice prove that the penguins are in no way related to any northern group of aquatic birds, but belong in an ancient complex which includes the tinamous, fowls and pigeons; that the kiwis of New Zealand are modified rails, and not struthious birds at all; that the tropic-birds are not steganopodes but terns, and so on. A third use is to refute suggestions of convergent resemblance, which are often very lightly made, and which are so exasperating to the zoogeographer since they are usually incapable of either proof or disproof. Leptodactylid frogs are found in South America and Australia. Did they evolve separately, or are they derived from common ancestors? The herpetologist cannot say with any certainty, but the parasitologist discovers that they share a genus, Zelleriella, of ciliate protozoan parasites, and must have had common origin. This same example will serve to illustrate a fourth use for the host-parasite relation. The genus Zelleriella can, and does, infest frogs other than Leptodactylids. It is not found, however, anywhere except in Australia and South and Central America, so that its distribution affords strong presumptive evidence that South America and Australia have been joined in past time in some way which excluded the northern land masses. These examples indicate the nature of the host-parasite relation, and its possible usefulness. I propose now to give a short historical account, and to B x. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. follow with an examination of some groups of parasites to see how far this usefulness may be of general application. ii.—Historical. Since the relation between host and parasite is so obvious, it is remarkable that it has received so little attention. I have searched in vain amongst such textbooks of general parasitology as have come under my notice for any reference to it. It seems incredible that there should not be references in serial literature, but, until quite recent times, I have not been able to trace any. This may be due to the fact that such references, if there be any, occur in papers the titles of which give no indication of this aspect of their contents. Be that as it may, the earliest use of the host-parasite relation to suggest phyletic affinities which I have been able to trace is that by Zschokke, who in a series of papers (1898, 1899, 1907) upon the cestodes of marsupials, has insisted that the common possession of cestodes of the genus Linstowia by South American and Australian marsupials clearly indicated their origin from common stock. Two of Zschokke’s papers have not been accessible to me, and I have gathered their content from certain criticisms of Zschokke’s views by Nybelin (1917). The latter’s criticisms do not seem particularly well founded. They are based chiefly upon the well-known fact that many helminths are viable in animals other than their natural hosts. This must be admitted, but it merely demands that care must be exercised in using the host-parasite relation to distinguish between ancient natural associations and those which if not unnatural, are at least of more recent date. No one would suggest, for instance, because the liver-fluke of sheep has been found both in man and the kangaroo in Australia that these animals had any close genetic affinity with sheep. Kellogg may perhaps be held to antedate ZschokkKe, since, in his studies of lice, he drew attention to the fact that parasitic species have persisted unchanged from the common ancestor of two or more distinct but closely allied bird-species as early as 1896. But he was long in committing himself to the conclusion that any use could be made of this relationship, as the following quotations from his writings show. After pointing out that he has taken from American birds a number of lice specifically identical with those described from their European congeners, he writes (1896, p. 51) :— “This explanation, I believe, is, for many of the instances, that the parasitic species has persisted unchanged from the common ancestor of the two or more now distinct but closely allied bird-species. With the spreading of the ancestral bird-species, geographical races have arisen within the limits of the species which have, with time and isolation caused by newly appearing geographical barriers (due to geologic or climatic changes), come to be distinct species—species often distinguished only by superficial differences in colour, etc. The parasites have remained practically unaffected by the conditions which have produced the differences among the birds; the temperature of the host’s body, the feathers as food, all of the environment is essentially unchanged in its relation to the parasite. The parasitic species thus remains unchanged, while the first Larus species or Anas species becomes differentiated into a dozen or score of specific forms, all with a common parasite.” Between 1896 and 1913 I can find but one sentence in Kellogg’s writings which gives any indication that he was pondering upon the further implications involved in the above statement, and that is (Kellogg and Kuwana, 1902, p. 458) :— PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. xi. “Tt was hoped that the character of the parasites found on the strictly Galapagos Island bird hosts might throw some light on the relationships of these birds to continental genera and species % This hope was defeated by the extraordinary conditions obtaining on the islands, birds of different orders huddling together promiscuously on the bare rocks, and their parasites becoming hopelessly mixed. In 1913, however, Kellogg came definitely, if timidly into the open (1913, p. 138) :—“Of the other Mallophagan genera found on the tinamous two that specially characterize the pheasants and other gallinaceous birds are, by odds, the most commonly represented. And this condition suggests another interesting problem. Is it going to be possible to get suggestions regarding the phyletic affinities of hosts from the character of their parasitic fauna? Take, for example, an order of birds troublesome to the ornithological taxonomists. Will the evidence of the presence on members of this order of certain parasitic genera characteristic of another order indicate their affinities to this second order? It does indeed seem, in the case of the Tinamiformes and Galliformes, as if the evidence from the Mallophagan distribu- tion was in conformity with that suggested by certain structural similarities in the two groups.” In 1914 Kellogg was more emphatic, and he writes (p. 259):—“‘Also, if it be true that genetic relationship is the determining factor in accounting for the host distribution of the parasites, then it is also true that the distribution of the parasites will indicate in some measure the genetic relationships of the hosts, and that occasional aid in determining the genetic affinities of birds and mammals of doubtful relationships may be had from a study of their parasitic fauna. In my paper already referred to I have pointed out some suggestive cases of this sort in connection with the birds and their parasites.” He concludes (p. 279) :—“In the light of the plain statement in Part i of this ‘paper of my belief gained from a study of the distribution of the bird-infesting Mallophaga, to the effect that the host distribution of the permanent wingless ectoparasites of birds is determined more by the genetic relationships of these hosts than by geographic relationships or any ecological condition, and the corollary of this, which is that the distribution of the parasites may therefore often have a valuable significance as to the genetic relationships of animals whose genealogic affinities are in process of ascertainment, and in the light of the facts of distribution for the mammal-infesting Mallophaga and Anoplura as just set out in Part ii of this paper. I hardly need do more, in conclusion, than to point out that the distribution conditions exhibited by the mammal parasites, even in the face of the meagre knowledge that we yet have of the mammal-infesting forms, clearly, on the whole, confirm this thesis. In fact, considering how few mammal-infesting parasite species we yet know, it is surprising how repeatedly the commonness of parasite species to two or more related, although geographically well separated, host species, is illustrated. All through the order from Marsupials to Quadrumana this condition is again and again exemplified. I am then, naturally, made more certain of the essential truth of the thesis, and can the more strongly recommend the attention of systematic zoologists to that practical application of it, which I have stated in the form of a corollary.” My personal connection with this subject dates from 1911, when, after about a year’s study of Mallophaga, I read a paper before the Sydney University Science Society upon the possible value of these parasites in determining bird affinities. The manuscript of this paper has been lost, but an abstract was published in the Xii. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. annual report of the Society for 1911-12, which I quote to show that I had already arrived at some definite conclusions in advance of, and independently of, Kellogg:— “Wednesday, 16th August (1911).—Held in the Geology Theatre, the President in the chair. LL. Harrison read a paper, illustrated with lantern-slides, on “The Taxonomic Value of Certain Parasites.” The parasites referred to are the biting lice (Mallophaga) found upon birds or mammals. Owing to both environment and food remaining unchanged through the centuries, these insects have not differentiated as fast as their hosts, and afford indications of original relationship between birds that have diverged widely from parent stock. Though birds can be divided into good natural groups, the relationships between these groups have not, and cannot, be satisfactorily determined on anatomy alone. So any line of investigation that is likely to aid the solution of bird phylogeny deserves considera- tion. Some evidence is afforded confirming parts of existing classifications. Among other results, a study of the Mallophaga would suggest the inclusion of the penguins with the fowls, pigeons, and tinamous, a relationship that has never before been suggested. Such results could, of course, only be put forward as suggestions to the morphologist. A preliminary examination, however, of this group of parasites, certainly suggests that more complete knowledge will afford valuable clues towards the solution of bird taxonomy.” In 1914 I published -a general statement of the host-parasite relation in Mallophaga repeating the suggestion as to the position of the Sphenisciformes, and including Opisthocomus in the same grouping (1914, p. 10). I also discussed _the genetic connection of the struthious birds. In 1915 I discussed the parasites of the New Zealand kiwis (Apteryx spp.), and produced evidence to show that these were more nearly related to the Ralli than to the other struthious birds. Incidentally I produced evidence that the jacanas were ralline rather than limicoline. In the same year I was invited to open a discussion before Section D of the British Association for the Advancement of Science on the general question of host-parasite relations, an abstract of my address being printed in the Proceedings for the year. In the following year (1916) I was asked to address the British Ornithologists’ Club, and this address appeared in full in The Ibis, and in abstract, with an abstract of the discussion, in the Bulletin of the Club. In this address I propounded a classification of the petrels based entirely upon their Mallophagan parasites. More recently I have made use of lice and of other groups of parasites both for phyletic and for zoogeographical purposes, statements of which appear in due course below. The Chairman of the meeting at which I read my first paper in 1911 was Mr. (later Professor) S. J. Johnston. He told me upon that occasion that he proposed to test my ideas with regard to trematodes and cestodes. He subsequently wrote three short papers, which are discussed below. G. F. Ferris, pupil of, collaborator with and successor to Kellogg at Stanford, naturally imbibed his teacher’s ideas, and has made some contributions to the subject which will be discussed when I deal with lice later on. Metcalf (1921) was, so far as I am aware, the next independent discoverer of the value of the host-parasite method, being led to it by his investigations of the Opalinid parasites of frogs. In a series of subsequent papers he has based the broadest possible conclusions, both phyletic and zoogeographical, upon the distribu- tion of these parasites. We will touch upon his work when dealing with the Protozoa. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. xiii. Finally Darling’s discussion (1921) of hookworm in relation to man is a further example of independent use of the method, and Grobbelaar (1922) has extended §. J. Johnston’s discussion of frog trematodes. Theses reverberations are at last beginning to reach the ear of the general parasitologist, and Dr. Henry B. Ward, in his presidential address to the first annual meeting of the American Society of Parasitologists, writes (1926, p. 236) :—“The significance of studies in parasitology is by no means limited to the fields I have been discussing. Such studies have been shown to have a direct bearing in individual cases on problems of pure science, such as phylogenetic relationships, distribution and the origin of the parasites and their hosts.” He mentions the work of Kellogg, Metcalf and Darling. This brief historical discussion indicates that the same conclusions have been reached, for the most part quite independently of one another, by a number of workers upon various groups of parasites. This unanimity can mean but one thing, namely that the host-parasite relation is a general principle, and is capable of wide application when parasites are better known. I shall now proceed to consider this relation in some selected groups of parasites. iii—The Host-parasite Relation in Protozoa. Wenyon (1926, p. 136) writes on the general host-parasite relation in Protozoa as follows:— “An important feature of parasitism is the specificity of any particular parasite for its host. It is found in nature that some parasites are unable to live in any other host than the one in which they naturally occur. This undoubtedly depends upon the peculiarity of the body fluids of these animals. Some parasites have become so specialized that they cannot survive in any other fluid than the one to which they have become accustomed. Very frequently, however, a particular parasite is able to live in hosts which are nearly related, the fluids of which may be presumed to differ only slightly from one another. Thus Plasmodium vivax, which causes benign tertian malaria, cannot survive in any other vertebrate host than man, though Mesnil and Roubaud (1920) have shown that it may multiply for a short period in the chimpanzee. Other parasites are much less specific, for many of the pathogenic trypanosomes can develop in small rodents, which under natural conditions are never infected by them. In such cases it seems probable that quite apart from the suitability of the fluid of a host, the rapidity with which a host can develop antibodies, is the determining factor as to whether a parasite can establish itself or not. Instances are known in which it is only after many attempts to introduce a parasite into a host that success is at last attained. An instance of this is quoted below (p. 576), where Watson, attempting to isolate a strain of Trypanosoma equiperdum from horses in laboratory animals, only succeeded in one after inoculating over 600 animals. The infection, once established, was then readily inoculated from one animal to another. It is evident that here the fluids of the animal which gave a successful result differed from those in which inoculation had failed, or that amongst the organisms injected on the successful occasion there happened to be a few which found the environment congenial and were able to resist the antibodies developed. The fact that subsequent subinoculations were easily carried out seems to suggest that the explanation is to be found in the parasites themselves. Not infrequently an animal which has acquired an infection will free itself, after which it is found to be immune to further inoculations. On the other hand, it has been shown Xiv. ’ PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. that in some cases, when an infection has disappeared or has been much reduced, further inoculations of the same organism may bring about a superimposed infection which may be more severe than that first produced. Such an instance has been described by Noller (1917) in the case of frogs infected with Trypanosoma rotatorium. “Tt may be stated as a general rule that the specificity of parasitic Protozoa for their particular hosts is much more marked than is the case with vegetable parasites, such as bacteria, yeasts and allied organisms. It often happens that a parasite in one host may be morphologically indistinguishable from one in another. yet experimentally it is impossible to produce cross-infections. Whether such biological races are to be regarded as distinct species or not is a problem which still requires solution. From the strictly zoological point of view they should be regarded as belonging to one.” Despite the generally recognized specificity of protozoan parasites, only one group has been studied from the point of view of host affinities and migrations. The very interesting symbiosis between termites and their flagellate parasites, in which Cleveland .(1923) has shown that the flagellates are essential to the continued existence of their hosts, since the parasites alone are able to digest the cellulose of the wood upon which termites feed and to produce substances assimilable by their hosts, indicates a very ancient history of parasitism. Termites and flagellates must have evolved pari passu to have reached the present complex condition of interaction. It occurred to me when I first read of this relation that the phenomenon may have a wide general application amongst plant-feeding animals. The striking ciliate and flagellate faunas of the paunch of ruminants, for example, may well prove to have a similar function in aiding the digestion of the cellulose and silica of their hosts’ food. Studies have not yet, however, been undertaken along these lines, but I have little doubt that, when they are, there will be a useful crop of by-products in the form of indications of host relation- ships, etc. I do not intend to traverse the groups of parasitic Protozoa, but will content myself with quoting Metcalf’s work (1923, 1923a) on the Opalinid ciliates parasitic (commensal) in frogs, since his comprehensive study indicates that similar results may be expected from the careful examination of other parasitic groups. Metcalf divides the family Opalinidae into two subfamilies, Protoopalininae possessing two nuclei, and Opalininae, comprising multinucleated forms, of which the former is more primitive. This contains two genera, Protoopalina (which is divisible into nine subgeneric divisions) and Zelleriella. The more specialized subfamily also includes two genera, Cepedea and Opalina, the latter of which is further divided into two sections, Opalinae latae and O. angustae. He is of opinion “that Zelleriella arose in tropical America from Protoopalina; that Cepedea evolved from Protoopalina probably in southern Asia; that Opalina (broad form) was derived from Cepedea, apparently in: Euro-Asia; that the Opalinae angustae arose in south-western North America or in Central America when Hylids, coming north from South America, first met Bufos and Ranas bearing broad Opalinae, adopted these parasites and changed them to the narrow form” (1923a, p. 393). To quote the full evidence and argument for the above conclusions would: take too much space, but we may accept them provisionally as those of the worker most competent to judge. Upon this basis Metcalf discusses the whole broad question of the origin and distribution of the Anura. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. KV. What value has such a discussion? Noble (1925) and Dunn (1925), both competent herpetologists, have pooh-poohed it rather contemptuously, and I (1926) have made some reply to their criticisms as far as the Australasian region is concerned. Metcalf has suffered from the usual pitfalls which everywhere beset the path of the generalizer, once he leaves the safe preserve of the group he knows thoroughly. Thus the so-called Bufonids of Australia are not Bufonids at all, but toothless Leptodactylids; there is no Gastrophrynid, nor any frog at all, in Samoa; the record for the Australian Limnodynastes peroni in the New Hebrides is erroneous, and is apparently due to a collection of Australian origin having reached the British Museum incorrectly labelled, since other Australian animals have also been wrongly recorded from Erromanga; and finally the position of the New Zealand Liovelma is still in doubt. It is pretty certainly a Leptodactylid, but Noble has recently (1922) reaffirmed its status as a Discoglossid. If the data collected from other regions contain similar errors (and I am aware of some) it is small wonder that the generalizer meets with difficulties, and may announce conclusions which are open to criticism. It would be out of place for me to attempt to follow or to summarize the whole of Metcalf’s conclusions as to the past and present distribution of frogs, which he bases upon a study of their Opalinid parasites. I shall, however, briefly consider such of his views as have a bearing upon Australian zoogeography. Australian frogs, if we leave out of consideration four recent immigrants into North Queensland, belong to the families Leptodactylidae and Hylidae. The Leptodactylidae are parasitized by the Opalinid genus Zelleriella, both in Australia and in South America. A few species of Zelleriella have apparently pushed up into North America, where they have infested frogs other than LeptodactyJids, but the genus is confined to Australia and America. After citing the common possession of this genus of parasite by both Australian and South American Leptodactylids as conclusive evidence against the possibility of con- vergent development of the two host groups, Metcalf writes (1923, p. 330) :— “It would perhaps be conceivable, though difficult to believe, that the Australian Leptodactylids may have evolved independently of the South American forms now classed in this family. But it is hardly conceivable that almost identical internal parasites were evolved also independently in the two groups of hosts. JZelleriella is a very compact genus morphologically, so compact that subdivision into valid species is difficult. The Australian Z. binucleata and some American Zelleriellas are especially similar. There seems no escape from the conclusion that the Leptodactylids of America and Australia, and their parasites as well, arose in some one region and spread to their present localities. The evidence for an Antarctic land connection between South America and Australia is greatly strengthened by the data Zelleriella and the Leptodactylidae present. Indeed the evidence seems conclusive. . .-. It seems in agreement with the data at present known to suppose that a great continental mass existed in the Southern Hemisphere up into Miocene times, and that upon this continent, including Australasia and southern South America, there were Leptodactylids which had Zelleriella parasitic in them. Bufo was not in this Antarctic fauna.” The Hylide are most numerous in South America, dwindle in North America, and are represented in Palaearctica by races of a single species with North American affinities. Elsewhere they occur only in Australia, extending north- wards to the Moluccas and the more eastern of the Lesser Sundas. They are absent from South Eastern Asia, which offers an environment essentially suited to Xvi. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. them. Concerning their parasites Metcalf writes (1923a, p. 392):—“The Opalinid parasites of the Euro-Asian Hylids, so far as known, are of a modern subgenus (Opalinae angustae, evolved, apparently, in the Pliocene), are of North American origin, and are utterly different from any Opalinids known in Australasia. Opalina obtrigona was the Opalinid found in all the infected Hylas from Euro- Asia. This is perhaps the most modern of all the Opalinidae. The Australian Hylids, on the other hand, have been found to carry Opalinids only of the most archaic genus, Protoopalina, a genus of world-wide distribution. The BHuro- Asian Hylid parasite, Opalina obtrigona, is almost identical with the North American species O. obtrigonoidea, which occurs in several North American genera, including Hylids of five species.” Metealf’s conclusions from parasitological evidence thus support the view generally held by Australian zoogeographers that the Hylids and Leptodactylids entered Australia from the south, and tend to refute that put forward by Matthew (1915), Noble (1922, 1925) and others that these families reached Australia from the north. They also serve to refute Noble’s claim that the Australian Lepto- dactylids are genetically continuous with Asiatic Bufonids. Since only a small part of Metcalf’s total conclusions has been discussed, it seems reasonable to hope that a detailed study of other groups of parasitic Protozoa with regard to the affinities and distribution of their hosts will yield results of equal importance. It should be mentioned, however, that Opalinids are commensals, not true parasites, and appear to be viable in any frogs to which they have access. They are, therefore, less useful than Protozoa which have a strict host-parasite specificity. But inferences such as that drawn from the distribution of the genus Zelleriella seem well justified. The genus is absent from the Palaearctic, Oriental and Ethiopian regions, and it may fairly be argued that the ancestors of the existing Leptodactylids have never existed in these regions. The study of host-parasite specificity is in its infancy, but Andrews (1927) after careful cross- infection experiments with coccidiosis in mammals, concludes:—‘“‘The coccidia of mammals seem to be strictly host-specific parasites, as judged by cross-infectivity experiments on cats, dogs, rabbits, skunks, opossums, pigs, and prairie-dogs.” iv.-—The Host-parasite Relation in the Temnocephaloidea. The TVemnocephaloidea are commonly considered as an order of monogenetic Trematodes, but their true affinities appear to lie with the Rhabdocoele Turbellaria. They are somewhat leech-like creatures, with a large muscular posterior sucker, and a series of adhesive tentacles, varying in number, usually arranged in a single row at the anterior end. They have a preponderant obligate association with fresh-water Decapods, but in South America species occur upon fresh-water tortoises and a fresh-water mollusc. A couple of species have been described from fish in the Oriental region, but my colleague Miss Lucy M. Wood, who has for some time been working on the group, will not allow that these are Temno- cephaloids. Their normal habitat appears to be upon.the external surface or in the gill-chambers of fresh-water crayfishes (Mexico, South America, New Zealand, Australia with New Guinea, Madagascar); but they also occur on fresh- water crabs (South America, New Guinea, Philippines) and shrimps (South America, Australia) and upon the curious archaic Isopod, Phreatoicopsis, in Australia. The group is thus confined to the southern hemisphere, save for the anomalous occurrence of a species in Mexico, and a second in the Philippines. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. XVii. Temnocephala mexicana occurs upon the Potamobiid crayfish Cambarus digneti in Mexico, and affords the only known instance of a Temnocephaloid upon the northern crayfishes. This species appears obviously to be a recent derivative from South America. TZ. semperi occurs on Telphusa sp. of Sunda, Philippines, and is an extension, like its host, from the Australasian region upon a well-known migration route (Merrill, 1926; Harrison, 1928a). The Temnocephaloidea are confined to fresh waters, and show no evidence of marine origin. Their distribu- tion in South America, New Zealand, Australia and Madagascar is coincident with that of the Parastacid crayfishes. I have cited this example (1926, p. 379-382) as affording positive evidence of the connection in past time of these four widely- separated southern land-masses. My argument is further strengthened by a consideration of the distribution of the fresh-water Histriobdellids discussed below (p. xxv). We have here a host-group, itself confined to four southern land-masses, associated with two parasitic groups which are totally unrelated. The first parasitic group is associated with crayfish hosts in all four countries; the second with crayfish in two, and with another fresh-water Decapod in a third, and may yet be found upon crayfish both in New Zealand and South America. When we add to this the circumstance that two species of Phreodrilid oligochaetes are found ectoparasitic in the eye-sockets of Australian crayfish, and that the Phreodrilidae are confined to the extreme south of Africa, Australia and South America, and to the widely separated islands of the sub-antarctic zone, we have a chain of data which, to me, appears to oppose an insuperable obstacle to any hypothesis for the northern dispersal of the southern crayfishes. As I mention below, they appear to me to have been derived at one time and in one place from marine ancestors, and to have achieved their present dispersal by migrations over land routes. This implies either land bridges, or the shattering of an original southern continental mass, as suggested by Wegener. Of the two, Wegener’s hypothesis seems the more probable. The Temnocephaloidea are richest in genera and species in Australia, South America coming next, but with the genus Temnocephala only, of which genus New Zealand has two species and Madagascar one. This last will be made the type of a new genus. The group has certainly undergone radiation in Australia, but, when Miss Wood’s studies are completed, they will afford some indication that the Australian Temnocephaloids were derived with those of New Zealand, and must have entered from the south. This would imply a derivation from Antarctica, which may have been a centre of radiation for Temnocephaloids. Much depends upon the final determination of the status of the Madagascar species, specimens of which have recently been received for investigation. I must not here anticipate Miss Wood’s results, but she is fairly confident that she will-be able to do a good deal towards tracing the migrations of the crayfishes themselves when she has completed her survey of their Temnocephaloid parasites. From the viewpoints of both zoogeography and parasitology, the Temnocephaloidea are an important and interesting group. v.—The Host-parasite Relation in Trematoda. Stiles and Hassall’s Index Catalogue of Trematodes (1908) is now twenty years old, and is thus to a certain extent unreliable as a guide to anyone not versed in the systematics of Trematoda. On this account I do not propose to attempt any close investigation of the host-parasite relation in this group, but will C Pa LO 4 Pa s fs rely upon the statements made by S. J. Johnston (1912, 1913, 1914), supplemented» » _ XVili. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. by Grobbelaar’s excellent paper (1922) extending Johnston’s discussion of the relation between the distribution of frog trematodes and their hosts. Johnston’s analysis (1913, p. 272-3) of the frog trematodes of Hurope, America, Australia and Asia shows that in the subfamily Haplometrinae species of Pneumonoeces occur in the lungs of frogs of all four continents; and species of Halipegus in the buccal cavity of frogs in Europe, America and Asia. In the subfamily Plagiorchinae closely related species occur in the intestine of frogs of Europe, America and Australia, but have not so far been recorded from Asia. Other intestinal parasites belonging to the subfamilies Brachycoelinae and Pleurogenetinae occur in the frogs of all four continents. Bladder parasites belonging to the subfamilies Gorgoderinae and Polystominae are not recorded from Asia, but occur in the remaining three continents, as ‘do rectal parasites of the genus Diplodiscus (Paramphistomidae). Grobbelaar (1922) has brought Johnston’s work up to date, and has shown that the same relations hold for African frogs. Johnston (loc. cit., p. 276) accounts for this remarkable condition as follows :— “When the amphibian ancestors of the frogs appeared in the world—long before the frogs themselves—they became .. . infected with a number of forms of trematodes. These trematodes probably much more closely resembled the present day trematode parasites of frogs than did those amphibian ancestors the frogs of to-day, for the worms by that time were an old group of animals, and less likely than the newly evolved amphibian to be very plastic. And, not only so, but their mode of life rendered them less likely to be rapidly affected by environ- mental changes than free-living animals. As the descendants of those early amphibians dispersed to the four corners of the earth, they took their parasites with them, and while the old amphibians have, become altered very considerably, the parasites have probably altered only a little, but still have altered; so that we find the old types of Pneumonoeces, that affected to live in the lungs, represented by a dozen or so species scattered over various parts of the earth. And so on with the others, e.g. Gorgoderinae, Brachycoelinae, etc.’’. Johnston proceeds to a statement that the trematodes of Australian frogs find their nearest relatives in those of Asiatic frogs, and Grobbelaar accepts this statement. This is against the weight of the zoogeographical evidence drawn from the frogs themselves, and is also against the conclusions drawn by Metcalf from his studies of the Opalinid parasites of frogs, but would accord with the views of Matthew, Noble and others concerning the radiation of frogs from a northern centre of dispersal. It must be borne in mind, however, that Johnston Knew only six species of frog trematodes from Asia, that only a small portion of this fauna has been described for Australia, and that nothing whatever was known of the frog trematodes of South America. So we have here an interesting test case for future judgment. When the frog trematodes of Asia, Australia and South America are better known, it will be possible to determine whether those of Australia are more nearly related to the Asiatic or to the South American fauna, a matter which will largely assist in determining the affinities of the frogs them- selves. I myself have the utmost confidence, derived from many collateral lines of evidence, that ultimately the closest affinities of Australian frog trematodes will be found to lie with those of South American frogs. In the same paper (p. 278) Johnston makes brief mention of a few other trematode relationships; the various species of Scaphanocephalus from sea eagles in different regions are very closely related to one another, as also are those of PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. xix, Bilharziella from seagulls and of Hemistomuwm from herons; two species of Harmostomum from the Australian marsupials Dasyurus and Perameles are 0) closely related to H. opisthotrias Lutz from an American Didelphys that they must be considered as derived from common ancestors; and finally the flukes from an Australian marsupial and monotreme comprise a subfamily intermediate between the Fasciolinae of higher mammals and the Psilostominae of reptiles and birds. In 1914 Johnston extended his studies to Australian Trematodes and Cestodes in general; and in 1916 devoted considerable space to a discussion of the relations of the trematodes of Australian birds with those of birds elsewhere. He concludes (1916, p. 254) :— “Of the fifty-one trematodes of Australian birds mentioned in the foregoing table, thirty find their nearest relatives in trematodes parasitic in birds of the same family, ten in birds of a closely related family, and seven in birds which cannot be considered closely related to the Australian bird-hosts, while three are so constituted that they do not seem to have any near relatives amongst known trematodes. 5 “In the case of the first group and perhaps also of the second, it may be considered that the pairs of related trematodes have been derived from common ancestors, and also that their hosts have been derived from common ancestors, and that the ancestors of the trematodes were parasitic in those of the birds. For instance, Holostomum hillii and H. eraticum, two closely related species of Holostomum, are parasitic in various species of Larus. These sea-gulls are apparently derived: from common ancestors in which the species of trematode that gave rise to H. hillii and H. eraticum was parasitic. As the original Larus spread over the earth till, in the course of time, it attained the present very wide distribution of the genus, by the acquisition of different characters it became split up into a number of species. Evolutionary agencies were at the same time working on the trematodes which accompanied the birds, and one group eventually became separable from another as a distinct species. “The want of relationship between the hosts in the case of the seven pairs in the third group, may be explained on the supposition that in the one case or the other the parasite has been acquired by the bird much more recently.’’ The evidence brought forward by Johnston proves con¢lusively, I think, that there is a very marked specificity in the relations of trematode parasites to their hosts. Anomalous distributions occur, as in almost any other group of parasites, and these may be due to comparatively recent acquirements which are not natural to the hosts from which they have been recorded. But it is also possible that an extended knowledge of the trematode parasites of vertebrates, of which only a small portion is known, will clear up many of these apparent anomalies, by indicating more precisely the real affinities of the parasites. Trematodes seem likely to be of very real value in affording light upon the relationships and migrations of their host groups. vi.—The Host-parasite Relation in Cestoda. Although it was in this group that Zschokke indicated for the first time, so far as I am aware, the value of parasites in the determination of host affinities, it nevertheless does not appear to offer, in the light of present knowledge, much useful data for this purpose. Zschokke based his statement upon the common possession by marsupials in America and Australia of cestodes of the genus Linstowia. Linstowia echidnae, however, is recorded from both a monotreme XX. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. and a marsupial in Australia, and these have no close affinity. Moreover, the sub- family Linstowinae includes five genera: Inermicapsifer, confined to the mam- malian genus Procavia; Linstowia, which is confined to marsupials and a mono- treme, save for a species described from Beddard from the lemuroid Nycticebus; ' Multicapsiferina, found in five genera of mammals ranging from rodents to monkeys; Oochoristica, which is more characteristic of reptiles, but which is found in marsupials in America and Australia, but is also found in badgers, new world monkeys, armadillos and anteaters; and Palaia, found only in reptiles. One might be tempted to suppose that the subfamily is a very ancient one, confined to reptiles and primitive mammals, but an example such as is afforded by Oochoristica megastoma, which is recorded from eleven species of new world monkeys, belonging to seven genera, vitiates such a suggestion. The following data concerning the cestodes of Australian marsupials are taken from Meggitt (1924). Linstowia and Oochoristica have already been dis- cussed. Moniezia, characteristic of ungulates, has a species, M. bipapillosa, in the wombat, Phascolomys mitchelli. Cittotaenia, chiefly found in rodents, has a species in the echidna, and a second in a wallaby, Lagorchestes conspicillatus. Progamotaenia, Hepatotaenia, Bancroftiella and Dasyurotaenia are confined to Australian marsupials, and their precise affinities are not known. Pavoniella has a species in Macropus brunii, and occurs elsewhere in two rodents and two pangolins of the genus Manis. A species of Hymenolepis, probably characteristic of rodents but widely distributed in mammals in general, is recorded from Perameles macrura. Species of Bertiella occur in phytophagous marsupials of the genera Phalanger, Phalangista, Phascolarctos and Pseudochirus, as well as in monkeys, lemurs, and four species of rodents. Such distributions are frankly incomprehensible. It may be that not enough cestodes are known, or that an adequate means of natural classification has not been attained. But even granting this, the Cestoda appear to exhibit a much greater degree of viability than is shown by the Trematoda. Nevertheless there are some facts which appear to indicate that a host-parasite relation does underlie the apparent confusion. Thus Johnston (1914, p. 243) notes that the same tapeworm, Davainea struthionis, is found in both the African ostrich and the American rhea, while a closely related form, D. australis, is found in the Australian emu. And many genera do show restriction to a limited host group. vii.—The Host-parasite Relation in Nematodes. As a basis for the examination of this group, I have used Stiles and Hassall’s Index-Catalogue (1920), together with Cram’s recent. study (1927) of three Nematode suborders parasitizing birds. It must be confessed at the outset that Nematodes do not appear to display any great degree of specificity towards their hosts. Many of the larger genera are cosmopolitan in distribution, and are spread over a startling variety of host groups. On the other hand there are many monotypic genera, or genera with a limited number of species from the same host or host group, from which I can read no meaning, since I am not familiar with the systematics of these parasites, but which might mean more to a specialist in them. There are, moreover, a number of factors which militate against a clear understanding of the relations of Nematodes to their hosts, in the present state of knowledge. Only a small fraction of the group is known; life histories are very largely unknown; distribution may often be determined by that of unknown intermediate hosts; for these, when better known, a more specific host-parasite PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Xxi. relation may hold; the lists of species are clogged with old records, the precise status of which is not known, as well as with misidentifications by more recent workers; and finally the general problem of the viability of Nematode species is far from being fully solved. A casual survey of Nematode genera appears to indicate that they may be divided roughly into five categories as follows:— (i) Genera with species which seem-to be able to parasitize any animal group whatever. The genus Heterakis, for example, is found in various fishes, in frogs and salamanders, in most groups of reptiles, in almost every order of birds, and in such diverse mammals as monkeys, tarsiers, the agouti and the guinea-pig. H. gallinae occurs in the bird genera Anas, Tadorna, Anser, Chenopsis; Ceriornis, Chrysolophus, Colinus, Coturnixz, Cupidonia, Gallus, Crossoptilon, Lagopus, Meleagris, Numida, Ortyxz, Pavo, Perdiz, Phasianus, Bonasa, Tetrao; and finally Otis and Corvus; that is to say, in four anseriform and sixteen galliform genera, finishing up with two bustards and a crow. The only conclusion to be drawn from such a distribution is that the species must be viable in almost any kind of bird host, although it must be remembered that the host genera are all commonly kept in zoological gardens, occupying in succession the same enclosures, so that although the parasite may be viable in all these hosts, it may not be a natural parasite of many of them. But a glance down the list of bird-infesting species of Heterakis does not offer much promise of definite specificity. Sixteen species are recorded by Cram as having a single host, five as having two closely related hosts (congeneric in three) and two as having two unrelated hosts; while four are found in numerous pheasant genera, and one in thirteen anserines and an owl. A similgr history attaches to most of the larger genera, such as Oxyuris, Physaloptera, Spiroptera and many more. (ii) Genera with species which are confined to predatory groups and their prey. This category covers a relation which is very general amongst helminth parasites, especially those which require an intermediate host in their life history. In such organisms the intermediate is the prey of the final host, and harbours some kind of larval stage of the parasite found in its adult form in the final host. Thus in Dispharyn«x spiralis the infective larval stage is found in the terrestrial isopod Porcellio, and the adult occurs in a variety of ground-feeding birds, chiefly galliform. The infective larvae of Hchinuria uncinata occur in the ‘“water-flea,” Daphnia, and the final stages in aquatic anseriform birds. Hchinorhynchus strumosus has its larval stages in various fishes, and occurs in the adult form in seals and cetaceans, and so on. (iii) Genera either themselves confined, or having species confined, to fairly limited host groups. EHpomidiostomum is confined to anseriform birds, Codiostomum to three species of ostriches in Africa, and Deletrocephalus to rheas in South America, Acanthocheilus to sharks, Belascaris to cats and dogs, Cylichnostomum to equidae, - Dictyocaulus, Onchocerca and Ostertagia to ungulates, Kalicephalus to snakes, Prosthecosacter to cetaceans. Further genera might be cited, but these are sufficient to indicate some kind of obligate relationship between hosts and parasites, the precise nature of which cannot at present be stated. Amongst species, Heterakis alata is found in two species of tinamous in Brazil, as also is H. valvata; H. hamulus occurs in two species of peacocks, and H. XXii. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. papillosa in two species of bustards. Ascaridia hermaphrodita has been found in nineteen species of South American parrots, belonging to four genera; A. columbae in thirteen species of pigeons has a cosmopolitan distribution; A. cristata and A. stroma are confined to cranes; while A. numidae occurs in three species of guinea fowls in Africa. Vigwiera euryvoptera is found in four species of shrikes of the genus Lanius, Acuaria quadriloba in woodpeckers of several genera in Europe and U.S.A., Chevreuxia revoluta in two species of Himantopus, and similar limited distributions might be quoted almost ad infinitum. (iv) Genera which either as a whole or in some of their species appear to afford indications of the underlying genetic affinity of their hosts. Few nematode genera fill this condition, but two striking examples may be quoted. The genus Hchinonema contains two species only, one of which occurs in the marsupial Perameles obesula in Australia, the other in the marsupial Didelphys azarae in South America. The genetic affinity of the American with the Australian marsupials is confirmed by four separate categories of common parasites, nematode, trematode, cestode and mallophagan. The second example is afforded by the two genera which compose the tribe Deletrocephaleae of the sub- family Strongylinae. These are Codiostomum, with a single species found in three species of ostriches in Africa, and Deletrocephalus, with a single species occurring in Rhea americana of South America. Despite the view generally held by ornithologists that ostriches and rheas are not closely connected, a study of their parasites affords convincing evidence that they are. These two examples, taken in conjunction with some of those quoted in the preceding section, suffice to show that, underlying the apparent confusion and disorder of nematode distribution, there are traces of a specific host-parasite relation such as is exhibited by most obligate parasites. (v) Genera and species the distribution of which is so extraordinarily mixed that no satisfactory conclusions can be drawn from them. This fifth category partly overlaps the first, but is meant to apply to conditions other than general viability. Thus the genus Ornithostrongylus has a species in the domestic pigeon in Australia and U.S.A., a second in a Brazilian Leptotila, a third in the African ostrich, while the fourth and fifth occur in the European bustard and grouse respectively. Even if it be granted that there are many more species to be discovered, no sense can be read into such a distribution, and one suspects at once that the genus is not a natural one. This is Miss Cram’s opinion, and she writes (1927, p. 12):—‘‘The pattern of the bursal rays is so divergent in the species included by Travassos in this genus as to raise a doubt as to whether all these species are congeneric.”’ The genus Aspidodera contains five species, two of which occur in marsupials of the genus Didelphys, and two in armadilloes belonging to several genera. The fifth occurs in both opossum and armadilloes. Such a distribution cannot be read as indicating genetic affinity, and it may be that some common food factor will ultimately explain it. In the present state of knowledge it does not appear that nematodes can afford much help in unravelling the affinities of their hosts. But a better knowledge may reveal a different state of affairs. The chief hindrance seems to lie in the very general viability of nematodes. Thus the common gape-worm, Syngamus trachea, has achieved an almost cosmopolitan distribution in a wide variety of hosts. Yet Cram (1927, p. 37) is able to show that it is a natural parasite of the PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. XXili. North American turkey, from which it has become transferred to all its other hosts. Bound up with this is the question of the reaction of the parasite to conditions obtaining in a new host, which tends to produce variations which may or may not be of specific value. One need but recall the interminable discussions about the status of the larger species of Ascaris found in the domestic animals and man. Sandground (1926) has made a careful study of this aspect in the genus Strongyloides. He writes (p. 66):—“In summing up the consideration of specia- tion in this genus, I may repeat that the incompleteness of certain records at present permits us to recognize representatives of the genus in mammals only. The parasite in no instance has undergone any fundamental morphological differentiation which can be correlated with physiological adaptation toward special environmental conditions in a particular host species. The most out- standing differences that are recognized in our present conception of specific distinction in the parasitic generation is that of size, but the relation that obtains between a parasite and its hosts must not be disregarded in the evaluation of this character. There appears to be no single character by means of which a specimen may be relegated to its specific position; on the other hand it is, I think, possible to make a determination in a considerable number of individuals if a number of characters representing the different stages in the life-history of the form be jointly considered.” After remarking that some nematodes can successfully invade many hosts. while others are restricted in habit, Sandground proceeds to a general discussion of the phenomena of specificity in nematodes, for quoting which I make no apology, since it embodies the opinions of an expert worker in the group, and has therefore a far greater value than my own. He writes (loc. cit., pp. 68-69) :— “Relatively little attention has been given until very recent times to the study _of specificity among nematodes but in the application of parasitology to control work, it may become a subject of no little importance. “Among nematode parasites of plants, there are some . . . which are polyphagous in their habits. When attempts are made to transfer some of these forms to other host plants, known to be attacked by the same parasite in nature, success does not always follow. . . It seems that the restriction of a population of parasites to a particular host species for a great number of generations leads to a special adaptation towards this species and a corresponding loss of adaptability towards other hosts. This loss may only be temporary but if the parasite be restricted for a sufficient number of generations the probabilities are that the loss will be permanent. The mechanism of this host restriction may be of the nature of a physiological ability to utilize food of only a particular chemical constitution. Should no somatic changes occur in the structure of the parasite during this time, an inability to establish it in its original host under experimental conditions would lead to its being considered as a biological variety but should morphological adaptations develop concomitantly with the development of a host specificity, the parasite would come to be recognized as specifically distinct from its parent stock. “The situation among nematode parasites of animals is, I believe, closely analogous to that which obtains among nematode plant parasites. The develop- ment of structural differences in certain groups of nematodes which parasitize different hosts is sometimes of a low order. The degree in which it occurs may XXIV. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. depend upon several factors, such as the intrinsic plasticity of the parasite, the extent to which the change in environment in a new host calls for special adaptations, an evolution time factor, as well as upon other factors of a more obscure or less intelligible nature. Several intermediate gradations may be recog- nized in the evolution of a complete specificity of a parasite towards its definitive host. When embryonated eggs of several species of Ascaris are fed to abnormal hosts, the larvae which hatch from the eggs undergo the normal migration through the vascular system and lungs but when they return to the intestine, they are unable to establish themselves and are passed out of the body. The parasite shows different degrees of adaptation to different host animals. In some animals (rats, guinea pigs, etc.) Ascaris lwmbricoides is eliminated at an early stage, while in other animals (sheep, goats) the larvae can develop to a stage approaching maturity before they are out of the intestine. There are many who recognize a specific distinction between parasites which although morphologically indistinguishable appear to possess a high order of host specificity; thus for example Ascaris lumbricoides and A. swum. Although this procedure may not be warranted from the point of view of the systematist, from the standpoint of applied parasitology it is probably justifiable. The ability of a parasite to proceed to a certain stage in its development in an abnormal host may be further illustrated by the example of the human hookworm, Ancylostoma duodenale, which according to Looss and other observers is able to develop in young dogs almost to the mature stage before passing out of the abnormal host. In Strongyloides a most advanced condition is encountered; certain species, as will be shown later, develop to maturity in certain abnormal hosts and proceed to produce young but after a shorter or longer time the prolificity of reproduction gradually diminishes and eventually ceases, presumably with the death of the parasites.” Sandground follows with an account of some infection experiments, the most interesting of which is that with Strongyloides filleborni, a common parasite of old world monkeys, including anthropoids. He did not succeed in inducing infections in dogs, cats or rats, but produced a small infection, persisting up to the eighth day, in man. Using Ateles geoffroyi, a new world monkey, he was able to secure a few larvae after five and six days, but failed in several attempts to reinfect. He concludes that the old and new world Strongyloides are distinct, but these experiments also suggest, though the evidence is slender, the closer affinity of man to the old world monkeys, and the more remote affinity of the genus Ateles, which, it is of interest to note, harbours a louse of the genus Pediculus, otherwise confined to man and the old world anthropoids. Finally Darling (1920, 1921), who was a leading authority on hookworm, has actually used the host-parasite relation of the hookworms of man, Ancylostoma duodenale and Necator americanus, as a basis for some interesting and suggestive speculations as to the interrelations and wanderings of the races of man. After stating (1921, p. 323) that either species is equally viable in any kind of man, he points out that holarctic peoples show a marked predominance of A. duodenale, while the predominant parasite in peoples of the Oriental and Hthiopian regions is N. americanus, which he found also in uncontaminated Fijians. He suggests that a survey of uncontaminated American Indian communities may indicate the origins of these peoples, and further that it may be possible to revise the ancestral tree of the primates after a study of the host relationships of their respective obligate nematode parasites. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. XXV. It thus becomes evident, despite the hopeless confusion which the nematodes present to a generalizer not conversant with the group, that, in the hands of experts and after they are better known, they will afford the same kind of evidence of host relationships as do other obligate parasites. viii—The Host-parasite Relation in Histriobdellids. The Histriobdellidae are a family of primitive worms which are generally included in the Archiannelida, although they show no very obvious relationships with any other members of this group, and in some respects come nearer to the Trochelminthes. The family is a small one, comprising, so far as is at present known, only five species contained in two genera. These are:— Histriobdella homari: van Beneden, found upon a EHuropean marine lobster, Nephrops norvegicus. Stratiodrilus tasmanicus Haswell, found upon the Tasmanian crayfishes, Astacopsis tasmanicus, A. franklini. Stratiodrilus novae-hollandiae Haswell, found upon the Australian crayfish, Astacopsis serratus. Stratiodrilus haswelli Harrison, found upon the Madagascar crayfish, Astacoides madagascariensis. Stratiodrilus platensis Cordero, found upon a fresh-water anomurous crab, Aeglea laevis, in Uruguay. Both genera. have an obligate association with the gill filaments of decapods, upon the surface of which they normally live, though whether as parasites or as commensals has not been accurately determined. Histriobdella, the mcre primitive genus, is marine and has been found only in the northern hemisphere. Stratiodrilus is found in fresh waters of the southern hemisphere, in land masses as widely separated as South America, Australia and Madagascar, and its characteristic association appears to be with the southern crayfishes of the family Parastacidae, which are distributed in South America, New Zealand, Australia and Madagascar. I have dealt with these in more detail above, when discussing the host-parasite relations of the Temnocephaloidea. I have recently (1928) described and figured the species of Stratiodrilus from Madagascar, and figured also the South American species, and have drawn the following conclusions :— “Tt seems reasonable to conclude that Stratiodrilus comes of marine ancestors, and that it, or an ancestral form of it, lived upon the marine forerunner of the Parastacid crayfishes. The transition to fresh-water conditions must have taken place once, and once only, upon a single land mass, for, even if it be argued that there were several migrations of marine Decapods carrying Histriobdellid parasites from the sea to the fresh waters of widely separated southern lands, these could not have received fresh-water Temnocephaloid parasites, which again must have had common origin on a single land mass. The association of the Parastacid crayfish with two unrelated parasitic groups, one probably of marine origin, the other giving no evidence of such an origin, seems to me to demand conclusively that there should have been land connections between Madagascar, Australia, New Zealand and South America in past time. Wegener gives the most plausible suggestion, and I have discussed this elsewhere (Harrison, 1928a). A difficulty would arise in connection with the absence of crayfishes from Africa, and it must be supposed that Madagascar had no land connection with Africa after it had received its crayfishes from the east.” XXVi. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. ix.—The Host-parasite Relation in Lice. Both biting and sucking lice are now included in a single order, Anoplura, following upon the work of Mjoberg, Kellogg and myself. I have further shown (1916) that the sucking lice are an offshoot of the more specialized suborder of biting lice, the Ischnocera. The work of Snodgrass (1896) has indicated quite clearly that the Anoplura as a whole are derived from the Copeognatha. The Anoplura are now divided into three equivalent suborders, Amblycera and Ischnocera comprising the biting lice, and Siphunculata the sucking lice. The interrelations of these are not quite clear. The Amblycera constitute the more generalized type, but show no obvious intergrades towards the Ischnocera, the two suborders being very sharply cut off from one another. My own opinion is that they represent an earlier and a later independent derivation from psocid stock. The Siphunculata are certainly derived from the Ischnocera, and a link in this derivation is certainly provided by the elephant louse, Haematomyzus, which is so distinct from either (Harrison, 1919) that it is probably entitled to equivalent subordinal rank. The more primitive Amblycera are two-clawed (except for the family Gyro- pidae, in which one claw has become lost) and have the antennae concealed in a fossa beneath the head. The Ischnocera and Siphunculata have the antennae freely exposed laterally, and have but a single functional claw. All Ischnocera save the Trichodectidae, however, exhibit a non-functional second claw, in various stages of reduction, and not connected with the flexing apparatus of the tarsus, which accounts for the usual statement that the Ischnocera are two-clawed. Haematomyzus, Scipio and Hybophthirus amongst the Siphunculata show similar traces of derivation from a two-clawed condition. The host relations of these major groups are of considerable interest. The Amblycera occur upon birds, upon marsupials both in Australia and in South America, and upon a certain number of rodents in South America only, and not in any other part of the world. Those which occur upon mammals are at present included in three families, the Boopidae on Australian marsupials, the Trimeno- ponidae upon marsupials and rodents, and the Gyropidae upon rodents in South America. Ferris (1922, p. 76) has discussed this somewhat anomalous distribution as follows:— “As has been many times pointed out, one of the most interesting problems in connection with the study of these ectoparasites is that of their distribution. This is, at least in part, the problem of the genetic relationships of their hosts. Just how far the two problems are concurrent is the most fascinating aspect of it all. In the case of the South American two-clawed species infesting mammals it is evident that the two problems diverge rather early, at least if we may form any conclusions from the rather scanty amount of information that is available. “The majority of the two-clawed Mallophaga from mammals have been taken from marsupials in Australia and for these Harrison has named a distinct family the Boopidae. Two of the species herein dealt with are from marsupials, but apparently they find their nearest relatives not in the Australian marsupial- infesting species but in other species from South American rodents. The one consolation for those of us who like to see our theories work as they should is that these two species are apparently referable to the same genus. Of the other three species, one is from members of the rodent family Lagostomidae, one from the family Octodontidae, and one from the family Caviidae. There is at least a PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. XXVii. suggestion that here the problem of the distribution of the parasites is in large part geographical. “A similar situation appears to exist in the case of the Mallophagan family, Gyropidae, the members of which occur upon mammals that appear to have little more in common than the circumstance that all are South American.” : Ferris’s paper, published in England, anticipated by a fortnight one of my own bearing practically the same title published in Australia, in which I wrote (1922, p. 154) as follows:— “Vallophaga from Australian marsupials are contained in a family, the Boopidae, which finds its closest relations in the Gyropidae, a family found upon certain South American rodents. Certain South American rodents also harbour the two contained species of a third family, the Trimenoponidae. With the exception of these three small groups, all mammalian Mallophaga belong to the widely different family Trichodectidae, which is placed in a distinct super-family. “Believing as I do that Mallophagan parasites afford valuable indications as to the genetic relationships of their hosts, I have always been puzzled by this distribution. That the marsupials of Australia should not carry the same kinds of parasites as the EHutherian mammals is reasonable enough. But, apart from marsupials, I should have expected all other mammalian Mallophaga to belong to the Trichodectidae. Hence the occurrence of two small, but distinct, families, not upon rodents in general, nor even upon American rodents in general, but on a limited number of South American rodent species, families which showed, more- over, some relationship with the Boopidae, but differed from all other Mallophaga, was difficult to reconcile with my ideas. “The explanation would appear to be that such Amblyceran Mallophaga as occur on South American rodents have been migrants in the past from the marsupial stock. The new genus which I describe from a South American marsupial must be placed in the Trimenoponidae, but shows marked features of resemblance to the Boopidae, and some points of contact with the Gyropidae. It is, of course, no use trying to base definite conclusions on a single marsupial- infesting species, but it seems likely that, when more information is available concerning the Mallophagan parasites of American rodents and marsupials, the suggestion thrown out here may be upheld. It is also possible that the discovery of further connecting forms will make it advisable to unite these three anomalous groups under one family name.” The additional information contained in Ferris’s paper confirms me in my opinion. The marsupial fauna of South America is a dwindling remnant of once dominant forms, as is indicated by the rich deposits of marsupial remains found by Ameghino. Peramys and Caenolestes, marsupials from which Ferris records two-clawed Mallophaga, are small creatures of rodent-like habit and habitat. Unless it be assumed that these and their like have passed their parasites on to rodents sharing their haunts, we must accept a condition otherwise unpre- cedented amongst lice, which have no zoogeographical distribution independent of their host groups. That two-clawed Mallophaga are viable on other than their natural hosts is well shown by the large number of records of the taking of Heterodoxus, a Boopid genus absolutely characteristic of the Australian marsupial genus Macropus, upon dogs, foxes and coyotes in various parts of the world. Paine was so much impressed by this fact that he has stated (1912, p. 361) that this genus is mammal infesting, probably characteristic of dogs. XXVIii. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. “The Amblycera, then, appear to be natural parasites of birds and marsupials, while the Ischnocera are natural parasites of birds and placental mammals. The Siphunculata are entirely confined to placental mammals. This distribution suggests a very ancient history of parasitism, and, taken with other available data, has led me to the opinion that the Amblycera parasitized birds and marsupials before the placental mammals came into existence, while the Ischnocera and Siphunculata are of later origin than the marsupials themselves. Since, however, the two latter groups have a cosmopolitan distribution upon placentals, they must be practically as ancient as these mammals. Consequently we have a history of parasitism for all three groups which must cover practically the whole period of evolution of their hosts. Since the parasites have not, in general, evolved at so rapid a rate as their hosts, their relationships may be more easily traced, and will in many cases afford suggestive evidence as to host affinities. I do not intend to discuss the Amblycera in any detail. They are more active than the Ischnocera, tend to wander from the body of the host after death, and seem to be able to live without inconvenience upon other than their natural hosts. In general, however, they display a specific host-parasite relation, and, when better known, will probably prove almost if not quite as useful as the Ischnocera for the purpose of assessing host affinities. Those genera which have been definitely delimited in recent years exhibit precise host relations. The genus Tetrophthalmus is confined to pelicans, Eomenopon to parrots, Trochiloecetes to humming-birds, and so on. Ferris and Uchida are in process of making critical studies of the suborder, and, when these are completed, the results will very certainly lend themselves to a consideration of host relationships. The Ischnocera, however, are much more valuable from this point of view. They are more diversified in form, exhibit a better range of characters, and show a much higher degree of specificity towards their hosts. This last is very largely due to the fact that they do not leave the body of the host at death, but fix themselves by their mandibles to feathers or hair, and die in situ. They may, in consequence, be easily, and for the most part safely, collected from dried skins in museums, and it is of passing interest to note that I have a fairly considerable collection taken from skins collected by the Challenger, as well as a few dating back to the voyage of the Beagle. The condition among the Ischnocera is such that the parasites of any host group have a common facies, and are recognizable at sight as coming from a particular host group. I should scarcely be justified in saying that I could name the host group for any Ischnoceran that was submitted to me, since there are some groups of birds with whose Ischnoceran Mallophaga I am not familiar. But for all well-known groups of birds with a wide distribution I could say with- out hesitation that a given louse came from a crow, a kingfisher, a cuckoo, a parrot, a gannet, a petrel, or such other bird as might be. For those groups which I have studied most intensively I would go even further. For almost all Ischnoceran parasites of the Tubinares, for instance, I could name the actual genus of petrels from which any louse shown me was derived. There can be no doubt whatever that the Ischnoceran Mallophaga have evolved pari passu with their host groups, and that the latter carry their appropriate parasites whether at the pole or the equator. After a number of years of study I am just bringing to conclusion a critical examination of the Ischnocera as a whole, which will involve the diagnosis of upwards of a hundred new genera, and which will exhibit the main lines of evolution within the PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. BRONGIPK cs group. I do not propose to anticipate here the results of this study, but, although inadequacy of material in certain directions has rendered: these less complete than I had hoped, I shall nevertheless be able to discuss the broad lines of bird evolution upon the basis of their Ischnoceran parasites, and to suggest a certain number of emendations in bird classification. The Siphunculata are even more specific in their host relations than the Ischnocera, but are not yet well enough known to be of much use in questions ‘of host relationships. Ferris (1919, 1921, 1922, 1923) is engaged in monographing the group, and, when his work is completed, it should be very valuable from this point of view. Kellogg (1913a@) has shown that man and the anthropoids share a genus of sucking lice which is distinct from that found upon the lower monkeys. x.—The Host-parasite Relation in Other Insects. Amongst insects there are many parasitic groups, especially in the Diptera and Hymenoptera. These have not been studied from the point of view of host relations, but my colleague, Mr. A. J. Nicholson, informs me that there does not appear to be any strict specificity towards insect hosts. Phytophagous insects, on the other hand, exhibit in many cases an absolute specificity towards the plants which they parasitize, but so far little attention has been paid to this relation. Dr. G. A. Waterhouse has kindly given me some brief notes upon the food-plants of Australian butterflies. In the genus Papilio, species of the subgenus Pharmaco- phagus feed upon Aristolochia, rarely upon allied plants; those of the subgenus Papilio chiefly unon Rutaceae (more especially citrus fruit trees), but also upon Umbelliferae; those of the subgenus Cosmodesmus upon Anonaceae. Delias feeds on Loranthus, Hlodina and Huphina on Capparis, Catopsilia and Terias on Cassia, the Danaida on Asclepiadeae. Many Lycaenids feed upon Leguminosae, others upon Loranthus. Satyrids and some Hesperiids feed on monocotyledons, in many cases being limited to single genera, e.g. Tisiphone and Hesperilla on Gahnia and Trapezites on Xerotes. It is possible that some significance may attach to the fact that these archaic groups are confined to monocotyledonous plants. In any event the whole question of host-parasite relations in insects seems worthy of further study. xi.—Conclusion. The foregoing far from exhaustive discussion brings out clearly enough, I think, that there is a general specificity underlying obligate host-parasite relations, however much this may, in some groups, be obscured by the interposition of other factors. Parasites have evolved pari passu with their hosts and the history of parasitism goes far back in time. Parasites may therefore quite justifiably be used to aid in the solution of problems affecting their hosts in the various ways indicated in my opening remarks. Where evidence can be derived trom more than one group of parasites, as for example in the cases of struthious birds and fresh-water crayiishes which I have mentioned, its value is greatly increased. In conclusion, I should like to plead not only for a wider application of this host-parasite relation to zoological problems in general, but, also, and more particularly, for the more careful collection of all groups of parasites. Any mammal or any bird harbours parasites without and within which may prove of more value in determining its affinities and status than the skin which is usually the sole trophy of the collector. No parasitic group is at all well known, and until this state of affairs is altered the host-parasite method cannot attain to its full usefulness. XXX. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. References. ANDREWS, J. M., 1927..—Host-parasite specificity in the Coccidia of Mammals. Journ. Parasitology, xiii, pp. 183-194. CorprErRO, E. H., 1927.—Un nuevo Arquianélido, Stratiodrilus platensis, n. sp., que habita sobre Aeglea laevis (Latr.). Physis, viii, 574-577. Cram, E. B., 1927.—Bird parasites of the Nematode Suborders Strongylata, Ascaridata and Spirurata. Bull. 140, U.S. Nat. Museum, 465 pp. DasRLING, S. T., 1921.—The distribution of hookworms in the zoological regions. Science, N.S., liii, No. 1371, pp. 323-4. DuNN, E. R., 1925.—The host-parasite method and the distribution of Frogs. Amer. Naturalist, lix, pp. 370-375. FERrRis, G. F., 1919-1923.—Contributions toward a monograph of the Sucking Lice, Stan- ford University Publications, Pt. i, 1919; Pt. ii, 1921; Pt. iii, 1922; Pt. iv, 1923. , 1922.—The Mallophagan Family Trimenoponidae. Parasitology, xiv, No. 1, pp. 75-86. GROBBELAAR, C. S., 1922.—Some Trematodes in South African Anura and the relation- ships and distribution of their hosts. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Af., x, pp. 191-199. HARRISON, lL, 1911.—The taxonomic value of certain parasites. Abstract in Ann. Rept. Syd. Uni. Sci. Soc., 1911-2. , 1914.—The Mallophaga as a possible clue to bird phylogeny. Aust. Zoologist, i, 1, pp. 7-11. , 1915.—Mallophaga from Apteryx, and their significance. Parasitology, viii, No. 1, pp. 88-100. , 1915a.—The relation of the phylogeny of the parasite to that of the host. Rept. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sci., 1915, pp. 476-7 (Abstract). , 1916.—Bird-parasites and Bird-phylogeny. Jbis, April, 1916, pp. 254-2€8. Abstract and discussion in Bull. cexii, Brit. Orn. Club. , 1916a.—A preliminary account of the mouth-parts of the Body-louse. Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc., xviii, pp. 207-226. 1919.—Note on the mouth-parts of Lice. Awst. Zoologist, i, 7, pp. 214-216. , 1922.—On the Mallophagan Family Trimenoponidae. Aust. Zoologist, ii, 4, pp. 154-158. , 1924.—The migration route of the Australian Marsupial Fauna. Aust. Zoologist, ili, 7, pp. 247-263. 1926.—Crucial evidence for Antarctic radiation. Amer. Naturakst, lx, pp. 374- D 383. , 1928.—On the genus Stratiodrilus, ete. Rec. Aust. Mus., xvi, pp. 116-121. , 1928a.—The composition and origins of the Australian Fauna, with special reference to the Wegener hypothesis. Rept. Aust. Ass. Adv. Sci., Perth, 1926 (in press). : JOHNSTON, S. J., 1912.—On some Trematode parasites of Australian frogs. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxxvii, pp. 285-362. , 1913.—Trematode parasites and the relationships and distribution of their hosts. Rept. Aust. Ass. Adv. Sci., Melbourne, 1913, pp. 272-278. , 1914.—Australian Trematodes and Cestodes; a study in Zoogeography. Med. Journ. Aust., Sept. 12. Abstract in Proc. Brit. Assn. Adv. Sci., Australia, 1914. , 1916.—On the Trematodes of Australian birds. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1, pp. 187-261. Kruitoee, V. L., 1896.—New Mallophaga, i. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., vi, pp. 31-168. ————,, 1913.—Distribution and species-forming of Ectoparasites. Amer. Natwralist, xlvii, pp. 129-158. , 1918a.—EHctoparasites of the monkeys, apes and man. Science, N.S. xxxviii, pp. 601-2. , 1914.—Hctoparasites of mammals. Amer. Naturalist, xlviii, pp. 257-279. KELLOGG and Kuwana, 1902.—Mallophaga from birds. Proc. Wash. Acad. Sci., iv, pp. 457-491. MrecirtT, F. J., 1924.—The Cestodes of Mammals. London, 282 pp. MERRILL, E D., 1926.—The influence of the Australian Flora upon the Flora of the Philippines. Proc. Pan-Pacific Sci. Cong., 19238, Vol. i, pp. 3238-4. Mzrcaur, M. M., 1921.—Upon an important method of studying problems of relationship and of geographical distribution. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci., vi. , 1923.--The Opalinid Ciliate Infusorians. Bull. 120, U.S. Nat. Mus., 484 pp. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Xxxi. MetcaLr, M. M., 1923a.—The origin and distribution of the Anura. Amer. Naturalist, lvii, pp. 385-411. Nose, G. K., 1922.—The phylogeny of the Salientia. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., x¥1vi, pp. 1-87. , 1925.—The evolution and dispersal of Frogs. Amer. Naturalist, lix, pp. 265-271. NYBELIN, O., 1917.—Australische Cestoden. Kungl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad., Handlingar, lii, No. 14, 48 pp. Paine, J. H., 1912.—The Mallophagan Genus Heterodoxus. Ent. News, xxiii, pp. 359-362. SANDGROUND, J. H., 1926.—Specificity in the Nematode genus Strongyloides. Journ. Parasitol., xii, 2, pp. 59-80. SnNoperAss, R., 1896.—In Kellogg, New Mallophaga, i, q.v. SmuLes and Hassaut, 1908.—Index-catalogue of Medical and Veterinary Zoology. Trematoda. Washington. , 1920.—Ditto, Roundworms. Washington. WarD, H. B., 1926.—The needs and opportunities in parasitology. Science, N.S., Ixiv, pp. 231-236. WENYON, C. M., 1926.—Protozoology, 2 vols., London. Bailliére, Tindall and Cox. ZSCHOKKE, F., 1898.—Die Cestoden der Marsupialia und Monotremata. Denkschr. med- naturw. Gesellschaft, Jena, Bd. viii. , 1899.—Neue Studien an Cestoden aplacentaler Saéugethiere. Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., Bd. |xv. , 1907.—Moniezia diaphana n. sp. Hin weiterer Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Cestoden aplacentaler Saéugethiere. Centralbl. f.. Bakt., xliv, Abt. 1. On the motion of the Chairman, the following resolution was carried in silence, the Members standing: The Members of the Linnean Society record their deep sorrow at the loss of their President, Professor L. Harrison, whose sudden and unexpected death has stricken his colleagues and friends with grief. Australian Science has lost one of its most brilliant zoologists and one of its most inspiring teachers of zoology, and this Society has lost one of its most valuable members whose place will be difficult to fill. The Members express their sympathy with Mrs. Harrison in her sad bereavement. Dr. G. A. Waterhouse, Hon. Treasurer, presented the balance sheets for the year ending 31st December, 1927, duly certified as correct by the Auditor, Mr. F. H. Rayment, F.C.P.A., Incorporated Accountant; and he moved that they be received and adopted, which was carried unanimously. No nominations of other Candidates having been received the Chairman declared the following elections for the ensuing Session to be duly made:— Members of Council: W. R. Browne, D.Sc., R. H. Cambage, C.B.E., F.L.S., W. W. Froggatt, F.L.S., A. J. Nicholson, M.Sc., F.E.S., G. A. Waterhouse, D.Sc., B.E., F.E.S. Auditor: F H. Rayment, F.C.P.A. "LOINSBALL, ‘8c61T ‘Arenuvr YI6 “AoupAS UO ‘ASNOHUYUALVM ‘V ‘D “LOJIPNY ‘poonpoid soetjylandes "S261 ‘Adeniqeg Wg ‘Aeupsg “Vd OW “SLNAWAVU “H ‘y091100 puNnOoy pue poeTIMeExG ST GSl ts bP $f SSL PS g ee 266 e-. s. ee oe ee O09 oa SZ61 07 osouRleg ce 0 096 ane ged pe Avg 0 ¢ @ Lge ee cai puny [BIIOUley, A9yOJOTA “ W8qeUZTa 18 [BVH Sul}enovAS UO UOTWeSuUsdMIOD “ 0 0 000‘T SOATEST! SolouesulIjUOD :UOoTIeIAdOoIddy “ Cnc [VLLOW OT, 19YdJe] 0} SUOTIdTAOSsqns “ ce eecin SsuIpuIqyoog pue Areaqiy “ 9T 89L'T (DEAE AOD {SLQ yl) o/V SdiysMoT[aq “ T 6 961 -—— ST G0¢ (Solem 6 91 @ Ssosuodxy yuvg “ YIN0G MON jo JUuoTIUIeAOy AQ poseyound 0 0 ST souepueily “‘ SHELDON NG 30 Beyelce) 00T SALVO. DE) sored “ Z 6L FE yseg Ajjog “ 6& 6 4Gg9 = “* sjyuey “ 9 6 FF sosuodxm “ G ) 396 : s 2 qysoroquy “ 9 9 O§ ASENUOTIERS) paw sulullg “ 0 $f 9T Sooq oouvijug * @) = 2 yipny “ ) G Riv sets ss smorydtaosqng afiry “ G6 OT 19 a3B1S0q “ 0 9 FLT —= 9 &T 29zZ ” souvinsuy pue soaIey “ 0 9 9 soURAPY UT 0 PF GI6 == Q) g & en 00.1107 9 LE GLE SUOTIBIISNIII “ 0 ST ¢G9T Se ae LZ6L :SUor}dt1osqng 379) 6S SUOT}BOTIGNd suryjulIg “ C9 9261 Woy souBleg Ag 0 €L 988‘T SosVM PUB SOLIB[VS OL s 3 p 's a ‘ps 3 ‘p's a "Z26L ‘4equieceq ¥S1g papuy jk9A “LNNOODOV AWOONI & 9T8'6es 8 § 918625 8 LE TLS = 0 0 OT puey ul 0 LI &Z@ LZ6L ‘lequiedegd ISTE Je puny [elIoWey, JIT G PL PEG yUuv_ SSUIACS 8 IL 666 the ee “" L66L RCE GT ISTE 3B 9O/Y sMOoUT ) © fe o/V JUetIND :Yseo 0 0 000‘6 PED ap dALOSeY SelouesulIqUOD IL FPL LT 0 0 000'02 Sara 0 0 0099 9SBS}IOJN WO SUBOTT 0 0 000°9 ITEM. 0 0 OLF ** seinjueqod “M'S'N sty Aq poyeenbeq wns JeqWNy 0 TL F19‘0T SOT GENE OTSEGO) SJUOULISOAUT 0 0 O00'FL OUWTMeEJIT SITY SULINP AvOTORI, “UA 0 O000TT O70 ployee. 8.491009 IIS WOdJ poAlooel JUNOUYW ‘:[eiIdeD ts) a p 8 a ‘Pp 8 3 ‘p's 3 ‘SLASSV ‘SHLLIIIGVI'I "226, ‘daquiaceq 3SLE 3 JeeUS sOUR]eg “LNNODOV IVWYANS9 ‘SaTe AA YINOG May] jo AjoID0G uRoUUTT XXXM1. ‘JeIMsvely, Uo ‘ASNOHYALVM “VV “D ‘SZ6L ‘Atenuepr 416 ‘AesupAS “LOUIPHY “Vd0W “LINAWAVY H W ‘JOoIL0D puUnoOy pus poulWexn ‘peonpoid sorjtinoeg ‘S.LHSS V 6 SL @P8'ss 6 SL 3P8'es ie ee 0/V [ereuen “ 0 0 08g 0/V Teydep “ yt We Solpisqng ,sMoTTaq “ § SL ZPrs‘z ysersquy Aq LT 61 690‘T eae SMO][OY ABOTOVI, WROTUTT JO SolIy[es oF aL ess saci SD Sse eay "226. ‘Aequisseq 3SLE papuy weak "LNNODOV AWOONI 0 0 0g9°Shs 0 0 0g9°Shs 0 0 0889 e8eS}1OJ UO suvOrT 0 0 oOgs ssumjueqeqd “M'S'N 0 0 O&9‘0I pestleyides swooUuy snjdaing 0 0 OFg‘s SUBOT YI[VAMUOTIULOD 0 0 000‘SE AvIpVIN “UAA IIS Aq poyieenbeq JunoWYy ‘p's a ps a "L661 ‘aaquiecsq SLé 38 LAAHS AONV1VE “INNOODOV SdIHSMO11S4 AVAIOVN NVANNIT ‘861 ‘Aceniqey 3g ‘AeupAg SHLLITIGVIT XXXivV. 976, ‘Adenuer 416 ‘AoupAS ‘JOJIPNYW °OZ6L ‘Adenaqeay 418 ‘AeupsS “laIMSvel], “UOP “Vd OW SLNAWAVY AH ‘ASNOHUALVA 'V ‘9 ‘poonpoid serranoeg ‘1001100 punoy pue poulmexa y 8 G6L 15 y 8 OWS 9 91 POLT aie OG alle ike 0-0 B00 66 SZ61 0} eoueleq ‘cc . 0 0 9 ee oe ee oe oe oe ve ee oe yseo 4£4)0q a3 0 OT ZG) OO a0 0-0 O-0 0.4 OO ies nie O.0 480.10]UT e Z G 88 2g oe and 6.0 Or0 eins OG ain on sosuodxm 6 a7 ZL 6£0'T ee ee oe ao Oo ee ¢ . 9Z61 Woda eouRled £q g 9 €0¢ oe o. oe ee og ee SoseM pue SOTIBIVS OL isan pS ¢& "226, “A9quisseq ySLE pepuy 4e9A "“LNNODOV AWOONI 9 9T P6T‘STS 9 9T P6TSTS 9 9T F6E Se Se G GL 8éL ‘i yued SsulAeg JUSULUIOAOS) 9 9T FETT Meet LZ6T ‘Iequie.eq 4STEg 7B 0/V sUuLOOUT LL PF 992 Aueduro) Suryueg [el1sewmuUI0D :YseO 0 0 000% retinas te oe Pest[eildeo eulooUuyT pe R[NuUNdIy 0 0 O008‘FT * -* suvorTy YI[VOMTOUIUOD ® @® @0M%%rR °° °° AvVpORIT ‘WA JIG Aq poy}eenbeq JuNOWYy Pp Ss 3 2 a 10S ae SLHSSV SHLLITIAGVIT ‘126, ‘daquieseq 3816 38 LASHS AONV IVE “LNNODOV ADONOINALOVE ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. SPECIAL GENERAL MEETING. 28th Marcu, 1928. Mr. R. H. Cambage, C.B.E., F.L.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. Business: To elect the President and a Member of Council for the year 1928-29. The Chairman explained that the elections for which the Special General Meeting had been called were rendered necessary by the death of Professor Harrison, who had been nominated as President for 1928-29 and also as a Member of Council, but whose death took piace after the closing date for nominations. The elections, therefore, were to be made at a Special General Meeting in accord- ance with Section 10 of the Society’s Act of Incorporation. Election of President: Assistant-Professor W. R. Browne, D.Sc., was unanimously elected President for the Session 1928-29. Election of Member of Council: The vacancy on the Council was filled by the election of I. M. Mackerras, M.B., Ch.M., B.Sc. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 28th MarcH, 1928. Dr. W. R. Browne, President, in the Chair. The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting (30th November, 1927) amounting to 46 Vols., 323 Parts or Nos., 37 Bulletins, 10 Reports and 5 Pamphlets, received from 139 Societies and Institutions and 6 private donors were laid upon the table. ; PAPERS READ. 1. Notes on Australian Coleoptera, with Descriptions of New Species. Part i. By Charles G. Oke. 2. The Loranthaceae of Australia. Part vii. By W. F. Blakely. 3. The Growth Rings in the Wood of Australian Araucarian Conifers. By W. D. Francis. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEBRTING. 27th Apri, 1928. Dr. W. R. Browne, President, in the Chair. Mr. Jacop HaroLtp SmitrH, Brisbane, and Mr. THomaAas ARNOLD WILLIAMS, Murgon, Queensland, were elected Ordinary Members of the Society. The Chairman announced that Messrs. A. G. Hamilton, R. H. Cambage, H. J. Carter and A. F. Basset Hull had been elected Vice-Presidents and Dr. G. A. Waterhouse, Hon. Treasurer, for the Session 1928-29. The President offered the congratulations of the Society to Messrs. C. Barnard and I. V. Newman on attaining their M.Sc. degree at the University of Sydney. XXXVi. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. The President referred to the death of Mr. William Welch, who had been a member of the Society since 1916. The President drew the attention of members to the Fifth International Botanical Congress to be held at Cambridge in 1930. The Donations and Hxchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting (28th March, 1928) amounting to 15 Vols., 126 Parts or Nos., 20 Bulletins, 4 Reports and 24 Pamphlets, received from 88 Societies and Institutions and 1 private donor were laid upon the table. PAPERS READ. 1. A Revision of the Australian Bombyliidae (Diptera). Parti. By Frederick H. S. Roberts, M.Sc. 2. Crane-flies (Tipulidae, Diptera) from Barrington Tops, N.S.W. By Charles P. Alexander, F.E.S. (Communicated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) 3. A Review of the Australian Species of Corysanthes (Orchidaceae). By the Rev. H. M. R. Rupp, B.A., and W. H. Nicholls. 4. Fossil Plants from Plutoville, Cape York Peninsula. By A. B. Walkom, D.Sc. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Mr. HE. Cheel exhibited a fresh flowering specimen of “Spear Thistle” (Carduus lanceolata) with white flowers. The seeds were collected from plants naturalized at Maclean (North Coast district) which have apparently become fixed, as there were several plants in the neighbourhood with white flowers. So far, all the plants grown at Ashfield from the seeds collected at Maclean have produced white flowers. Dr. F. N. Blanchard (University of Michigan) exhibited specimens of the frog Crinia tasmaniensis which he had collected in Tasmania during January. This species was originally described by Giinther in 1864 from specimens collected in Tasmania and preserved in the British Museum, but seemed to have been lost as it had apparently not been again collected from Tasmania. Since Dr. Blanchard had collected it, however, specimens had been found in the Australian Museum, collected by Professor H. J. Goddard in 1909, and the late Charles Hedley in 1911. Professor T. D. A. Cockerell, Professor of Zoology in the University of Colorado, delivered a short address on “Wild Bees’’. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 30th May, 1928. Dr. W. R. Browne, President, in the Chair. Miss Daphne Lydia Goulston, Centennial Park, Sydney, was elected an Ordinary Member of the Society. Letters were received from Messrs. C. Barnard and I. V. Newman, returning thanks for congratulations. The President announced that the Council has decided to advertise the position of Macleay Bacteriologist in Australia and New Zealand and also in England. A salary of £600 per annum will be offered and applications will close on 30th November, 1928. A circular containing information for intending applicants will be available at an early date. The President announced that the Council has decided to institute a series of memorials to distinguished members of the Society who have died. The memorials will take the form of an extended biography, bibliography, portrait, ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXVIi. and other suitable matter; they will be issued separately and will also be printed in the Proceedings. Of the members who have died since 1st January, 1925, the date fixed for the commencement of the Memorial Series, the Council has decided to prepare memorials of Professor W. A. Haswell, Mr. C. Hedley and Mr. J. H. Maiden. Any information that members may be able to afford concerning these three former members will be welcomed. The President referred to the death of Professor J. V. Danes, a former member, at Pasadena, California. The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting (27th April, 1928) amounting to 9 Vols., 135 Parts or Nos., 17 Bulletins, 3 Reports and 28 Pamphlets, received from 73 Societies and Institutions and 3 private donors were laid upon the table. PAPERS READ. 1. The Physiography of the Cox River Basin. By F. A. Craft, B.Sc. 2. The Larva of Hemiphlebia mirabilis (Odonata). By R. J. Tillyard, M.A., Se1D., IDSG.5 PAIS. 3. The Geology of the South Coast of New South Wales. Part i. The Palaeozoic Geology of the Moruya District. By Ida A. Brown, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Professor Sir Edgeworth David exhibited specimens of the extensive fauna of archi-annelids and archi-arthropods recently found by him in the, probably, Pre-Cambrian rocks of the Adelaide Series of South Australia, and the Nullagine Series of Western Australia, both in the Pilbara Region and over the Kimberley and Wyndham areas. This new fauna is rich in forms, and the minute appendages of the fossils are in many cases exquisitely preserved. These fossils commence at about 2,000 feet below the base of the known fossiliferous Lower Cambrian, and extend to about 10,009 feet stratigraphically lower. For the privilege of examining a number of the rocks in which the fossils have now been found he is indebted to his colleague Professor W. Howchin. Mr. E. Cheel exhibited live plants of a native “Buttercup” (Ranunculus sp.) probably undescribed, collected originally on Lake George by Mr. H. Fester. Plants kept in a semi-submerged condition flowered during December last but failed to set their achenes. When pollinated with pollen taken from Ranunculus rivularis the flowers set their seeds. The resultant seedlings (6 of which are thriving) developed three trifid leaves following the cotyledons, similar to those of the parent plant from Lake George, but the lobes of the seedlings are slightly broader. Subsequent leaves are more or less dissected but not nearly so much as those of Ranunculus rivularis (the pollen bearer), which are also much more deeply dissected, and have more numerous lobes. The leaves of the seedlings are of a much darker green colour than those of the Lake George plants and also those of Ranunculus rivularis. It is intended to continue further observations on the seedlings in order to compare the flowers and achenes with those of the two parent plants. Mr. W. W. Froggatt exhibited foliage of the “Boree” (Acacia Oswaldi), aborted with blister-like galls by a small Thrips. Each of these small galls contains an average of about 200 adult Thrips. The scar on the underside of the leaf where XXXVili. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. the mother thrips entered the tissue has closed up behind her, so that the enclosed insects cannot emerge until the leaf gall contracts and the scar opens. The specimens were collected at Leeton, N.S.W., by one of our members, Mr. Keith McKeown. Miss Ida Brown exhibited specimens of Spirifer disjuncta from the Devonian quartzites of the Moruya District. Two varieties are represented both of which are somewhat different from the form found at Mt. Lambie. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 27th JUNE, 1928. Dr. W. R. Browne, President, in the Chair. Rey. Ernest Henry Burgmann, Morpeth, N.S.W., and Miss Hileen Leys Durrell, Drummoyne, were elected Ordinary Members of the Society. The President referred to the death of Mr. John Hopson of Eccleston, N.S.W., who had been a member of the Society since 1918. The President referred with pleasure to the proclamation issued by the Govern- ment extending the existing protection to certain species of wild flowers for a further period of twelve months and including a number of additional species. The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting (30th May, 1928) amounting to 19 Vols., 126 Parts or Nos., 11 Bulletins, 8 Reports and 9 Pamphlets, received from 72 Societies and Institutions were laid upon the table. ; PAPERS READ. 1. Fossil Plants from the Upper Palaeozoic Rocks of New South Wales. By A. B. Walkom, D.Sc. 2. On the Life-history of Ceratodus (Epiceratodus forsteri). By T. L. Bancroft, M.B., Ch.M. (Communicated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) 3. Notes on Australian Diptera. No. xiv. By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) 4, Lepidodendroid Remains from Yalwal, N.S.W. By A. B. Walkom, D.Sc. 5. The Australasian Species of the Genus Nemopalpus Macquart (Diptera, Psychodidae). By C. P. Alexander. (Communicated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) 6. Revision of the Australian Species of the Genera Curis, Neocuris and Trachys, together with Notes, and Descriptions of New Species of other Coleoptera. By H. J. Carter, B.A., F.H.S. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Mr. A. F. Basset Hull exhibited specimens of a Loricate, Acanthozostera gemmata Bly. from Hrromanga, New Hebrides, collected by the Rev. J. Campbell Rae. The species has a wide range through tropical Australia and the Pacific Islands. Mr. A. Musgrave exhibited some specimens of Capsid bugs, Calocoris norwegicus Gmelin 1790 = bipunctatus Fabricius 1781 (nom. praeocc.), from West Devonport, Tasmania. These were sent to the Australian Museum by Mr. H. Stuart Dove, who stated that they had bitten a young man on the back of the hand raising a sup- purating swelling which took ten days to heal. The bugs were not represented in the Museum collections and were sent to the British Museum where they were identified by Mr. W. E. China. The species was first recorded from Norway by ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXI1X. Fabricius, but it has since been noted from New Zealand and U. S. America. The occurrence of the species in Tasmania further extends its range, and its ability to inflict injury to man constitutes at least a record for Australia. No members of the family have so far been known to cause suffering to man in Australia. AMENDMENTS TO THE INTERNATIONAL RULES OF ZOOLOGICAL NOMENCLATURE.* Upon unanimous recommendation by the International Commission on Zoo- logical Nomenclature, the International Zoological Congress which met at Budapest, Hungary, September 4-9, 1927, adopted a very important amendment to Article 25 (Law of Priority) which makes this Article, as amended, read as follows (the underlined part represents the amendment; the part not underlined represents the old wording) :— ARTICLE 25. The valid name ef a genus or species can be only that name under which it was first designated on the condition— (a) That (prior to January 1, 1931) this name was published and accompanied by an indication, or a definition, or a description; and (6) That the author has applied the principles of binary nomenclature. (c) But no generic name or specific name published after December 31, 1930, shall have any status of availability (hence, also, of validity) under the rules, unless and until it is published either— (1) With a summary of characters (seu diagnosis; seu definition; seu condensed description) which differentiate or distinguish the genus or the species from other genera or species; (2) Or with a definite bibliographic reference to such summary of characters (seu diagnosis; seu definition; seu condensed description). And further— (3) In the case of a ggneric name, with the definite unambiguous designation of the type species (seu genotype; seu autogenotype; seu orthotype). The purpose of this amendment is to inhibit two of the most important factors which heretofore have produced confusion in scientific names. The date January 1, 1931, was selected (instead of making the amendment immediately effective) in order to give authors ample opportunity to accommodate themselves to the new rule. The Commission unanimously adopted the following resolution :— (a) It is requested that an author who publishes a name as new shall definitely state that it is new, that this be stated in only one (i.e. in the first) publication, and that the date of publication be not added to the name in its first publication. (bo) It is requested that an author who quotes a generic name, or a specific name, or a subspecific name shall add at least once the author and year of publication of the quoted name or a full bibliographic reference. The foregoing resolution was adopted in order to inhibit the confusion which has frequently resulted from the fact that authors have occasionally published a given name as “new” in two to five or more different articles of different dates— up to five years in exceptional cases. * This report of proceedings of the Congress is reprinted from Public Health Reports, U.S. Public Health Service, 1927, xlii (43), 2639. xl. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 25th Jury, 1928. Dr. W. R. Browne, President, in the Chair. The President referred to the death of Mr. Bert Bertram, a member who had joined the Society only this year and who was doing very promising work on mosquito control. The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting (27th June, 1928) amounting to 4 Vols., 74 Parts or Nos., 4 Bulletins and 2 Pamphlets, received from 47 Societies and Institutions and 2 private donors were laid upon the table. PAPERS READ. 1. Notes on Australian Diptera. No. xv. By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) 2. Notes on Australian Diptera. No. xvi. By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) 3. New Species of Australian Erirhinides (Curculionidae). By A. M. Lea, F.E.S. 4. Notes on four little-known Species of Kangaroos. By A. S. Le Souef, C.M.Z.S. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Mr. E. Cheel exhibited specimens of Casuarina equisetifolia var. incana Poiss., collected at Angourie near Maclean in July, 1927, together with a seedling raised from seed collected at. the same time. He also exhibited fresh specimens collected at Nambucca on Thursday, 19th July, 1928, identical with the Angourie specimens. Specimens of typical C. equisetifolia collected by the exhibitor in Fiji in July, 1918, have much finer branchlets and smaller fruits which seem to indicate that Allan Cunningham was justified in regarding this as a distinct species. It has previously been recorded from Nambucca by the late J. H. Maiden (Forest Flora, v, 19138, 155, pl. 182) but Angourie is a new locality. Flowering specimens were also exhibited, on behalf of Dr. G. A. Waterhouse, of Acacia adenophora Sieber, which seems to be an undoubted hybrid, as seedlings raised from the adenophora forms frequently show characters similar to those of Acacia Baileyana, which seems also to have originated as a hybrid. Stages of development of a hybrid, Acacia dealbata »« A. Baileyana were exhibited some years ago (see PROCEEDINGS, 19238, p. xxxiv). Dr. A. B. Walkom exhibited (1) a specimen of a Lepidodendron stem with leaves attached, collected by Mr. C. A. Sussmilch from the Carboniferous north of the Hunter River; (2) some Lepidodendroid remains from the Geology Department, University of Sydney, collected near Hden by Dr. W. G. Woolnough. These specimens resemble some recently described as Protolepidodendron from Devonian rocks further to the north at Yalwal; (3) for Dr. Eland Shaw, a series of photo- graphs of Thrips, very greatly enlarged, taken by Mr. Dudley Moulton. The Secretary has received an inquiry from Mr. William Moore, who is writing a history of Australian Art, as to the existence of portraits or busts of Australians of scientific importance. He has record of the following, and would appreciate any additional information from members of the society :— ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. x1i. Portraits (with artist’s name, and locality of portrait): Hon. Alexander Macleay (artist unknown, Australian Museum, Sydney), Prof. A. Liversidge (Hon. John Collier, Sydney University), Rev. W. B. Clarke (Annivitti, Royal Society, Sydney), Rev. John Smith (artist unknown, Royal Society, Sydney), Professor Stephens (Miss Ethel Stephens, Linnean Society, Sydney), Dr. Robert Townson (Augustus Harle, locality unknown), Sir Hdgeworth David (Longstaff, Sydney University), Sir Baldwin Spencer (W. B. McInnes, Melbourne University), Robert L. J. Ellery (EH. Phillips Fox, Melbourne Gallery), Joseph Henry Maiden (Norman Carter, Botanic Gardens, Sydney), Sir Joseph Banks (Henry Eldridge, Sydney Gallery), Sir Joseph Banks (Lawson Balfour, Commonwealth Collection, Canberra), Allan Cunningham (artist unknown, Commonwealth National Library). Busts: J. Cosmo Newbury (Percival Ball, Melbourne Gallery), Sir William Macleay (Simonetti, Linnean Society, Sydney). Statues: Sir Joseph Banks (sculptor unknown, Lands Office, Sydney), Allan Cunningham (sculptor unknown, Lands Office, Sydney). ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 29th Aucust, 1928. Dr. W. R. Browne, President, in the Chair. Miss Della Lytton Pratt, B.Sc., Lindfield, and Messrs. Thomas Hodge Smith, Australian Museum, Sydney, and Lionel Lawry Waterhouse, B.E., Chatswood, were elected Ordinary Members of the Society. The Chairman, on behalf of members, offered congratulations to Professor Grifith Taylor on his appointment to a Chair of Geography in the University of Chicago. Members offered congratulations to Drs. Browne and Wardlaw on their election as Members of the Australian National Research Council, and to Dr. Mackerras, Messrs. Osborne, Kinghorn, Roughley, M. B. Welch, Troughton and L. L. Waterhouse, on their election as Associate Members of the Australian National Research Council. The President called the attention of members to the conditions announced by the Royal Society of New South Wales to govern the award of the Walter Burfitt Prize. The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting (25th July, 1928) amounting to 44 Vols., 253 Parts or Nos., 9 Bulletins, 1 Report and 5 Pamphlets, received from 74 Societies and Institutions were laid upon the table. PAPERS READ. 1. The Tanyderidae (Diptera) of Australia. By ©. PB. Alexander: (Communicated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) 2. Terrestrial Orchids of Barrington Tops. By Rev. H. M. R. Rupp, B.A. 3. A Revision of the Australian Bombyliidae (Diptera). Part ii. By F. H. S. Roberts, M.Sc. 4. Notes on Australian Lycaenidae. Part vi. By G. A. Waterhouse, D.Sc., B.E., F.E.S. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Mr. David G. Stead exhibited a number of fancy goldfish (Carassius auratus, ‘ var.), portion of a lot of about 200 bred out from one pair of “plain” goldfish. Van xiii. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. The parent fish had the tail lobes just a little elongated, but not long enough to be called ‘“comet-tailed.” ‘The progeny showed the greatest variation in colour and form. About 50% were plain carp or goldfish, and the remainder showed every sort of variation in general form of body colour and tail. It was remarkable also that whereas the parents were ordinary “scaled” sorts, many of the progeny were scaleless. Mr. Stead also drew attention to the early appearance of the common bladder weed or balloon weed; a seaweed that makes its appearance usually considerably later, in September. The unusually warm winter had hastened its appearance. First specimens for the season were seen to-day, and one was exhibited. Contributions to the discussion on Mr. Craft’s paper on the “Physiography of the Cox River Basin” were made by Mr. C. A. Sussmilch, Professor L. A. Cotton and the President. Mr. Craft replied to criticisms of his paper. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 26th SEPTEMBER, 1928. Dr. W. R. Browne, President, in the Chair. Mr. Edgar Alexander Hamilton, Chatswood, was elected an Ordinary Member of the Society. A letter was read from Professor Griffith Taylor, returning thanks for congratulations. ' The President announced that the Council is prepared to receive applications for Four Linnean Macleay Fellowships tenable for one year from ist March, 1829, from qualified candidates. Applications should be lodged with the Secretary, who will afford all necessary information to intending candidates, not later than Wednesday, 7th November, 1928. The President, on behalf of members, offered congratulations to Dr. G. A. Waterhouse and Dr. I. M. Mackerras on their appointment by the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research to the staff of the Division of Hconomic Entomology at Canberra. The President announced that, as a representative of the Society, he had attended a meeting called by the Chief Civic Commissioner to arrange a suitable celebration of the bicentenary of the birth of Captain Cook. The main celebration will take place on Saturday, 27th October, the arrangements being in the hands of the Royal Australian Historical Society, aided by a committee appointed at the meeting. The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting (29th August, 1928) amounting to 15 Vols., 95 Parts or Nos., 5 Bulletins and 3 Reports, received from 59 Societies and Institutions and 1 private donor were laid upon the table. PAPERS READ. 1. Features of the Vegetative Anatomy of the Australian White Beech (Gmelina Leichhardtii). By W. D. Francis. 2. A new Buprestid from Australia. By A. Théry. (Communicated by Mr. H. J. Carter.) 3. Third Contribution towards a new Classification of Australian Asilidae. By G. H. Hardy. 4. Fossil Plants from the Hsk District, Q. By A. B. Walkom, D.Sc. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xliii. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Mr. A. J. Nicholson exhibited several lantern slides of the “glow-worm” which occurs in some gullies on the Blue Mountains. It is the larva of a myceto- philid fly and possesses a luminous organ at the anal extremity. Each larva constructs a large number of hanging threads on which globules of mucus are arranged like the beads of a necklace. Small insects become entangled in these sticky threads and are eaten by the mycetophilid larvae. Sir Edgeworth David exhibited some specimens of comparatively well preserved appendages and carapaces of fossil Merostomata, almost certainly Eurypterids, from the Pre-Cambrian or “Lipalian’” Adelaide Series. These are from horizons from 6,000 to more than 10,000 feet below the base of the Lower Cambrian fossiliferous rocks. They were found on a recent fossil-collecting expedition by the Rey. P. C. Eckersley and Mr. A. R. Alderman, of the Geology School of Adelaide University, when collecting with Professor David. The Hurypterids were evidently extremely numerous and varied in this Series and to judge from the size of their appendages they must have been from eight inches to more than one foot in length. Considerable interest is added to this Lipalian fauna by the discovery that such highly organized animals as the HEurypterids were so extensively developed and widely distributed at this remote epoch. Mr. R. T. Baker exhibited a leaf and fruit of Hucalyptus unialata forwarded to him by Professor John Read, St. Andrew’s University, Scotland, from the sub- tropical gardens of the Har! of Ilchester at Abbotsbury, Weymouth, in England, where well over 50 Hucalyptus trees flourish. It was labelled in the Gardens as E. melliodora, the “yellow box” of the warmer climates of N.S.W., but is undoubtedly this rare species of Tasmania where only a few trees are known to occur. The characteristic single rib of the fruit is well marked, so that its specific identification is assured and is supported by the leaf venation. The other trees growing there are chiefly Tasmanian and this probably accounts for the origin of the seed. It is worthy of note that this rare tree forms the largest group of Eucalyptus trees in the Garden where it grows to a larger size than in its native habitat. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 31st OcToBER, 1928. Dr. W. R. Browne, President, in the Chair. Dr. Bertram Thomas Dickson, Cremorne, was elected an Ordinary Member of the Society. The President announced that the Council had accepted, with regret, Dr. G. A. Waterhouse’s resignation from the office of Hon. Treasurer and had elected Mr. Edwin Cheel as Hon. Treasurer for the remainder of the current Session. The President offered the congratulations of members to Mr. E. A. Breakwell, B.Se., on his appointment as Organizer of School Agriculture in the Education Department; and to Mr. W. R. B. Oliver on his appointment as Director of the Dominion Museum, Wellington, N.Z. Candidates for Linnean Macleay Fellowships, 1929-30, were reminded that Wednesday next, 7th November, 1928, is the last day for receiving applications. The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting (26th September, 1928) amounting to 9 Vols., 78 Parts or Nos., 7 Bulletins, 2 Reports and 1 Pamphlet, received from 65 Societies and Institutions were laid upon the table. xliv. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. PAPERS READ. 1. New Australian Mydaidae (Diptera). By I. M. Mackerras, B.Sc., M.B.. Ch.M. 2. Notes on Australian Diptera. No. xvii. By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated oy Dr. I. M. Mackervras.) 3. Notes on Corysanthes and some species of Pierostylis and Caladenia. By Rev. H. M. R. Rupp, B.A. . 4. Revision of Hesthesis (Cerambycidae) together with Description of a new Genus and Species of Buprestidae. By H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S. 5. The Life-history of Doryanthes excelsa (Corr.). Part i. Some Heological and Vegetative Features and Spore Production. By I. V. Newman, M.Sc. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Mr. David G. Stead exhibited a remarkable knitted sling obtained by him in Malacca (British Malaya). This sling was one of many used by Menangkabau Malays to frighten wild elephants away from young plantations of coconut. No means could be devised to keep the elephants from raiding the plantations and destroying the palms. But it was found that the elephants were “unnerved” by the whining sound made by rounded stones cast from these slings, followed by the smart stinging slap made by the stones on their sides, and made off again (frequently trumpeting with fear) into the jungle. Apparently it was the strange and, to the elephants, the inexplicable, sound, which caused the animals’ fear; as the actual hurt by so small a missile (delivered with relatively little violence) on so huge a quarry, was but slight. Mr. K. C. McKeown sent for exhibition, specimens of the hairy brown Cypress Pine aphis (Dilachnus callitris) with the following note: In his “Forest Insects of Australia” Mr. W. W. Froggatt originally recorded this aphis from Narrabri and Dubbo in 1921. In October, 1925, I found the same species at Leeton on a limited area of Cypress Pine scrub and forwarded specimens to Mr. Froggatt, which he figured, with further notes, in his “Forest Insects and Timber Borers.” Although I had searched carefully from time to time, no further occurrence of this aphis was found until the 2nd August, 1928, when a heavy infestation was found over an extended area. The Cypress Pines (Callitris robusta) were very heavily infested and were wet and glistening from the quantity of honey dew and excrement which covered them. Aphides in all stages were present. The infesta- tion increased in intensity for about a fortnight, at the end of which period the trunks of the large trees were massed with aphides descending and ascending, presenting the appearance of a brown moving mass. About this period Aphides were also falling from the branches in great numbers and covered the ground under the trees, eventually climbing the trunks again. Under one tree on an area of not more than a foot square Aphides were massed to a depth of over two inches and here in less than 5 minutes I collected an “Eno’s Fruit Salt” bottle full of the insects, simply gathering them up on the blade of a table knife. This will give an idea of how heavy the infestation was. About the end of the month the majority of Aphides appeared to migrate to the young Cypress Pines and almost immediately the old trees, which had been infested, burst into flower. At the time of writing (26th October, 1928) the old trees are practically free from Aphides, but young trees up to about four or five feet in height are still heavily infested. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xlv. In paddocks where Cypress Pines were infested considerable annoyance was caused to horses and cattle by the Aphides falling upon them from the trees and everywhere the stock could be seen rubbing themselves in an effort to free them- selves from the irritation of the crawling Aphides. They also entered houses and other buildings, crawling up walls and along floors in a brown film. While the infestation was at its height the Aphides were heavily preyed upon by lady birds (Verania frenata) both in adult and larval stages, the trunks of the trees being liberally dotted with pupae. Larvae of the Green Lace Wing (Chrysopa ramburi) and the Vine Moth Bug also took heavy toll. Yellow-tailed Tits and White-eared Honey Haters also found them an inexhaustible food supply. Mr. E. Cheel exhibited specimens of a native “Buttercup” (Ranunculus sp.) showing further development and variation since that recorded at the meeting of this Society in May last. The seedlings not only showed intermediate characters in the dissections of the leaf but, in addition, pronounced pubescence in two of the plants, which is not apparent in either of the parent plants, as R. rivularis is perfectly smooth and glabrous whilst the leaves of the Lake George plants (the seed bearer) are sprinkled with a few scattered soft hairs. He also exhibited seedling plants of Acacia dealbata raised from seeds collected at Hobart, Tasmania, in January, and Acacia mollissima raised from seeds collected at the Gorge near Launceston, Tasmania, which are being closely studied for characters varying from those of the various forms of these two species as recorded for New South Wales. A number of specimens of Acacia Baileyana (Cootamundra Wattle) were also exhibited to show variation in hairiness; some were perfectly glabrous, some densely pubescent and others more or less hairy. Mr. Gilbert P. Whitley exhibited a specimen of a Dragonet (Callionymus macdonaldi Ogilby) from Taree, New South Wales. The species has not hitherto been recorded from this State as the type, the only other specimen known, came from Moreton Bay, Queensland. This rare fish was caught recently by Dr. S. M. Ware and presented to the Australian Museum by Mr. T. C. Roughley. Mr. W. W. Froggatt exhibited some Casuarina galls, made by an unknown Chalcid, from Euston on the Lower Murray. Mr. A. J. Nicholson exhibited a series of lantern slides in illustration of the genus Hesthesis dealt with in the paper by Mr. H. J. Carter. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEERTING. 28th NoveMBER, 1928. Dr. W. R. Browne, President, in the Chair. The President announced that the Council had re-appointed Miss Ida A. Brown, B.Sc., and Miss H. Claire Weekes, B.Sc., to Linnean Macleay Fellowships in Geology and Zoology respectively for a period of one year from ist March, 1929. Letters were read from Mr. H. Breakwell and Mr. W. R. B. Oliver returning thanks for congratulations. The Donations and Hxchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting (31st October, 1928) amounting to 19 Vols., 159 Parts or Nos., 7 Bulletins, 4 Reports and 2 Pamphlets, received from 69 Societies and Institutions and 1 private donor were laid upon the table. On completion of the purely formal business the papers set down for reading were taken as read and the meeting adjourned on account of the sudden death oi Mr. R. H. Cambage, members passing the following resolution in silence:— xIvi. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. That the Members of this Society wish to place on record their deep sorrow and sense of personal bereavement in the death of their honoured and beloved friend and fellow member, Mr. R. H. Cambage, and desire to express their deep and sincere sympathy with the members of his family. PAPERS TAKEN AS READ. 1. The Carboniferous Rocks between Glennies Creek and Muscle Creek, Hunter River District, N.S.W. By G. D. Osborne, B.Sc. 2. The Carboniferous Rocks of the Muswellbrook-Scone District, with special reference to their Structural Relations. By G. D. Osborne, B.Sc. 3. Notes on Australian Diptera. No. xviii. By J. R. Malloch. (Communi- cated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) 4. Notes on some Additions to the Glossopteris Flora in New South Wales. By A. B. Walkom, D.Sc. 5. The Physiography of the Wollondilly River Basin. By Frank A. Craft, B.Se. f DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. > Received during the period ist December, 1927, to 28th November, 1928. (From the respective Societies, etc., unless otherwise mentioned.) ABERYSTWYTH. Welsh Plant Breeding Station, University College of Wales.—Bulletin, Series H, No. 8, Seasons 1921-1928 (1928); “The Welsh Journal of Agriculture’, i (1925); iv (1928); One reprint—‘The Effect of Length of Day upon the Growth and Chemical Composition of the Tissues of certain Hconomic Plants”, by M. A. H. Tincker (From Annals of Botany, xlii, No. elxv, Jan., 1928). ACCRA. Geological Survey of the Gold Coast.—Bulletin, Nos. 3-4 (1927-1928) ; “Manganese Ore Deposits of the Gold Coast, Africa’, by A. EH. Kitson, with “Notes on the Petrology of certain Associated Manganese Silicate-bearing Rocks”, by N. R. Junner (From Amer. Inst. of Mining and Metallurgical Engineers, issued with Mining and Metallurgy, May, 1927). ADELAIDE. Department of Mines: Geological Survey of South Australia—Annual Report of the Director of Mines and Government Geologist for 1927 (1928); Bulletin No. 18; Mining Review for the Half Years ended December 31st, 1927 (No. 47); June 30th, 1928 (No. 48) (1928). Field Naturalists’ Section of the Royal Society of South Australia —“The South Australian Naturalist”, viii, 1 (1926); ix, 1-4 (1927-1928). Public Library, Museum and Art Gallery of South Australia.—Forty-fourth Annual Report of the Board of Governors for 1927-1928 (1928): Records of the South Australian Museum, iii, 4 (T.p. & c.); iv, 1 (1928). Royal Geographical Society of Australasia, South Australian Branch.—Proceed- ings, xxviii, Session 1926-27 (1928). Royal Society of South Australia—Transactions and Proceedings, li (1927). South Australian Ornithological Association.—‘The South Australian Orni- thologist”, ix, 5-8 (1928). University of Adelaide——‘“‘The Australian Journal of Experimental Biology and Medical Science’, iv, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1927) ;, V, 1-3 (1928); 19 Separates (1926-1927) and Commemoration Address, 1926, by T. B. Robertson—“| victoriae plate . 364 Agriocnemis ., LSB Baileyana xl,xlv Acuaria quadriloba _xxii Agrion 50 alte Cunninghami _ 404 Acucula _ 304 splendens . 203 dealbata Pe bP xe Li saltans ee 04a otis ny [ie so JL hapvophyila =. 25 2) 46 Adaluma urumelia __ . 403 Alemeonis paradoxus .. 288 melanoxylon _ 411 Adelium e286 RUFO-VITTIS Ted as wee mollissima xly ABNORME . 285 Allocotosia . 609, 610 Oswaldi XXXvii SPINICOLLE .. 285 Allognosta . 365 ? penninervis 5 aS striatum .. 285 Alophora eGo: ramulosa em ame violaceum . 285 auriventris 50 Oa SD ae 42,48 Adenochilus 1). 3400” Amaryemus . 287 Acanthocheilus oy SL Nortonii . 338,342 Amblypone australis 13, 20-1 Acanthozostera gemmata Adeolus .. 473 obscurus eee e411223, XXXVili Adiantites SoS : Acephana oe Weal adiantoides 4) 463 eee 3 Ns (es ei rubrifrons .. 651 Aeglea laevis Pexexayi SIRES " 65y Achias Pe ero eA apDetem alniComan ss 544-5 1 3 "659 ; rs ete eonina Se Acicalyptus Fullagrii .. 36-7 carissima 544-5 parva 614. 652 Acracantha sydneyensis 51 kreusleri 544-5 Stictica . ; 652 Actia 5. wil VEStitagme eas. Ale ee 4: aan "6592 eucosmae .. 651 Agathis microstachya HALES Amphibolia 615, 652-3 fergusoni ,, (65Il Palmerstoni .. me fe fulvipes 652 valida 55 DIL robusta 12, 16 speciosa i; 652 659 Actina 363-4 Agave 499 Sarena: 5 ( 652 filipalpis nea Be! americana ag, ASS ee 4 fusciventris aes attenuata | 523,531 Amplipila .. 652 incisuralis Gs clorantha 523 versicolor . 652 nigricornis .. _. 364 is) 0) 0 ee 512 Anagonia .. 652 nitidithorax .. . 364 Virginica 530-1 spylosioides . 652 1Xxiv. Anamastax Roe dee nee O52! goniaeformis eee 652 Anas .,. : : X, Xxi Anastoechus _. 413, 432 ANNEXUS . 432, 434 bifrons 432-3 PERSPICUUS 432-3 Ancylostoma duodenale xxiv PANTS Tae es pi) ee AOD Andrenosoma 298-9, 472 ~ formidolosa .. .. .. 299 DyLHHOpysaees se ee 29 tectamus eG ene ne 0:0) Angophora Nee Ae ae SDipr ee ae ee ol ne 4 ? subvelutina ce 65 LOH Anilara . 272, 550 DODDI Lie Eee nt mae ills Anorthorhinus brevicor- nis eg Eons | aOR S PATS Ole ie ue ed a7) oa XX ANDDNESTE, 55 55 55 oo BDO cupripes Roe) Sey aA) purpureicollis var. nigra 279 Anthaxoschema eae weKmne ia, terraereginae Be es cle Anthracomyia .... .. 360 ANTHRACOMYZA i eo 60, Anthrax 2 92-4, 135-7 albirufa .. 113-4 UG 5. 50° oo oo LNG alternans Oe \ Gere rau AILS angularis 135-7, 142 argentipennis ee 2.9 ATER Me ists, eo OT 0 australis Se aie? SHALES bombyliformis .. .. 100 commista Bio ie, een ay concinnus SOR Bee HOD COMGISE, 25 965 oo Lede, leo confluens = at See LS 7 CONFLUENSIS ,. 135-7, 139-40 Gomes 5, 5, oo lie Giana: Fo .3 Reems, disjuncta Re assis 0 ClORVGHS 55 co on oo OW erythrocephala .. .. 95 flava Me chile ake ERVOOIE, GO) ie, 9 44 4, dla! fuscicostata , al, alal4t incisa 136-7, 142 incompta 135-7, 143-4 LEPIDIOTA ay 137-8 maculata 135-7, 140 IMI, 3, oo ao Je marginicollis ue Ol minor , 115,118 nigricosta .. 118, 128 OMG Ga 4, 5 le ies pellucida ohn pace eel 2A) resurgens 134-5 SAiGYAGUS eee eS INDEX. Anthrax semimacula 143-4 simplex. jf SP ets stellifer i are aae es 3110) velox cok aces ee LAL vitrea PV: ea 117-8 Anthrophyopsis tee. AGE erassinervis RA Ga GRANDIS se 458,464 Nilssoni RD iie) be Oe OOOWAR oo. oo ce oo 2tit! Antriadophila . 599, 600 ANDOMDOIN 5, os 60 ao GOO Aphanisticus occidentalis 272 Aphestia ed ee 297-8 Aprotheca ee WA ODA TUipeseee sla.) ee eon Apsophana Pesee men) Se O52 rufifacies eg yy: Oe ATOR Yee i Piece ae exe Araucaniiay 20 2.73 Pe aeneiG Bidwilli UPA, at Cunninghamii 72, 74-7 Araucarioxylon Daintreei 264 Archaeopitys .. .. .. 261 Archaeosigillaria .. ., 312 Vanuxemi 311-2 Arctoneura So wh Ss) UWd'SOMie O00) Argyramoeba 94,136 CONCISAY Le iy selon) ec. al incompta ei ge. Danae wl maculata fee Seen ee e347 Aristolochia fae Xxix Articerus angusticollis .. 24 aurifluus Be ee oe ae evar FIMBRIATUS .. .. .. 24 ILE SU arS) ee yee LEAT 2 a ee mS mastersi eet meer S917) Asearidia columbae _ SOx cristata is PpXeXeli hermaphrodita , xO numidae DpXoxalill stroma _ XXii Ascaris ce XxXili lumbricoides exexeliva suum wpe) xo; Asilus 297, 610-1 Asindulum .. 599, 600 Aspidodera fi eal ASONCEESA, 55 6s oo oo 40 ASOIGWEME, 25 oo ao oo 4D Astacoides madagascari- GNSiS! (PEGS Oh eX, Astacopsis franklini 5 REY serratus Jk RSV: tasmanicus 2B) cee Asterotheca se Me ae Gl Cottoni . 458, 461 DENMEADI .. 458, 461 Hillae .. .. .. 458, 461 IMMUNO 5 oo oe a ABIL Astilbe PO aE ea ale OVE Atamoseo texana 523, 530-1 Ateles .. XXiv geoffroyi _ XXiV Atesta angasi 28 BESTI 28 bifasciata Bey Eds) DIXONIL .. 28-9 tatei OS a2 8-9) Athemistus monticola .. 270 NODOSUS ao BUD punctipennis 55 UY) tricolor ies Rie eT Atherigona BIDENTATA .,. 326 varia Le ro crt Atomosia 297-8, 473 scapularis > oa OY) Australosepsis . 307, 611 fulvescens . 807 niveipennis sa AA niveipennis var. robusta 207 Austroagrion cyane 4 JL Austrolestes analis.. 195, 204 leda 1p , 195 Austrolimnophila MUNIFICA 51, 56-7 pristina ., 57 Austrophorocera . 656 Austrophryno anG 52! densa x .. 652 Avicennia nitida . 478 Backhousia Seli5s Ballardia SG 2 pallipes , 652 Baloghia lucida 38 Bancroftiella xx Batraxys armitagei rt TRIFOVEATA 6 Belascaris Xxi Beris 362-4 BERISINA a 363 MACULIPENNIS 365 Berismyia .. 362 Bertiella xx Beschorneria 499 Bibio 602 capucina 104 satyrus 99 Bifaria 31-2 bigibba ae 37-8 breviarticulata 33-4 disticha 37-8 Howensis 35-6 rubra oe 34 Bilharziella xix BITREPHES 27 CUNEIFORMIS 27 Blepharepium 300 Blepharipeza 652 Bombylius ! 91-4, 413, 425, 434-5, 451 albavitta . 428 albiceps . Lo PRA as albicinctus . 435, 450 altus 3 SIGIR Opes ites oh BBO antecedens , 454 auratus .. 426, 430 aureolatus i 435-6, 443 australianus. .. 435-6, 447 australis : .. 420 BELLUS ‘435- 6, 439 brevirostris pasa 1 chrysendetus 435- 6, 443, 448 consobrinus ,., 435, 443, 450 erassirostris .. . 430 crassus 25 Gls) decoratus » 429 distinctus 55 GAL DULCIS "435- 6, 440 fuscanus a 442-3 hilaris 435- 6, 446-7 immutatus _. 455 lobalis , 4D loewii so) BRO major peed 3 4 matutinus , 442 minimus a 451 nanus : : 435, 448, 450 nitidulus zo BSA notatipennis 415-6 palliolatus et 443-4 penicillatus 417, 419-20 Dictipennis 435-6, 445-7 (NSS) Sane 2515) platyurus , Bales primogenitus ow abil PROPRIUS te 435-6 PULCHELLUS 435-6, 441 punctipennis 415-6 pycnorhynchus . .. 430 rubriventris . . 436, 449 rutilus .. 430 seutellaris 5 LY sericans .. 418 spinipes a .. 419 SUCCANDIDUS .. 435-6, 438 sulphureus fee a eATe tenuicornis 2 435-6, 442-3, 445, 448 TENUIROSTRIS 436-7 tetratrichus 54 Sil vetustus Berl viduus 435- 6, 443-4 Bonasa 5 Sod Brachychiton opulteds 40 sp. te LO “Sina hglenehenes 5b aa OES PLEURALIS 353-4 sydneyensis 353-4 Brachyphyllum crassum 145-6, 149 INDEX. Brachyphyllum sp. (2° 246 Bravoa Jee tn 2enkd Gg Briseis conica .. Ra he DT Gals SalgiGthae i... | eee ee ZT Bruchomyia 291-2 argentina , 2M Brycopia .. 286 Buchannia oblongifolia OL IB UEOR ee ec: no. elt Buprestina oo AAD prosternalis » 20 Cacao theobroma .... 605 Caccoplectus celatus Hie 22, Caenolestes = XXvVii Caladenia , DDIL, HE! caerulea . 554 carnea . bb4 carnea var. gigantea 552, 554 carnea var. pygmaea .. 554 dilatata Ree ane dilatata var. concinna 554 Calamopitys er eee 262 Callionymus aemedlemella xlv Calliphora 329-30, 613 AU Ue Se OLS. aureopunctata ary Gala: centralis F Dire eee (Fh bes} dasyophthalma .. .. 613 hilli Tt hs aN are aL ALR NORWOOD, 55 64 os oo Old OOM 5, 55 ou oo lB ochracea Ae eNOS quadrimaculata Fa Oe Gil Sty eae ee he ee onrers a O13 HOM 65 gg oe LE WHOS gg be bo on OLB Calliphoropsis .. 56 Sa CALLIPLATYURA ; _. 600 Callistemon viminalis Poe Callitris robusta _ 5 ney Caliiixaylonweas 2 eee 2 OF Calloplatyura .. . 5,4 (Oil Calocoris bipunctatus XXXVili norwegicus XXXVili Calopteryx splendens e203 Cambarus digneti _ Xvii Campsomeris radula J OB Candalides Ao | beleaateiae ESA (sf) absimilis ,, 4i@il eyprotus _, 403 erinus .. 403 heathi 401-2 heathi aerata .. 402 heathi ALPINA _ BOA heathi heathi 5 BOY hubneri .. 407-8 hyacinthina ...... 401 xanthospilos .. 401, 407-8 I1Xxv. Capparis) eee ERONGTENG Mitchelli sae en oe Carassius auratus var. .. xli @arceliiay, 2. ...00 i e652 tasmanica pc * Ee OD Cardiocarpon Seixasi _ aXe! Carduus lanceolata, . XXXV1 Carissa Brownii eet VAIMIS 5 Carpolithes BELMONTEN- SIS Ae oe ae MOUS granulatus i 562-3 Sp. Ci: Ae OREO Carpolonchzea ao ll eee bma BLY cy (VA. CASa ge Ata Jae eee O00 Cassia »:@:4b.¢ Castelnaudia australasiae 270 Castelnaudina 5, AY Casuarina UA RINE EO equisetifoliay en nex equisetifolia var. in- CANA ye 250 ee Pex SD 9 os acd ene, ae LOnUIOSay 49 ee eee es Catharosia Tee PaO varicolor Sco eee LENG Catopsilia ERORGIDNG Cepedea EXSY Ceratodus é 315-7 Ceratopetalum apetalum 34 Ceratothyrea .. .. .. 366 Cerioidess 6 ae eee 2 Ceriornis Ke D-O-0 Ceromasia eonenonnon 5, WDD Ceroplatus i me O00) MAS hELS10 O00 Cerotainia Rie ail Coa Cerotelion pe aed ieee COD Chaetolyga so 50 COZ Chaetophthalmus . 652, 655 Dicolorae es Co brevisastern mers sob TONG SOS 52 oo ol ae] OO Sirah Ba be vas, GBF tenmisetosal fen see ob2 CHAETOPIOPHILA 309 HYALIPENNIS .. .. .. 309 Chalcoponera 6, 26 metallica : he Weep 2ii Chenonetta jubata pe ee ol Chenopsisi a yee ee XeXall Chetogaster Pel PAY NeteOia violacea Pe ee OIA Chevreuxia revoluta iexexdll Chiloglottis 8 82, 338 Gunnii : 337, 340, 342 neflexale. .. 336, 342 Chiamydopsise lee O Cilonocexds, 5, 55. oo O88 froggattii Pee Pe) PETG) CINIGHOERISIGIP 45 45 oo Whe RUPES ee, vcs SEE ODS tasmanensis WY Ss O53 Ixxvi. Chlorotachinals. a eeODS flaviceps is) nO DS Chorismagrion nae risi i ee cmt bees O55 CIMOPISOOS 5, co co oo Boe LaCUANS PEA eye ao OF Choristus bifrons .. .. 433 Chromomoea MAJOR .. 288 OGUIEND, 55 os oo ce Coe picea FONE Ts Ae ee ASS rufescens AEA AZ SS Ciemargnimaen 5) og air NIGRINUS yaa eesti ot et ATER ClinysOloonns ., 3, ., 2oal Chrysopa ramburi ....,. xlv Chrysopasta 615-6, 653 versicolor . 616, 653 Chrysophanus cyprotus ee 4035) Chrysopogon 300, 471-2 albopunctatus oo oo BO Chrysosoma Sa Pe eae ChinySonutilialy an eed: Cisseis ? carteri peewee lilo i Caen eek Cisseoides uate pegsh tweet (el aeneipes Cal eee albopicta tenis te ag CAGECRIOO Se ot. 70! peer ee eels gebhardti eA a teers Gol manele 55 6k be oe il MmiBrOserees, 65 4, J, Bil Citrusmaurantinn: =) as Limonum 0 RET anh rd aX) Cittotaenia ‘ XX Cladophlebis australis 458-9 lobifolia .. : 458-9 Clavergeropsis australiae 23 Cleisostoma tridentatum 336 Clinopogon Set 2c) Codisostomum PP XOXG| NOX Colinus Sg esE oN, a AS OG Comllimella, 55 oo ss os BAB TRIFASCIGERA 55 ee BAG Comptosia ee andes KC) I: Coniopteris Sa cl. 6 hymenophylloides .. 147 Cooperia Drummondii 523, 530-1 Coprosma putida so SO Coptotermes acinaciformis 19 Cora ES . 203, 205 Cordaicarpus Cordai 5 HOY SUN ee eee we OOS CORGEIWES 5, col os ov Bll Corvus ee CMI exctei cth vis. Corybas on . od1 aconitiflorus OO Chime 25. 55 55 BBDIl dilatatus RAN Hae ile eso ian 5, oo os WBl pruinosus Le em RAO OL WINGS 55. oo sa Boil unguiculatus og oo Boul INDEX. Corysanthes .. .. 80-3, 89, 340, 342, 551 bicalcarata 81-3, 88, 551 Cheesemannii Soe than OouL diemenica .. 80-6, 551 DILATATA 4 SEM, HHL fimbriata ., 80-8, 551 fimbriata var. diemenica 86 Hamiltonii 81, 86 pruinosa so on ORS, HHL undulata 81-3, 88-9, 551 unguiculata 81-3, 89, 551 Cosmodesmus Xxix COTUTE XG aye ee eo Ms xexell Crayne, 5, 45 36. os OZ melanaspis 602-3 Crematogaster laeviceps 27 Crinia tasmaniensis XXXVI Crossocosmialy’.. 72° 662 Crossoptilon MG i, SOG Croton insulares .. .. 35 phebalioides Heyes We ae Crypsina _ 653, 657 OWN 5 na oo OOS Cryptocarya triplinervis 36-7 CRYDIOIOROM 5, eo ao 400 OBSCURUS Bey es etinthdeu chub HEU Tb wermeenlltis 595, 2. “eal Cues: iaililex .. (. ,, 464 Ctenophorocera wanes Spat Cupidonia RULES APS-C Curis 5 AO, 0D, BUS aurifera — cl. ae ppc G ANU Onvslis Galella eNO aurovittata var. confusa 276 aurovittata var. formosa 276 bella ieee me wee) ei) 2175) loreelnelhyine, 5, =, .. BUG caloptera ek 276-8 caloptera var. confusa 276-7 caloptera var. formosa 277 chloriantha 276-7 corusca. 276-7 despecta 275-6 discoidalis i 276-7 dives uae Witt ee MEMeEC OT IG fairmairei 276-7 intercribrata 276-7 obscura eis caries oie teATAn olivacea 5 AUG, AUS perroni 275-7 REGIA 276-7 spencei 276-7 splendens 276-7 viridicyanea 276-7 yalgoensis Pe ths RZ Cyanonedys seve alae in Og eT) Cyclopteris sat Ugh een OF: pachyrhachis ei OROKALG'S Cyclostigma 5 Ae) Dro Cydmaea AEMULA .. .. 3938 BASALIS. | aes ees oO bimaculatage | lees S cara 201) ate |. aeRO CORDIPENINIS ent 2: CLASSIEOS Cig Sine eC 4 eryptoderma Se OOO diversa 385, 388-90, 393 dorsalis) oS 6 EXMLIS!) 22/6 sey RA aeRO OL GEMMEA CE aa OG: grisea : . 385, 388 TENICONISIAINIS sn S TN DUG TUN CAG So) OYTO ION gg ID INTEROCULARIS Keil Bro 5 invalida .. 385-6 ATTOROSTRS 5, 55 os BOT THEO CONVO AC eR OT luctuosa MRIS yes.) Ceres major i.) (oe eres 6 METASTERNALIS .,. .. 393 MONOBIA La eo) MULTE AC HI ATAN | enoOs MURINA Sh ne aoe NASALIS S| ROS) opaca Pesos OL MOCO 4, .. .. oof SCULEEDARICH la Senso) 2 SOMOS 55 oo oo SB SOPDIDA 55 65. oo oo Soe SOROR WUT fey OL SUBUNIEFORMIS Pi Wie OOD VAIRTOIS? i.) hawlecpeaie owe: viridula ion. Mapas o£ VOMTMCOLINS 2, (55- os See Cylichnostomum pet 3.0 Cyrtanthus parviflorus 523, 530-1 SAMS Ue US ee em) Cyrtomorpha 91, 93 Cytherea 94, 130 IDOI, Swe CuCOWIcMS ., 4. 1 Dalctylothe Calas aaa OHt WACUS WAgAINS ., 2. .. ede Dadoxylon Arberi 255-6, 264, 266-7 UMEME 6 oe ys on AO IYI, Fig ee eee oy CARE! bengalensem yy sen ee2 Or HARLEYEINSE | Ses an255e 261-2, 264, 267 mnGiCGbion », 4. 262-4, 267 Lafoniense 5 ABS PAL, PART Mendionalee eNO nummularium a UeeeelOnl RECT Oey ie es cite sclerosum eee en ee Oe Danaeopsis Hughesi te 458, 460-1 Dap lana ye eG Leann oeenpRoX Dasiops BS ais faa ROO: Dasyllis .. 298 Dasyops . 804 Dasypogon elongatus .. 608 princeps EAT: Dasythrix . 298 Dasyurotaenia ,. BUENEXS Dasyurus a Pe OeLex: Datura arborea 523-4 stramonium ,. .. 524 tatula we , 524 Davainea australis Ae xx struthionis Poe ARG Mao << Decemplocotes strigicol- lis ner Degeeria eGo australis , 5 (ORR lateralis . 653 Deletrocephalus 5 LOGI, XO Delias _ XX1X Demoticus _ ons certima eGo: Dendrobium , BDL faleorostrum Ne OL) Deromyia . 297, 299, 300 gracilis So hye AY Desiantha ALBIDOSPARSA 380 ALPINA 55 BUY assimilis 5 RUT caudata .. so Bul CURVISETOSA 5 BG FERRUGINEA , BUG FOVEATA ., 56 BUS HUMERALIS , BUY) INERMIS .. to OU irrasa 55 Gxal) LATA 5 ee LONGA } 380 maculata 1378, 380-1, 383 major x 376-8 malevolens . 315, 384 METALLICA 55 Oe MUCRONATA so Bel nigra 381-2 nociva POTS parva ao BOS PARVICORNIS 5 Be PARVONIGRA a OOH praemorsa so CUS PUNCTICOLLIS so BOIL pusilla a5 DOR ROSTRALIS +. 304 STENODERES 5 BO TRIVITTICOLLIS 5 BT vittata 381 Dexia 653, 658- 62 appendiculata 5. (6s hyria } 5653 longipes var. “2 .. ae notata ‘ ., 653 rubricarinata .. 658 tessellata . 5 (HbR testaceicornis . 653 INDEX. Diaphania . 657, 660 grisea Ga Diceropygus maculatus 201 quadritinctus sara suturalis fg LUA Dichaetophora 322-3 CONJUNCTA 55 Be! PUNCTIPENNIS 323-4 Dicomada .., . 092 Dicranomyia obscura ,. 51 OCMPIROSINS . 5% 25 o> bil punctipennis pater Or nilbs3) IL saxatilis cath ialeais Yl Dictyocaulus PSA RK Didelphys , IDK, Soci azarae ‘ ih, ae. OO Dilachnus callitris _ Xliv Dilophus ~, 602 Diochlistus so es) auripennis 5 wey) eracilis 539-40 melleipennis 539-40 mitis 540-1 NICHOLSONI .. 540 Diogmites 299-300 platyptera : 2299 Diphlebia lestoides | . 203 Dipleura .. see) Diplocotes foveicollis bay GAD howittanus _, 26-7 TVETINTUUAS TS te SAA gi 20 Diplodiscus : XVili Dipodium punctatum 336, 342 Dischistus . 413, 428, 451 altus 454-5 antecedens so ase! crassilabris 454-5 FORMOSUS. ees bull immutatus 454-5 limbatus an CAT PALLIDOVENTER ve 451-2 PERPARVUS . 451, 453 Discobola australis wed ena Dispharynx spiralis 5 2OT Diuris 50 Ot venosa e360 340, 342 Docidomyia Tae he Reet er Ee OH Doddiana so 58} pallens POS Dolichopeza annulipes ao OS) annulipes ORESITROPHA 51,55 longidigitalis Va Ee ORL Doryanthes so oo AY), BOL excelsa .. 499,501, 508, 509-10, 512, 515, 521-5, 530-2, 534-5 Guilfoylei , 4209), soul Larkini a 1 499 Palmeri : 499, 501, 503 Doryphora sassafras fa Wo Drosophila 354 Ixxvii. Duomyia _ 5. Oy) obscura 350-1 Dystalica _, 286 ANGUSTA 5 PHS Haromyia . 304 Hchinomyia . 654 Hehinonema : f jin Echinorhynechus strum- osus Be eXSXGI Hehinuria uncinata 5 Ron Eelimus ate ken 4, Hctrephes formicarum yn oH kingi Een Serial Wiehe TRL alr oc Eetyche ny 285 EHlaeodendron .. .. .. 36 curtipendulum _ 36-7 Hlassogaster , oval, BR? albopilosus 55 Be metallicus 5 bil, BER sepsoides 351-2 TERRAE-REGIN AE , BD Elatocladus ef. conferta 145-6, 149-50 planus an 5 ao LO) Sp. ee at AG Elephantomyia ‘tasmani- ensis barringtonia page i! Elodina XOXGIOX Hmphysomera 610 Hndothina 284 squamosa 284 IDI ng na od oe SU Homenopon XXVili HEpacris .. 410 Hpania AUSTRALIS , D49 discolor Bm 55 DA) E\piceratodus forsteri ey Epomidiostomum , XOKi Hrina pulchella Doe, eee OU Hrythraea pulchella , SLO Hrythronychia , (85583 australensis :. . 653 Huamphibolia .. (Galt 652- 3 Eucalyptus . 281,500, 544 corymbosa , US eugenioides ag JUS hemiphloia pe 55 maculata 5 ID melliodora xiii pilularis eli) siderophloia .. eh! 2 eal Se BM tse So, teas unialata xiii Euchaetogyne 5 bg Wil Eugenia Smithii .. .. 34 Smithii var. minor .. 34 FS}O as 12) nat oll Sane ea oe Re oe IDUUENGMES:, 55 oo) os so Ye IDDUNOUWOUIMEKOS 5. «, ., ow) EHKuphasia 5 Ne picta , C52 xxviii. INDEX. Exoprosopa stellifer 105, 108 Hupines 11, 13-4 NIGELLA at ee aimvesen peel THGEOSORT gig bo po oo CRASSIPES tan) Riba antes IDHOMONOA, 5, o5 oo oo ull FRATERNA BY: te cede Sve EUPINOLUS Ee eae Le: TOCMUOEGS ss oo oo lil OBSCURUS 1s PP eas PARASITUS .. 12-3 SO CVAUSIS apenas aan sun Le, Eupinopsis pay OY ap nem, aL UNICLAVATA peli) Euponera lutea @, IY Euprosopia 343, 348, 350, 612 australis . 343, 612 conjuncta 344-5 diminutiva so BES MACROTEGULARIA 344-7 maculipennis 343-4, 346, 612 miliaria 344, 346-7 PUNCTIFACIES 344, 346-7 separata a 343-5 TEGULARIA 344, 347-8 tenuicornis . 3844, 612 CLOT Ar Fekete pen Nice i Manes 48 Eurigaster ALTO An woo lateralis 6 Pee Ne REG 53, HKurygaster eer hae Orne a OA: Eurygastropsis OD TASMANIA 2, 55 oo Was Hustacomyia .. .. .. 654 breviseta Baca es SU Al HULTANYDERUS .. .. .. dtl WILSONI .. . 368, 371 Exaeretina : 361-2 aurocoma ye ar il et leon ash Exaireta 361-2 ayo, 55 oo oo oo BOA Exechopalpus .. .. .. 654 rufipalpus Bis, Silene UOT g spathipalpus .. ., .. 654 Exeirus !ateritus .. .. 544 Exocarpus cupressiformis 271 SDE (RR ee at emer eea eS Exoprosopa . 92, 94-5, 104, 111, 113 adelaidica 105-6, 108 albiventris .. .. .. 100 bicellata 134-5 cingulata aS eit KEEN) DIMIDIATA . 105,109 doryca 97 funesta 99 insignis .. so) OY laterimbata _ 106 macraspis pee Ouli marginicollis 5 LOS obliquebifasciata . . 105-6 punctipennis . 100 satyrus ue 5 sinuatifascia , u@al Exorista 654, 657, 661-2 auriceps jee al KODA GbISIOENG 5g oe co oo OE Were) Bo ho wa a4 WOH VECUIAY, icin en?) ata ODM Fagus Ape .. 68-9 sylvatica ates, eae Pe Formicosepsis .. .. .. 307 Formosia .,. .. 334, 615, 617, 654, 657-9, 661 atribasis Mei co Uae: callipygus .. 654 chrysame .. 654 fervens ao We! flavipennis .. 654 hypsa i ood mirabilis Le) eee nO A: WHOA 55 05 oo oo One plumicornis .... .. 654 pretiosa Ale Seo saturatissima een 4: smaragdifera 2 Obs Fourcroya oa, | ROSS. altissima 1 en 52 andina 523-4 cubensis soc ak yw en Froggattimyia Aa ey, ORY: hirta Sic. inet eee DA: Furcraea andina , DAB, HBL Gahnia PEP MNT) tak ee RORGIDNS Galanthus Wess ies le) TUES oh gw oC BOUL Gallus vist. 1 ait Sa eo Gangamopteris 261, 560-1, 563 kashmirensis 0.0) Gastrodia Bae oO sesamoides . 336, 342 Geijera parviflora .. .. 34 Genea PPE oc)! 5 COE Geral “o9 ss 25 oo 2B decipiens Ri Rati agin ih. oe 8} OWA te) lle ae: Geranomyia annulata .. 56 RISIBILIS 51, 56 tenebricosa .. .. .. 51 Geron ee PR RMBR S A0. aeyd Gerotachina .. 654 obtusa .. 654 stolida eG Ginkgoites digitata .. 466 ef. magnifolia .. 458, 466 ? sibirica . 458, 466 Glabella . 606 Glabellula .. 606-7 Glaucopela fuscomarmorea 375 instabilis 5 OUD NIDICOLA Me eR OS Gleichenites cf. acutus .. 146 gleichenioides . 146 Glossidionophora .. .. 656 Glossopteris 212-3, 261, 264, 555-7, 559-62 angustifolia 5 DDT angustifolia var. taeni- opteroides ao DDT ’ Browniana 555-7 conspicua oo DDS indica 555-7 linearis 555-7 ? MITCHELLI 559-60 orbicularis 5 oo BEY) spathulato-cordata +5 DY Gmelinay 22.) 45 Se eee arborea og) eee) RS Leichhardtii 474, 477-8, 480 Gonia . 654, 662 MAiNTAS) 3. oe Oe Graphomyzina 55 OAD Graphostylum ee Lene) Grevillea robusta .. .. 42 Gymnophania pernix ,, 329 Gynoplistia aurantiipen- nis be . 58-9 BARRINGTONIA 51, 61 bella PPE Re ee OD bimaculata nigrotibi- alis , mil CULTRATA 51, 65-6 fergusoniana 63-4 flavipes we G2 FLAVOFEMORATA 51, 63-4 fumipennis . 68 ‘FUSCODORSATA 51, 58-9 HARRISONI 51, 60 HISTRIONICA 51, 66 MYSTICA 51, 62-3 NICHOLSONI 51, 64 obscurivena .. Pol PAMMELAS 51, 67-8 puella 5 OS REMULSA 51,59 simplex J 66 viridis helmsi 51 westwoodi ne . 65 Westwoodi OPIMA ,. 51, 64 Gymnosoma 654 rotundata 654 Habromastix similior ., 51 Haematomyzus XXVi1 ISEMNCCUIS 55 hus Joo. oo 82 Halipegus sa XVili Harmostomum Pe ci Hausmannia .. .. 148, 463 dichotoma .. .. .. 148 Pelletieri .. 146, 148 WILKINSI ., 145, 148 Hawlea eae etc? el ARES Gill Miltonit 2) 4). o:8e2en46u! Hebranthes texana 55 DER Helichrysum ....... 281 Helladepichoria .. 399, 600 Helosciomyza 324-5 IENAG, ,'; | |).4 ee S24 ferruginea 324-5 Hemerocallis fulva 523, 530-1 Hemicycle an 36 Hemicyclia australasica 36 australasicus dete ee ON! Hemiphlebia 193, 195, 201-5 mirabilis .. 193, 195 Hemistomum U2 Dab opisthotrias 5 Seb Hepatotaenia .. .. .. xXx Hesperilla nae XX1x Hesperodes eee, O00 Hesthesis xlv, 544, 548-9 acutipennis 545-6, 548 angulata 545-6, 548 ASSIMILIS 546-8 auricoma .. 5d44 bizonata 544-9 cingulata ats 544-8 CRABROIDES 545-7, 549 ferruginea 544-7, 549 moerens ays 544-9 MONTANA 545-6, 548 murina . 545, 549 ornata .. 5b45, 549 plorator 544. 6, 548 variegata : 544-8 vesparia 545- 7, 549 vigilans 545-9 Heterakis _ OE alata Pe xox caiimaey sf, EXT hamulus aia dette aNltiogo SMSO ruficollis es oy OS Warring 55 5, 3, we) Monacanthomyia 5 gg BOG IMO IME ZITA Akio Wo el) es ex: DIpapiwllosay Peewee Tet oxcx Monolepta aberrans ee 29 Divatticolliss yee. 30 figurata PIA te lore oO JUCUNDA sh Ls ee eis) megalops tok Si LL THEMEDICOLA ites A RA (HONAWIOIGOMIDIES 55 sol) 55 eh) Monotoca elliptica .. .. 410 Multicapsiferina .. .. xx Musa Mer ee 8 OT Musea 93, 652, 654-6, 660 anthrax 55 LSE macularis Een () SEMIN S UNV Wi asi DO Mycetaulus 309 Mydas clavigera ., b40 effracta .. D40 Myiographa _. 028 Myiophasia a4 HAE Myiotrixa,. . 655 prosopina Mi asO55 Myobia Pee eh erGo2 Gor Myoporum Mitchelli roe Myriophyllum a3 UBS Myrmecodia tuberosa . 406! Nacaduba ancyra .. 409 ancyra florinda .. 409° palmyra tasmanica . 409 Naias flexilis PP LaLa Narcissus 510-1, 531 Narcodes sqguaMosus .. 18 Nathorstia + 145-6, Willcoxi . 145-6, 148 | Neactina 362-4 Necator americanus 5g RORY Necydalis auricomus . 544 Nemapalpus a ee Nemopalpus 291-3 AUSTRALIENSIS 5 DS flavus ay, , aL molophilinus oe eo pilipes ae AR tical zelandiae _ Bil, 7B}, Nemopoda peel te HET TENE Nemoraea ,. . 652, 655, 662 brevisetosa , 5d erythropus . OHS nitidiventris 5655 Neobubastes aureocincta 270 Neocuris AENESCENS 11279) 280m, anthaxioides 278-81 __- E . 270, 273, 278, 281 | INDEX. Neocuris anthaxioides var. livida 279-80 asperipennis . , 278, 280 atra fe: , 209 auro-impressa Bue hee t eral ite) browni 278-9, 281 ? carteri 279-80 coerulans 279-82 crassa 279-80 cuprilatera _ 279-81 dichroa ae . 249; 281 dilataticollis 279-80 discoflava _. 218, 281. DODDI , 278, 281 fairmairei 55 AUG. AASIL fortnumi .. 28, 280 gracilis . 278-80 guérini so oe Sy ZA) guérini var. subtilis .. 280 hoscheki ~ 2g ignota 1 29 ? indigacea 279-80 lepida sg UY ? luteo-tincta opis on monachroma _. 279, 281 nickerli . _ 278, 280 nigricans 279-80 oblongata rey See ? obscurata 279-80, 282 ornata 278-9, 281 pauperata 279-82 pilosa 279-80 ? pilosula 279-80 pubescens 279-82 smaragdifrons _. 218, 280 soror -. 219-80 thoracica _, 268, 281 VIOLACEA 229 28:2 viridiaurea .. 279-80 viridimicans _ 279, 281 viridimicans var. sap- phira 279-80 Neocuropsis so AUG Neoderus 367-8 Neoexaireta 361-3 spinigera 361-2 Neolucia agricola agricola 410 hobartensis . 410 hobartensis hobartensis 410 hobartensis monticola 410 mathewi . 410 NEOPALIMBOLUS Wa Epes DD COUDINTS ie) sae eee 22 Neophasia 55 (583 NEOPLATYURA 600-1 Neopogon ne ATO Neosaropogon _ 300, 472 princeps : re 00 NEOSCLEROPOGON Ey 60% NEOSEPEDON 322-3 CONJUNCTA ve Be! PUNCTIPENNIS 323-4 exonie Neotrigonometopus . 319 ALBIBASIS ae ayy) fuscifrons old Nephrops norvegicus 5 ON Nervijuncta . 600 Neuropteridium . 458, 463 MOOMBRAENSE . 458, 463 validum .. 463 Neuropteris .. 464 Nicotiana Se HE Nilssonia ., 146,149 compta _. 149, 465 ESKENSIS ., 458, 465 MortToni . 458, 466 orientalis _, 149, 466 PLUTOVILLENSIS 145, 148-9 polymorpha .. 466 princeps .. 465 REIDI . 458, 465 schaumburgensis 146, 149 Spas . 145, 149 Nitella a Ans so Ola Noeggerathiopsis a BOY Nothoderus 367-9, 371 australiensis se Coe) Nothofagus .. 340 Notobubastes 55 al) orientalis 5 UG Notocerastes .. 285 blackburni PS: TRICORNIS 284 Notographus 56 OUP terraereginae AU yorkensis , AUP Notothixos .. 38-9 cornifolius 39-40 cornifolius var. angusti- LOLA EN ie can ae ALO) incanus .. 39, 40, 43 leiophyllus 39, 41-2 malayanus’”.. §. |. 42 subaureus 39, 41-3, 48 subaureus var. CINERA 39, 42, 44 Numida Nahas B XoXGll Nusa ; _ 298, 472 queenslandi wari 2, Nycterimyia se leo DSW) Nycticebus Soren. St hecsohy, 0-5 Nygmatodes _ eel Ochromyia Y2655 flavipennis _ Os hyalipennis 43 (EBS nigricornis . 656 nudistylum _, 652 Ochrosia elliptica _, 06-7 Ocyptera . 656 diversa anh Ocypteropsis . 656 bicolor .. 656 bimacula . 656 1xxxii. Ocypteropsis flavifrons ,., 656 tristis so DG Odontomyia Pero oll: vertebrata , atoll Odontopteris .. 464 Odynerus 92,136 Ogyris i 406-7 Olea paniculata 5 dg Bee Omalogaster . 654, 656 brevipalpis POO limbineuris .. 656 Ommatius 609-10 chinensis 609-10 doddi ey eames 4 , 610 Omphalophloios anglicus 314 eyclostigma _ ole Onchocerca aN O'et Onoclea . 561 Oochoristica XX megastoma Fede XOX: Opalina tO obtrigona . Xvi obtrigonoidea nexavall Opalinae angustae .. xiv, xvi latae _ xahy Opisthocomus Jeol Opsophasiops 5 ig GBB Orimargula australiensis 51 Ornithostrongylus .. .. xxii Orthoceras' strictum 340, 342 Ortyx . eh Mean eX Ostertagia epXexall Otis... OO eee it. o-! Oxydendrum arboreum ,, 478 Oxyuris , 2x Pachygaster . 366 whitei . APAL iy che pero Pachyneres 91, 93, 598, 606 australis 306, 606-7 femorata . 607 Pagiophyllum _, 147, 149 sp. . £45; 149 Palaeosycorax .., 291-2 tertiariae , Al Palaeovittaria .. .. 560 Kurzi . 560 Palaia HOR Palia : 54 9 aureocauda . 656 Paliana .. 656 basalis ». 656 intensa . 656 Palimbolus 22 dimidiatus 21 POSTCOXALIS 21 RUGOSUS .. 21 victoriae eer z2 Palpostoma 655-6 apicalis .. 656 desvoidyi SOG flava . 656 INDEX. Palpostoma testacea .. 656 Pancratium maritimum 531 Papilio iid 5 5 DOKI Parabrachelia .. .. .. 656 WOUTUOS 6s oa oo an One Paracephalai sani eeeine ie, BICOSTATA ee Fae es Wat Are! impressicollis OEE BAR YATC 5 intermedia 5 AU, AU niveiventris on ee hae: strandis ly yee. a) TR 2T4: transsecta en Whee) teen Paraeupogona ,... .. 656 oblonga We ea eG SG Parahippelates , atlil, aX03} aequalis fs = AON eS Oil albiseta so vachouh eens Oil anomala Ss eS es brunneicosta soe ag OL costomaculata Jigar Oil DASYPLEURA . . 301, 303 duplicata cael Ee gees (ilk fuscipes oA is eee OZ nudiseta SWE As eae re (2; ornatipennis Py eer Oi AR VAWS (So, ica) ya eto SETICAUDA ey 301-2 Paralimnophila BARRING- TONIA i 51, 61 flavipes Boh (re ee. gees FUSCODORSATA 51,58 HARRISONI 51, 60 MYSTICA P so Dile OARS DUCT AA ie hee nee OS REMULSA 51, 59 Paramenia 329, 330, 614, 656 macularis .. 330, 614, 656 semiauriceps 330, 614, 656 Paramphibolia . 614, 658 Paranomina A ee SIS: () Paurothrix His). ie Agee SO: ENV ONG Mtn Byline ss: © Gea see ATERORET Pavoniella Pa EIR SREP SKONG Pecopteris Pi 1 hy eae O'S ENaC eae eet a Se4 Gill Wwhitigort 5. fg og oy AAI Pediculus TTA, HRIEXEXGTY: Pelopoeus Ee sate yer 9/2, Pencixosi? ae) a Wn Panag Penthetria thoracica 55 Ade} Perameles re AO WEAR SEXGTEN macrura See hee RT iaicit ree One Obesulay avi i) Peexexalll Peramys ePeL ye tbed MA XXVii Perdix USS ged exes Péringueyomyina .. 367-8 Persica vulgaris PANT ibe Sys) PINE ge a CAD Phalanger SER Ee RMEXEX Phalangista se) ANAC RS ERERS Pharmacophagus .. .. xxix IPMASOONMIACUOS 4, co nan OOK Phascolomys mitchelli ., xx Phasianus Bees >. Pheidole .. 406 Phellus ne .. 470 Phialophloios . 314 quadratus Ae oul! Philiris Sue . 401 ilias innotatus .. 401 Phlebotomus » 292 signatipennis Be eer Phoradendron xantho- phyllum Rae tiven i) Phorocera 5 po WDE, HHH acutangulata .. 656 biserialis eGoG cilipes 55 WHT flavipalpis an We egraciliseta oo We grandis . 6d7 hyalipennis .. 657 lateralis , 657 maculata Poon mucrocornis ,. 5 GBT ornata 55 (O57 scutellaris ag BDA scutellata _ BDe subpubescens ao Ne tessellata 5, ODT Phreatoicopsis exavin Phrygilanthus We sb celastroides ., 42-4 eucalyptifolius .. .. 42 Phryno . 657, 661-2 calliphon ao ODT diversicolor ag (OBIT Phyllotheca £21 FLED OS Phymatopsis brevipalpis 55 brevirostrata 50. DD INTRICATA 51, 54-5 PERIPLOCA 51, 53-5 Physaloptera Rey 2.0-0! Pimelea ligustrina .. 401 linifolia .. 401 longifolia _. 36-7 Pinophilus semiopacus ,., 2 Pinus ponderosa 72, 74 radiata tenn Piophila _ 309 Pityophyllum sp. Bae AAG Pitys 256, 260-1 antiqua 260-1 Dayi so AGL primaeva ee 260-1 ? SUSSMILCHI . 255, 260 Withami 260-1 Plagiostenopterina 5 SDS aenea ao HDS hendeli 5 OY Plantago 402-3 Plasmodium vivax . xiii Platydema scriptipennis 284 Platygaster . 606 Platyroptilon . 599, 600 Platystoma australe .. 046 pectorale LS PERE LO Platytainia = et eee ON maculata 3 ACCES UN PSG 57) Platytania I A ane ENE G 53 Platytropesa .. .. .. 657 rubriceps Ant WA Pes Obl Platyura ; 598, 600-1 conformis 601-2 Cleans ne O00 SCUMEGIEN ES ie eg BE talaroceroides so oe OW Plecia sat 602-3 amplipennis ae 602-3 PAROS ye en oe ee OUD CONFUSA eT ante 5 G05 dimidiata ee ere G02 dorsalis AAP a). 605 Cnepeayr sa . a a! A602 fulvicollis 602-5 heteroptera = 602-3 TOGA 2 beret er 28 63 melanaspis 602-3 ornaticornis e 602-5 PARVA Ae . 603, 606 PHILIPPINENSIS .. .. 605 ruficollis bis ae O06 subvarians .. ..... 603 Plecomyia ie oes GOS Plectostenus gracilicornis ~ 6 ORIENDATIS# 5 25) 5.0 6 Ploionixia Siete te eA Ploionuxia eit et he ee 4: Plusiomyia MACKERRASI 51-2 olliffi Sg ean epg Rae ky Pneumonoeces XVili PoODAMARYGMUS sn hasbeen ALTERNATUS .. .. .. 287 PoDANEMA . 308, 611 PNESRIAUUAG a 7 os 5 ee B08 TINE Ts pee ae ke EL viduata .. soo SOY, Gill Eegonortalis .. .. :. 611 barbifera Fopantieren aya ole Polianthes Hn aes he ya ae) Polychaeta sie imtoo ladys MCSE nigra ose weal Soci LOOT! Polyommatus hitibneri .. 401 uranites Ba pepe it olen! Polyosma Cunninghamii 34 Polyplocotes APICALIS .. 26 Ganinaticeps) 5) ae...) 2.) 20 SEMOIBIS) {20.0 8. 27 Pomaderris lanigera .. 408 HOGRCeIO BA ee ee xxi Poroxylon THAN Stet EELS 7a oy Prasophyllum ag) 340-1 brevilabra 336-7, 342 fimbriatum , 340, 342 Hopsonii 340-1 noen@eyeuban =, BD INDEX. Prasophyllum odoratum 337, 342 patens’ 3.5 42 202) 387 Rogersii .. 040, 342 Ruppii 5 . 3840, 342 viride bat PME fA AO) IPTROGR ITER Se et NE ee Procirrus ferrugineus .. 2 Prodiaphania . 615, 657 echinomides » 66. We testacea SE ee OO) Progamotaenia PUTAS AAREE BSE Promachus Fiat A ERG 1G) Prosena amet PPE UALS Gudea Hair argentata bie BLE ang air bella BP hi eas eat Sen WNG Oy(: conica SA 657-8 OWISIORNP 5 OK gat wig ORS doddi Shenae het AG OS dorsalis 15) PESSENO D'S longipes PU ASb TAA eG O'S macropus Lis 6A EO IS nigripes aa aadrtys., axe) TULIPS .. 5. 4, ne SVG Col GS Prosthecosacter TEA ERA EXEL Prostomomyia Se) Oe 366 Protanyderus .. 367-8 Protolepidodendron xl, 310-2 Karlsteini 3 Mea APT EP Sal LINEARE 311-3 primaevum an 310-3 YALWALENSE .. 310, 312-3 Protomeigenia oe an BOS AURA eR al, FLA G5S Protoopalina . XV, Xvi Protoplasa ah 367-8 fitchii te) Re EH AS OS Protorrhipis 1a hl ene G 3 Prunus sp. MI eric 1 Ree ears Pselaphus ALLUVIUS sip ALG ELECTILIS ik Reta pee O EMM ~., oo oo Le DITO SUSI «ee ene anni pulchellus See eee a ET, SQUAMULOSUS Stents alas, SULCIVENTRIS yar ema Ee tuberculifrons A Rid a Seca HY Pseudalmenus chlorinda 410 chlorinda BARRINGTON- EINSISS ys. ea een ae chlorinda chlorinda .. 411 chlorinda chloris 5, Gale chlorinda zephyrus 411-2 Pseudanilara 5 Als ANE cupripes 279-80 pilosa 279-80 purpureicollis var. nigra 279-80 Pseudixus .. ol-2 japonicus .. dl-2 Pseudochinusi seit ExXX 1xxxiil. eathiensis Pseudoctenis 458, 466 HMootei | 4. jn Wee SRE Pseudodipsas brisbanen- sis sical RRO eae ae OT digglesi ar ee 05 Pseudoformosia SL eEODS, Pseudonemopoda .. .. 308 PSEUDOPENTHES ., 94, 132-3 IENESTRATA 132-3 Pseudophaea ., .. .. 205 Pseudoplatyura Nessie.) 0) Pseudotsuga Douglasii .. 74 PRMIOZOME, 5. 65 oo on “00 Pterophyllum . 145, 149 Comneumm™ ., ., 4, ABs ef. Lyellianum .. .. 146 multilineatum er ete LOD), Nathorsti . 458, 466 Pterostylis .. 86, 336, 551-2 acuminata le ee DDS acuminata var. INGENS 552 alata eRe 553-4 alata var. robusta 53 ONS Baptistii . 209, 552 DESEO, 25 56 ek oe BE coccinea 5 OO, BA concinna so De! eyenocephala 339, 342, 553-4 decurva , . 339, 340, 342 falcata 338-40, 342 Sraciis 2. oo oo oo BDH Matthewsii .. .. .. 552 mutica 553-4 nana 552-3 UUAINS 5 ace ow DOH parviflora . 387, 340, 342 puberula Ay) SNR oie Pyramidalis .. .. .. 552 ReMmexaye 2 F)4. e revoluta Puede AM RE TOONS, 65 oo oc oo Sb8 toveyana 4 Ei eife x tare ly Fy truncata LA hee enn OS COIOS®, 45 oo oo co DOS Ptylostylum albomacu- latum eb han Salo De Pyrrhosia . 654, 661 Quedius BELGRAVENSIS iL cordatus arty Maan ee tay Quercus pedunculata .. 74 Radinoderus 367-8, 372 gloriosus EU plein SHOU, mirabilis 0h Deel OST occidentalis 372-3 oculatus By Hehe ddig ee ornatissimus AMOS sollomomls 3, 3, .o. SUZ terrae-reginae 372-3 1xxxiv. Ranunculus , 524 rivularis XXXVii, xlv SDs DN eXCXCXAV ATI XCV Rhacopteris" . 256, 463, 570 inaequilatera .. 463 Lindseaeformis 5 gg OR SOs oo MCU LOS Rhea americana so Seah Rhexoxylon ABZ Rhinia Heys , 612 xanthogaster 612-3 Rhinocypha .. 205 Rhinomyiobia . 658 australis an axe flavipes . 658 marginata ., 658 melas ie , 658 rufomaculata ., 658 translucens .. 658 Rhinoplecia .. 603 rostellata 56 (8083 rostrata ., 603 Rhynchiodexia OOS brevipalpis .. 658 longipes .. 658 punctipennis .. 658 rubricarinata .. 658 Rhynchonella ya CAL Rivellia so Bll connata 3. DIL Ruffordia ayaa geminal 146. 8 Goepperti 5 lee Gopperti var. latifolia 147-8 MorTONI , 145, 147 Rutilia 331, 615-7, 654, 657-61 aditha .. 658 albopicta .. 658 analoga OOS argentifera . 3838, 658 assimilis , 658 australasiae .. 660 barcha . 659 castanipons .. 659 decora .. 660 decorum .. 659 desvoidyi 332, 334- 5, 659-61 dorsomaculatum 1659 durvillei ee GY) erichsoni . 38338, 659 ethoda .. 659 flavipes i .. 659-60 formosa ,. 332, 334-5, 659 frontosa . 659 fulgida + 08) fulvipes ,. 659 fulviventris ay Woe) fuscotestacea . 659 idesa f oA 659 imperialis } 333, 335, 659 incomparabilis .. 659 inornata : . 331, 659 lepida ‘ 332, 335, 659, 661 INDEX. Rutilia leucosticta ., 331, 334, 659 livis .. 660 media , 659 minor so wy) nigrithorax Pata O60, nitens 5 Bag GD oblonga . 660 onoba ., 660 panthea . 660 pectoralis ee .. 660 pellucens : 332, 335, 660 potina .. 660 pubicollis . 660 punctum ; .. 660 regalis Bor 334, 659-60 retusa . 660 rubriceps ., 660 ruficornis .. 660 sabrata . 660 semifulva .. 660 setosa .. 660 soror .. 660 spinipectus . 660 spinolae 660 splendida sage 5, 660 subtustomentosa . 660 testacea .. 660 uzita .. 660 variegata 659-61 velutina aN 661 viridinigra : 332, 334, 661 viriditestacea wee Ol vittata bos .. 661 vivipara é Boi, 333, 661 zabrina , Oil Rybaxis acanthosterna ,. 7 ATRICEPS a BREVIS a i) DELECTABILIS 8 electrica 10 harti 9 isidorae ,. 9 KINGI 9 LEAI : 10 longipilosus 10 MELANOCEPHALA 8 MONSTRABILIS 7 otwayensis 9 parvidens f 9 quadriceps We 9,10 quadrituberculata 9 sanguinipennis i) strigicollis 10 villosa 10 Rytus : ae subulatus 23 Sagola 5 australiae 4 FILIXICOLA 4 misella 5 Sagola TRICOLOR 5 VENTRALIS Ney he 4 Saltelliseps so A, Cala Samaropsis .. 064 granulata .. 0638 moravica 562-3 PINCOMBEI 5g HOA Seixasi .. 563 Zignoana . 562 Santalum sp. SRE roe. Sapromyza .. 355, 360 aberrans . 258 alboatra tO OU ATRIMANA : 5 BT, SOY) aureocapitata 5 BHY) avicola 50 DNS bicoloripes ., 356 brevicornis so Be brunneovittata 3) flavimana eS flavodorsalis 5 DT fuscocostata .. 308 fuscolimbata 5 BDY griseodorsalis 5 359 hieroglyphica so ONG hirtiventris .. 356 immaculipes oo BDU lancifer ao BDU maculithorax so GS magnicoernis . 356 magnifica 4 BOT mariae 357- 8 nigricornis 357, 359-60 occipitalis so DDT ocellaris so DHS parviceps ,. 358 petersoni 56 BOD pilifrons 50 ND plumiseta sa BNDD) punctiseta .. 358 regalis OS riparia 54 Be sciomyzina a3 ODT spinigera 5 BBG stigmatica 358 strahani | B52 9 subaeneiventris 5 OOO suffusa ., 306 tenuicornis ao COU tonnoiri .. 356 unicolorata +4 SDS urbana eS variventris so HDS victoriae ; , 359 Saragus donviemarnns e284: opacipennis , 284 Saropogon 300 Scaphanocephalus _ xviii Sceliphron laetum .. . 136 Schaufussia mona ,. .. 28 Schizactiana . 651 Schizotachina 5 GH: Sciomyza 4, BA, tS Scipio XXvi Scleropogon Pee Gia picticornis . 607 Semisuturia . 661 australis ot ee Obl! Senostoma . 615-6, 659-61 flavipes a Ul? ruficornis a MLL Sepedon . 322 sphegeus bear. 25 Sepsis , a0, HOY) hirsuta ; ~ ae Sequoia gigantea eat CL: Setigena &, 656-7 Sigillaria 259, 310-2 Brardi : a5 auld! ? muralis . 261 Silbomyia edie aes S661 Sisyromyia . 4138, 426, 431 albavitta 426-9 altus .. 455 antecedens Walia A54 aurata 426-8, 430 auratus sey or ERO brevirostris 426-7, 431-2 decorata _, 426, 429 decoratus e429 immutatus _ AS limbata 426-7 primogenita se “etl primogenitus Berea! rutilus : G6 we BD tetratricha _ 426, 431 Sisyropa .. 661 cinerea RG Gil! lata Sekt Rae ane OCT GGL Solanum dulcamara ~. 524 Sparnopolius ao Gel limbatus 55 GAY Sphaerogaster .. 606 ? Sphenolepidium .. 146 Sphenopteris cf. fittoni ., 146 ESKENSIS . 458, 463 Sb (ae ae las superba . 458, 464 Spirifer , Beil disjuncta XXXVili Spirogyra , Ble Spiroptera 5 eed Spongostylum 135-6 Stenopogon 607-8 sabaudus 607 Stenopterina 353 brevipes 353 gigas eer het, OO Sterculia diversifolia .. 40 Stichopogon .. 298, 470 Stigmaria 54 AO, 2459) ficoides 255, 259-60 Stigmodera e280 cara . 22 INDEX. Stigmodera fossoria ae 25 maculifer ies MLE 27,3 maculifer var. aericollis 273 INROUNEL TCS N/A Ee anBnE MEN AUR TED Dlaicens) 9.) 44 ee ea rubriventris MOUS SEO TS WALSOMTAE 1 SGU) Wee 25 Stilbomyia 5 oo wells OBI Costalisy as) pe ween eo oll! opulenta ee aii 60d Stonys Ae cae Pes pate Flees Stratiodrilus XXV haswelli tale) es XXV novae-hollandiae |. YOY platensis XXV tasmanicus y 5 OA Siar, 6, “o, ., Beil Strongygaster bo eo CL normalis etl Gem ie KOE SOMOS 55 go oo eo OI! Strongylogaster Bet more OO)! Strongyloides xxiii, xxiv fiilleborni Q XXivV Struthiopteris .. so HO Sumpigaster .. 661 fasciatus . 661 Suniopsis 2 cribripennis As 2 Synechocera elongata 272, 275 LONGIOR a 274-5 occidentalis p22, 2105, setosa 5 AD tasmanica : 4, AUS Syngamus trachea .. , YORI Synlestes . 199, 204 albicauda _ 204 Systoechus 92, 413-4, 416, 432 albiceps .. . 414-5, 417-20 ALBOHIRTUS 414-5, 422 australis 414-5, 520-1 lOO 25 so os on CBS callynthrophorus Bs 414-5, 417, 419 CINCTIVENTRIS .. 415, 424 crassus . 415, 417 distinctus 414-5, 421 culabiatusi rene FLAVOVILLOSUS . 415, 423 leucopygus .. .. .. 425 PALLIDUS 415, 422, 424-5 pausarius a 418-9 platyurus 414-5, 417 RUBIDUS . Ab, 421 sericans 414-5, 418-9 vetustus 417, 419-20 Systropus .. 91-2 Tachina . 652, 654, 657, 661 amplicans ose een Ae OO australis eee mre NG G2, bura Re peel ie arom beri Olt GUO, 55 be oo, 6 OO Tachina coras .. despicienda fusciformis hebes inusta mutans olmus orga remota similis zebina Tadorna 1Xxxv. .. 661 ae oil .. 662 34 (oil .. 661 .. 662 55 (oil 54 (oil 36 OIL 50 OI . 661 Xxi Taeniopteris crassinervis Tenison-Woodsi Tandanus tandanus Tanyderus australiensis occidentalis patagonicus terrae-reginae Tasiocera attenuata BARRINGTONENSIS ,, Tasmaniomyia viridiventris Taxites sp. : Tectona grandis Telphusa sp. Temnocephala mexicana semperi .. Teremyia Teretrophora fasciata .. Terias 458, 462 . 458, 463 . 316 oD 367-9 __ 367, 369 . 373 ao BOT .. 373 OS 51, 68 . 662 .. 662 a5 LSD . 478 . Xvii DeexaValll .. XVil .. Xvii .. o04 .. 662 . 662 Xxix TERRAEREGINIA DASYPLEURA, Tetragonoschema Tetrao ears Tetrophthalmus Thecla’ chlorinda myrsilus Thecomyia longicornis Thelairia australis Thelymitra ixioides venosa Thereutria amaracus pulchra THERYAXIA SUTTONI Thinnfeldia ESKENSIS He Feistmanteli lancifolia narrabeenensis rhomboidalis talbragarensis 301, 303 + BaD . xxi XXVili 410-1 410-1 5 BBA , BAe 55 whe .. 662 340, 342 . 387, 340, 342 Themeda triandra .. |. 458, 460 458, 460-1 . 460 "_ 458, 460 ’ 458, 460 1XxxXvi. Thrips ies Da XXXVii Thrycolyga Ree ee ey flaviceps JEN Sen 662 Thyridanthrax es peme ee sLC) Thysonotis hymetus tay- Fetus ewe. sem ns09 taygetus oot y oe oMuaeee ce Oh Tiphia Ae cee Se LOD Tisiphone .. a XxX1X Todites Be ee eee OS, Williamsoni .. 458-9 Toxocnemis .. .. .. 662 WUE 35 9 oo oo ooo wn Toxophora oe ele AopOIOOGE, 5, 42 45 oo (oilil Trachys toe Sec OR282 ?albo-picta .. .. .., 283 australasiae .. .. .. 283 australis Re aaa e285 blackburni i 282-3 PeMCN 5 5° yo po a CB ? hackeri Leama 83 nigra, eared re eee OS PAUP a eee Socialis 25 o5 oo oo Lee Trapezites Xxix Trema aspera .. .. .. 409 Tricholyga Wein pa Oe Trichophthalma so 60 aw) Trichostylum .. .. .. 662 rufipalpis AS RS Dee ea Triclis bs a nace BY aA Trigona carbonaria .5 LRG Trigonometopus 319-20 ALBIBASIS ott noes ea eo) Triphana annulata se OO RISIBILIS 51, 56 tenebricosa .. .. .. 51 MEiSta ni ase ee 40.6 suaveolens .. .. .. 42 Tritaxys ad . 657, 662 australis See: Meee heterocera .. .. .. 662 Trochiloecetes .. . Xxviii Trypaneoides .. .. .. 321 AUSTRALIS Do, EEata oe HOM@ESHANIS 5, 25 oo O22 Trypanosoma equiperdum xiii TOUEWONNN =f, gg ng SY INDEX. Tupeia eee POLE MeO MOURNS ., ., op 4! HOWITTILI i et (A el ase bay Guadridentatism me elo speciosus Bie bet) shite spinosus SU eae ge aly) TERMITOPHILUS Fas eet) (OMENS By Viaetiee 20 TSAPUIS INOW! 55 55 on Ze Ugimeigenia .. .. .. 662 Clzmeriy 28 25 3. ~aseG2 WOES gn oe a OH fulviventris .. .. .. 662 Ulodendron . 256, 310 TOUS - 55 gy ao o6 ZDS minus , 255, 258 Vallisneria Pema ieee An SILT Verania frenata en dhe Verreauxia <5 igh RO auripilis Sis, Lea COZ Viguiera euryptera Bexoxel Villa 91-2, 94, 109-11, 130, 133-4 ALBATA 111-2, 124 ALBOBASALIS 111-2, 127 alterna ., 111,116 APRICA 111-2, 122 argentipennis 111-2, 129-30 bicellata Remora yeh Lass) BRUNEA 111-2, 118 commista 110-1, 113-4 flaveola... ~... 22 eas FUMEA ,, luli, ley fuscicostata 110-2, 114 minor Ws 111-2, 115 nigricosta 111-2, 121, 123-4 obscura .. 5, lait, Wad pellucida 111-2, 120-1 QUINQUEGUTTATA ,, 111,126 RAVA 111-2, 125 resurgens aoe eS simplex 111-2,118, 124, 128 TRIVINCULA Ve dahg 2k) VARIPENNIS 52 lala, ail velox 111-2, 117 vitrea 111-2, 117-8, 124 Viscum 32, 38-9, 44 angulatum 42, 45, 47 articulatum 31-7, 47 aureumd .2. 9.) a Veans42 australe... .. -) ee Rae BANCROFTI 45-6, 48 capense : .. 47-8 cornifolium .. .. .. 40 distichum .. oD-7 incanum .. 48 incanum var. racemosum 40 incanum var. subaureum 42 moniliforme e 33, 36 opuntioides 35-7 orientale 45-6 pendulum Pe 31, 35 psilitoides .. .. .. 48 subaureum . 41-2 NYVIEUMUOIE 45g AR 45,47 xanthophyllum .. .. 40 Westringia rosmarinifor- MIS.) 2 Winthemia and, ey ee irichopareia: 2. leno WEIIDES 55 oo oo oo OBZ Xanthoxylon Blackburnia 38 Xenica sy Me 1k yeaa eae OLU Xenocalliphora hortona 613 XENOPLATYURA 600-1 Xenorhipis ee es aD) Xerotes Re es Xxix Kylomyia | <7, | eae Yannichellia .. .. .. Dal Zelleriella .. ix, Xiv-xvi binucleaita) 4.) ee Zephyranthes texana .. 5238 VALE: a ROR eee NRSC oo OO aureopyga .. .. .. 662 Zizeeria alsulus pan e409 Zizula gaika attenuata .. 410 Zostera ee ae oe Zosteromeigenia a eenG 62, mima ae, Ri ee eo! Zosteromyia ~.. .. .. 662 cingulata Pe 7 é, ? anu fh NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES. Parr i. By CHARLES OKE. [Read 28th March, 1928.] Staphylinidae. DABRA SULCICOLLIS, 0. Sp. Testaceous; head and elytra dingy-brown; prothorax castaneous; first, second and eleventh joints of antennae and tarsi flavous, intermediate antennal joints infuscated. Clothed with pale ashen pubescence, tips of abdominal segments with a row of moderately long hairs. Head strongly transverse, narrowed in front, indistinctly punctured. Antennae with first joint large, second about half length of first, thin at base, thickened near apex, third to tenth transverse, increasing in width, eleventh as long as preceding four combined, rounded at apex. Thorax transverse,, base bisinuate, with the hind angles produced and having three or four stout setae; a large medio- basal impression continued to apex; fine confluent punctures. Elytra strongly transverse; posterior margin quadri-sinuate with the lateral angles produced; sculpture finer and more indistinct than on pronotum. Abdomen tapering, smooth and shining on basal joints, apical and subapical rather closely punctured. Under surface closely punctured. Length, 3:80 mm. f Hab.—Victoria: Gypsum, in nests of Iridomyrmex nitidus (C. Oke). Distinguished from the previously described species by the impression on pronotum. Viewed from some directions this appears to be an isolated round fovea somewhat obliquely impressed on the pronotum, but when viewed obliquely from the sides it appears as a medial sulcus dilated near the base. Type in author’s collection. QUEDIUS BELGRAVENSIS, Nl. SD. 6. Dingy reddish-brown, in parts infuscated; legs and tips of abdominal segments paler, head and pronotum black, elytra and mandibles pale testaceous, two basal joints of antennae (the others much infuscated), palpi and tarsi flavous. Hlytra, abdomen and sternum rather thickly clothed with pale adpressed pubescence; sides of head, prothorax and abdomen with scattered long black hairs. Head, excluding neck, transverse, convex, rounded on sides; eyes large, same length as inter-antennary space; two punctures at base of each antenna, a small puncture near eye, and a larger one between eye and neck. Antennae with first joint long, second slightly longer than third, fourth smaller, fifth and sixth quadrate, seventh to tenth transverse, eleventh ovate-acuminate, lightly incurved at apex. Prothorax a little wider than long, widest near base; with two punctures nearer apex than usual. Elytra quadrate, with rather close A 2 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, i, distinct punctures. Abdomen more closely punctate than elytra; under surface of apical segment with three V-shaped notches, subapical segment rather deeply emarginate in centre. Front tarsi with four basal joints much dilated; inter- mediate with basal joint swollen, longer than next three combined, and with a conspicuous V-shaped black comb on the lower surface, composed of 25 teeth. Length, 5 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Belgrave (C. Oke) in July, under rotting leaves. In many respects close to the description of Quedius cordatus Lea, but the elytron is closely punctate and the abdomen very closely so; also the comb of the tarsus is very different. The comb is V-shaped and is placed obliquely on the tarsi with the open end towards the base. The teeth at the closed end are very closely packed and are smaller than the teeth at the other end; as a result they are difficult to count, but I believe there are twelve teeth on either side and one at apex. The apical joint of the palpi is rather short, but is decidedly thicker at base than apex. On the elytra, behind the scutellum there is a vague infuscated blotch. Type in author’s collection. PROCIRRUS FERRUGINEUS Lea. I have taken twelve specimens of this species at Caulfield, Coburg, Sunshine and Melton; the colours are constant and as described by Lea. The mandibles are much like those figured by Lea for Pinophilus semiopacus, except that the tooth is not so deeply notched at its apex. The apex is cut off obliquely and lightly emarginate, the deepest part of the emargination being nearer the outside than the inside. The male, not previously described, has the front tibiae very slightly wider than the female, and has a V-shaped notch on the under surface of the preapical segment of abdomen, but otherwise agrees with the female. Allotype in author’s collection. SUNIOPSIS CRIBRIPENNIS Lea. Hight specimens of this species before me show that the type specimen was immature or not of the normal colour. The palest specimen is reddish- castaneous, three are dark castaneous, diluted with red along the sides, three are piceous and one is black. It would appear that the normal colour is almost black, in parts, particularly base of elytra, diluted with red, mandibles, palpi and antennae reddish-castaneous, legs flavous, with base of femora and middle of tibiae infuscated. The palpi show that Suniopsis and Hyperomma should be merged, as suggested by Lea, because the apical joint is apparently movable, at least in this species. Four specimens have the apical joint distinctly protruding in both palpi, one has just the extreme tips of both palpi just discernible, two have only one each visible and one has both tips concealed. 6. With the subapical segment having a fairly wide lunate excision. The front tarsi same width as in 9. Allotype ¢ in author’s collection. Hab.—Victoria: Fern Tree Gully (in May), Belgrave (in March and May), Evelyn (in June), Emerald (August and November), Warburton (January) (C. Oke), found in tussocks and rotting leaves. BY C. OKE. 3 HYPEROMMA LABRALE Lea. I have taken a @ of this species at Warburton, Vic. It agrees in all respects with the description, but is larger, 124 mm. as mounted, and has the apical segments telescoped. HYPEROMMA ATRA. Nl. SD. 6. Black; labrum, mandibles and apex of abdomen reddish, tibiae. palpi, first, second and eleventh joints of antennae testaceous, intermediate joints infuscated, femora watery-flavous. Head, thorax and elytra sparingly, abdomen densely, clothed with long black hairs. Head subquadrate, suddenly constricted in front of eyes, hind angles rounded off; labrum with a U-shaped excision in middle; mandibles very acuminate to apex, with a small, but distinct, blunt tooth near base; eyes large, invisible from below; with large round sparse punctures on dorsal surface, becoming rather dense on ventral. Antennae with joint one long, three longer than two or four, four-ten decreasing in length, eleven briefly ovate. Prothorax cylindrical, with an irregular semidouble row of punctures on either side of centre and a few scattered small punctures. HElytra slightly longer than wide, with large round close punctures. Abdomen densely covered with large punctures on both surfaces; apical ventral segment with a deep U-shaped excision, preapical depressed near margin and lightly emarginate. Legs rather long, anterior tarsi thin. Length, 7% mm. Hab.—Victoria: Carrum (C. Oke). The mandibles are longer and thinner, with the tooth smaller, not so acuminate and nearer base than in following species. The labrum is different and the head and abdomen are more closely punctate. Type in author’s collection. HYPEROMMA PALLIPES, Nl. Sp. 6. Black; mandibles and prothorax red, the latter with an elongate blotch on disc and sides black; two apical segments of abdomen and apex of palpi diluted with red; labrum, two basal joints of antennae and legs testaceous; antennae dingy-brown, apical joint paler. Nitid. Head, thorax and elytra sparsely, abdomen, legs and antennae rather closely clothed with moderately long pubescence; antennae also with fine dense pubescence; sides of head, elytra and abdomen with long straggling hairs. Head oblong-ovate with a large neck; with large and numerous irregularly distributed punctures; labrum with a V-shaped notch in middle and an oblique lunate excision on either side, leaving a blunt tooth between; mandibles long and acute, with a distinct tooth towards base, the base swollen; eyes large, invisible from below; under surface nitid and almost impunctate on disc, but with large punctures on base and sides. Antennae with first joint large, third about half the length of first, twice length of second, a little shorter than fourth, fourth to sixth decreasing, seventh to tenth equal, eleventh a little longer, rounded at apex. Prothorax oblong, slightly wider at apex than base, angles rounded off, margined on basal half of sides, an irregular double row of moderate punctures on either side of middle and numerous smaller ones distributed about. Hlytra short, with fairly dense, large punctures, the surface between finely shagreened; a large bristle at humeral angles. Abdomen gradually tapering, finely shagreened and a few small punctures; subapical segment with a 4 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, i, deep V-shaped notch on under surface. Legs rather long; front tarsi thin. Length, 7:25 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Grampians, from moss in November (C. Oke). Mr. Lea has kindly compared my specimen with his types and I am indebted to him for the following note: “Differs from bryophilum in having shorter and darker antennae, shorter jaws with inner tooth smaller, prothorax less dilated in front, with dark sides, rows of punctures on each side of middle smaller and more numerous, elytra with denser and smaller punctures and abdomen darker. Nearer pictipes but head darker, tibiae not bicoloured and punctures of prothorax and elytra denser.” Type (unique) in author’s collection. Pselaphidae. Faronini. SAGOLA VENTRALIS, Nn. Sp. 6. Reddish-castaneous; legs and palpi paler. Rather closely clothed with short yellowish pubescence. Head small, with two distinct interocular foveae; lightly impressed between antennal tubercles. Antennae extending to basal fourth of elytra; joint one thick, as long as two-three combined, three smaller than two, four-eight subequal, nine-ten larger, transverse, eleven same width, shortly ovate. Prothorax slightly longer than wide, widest about middle, much narrowed to apex, less strongly to base; with a transverse prebasal impression, which is dilated forward in middle, and connecting three foveae; sides obliquely impressed; with fine sparse punctures, base with a row of larger punctures. Hlytra slightly longer than wide, lightly narrowed to base, humeral angles widely rounded; subsutural striae with four small foveae near base; discal stria represented by two rather large impressions behind base and a groove, which is continuous to apex; two large impressions between sutural and discal striae, a faint groove near margins; fine scattered punctures. Abdomen lightly dilated to fourth segment, apex pointed; strongly margined; under surface lightly flattened along middle, third segment with a longitudinal process on its apical two-thirds. Metasternum excavated posteriorly; lightly carinated across anterior margin of excavation. Middle trochanters with a sharp tooth, hind trochanters compressed and produced into a sub-cuneiform process. 9. Differs in having under surface of abdomen convex and without process, and the trochanters unarmed. Length 1:60 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Carrum (C. Oke). The eighth joint of the antennae is irregular and viewed from some directions appears to be the smallest joint. The process on abdomen, when viewed from the side, is seen to start near the base of the third segment and increase in height to the apex of that segment, where it is truncated. Apparently, from the description, this species is close to S. australiae, of which the female only was described, but differs, inter alia, in the elytral sculpture. In the present species, the sutural and discal striae are continuous to apex, with two impressions between. Type in author’s collection. SAGOLA FILIXICOLA, Nn. Sp. dg. Dark reddish-castaneous. Thickly clothed with long reddish-yellow setae. Head with a large oval fovea in middle, open in front and narrowly separating BY C. OKE. 5 antennal tubercles, the latter with a narrow sulcate impression on each from base to near apex. Antennae robust, joint 1 thick and long, 2 much smaller, 3 smailest, 4-11 gradually increasing in width, 8-10 strongly transverse, 11 obliquely produced on inner side of apex. Prothorax transverse, strongly rounded on sides; with a large medio-basal fovea and a smaller obliquely impressed one on each side; with a few scattered punctures. Hlytra with sutural striae distinct, discal with a round fovea at base and a larger one behind, the striae traceable to beyond middle, a small round fovea on base between the striae; fine sparse punctation. Abdomen increasing in width to fourth segment, strongly margined; punctures as on elytra; under surface with a flattened impression on apex of third and sixth segments. Metasternum impressed posteriorly. Posterior trochanters compressed and produced into a fairly acute cuneiform process. Length, 2:40 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Gembrook (C. Oke), in a fern gully. A large robust species. It is more robust and with longer and denser clothing than any other species known to me. The medial fovea on the pronotum is unusually large, and, when viewed obliquely from behind, it appears to occupy about one-third of the total area of that segment. Type in author’s collection. SAGOLA TRICOLOR, 0. Sp. Piceous; antennae and femora paler, elytra reddish, tibiae (apices infuscated), tarsi, mandibles and palpi flavous. Clothed with fine pale pubescence, with a few scattered long hairs. Head small, with three foveae, two interocular open in front, and one in frontal impression; antennal tubercles not very prominent; a few small punctures. Mandibles prominent with four minute denticulations near base. Antennae reaching middle coxae; joint one large, as long as next two combined, two same width but shorter, three small, four to eight subequal, nine to eleven forming a light club, eleven slightly pointed. Prothorax slightly longer than wide, with an irregular transverse impression at base, joined with the medio- basal fovea, sides obliquely impressed. Elytra longer than wide; sutural and discal striae interrupted near base by small impressions, discal striae continuous to apex, between sutural and discal striae with three round impressions in a longitudinal line, a groove near margin. Abdomen same length as elytra, lightly dilated to fourth segment, apex somewhat pointed. Length, 1:10 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Warburton (C. Oke). The colours, if constant, will easily lead to the identification of this species, but otherwise the elytral sculpture is distinctive, as also is the head. Sagola misella Sh. must be regarded as the genotype of Sagola, as Sharp described the genus from a dissected specimen of that species. In his formal diagnosis he gives as one of its characters “mandibles without teeth on the inner edge’, but, as S. tricolor has all the other characters given, I do not think its dentate mandibles should exclude it. Type (unique) in author’s collection. Euplectini. LIMONIATES CRIBRATUS, Nl. SD. 6. Dark castaneous-brown; antennae, palpi (tip infuscated) and legs flavous. Moderately clothed with short ashen pubescence. With close distinct punctures becoming a little finer on abdomen. 6 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, 1, Head about as long as width at base. Antennal tubercles small but prominent Antennae with joint 1 large, 2 smaller but larger than 3, 3-8 small, 9-10 larger, transverse, subequal, 11 largest, sharply pointed, length of three preceding com- bined. Prothorax subquadrate, widest about middle, much narrowed to apex; with a rather deep transverse impression at basal third, a shallow longitudinal impression from apex, not quite reaching transverse impression, foveate near sides. Elytra longer than wide, sides parallel; sutural striae distinct, discal striae short, base with six foveate impressions. Abdomen with a transverse medio-basal impression; under surface lightly flattened, a subapical impression and apex slightly produced. Anterior and intermediate femora rather strongly inflated, posterior lightly inflated. All the tibiae lightly inflated to about apical third, thence obliquely narrowed to apex, where the middle ones are obtusely spurred. 9. Similar to dg, though slightly narrower, legs not so inflated and the under surface of abdomen lightly convex. Length, 1 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Frankston (C. Oke) in tussocks. Type in author’s collection. PLECTOSTENUS ORIENTALIS, Nn. Sp. 3. Very dark reddish-castaneous. Clothed with minute pale pubescence. Head small, truncate in front, rounded on sides, constricted behind; with three interocular foveae all opening in front, and an oblique impression near each antennal tubercle; indistinctly punctate. Antennae long, joints 2-9 cylindric, 9 wider at apex than base, 10 a little wider than 9, 11 ovate-acuminate. Thorax convex, with a conspicuous transverse groove, foveate on sides and at centre, the central fovea dilated forward; punctures as on head. Elytra longer than wide, sutural striae foveate at base and continuous to apex, first dorsal stria very faint, second with a large fovea at base, the stria itself well impressed at base, but becoming obsolete near middle; punctures very indistinct and surface rougher than on pronotum. Abdomen with punctures larger and more distinct than on pronotum. Under surface with moderate confluent punctures on parts, larger on head than elsewhere. Ventral surface of head and prosternum longitudinally carinated. Metasternum widely depressed. Fifth and sixth ventral segments with a shallow depression, apex of abdomen bisinuate. Anterior trochanters obtusely armed, tibiae finely spinose at apex. Length, 2 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Bendigo, in nest of Chalcoponera; N. S. Wales, in nest of Huponera lutea (A. M. Lea). j In appearance very like P. gracilicornis, but larger, with the head and sculpture of elytra somewhat different. There are vague traces of a longitudinal impression on disc of pronotum, but these are faint and not visible when looked at from some directions. Brachyglutini. BATRAXYS TRIFOVEATA, N. Sp. Pale castaneous. Conspicuously clothed with short pale pubescence. With indistinct punctures. Head with a strong transverse impression in front and two interocular foveae. Antennae with joint 1 thicker but scarcely longer than 2, 3 longer, 4-8 moniliform, 9 smallest, 10 transverse, 11 largest, truncate-ovate. Prothorax widest in front of middle where sides are strongly rounded, much narrowed to apex, BY C. OKE. i obliquely cut away towards base; a small medio-basal fovea and one on either side. Hlytra transverse, base quadrifoveate, shoulders obliquely raised; sutural striae indistinct, discal wanting. Abdomen with two short carinules at base, widely separated, the space between being half width of abdomen. Meta- sternum rather widely impressed, sides of impression carinate posteriorly. Legs unarmed. Length, 1:90 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Eltham (C. Oke), in nest of Iridomyrmez. The unique specimen of this species is possibly a ¢, the metasternum being widely impressed, but the abdomen is scarcely flattened. The genus has been characterised as having only the medio-basal fovea on the prothorax, but as the present species agrees in all other generic characters, I have not thought it advisable to propose a new genus for it, simply because it has the two lateral foveae. Compared with B. armitagei, as identified by Mr. Lea, the present species is paler, duller and wider and with very conspicuous clothing. Type (unique) in author’s collection. RYBAXIS MONSTRABILIS, Nl. SDP. ¢. Pale castaneous; legs and eleventh joint flavous, eighth joint infuscated, ninth and tenth black. Sparsely clothed with short pale pubescence. Head longer than wide, convex, smooth and shining on vertex, a few punctures in front between antennae; with two small interocular foveae. Antennae long, joint 1 large, 2 smaller, 3-4 subequal, 5 longer and wider, as long as 3-4 combined, 6-7 subequal, 8 smallest, 9-10 large, increasing, 11 largest, strongly curved, excavate on lower surface. Prothorax lightly transverse, widest at apical third, suddenly narrowed to apex; each side with a fovea, the two connected by a strong impression, which is bent backwards, but scarcely foveate, in centre; strongly strigose in front of impression. HElytra about as wide at apex as length down suture, much attenuated to base, apical margin strongly produced nearer suture than margin; sutural striae distinct, discal striae abruptly ending near margin; with a fine scattered punctation, becoming coarser posteriorly. Abdomen with a small medio-basal node and two short diverging striae; under surface with first segment raised between hind coxae and then strongly impressed, margin of second recurved cephalad in middle, thence to apex with a deep impression, apex lightly produced. Meso- and meta-sternum strongly sulcate. Anterior trochanters at base and anterior femora at base with a minute sharp tooth. All the femora inflated in middle, the anterior slightly more so than the inter- mediate, the posterior much less; the intermediate impressed (scarcely notched) near base on lower surface. Anterior tibiae strongly dentate at apical third, thence emarginate to apex; intermediate thickened to apical third, thence obliquely narrowed to apex, the apex notched, leaving an Obtuse tooth; posterior lightly curved. ®. Slightly smaller than the ¢, with the ventral surface of abdomen convex and without the recurved plate on second segment; the margin of elytra not produced and legs simple. Length, 2-50-2:70 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Fern Tree Gully (C. Oke), in July and October. A fine large species with strigose pronotum, differing in several respects from the other described species having that character. The antennae are peculiar, with joints 9-11 cut away underneath, where they are highly polished. The apical joint is much as figured by Lea for his acanthosterna (= atriceps Macl.), but is more curved. When viewed from the sides the ninth and tenth joints are 8 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, i, seen to be very thin. The males are very pale and appear to be somewhat immature, but the ninth-tenth joint is absolutely black in all examples, so this may be the mature colour. Type in author’s collection. RYBAXIS MELANOCEPHALA, Nl. Sp. ©. Reddish-castaneous; head and 9th and 10th joints black, legs and palpi almost flavous. Moderately clothed with short pale pubescence. Head widely but shallowly impressed between antennae and with two round interocular foveae; moderate sparse punctures, becoming much closer in front. Antennae reaching middle coxae, joint 1 longer than next two combined, 2 stout, 3-4 subequal, 5 longer, 6 shorter, 5, 7 same length as 3, 8 smallest, 9-10 increasing, 11 largest, ovate-acuminate, longer than 9-10 combined. Prothorax transverse, sides evenly rounded; three prebasal foveae connected by a distinct arcuate impression; striolate in front of groove, behind with a few fine punctures. Elytra searcely as long as width at apex, narrowed to base; humeral region slightly raised; subsutural striae interrupted near base by a foveate impression, discal striae arcuate and distinct to near apex, foveate at base; very finely and sparsely punctured. Abdomen with medio-basal impression; punctures as on elytra. Metasternum rather deeply excavated posteriorly. Length, 2:10-2:20 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Daylesford, in moss (C. Oke). Described from 7 females obtained in October and February. The head and two joints of antennae black, the strigose pronotum and short pale clothing should make this an easy species to identify. RYBAXIS DELECTABILIS, nN. SD. 6. Sternum and abdomen (apex excepted) black; fourth-tenth joints of antennae deeply infuscated, head and pronotum dark obscure brown, disc of elytra and apex of abdomen bright reddish-castaneous, legs, palpi and joints 1-3 and 11 pale reddish-castaneous. Clothed with moderately long yellowish pubescence. Head with a large depression in front between antennae and two large round interocular foveae; with fine scattered punctures becoming closer and coarser in front. Antennae with joint 1 as long as next two combined, 2 short, 3 longer than 2, thin at base, increasing to apex, 4-8 produced on inside over entire length, 4 larger than 2, 5 larger than 4, 6-7 equal, larger than 5, 8 shorter but same width, 9-10 larger, subequal, 11 truncate-ovate, lightly cut away on inside near apex; joints 4-10 finely rugose. Prothorax transverse, strongly rounded on sides; with a large fovea on either side connected by a strongly impressed curved line, central fovea obsolete. Elytra lightly transverse, with sutural striae distinct and discal widely impressed at base and traceable to apical declivity; epipleural furrow very distinct; with fine distinct but scattered punctures. Metasternum shallowly impressed in front, becoming deeper and wider behind. Ventral surface of abdomen with a small node on base of fourth segment, apex with an elongate fovea. Intermediate trochanters finely dentate. Anterior tibiae minutely dentate before apical third. 9. Differs from the ¢ in having antennae much thinner, with the joints not produced inwards and only joints 8-10 dark; abdomen without node and non- foveate; the trochanters and tibiae non-dentate. Length, 2:20 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Carrum and Frankston (C. Oke). BY C. OKE. 9 The antennae of this very distinct species are peculiar in the ¢; the joints appear to be a different shape according to the position from which they are viewed, as in parvidens, quadrituberculata and quadriceps. When viewed from the side they are seen to be as described above. The colours of the antennae in the two sexes appear to be constant in all the specimens before me, though some have the abdomen brownish, not black; these are probably immature. Types in author’s collection. RyYBAXIS KINGI, nN. SDP. Castaneous; three apical joints of antennae infuscated. Clothed with short pale pubescence. Head with two round interocular foveae, and deeply impressed between antennae. Antennae with joint 1 long, 2 not so wide and less than half length of 1, 3 thin, longer than 5, 5 longer than 4 or 6, 7 same as 5, 8 smallest, 9 large, 10 larger, 11 largest, oblong-ovate. Prothorax with sides strongly rounded, widest near middle; transverse furrow biarcuate, medial fovea very small, lateral moderate; with fine scattered punctures. Elytra with sutural striae foveate at base and distinctly impressed to apex, discal well impressed to apical declivity; shoulders obliquely raised; with fine fairly close punctures. Abdomen with two short divergent carinules, fasciculate between; under surface flattened, with a small impression near apex. Metasternum rather deeply sulcate. Four front femora lightly inflated. Anterior tibiae feebly spinose near apex, intermediate with a long curved spur at apical fifth. Q. Similar to g, but differs in having abdomen convex, tibiae unarmed and the club thinner. Length, 1-50 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Eltham (C. Oke). Very like harti in size and general appearance even as to the apical joints of antennae being infuscated, but tibiae differently armed. Schaufuss and Lea describe isidorae as having the last joint of antennae pale and the front tibiae noticeably armed. “Smaller than sanguinipennis, which is also different in colour and has apex of abdomen sulcate. In otwayensis the abdomen is excavate and has a recurved plate on lower surface. Type in author’s collection. RYBAXIS BREVIS, nN. SDP. 6. Reddish-castaneous. Rather closely clothed with short pale pubescence. Head small with five foveae, 2 between eyes, 2 at bases of antennae and 1 in depression between antennae. Antennae with joint 1 large, as long as next two combined, 3 smaller than 2, 5 longer than adjacent joints, 8 smallest, 10 subtrapezoidal, 11 largest, truncate-ovate. Prothorax transverse, sides widely rounded; with three distinct foveae at base; rather close fine punctures. EHlytra transverse, with 6 basal impressions; sutural striae distinct, discal distinct to apical declivity, strongly curved; shoulders distinctly raised; punctures a little sparser than on pronotum. Abdomen with two divergent carinules reaching about apical third of basal segment; under surface flattened, apex foveate. Metasternum widely impressed. Intermediate trochanters dentate. Intermediate tibiae notched at apex, leaving a short spur. @. Differs from the male in having thinner antennae, abdomen convex underneath and apex non-foveate, trochanters and tibiae not armed. Length, 1:10-1:20 mm. 10 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, i, Hab.—Victoria: Warburton and Belgrave (C. Oke). A small species related to electrica King, but the spur on intermediate tibiae will distinguish it from that and other described species. There are indications of the transverse impression at base of thorax, but these are faint and invisible from some directions. RYBAXIS LEAI, n. nom. Rybaczis villosa Lea (nom. praeocc). The name villosa was preoccupied, by Raffray (1904) for a species from Tonkin, when proposed by Lea and so it is necessary to alter the later name. RYBAXIS STRIGICOLLIS Westw. (= R. longipilosus Wilson.) Having examined well over 200 specimens of this species I feel confident of the above synonymy. The only differences that were noted in the description of the latter species were in the antennae, viz.: strigicollis with the ninth and tenth joints of the antennae black and the eleventh “rather strongly bent”; longipilosus with unicoloured antennae and the apical joint “a little bent.” In a series in front of me (74 specimens, including some cotypes of longipilosus) there is every gradation in colour of the ninth and tenth joint, from flavous (immature) to black; also the apical joint varies a little in shape, though the apparent shape of this joint depends on the angle from which it is viewed. Specimens have been taken that were almost white and kept alive in captivity until they reached the mature colour. The darkening of the antennal joints is very gradual and apparently in some individuals they never really become black, but remain at most infuscated. This species is very common around Melbourne and is widely spread in Victoria, as I have taken it from such widely spread localities as: Grampians, Bendigo, Lorne, Wandong, Mornington and Traralgon. It also occurs in New South Wales and Tasmania. RYBAXIS QUADRICEPS Westw. Lea has drawn attention to a specimen in the Howitt collection which he thought had been correctly identified as this species, and I think there can be no doubt that this determination is correct. The species is fairly common around Melbourne, but I have not taken it associating with ants and it certainly cannot be considered a myrmecophile even if an odd specimen has been found near, or with, ants. Neither can R. strigicollis be so regarded. Both species live in grass tussocks and moss. Hab.—Victoria: Fern Tree Gully, Emerald, Warburton, Carrum, Frankston (C. Oke). EUPINOPSIS UNICLAVATA, Nl. Sp. g. Castaneous. Clothed with fairly short pubescence, a few longer reddish hairs on abdomen and antennae. Head large, longer than wide, attenuated in front; the vertex raised in front forming a ridge between the antennae, behind a ridge a large depression and two small round interocular foveae; the front concavely declivous, with the anterior margin lightly reflexed; mandibles quadri-dentate; with scattered micro- scopic punctures. Antennae with joint 1 long, 2 about half size of 1, 3-5 much smaller, subequal, 6-7 larger, subglobular, equal, 8 still larger, 9 smallest, quadrate, BY C. OKE. 11 10 narrow, transverse, 11 very large, truncate ovate; 6-8 each with a little group of papulae on inner surface, each papula with a long luteous seta, 10-11 covered with the setiferous papulae. Prothorax transverse, narrowed to apex, widely rounded on sides, with a small medio-basal fovea and the base with a line of small punctures. EHlytra large, narrowed to the base; sutural striae deeply impressed to apex; discal rather widely impressed at base, but becoming obsolete about middle; with a few scattered indistinct punctures. Abdomen with first segment large; ventral surface with a large transverse impression at apex. Metasternum with a wide, but not deep impression. Legs long. Length, 1:50 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Belgrave (C. Oke). The head and antennae of this species are both remarkable and distinctive. The impression on the head, behind the inter-antennal ridge, appears to be feebly divided into two separate impressions when viewed from behind, but from other directions it appears to be entire. The antennal club is formed entirely by the last joint, which is very large. Type in author’s collection. EKUPINOLUS, nN. gen. Head rather large, longer than wide, front impressed, two interocular foveae. Antennae irregular, club formed by the last joint only. Prothorax cordate, with a medio-basal fovea and one on either side below the disc; the base with a fine transverse groove, which is more or less punctate. Elytra without basal foveae or discal striae, sutural striae rather faint. Abdomen rather long, margined, ventral surface with segment 1 hidden under the metasternum, but just perceptible between the coxae, 2 large, 3, 4, 5 short, 6 larger. Metasternum large. Anterior and intermediate coxae contiguous; posterior distant. Legs of moderate length. The transverse groove of the prothorax is right on the base and is rather fine, with the medio-basal fovea touching it, but the lateral foveae, which are not visible, or scarcely so, from above, are some distance from it. The genus will be distinguished from Hupines and Hupinoda by the fovea on prothorax and the single jointed club; and from Eupinopsis by the absence of basal foveae and discal striae on the elytra. Genotype, H. lucifugus. EUPINOLUS LUCIFUGUS, N. Sp. ¢. Reddish-castaneous. . Clothed with moderately long semidecumbent pubescence, a few longer hairs on abdomen. With faint indistinct punctures. Head rather large, a little longer than wide, anterior margin sinuate and reflexed; with a large deep impression in front, and two small rounded interocular foveae. Antennae long, joint 1 large, 2 a little narrower, much shorter, 3-6 subequal, smaller than 2, 7 large, two and three-fourths as wide as 6, 8 a little smaller than 7, subglobular, 9 smallest, 10 just perceptibly larger than 9, 11 large, same width as 7, truncate-ovate; seventh and eighth joints with small papulae bearing long yellowish setae on inner surface. Prothorax subquadrate, rounded on sides; medio-basal fovea small. Elytra fairly large, sutural striae distinct to apex. Abdomen with first segment large, the following joints decreasing and bent downwards; ventral surface with 3-5 segments shortened down middle, the apex slightly produced underneath and lightly impressed. Metasternum with a large deep impression, which is subcarinate on the sides. Legs long, all the femora lightly inflated in middle, posterior tibiae curved inward. 12 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, i, ®. Differs in being smaller; joints 7 and 8 of antennae not being inflated and the apical joint smaller, though still of large size; ventral surface of abdomen more convex and the metasternum not so widely impressed. Length, 6, 1:40; 9, 1:15 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Fern Tree Gully and Warburton (C. Oke) under deeply embedded logs. The impression on the head is peculiar and appears of different shape from each angle of view. Viewed from behind it appears as a large irregular depression, deep behind and shallow in front, with an oblique extension behind each antenna. From the sides it appears to be open in front, but divided in its middle by a swollen ridge. The peculiar formation of the ¢ antennae will easily lead to its identification; in the female the seventh joint is longer, but not wider, than the adjacent joints. Types in author’s collection. EXUPINOLUS PARASITUS, N. Sp. 6. Reddish-castaneous. Moderately clothed with fine yellowish depressed pubescence, with distinct patches of golden pubescence on sides of pro-, meso- and metasternum near the coxae. Head moderate, narrowed in front, hind angles rounded; a large impression between antennae and two fairly large round interocular foveae; with sparse fine punctures. Antennae with joint 1 longer and wider than 2, 2 larger than 3, 3-6 subequal, 7 inflated, longer and wider than 2, 8 same as 6, 9-10 slightly increas- ing, 11 largest, truncate-ovate. Prothorax widest at apical third, suddenly narrowed to apex, arcuately narrowed to base; with a round fovea and a line of punctures at base. Elytra with sutural striae distinct to near apex; punctures as on head. Metasternum widely and rather deeply excavated. Ventral surface of abdomen with a round impression near apex. Legs rather long and thin, unarmed. %. Differs in not having the seventh joint inflated, metasternum not so excavated and ventral surface without preapical impression. Length, 1-35 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Belgrave and Emerald (C. Oke), found associating with Amblypone obscurus; Bayswater (J. E. Dixon). Types in author’s collection. EKUPINOLUS SOCIALIS, nN. sp. 6. Reddish-castaneous. Clothed with short pale pubescence. Head large, slightly wider than prothorax, much narrowed in front; with a large round impression between antennae and two small round interocular foveae. Antennae with joint 1 larger than 2, 3-4 smaller, 5 nearly as long as 2, 6-8 small, subequal, 9 as wide as 2, 10 a little larger, 11 largest, ovate-acuminate. Prothorax widest in front of middle, rounded on sides, rather suddenly constricted near base; a small round median fovea at base, with fine microscopic punctures. Elytra longer than wide, sutural striae distinct to apex, discal striae faintly indicated near base; punctures more distinct than on prothorax. Abdomen short, declivous; second ventral flattened, and a transverse impression on the fifth. Metasternum widely impressed. Intermediate trochanters compressed and obtusely produced in middle. °. Differs from the ¢ in having the ventral surface of the abdomen convex and the trochanters unarmed. Length, 1:25 mm. BY C. OKE. 1A} Hab.—Victoria: Fern Tree Gully and Belgrave (C. Oke), found in nests of Amblypone australis. Types in author’s collection. EUPINOLUS OBSCURUS, 0. SD. Similar to EH. parasitus, but larger, darker and the antennae not the same. The seventh joint is much larger and is produced inwards on the apex; the eleventh joint is much larger than in the preceding species. Hab.—Victoria: Evelyn (C. Oke) in a nest of Amblypone obscurus. This may prove to be only a variety, or form, of HE. parasitus, but even so it would be desirable to give it a varietal name. Of the numerous specimens I have obtained of parasitus none has shown any sign of bridging the differences between that species and obscurus. Type (unique) in author’s collection. EUPINODA FRATERNA, Nl. SD. 6. Reddish-castaneous; abdomen, except apex, darkers Clothed with short pale pubescence, scarcely visible on prothorax and elytra. Head rather small, narrowed in front, with two small, round, interocular foveae. Antennae with joint 1 large, 2 smaller, 3-4 still smaller, equal, 5 lightly inflated, 6-8 same as 3, 9 as wide as 5, transverse, 10 larger, 11 pedunculate at base, then suddenly wider than 10, the large part ovate-acuminate. Prothorax widest at apical third, much narrowed to apex. Elytra longer than wide, sutural striae distinct to near apex; shoulders slightly raised; with a fine scattered punctation. Metasternum widely impressed, subcarinate around depressed part. Second ventral segment (first visible) large, flattened, with two small tubercles, close together, nearer base than apex, segments 3-5 shortened down centre, 6 large, widely foveate. Legs long; the posterior trochanters compressed and obtusely produced in middle; the femora lightly inflated in middle and the tibiae thickened towards apex. Length, 1:20 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Belgrave (C. Oke) in nests of Amblypone obscurus. The tubercles on the abdomen are small and lightly transverse, with the distance between slightly more than the length of each tubercle. The fifth joint is not so large as in most species of Hupines having that joint inflated, but is distinctly larger than adjacent ones. The club appears to be formed by the last two joints only, though the ninth is wider than the eighth. The tenth has the base very thin or stem-like, with apex suddenly clavate. Type in author’s collection. EUPINES NIGELLA, 0. SD. 6. Black or almost so, appendages dark brownish. Clothed with very short, fine, adpressed pubescence. Head small, narrowed in front of eyes, without impressions. Antennae with joints 1 and 2 stout, 3-8 moniliform, 9 slightly wider, transverse, 10 wider, transverse, 11 largest, ovate. Prothorax widest in front of middle, where sides are rounded. Elytra subparallel-sided, with sutural striae indistinct. Ventral surface of abdomen flattened, apical segment impressed. Metasternum widely impressed. Anterior femora strongly inflated; intermediate less noticeably so; posterior scarcely inflated. Anterior tibiae suddenly narrowed at apical fourth; intermediate with a short sharp spur at apex; posterior mucronate at apex. 14 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, i, 9. Differs in not having inflated femora, tibiae unarmed, abdomen not flattened and without impression, metasternum not so widely impressed and antennae a little thinner. Length, 0:90 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Fern Tree Gully, Gembrook (C. Oke). A small narrow black species, flatter and more parallel-sided than usual, with a distinct spur on: middle tibiae. The pubescence is very fine and scarcely visible under a hand lens, but under a 4 inch compound lens is very conspicuous. EUPINION, n. gen. Body elongate, convex. Head transverse; eyes prominent submedian; antennae rather short; palpi as in Huwpines; under surface without median carinae. Prothorax without impressions. Elytra with sutural and discal striae. Abdomen with narrow margin, declivous posteriorly. Anterior coxae conical, prominent, sub-contiguous; intermediate contiguous; posterior sub-globular, lightly separated. Size minute. The beetle for which this genus is proposed has somewhat the facies of Eupines, but is without the median carina on under surface of head, which is quite a conspicuous character in Hupines; the discal striae on elytra add another distinction. In the single species described the grooves on front of head and the produced apex of abdomen, with the pygidium on the ventral surface, are characters unknown in Huwpines, but these may be merely specific. The latter character occurs in some species of Tyramorphus, while others have the apex normal. Genotype, BL. crassipes. EUPINION CRASSIPES, 0D. Sp. dg. Dark castaneous-brown, appendages almost flavous. Moderately clothed with short, fine, depressed, ashen pubescence; a few long hairs below eyes. Head with two round interocular foveae, and two longitudinal impressions between antennae. Antennae rather short; joint 1 large, 2 slightly smaller, 3-8 small, 9 very little larger, 10 large, transverse, 11 largest, as long as four preceding combined. Prothorax widest about middle, evenly decreasing to apex, rather suddenly narrowed before base; finely and rather closely punctate. Elytra slightly longer than wide, sides rounded and increasing to beyond middle; punctures as on prothorax; sutural striae distinct to apex, discal stria represented by a deep notch, a fine stria near margin, visible to middle. Abdomen strongly declivous posteriorly, the apex somewhat produced and bent under, the pygidium on ventral surface, under surface lightly flattened, the apex of fourth segment deeply emarginate in middle and on each side of emargination a triangular projection. Metasternum rather deeply impressed and finely carinate on each side. All the femora inflated, the intermediate largest and with a small sharp tooth at base, the anterior carinate on the inner under edge. Intermediate tibiae inflated in middle, notched at base, spinose at apex. %. Similar but under surface of abdomen lightly convex, with the intermediate and posterior femora, and middle tibiae not inflated. The anterior femora are lightly inflated. Length, 0-80 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Noble Park (C. Oke), in moss with numbers of a small black species of Iridomyrmez. Type in author’s collection. BY C. OKE. 1155 MALLEECOLA, nN. gen. Head large, with prominent carinae; truncated in front; a cuneiform process at base of eyes. Under surface with a median carina from mentum to base. Eyes moderate, coarse facets, sub-median. Antennae eleven-jointed, club large, of three or more joints; fairly close together at their insertion. Mentum longer than wide. Maxillary palpi rather small; first joint scarcely visible, second long, thin at base, suddenly clavate near apex, third short, sub-globular, fourth slightly shorter than second, subfusiform, lightly truncate at apex, where there is a minute appendage. Prothorax with carinae on disc and flanges on the sides. Elytra with strong sutural and discal striae. Abdomen of 6 segments, lateral margin strong, first ventral hidden under the metasternum, second segment longer than the following ones. Prosternum very short. Mesosternum with a slightly raised intercoxal process. Metasternum large. Anterior coxae conical, prominent, approximate; intermediate not prominent, lightly separated; posterior somewhat triangular, distant. Trochanters short. Femora and tibiae com- pressed and angular; femora grooved for reception of tibiae, tibiae grooved for tarsi. Tarsi with minute basal joint, 2 and 3 subequal, a single robust claw. It is with some doubts that I refer this genus to the Brachyglutini, but if that is not its right position it would require a new tribe, as it certainly cannot be referred to any other tribe as defined by M. Raffray. Genotype, M. myrmecophila. MALLEECOLA MYRMECOPHILA, 0D. Sp. 6. Reddish-castaneous; antennal joints 8-9 infuscated. Clothed with fine sub- squamose pubescence, more noticeable on head and prothorax, which are sub- opaque and have fine reticulate punctures, than on elytra and abdomen, which are subnitid and have a very fine punctation. Head longer than wide (as 6:5 or including ocular processes 6: 8%), flat on vertex, the front of which is carinated and tri-lobed, the lateral margins carinated and quadri-lobed; from the central lobe of anterior margin a well-raised carina runs back about one-third towards base, then branches and diverges towards sides and then converges towards base (thus enclosing a square), a short carina to each eye; a fovea at base, carinated on its sides; posterior margin raised; in front of vertex concavely declivous with the anterior margin tri-lobed, central lobe narrow and slightly produced; under surface produced into a cuneiform process on each side cutting through the eyes. Antennae thick, reaching middle of prothorax; joint 1 thick, as long as next 3 combined, 2 same width, trans- verse, 3-7 narrower, transverse, equal, 8 wider, very thin, closely applied to 9, 9 wider, thin, 10 same width as 9 but longer, 11 largest, truncated. Prothorax (excluding flanges) longer than wide; tri-carinate, the lateral carinae becoming subobsolete at basal third; base bilobed; hind angles somewhat produced and rounded; an elongate median basal fovea; with wing-like flanges on the sides, having fairly acute points in front, widely rounded behind. Elytra with sutural striae foveate at base and distinct to apex, discal striae foveate and widely impressed at base, becoming obsolete near apex; shoulders raised, from apex of shoulder a fine carina extends to apical fourth of each elytron; lateral margins extended and carinate, hind margins sinuous, shortened at suture; epipleurae without impression. Metasternum widely and deeply impressed. Ventral surface of abdomen lightly flattened, with a small round node or swelling at apex of second segment. Anterior trochanters compressed and produced into an obtuse tooth. Femora wide and thin, tibiae with inner margin straight, outer 16 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, i, rounded from base to beyond middle, then obliquely cut away to apex, which is truncated. @. Similar to the dg, but the antennal club is not so large and the tenth and eleventh are more separated. The metasternum is not so widely nor deeply impressed, though still noticeably so. The abdomen is slightly more convex beneath and is without node on second segment. Length, 1:70-1:90 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Gypsum and Lake Hattah (C. Oke), in nests of Iridomyrmex rufoniger. This is, I consider, the most remarkable looking Pselaphid described from Australia, and it is exceedingly difficult to give a satisfactory description of it in a few words. The carinae of the head are very conspicuous, forming a square placed so that a corner points towards each eye, the four points being connected with the margins by short carinae. The fovea of the pronotum looks as though it had been impressed into the median carina, splitting it and having a thin, or narrow, piece of the carina on either side. The legs are quite different from any Pselaphid known to me, but are very much like some species of the Histerid genus Chlamydopsis. The club is four-jointed with the 8th, 9th and 10th so closely applied to ene another that under a hand lens they appear as one joint. Types in author’s collection. Pselaphini. PSELAPHUS ALLUVIUS, Nn. Sp. 9. Dark reddish-castaneous; elytra paler, palpi and tarsi pale testaceous. Nitid. Thickly clothed with long dark hair-like setae, tips of tibiae with yellowish pubescence; apex of mesosternum and base of abdomen, on under surface, with dense pearly squamose pubescence. Head with median sulcus narrow in front, widened and interrupted behind eyes, feebly indicated on vertex to near base; with two interocular tubercles, antennal tubercles very pronounced; with large rough uneven punctures. Antennae long, joint 1 nearly as long as next three combined, 2 wider than 3, 3-8 about same width, 9-10 each widened from base to apex, 10 wider than 9, 11 large, ovate-acuminate. Palpi nearly as long as antennae, fourth joint with short straight peduncle, club large, longer than peduncle, strongly rounded on outside, with a wide sulcus on apical third of club. Prothorax longer than wide, widest at apical third, much narrowed to apex; base with a straight impression, without interruptions; punctures as on head. Elytra with four basal foveae; sutural and discal striae distinct to apex, with a short stria between them on each elytron; without punctures. Abdomen with first visible segment longer than the others combined; very strongly margined; under surface convex. All the femora rather strongly inflated. Metasternum sulcate anteriorly, then abruptly declivous and largely excavated. Length, 2°50 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Bendigo (C. Oke), clinging to under surface of a stone on the old alluvial diggings. A large robust species at once distinguished from previously described Australian species by the large punctures on head and thorax. Type in author’s collection. PSELAPHUS ELECTILIS, N. Sp. 3S. Bright reddish-castaneous. Nitid. Clothed with moderately long dark setae, apex of elytra distinctly fringed; apex of pro- and mesothorax and base of abdomen, on both surfaces, with dense pearly squamose pubescence. BY C. OKE. 17 Head with median channel wide and deep, continuous from apex to base, but interrupted between eyes by two minute black tubercles; between these and eyes are two large rounded tubercles; the antennary tubercles strongly raised. Antennae long, all the joints longer than wide, 9-10 a little stouter than preceding joints, their combined length longer than 11, which is ovate. Palpi as long as antennae; fourth joint curved, its club rather small, barely one-third of the length of joint, suleate with a short seta at apex. Prothorax longer than wide, with the sides gently rounded; base with a narrow transverse groove, in front of which is a vague impression; sides with a rounded fovea connected with a triangular impression, these almost isolated. Elytra with four small round basal foveae; shoulders obliquely ridged; with sutural striae very distinct to apex, discal striae curved, geminate to near apical declivity, where inner one ends, outer almost reaching margin. Abdomen with second segment as long as the following segments combined; on its under surface with an elongate-oval depres- sion, apex sulcate. Metasternum widely and deeply impressed from base to apex, excavate posteriorly. %. Differs from the ¢ by the metasternum not being sulcate at apex and only lightly excavate posteriorly and second segment without depression. Length, 2:25 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Pakenham and Belgrave (C. Oke), in moss. A very fine species, in appearance nearer to pulchellus than any other known to me, but the clothing is shorter and not so dark and the elytral striae are geminate. Nearer to the description of pilosus than any other Australian species, but the sulcus on head continued to base and not narrow, the shoulders are also marked. The inflated “button” on under surface of head is unusually large. - Types in author’s collection. PSELAPHUS SULCIVENTRIS, N. Sp. 6. Pale castaneous; palpi, legs and elytra somewhat flavous. Sparingly clothed with pale, hooked or bent, pubescence; apex of elytra fringed; apex of mesosternum and base of abdomen with dense pearly squamose pubescence. Head much attenuate in front, median channel rather narrow, abruptly ending between eyes; with fairly conspicuous, but obtuse, interocular tubercles; behind each tubercle, near eye, are five large punctures, elsewhere smooth. Antennae of moderate length, all the joints longer than wide, eleventh ovate, the last three forming a light club. Palpi with the fourth joint elongate, arcuate, with club about one-third total length. Prothorax longer than wide, base with an uninterrupted impression, sides with an oblique impression from end of transverse impression to base. Elytra with four basal impressions, sutural striae distinct to apex, discal striae finely geminate to apical declivity. Abdomen with first segment longer than the following segments combined; ventral surface with a fairly narrow sulcate impression from base to apex. Metasternum narrowly flattened on apical three-fourths, then excavate posteriorly. Posterior tibiae dilated to near apex, then rounded off. Length, 1-50 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Gypsum (C. Oke), near nest of Huponera lutea. A small pale species, in some respects close to geminatus, but head and base of pronotum not reticulate. It is also near to tuberculifrons, but antennae are different and dorsal striae geminate. From some directions there appears to be a minute tubercle on the vertex of the head, but from the sides this is not visible. Types in author’s collection. B 18 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, i, PSELAPHUS SQUAMULOSUS, Nn. SD. d. Pale castaneous; legs and palpi paler. Clothed with short pubescence, having the appearance of small scales in parts, rather sparse on elytra where it is arranged in four rows; front of prosternum, sides of mesosternum and base of abdomen with pearly-white squamose pubescence. Head with median channel rather wide and deep, ending a little behind eyes, but interrupted between eyes; in front of eyes, two basal joints of antennae and extreme base finely reticulate. Palpi long; fourth joint arcuate, with its club about one-third of total length, its apex lightly produced on inner side, on the outer side obliquely cut away and sulcate, the sulcus with fine pubescence. Antennae with joint 1 large, 2 much smaller, 3-8 cylindrical, of same width, 9-10 a little stouter, 11 a little wider than 10, as long as two preceding combined. Prothorax subhexagonal, widest behind middle, the base with a wide transverse impression, which is finely reticulate and without impressions; the sides with an elongate impression, narrow at base and ending in a round foveate expansion near middle, carinate at its outer edge and around the expansion. Elytra with sides rounded from base to apex, base with four foveae; sutural striae distinct to apex, discal very distinct to apical declivity, strongly curved inwards. Abdomen with first segment large; ventral surface with an elongate impression on the first (visible) segment. Metasternum rather widely excavated posteriorly. Legs long. %. Differs in having the abdomen convex underneath and without impression, the metasternum not so excavated and the antennae a little thinner with its apical joint smaller. Length, 1:80 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Fern Tree Gully, Emerald (C. Oke). The clothing is of a reddish-yellow and on the abdomen is adpressed and appears to be in the form of small scales. Types in author’s collection. Ctenistini. NARCODES SQUAMOSUS, 0. Sp. 6. Dark piceous, in parts almost black: antennae (club excepted) and legs diluted with red; palpi pale castaneous. Upper surface covered with pale yellowish scales, under surface and appendages clothed with pale stiff pubescence. Punctures large and sparse, much obscured by the clothing. Head with antennal tubercles distinctly raised and separated on the sides from the head by a notch; behind antennae strongly impressed, and with two large round interocular foveae; hind angles rather strongly produced and a point on each eye. Antennae fairly long, joint 1 stout and long, 2 shorter but stouter than 3, 3-8 diminishing in length, 9-10 large, increasing, 11 truncate- ovate. Prothorax with anterior angles strongly produced downwards into a sharp point, just behind which is a smaller projection; a large medio-basal impression and a larger impression on the sides. Elytra transverse, sutural and discal striae deeply impressed and distinct to near apex, shoulders obliquely raised. Abdomen much longer than elytra, strongly margined; under surface sulcate from base to apex, the latter foveately impressed. Metasternum widely and deeply excavate; sides of excavation carinate and ending in a blunt tubercle overhanging the hind coxae. Legs long; anterior trochanters produced into a short truncated process; all the femora inflated, the anterior with a very small tooth near base: all the tibiae strongly curved and obtusely spurred at apex; tarsi short. BY C. OKE. 19 2. Similar, but club small with the 11th joint almost globular; the meta- sternum not so excavate, and under surface of abdomen convex. Length, 2:10 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Warburton (C. Oke). The clothing of the upper surface consists entirely of fairly large scales. These are of a pale yellowish colour, but owing to the inequalities of the surface the light strikes them at different angles and gives the insect a mottled appear- ance. The prothorax appears to have a feeble ridge down the disc from some directions, while from others there appears to be a V-like impression. On each eye there appears to be a small conical projection composed of a few scales. The shape of the head, prothorax and sternum will distinguish this species from the previously described ones. Types in author’s collection. Tyrini. TYROMORPHUS TERMITOPHILUS, N. Sp. 6. Reddish-castaneous; tibiae and tarsi darker, the extreme base of head, pronotum and antennal joints infuscated. Clothed with rather long reddish pubescence. Head nearly as wide as prothorax, much narrowed in front; with an impressed line from base to front, and two foveae close together in centre of vertex, connected together across central line; large rough punctures. Antennae reaching middle coxae, joint 1 large, 2-10 oblong, of equal width, 11 a little wider, nearly as long as three preceding combined. Palpi with third joint sub-triangular, fourth very large. Prothorax quadrate, convex, rounded on the sides, a small medio-basal fovea, punctures not quite so conspicuous as on head. HElytra trans- verse, narrowed to base; sutural striae foveate near base, discal striae foveate and widely impressed at base, becoming obsolete near middle; shoulders raised; punctures as on head. Abdomen with punctures as on pronotum; under surface deeply impressed from base to near apex. Metasternum widely impressed. Legs long and unarmed. %. Differs from the ¢ in having the under surface of abdomen non-sulcate and the metasternum with a smaller impression. Length 2:75 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Violet Town (C. Oke), in nest of Coptotermes acinaciformis Frogg. Types in author’s collection. TYROMORPHUS QUADRIDENTATIS Lea. Several females of this species are before me, one of which Mr. Lea has kindly identified for me, and these show that the species is variable in its colour. The darkest specimen has its head, pronotum and abdomen almost black, from some directions it is quite black, from others there are reddish lights, the under surface is infuscated, the elytra ruby-red with the suture and apex blackish, the two basal and apical joints of antennae reddish, joints 3-7 infuscated, 9-10 black. The palest is bright reddish-castaneous, suture, abdomen and under surface darker, 11th joint pale, palpi flavous. The paler specimens may be immature or perhaps some individuals do not attain the darker colours. This variation in the colour leaves the presence or absence of the medio-basal fovea on the pronotum as the only difference between quadridentatis and spinosus. It may seem strange, but the fovea, though of exactly the same size, does not show up so distinctly on the darker examples. I doubt whether quadridentatis is distinct from spinosus. As the male has not been described I give its sexual characters. 20 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, 1, 6. Metasternum widely and deeply impressed. Under surface of abdomen with a wide deep excavation from base to apex, the apex itself produced and curved under. Legs robust; anterior trochanters armed near base, intermediate produced into a round tooth at apex; the anterior femora strongly inflated, constricted near apex, a sharp tooth at base, intermediate very strongly inflated, upper edge widely rounded, lower lightly rounded, with a golden fascicle in centre, a small round protuberance at apical third crowned with a long thin testaceous fascicle; posterior lightly inflated and constricted near apex; anterior tibiae strongly curved, intermediate tibiae rather thick with a compressed spur-like fascicle a little nearer apex than base, from spur to near apex obliquely narrowed, the apex produced inwardly into a cuneiform spur, with numerous bristles near apex, hind tibiae widened to apex, near where it is notched and with a compressed fascicle of hairs. Victorian localities: Evelyn, Emerald and Warburton (C. Oke), first record from the mainland. Allotype ¢ in author’s collection. TyYROMORPHUS SPECIOSUS King. Numerous specimens of this species have been taken by Mr. J. HE. Dixon and myself in the Dandenong Ranges, most of them under stones and logs where there have been nests of Amblypone australis; whether there has been any actual association between the ants and beetles has not been observed, but it is rather doubtful, because several have been taken where there were no ants of any kind. Mr. Lea has given (These Procrreprnes, 1910) a full description of the ¢ and a very fine figure of same, but the ? has not been described. 9%. Differs from the g in having head slightly smaller, with the impressions less distinct; the dorsal surface of abdomen without the raised process and non- fasciculate, and the under surface non-sulcate; the metasternum unarmed. Anterior trochanters acutely dentate. Anterior and intermediate femora armed, posterior not armed. In both sexes, figured but not mentioned by Lea, there is an acute tooth at base of anterior femora, and from this there is a short carina ending in a small oblique tubercle. Hab.—N.S. Wales: Otford (A. M. Lea); Victoria: Fern Tree Gully (J. E. Dixon and C. Oke), Upwey (Dixon), Belgrave and Emerald (Oke). Allotype 2 in author’s collection. TYROMORPHUS TIBIALIS Wilson. There are fourteen specimens of this species before me and these show some slight variation in the colour of the antennae. One pair, 4, 9, taken together, have joints 1-8 pale reddish-yellow, 9-10 black, or almost so, 11 dull ruby-red, but most specimens have four or five joints blackish, while one specimen has all the joints 2-11 black, or almost black. In all the specimens before me the suture, base of elytra, the shoulders and apical angle of elytra are either infuscated or black. The 2 has not been described. %. Similar to the ¢ and has the anterior trochanters and femora armed as in that sex, but differs in the intermediate trochanters and tibiae not being armed; the metasternum not so deeply impressed and the ventral surface of abdomen convex. BY C. OKE. Pall Hab.—Victoria: Warburton (F. E. Wilson and C. Oke), Evelyn in tussocks, Pakenham in moss, Fern Tree Gully in moss and in nest of Amblypone australis (Oke), Drysdale in nest of Chalcoponera metallica (Rev. P. C. Nye). Allotype 2 in author’s collection. PALIMBOLUS RUGOSUS, 0. SD. cd. Castaneous; disc of elytra and appendages reddish. Thickly clothed with long black hooked setae. Head rather small, narrowed in front, with the antennary tubercles strongly raised; with large, rugose, confluent punctures. Antennae with basal joint longer than next four joints combined, joint 2 much narrower than 1, 3 smaller, 5 a little longer than 4, 6 quadrate, 7-8 subequal, transverse, 9-10 larger, increasing, trans- verse, 11 ovate truncate, lightly bent. Prothorax subhexagonal, widest a little in advance of middle; with a large medio-basal fovea and the sides obliquely impressed; punctures as on head. HElytra transverse, sutural striae distinct, discal widely impressed at base, becoming obsolete near middle, shoulders raised and oblique; with a fine scattered punctation. Abdomen with punctures as on elytra; under surface flattened, with a triangular impression on apical segment. Mesosternum sulcate with sides of sulcus carinated. Metasternum convex, lightly impressed down centre, a little excavate posteriorly. Intermediate trochanters with a very small sharp tooth, posterior with a short blunt tooth. All the femora lightly inflated, the intermediate more noticeably so than the others. Inner claw of anterior tarsi trifid. Tibiae straight and simple. ©. Similar to the dg, but differs in having trochanters not armed, antennae a little thinner, abdomen convex and inner claw of anterior tarsi simple. Length, 3-3-20 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Carrum and Frankston (C. Oke). A very fine species allied to P. dimidiatus Raff which has been described as having the basal joint of antennae long and the head and prothorax with rugose confluent punctures, but the ¢ of that species has “a strong impression from middle coxae to apex of abdomen” and the posterior tibiae armed. Type in author’s collection. PALIMBOLUS POSTCOXALIS, N. Sp. 6. Dark reddish-castaneous; appendages somewhat lighter, head and pro- thorax almost black. Clothed with rather dense dark pubescence. Head with two round interocular foveae and the front deeply impressed; with a few scattered punctures, becoming closer on antennary ridges. Antennae stout; joint 1 long, longer than 2-3 combined, 2 small, 3, 4, 5 increasing in width, 3-4 subequal in length, 5 longer, 6-7 shorter than 5, 8 short, transverse, 9-10 increasing, transverse, 11 large, longer than 9-10 combined, an oblique impres- sion on under surface at base. Prothorax slightly longer than wide, widest in front of middle; with a deep medio-basal impression, the sides with a longitudinal impression, foveate before middle; with a few fine scattered punctures. Elytra slightly wider at apex than length, narrowed to base, with four basal foveae; punctures rather coarse and fairly close. Abdomen strongly margined; under surface lightly flattened, excavate near apex. Metasternum widely excavate posteriorly. Intermediate trochanters with a long curved process, truncate at apex. Posterior coxae produced into a sharp tooth over the trochanters, which are armed with a strong tooth. All the femora lightly inflated, the posterior notched 22 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, i, and with a blunt tooth near base. Hind tibiae with a short, obliquely truncated, spur at apical fourth and a minute spur at apex. Front inner claws trifid. 2. Differs from the male in having the under surface of abdomen convex, legs unarmed, 11th joint without impression, and front inner claws simple. Length, 3 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Warburton (C. Oke). In appearance much like victoriae King, but the armature of the hind coxae and femora, and the absence of tubercles from abdomen will distinguish it from that species. The fifth joint of the antennae when viewed from above is wider than its neighbours, but is scarcely so, if at all, when seen from the side. On the under side the 10th is produced to fit into the impression on the 11th. Type in author’s collection. NEOPALIMBOLUS, nN. gen. Body oblong. Head attenuate in front. Eyes median. Antennae thick, with three-jointed club, the bases distant and their tubercles prominent. Palpi long: first joint moderate, second long, very thin at base, suddenly clavate at apical third; third joint about half the length of second, pedunculate at base, clavate from basal third; fourth subfusiform with a short peduncle. Prothorax cordiform, with impressions. Elytra short, with striae. Abdomen, long, with wide margin. Intermediate coxae contiguous with their trochanters, long. Posterior coxae distant. Tarsi with first joint small, second long and continued as two long filaments below the plane of the third, which is the longest joint and carries two well-developed claws, the inner claw of the anterior tarsi trifid in ¢, simple in 9. This genus resembles Palimbolus in facies, but differs from that genus by the maxillary palpi and the tarsi. The latter are quite unlike those of any species known to me in nature, but are somewhat like the tarsus of Caccoplectus celatus Sharp, figured by Raffray (Genera Insectorum, Plate 9, Fig. 10). Genotype, N. goudiei. NEOPALIMBOLUS GOUDIEI, 0. Sp. g. Dark reddish-castaneous; elytra paler, palpi flavous. Clothed with long pubescence, appearing pale in some lights, almost black in others. Head slightly longer than wide, rather deeply impressed between antennal tubercles; with three interocular foveae, one near each eye and one further back on vertex; a few coarse punctures on antennal tubercles, elsewhere smooth. Antennae reaching middle coxae; joint 1 stout, cylindrical, longer than next two combined, 2-6 slightly decreasing, 7 smaller, 8 smallest, 9-10 transverse, 10 larger than 9, 11 ovate, not quite length of two preceding combined. Prothorax about as wide as long, widest before middle, somewhat angular and flattened on sides; with a large oval medio-basal impression and three impressions on each side, one near base, one premedian and one at apex; almost impunctate. Elytra transverse, angles rounded away and dilated to apex; sutural stria distinct, with an impression near base, discal impression oblique, with a basal fovea; with a moderate scattered punctation. Abdomen slightly wider than elytra; punctures much as on elytra; under surface lightly flattened. Metasternum depressed. Legs unarmed. ©. Similar to male, but abdomen convex and sternum not so impressed. Length, 2:25 mm. BY C. OKE. 23 Hab.—Victoria: Sea Lake (J. C. Goudie), Gypsum (C. Oke, November). I have much pleasure in naming this interesting species after Mr. J. C. Goudie, who was the first to collect it. © GeRALLUS (TyRUS) HOWwITTI King (= 2 nec ¢ Tyromorphus howittii King (Lea) = 6 Gerallus decipiens Lea = ¢ Schaufussia mona Wilson). There can be no mistake about the above synonymy as I have several specimens of both sexes before me and have taken a pair in cop. Mr. Lea, in redescribing King’s type, mistook that specimen for the ¢ on account of the armature of the trochanters, but they, and the femora, are the same in both sexes. By the kind permission of Mr. Kershaw, I have examined King’s type in the Howitt collection, now in the National Museum, and find it is a 9, the under surface of abdomen being gently convex. The great difference in the head of the ¢ from the 9, while not previously noted in Gerallus, is found in the allied genus Rytus and Mr. Lea has drawn attention, in both of his descriptions, to the fact that this species greatly resembles Rytus subulatus. Hab.—Victoria (Howitt, and Macleay Museum), Warrandyte (Wilson), Hltham, Ringwood and Bayswater (Oke). CLAVERGERIN AE. CLAVERGEROPSIS AUSTRALIAE Lea. Only the 9 of this species has been described by Lea; having taken the Jd, I complete the description by adding its sexual characters. ¢. Mesosternum with diverging carinae on sides, the centre with a sharp carina. Metasternum raised, subcarinate, abruptly declivous behind. Abdomen lightly flattened and with vague impressions. Anterior femora flattened beneath, intermediate lightly flattened beneath, arcuate on outer edge, a strong spur near base on inside. Intermediate tibiae with a small tooth on inside near apex. Hab—N. S. Wales (after Lea); Victoria: Pakenham (C. Oke). Allotype ¢ in author’s collection. ARTICERUS LEAT, D. SD. 6. Reddish-castaneous. Moderately clothed with short pale depressed pubescence, a few short setae at apex of elytra, between middle coxae and on base of metasternum with golden pubescence. Head longer than wide, lightly dilated behind eyes; closely punctate. Antennae longer than head, base narrow, then strongly dilated to beyond middle, where it is fairly wide and flattened, and then feebly diminishing to apex, apex almost circular in cross-section; with a shallow impression in middle. Prothorax feebly transverse, widest at apical third, suddenly narrowed to apex, lightly narrowed to base; with a large round impression near base; punctures as on head. Abdomen with a deep transverse depression not encroaching on middle of convex portion, but continued on each side as an oblique impression, with a small fascicle on each side; under surface obliquely strigose at base; constricted and flattened along middle; apex with a small transverse process, crowned with a golden fascicle. Prosternum unarmed; with large punctures, especially on sides. Metasternum rather strongly excavated posteriorly, with two small tubercles placed transversely near apex of excavation. The femora inflated; the middle, which has an acute (somewhat hooked) tooth at basal third, more strongly than the others. Middle tibiae strongly inflated and produced into an acute tooth at apex on lower 24 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, i, surface; on upper surface strongly notched and cut away at apical third, leaving an acute tooth. Length, 14 mm. 9. Differs in having the metasternum declivous, but not excavate, and unarmed; the abdomen convex and unarmed; legs less inflated and unarmed. Hab.—Victoria: Lake Hattah (C. Oke), in nests of Iridomyrmez. A small, narrow, almost parallel-sided species with antennae much as in mastersi Lea, but abdomen very different. In Lea’s table of the genus, it would be associated with aurifluus Schauf. by “metasternum transversely armed”, but in the present Species the tubercles are very small and continue the plane of the sternum, while in aurifiwus they are at right angles. The tubercles are so small that they might easily escape notice, and taking the metasternum as unarmed, it would be associated with irregularis Lea, from which species it differs, inter alia, by the antennae and middle tibiae. Type in author’s collection. ARTICERUS FIMBRIATUS, DI. Sp. 6. Reddish-castaneous. Conspicuously clothed subsquamose pubescence, except in abdominal excavation, which is highly polished; intermingled with the pubescence are numerous setae, which form a rather conspicuous fringe around pronotum and at apex of elytra; on the abdomen are some longer hairs, particularly in excavation and a row across pygidium. Head long, almost cylindrical, very little wider behind eyes than before, bluntly pointed; with fine sparse punctures. Antennae moderately long, thin at base, then suddenly widened and flattened, circular at apex, lightly concave on inside edge. Prothorax transverse, angles widely rounded; with a large elongate foveate impression in front of base; punctures closer than on head. Hlytra wider than prothorax at base, dilated to apex; subsutural striae fairly distinct; punctures much as on thorax. Abdomen with a deep transverse excavation, feebly encroaching on middle of convex portion; with conspicuous fascicles on the sides; under surface flattened and constricted across middle. Metasternum feebly raised in centre, scarcely tuberculate, thence sloping away, but not excavated. Middle trochanters armed with an acute tooth at apex. The femora lightly inflated. Anterior tibiae with a truncated process at apical third, middle tibiae with a curved sharp tooth at apical fourth. Length, 1:60 mm. Hab.—N.S. Wales: Glen Innes (W. du Boulay), in nest of Iridomyrmex. The most conspicuously clothed species known to me, the long hair-like setae on the abdomen being very noticeable. In general appearance somewhat like aurifluus Schauf., but the antennae are longer and narrower, and there are differences in the clothing, sternum and legs. Mr. du Boulay took several specimens which were running about freely and mating in the nests, and he has kindly given me two males. Types in author’s collection. ARTICERUS ANGUSTICOLLIS Westwood. 6. Obscure castaneous. Well clothed with short pale pubescence, becoming thicker and longer on elytra towards apex; the lateral ridges of abdomen with a distinct golden fascicle and sides with a few longer hairs. Antennae, head, both surfaces, prothorax, elytra and mesosternum with distinct reticulate punctures; middle of metasternum and under surface of abdomen indistinctly punctured. BY C. OKE. 25 Head elongate, somewhat triangular in front, feebly widened behind eyes. A few long setae protruding from mouth. Antennae thin at base, then compressed and rather suddenly widened, straight on inside, lightly rounded on outside, truncate at apex, the apex itself oval. Prothorax subquadrate with ar elongate impression on disc. Elytra quadrate, suture raised, sutural stria distinct. Abdomen with a transverse excavation not encroaching on middle of convex portion; under surface shortened down centre and flattened. Metasternum convex, declivous posteriorly. Anterior trochanters dentate. All the femora inflated, the intermediate more strongly than the others and with a rounded tooth at base covered with a golden fascicle. All the tibiae curved inwardly, rounded on outside; the anterior widened to apex, notched on inside and feebly spurred; intermediate widened to near apex, which is strongly spurred; posterior widened to near apex and more strongly compressed than the others. ©. With under surface of abdomen convex and the legs unarmed. Westwood’s type was undoubtedly a 9 of this species; he described the thorax as oblong, but this is hardly correct, though numerous specimens before me are so in appearance, but not by measurement. The elongate impression on the pro- thorax causes that segment to appear longer and narrower than it really is. The o@ antennae are more rounded on the outer edge than the female, which are not so wide as Westwood’s figure makes them appear to be. Hab.—Victoria: Melbourne (after Westwood), Caulfield, Preston and Bendigo (C. Oke), in nests of a small black Jridomyrmez. Buprestidae. STIGMODERA MONTIGENA, N. SD. Subeylindric; violet-blue, antennae, scutellum and suture greenish-blue, elytra with the following markings yellow: two round postbasal and subhumeral maculae, an irregular premedial and an arcuate postmedial fascia, fasciae not reaching suture. Head channelled, sparsely punctate in front, closely behind. Prothorax with sides strongly rounded, widest behind middle, apex truncate, base bisinuate, anterior angles obtuse, posterior acutely produced; disc finely and closely punctate; medial line indicated throughout, medio-basal fovea distinct. Scutellum lightly concave, with a few punctures. Elytra as wide as prothorax at base, sides nearly straight, apices with an oblique excision, finely bispinose; striate-punctate, intervals flat (except near apex), finely punctate and transversely wrinkled. Under surface finely punctate and almost glabrous. Dimensions, 10-5 x 3-5 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Warburton Ranges (C. Oke). Of the size and shape of S. wilsoni, but the punctation of the pronotum is finer and closer, also the sculpture of the elytra is different and this character will separate it from other allied species. Type (unique) in author’s collection. STIGMODERA FOSSORIA Carter. Several specimens of this species have been taken at Belgrave and Fern Tree Gully by Dr. F. M. Burnet and myself, and these show the markings, as described by Mr. Carter, to be constant, except that the extreme base of elytra is metallic. ae The green parts have a tendency to become blue or purple and in parts.“ \ (particularly under surface) to give off brilliant metallic reflections. 26 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, i, Ptinidae. DIPLOCOTES MINUTA, 0. SP. Reddish-castaneous; head and sides of prothorax infuscated. Clothed with microscopic pale pubescence. Head behind antennae strongly transverse, indistinctly “bisinuate, sides hollowed out; finely reticulated. Antennae fairly long, joint 1 large, bent, 2 much smaller, thin at base, wider at apex, 3 oval, 4-9 moniliform, 10 largest, 11 much smaller, rounded at apex. Prothorax longer than wide, widest at apical third, where sides are strongly rounded; a transverse arcuate impression at basal third, somewhat dilated, but scarcely foveate, in middle; sides with an obtuse tubercle directed cephalad; longitudinally strigose. Elytra ovate, truncate at base; with large seriate punctures. Legs fairly long, femora lightly inflated, tibiae thin at base, feebly dilated to near apex. Length, 1:10 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Bendigo, in nest of Chalcoponera. The smallest species of the subfamily as yet described from Australia. In appearance it is very like howittanus, but much smaller and the transverse impression on pronotum is arcuately dilated in middle, but not deeply foveate as in foveicollis. The unique specimen was taken under a large stone which covered an unusually large colony of the Chalcoponera. The beetle was first seen amongst a number of the ants with whom it was apparently on the best of terms. Type in author’s collection. DIPLOCOTES HOWITTANUS Westw. A specimen from the Grampians, Victoria (C. Oke), shows a variety of this species in being larger and the antennae thicker than usual. It was taken under bark in company with some ants, but unfortunately no specimens of the latter were kept for determination. POLYPLOCOTES APICALIS, D. Sp. Pale reddish-castaneous; antennae with intermediate joints darker. Rather thickly clothed with long yellowish pubescence, disc of meso- and metathorax and base of abdomen with squamose pubescence. Head with declivous front carinate on either side and with a few large punctures; behind antennae transverse, bisinuate; punctures as on front. Antennae with joint 1 long and stout, 2 much narrower, 3 longer than 2, 4-7 transverse, 8 larger, 9 largest, 8-9 somewhat compressed laterally. Prothorax longer than wide, anterior angles widely rounded; near base with a wide transverse impression which is expanded in centre; with setiferous papulae and confluent punctures. Elytra ovate, truncate at base, with moderate-sized seriate punctures. Metasternum lightly impressed. Basal segments of abdomen apparently fused together and with a few scattered punctures. Legs rather long. Length, 13-2 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Hattah, in nests of a small black species of Iridomyrmex (C. Oke). A very distinct species, having the ninth, or apical, joint larger than the subapical, a character which will separate it from all previously described species of the subfamily. The papulae on the thorax are small but distinct, and mostly blackish, and each one bears a fairly long yellowish seta. Type in author’s collection. BY C. OKE. 27 POLYPLOCOTES SIMILIS, nN. Sp. Light castaneous; head and antennal joints 1-7 darker. Clothed with moderately long yellowish pubescence. Head behind antennae strongly transverse and strongly bisinuate; eyes projecting; rugose-punctate. Antennae long, joints 1-7 rugosely punctate, joint 1 long, 2 thin at base, wider at apex, 3 a little thinner, 3-7 decreasing in length, increasing in width, 7 transverse, 8 very large, nearly as long as three preceding combined, 9 less than half length of 8, narrowed to and rounded at apex. Pro- thorax longer than wide, with a wide transverse impression near base; longitudin- ally strigose. Elytra oval, lightly truncate at base, with large close seriate punctures. Legs fairly long. Length, 1? mm. Hab.—Victoria: Inglewood, in nest of Crematogaster laeviceps (C. Oke). This species closely resembles Diplocotes howittanus Westw. and Decemplocotes strigicollis Lea in general appearance, but the former has eleven-jointed antennae and the latter ten-jointed, while the present species has only nine. My unique specimen was taken under a small piece of wood, where the ants had their nest, in the dry Mallee scrubs. Type in author’s collection. POLYPLOCOTES CARINATICEPS Lea. This species has only been recorded from Western Australia, but in November, 1924, I took two specimens from a nest of Crematogaster laeviceps at Hattah, N.W. Victoria. BITREPHES, nN. gen. Body short, oval. Head deflexed. Antennae two-jointed. Prothorax with a large impression. Elytra seriate-punctate. Sternum short. Anterior coxae lightly separated, intermediate well separated, posterior distant. femora grooved for reception of tibiae. Tibiae sulcate. This new genus makes an interesting addition to a remarkable group of beetles—the myrmecophilous Ptinidae. The antennae are nearer to EHctrephes formicarum than to any other described species, but are only two-jointed, not three, and the apical joint is larger. The prothorax is almost exactly as in EH. kingi, but that species has very different antennae. The front of the head seems to be raised into a conspicuous ridge, but this is due to the hollowing of the sides. The margin of the clypeus is semicircular, with the labrum long and protruding over the base of mandibles. Genotype, B. cuneiformis. BITREPHES CUNEIFORMIS, N. Sp. Reddish-castaneous; parts of head, basal joint of antennae and sides of prothorax infuscated. Clothed with minute pale pubescence and with thick golden pubescence between all the coxae and a round patch on abdomen. Head behind antennae bisinuate and strongly transverse, rugosely punctate; the sides in front of antennae obliquely hollowed, where it is strigose, elsewhere with a few granules. Antennae with first joint large, rugosely punctured, second larger, flattened, subcuneiform, rounded off on outside edge, with microscopic reticulate punctures. Prothorax transverse, on both sides, in front of middle, produced into a sharp cuneiform projection, behind which is an elongate impres- 28 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, i, sion; here the sides are compressed into a thin angular projecting plate; the base with a transverse impression; a large round foveate impression before base, from which striolae radiate. Elytra equal in length and width, base bisinuate; the striae lightly impressed and having large, round, setigerous punctures. Under surface of abdomen with large shallow punctures becoming _ more numerous towards apex. Femora lightly inflated, tibiae compressed, bent near base, the two posterior pairs feebly serrated on upper edge. Length, 1-20-1:-50 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Lake Hattah, in nests of Iridomyrmex rufoniger (C. Oke). Several specimens of this very interesting little inquiline were taken, some under cover in the nest itself, others in the beaten down “footpaths” or tracks between the nests. The beetles appear to be on very good terms with the ants and if a beetle is turned over on its back, several ants will come to its assistance and help it to turn over again. Beyond this I was not able to observe any intimacy between host and guest, but this was very well demon- strated by turning over one beetle several times with a piece of grass. Cerambycidae. ATESTA DIXONI, N. SD. 6. Dark piceous-brown, in parts diluted with red; antennae and legs dark reddish-brown; a sinuate premedial fascia and apex pale flavous. Subnitid. Thickly clothed with long greyish setae, joints 4-11 in addition with very short pale adpressed pubescence. : Head elongate, deeply channelled, antennal tubercles moderately prominent; with coarse rough punctures. Antennae with three joints beyond apex of elytra; second joint small, third very feebly armed, longer than first or fourth. Pro- thorax with sides trisinuate, medial swelling fairly acute; a transverse impres- sion near apex, an impression near base; an elongate smooth node in centre and four smaller ones arranged around it; punctures large and rough, not sharply defined. Elytra elongate, parallel-sided to near apex, then rounded off, apices simple; shoulders obliquely raised; with large round seriate punctures becoming finer behind. Under surface with moderate-sized scattered punctures. 9. Antennae not quite reaching apex of elytra. Length, 11-14 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Lake Hattah (J. E. Dixon and C. Oke), bred from Black Box sticks. In facies it is nearer to bifasciata than to any other described species, but differs in having much finer antennae, with the third joint almost imperceptibly armed, instead of strongly so, and apex simple instead of obliquely cut away. A. angasi has the apex oblique with a minute spine, and tatei has the apex emarginate and armed. I have much pleasure in naming this after my friend, Mr. J. E. Dixon, who has bred ‘it out on several occasions from sticks brought from Lake Hattah. Type in author’s collection, paratypes in coll. Dixon. ATESTA BESTI, N. Sp. ©. Black; base of thorax, tibiae and antennae diluted with red; a wide fascia and apex of elytra dark flavous. Nitid. Thickly clothed with long pale setae, with joints 4 faintly, 5-11 thickly clothed with short adpressed pubescence. Head narrowly but deeply channelled; antennal tubercles rather large, prominent; with large rough punctures. Antennae not quite reaching apex BY C. OKE. 29 of elytra; joint 2 very short, 3 longer than 1 or 4, very faintly armed. Prothorax with a strong transverse impression near apex, at base with a round impression; sides in front of middle notched, behind with a rounded projection; an elongate smooth node on disc, with four smaller ones arranged around it; punctures rather large and rough. Hlytra elongate, parallel-sided to near apex, the latter obliquely truncated; an impression on base near shoulders, which are slightly raised and smooth; punctures large and round, becoming much finer and less distinct mear apex. Under surface with a few scattered punctures. Length, 12 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Gypsum (C. Oke) in November, attracted to light. Apex of elytra being truncate will, inter alia, separate this species from dizoni, while the apex not being armed will distinguish it from tatei. The black markings on the elytra are: a round scutellar patch, narrowly continued across base to sides, epipleurae, a round spot on either elytron at basal third, and a sinuate fascia at apical third. Named after Mr. D. Best, a most enthusiastic and successful breeder of longicorn beetles. Type in author’s collection. > Chrysomelidae. MONOLEPTA JUCUNDA, DN. SD. Flavous and black. 6. Head with a strong curved interocular impression, lightly dilated forward in centre. Eyes rather small but prominent. Antennae moderately stout, just passing hind coxae; second and third joints equal, fourth longer, eleventh sharply pointed. Prothorax transverse, sides rounded, hind angles rounded off; with minute indistinct punctures. Elytra subelliptic; punctures rather small and close, but sharply defined. Epipleurae abruptly narrowed near hind coxae. Basal joint of hind tarsi nearly as long as the rest combined. Apex of abdomen with two narrow impressions on under surface. %. Similar to the ¢, but without impressions on the abdomen and the apex more convex beneath. Length, 3-3-50 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Fern Tree Gully, Emerald, Warburton (C. Oke), in grass. The head, antennal joints 6-10, a subtriangular blotch on sides of pronotum and one on disc (which is more or less distinct), scutellum, a fairly wide transverse mark on base (but not reaching sides) and suture (not quite reaching apex) towards apex, on sides, with a horseshoe-shaped mark, black; the 1st-4th and 11th (extreme tip infuscated) joints flavous, the others black or almost so; the sternum and ventral segments of abdomen infuscated in some places. A pretty little species allied to aberrans Lea, but with different markings, and the second and third joints of antennae of equal length. Most of the specimens have an indistinct or vague blotch on middle of pronotum, but on one Q it is quite distinct and is almost a medial vitta. Types in author’s collection. MoNOLEPTA THEMEDICOLA, 1. SD. Flavous; a spot at base of head, a medio-apical spot and sides of pronotum, a spot on base (one-third from scutellum towards sides), shoulders and inner edge of epipleurae, 2 premedian and 3 post-median spots of elytra, and extreme 30 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, i, base of hind tarsi, black; antennal joints 4-11 with an infuscated mark near their apices. Head with a narrow but fairly deep procurved interocular impression, with a small impression in front, a few punctures behind. Eyes large and prominent. Antennae with the second joint short, third a little longer, the others much longer. Prothorax nearly twice as wide as long, sides almost straight, base rounded, apex straight; transverse impression feebly indicated towards sides; punctures fine and close but sharply defined. Hlytra long, subparallel-sided to near apex; punctures a little stronger than on pronotum; epipleurae narrowed before hind coxae. Basal joint of hind tarsi a little more than once and one-half the length of the rest combined. Hab.—Victoria: Evelyn, Fern Tree Gully (C. Oke), on Themeda triandra Forst. Close to description of bivitticollis Lea, but differs in the shape and punctures, while the markings on the elytra are certainly different. Only two vittae on prothorax, with its sides not rounded, will separate it from trivitticollis Lea. The elytral markings are not as noted for figurata Weise, and megalops Lea, also the vittae on prothorax and the close punctures on elytra separate it from the latter. The hind angles of the prothorax are produced into a minute tooth, but this is not visible from some angles. Type in author’s collection. THE LORANTHACEAE OF AUSTRALIA. Parr vii. By W. F. Buakety, Assistant Botanist, National Herbarium, Sydney. (Plates i-ix.) [Read 28th March, 1928.] II. 1. VIscoIDEAE-KORTHALSELLINEAE. Engler, Engl. et Prantl., Pflzfam., Nachtr., 1897, 137; Bifariées Van Tiegh., Bull. Soc. bot. France, xliii, 1896, 162." . Perianth single. Flowers unisexual. Placenta central; embryo-sac oblong or U-shaped. Anthers two-celled, usually dehiscent by a terminal orifice in the Australian species. 5. KORTHALSELLA Van Tiegh. Bull. Soc. bot. France, xliii, 1896, 88; Engler, Engl. et Prantl., Nachtr., 138. Flowers unisexual. Calyx absent or inconspicuous. Corolla regular. Male flowers trimerous, the petals persistent, valvate, triangular, concave and some- what gibbose. Anthers (3), forming a sessile globose mass in the centre of the perianth, two-celled, usually dehiscent by a single central pore. Female flowers trimerous, the petals persistent, regular, valvate, incurved in all the Australasian species. Ovary inferior; style very short, included; stigma thick, pulvinate. Fruit baccate, viscid, pear-shaped or ellipsoid, crowned by the petals. Seeds albuminous; embryo 1, rarely 2, terete or compressed; cotyledons membranous, unequal. lLeafless parasitic shrubs; branches opposite, nodose, the internodes angular, terete, or broadly compressed, nerveless or venulose. Leaves reduced to microscopic stipular scales. Inflorescence axillary, consisting of a simple floral band forming a cushion-like receptacle on the shoulders of the internodes. Flowers usually surrounded for nearly half their length by moniliform, crystalline, variously coloured cilia. The common Australian species, formerly known as Viscum articulatum Burm., is included under Pseudixus japonicus by Hayata (Ic. Pl. Form., v, 1915, 187). In the absence of the original description of Korthalsella Van Tiegh., and Bifaria Van Tiegh., I have decided to follow Engler and take up the name Korthalsella in preference to Pseudixus Hayata, as the disposition of the anthers is not quite clear to me. Apparently Hayata is also dubious as to their arrange- ment, for he says “Bifaria seems to have male flowers with stamens opposite to the perianth-lobes, as is the case with Korthalsella’’. Assuming that Van Tieghem had inaccurately described the anthers of Korthalsella or Bifaria, it would not be admissible on that account to set aside his genus and establish a new one. In addition to the Australian, Lord Howe, and Norfolk Island species, I have examined the anthers of K. salicornioides Van Tiegh., from New Zealand, and also Korthalsella (Viscum) pendulum A. A. Heller, and a specimen labelled 32 THE LORANTHACEAE OF AUSTRALIA, Vii, Viscum articulatum from Hawaii, all of which, to my mind, have the same staminal arrangement. The last-mentioned plant must not be confused with the Australian plant, as it is quite different, particularly in the complanate branches. I have not seen the male flowers of K. Lindleyi from New Zealand, but the female flowers and the fruits differ only in size from those of all the other species referred to. : I have given considerable attention to Korthalsella articulata which is very closely allied to Pseudixus japonicus Hayata in nearly all the essential characters, but it appears to differ somewhat widely in the internodes, and to some extent in the anthers. It must be borne in mind that the anthers are the deciding factor between Korthalsella and Pseudixus, and, owing to their minuteness, they are very difficult to define. Of the numerous male flowers examined in all stages of development, I was unable to find one with the anthers clearly separated along what appears tc be the sutural line; but numerous anthers showed a perfectly defined central pore or orifice, without the slightest sign of cleavage of the suture. On the other hand, when in a dry state, the connate anthers separate in whatever direction the needle is directed, more readily than along the sutural line. The same result was noted when the flowers were boiled. In fact, I can come to no other conclusion but that the majority of the anthers examined were dehiscent through a terminal orifice. The camera-lucida drawing, by Miss M. Flockton, depicts a male flower artificially opened, with two-celled anthers, without the broad receptacle shown by Hayata. It is obvious that the Japanese plant has the anthers more fully developed than the Australian plant. Sect. Brrarta Engler. Engl. et Prantl, Nachtr., 138.—Bifaria Van Tiegh., Bull. Soc. bot. France, xliii, 1896, 164. Floral bracts on one plane. Flowers surrounded by minute moniliform cilia. Internodes cylindrical or compressed. Australian Species. i. Internodes longer than broad, usually three-nerved, contracted at both ends. Flowers of the old branches usually encircling the internodes ... 1. K. articulata. ii. Internodes broader than long, 3- to 7-nerved, not contracted at the ends. Flowers on the shoulders of the internodes only ...................-6- 2. K. australis. Island Species. i. Internodes 20-25 ecm. long, with 3 scarcely prominent nerves ........ 3. K. Howensis. ii. Internodes more than 25 cm. long, with 3-7 prominent nerves .... 4. K. opuntioides. Lie. UNCErPNOG!ES! LSa USI LOM LHe ten Sues oges 2) ers eur atlee Saal ona Sictiei Len onc eel elrelnperoneuencuaes 25. AK. bigibba. The floral band of Viscum and Korthalsella. The floral band or floral cushion of Viscwm and Korthalsella is best described as a thin expansion of the upper margin of the internode which functions as a protection for the young shoots and flowers. It is considerably broader on the shoulders than in the middle, and usually forms a socket-like appendage over the shoulders of the internodes. In Viscum it is invariably a mere band, while in Korthalsella it expands into a cushion-like receptacle, closely packed with minute BY W. F. BLAKELY. co i) moniliform, white or pink cilia, resembling a little mop, or the head of a diminutive Composite. Both the floral band and the floral cushion have much in common; they are not only the torus of the flowers, but also the growing point, for many young shoots spring from either of them, after the flowers and fruits have fallen, and more than one (perhaps several) generation of flowers originates upon them as in other shrubby plants that produce flowers on the old nodes annually. _ 1. KoRTHALSELLA ARTICULATA (Benth.), n. comb. Plate i. B.FI., 1866, iii, 396; Mueller, Report Burdek. Exped., 1860, 12, as Viscum articulatum (non Burm., non Franch., non Tate); Van Tiegh., Bull. Soc. bot. Fr., xliii, 1896, 146, as Bifaria breviarticulata; Engl. et Prantl., Pflzfam., i, 1897, 138, as Kortalsella breviarticulata (Van Tiegh.); Bail., Fl. Q’land, v, 1384; Com. Cat. Q. Plants, 466, fig. 452. Mueller did not describe his species, but accepted Dr. J. Hooker’s decision that it was conspecific with V. articulatum Burm. (FI. Ind., 311). He also expressed the opinion that “it differed in no particular from V. moniliforme Blume, as illustrated in the Spiciligium Neilgherrense, t. 87.” Bentham’s description is the first on record and as it is somewhat imperfect I am obliged to describe the plant more fully:—Compact plants from 3 to 24 inches in diameter, somewhat erect when young, but soon forming dense con- glomerate pendulous masses; union fusiform, branches compressed, articulate, the old ones semi-terete, especially at their junction with the host; internodes thick, cuneate oblong, coriaceous, 2 to 4 ecm. long, 1 to 14 cm. broad, 1- to 3-nerved, with flexuose wrinkles between them, usually of a yellowish-brown colour; stipules small, persistent, acute, sometimes completely concealed by the floral band or cushion which is persistent on the upper portion of the internode; at first it is bandlike, but with the development of the branch, which may extend over a number of years, it forms a pulvinate projection on the shoulders of the internodes. Flowers few or numerous within the floral cushion, surrounded by moniliform, crystalline cilia, which often change from white to pink, or in some specimens a purple-brown colour, which no doubt, is due to climatic conditions. Sometimes the flowers are nearly all males, especially on the ends of the branches, but usually the percentage of females greatly exceeds that of males. Male flowers globose, stipitate or turbinate, about $ mm. in diameter, three- lobed, the lobes broadly and obtusely triangular to nearly orbicular, concave, somewhat gibbose on the back, persistent. Anthers connate, globose or depressed- globular, in the centre Oo} ai Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. PLATE VIII. Viscum Bancrofti, n. sp. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. IRIGARWe xe Araucaria Cunninghamii—smoothed surface of sections. PLATE XI. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. TORT Hr srosnee ities 0829.0 ¢ 2 Ht ec e 8 ons CBR e Transverse sections of (1) Arauwecaria Cunninghamii (x 40), (2) A. Bidwilli (x 40) and (3) Agathis robusta (x 170). " red, “ty PLATE XIt. N.S.W., 1928. LINN. Soc. Proc. Tecan ar mH ti) Oe hy “; ‘tat it ics DOU wi ot x bs o a rf 3 x3 He] ce 3 ES > Species of Corysanthes. dilatata. 4. C. C. prwinosa. unguiculata and C. 2 vo. diemenica. dilatata and C. undulata. fimbriata. 2. C. © iL, bicalcarata. C. 6. C. 5. PLATE XIII. sula. Penin x orl Hs ‘ 5 a P5 P33 APPLE SS ee ay # a LOM ag: N.S.W., 1928. Proc. Linn. Soc. J; Pi ye Cape Y , s from Plutoville ossil plant EK ae eouee rah - , + if ‘ if 2 s d \f oi o 1 h o a 3; NM ae : y ‘ a ~ i] . fe i : =. ee ome, ere F - t ; Coe ‘ “ ‘ ixs fee Z tie ie) We ey oT : { at ee iz 1A aire | a tas ' f < te sy fb ; : Hee rae Be oat ss x Tey rat < bts : zs Wan) sfld * 7 eS MY, i 4 7 XIV. PLATE N.S.W., 1928. Proc. Linn. Soc. Fossil plants from Plutoville, Cape York Peninsula. hash ; i + 23 THE GEOLOGY OF THE SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES. Part i. THE PALAROZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE Moruya DistTricr. ls) By Ina A. Brown, B.Sc., faa 3 Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology.* bu { ~F (Plates xv-xviii; four Text-figures. ) \— [Read 30th May, 1928.] e, \ Py (1) Introduction and Previous Records. A (2) General Geology. (3) The Sedimentary Series. (4) The Igneous Series. (i) Occurrence and Field Relations; (ii) Structures; (iii) Petrography of the Plutonic Rocks; (iv) Field Occurrence and Petrography of the Dykes; (v) Petrogenesis; (vi) Age of the Intrusion. (5) The Metamorphic Series. ; (6) Tectonic History of the Area. (7) Summary. (1) INTRODUCTION AND PREVIOUS RECORDS. The area under consideration is situated on the south coast of New South Wales, two hundred miles south of Sydney. The town of Moruya, situated five miles from the mouth of the Moruya or Deua River, is the centre of a large dairy-farming district, and has recently been brought under public notice by the reopening of “granite” quarries by the firm of Dorman, Long and Company, Limited, in order to supply stone for the building of the Sydney Harbour Bridge. No detailed geological work on this district has hitherto been attempted, although one finds references to the Moruya district in several reports of the Departments of Mines and Agriculture of this State. An analysis of Moruya granite was published by Professor A. Liversidge in his “Minerals of New South Wales’, and is quoted in a paper by W. Anderson (1892) on “The General Geology of the South Coast’’, where a very brief account of the geology of the Moruya District is recorded. Further reference is made by Dr. H. I. Jensen in a paper on ‘‘The Soils of New South Wales’, and short reports of an economic nature have been made by L. F. Harper (1910), and T. L. Willan, B.Se. (1923). (2) GENERAL GEOLOGY. The general geological structure of the district might be described briefly as that of a folded and faulted series of early Palaeozoic sediments, which has been intruded by a series of plutonic rocks, ranging from gabbro to biotite-granite. Several systems of igneous dykes intersect the whole region. Conglomerates, which are supposed to be of Devonian age, form a capping over the steeply inclined older sediments in a few places, and Tertiary sediments and basalts cover considerable areas within a few miles of the present coast-line. The Post-Tertiary history includes the evolution of the present physiography, with the accumulation of quantities of alluvium, recent sands, and shell deposits along the rivers, coastal lagoons and low-lying coastal areas. * This work was commenced when the writer held the position of Demonstrator in Geology at the University of Sydney. A w 152 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, It is proposed to give in this paper an account of the Palaeozoic Geology of the Moruya District, and at a later date to deal with the Tertiary and Post-Tertiary History of the South Coast. (3) THE SEDIMENTARY SERIES. The older sedimentary rocks of the district have been subjected to a certain amount of regional metamorphism, but still show evidence that they were originally fine-grained sediments, which were deposited under fairly stillwater conditions. They are represented now by thin-bedded quartzites and silky, purple or greenish-grey slates, some of which possess well-developed cleavage. On the road to Araluen, eleven miles from Moruya, the slates and interbedded quartzites dip to the west at 43° and contain distinct ripple marks; the ridges of the ripples are about two and a half inches apart and run east and west, thus indicating a shallow water origin for the sediments. The only traces of organic remains yet known in this series occur in sandy purple slates on the northern bank of the Deua River, about 22 miles by road from Moruya. These fossils are not well preserved, but, in the opinion of Mr. Dun, Government Palaeontologist, they are certainly organic, and are probably the carapaces of crustaceans. For convenience these old, altered sediments will be referred to as “‘slates’’, or the “slate series’, it being understood that the term includes all the slates, phyllites and thin-bedded quartzites of Pre-Devonian age. These slates form part of a series, which extends from the head of the Clyde River in a southerly direction for about ninety miles to the Brogo-Tathra district, and from the coast in a westerly direction for about thirty miles to the Main Divide. At intervals they are interrupted by intrusions of igneous rocks consisting of granites, monzonites and more basic types, which outcrop at Moruya, Bodalla, Mount Dromedary, Cobargo, Brogo and Bega along the coast, and several other places further inland. The slates are also partly covered by later Palaeozoic and Cainozoic sediments and basalts. The geological age of the series has not yet been proved, as up to the present there is no record of any fossils having been found in them. Specimens of Favosites were discovered by W. Anderson (1892) in limestone at Bendithera, nearly thirty miles west of Moruya, at the head of the Deua River, and an Upper Silurian age is assigned to these beds. Unfortunately, the relation of the lime- stone to the slates to the east is not known at the present time. In 1851 the Rev. W. B. Clarke examined the granites and slates in the neigh- bourhood of Araluen and lower down the Deua River, and later examined the Clyde Valley and Yalwal Districts. He evidently considered the slates to be Silurian in age, apparently basing his opinion on the lithological character of the rocks, and their similarity to Silurian rocks on the western side of the Main Divide. Later writers have accepted this provisional classification, and one finds in a number of reports on mining in the southern goldfields, references to the slate series as of possibly Silurian age. For the purpose of soil classification, Dr. H. I. Jensen (1910) has divided the series into two parts, (a) the Nelligen Schists, extending from near Termeil to the south of Bodalla, and (0) the Narira Schists, extending from seven miles south of Bodalla to Brogo, but this division is somewhat misleading from a geological standpoint. SKETCH map | OF THE ce | pyr MORUYA DISTRICT Note* The Cainozore rock» are omitted wn order to show Walaeozoie structural textures LEGEND Granite Granodiorite ang Tonalite Diorite-gabbro Quartz Porphyry Schist Series Contact Zone F Fault | BY IDA BROWN. 153 Wir Bateman’s Bay ) bservation Head Sloth ila ay cio ogo Point imburra Head | | | | ore Stony! | et ! \BODALLA Text-fig. 1. 154 PALAEUZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, Within a radius of approximately thirty miles of Moruya, the slates consist of a folded series, which have a constant direction of strike, running within a few degrees of north and south. Small exposures of the slates, such as occur in road cuttings along the Prince’s Highway, show only beds which are apparently vertical; larger. exposures, however, all clearly show that the series has been subjected to meridional folding, which has been very intense over the eastern portion, gradually diminishing in intensity to the west. This is illustrated by the cliff-sections east of the town of Bateman, on Bateman’s Bay, the sea-cliffs near the mouth of the Tomaga River, and the section revealed by the erosion of the Deua River between Moruya and Araluen. Faulting has accompanied or closely followed the folding along parallel axes. This fact, together with the complete absence of a fossil-horizon*, and the more or less uniform nature of the sediments, makes it impossible to estimate the thickness of. the series outcropping over such a large area. A belt of quartz-porphyry, more than one mile in width, occurs about seven miles west of Moruya and trends in a northerly direction. It appears to be intrusive along one of the fault-planes. The porphyry is inclined to be tuffaceous towards both eastern and western boundaries, containing small angular fragments of felsitic rocks: towards the west it has the appearance of being interbedded with vertical bands of slate. A narrow band of similar porphyry occurs in a fault-zone through hardened sandstone and reddish-purple slates, between 21 and 22 miles along the road from Moruya to Araluen. There seems little doubt that the porphyry is really intrusive into the slate series. As previously stated, the folding is most intense in the rocks which lie to the east. In the neighbourhood of Observation Point, east of Bateman, the rocks consist of crushed conglomerates and contorted, banded quartzites and slates, which are faulted in a meridional direction. These extend to the headland known as the “Hanging Rock”, about a mile from Bateman. Half a mile of shell-banks, raised only a few feet above sea-level, separates this outcrop from the typical greenish-grey slates of Bateman, which appear to belong to a series younger than that of the crushed conglomerates to the east. No actual junction between the two series has been seen by the writer, but observations on the rocks between Bodalla and Narooma suggest a similar division into two series, without any marked angular unconformity, the older lying to the east of the younger. The occurrence of small veins of turquoise in the vicinity of Bodalla and HKurobodalla as recorded by Curran (1896, p. 252) has been taken as an indication that these rocks are Ordovician, but as yet there is no definite evidence as to whether the slates are Ordovician or Silurian. (4) THE IGNEOUS SERIES. (1) Occurrence and Field Relations. An examination of the accompanying geological map of the Moruya District (Plate xv) reveals the fact that the plutonic rocks outcrop over a belt some three and a half miles in width, extending from the neighbourhood of the coast north of Tuross Head in a north-north-westerly direction through Moruya and out to the west of Mogo. The writer was unable to complete the mapping in this direction on account of the mountainous and inaccessible nature of the country, but has some reason for believing that the mass is connected with the mountain granites east of Araluen. *The discovery by the writer, subsequent to the completion of this paper, of Spirifer disjuncta in quartzites at Coondella, about 12 miles west of Moruya, proves the presence of Devonian rocks, and there is a possibility that the quartzite series immediately west of the quartz porphyry may be of this age. BY IDA BROWN. The general directions of the eastern and western boundaries of this mass are similar, consideration being given to the fact that it is in part covered by newer formations, includ- ing Tertiary sediments and basalts between Coila and Congo Point, and more recent alluvium over the flats of the Moruya River and Congo Creek. This feature may be more clearly seen in the modified map given in Text- figure 1, where the Cainozoic formations are omitted. The occurrence of granitic rock has quite a marked effect on the topography, producing gently undulating country rarely rising to an altitude of 200 feet on the coastal portion of the area, whilst the adjacent steeply-inclined slates and schists produce rough, hilly country showing very much greater relief. This feature is well-illustrated near the Beashel trigonometrical station, about a mile west of Bergalia, where the contact slate rises to an altitude of 600 feet above sea-level, within less than half a mile of the low-lying granite area, quite close to sea-level. The slate ridges west of Moruya rise to over 2,000 feet. In like manner the differences in the resultant soil have produced a variation in the vegetation, which is quite striking even to the casual observer. The slates weather to rather poor, siliceous soils, although they support a number of valuable timbers. Eucalyptus maculata (spotted gum) is characteristic, and sometimes attains a great height; a magnificent specimen is growing near the 6-mile peg south of Bodalla. Hucalyptus corymbosa _ (blood- wood), H. pilularis (blackbutt), E. eugenioides (stringybark), and occasionally E. siderophloia (ironbark) flourish on the slate soil, with patches of Acacia (?) penninervis (myall) and Backhousia (myrtle) in sheltered positions. The burrawangs, Macrozamia, are very abundant on the slate soil and are practically absent from the granitic soil, thus forming a good index of the character of the underlying rock. E. (2?) hemiphloia (box) and Angophora (?) subvelutina (apple) occur on the granitic soils, with some E. siderophloia (ironbark) and #. eugenioides (stringybark). ‘SY-1X90L WOdIJ UOT}OES [eVoIZoO[oes pozipe1suey— GZ ‘JOIASIP BANAOJW 4UIOd S,A[[aM 0} VUEqUINOTIIETWT Q FIVOS WLNOZIYOH Merricumbene DEUA RIVER savas 91y9g Turner's Cutting Grumley’s Cutting Kimpton’s Cutting RIVER aj/sojpouesg Ages] AOD SES Ye mimo auojspueg e a | | | | ! | | 019983-9)/J01Q Kelly’s Point oos 334 7) m > - m < m [P 155 156 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, From an agricultural viewpoint the slates are practically useless, as the soil is too shallow, except where it has been collected along river-flats, whereas the soil derived from the igneous rocks is suitable for dairy-farming. For this reason the chief centres of settlement along this part of the coast are on outcrops of igneous rocks, which are separated by large tracts of slate country, inhabited only by timber-getters and occasional miners. ; The igneous rocks in the Moruya district consist of a series ranging from gabbro, through tonalite (quartz-diorite) and granodiorite to biotite-granite, with associated dykes of porphyry and aplite. The intermediate plutonic rocks, the tonalite and granodiorite, outcrop over the greater portion of the area mapped in detail (Plate xv), while the gabbros occur to the south-east, and the acid granites occur to the north-west of the intermediate series. It will be shown (p. 184) that the igneous series as a whole is intrusive into the slates, but it is overlain by Tertiary sediments and basalts between Coila and Congo Head, and by alluvium along the river flats, as shown on the map. The individual members of the series, the gabbro, tonalite-granodiorite, and biotite-granite, are fairly uniform in composition, and do not grade into one another. The field relations between the gabbros and tonalite may be studied along the sea coast at Kelly’s Point, and at the head to the north, known locally as the Clear Hill Point, about 10 miles south-east of Moruya, where there are excellent exposures of the contact. Kelly’s Point is an exposed headland, which runs out to sea for some distance at right angles to the general trend of the coastline, and is of intense interest, not only on account of the relations of the plutonic rocks, but also because of the occurrence of a series of peculiar dyke-rocks which will be described later. A geological sketch-map of the most easterly portion of the Point is given in Text-figure 3. The tonalite contains numerous dark-coloured inclusions of igneous rocks, similar to the “basic segregations” occurring in the granodiorite. At its junction with the diorite-gabbro, the tonalite has sent off numerous sharply- defined little apophyses into the invaded rock, leaving no doubt as to its later intrusion. The tonalite and granodiorite appear to grade into one another, and outcrop over part of the Tuross Peninsula, and from Bergalia to the township of Moruya. The granodiorite and the biotite-granite are lithologically distinct: the granite forms an isolated outcrop in the neighbourhood of Condoin Creek and occurs also in the main belt to the north and north-west of Moruya. The field relations between the granodiorite and granite are obscured by alluvium and cultivation patches, but as deposits of gold and silver-bearing arsenical-pyrites are associated only with the biotite-granites, it is considered that the granite is most probably of later formation than the granodiorite. Several systems of dykes intersect the whole region, and are described in detail below. In the intermediate plutonic series there occur numerous dark inclusions, some of which are fragments of the slate series and others are igneous rocks, whose origin is probably co-magmatic with that of the granodiorite. (ii) Structures in the Plutonic Rocks. There are certain structures in the igneous mass itself which show evidence of crustal strains operating about the time of its intrusion. These include (a) jointing, and (b) “rift and grain” structure. (a) Jointing.—At Pollwambra Mountain, five miles north of Moruya, vertical jointing is very distinct in a direction EH. 10° N. At the quarries at present being BY IDA BROWN. 157 worked by Dorman, Long and Co. vertical joints occur in two principal directions, HE. 10° N. and N. 20° W., whilst jointing in a third direction N. 50° E. is not so well developed and is parallel to a dyke of a basaltic nature, which for a time marked GEND Siew CH MAP Z OF le 2 z| Gabbro Kee eve Savi sOnniNints MORUYA DISTRICT SG B NN (2.2.4) inp eepires eo x _» x! Zonalite Sat Se as | Aplite Dyke rs Basalt 1 Por, Basalt . &j ~ 4 Ne] LS Basalt (Gaerne) ae Q Boulders SECTION ALONG A-B Text-fig. 3. 158 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, the eastern boundary of the smaller quarry opened up to the west of the old main quarry. Aplitic veins less than one inch in thickness occur parallel to minor joints dipping at 45° to the north-east in Dorman, Long’s quarry, and at 50° to the south- west in Louttit’s quarry, on the southern side of the River. Locally, a kind of sheet structure is developed in the main quarry owing to the presence of a system of joints which are more or less horizontal, with a down- ward sagging in the centre. This system is not parallel to the present land surface, but may bear some relation to the cooling-surface of the granodiorite magma. The only other good exposures showing jointing are in the south-east portion of the mass. At Kelly’s Point the dominant jointing is in a direction E. 15° N., which is also the direction of strike of the majority of dykes here. Another set of joints runs about at right angles to this direction. Between here and Tuross Head most of the dykes, following the set of principal joints, are running in the direction E. 15° N., while west of Kelly’s Point, on the shore of Coila Lake and in the neighbourhood of Bergalia, the average direction of strike varies from E. to E. 10° S. A few less important dykes run approximately at right angles to this direction, including two narrow basaltic dykes in the western part of Kelly’s Point, an aplite dyke in Por. 276, Parish of Congo, between Coila Lake and the sea, and several dyke channels through quartz-schists at Du Ross (Mullimburra) Point, which strike N. 26° W. Thus it is evident that the chief joint system is approximately at right angles to the direction of elongation of the batholith, while jointing parallel to the direction of elongation is less perfectly developed. (bo) Rift and Grain.—The other internal evidence of tectonic stress lies in the development of the structures known as rift and grain, which are intimately associated with the slight though marked parallel arrangement of certain of the constituent minerals. The phenomenon of “rift” and “grain” is one which has attracted the notice of geologists who have been working in granite areas in other parts of the world, for the last hundred and fifty years. It is found that usually in granitic rocks there is a certain direction, either approximately vertical or horizontal, along which the rock splits more readily than in any other direction. This direction is known as the “rift”. At right angles to this there is another direction of splitting with relative ease, which is known as the “grain’’, whilst the direction at right angles to both “rift” and “grain” is called the “hard way”. The results of careful observations on the “rift” and “grain” in granites of the States of New England, North America, have been recorded by T. Nelson Dale (1923), who gives a detailed bibliography and a summary on rift and grain structures. It is shown that cracks through the felspar and quartz occur in the directions of the rift and grain, as well as planes of gas or liquid inclusions through quartz, pointing to an intimate relation between the arrangement of inclusions and the rift and grain structure. Moreover, porphyritic felspars may be arranged with their long axes parallel to the rift and grain, or mica plates may occur all parallel to the rift. Sufficient has been stated to show that these structures are an expression of crustal strains and stresses during or after the consolidation of the magma, and a study of their directions may have some bearing on the tectonic history of the area. BY IDA BROWN. 159 In the Moruya district it is found that the slight parallel structure developed in the more acid members of the igneous series, is due to the parallel arrangement of the flakes of biotite and the elongation of the hornblende (if present) and plagioclase crystals in one direction in this plane. This feature is most pronounced along the eastern boundary of the batholith. At the “granite” quarries east of Moruya, the exposed granodiorite shows that this structure is parallel to the rift, which is vertical, and runs in a north-north-westerly direction. The grain is horizontal. As yet no oriented microsections are available, but some random sections of the granodiorite and granite certainly do show continuous parallel cracks extending across quartz and felspar grains and also parallel strings of tiny inclusions continuing across a number of optically independent grains of quartz, which in all probability are parallel to the rift, as determined by Dale. (iii) Petrography of the Plutonic Rocks. A large number of specimens of the plutonic rocks have been collected from all parts of the area, and have been examined in detail, and a series of chemical analyses of representatives of the chief rock-types has been carried out. The numbers M123, etc., refer to the specimens in the writer’s collection, which has been placed in the Geological Museum of the University of Sydney. Biotite-Granite. The most acid members of the plutonic series are the biotite-granites occurring to the north and west of Moruya. The granite exposed along the main road (the Prince’s Highway) five miles north of Moruya, is aplitic, the rock near the actual contact with the slates, M 337, being a white crumbly graphic-granite, which powders with a blow of the hammer, and consisting of quartz and altered orthoclase with the merest trace of biotite. Farther away from the contact is a pinkish-grey variety of granite, a medium- grained rock that has suffered considerable alteration. Under the microscope it is seen to consist of quartz and orthoclase chiefly, with some acid plagioclase and altered biotite. A small amount of muscovite is present, partly intergrown with biotite, and partly as a decomposition product of the potash-felspar. Fracture and granulation are evidences of mechanical strain. About half a mile from the contact a more normal granite appears, which is medium-grained, and grey in colour, with massive texture. In the handspecimen, white felspar, quartz and biotite are visible. Under the microscope the rock shows a granitic texture, and is seen to consist of quartz, orthoclase, oligoclase, and microperthite, with biotite and a very small amount of muscovite, some of which is of secondary origin. Some zircon occurs in the biotite. This rock still shows signs of fracture and granulation. About a mile west of Moruya, on the south bank of the River, the granite contains a greater amount of orthoclase and microperthite. It is interesting to note that neither in the handspecimen nor under the microscope can this rock (M 320) be distinguished from the granite outcropping at Bunnair Swamp, Conjola, about seventy miles to the north of Moruya. It is also similar to the granite out- cropping a couple of miles south of Bodalla (M 398), as well as the granite from the Buckembowra district, near Nelligen (M 270). The isolated outcrop of granite in the neighbourhood of Condoin Creek, south- west of Moruya, consists essentially of a similar acid biotite-granite (M 232), much of which has suffered considerable alteration on account of pneumatolysis, with the introduction of ores of silver, gold, arsenic and other metals. In several 160 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, localities there is a very interesting metasomatic replacement of the biotite by gold-bearing arsenical-pyrites (M 242, M 243, Baker’s Shaft). A good exposure of fresh, typical biotite-granite occurs near Heffernan’s property, Portion 32, Parish of Mogendoura, on the road from Moruya to Araluen over Larry’s Mountain. In the handspecimen (M 343) it appears to be a massive grey granite, medium to fine, and even-grained, consisting of quartz, white felspar and biotite. Under the microscope it is seen to be hypidiomorphic to allotriomorphic granular, with a marked tendency to monzonitic fabric, and consists of quartz, plagioclase, orthoclase (including microperthite) and biotite, with very small amounts of apatite and zircon enclosed in the biotite. The quartz occurs as allotriomorphic grains, either between the plagioclase crystals or else included in plates of orthoclase. It contains numerous tiny liquid inclusions, some of which contain a gaseous bubble, and which are arranged in definite lines that are continuous across a number of optically independent quartz grains. There is little doubt that this is an expression of rift and grain structure in the rock. The plagioclase forms more or less idiomorphic prismatic crystals, about 2mm. in diameter. It is slightly zoned and shows twinning after Carlsbad, albite and pericline laws, and is oligoclase of the composition Ab,,An,.». Orthoclase is present interstitially, and as allotriomorphic plates, which enclose crystals and grains of all the other minerals, as it has been the last mineral to crystallize out, giving the rock a kind of monzonitic fabric. In most of the orthoclase there is a slight development of microperthite, as though the soda- felspar had separated out along one of the cleavage directions of the potash-felspar. The biotite occurs as allotriomorphic flakes rarely exceeding 1:5 mm. in diameter. It has a brown colour, is strongly pleochroic, and contains small crystals of apatite and smaller needles of zircon surrounded by a pleochroic halo. A section of the rock is shown on Plate xvii, fig. i. The chemical analysis of this rock appears below. Wt. p.c. Mol. Ratios. SIOs tse ai: 70-78 1-180 ROR) ences: 15:77 0-155 esORE se sk 0:69 0:004 ME ORR rine as 2-44 0:034 Norm. WiteXO) Gona06 0-72 0-018 QUAEEZI as: Se eee oe 36:84 CAO? seers 2-53 0-045 Orthoclaseci ae eeonoe 14-46 INGUOL Reales 2-88 0:047 SAUD IGEY is, Sescera aoa oak anes 24-63 KO ....--- 2-44 0-026 Airorthite ss) (eee 11-68 BLO db oeso0 0-50 = Corundiums) jee 4-08 TEELOS oo006 0-06 == Hypersthene .......... 5-23 TiO, ....-- 0-45 0-005 Maegnetite ........4.5.. 0-93 BLO, .....-. 0-25 0-001 Dlmenite! <2... Ae ee 0:76 MnO ...... 0-08 0-001 INpALILC Uo. ee eee 0-34 Mota ga 55 a5 99°59 Sp. Gr. 2-688 Biotite-Granite, Por. 32, Par. Mogendoura, Moruya District. Anal. I.A.B. Magmatic name: Alsbachose, near Tehamose. [1, 3’, 2(3), (3)4.] BY IDA BROWN. 161 Granodiorite and Quartz-Diorite. The granodiorites and quartz-diorites outcrop over the area extending from a short distance north of Moruya, to a point about half a mile north of Tuross Head. A large number of specimens has been collected from all parts of the area, more than thirty of which have been sectioned and three chemically analysed. Whereas the granite occurring to the north-west is characterized by the presence of quartz, acid plagioclase (oligoclase), orthoclase, microperthite and biotite, the granodiorite and quartz-diorite consist essentially of more basic plagioclase (andesine), quartz, hornblende, biotite and very subordinate orthoclase which is merely interstitial. There are slight differences in the texture and grainsize of different specimens of the rock, as well as minor variations in the relative proportions of the minerals present, giving differences in the body colour of the rock. In general, the rock appears to be slightly more acid in the northern and western portions of the area and may be called granodiorite, whereas the eastern and southern portions appear to be more basic, and may be designated quartz-diorite or tonalite. Evidence of compressive crustal strain is most marked along the eastern border of the outcrop, where slight parallel arrangement of the minerals is obvious, and the dark inclusions or “basic segregations” are most abundant. One of the best exposures of typical granodiorite is at the quarries on the left bank of the Moruya River, two miles below the town. Commercially, the stone is known as “granite”, and in the past has been used in a number of the principal buildings of Sydney, including the G.P.O. and the Customs House, the material having been taken partly from ‘these quarries, and partly from Louttit’s quarry situated on the opposite bank of the river, rather nearer the mouth. A finer grained and slightly abnormal type of granodiorite has been quarried for local purposes in portion 48, parish of Moruya, about a mile south-west of the town. In the handspecimen, the typical rock at Dorman Long’s quarry, when free of “basic segregations’”, is light grey in colour, and shows slight parallel arrange- ment of the minerals. It is evengrained, the average grainsize being 5 or 6 mm. The minerals appear to be plagioclase, quartz, biotite, hornblende and occasionally iron pyrites. Under the microscope, the grainsize is seen to be variable, ranging from 1 mm. to 6 mm., as each of the quartz ‘“‘grains” as seen in the handspecimens, actually consists of a number of smaller grains. The fabric is hypidiomorphic granular. The microscope reveals also the presence of a little orthoclase, with apatite, sphene, zircon, magnetite, ilmenite and iron pyrites as accessory minerals. Strain is indicated by the parallel arrangement of the crystals, by. fracture and granulation of the felspar and quartz grains, and by bending of the biotite. The plagioclase is andesine, Ab,,An,, occurring as subidiomorphic tabular crystals, showing twinning after Carlsbad, albite and pericline laws. It appears to have crystallized early in the cooling history of the magma, or at least to have pushed aside the grains of ferromagnesian minerals. In crush zones indicated by fracture and granulation, there is a slight development of myrmekite, where the plagioclase is in contact with orthoclase. Quartz occurs as irregular grains between the felspar crystals, and is quite allotriomorphic. It contains tiny liquid and gas inclusions. The hornblende crystals are prismatic, and are about 3 mm. in width, and 7 mm. in length. The mineral is dark green, and strongly pleochroic, and shows PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, 162 ‘SOI}BI Te[NOV[OU 94} SAIS Solqe} Surpsvsoons puv sry} ul “ojo ‘BIT “BT SuLUN[OH 4 ID Ger = Ox Gé-00T «10-0 ss 66-00T = GF-00T =a 88-66 ae GL-00L = 10-001 ‘7 TWLOL | Ee | = ‘sqe | —_ a0R1} — — — —— — Sees ee | Rekeneaetea Ovi — d0R1} | — 0B} — = — = — api” |jpoaoee > ous ae, 60:0 100-0 1-0 ae aan a =e Eye ISOC tamer * Oe 100-0 40-0 | 600:0 91-0 ae IOV} 600-0 81-0 100-0 80-0 “OUT — 10-0 | — ‘sqv os =< == == =e = ~ OND a= 10-0 | — ‘Ssqe a = aes 7 = = 0°) ‘OIN —- | aol} | — 90.4 — — — — = ‘sqe 80 COA NAG) — 0B} | — ‘squ — ‘sqe = —- #00-0 eT-0 (san) Ss ar = | 800-0 rL-0 a: — — a= = = 5008 Sau | 9081) 100:0 60:0 = 90BI} ne as a = i 9) Ws Z1-0 | a? ‘sqe oe: are = os. enti ais: Ocoee ‘beard “0s 100-0 ce | 100-0 91-0 100-0 81-0 = a 100-0 GIO a aes “Od = ‘sqe — 90B1} s= = = — 200-0 6:10) se ee ae * “OZ 600-0 | 66-0 600-0 9€-0 0190-0 08-0 G00:0 66-0 S00-0 iTsPis OSes nto “OLL a | 10:0 — “‘sqe == ‘sqe = Bex as ‘sqe eoeese 700 = $10 | = 60-0 = 88-0 = = aa OD = eee -O'H a L¥-0 | == tee aa G33 = SEL = Wet P-peeees + O'H 660:0 91-6 6€0:0 GL-& 00:0 08:6 60:0 LI-G 660-0 61-6 : ee Oo 490-0 | 00-F $¢0-0 OFS 660-0 GEG 840-0 8G-¢ TS0-0 TPS e ae oe | cei ee O°RN 180-0 99-7 890-0 GB8°E 690-0 6S'S TL0-0 66'S 810-0 ONO toll ek ea OB) TS0-0 60°G GP0-0 T8-1 990-0 £9°S 90:0 GP &h0-0 SL-T ee OSIN $£0-0 PEG 860-0 89-6 690-0 LY-F. 8h0-0 GPs 660-0 NE Sree ene Oe 610-0 00:6 T10-0 O8-T 00:0 08:0 800-0 LYE 600-0 GF-0 E ‘O°O 991-0 6-91 T9T-0 Utsrgi 6SL-0 89-ST FLT-0 SLL 1 ELT-0 €9-LT : : “O1V OL0-T 06-49 680-T 98:99 L90-T 40°49 T60°T PP-S9 G60-1 oL-S9 ae “* “OIS am G0L-% a ILL-% ae GEL-% me = ae 60L-% “ap “ds | ———|__ —— ———— EE eee = ——— ‘CA “A “BAT ‘AI “eTIT ‘IIL “ell ‘II “eT al BY IDA BROWN. 163 The norms and C.I.P.W. elassifications are as follow :— ) | I JI, IIl | IV. We ~ oa oe QuUarezor’ hens sy etsy kee 25°92 23°34 25-14 | 19-20 17-52 Orthoclase ......... 12°23 | 12-79 16-68 | 22°24 16°12 Abi te ween: ae ciate teins 26-72 30°39 20:44 | 28°82 33°54 ANTWMORMOULEY 55600560000 20°85 19°74 16:68 | 18-07 20:29 Corundum ......... | one 2-24 245 | a ee FATCOMMUS ES eG ee | 0:37 | aan == | = | —_ Diopside ........... | = — | — | — 1-14 Hypersthene....... 8:26 | 8-62 12:94 | 7-67 6-91 Magnetite .......... 0-70 | 1-86 1-16 | 2-55 2-78 MMe MItey 7s Avttsceeencss 0-76 | 0-76 1-52 0:76 | 0-76 BATIAEICEY (on 08 bi nevbaccusene 0-34 — | 0:34 0-34 0-34 MELE bal Siaye/carainie wc | 0-24 | — — —- — I. Granodiorite [Yellowstonose. I(II), 4, 38, 4], Dorman, Long and Coy.’s Quarry, Moruya. M.L.4, Parish Tomaga, Co. St. Vincent. Anal. I.A.B. II. Tonalite [Yellowstonose. I(II), 4, 8, 4], Adamello, Tyrol. Anal. Z. Weyberg. Neues Jahrbuch fir Mineralogie, 1912, p. 398. W.T., p. 262. III. Granodiorite [Harzose. “II, “4, 3, 3], near Braemar House, Macedon Dist., Vict. Geol. Surv. Vict., Bull. 24, 1912, p. 20. In W.T., p. 368, No. 79. IV. “Blue Granite’ [Amiatose. I(II), 4, (2)38, 3”], Tenterfield, New England, N.S.W. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., 1905-9, pp. 203, 238. In W.T., p. 253. Vv. “Sphene Granite’ excluding orthoclase phenocrysts, Undercliffe, Wilson’s Downfall, New England, N.S.W. [Yellowstonose. I(II), 4, “3, 4]. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., 1905-9, pp. 209, 238 (Norm re-calculated). In Nos. II, III and IV the norms quoted are as given in Washington/s Tables. a tendency to crystallize with the biotite in such a way that the “ec” crystallo- graphic axis of the hornblende is parallel to the plane of (001) of the biotite. Brown, pleochroic biotite is present as allotriomorphic flakes, about 2 mm. in diameter. It shows alteration to chloritic material, and more rarely to epidote and lenses of carbonates between the cleavage lamellae, such as that described by Iddings (1911, p. 494). It contains acicular apatite, and zircon surrounded by pleochroic haloes. A small amount of orthoclase occurs interstitially. Idiomorphic sphene and small amounts of iron ores are scattered through the rock. The chemical analysis of a typical specimen of this rock (M122) is given in column I (p. 162), and a photomicrograph of a thin section on Plate xvii, fig. 2. Considering the analysis of the Moruya granodiorite, it is found that there is less orthoclase in the mode than shown in the norm, as the potash molecule goes to form biotite; also the plagioclase is not so basic as that indicated in the norm, as some of the lime silicate combines with the ferromagnesian silicate (the hypersthene of the norm) to form hornblende in the mode. The silica percentage is slightly below that of a true granite, and the alkali percentage also shows that the rock is related to the diorites, and may reasonably be called a granodiorite. In Column II is quoted the analysis of a tonalite from Adamello, which is remarkably similar to that of the Moruya rock. Indeed, much of the granodiorite 164 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, or quartz-diorite might appropriately be called “tonalite” as defined by Holmes (1920, pp. 227, 194) for mineralogical reasons also. The analysis of a typical granodiorite from the Mount Macedon District, Victoria, is quoted in Column III to show the general similarity to the Moruya rock. A study of the work on the New England granite by H. C. Andrews and other members of the staff of the Mines Department of New South Wales shows that magmatic differentiation has proceeded in New England in much the same way as it has done on a smaller scale in the Moruya District, and a number of similar rock types have been produced. For comparison with the granodiorite, the analyses of the “blue granite’ from ‘Tenterfield, and the Wilson’s Downfall “sphene granite’ without the orthoclase phenocrysts, are quoted in Columns IV and V. Sphene, so characteristic of these rocks, is present also in the Moruya granodiorite and can be seen in the handspecimen, especially in the more basic types. The titania percentage is even higher than in the New England “sphene granite.” Similar granodiorites have recently been described by Buddington from Alaska (1927), and by Gillson from Idaho (1927). Quartz-Diorite or Tonalite. As stated above there are minor variations from the type, and the granodiorite grades almost imperceptibly into a true quartz-diorite or tonalite, such as that exposed at Kelly’s Point. p Here it is sharply contrasted with the diorite-gabbro, which it intrudes. In the field it appears to be very similar to the granodiorite at the Moruya quarries, showing a similar parallel structure in the handspecimen, and containing abundant “Dasic segregations” and occasionally slaty inclusions, giving the rock a moitled appearance. The quartz-diorite outcrops west of Mullimburra Head (Du Ross Pt.), at the Clear Hill Point, Kelly’s Point, and the peninsula between Lake Coila and Lake Tuross, where it intrudes sandy micaceous schists. These localities are indicated on the accompanying map (Plate xv). The handspecimen, when free of foreign inclusions, is dark grey, rather coarsely crystalline, and even grained, with a granitoid fabric, and appears to consist of white plagioclase, quartz, hornblende and biotite, with occasional grains of pyrites. Under the microscope the rock is seen to have a hypidiomorphic granular fabric, very similar to that of the granodiorite, though there is less evidence of strain than in the rock at the quarry. The minerals present are plagioclase, quartz, hornblende and biotite, with subsidiary orthoclase, relatively abundant sphene, apatite, a little zircon and magnetite, and sometimes iron pyrites. The plagioclase occurs as idiomorphic to subidiomorphic crystals about 2-3 mm. in diameter, slightly zoned, and commonly showing twinning after Carsbad, albite and pericline laws and sometimes after the Baveno law (M175). It is andesine of the composition Ab,,An,,, slightly more basic than that of the granodiorite. In a few cases (e.g., M194, Clear Hill Pt.) the inner zone of felspar contains numerous small inclusions of hornblende, etc., some of which are optically continuous. BY IDA BROWN. 165 The quartz is not quite so abundant as in the granodiorite, but is otherwise similar, occurring as small allotriomorphic grains containing numerous tiny liquid inclusions, some of which contain movable gaseous bubbles. The hornblende occurs as fairly large, well-formed crystals, green in colour and often simply twinned. It frequently occurs in intimate association with the biotite (M 217), crystallizing so that the basal plane of the biotite is parallel to the orthopinacoid of the hornblende. Biotite is fairly abundant as small irregular grains, with some decomposition to chlorite and lenticular patches of carbonates. A very small quantity of interstitial orthoclase is present in some sections and is almost negligible. : Apatite occurs as acicular crystals in the plagioclase and ferromagnesian minerals. -Sphene is particularly abundant as irregular grains and lozenge-shaped crystals associated with hornblende. Iron pyrites and magnetite are both present in greater amount than in the granodiorite. Types intermediate between the granodiorite at Moruya and the quartz-diorite or tonalite at Kelly’s Point and Tuross, occur in the vicinity of Bergalia. A specimen of quartz-diorite from Kelly’s Point (M175) was chosen for analysis, the result being given in Column I below. Tl Ta. i. Si@ esis 61-44 1:024 59-47 INUOP ae 17-61 0-173 16-52 TAO nes 1-86 0-011 2-63 HCO ee a. 3-59 0-050 4-11 Norm. fe WIEO) os0000 3-09 0-077 3-15 Quartz. ae aaa e 27-72 CAO soeia eran 5-88 0-105 6:24 OnUM@OASS scascscoons 6-67 INaEOP 2: 2-03 0-032 2:98 PANIDICES Mens omen eae: 16-77 EGON AL 1:03 0-012 1:93 ISHHEVUED heschececes Pend BLO ceooc aleaby my, © — 1-39 Cowwachren scsccscance 3-16 BLO ooooc 0-10 = } IEDDEGSUNENS so5c0o00c 10-60 AO, coco 1-42 0-018 0-64 WEE NSIS Soonsaaaceas 2-55 IPO eee 0-33 0-002 = IOAN Secacscooeder 2-74 WON) ootooc 0-09 0-001 0-08 PNGENGURSY esi o amo ooo csc 0-67 TOTAL 99-64 100-00 Si, Gis coos 2-768 I. Quartz-diorite (Tonalite), Kelly’s Point, 10 miles S.E. of Moruya. MBandose nr. Tonalose [’II, (3)4, 74, 4]. Anal. I.A.B. II. Average quartz-diorite (Osann, Washington), quoted from Daly, Igneous Rocks, 1914, p. 26, No. 43. This rock is rather more basic than the granodiorite (M122) given previously, containing more than 4% less silica, with an increase in lime, magnesia and iron, and a decrease in the amount of alkalis. The marked increase in the titania content is due to the abundance of sphene. The analysis of the Moruya rock is very close to that of the average quartz-diorite given in Column II. An abnormal variety of granodiorite occurs about a mile south-south-west of the Moruya Bridge, in the vicinity of Portions 48 and 49, Parish of Moruya, the property of P. Jeffery, and also on the road to Moruya Heads, in Portion 113. 166 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, The specimen described and figured by W. Anderson (1892) as being typical of the Moruya granite, is identical with this type. It is finer-grained than the typical granodiorite and is darker in colour, although it contains the same minerals: plagioclase, hornblende and biotite, with quartz, which is far less obvious in the handspecimen than in the coarser type. The rock is inclined to be porphyritic in plagioclase. It was thought that this was possibly a basic differentiate of the granodiorite, but actually its chemical composition is almost identical with that of the granodiorite (M122). In the field it is characterized by numerous small inclusions of darker rock, some rather angular, but many ellipsoidal in shape, having an indefinite boundary as though they had been partly digested by the host. The peculiar habit of the quartz and plagioclase as seen under the microscope has been described by Anderson and may be seen in sections M127 a and Db. Numerous tiny rounded grains of quartz occur at the edge of the inner zone of plagioclase (Ab,;An,;), around which later plagioclase, of a slightly more acid variety, has been formed. The structure is not that of a true graphic intergrowth, although several grains of the quartz may extinguish simultaneously between crossed nicols. The structure seems to resemble somewhat the “quartz de corrosion” of French writers. Somewhat similar structures have been described by a number of writers, including Lacroix (1891, p. 156), Sederholm (1916, p. 64), Harker (1904, p. 186), Harker and Marr (1891, p. 278) and Andrews (1907, p. 215), but no satisfactory explanation of the phenomenon has been given. The fact that it occurs only in the neighbourhood of igneous inclusions gives some support to the idea that it is due to assimilation, and that the rock is really a hybrid. A photomicrograph of a thin section of the rock is shown on Plate xyii, fig. 3. A very small amount of interstitial orthoclase is present. The biotite and green hornblende both occur as ragged allotriomorphic grains about 1 mm. in diameter, which have frayed edges and contain inclusions of quartz, and occasionally felspar, giving a kind of poikilitic fabric, such as that seen in some diorites, and which is characteristic of many of the “basic segregations” in the granodiorite. Small amounts of apatite, zircon and iron ores are scattered through the rock, The analysis of this rock is given below. Wet. p.ec. Mol. Ratios. SiO Wie nae 65-83 1-097 ATOR | eer 16-44 0-161 BesOwy yaad 1:03 0-006 EO y eetea ee 3°33 0-046 Norm. MeOe nA sake 2:00 0-050 QUaRtZ Es he aiS... ee eee 26-22 C2One aw 4-24 0-076 Orthoclase "se. s.o eee 20-02 Na,O Replace 2°25 0-036 Albitew aire. .2.4): ae ee 18-86 15S O Mementocoie 3°40 0-036 PAN OGEHITCCS gets eisko vs 20:29 ISOS) hasan: 0-67 — Corundumm ase; eee 1:63 1IBLO= bo000 0-10 — IBLVADSESONIMS ooo oda0cccccon0 9-22 LOR 6 c16.0-9 2 0-78 0-009 MIEN Solas binboonce 0000 1:39 ILO. soc0ac 0-21 0-001 IDboaVENoNY Goon moe cao o 65 1:37 MONO) Ss 500d 0-08 0-001 JAN AGILE satis quate ves ei oles Ue 0-34 TOTAL 100-36 Sob (Ge os ae 2:741 Granodiorite, Por. 48, Parish of Moruya, Anal. I.A.B. Amiatose [1(II), 4, 3, 3]. BY IDA BROWN. 167 The abundance of biotite and hornblende in the mode accounts for the rather large amount of potash calculated as orthoclase in the norm. On comparing this analysis with that of the typical granodiorite a remarkable similarity will be observed. The relative increase in potash and iron percentages is due to the increase in the amount of biotite chiefly, which is reflected in the slightly greater specific gravity. The proportion K.0O : Na.O places it in Amiatose next to Yellowstonose (M122). The slight abnormalities in the composition of this rock may have been caused by the assimilation of material such as that comprising the “basic segregations” described later, thus supporting the suggestion that, in a limited sense, the rock is a hybrid, although the dark inclusions may be co-magmatic. Diorite-Gabbro and Hornblende-Gabbro. The gabbro series outcrops over an area of about three square miles, between the northern part of Coila Lake and the sea-coast. To the north-west it is over- lain by Tertiary sandstones and basalt, and on the south and east its outcrop is bounded by the lake or by sand-dunes. It has been intruded by the quartz- diorite as previously described, the contact being visible at Kelly’s Point and at the Clear Hill Point, about a mile to the north. In the field the diorite-gabbro appears as a dark grey holocrystalline rock of medium texture, which contains numerous segregation veins and. patches, varying considerably in colour and texture. Also it is intruded by a large number of dyke rocks, including granite-aplite and pegmatite, hornblende-quartz- porphyrite, mica-lamprophyre, and an interesting variety of basaltic types, which will be described later. By its colour and texture alone the diorite-gabbro, in the field, shows a very marked contrast with the granitic types previously described. In the hand- specimen, the rock has the appearance of a typical diorite, holocrystalline and medium-grained, consisting of black ferromagnesian mineral and white felspar in almost equal proportions. Some specimens show a small amount of iron pyrites and occasionally small well-formed crystals of sphene. The hornblende crystals show a certain amount of lustre-mottling, due to the poikilitic arrangement of the inclusions. Under the microscope, the grainsize is seen to vary from 0:5 to 5:0 mm., the fabric is hypidiomorphic granular, with a tendency to poikilitic or subophitic. The minerals present are chiefly hornblende and plagioclase, with very much smaller quantities of augite, biotite, orthoclase, apatite, sphene, iron pyrites and magnetite. Although. the rock looks perfectly fresh in the handspecimen, small amounts of chlorite and calcite are also present. The plagioclase is partly idiomorphic, but occurs also as small grains enclosed in the hornblende. It is well twinned, and consists chiefly of labradorite, Ab,,A;,, With a narrow outer zone of more acid andesine, Ab,;An.,-;. In several instances there is a kind of graphic intergrowth of the plagioclase and the ferromagnesian minerals. One slide (M 278) shows a section of labradorite cut perpendicular to (010) and (001) in graphic intergrowth with colourless augite and brown hornblende, both partly idiomorphic, and also a skeletal form of iron ore. A photograph of this appears on Plate xviii, figs. 1 and 2. Records of this kind of intergrowth are rare: the most similar case which has come to the notice of the writer is that of the graphic intergrowth of plagioclase and augite in a dolerite from King George Land, Antarctica, described B 168 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, by W. R. Browne (1923, p. 250). Iddings (Rock Minerals, p. 238) notes a graphic intergrowth between plagioclase and orthorhombic pyroxene, and Teall (1888, Plate xxiii) illustrates a graphic intergrowth of plagioclase and augite in a dolerite from Staffordshire. This rock is described by Allport (1874, p. 549). Harker (1909, p. 270) also gives references to somewhat similar graphic intergrowths. The hornblende is perhaps the most interesting mineral in the rock. It occurs as large subidiomorphic plates, up to 5 mm. across, and also as small crystals, less than 1 mm. in diameter. The larger plates show marked colour- zoning, the central portion being itself irregularly zoned in shades of greenish- brown, while the outer. zone is of a bluish-green colour, probably indicating the presence of a certain amount of soda. The mineral is strongly pleochroic. The natural colour of the mineral does not wholly mask the interference colour. Although many of the smaller crystals are idiomorphic, the larger ones are not quite so regular, and contain inclusions of plagioclase, biotite and augite, showing that the hornblende continued crystallizing until late in the cooling history of the magma. There can be no doubt that the hornblende is a mineral of primary crystalli- zation, and that it has been derived partly from the colourless augite, which occurs only as small grains less than 0:5 mm. in diameter surrounded by brownish hornblende. The boundaries are often indistinct, although the minerals may be in parallel intergrowth: the change from augite to hornblende has been accompanied by the liberation of some iron oxide, shown by the association of fine magnetite dust. Biotite in small quantity occurs in association with hornblende and iron ore. The ferromagnesian minerals in this rock, augite, brown hornblende, green hornblende and biotite, are a good illustration of the ‘reaction principle” of Bowen (1922, pp. 177-198), forming as they do “discontinuous reaction series’. The zoned hornblende itself may be considered as an example of “continuous reaction”. Apatite is an important accessory mineral, occurring as crystals more than 1 mm. in length, and 0-3 mm. in diameter. A few grains of interstitial orthoclase have been detected, as well as idiomorphic sphene and iron ores. Chlorite is partly an alteration product of the biotite, and partly interstitial and deuteric. There are a few grains of interstitial calcite, which also appear to be deuteric. A chemical analysis of the diorite-gabbro appears below (p. 170). The hornblende-gabbro outcropping at Kelly’s Point and through the beach sand, about three-quarters of a mile to the north, appears to be a local modification of the diorite-gabbro, which it resembles in many particulars. It contains all the minerals present in the diorite-gabbro (though in somewhat different proportions) and a few others in addition. In the handspecimen, it is a black phanerocrystalline gabbroic rock, and is medium-grained. Under the microscope it is seen to have a texture similar to that of the diorite-gabbro, and consists of hornblende, plagioclase, augite, hypersthene, biotite, apatite, sphene, iron pyrites and magnetite or ilmenite, and also epidote and calcite. No olivine has been detected with certainty. The plagioclase is not so abundant as in the diorite-gabbro, but is more basic in composition, being basic labradorite (Ab,,An,,) and there is a corres- BY IDA BROWN. 169 ponding increase in the proportion of ferromagnesian minerals present, the most important of which is the hornblende. The augite occurs as grains up to 1-5 mm. in diameter, always surrounded by and changing into brownish hornblende in parallel orientation. It appears to be a normal, colourless monoclinic pyroxene. In addition, there is present a small quantity of a rhombic pyroxene, with straight extinction and marked pleochroism from pink to pale green, which is evidently hypersthene. Like the augite, it may be seen changing to hornblende. Small rounded patches of serpentinous material in the hornblende appear to be the remains of olivine grains. The hornblende is identical with that in the diorite, showing a variation in colour from dark brown or greenish-brown in the centre, to a pale bluish- green at the edges of the larger crystals and in the smaller crystals; the cleavage and twinning are like those of primary hornblende and not like those of fibrous uralite. Similarly zoned hornblende has been recorded from Garabal Hill by Wyllie and Scott (1913, p. 503). Plate xvii, figs. 5 and 6, show sections of the rock described. Biotite is more plentiful than in the diorite-gabbro, and is of a peculiar reddish-brown colour; it appears to have formed after the hornblende on which it is moulded. Finally there is a mesostasis of faintly pleochroic epidote, having a strong double refraction, and a small amount of interstitial calcite which appears to be primary. This rock shows then an excellent example of a “discontinuous reaction series”, olivine (probably )—monoclinic and rhombic pyroxene—amphibole—mica. In the change from pyroxene to amphibole the excess of iron and lime in the pyroxene has ied to the formation of magnetite as a fine dust, and of epidote and calcite as final products of consolidation of the magma. Rosenbusch has described the production of uralite from pyroxene as being accompanied by all the phenomena which occur in the case under consideration; namely, the parallel growth of the amphibole about the pyroxene, both augite and hypersthene; the separation of fine magnetite dust, and the production of lime-rich minerals, both epidote and calcite. There can be no doubt, however, that, in this case, the hornblende is primary, in the sense that it commenced to form as a result of the reaction of the liquid part of the magma with the already crystallized pyroxene, and later formed idiomorphic crystals; and it seems equally certain from the mode of occurrence and chemical nature of the epidote and calcite, that these also may be deuteric minerals, which have been released by the reactions during the consolidation of the magma, just as quartz may occur in quartz-dolerites and quartz-monzonites containing olivine. Chemical analyses of the typical diorite-gabbro and hornblende-gabbro are given in columns I and II below (p. 170). The analyses are peculiar in showing high percentages of lime and magnesia and fairly high iron oxides, which, however, might be expected from the basic character of the plagioclase, and the high content of ferro-magnesian minerals. The relatively high percentages of titania and phosphoric acid account for the abundance of sphene and apatite in these rocks. : A study of the norms of the two rocks is interesting. The diorite-gabbro contains more than 56%, and the hornblende-gabbro less than 42% of salic minerals; also the norm of the former contains 1% of quartz (which does not appear in the mode), while nearly 4% of olivine appears in the norm of the 170 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, latter. This would place both rocks near the border line of “saturated” and “under-saturated” rocks of Professor Shand (1927, p. 124). The close relationship between the diorite-gabbro and hornblende-gabbro is further indicated by their positions in adjacent rangs of the same order according to the C.I.P.W. Classification. / 1 | | i la. || Sessa | IIa. 100, IIIa. in, } SiOnieeree: 50-44 0-841 49-38 0-823 50-04 0-834 48-24 AVON UE Ge. 17-05 0-167 13-89 0-135 18-68 0-183 17-88 HO rene: 2-43 0-015 1:89 0-012 0-80 0-005 3-16 HeOner eee 5-24 0-073 | 6-30 0-088 6-91 0-096 5-95 WO) “ene 10-85 0-271 | 15-82 0-395 7-79 0-195 7-51 CHO” ‘acusoos 9-80 0-175 10-12 0-180 9-88 0-177 10-99 INEKOMP Re 1-51 0-024 | 0-54 0-009 2-35 0-038 2-55 BARON Meese: 0-92 0-010 | 0-69 0-007 0-12 0-001 0-89 TROP le yacstels 0-65 = 0-58 = 1:74 anes ioe. 1st Os eee 0-06 | 0-13 = 0-28 pak 1-45 “UO )y Waeonce 1-10 0-014 | 0-96 0-012 0-80 0-010 0-97 PRO th tk 0-43 0-003 | 0-30 0-002 0-16 0-001 0-28 IMENO) on eee 0-11 0-001 0-14 0-002 0-14 0-001 0-13 O. Con. — — — — 0-89 | — — | (EST ene | 1 ales Aan ToraL 100-59 ae 100-74 real 100-58 | te 100-00 Sp. Gr 2-932 = | 2-989 at 2-977 | ee ae | The norms are as follows: If Il. Ii. QUWATEZ, aeipe sess Cueshe, 1-58 — 2°10 Orthoclasemeerrrer ra | 5:56 3°89 0-56 ASD ICO herria Sek erases elie 12:58 4-72 21-13 ANNOYING Goocooscse 36:97 33:08 40-03 Wiepsides Bey kcie wes 7:07 11-92 6:77 Hypersthene....... 29-68 37:13 27-04 ONVAIT Cin cneeer weno 3°86 Malenetiter ss iacte a | 3°48 2°78 1: imvemite ava are sens 2:13 1-82 1-52 ADAGICE, | PS clatter done 1:01 0-67 0-34 I. Diorite-Gabbro, Kelly’s Point, Por. 215, Par. Congo. 10 mls. S.E. of Moruya. Auvergnose [”III, 5, 4, 4]. Anal. L.A.B. II. Hornblende-Gabbro, 4 ml. N. of Kelly’s Pt. Por. 290, Par. Congo. Kedabekose [III, 5, (4)5, —]. Anal. 1.A.B. Ill. Diorite (?), Murgatroyd’s Tunnel, New England Dist., Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., 1905-9, Vol. 8, p. 216. Anal. J. C. H. Mingaye, Auvergnose [(II)III, 5, at Bye IV. Average of all Gabbros (Osann), quoted from Daly, Igneous Rocks, 1914, p. 27, Column 52. For comparison, the analysis of a dioritic rock from the New England District is given in column II. It is very similar to the diorite-gabbro, although BY IDA BROWN. 171 the magnesia percentage is not quite so high. Although the exact mode of occurrence of the New England rocks is not given in Mr. Andrews’ paper, its association with granites, comparable in chemical character with the Moruya granodiorites and other types, including aplites and lamprophyres which have their equivalents on the South Coast, suggests a similar course of magmatic differentiation and possibly a similar structural cause. The analysis quoted in column IV is that of the average of all gabbros, including olivine-gabbro, given by Osann, and used by Daly (1914, p. 26). The principal distinction lies in the fact that the average gabbro contains more lime than magnesia, whereas the reverse is true in the case of each of the rocks from Moruya. Nomenclature of the Basic Plutonic Rocks. The peculiar chemical nature and mineral constitution of the so-called diorite- gabbro demands some comment, and the name requires some justification. In the handspecimen the rock has a typical “‘dioritic’” appearance, being medium-grained and containing nearly equal proportions of light and dark-coloured minerals. Under the microscope it is found that the felspar is labradorite, Ab,, An,;,, and the chief ferro-magnesian mineral is hornblende. According to Harker (1908) the rock would be classified as ‘hornblende diorite’. Other petrologists, such as Daly (1909) and Iddings (1909, Vol. I, p. 376) would call it rather “horrblende gabbro” on account of the calcic nature of the plagioclase. Also, as the silica percentage is less than 52, it would be placed in the gabbro family by Hatch (1914, pp. 195, 216). The high percentages of lime and magnesia certainly indicate an affinity with the gabbros. It has already been seen that similar difficulty would be encountered in classifying it according to Professor Shand’s scheme. On the whole, it is considered that the name ‘diorite-gabbro” conveys the best idea of its characteristics, and distinguishes it from the allied but more basic hornblende-gabbro. Segregation Veins and Patches in the Gabbros. Reference has already been made to the variety of differentiation products occurring as veins and irregular patches through the diorite-gabbro, caused by the activity of magmatic solutions during the later stages of consolidation of the magma. These segregations are usually more coarsely grained than the enclosing rock, but are not invariably so; as a rule they are lighter in colour than the gabbro, on account of the predominance of felspar over the ferro-magnesian minerals: they are thus of the nature of pegmatites and aplites. Occasionally, however, the dark minerals preponderate and there is developed a kind of lamprophyric rock. ‘ In all cases the actual boundaries of the segregations are irregular and ill-defined. Sometimes veins of felspathic material about 1 mm. in thickness may extend from the segregation for a short distance along joint planes through the diorite-gabbro, but there is every reason for believing that the formation of these segregations took place when the diorite-gabbro was still hot, and not entirely consolidated, and in fact that the segregations represent the final stages of consolidation of the gabbroic magma. 172 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, Two varieties of coarse-grained pegmatities are worthy of note: one is ‘characterized by abundance of orthoclase, and the other by plagioclase. The orthoclase-bearing rock occurs in the diorite-gabbro on a small headland about a quarter of a mile south of Kelly’s Point. The rock (M 309) is coarse and even- grained, the absolute grainsize being more than 1 cm. It consists of approxi- mately 65% of pink orthoclase, 25% of black, idiomorphic hornblende, and 10% of white oligoclase, of the composition Ab;; An, A small quantity of iron pyrites is present. On the southern side of the cliffs half a mile north of Kelly’s Point, several veins of coarse felspathic material, somewhat similar to this rock, again occur through the diorite-gabbro. The ferro-magnesian constituent is practically absent, and the vein consists of about 95% of pink orthoclase, and the rest of white glassy plagioclase. By far the more common type of pegmatite is that consisting chiefly of white plagioclase and black, idiomorphic hornblende, which may reach a length of 4 ecm. Some orthoclase is usually present, and also relatively large grains of sphene. The plagioclase is oligoclase, Abs) Ano. Another interesting type of segregation is that developed on the southern part of Kelly’s Point, which has the appearance of a hornblende-lamprophyre. It occurs in irregular patches, and consists of black hornblende in stumpy crystals about 5 mm. in thickness, and comprising about 40% of the rock, set in a dark greenish groundmass of finely crystalline material. Under the microscope the hornblende shows characters similar to that in the gabbros, being colour-zoned, and containing remnants of augite. The groundmass consists of andesine and colourless augite in almost equal proportions, with some green hornblende, sphene, apatite and interstitial epidote. Inclusions in the Granodiorite. There are numerous dark inclusions and “basic segregations’” in some parts of the granodiorite and tonalite, particularly along the eastern and southern portions of their outcrops. Narrow veins of the granodiorite frequently intrude the inclusions, and aplite veins traverse host and inclusion alike. These inclusions may be divided into two classes, (a) rocks of sedimentary origin, and (6) igneous rocks. (a). The first class contains almost exclusively fragments of quartz-schists, which vary in size from a few inches to several feet in diameter. These inclusions are generally angular, and retain distinct evidence of original bedding similar to that of the intruded quartz-schists of the district. The schist appears to have sharp boundaries against the granodiorite. Under the microscope it is seen to be entirely crystalline, and to consist of quartz, a greenish-brown mica. and some plagioclase. Inclusions of this class are undoubtedly fragments of country rock included in the intrusive igneous mass, and are thus “accidental xenoliths”. (b). The rocks included in the second class call for closer consideration. At Moruya these inclusions are far more abundant than those belonging to the first class. There is no doubt that they are not true segregations or secretions which have crystallized in the position in which they are now found, although it is possible that they may have exerted some such influence upon the crystallization of the adjacent rock as that postulated by Bowen (1922, p. 539). BY IDA BROWN. 173 This type of inclusion is usually spheroidal, and consists of a rock which is more finely grained than the normal granodiorite or tonalite. It is really a quartz-mica-diorite. Frequently phenocrysts of plagioclase and poikilitic flakes of biotite are present (Plate xvii, fig. 4). A typical specimen consists of plagioclase, biotite, green hornblende, interstitial quartz, and a small amount of interstitial orthoclase, iron ore, acicular crystals of apatite, with occasional sphene, zircon and iron pyrites. The peculiar habit of the ragged flakes of biotite enclosing crystals of other minerals, notably felspars, in a poikilitic manner, is quite characteristic, and resembles the structure of some normal mica-diorites. The following is the chemical composition of a typical specimen of this class of inclusion. SION a kei 58-58 0-976 INO, s0d0c 18-33 0-179 (OP eee 1:96 0-012 PCO) aes swe 5-01 0-069 MEO). talnrarcecne 3°69 0-092 Norm. CaO Bees. 6:14 0-110 QUEL Zire ee Le ee eRe Ue 21-36 INIA) soooc 1-99 0-032 Orthoclasek er Awg as ccebs bis Se ates 7-78 ESO" saber 1-28 0-014 NA ay liye Wea ee eer aes OREN oe ee OI 16°77 IBLO) +b soc00 1-44 — AMORTMED seocccce000000000 28-63 IBLO= ooo. 0-09 — GOrLMGUNat sere ike eee tere 3°06 aDO)S Eerste ene 1:06 0:014 IEDAOSESUNEME s55000000000000 15:27 1IZO- Sopeos 0-30 0-002 WIENGES) 45050500055 000000 2-78 WiGXKO Socba6 0-19 0-003 MMVe Nites Vea ess arsateces eens es owes 2°13 aAN a CALE pectgrd een isin ke aca Lestenetireds 0-67 TOTAL 100-06 Spe Gr Sac. 2-808 Basic Inclusion in Granodiorite, Quarry near Moruya, M.L.4, Par. Tomaga. Bandose [II, 4, “4, 4]. Anal. I.A.B. A comparison of this analysis with that of the granodiorite shows that there is the same order of difference in the chemical characters of the inclusion and host as that which has been observed by Harker and Marr (1891, p. 279), Phillips (1880, p. 1), and others. With a relative decrease in the amount of silica and alkalis in the inclusion, there is a corresponding increase in the amounts of iron, lime and magnesia. On reference to the variation-diagram for the plutonic complex, given on page 183, it will be seen that the composition of a hypothetical member of the complex containing 58% per cent. of silica, is remarkably close to that of the included quartz-mica-diorite. It therefore seems quite probable that the host and inclusion are co-magmatic, and that the quartz-mica-diorite represents an early-formed member of the igneous series, which was shattered and included in the grano- diorite during its injection into its present position. These “basic segregations” are therefore really “cognate xenoliths”. (iv). Field Occurrence and Petrography of the Dykes. Associated with the Moruya plutonic complex and the related sediments are several systems of dykes, some of which are clearly hypabyssal equivalents of the plutonic series, and others whose relationships are more obscure. Individual dykes vary in width from one or two feet to about twelve or fourteen feet, but the majority average a thickness of about four feet, and they are generally vertical. 174 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, In some areas they are very numerous, although individual dykes cannot usually be traced for any great distance, on account of surface weathering. The directions of strike of the dykes seem to bear a definite relation to the lithological character of the dyke, and are probably dependent on the directions of crustal strain and stresses acting prior to and during the time of their injection. For this reason it will be convenient to consider them in the following order, which is probably the order of their intrusion. (1) Muscovite-granite apophysis. (2) Granite-aplites and pegmatites, including graphic pegmatite. (3) Hornblende-quartz-porphyrite and granite-porphyry. (4) Mica-lamprophyre. (5) A variety of intermediate and basic types. (1) A dyke of muscovite-biotite-granite occurs in the Moruya Council’s metal quarry at Yarragee, about a mile west of Moruya, where it intrudes vertically bedded and banded quartz-schists, along their direction of strike, which is almost north and south. It is about four feet in width and consists of granite very similar to the border phases of the biotite-granite in the main batholith. In thin section the rock shows a rather coarsely crystalline texture, and the grainsize is variable; it is granitoid and shows evidence of considerable strain. It consists of quartz as irregular interlocking grains, acid plagioclase (oligoclase), orthoclase and microperthite similar to that in the biotite-granite, with abundant muscovite in parallel intergrowth with biotite. The biotite contains numerous tiny, dark brown haloes, in the centre of which a crystal of zircon may occasionally be detected. A small amount of iron ore is present. It is noteworthy that muscovite does not occur in the biotite-granite normally, except in some of the border phases and apophyses. (2) The granite-aplites and pegmatites show some variation in composition and texture; they usually intrude the granodiorite and tonalite, but they also occur in the diorite-gabbro. There is greater variation in the direction of strike and the amount of dip in the case of the aplites than in any of the other dyke-rocks. In the quarry on the north side of the Moruya River, narrow veins of aplite, less than one inch in thickness, traverse the granodiorite, dipping in a direction N. 45° H. at about 45°, which is parallel to the direction of strike of the principal joint system in the granodiorite. Veins of this type may be seen in the granite columns of the G.P.O., Sydney. In the quarry on the southern side of the River (Louttit’s), there are four or five veins of aplite about one inch in thickness, and from three to eight feet apart, as well as a dyke two feet in thickness, which dip S. 40° W. at 50°. These veins always cut through the slaty and other inclusions in the granodiorite. There is a series of eight or nine fine-grained aplitic dykes on the shore of Lake Coila about a mile north of the Bar. They average about two feet in width, and are only a few yards apart, running in a direction W. 20° N. Half a mile to the north are numbers of smaller aplite veins. Several aplite dykes intrude the tonalite of the Tuross peninsula, between Lakes Coila and Tuross, running in a direction N. 60° E. and others occur between Lake Coila and the sea. One dyke in portion 294, Parish of Congo, appears to have been faulted at right angles, resulting in the concentration of ground water at the intersection of dyke and fault, with the formation of a small spring or permanent soakage. BY IDA BROWN. 175 South of Kelly’s Point there are two well-defined dykes which dip to the north at 60°, and form prominent outcrops through the beach-sand; one has weathered to a yellow colour and the other is red. The widest aplite dyke is that at Kelly’s Point, indicated on the sketch-map on page 153. It is about twelve feet thick and dips to the north-east at 40°, but is not constant in direction as it swings round to the north. It has intruded the tonalite, which in turn has intruded the diorite-gabbro, but is intruded by the later basaltic dykes. Unweathered specimens of this dyke were chosen for analysis as being representative of the aplites. The microscope shows it to be a fine-grained and aplitic rock, consisting of quartz, acid plagioclase and some biotite, with abundant interstitial orthoclase, which has been the last mineral to crystallize out. No muscovite has been observed in this particular rock, although some of the other aplites contain small amounts of both biotite and muscovite, while in others there is a complete absence of any minerals other than quartz, orthoclase and acid plagioclase. The chemical analysis of this aplite is quoted below. I. | Ta. 11. IIa. a | ames — SiG) ci Mila A 77-92 | 1-299 74-00 1-233 INO ocebetoce soul ac 11:99 0-118 14-49 0-142 WEOn soocvovcsoccc00s 0:21 0-001 1-10 0-007 TOON aie enter ante Soleionece as 0:74 0-010 0-45 0-006 VE OM a een ee es, SEMIS Sars 0:24 | 0-006 0:44 0-011 GRO). 3.4 ian cere oid een ered 1:23 0-021 0-92 0-016 INGROMy oho iy ll Peet. 2-29 | 0-037 3-29 0-053 IES ole. niseraey opal o cue 4-78 | 0-051 4-85 0-051 [SLO ae eee 0-26 | — 0-56 _ TEL O—= beso vecogoccogs 0:14 | — 0-18 — GO), lees Sisto Wore DERoN abs. | = abs — IMO, nécanocecvoulbo oD 0-18 0-003 0:14 0-002 15. Soe wrotels Somecia ororarars 0:03 0-05 — WOK OOS ceskcusn ircncrvo Renee o trace — 0-08 0-001 TBO). Sp alee meateeeke aeiaeearnOrs — — 0:06 0:001 BIRO IVANTS rah he coe eo ecsicisl see 100-01 — 100-61 — Sin, Ghoy See Se eee 2-646 | — 2-630 Norms. I Lele Quartz: BAS aoe eens 43-02 re 33-84 OTtHO CLAS SH aases eoet casa see ees ye 28-36 AG 28°36 IAVDIte. GRRE e rca Oisten se crer scope 19-39 es 27°77 Anorthitewese sate ee ace 5-84 ne 4-73 Corundumis ence te ee ee 0:92 an 2-14 Hy persthene: tii. ais cesar earl iLo83) Se 1-10 Malenetite sy nas cvigs Ruonaue ace Stats 0-23 eats 1:16 TIME nbe a creel eB eee cess 0-46 ae 0:30 Haemartiter ai Glade wat saree —— ae 0-32 I. Aplite, Kelly’s Point, 10 mls. S.E. of Moruya. Anal. I.A.B. Tehamose [I, 3, 2, “3]. TI. Aplitic Granite, 2 mls. E. of Tenterfield. Anal. J. C. H. Mingaye. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., viii, Pt. 3, 1905-9, p. 225. Tehamose [I, 3(4), (1)2, 3]. Norm re- ealeulated. F 176 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, The rock is a normal aplite. The analysis of an aplitic granite belonging to the euritic period in the history of the New Hngland Tableland intrusions is quoted in Column II to show the close resemblance to the Moruya rock. Some of the acid granites from Bolivia are also very similar. It will be shown later that the rock bears a close magmatic relation to the plutonic types comprising the batholith, and was probably injected shortly after their consolidation. A beautiful example of graphic pegmatite occurs as a dyke on the south- western shore of Lake Coila, in portion 39, Parish of Congo. It consists of crystals of yellowish-pink orthoclase, averaging two inches in diameter, and white acid plagioclase, both graphically intergrown with quartz. Flakes of biotite about half an inch in diameter are associated with the plagioclase. Under the microscope the orthoclase shows also a fine perthitic intergrowth with plagioclase. (3) Dykes of the third class, the hornblende-quartz-porphyrites, have a very wide distribution, occurring throughout the whole of the mapped area, and intrud- ing all phases of the igneous complex, as well as the adjacent slate series. It was found quite impracticable to indicate all of these dykes on the map, as several hundred must occur in the district. The greater number run in a direction slightly north of east, although a few run approximately E. 30° N. and some strike E. 30° S. As a result of weathering, the positions of the dykes (which frequently occur in groups) may be indicated by a series of parallel trenches, or by a series of parallel rock-ridges, depending on the relative resistance to weathering of the intruded and intrusive rock. The dykes are rarely more than a few feet in width. The consistent and characteristic alteration of the rock itself, suggests that such is due not merely to surface weathering, but to magmatic processes which have accompanied or closely followed the dyke formation. It is difficult to obtain a specimen which looks really fresh. The freshest specimens are dark grey in colour, but on weathering the rock becomes light greenish-grey. Often the rock is very fine-grained, so that only crystals of hornblende can be distinguished from the lithoidal groundmass. Coarser varieties show elongated phenocrysts of hornblende or hornblende and plagioclase, never exceeding a few millimetres in length, set in a phanerocrystalline groundmass. Under the microscope, these rocks are seen to be holocrystalline, slightly porphyritic in plagioclase and hornblende or its pseudomorphs. The phenocrysts are set in a fine-grained or even microcrystalline groundmass, consisting chiefly of plagioclase and quartz and the remains of hornblende grains, with a small amount of biotite and muscovite. The fineness of grain of the groundmass makes it difficult to recognize the variety of plagioclase, or the presence of orthoclase with any degree of certainty. The hornblende phenocrysts are idiomorphic, and very seldom fresh. Such as are fresh have a greenish-brown colour approaching that of basaltic hornblende. A characteristic feature is the alteration to grains of clear carbonate material, including calcite, and colourless or pale green epidote, with associated iron ore. Green chloritic material showing prussian-blue interference colours occurs in some cases. The plagioclase phenocrysts are andesine, Ab,; AN,;. The groundmass consists of an intimate association of felspar, chiefly plagio- clase, and quartz. In some cases the felspars occur as stout little prisms with quartz filling the interstices, in other cases (M123, M 206) there is a micrographic intergrowth of the quartz and felspar, producing a kind of granophyric structure. BY IDA BROWN. 177 Occasionally the structure is micropoikilitic, quartz grains forming a matrix for smaller, optically independent grains of felspars. Alteration products such as epidote, chlorite, calcite and iron ore are scattered through the groundmass, and a pale yellow variety of sphene and some apatite crystals are present in some sections. It will be seen that the rock (Plate xviii, fig. 3) is a peculiar type. As a field name “lamprophyre” seems appropriate, and the alteration of hornblende to carbonates and epidote is certainly characteristic; but there is an unusually high percentage of quartz present in the groundmass, which probably indicates peculiar conditions of crystallization. A specimen from a dyke cutting across the main road about half a mile north of Bergalia Store and Post Office, was selected for chemical analysis, as being relatively fresh and representative of the series. The result is given in Column I below. I Ta Tt. Ila oe SHUG} tater ee isas a4 Geclomacen aise 66-11 1-102 69°33 1-155 AIO), og doacc0gvansope 17-26 0-169 15-23 0-149 TENS (ORs aatia Sone orca Choe 0-63 0-004 0:97 0-006 TENEXO)S ie Bae eee ae ee 2-68 0-037 2°56 | 0-035 MIKO)! Biiowenlecen cee oecneionere 1-41 0-035 1-01 0-025 CAO chsorcesoesesovos 4-72 0-084 3:74 0-067 INP OME icra epevsouees ene es PAIL 0-034 2-73 0:044 KO 22 eee 1-02 0-011 1-42 0-015 TSE) tS: ae eae oroiere one ona 1-72 a TofS aie TB. ©) 86 aio ciptcno sro paeiarore 0-10 = 0-18 eres (CO Gah e Peres 1°22 0-027 abs. — TRIO), age ORO nae eee 0-49 0-006 0-94 0-012 P.O. ssseoccccccpagage 0-13 0-001 0:06 0-001 VETO Meas se costlier owes eles 0-12 0-001 0-11 0-001 TOMA sscopoeasgce 99-72 = 99-84 pal | Sin, | Civ at ee 2-719 — 2-711 | _ Norms. Te IDE QUWaTrts IIe seers ws secu Aeneas 39-66 37:80 Orthoclases was ae een 6:12 8-34 Albite! (ie eset earern she cieineee 17-82 23:06 ATO rthitene sae ci ees cep oseeeces ee 15:01 17:79 Corundum@ianeer sane. oe 7-14 2:65 Piypersuhene mares cusciciee sc oe 7-20 4-88 Malan etiten nai sinractaty ns cits ae & 0-93 i3'9 Tiimenitey eer bss nee case 0-91 1-82 PAO OF BIG, brie PBT RCD .0, cee tee 0:34 0-34 I. Hornblende-quartz-porphyrite. Dyke, 4 ml. N. of Bergalia. Aria) See lie Awis Susquehannose [I(II), 3, 3, 4]. II. Granite-porphyry. Condoin Creek, Por. Bio Jeni, ieee, © Amel I.A.B. Susquehannose [I, 3”, 3, 4]. 178 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, The chemical composition thus shows a remarkable similarity to that of the typical granodiorite from Dorman, Long and Company’s quarry, the main difference being that the percentage of alkalis is lower (by two per cent.) in the dyke rock. This is reflected by a decrease in the amount of felspar with a corresponding increase in the amount of quartz in the norm. As a result the rocks are placed in corresponding subrangs of adjacent orders according to the C.I.P.W. classification. Somewhat similar rocks are described by Iddings (1891, p. 588) from Hlectric Peak in the Yellowstone Park, and called by him “porphyrites” of various kinds. The chemical analyses of these rocks show a similar percentage of silica but the alkalis exhibit a slightly higher percentage than in the Moruya rock. Similar dyke-rocks of Palaeozoic age in the Cape Colville Peninsula in the North Island of New Zealand have been described by Professor Sollas (1905, p. 119) as porphyrites, but unfortunately no chemical analyses are available. The frequent alteration of hornblende to epidote is specially noticed in these rocks. The nomenclature of the Moruya dyke-rocks has been the subject of serious consideration, and it seems that the name “hornblende-porphyrite” or “hornblende- quartz-porphyrite’ would be most appropriate for these peculiar types. The analysis given in Column II is that of a granite-porphyry intruding the biotite-granite at Condoin Creek, south-west of Moruya, in portion 33, Parish of Bergalia. Its composition is close to that of the hornblende-quartz-porphyrite. The mode of occurrence is somewhat obscure, as the outcrops are poor. AS far as can be ascertained it occurs as a dyke or small stock near the border of the granite. : In the handspecimen, phenocrysts of plagioclase, quartz and biotite are set in a lithoidal groundmass. Under the microscope, the plagioclase is seen to be oligoclase of the com- position Ab,, An.,, and the groundmass is holocrystalline and consists of felspar, quartz, biotite, green hornblende, iron ore and a little orthoclase and apatite. (4) Mica-lamprophyre outcrops on the shore of Lake Coila in portion 295, Parish of Congo, as a vertical dyke, two feet in width, running in a direction W. 20° N., parallel to the series of associated dykes of aplite, hornblende-porphyrite and more basic types, which are intruding the diorite-gabbro in this locality. The rock shows the characteristic weathering of a lamprophyre, the colour of the fresh rock being light greenish-grey, which changes to a reddish-brown shade on weathering. Idiomorphic biotite is the only mineral visible in the handspecimen. It is very abundant and gives a kind of schistose appearance to the rock. Under the microscope a few grains of altered plagioclase may be seen in addition to biotite, which contains abundant grains of iron ore. The groundmass is microcrystalline and probably felspathic (Plate xviii, fig. 4). Its chemical composition has not been determined, so that its genetic relation- ship with the igneous complex cannot be proved. The occurrence of similar lamprophyres is rather characteristic of the closing phases of igneous activity in many parts of the world. The susceptibility of this type of rock to rapid weathering probably accounts for the fact that no other dykes of a similar character have been observed in the district. (5) Rocks of a basaltic appearance occur as vertical, or steeply inclined dykes intruding all phases of the igneous complex, and also the altered sedimentary series. The width of the dykes varies from two and a half to twelve feet, the BY IDA BROWN. 179 majority being about four feet wide; the direction of strike varies from N. 50° EH. to HE. 10° S. The general trend is about EH. 10° N. The majority of these dyke-rocks are finely grained and dark-coloured, not markedly porphyritic, although there are a few rather striking exceptions. In the handspecimen they may be readily distinguished from the Tertiary basalts, occurring as interbedded flows or sills in the later sediments. Petrographically, there seems to be a fair amount of variation in these basaltic-looking rocks. Some specimens show resemblances to the rocks previously described as hornblende-quartz-porphyrites. The rocks are always holocrystalline, and usually slightly porphyritic. The phenocrysts consist of plagioclase or horn- blende in some cases, or in a few cases they are of colourless augite and pseudo- morphs after olivine. The groundmass is generally medium-grained, and consists of plagioclase and green hornblende, with a small amount of quartz and accessory minerals, apatite and iron ore. -Associated with these basaltic rocks are a few unusual types which deserve special mention, but which are reserved for detailed description in a later com- munication. These outcrop at Kelly’s Point and on the shore of Lake Coila. They contain xenoliths of basic plutonic rocks, and xenocrysts of plagioclase, biotite, brown hornblende, augite and dark red garnet. It is considered that the dykes belonging to the first three groups certainly belong to the later stages of the Palaeozoic igneous activity in this area, and are magmatically related to the plutonic series; there is insufficient evidence for assigning an age to the mica-lamprophyre; while some of the basaltic types containing green hornblende are probably related to the granodiorites, others, particularly those containing large xenocrysts, may be of much later origin. (v). Petrogenesis of the Palaeozoic Igneous Rocks. (a) Genetic Relationships. The field relations and associations of the Palaeozoic igneous rocks naturally lead to the consideration of their magmatic relationships. There is a wide range of rock types from acid to basic, and from plutonic to hypabyssal or volcanic types. The field evidence suggests some magmatic relationships, in that the main intrusion takes the form of a complex batholith in which the later injections of magma have been progressively more acid than the earlier ones. Acid aplite dykes probably represent the later phases of consolidation of the injected magma. Subsequent strains and stresses have caused the development of joints and other planes of weakness, along which dykes of hornblende-quartz-porphyrite and then basaltic and lamprophyric rocks have been injected. The general sequence therefore, is such as might be expected in a complete igneous complex. The mineralogical composition confirms this supposition. For the sake of clearness and simplicity a table is given below showing the mineralogical composition of all the rocks which have been chemically analysed, which comprise most of the principal types described. The rocks are arranged in order of decreasing basicity. It will be seen that the order of crystallization of the minerals present shows a similar order of decreasing basicity. The ferromagnesian minerals, with the exception of biotite, are more abundant in the basic members of the system; some biotite is present throughout the whole series, with a notable increase in amount towards the acid end. The plagioclases by themselves form a definite index of the composition of the rock; the oldest 180 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, rocks, the gabbro and gabbro-diorite, are characterized by labradorite of fairly constant composition, the tonalite and granodiorite show a variation from andesine to oligoclase-andesine, while the later biotite-granite contains oligoclase of a constant composition. Orthoclase is important only in the biotite-granite and aplite, although smaller quantities do occur in the more basic types. Quartz is present in all but the basic types, increasing in abundance in the acid members. = £ ; E : Sr oLusnabs Bro) eS Blase 9 lle os Gy u ‘Da - o u a = o 6 5 © a= & © 3 @ = ue) a hi ; Ay es ig ) 5 d 6 = N ® D S 1 = » = Lo} ae) » | ov o eS) = be) On lo 5 g ‘ fe) = “4 @ ° (| a a oa o q i=] a g iI fan} 2 64 {o) a= 2 aS) by So) ® H ae} Si = a S A fq a bs O en) a foo : : S ; “5 i < Hi = > S S = 4 4 = = H ma > > S 4 yA IGPOMD OKO sooonacdoas + | + + + + oh - =. + ue | @bivaime yrs etecye tem eecceu ? — = | — ce Wh oe — = — = Hypersthene ....... + — = = — — = = as a | INURE! Py toneh sce eigi senor se | a = | = —> || — ee = ane ed | Brown Hornblende .. + | > — — —_ — ? <2 = —= Green Hornblende .. + + + | + se a ZY i = -- — | | IBTOEIEED Bay a waist coeke a + + + + + aL a0 a = IMEBIEKCONAN®) 566 G00%000 — — == = = | = + | — <= 2 | | Labradorite ........ + + == os = | a= per es pte stn | | INDCSINS osococcaco0dc — — ® + + + 4+ | — = | = | | | Oligoclase ......... = — = == oo == pats sh + + | | Orthoclase ......... — — se 4 Se a. + ? | ak. + | + i} | H Quan wena erence — — + + + + + + + | + | SONNE cooccvcco500 qe | oF 4- + + ;, + + | — — — INGO stoeg ia a ORO OOO se || oF + + +) + ? =E + | ? | | ZAMPOOIN, “gogocacoac0000 = | = + + + + a= 2 + are | | IDJOMCIOUE oboosdsooodcn + — a= — == om ab. Tats a ale @allciten hen asoe ser + | — = | — = | = ib) el See | | | | Of the accessory minerals, iron ore and apatite occur in small quantities throughout; sphene is in greater abundance than is usual, especially toward the BY IDA BROWN. 181 basic end of the series, and zircon is relatively important in the granodiorite and biotite-granite. Epidote and calcite occur in unweathered specimens of the gabbro and the hornblende-quartz-porphyrite alone, where they are undoubtedly minerals of late- magmatic or deuteric crystallization. The chemical evidence is probably the most convincing in proving the con- sanguinity of the rocks under consideration. A table of the chemical analyses of < > bee i ~ = Ld bo g An XN @& © SS 1. CUna sane Sees eee 50 \ [ ° jp ESS f\- -4---4-->- -|---4—— Diorite-Gabbro pean} =| =) |-.-.—| Basic Inclusion | -.-4---J---1—| Jonalite anodiorite SSS peep Ease = Granodiorite | VWHbQtzPorphyrite APSE Helical By Spies ee eae |__| GranitePorphyry 7 eC peal ee eT enn = pool. -- bo. A plite 80 Text-fig. 4.—Variation diagram for the igneous complex of the Moruya district. 182 PALAKOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, all the rocks from this district, which have been analysed by the writer, is given below in the same order as in the mineralogical table, thus including -the chief plutonic types, some of the important dyke rocks, and a cognate xenolith from the granodiorite. It will be seen that on the whole there is a gradation throughout the series for each of the constituent oxides. This has effected a corresponding variation in the values of the specific gravities, which are quoted below the analyses. A table of the calculated norms further bears out the consanguinity of the various members of the series, which is emphasized in the table of their classifica- tions by the regular gradation in class, order, rang and subrang alike. The ten chemical analyses have been plotted to form a variation-diagram (Text-fig. iv) of the type used by Harker (1909, p. 129), where the silica percentages are used as abscissae, giving a range of nearly 30 per cent., and the percentages of the other oxides are plotted as ordinates. Smoothed curves have been drawn through the mean positions of these points. The curves thus obtained give the best picture of the series as a whole, showing without doubt the genetic relationships of the series, which forms a true plutonic complex, including basic, intermediate and very acid types. A consideration of the form of each of the curves representing the various oxides shows that the series is a typical subalkaline or calcic assemblage, characterized by the flat convex curve for alumina, concave declining curve for magnesia, and declining curves, almost straight lines, for lime and iron oxides; the curves for the alkalis, particularly potash, show a rise from the basic to the acid end of the series. Another feature shown by the analyses is the relative importance of titania: in the basic gabbro the amount of titania is greater than that of either soda or potash. ast: iat, ||, Jods, IV. Vv. VI. Vag, || Vaan, |) Tos X. | SHOW aeae | 49-38 | 50-44| 58-58 | 61-44| 65-72 | 65-83] 66-11 | 69-33] 70-78 | 77-92 ATROm wake 13-89 | 17-05/. 18-33 | 17-61 | 1763 | 16-44] 17-26 | 415-23) 15-77 || 11-99 GO, ssoee 1-89 2:43| 1-96 1-86 | 0-42 1:03} 0-63 0-97 0-69 0-21 SO) su ocou 6-30 5-24| 5-01 3-59 | 2-80 3-33| 2-68 256 | 2-44 0-74 MeO 00a: 15-82 | 10-85| 3-69 3-09 | 1-73 2-00 | 1-41 1-01 |* 0-72 0-24 Cau) aA 10-12 9-80| 6-14 5-88 | 4-36 4-24| 4-72 3-74 | 2-53 1:23 NaOU fae. 0-54 1:51| 1-99 2:03 | 3-14 2-25 | 2-11 2-73] 2-88 2-29 320) Vases 0-69 0-92) 1-28 1-03 | 2-12 3-40 | 1-02 142 | 2-44 4-78 BOO ye Be 0-58 405 |) tele 1-17| 1-03 0-67| 1-72 1:56 | 0-50 0-26 SOS aes 0-13 0-06 0-09 0-10} 0-06 0-10} 0-10 0:18 | 0-06 0-14 FO), soouae 0-96 1:10| 1-06 1:42 | 0-41 0-78 | 0-49 0-94] 0-45 0-18 POU ge anee 0-30 0-43 0-30 0-33 | 0-19 0-21] 0-13 0:06 | 0-25 0-03 MnO! oe ocak | 0-14 Q-11) 0-19 0-09 | 0-08 0-08| 0-12 O11) 0-08 | Tr Other con- | } | stituents. | — — | - == 0-32 — 1-22 — | — — | } | ToraL .. [Agena 100-59 100-06 | 99-64 / 100-01 | 100-36 | 99-72 | 99-84) 99-59 | 100-01 | i Sp. Gr. ..../ 2-989 | 2-932 | 2-808 | 2-768| 2-729 | 2-741 | 2-719 | 2-711] 2-688 | 2-646 BY IDA BROWN. 183 I. II. III. INS, Vv. Vi. VII. VIII. WS x, Quartz : — 1:38 21°36 PAH (4 25:92 26-22 39-66 37°80 36°84 43-02 Orthoclase . 3-89 5-56 7-78 6-67 | 12-23 | 20-02 6-12 8-34 | 14-46 | 28-36 Albite ..... 4-72 12-58 16-77 16:77 26:72 18-86 17:82 23:06 24-63 19°39 Anorthite .. 33:08 36-97 28-63 27-24 20°85 20:29 15-01 17:79 11:68 5-84 Corundum — —- 3°06 3:16 2°55 1:63 7-14 2:65 4-08 0:92 Zircon — — — — 0:37 — — — ace == Diopside 11-92 7:07 — — — = — —_— oo — Hypersthene 37°13 29-68 15:27 10-60 8-26 22 7:20 4-88 5:23 1:39 Olivine 3°86 — — — — — — — — — Maegnetite 2-78 3°48 2-78 2°55 0:70 1:39 0:93 1:39 0-93 0-23 Ilmenite ... 1:82 2-13 2:13 2:74 0-76 1°37 0-91 1:82 0:76 0-46 Pyrite — — — — 0:24 — — — — sae Apatite .... 0-67 1-01 0:67 0-67 0:34 0:34 0-34 0-34 0-34 _- Glass)... IIL Zatti II TT CG) | WGaH) || sae) I I I Order ..... 5 5 4 (3)4 4 4 3 BY By 3 Rang ..... (4)5 4 “4a “4 3 3 3 3 2(3) 2 Subrang ... = 4 4 4 4 3 4 4 (3)4 "3 2 2 z x (e) ° ° (e) . 9 is) S fo} ¢ Vo 2 2 2 o of @ opt yl Q Q n ° E é z ah 5 OB 38 g o o ° ° ° [S| ©) go @ é Sea: eS ae ee (ee Tae |e 2 3 a S oh ae | gh | oh | Se G 5 a i s ote z ae Sip =I BH 5 &0 3S > SI ae = ae RS Re Be & a o 5 3 3S © g a i aS oO = < aa 6 ea < n n < = I. Gabbro (M.109). Il. Diorite-gabbro (M.278). Kelly’s Point. III. Inclusion in Granodiorite (M.121). Kelly’s Point, south-east of Moruya. IV. Tonalite (Quartz-Diorite). (M.175). Kelly’s Point. V. Granodiorite (M.122). Quarry, 2 mls. E#. of Moruya. VI. Granodiorite (M.127). 1 mile south-west of Moruya. VII. Hornblende-quartz-Porphyrite (M.123). Dyke, near Bergalia. VIII. Granite-porphyry (M.233). IX. Biotite-Granite (M.343). 3 mls. north-west of Moruya X&. Aplite (M.105). Quarry, 2 mls. EF. of Moruya. Condoin Creek, south-west of Moruya. Dyke, Kelly’s Point, 10 mls. south-east of Moruya. There is a marked similarity between the series at Moruya and the classic series at Garabal Hill, which was described by Dakyns and Teall (1892, pp. 104-121) and later by Wyllie and Scott (19138). In the case of Garabal Hill the silica percentages range from 38-6 to 75-8, and thus differ slightly from those at Moruya. Within the latter limits the modified variation-diagram for the Garabal Hill series, as given by Harker (1909, p. 129), bears a striking resemblance to that of the Moruya series. The only real difference is the relatively sudden change in the amount of curvature of the oxide-curves between the diorite-gabbro and the more basic gabbro at Moruya, which is suggestive of complementary, as opposed to serial differentiation. This idea is supported by the nature of the field occurrence of the hornblende-gabbro. Never- theless the senses or directions of curvature in the basic ends of both the Garabal Hill and the Moruya series are similar. c 184 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, (0). Shape and Nature of the Intrusion. The intrusive nature of the igneous mass may be seen at its junction with quartz-schists, about half a mile east of Dorman, Long and Co.’s main quarry, M.L.4, Parish of Tomaga, where a chilled marginal phase of aplitic granite is developed for a short distance from the contact. A somewhat similar aplitic granite is developed at the contact with slates near the 5-mile peg from Moruya towards Sydney. Also at Yarragee a couple of miles west of Moruya, a granitic dyke, closely related to the granodiorite mass, has intruded quartz-schists in the Council’s metal quarries. About a mile and a half south-west of the town of Moruya there are several small patches of folded sedimentary rocks, which appear to have been rifted off the roof of the magma- chamber, as the fold-axes are not parallel to those uniformly developed in the adjacent sediments. No assimilation of these sediments has been observed in the granodiorite. East of Moruya, there are other examples of included sediments, the largest of which was probably not detached, but formed a “roof-pendant” as defined by Daly (1914, p. 100). It occurs in portions 121 and 122, Parish of Moruya, and consists of meridionally folded, banded quartzites and slates, with interbedded tuffaceous and other volcanic material. The junction with granodiorite is sharply defined in many places, and there appears to be no trace of assimilation. Elsewhere, the actual junction between the igneous rock and the altered sediments is obscured by weathering products, but the mass cuts across the bedding planes of the associated slates and schists, apparently without affecting their direction of strike. Numerous small inclusions of country rock in the granodiorite, and the slight, though marked, parallel banding it exhibits parallel to the main trend of its out- crop, and the well-marked zone of contact metamorphism are considered to be further evidences of its intrusive nature. ; No vertical cross-sections of the intrusion are available, but from a study of the detailed map of the district, and the foregoing description, it is obvious that the intrusion is portion of a batholith, which is elongated in a north-north-westerly direction and which has cut across the planes of bedding and schistosity of the country rock. These features are shown by Daly (1914, p. 95) to be characteristic of batholiths, although there may be some doubt as to whether the longer axis of the batholith is, in this case, “parallel to the tectonic axis of the mountain-built zone in which the mass is situated”. It is at least interesting to note that the main trend of the Moruya River from Merricumbene to Larry’s Crossing, where the river has entrenched itself to a depth of several hundreds of feet in the slate series, is in a direction approximately parallel to the elongation of the batholith, evidently following a line of weakness in this direction, possibly along a Palaeozoic fault-zone. The deflection of the river course to a southerly direction for four miles below Larry’s Crossing is due to the outcrop of a hard bar of quartz-felspar- porphyry, as shown on the general map of the district. Dr. H. I. Jensen (1908, p. 306) has noted faulting, through Devonian rocks in the Ettrema gorges near Sassafras, where Rolfe’s ‘“‘creek follows . . . . an old fault running N.N.W. to S.S.E. and antedating the deposition of Permo- Carboniferous strata’. This area lies to the north of Moruya, where the slates are overlain by Permo- Carboniferous strata, except where they are exposed by stream erosion. BY IDA BROWN. 185 (c). History of the Intrusion. Summarizing the events which have taken place in the igneous history, it is evident that there was first an intrusion of basic rocks, hornblende-gabbro and diorite-gabbro, along a zone of weakness in a north-north-westerly direction through folded early Palaeozoic sediments. This intrusion was followed by an injection of tonalite and granodiorite, and later by biotite-granite, each of which has its own peculiar and characteristic composition, yet shows indubitable evidence of consanguinity with the other types, the whole series occurring as a plutonic complex in the form of a composite batholith. The cooling and contraction of the plutonic rocks allowed the formation of veins and dykes of aplite from the residual magma, and at a later period, dykes of intermediate and more basic composition, the hornblende-quartz-porphyrites and basaltic types, were injected along fissures generally parallel to the system of joints, which are transverse to the batholithic axis. The metalliferous deposits in the neighbourhood of Condoin Creek, south-west of Moruya, probably represent the closing phase of this igneous activity. Thus all the evidence available, the field relations and the mineralogical and chemical evidence, points to the fact that magmatic differentiation of a serial nature has been effected by some means in the original magma-reservoir. It seems that the differentiation has not taken place in the position in which the rocks now occur, for there are definite intrusive relations between the gabbro and the tonalite, and there is not a gradual transition in the composition of the three main plutonic types, gabbro, tonalite-granodiorite, and biotite-granite. With the exception of dyke rocks, the “basic segregations” are the only rocks which are intermediate in composition between these main types, and it has been shown that they are really cognate xenoliths. Further, the disposition of the outcrops of the chief rock-types does not indicate differentiation in place. If separation into basic and acid fractions of the magma had occurred, it might be expected that the basic portion would occupy the lower part of the magma- chamber, yet actually the gabbros occur at higher altitudes than the more acid types, although there is no evidence in the surrounding invaded sediments that any tilting movement has taken place in the district. The occurrence of granite at Conjola, seventy miles north and also near Bodalla, fifteen miles south of Moruya, apparently identical with the biotite- granite north-west of Moruya, suggests a common source of origin in an inter- erustal reservoir. It is considered that the batholith at Moruya is but one expression of Palaeozoic igneous activity in the South Coast district, and that the complete history will not be known until the other granitic and monzonitic intrusions of the South Coast have been studied. Attention has already been called to the similarity of the chemical nature of the series at Moruya and at Garabal Hill, and closer investigation reveals other resemblances. The series at Garabal Hill was used by Harker (1909) as an example of a typical subalkaline plutonic complex, and later Bowen (1922, p. 189) used it to illustrate the reaction principle in petrogenesis. At Moruya, as well as at Garabal Hill, the order of intrusion is that of decreasing basicity and increasing alkalinity, which is considered by Brogger (1895) to be the normal order of intrusion. Also, there are parallel orders of appearance and disappearance of the constituent minerals in both series, which, according to Bowen, “is the very essence of the reaction series’ as opposed to eutectic crystallization. Nevertheless, both series are really discontinuous in that they contain two gaps, one between the basic and intermediate types and one between 186 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, the intermediate and acid plutonic rocks, thus presenting certain difficulties in the explanation of the differentiation. These difficulties led Wyllie and Scott to postulate a separate origin of the ultrabasic and acid magmas at Garabal Hill. At Moruya, the obvious genetic relationships of the exposed rocks do not seem to be in accordance with this idea, and the most probable explanation of the rock association appears to be that differentiation of an originally homogeneous magma took place in an intercrustal reservoir by means of fractional crystalliza- _tion and the sinking of crystals, similar to that postulated by Bowen (1915-1919). Orogenic earth movements took place when the liquid portion of the magma had reached about the composition of the diorite-gabbro, and portion of this magma was injected along the zone of weakness in the upper layers of the earth’s crust, now occupied by the Moruya batholith. This portion of the magma crystallized as the diorite-gabbro. Meanwhile, crystallization-differentiation of the remaining liquid was proceed- ing quietly in the main magma chamber, the liquid becoming progressively more acid as the minerals of early crystallization were formed. Further earth move- ments caused relief of pressure and allowed of the injection of a portion of the remaining liquid magma, possessing at this time a composition about that of the tonalite and granodiorite. As a relatively large portion of this was injected, it is possible that some local differentiation took place during its consolidation, or the injected magma may have been already partly differentiated, thus producing the variation from tonalite to granodiorite. Further differentiation of the magma in the main reservoir produced a liquid still more acid than the granodiorite, and later movement allowed of its intrusion into the position now occupied by the biotite-granite. It seems feasible that the masses of hornblende-gabbro and the quartz-mica- diorite xenoliths, both of which are more basic than their hosts, the diorite-gabbro and granodiorite respectively, were fragments of more or less consolidated portions of the original magma, which were carried up and included in the injected magmas. The true segregation veins and patches in the diorite-gabbro are undoubtedly the final products of consolidation of the magma in place, and probably many of the aplite veins and dykes have been formed in a similar manner from the grano- diorite; the origin of the later porphyrite and basaltic dykes is more obscure, and no satisfactory explanation is offered for their occurrence. This interpretation of the plutonic differentiation seems to be in accordance with the main facts, explaining as it does (i) that the chief types are members of a continuous series produced by serial differentiation, and that they are really evidences of the composition of the liquid part of the magma at certain stages in its history; (ii) the normal order of decreasing basicity in the intrusion of the main types; (iii) the relatively uniform composition of the individual types, which were injected during short periods of diastrophism; (iv) the gaps in the series, which represent periods of quiescence, when differentiation was proceeding with- out interruption in the intercrustal reservoir; (v) the shape of the batholith, elongated in the direction of crustal weakness; and (vi) the occurrence in neigh- bouring localities of granite of the same character as that in the batholith, as earth movements probably caused relief of pressure and opportunity for the injection of magma of uniform composition over a considerable area at about the same time. (vi.) Age of the Intrusion. There is no conclusive evidence in the Moruya district with regard to the age of the intrusion. The batholith intrudes rocks which are either Ordovician or BY IDA BROWN. 187 Silurian in age, and is partly covered by Tertiary beds. The faulting in a direction parallel to the longer axis of the Moruya batholith, which has been recorded by Dr. Jensen as occurring near Sassafras, probably belongs to the same orogenic period, that is, between the deposition of the Devonian sediments and the overlying Permo-Carboniferous strata. It was considered by Anderson (1892, p. 164) that the intrusion of plutonic rocks of the South Coast, including those at Moruya, which he describes, “probably dates between the Upper Silurian and the deposition of the Devonian conglomer- ates, the exact position of which in the Devonian Series has not yet been worked out’. No specific evidence is brought forward in support of this statement, and the Devonian age of these conglomerates is unproven. A comparison with the granitic series in other parts of Hastern Australia may be of advantage in attempting to determine the age of the South Coast Intrusives. In New South Wales little detailed work has been published on the granites of the State. Stssmilch (1914) has given a summary of our knowledge of these igneous rocks. Dealing with the earlier Palaeozoic intrusions he states, ‘Acid plutonic rocks are extensively developed over the southern and central tableland areas of N.S.W. Many of these intrude strata of Upper Devonian age and belong, therefore, to the Kanimbla Epoch: none are younger, some are probably older’’. In the New England district, the plutonic complex described by Mr. Andrews, was injected in later Palaeozoic time, commencing in the Carboniferous, and continuing until Permo-Carboniferous time. At Mt. Macedon in Victoria, there is another series, also very similar to that at Moruya, which has been described by Skeats and Summers (1912, p. 55) as a “Devonian sub-alkali province’. It does not seem improbable that more detailed work on the intrusive rocks of the South Coast will show their close relationship with the Palaeozoic intrusions of Victoria, with regard both to the composition of the original magma and to the age of the intrusions. In Queensland, the major intrusions of Palaeozoic granite, such as that at Stanthorpe, are considered to be of Permian or Permo-Carboniferous age. The trend of evidence, therefore, is that granitic intrusions took place in Victoria during the Devonian period, the active front of invasion advancing like a wave in a northerly or north-easterly direction into New South Wales towards the close of the Devonian, and into New England in Carboniferous time, reaching Queensland during the Permian or Permo-Carboniferous period. This idea has been expressed diagrammatically by Professor Benson (1923, p. 15). Hence, it is highly probable that the intrusion at Moruya is no exception to the general rule as stated by Mr. Siissmilch for the central and southern table- lands, and that its injection most probably took place in late Devonian time, during the Kanimbla Epoch. (5) THe METAMORPHIC SERIES. Two periods of metamorphism have left their impress on the older sediments of the area under consideration. The earlier period was one of regional metamorphism, which affected a large part of the central and southern tablelands and south coast of New South Wales. In this metamorphism the main factor was lateral pressure, apparently from the east, which produced meridional folding and faulting of the fine-grained argillaceous and arenaceous sediments of the Moruya district. The rocks were hardened and compacted to form slates, phyllites and quartzites, without appreciable recrystalliza- tion of the constituent minerals. Vertical meridional cleavage was developed 188 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, throughout the area, the planes of cleavage frequently cutting across the bedding planes of the folded sediments. The almost entire lack of fossil organisms through- out the series is undoubtedly due to this metamorphism, which has obliterated all traces of the finer structures likely to occur in argillaceous sediments. By analogy with other parts of the State it seems probable that this meta- morphism took place at the close of the Silurian period. Superimposed on this metamorphism is a phase of local or contact meta- morphism, the direct result of the intrusion of the composite batholith. The effect of this phase is expressed in a zone of recrystallized rocks bordering the batholith, the width of outcrop of the aureole being approximately half a mile. The batholith is transgressive, cutting across the planes of bedding and cleavage of the country rock. As far as could be ascertained, the schistosity, commonly produced by the development of flakes of mica arranged in parallel orientation, is not parallei to the bounding surface of the batholith, but is parallel to the bedding of the original sediments from which the metamorphic rocks were derived. Thus it seems that heat rather than pressure was the dominant factor in this phase of contact metamorphism. It was not found possible to distinguish exactly the effect on the sediments of the successive injections of magma, nor was it possible to map concentric zones of metamorphism. The rocks are of the nature of schists and hornfelses and have been derived from three main types: (i) Arenaceous sediments, (ii) Argillaceous sediments, (iii) Basic igneous rocks. No calcareous rocks are known to occur in the district. (i). Arenaceous sediments.—The purest siliceous rock of sedimentary origin occurs in the Government quarry about a quarter of a mile east of the grano- diorite contact on the northern bank of the Moruya River. This rock has been used in the building of the breakwater and training wall near the mouth of the river. Somewhat similar rock occurs, in bands, through the quarry at Yarragee. The rock is very hard, fine-grained, dark grey and traversed by narrow veins of white quartz. It consists of angular fragments of quartz, less than 0:5 mm. in diameter, set in a matrix of microcrystalline quartz, with small amounts of biotite, muscovite and iron ore, the latter material being obviously recrystallized cement. The rock is a quartz-hornfels. More common varieties are those which have contained argillaceous or felspathic material as a cement for the quartz grains. These rocks outcrop in the southern portion of Tuross Peninsula, at Du Ross Head (Mullimburra Head), on the main road a mile north of Coila, and at intervals along the western boundary, as well as on the main road five miles north of Moruya. They have been completely recrystallized to form fine-grained schists, which vary in colour from buff to brown or dark grey. It is the development of tiny flakes of mica arranged in parallel orientation, which gives the rock its schistose appearance. Under the microscope, it is seen to consist chiefly of irregular grains of quartz elongated in the direction of schistosity, with occasional orthoclase and somewhat abundant reddish-brown biotite and a smaller amount of muscovite. These rocks may be described as quartz-mica-schists (Plate xviii, fig. 6). (ii). Argillaceous sediments have produced a variety of metamorphic types, which are exposed over the greater part of the aureole, the best outcrops being along the western boundary of the intrusion. Certain bands close to the contact BY IDA BROWN. 189 have produced rocks containing the mineral cordierite, which is not developed in parts remote from the intrus*’on. A fresh exposure of cordierite-hornfels occurs in contact with a granitic dyke in the quarry at Yarragee, a couple of miles west of the town of Moruya. This is a dense dark blue rock, with a slightly resinous lustre. Under the microscope it shows poikiloblastic structure, the ground fabric consisting of xenoblasts of cordierite 2 mm. or more in diameter, crowded with tiny idioblasts of reddish-brown mica, muscovite and possibly quartz, producing a kind of sieve structure. A photograph of this rock appears on Plate > e100 an Ota More remote from the contact are the “spotted schists’; as the contact is approached these “spots” give place to “knots” of varying dimensions, which are set in a very micaceous matrix of a dark grey to light greenish-grey colour. In places where the original bedding has been preserved, it may be seen that the “knots” attain greater development and greater abundance in some of the original layers than in others adjacent, showing that the original composition had a direct influence on their formation. The “knots” vary from a fraction of a millimetre to nearly one centimetre in length, and the habit is prismatic, suggesting that the mineral is andalusite. Under the microscope, however, no definite andalusite can be seen; the “knots” or porphyroblasts consist of fine-grained ‘shimmer aggregates”, which once may have been either andalusite or cordierite. They some- times contain patches of isotropic material. The ground fabric is lepidoblastic and exceedingly fine-grained. : (iii). A kind of hornblende-schist, evidently a metamorphosed igneous rock, outcrops near the headland north of Kelly’s Point, known locally as “The Clear Hill”. The outcrop is surrounded on the landward side by the igneous rocks of the Moruya complex. At the base of the cliff-face, the tonalite is seen to underlie this rock and to send up fine apophyses through it. From its mode of occurrence, therefore, it is impossible to determine whether it was interbedded with the older sedimentary series, or whether it was an early-formed member of the plutonic complex, which has been metamorphosed by subsequent intrusions. (6) TEcTOoNIC HISTORY OF THE AREA. The older sedimentary rocks of the area are folded about axes which trend almost due north and south. Faulting and cleavage are also developed in this direction, giving the grain of the country a decided north and south trend. The intensity of the folding appears to have been greater in the east than in the west, and the faulting has been accompanied by the intrusion of massive quartz- porphyry. The dips of the faults are usually very steep, almost vertical, but occasionally (along the course of the Deua) the faults dip at low angles to the east with overthrusting from the direction of the Tasman Sea. The intrusion of the Moruya batholith took place at a later date along a zone of weakness, probably of faulting, extending in a north-north-westerly direction. Not only do the mapped boundaries of the batholith conform with this direction, but also the internal structures of the batholith, the parallel arrangement of the minerals and inclusions, the rift and grain structures, and the directions of the joints and dykes in the granodiorite, all indicate a change in the direction of the trend lines from north and south to north-north-west and south-south-east. The disposition of the joint and dyke systems within the batholith itself seems to agree with the ideas put forward by Cloos (1922; 1923) as interpreted by Tyrrell (1926) and Kemp (1925). 190 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT, In describing the tectonic history of New South Wales in 1914, Professor David states: “In the Bathurst-Monaro Tableland the old trend lines are still shown by the direction of outcrop of the chief beds of limestone of Silurian age, which there run north and south. Towards the northern edge of the plateau these fold lines swing round more west of north, the chief synclinal troughs in the Upper Devonian series lying along directions between north-north- west and north 30° west. . . In the Yass district the general trend of the folds in Silurian and also Devonian rocks is north 15° west and south 15° east’. In the New England district the “Carboniferous and Devonian rocks have been folded and powerfully fractured along this north-north-west and south-south-east tectonic zone’’. This later trend at Moruya is therefore not an unusual one for New South Wales, although it is not so important as in Queensland, where, according to Bryan (1925), “This N.N.W. trend is all important in the structural geology”. Hlsewhere (p. 21) he states “The N.N.W. trend . . . seems everywhere to be later than the Devonian period, and may be in part Post-Carboniferous”. The effects of the older north and south trend and the newer north-north-west and south-south-east trend at Moruya are apparent in the physiography of the district, and will be discussed in a later paper. (7) SuMMARY. The paper includes a geological sketch-map of the Moruya district, covering an area of about 100 square miles, with an account of the Palaeozoic geology of this area and of other places of interest within a radius of about 25 miles of Moruya. The salient features:in the Palaeozoic geology are (1) the deposition of a series of argillaceous and fine-grained arenaceous sediments during the Ordovician or the Silurian period; (2) the subsequent folding and faulting of these sediments in a meridional direction during a period of regional metamorphism, which probably dates to the close of the Silurian; (3) the alteration in the trend lines to a north-north-westerly and south-south-easterly direction, and the injection of a plutonic igneous mass along a zone of weakness in this direction, probably at the close of Devonian time. The plutonic mass takes the form of a composite batholith, and forms a complete subalkaline or calcic igneous complex, as is proved by a study of the field-relationships, and the mineralogical and chemical compositions of the various members of the series. The complex consists of three main plutonic types, diorite-gabbro, tonalite-granodiorite and biotite-granite, containing accidental and cognate xenoliths in some parts, and a series of dyke rocks ranging from aplitic to basaltic varieties. Magmatic differentiation of a serial nature probably took place in an intercrustal reservoir by means of fractional crystallization and the sinking of crystals, the liquid portion of the magma being injected at various stages into the upper layers of the earth’s crust, and producing an order of decreasing basicity and increasing alkalinity in the intrusion of the plutonic types. Acknowledgments. In conclusion, the writer wishes to thank those who have assisted in the preparation of this paper, especially Professor L. A. Cotton, M.A., D.Sc., in whose Department the laboratory work was carried out, Assistant-Professor W. R. Browne, D.Se., for helpful discussion of the work, and Mr. H. G. Gooch for assistance in microphotography. BY IDA BROWN. 191 The writer also wishes to express appreciation of the kindness and hospitality shown by residents of Moruya, particularly Mr. and Mrs. H. Parbery and family of Gundary, Mr. and Mrs. J. A. Greig and family of “The Priory’, Bergalia, and Mr. and Mrs. J. Greig of ‘“Bergalia House’, Bergalia, during the course of field- work in the district. References. ALLPORT, 1874.—Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., xxx, 1874, 549. ANDERSON, W., 1892.—On the General Geology of the South Coast, ete. Kec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., ii, Pt. 4, 141. ANDREWS, E. C., 1905-1909.—Geology of the New England Plateau, etc. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., vii, 1905-1909. BENSON, W. N., 1923.—Palaeozoic and Mesozoic Seas of Australasia. Trans. N.Z Institute, 54, 1923, 15. BoweEN, N. L., 1915.—Later Stages in the Evolution of Igneous Rocks. Journ. Geol., 23, 1915, Supplement. —_———,, 1919.— Crystallization Differentiation in Magmas. Journ. Geol., 27, 1919, 414. , 1922.—The Reaction Principle in Petrogenesis. Jowrn. Geol., 30, 1922, 177-198. ——_——,1922.—The Behaviour of Inclusions in Igneous Magmas. Journ. Geol., 30, L922, Doge BrOGGER, W. C., 1895.—Die Eruptivgesteine des Kristianiagebietes, II, 175. BROWNE, W. R., 1923.—The Dolerites of King George and Adelie Land. Aust. Antarctic Exped. 1911-14, Scientific Repts. Ser. A, Vol. III, Pt. III, 250. Bryan, W. H., 1925.—Presidential Address. Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’iand, 38, pp. 21, 43. BupbpDINGcTON, A. F., 1927.—Coast Range Intrusives of South-eastern Alaska. Journ. Geol., 35, 1927, 224. CLARKE, W. B., 1860.—Researches in the Southern Goldfields of N.S.W., pp. 21, 42. Cioos, H., 1922.—Tectonik und Magma. Band I, Abhand. Pretwuss. Geol. Landesaist, N.F. 89. Berlin, 1922. ; , 1923.— Das Batholithenproblem. Fortschr. d. Geol. w. Pal., p. 5. CurRRAN, J. M., 1896.—The Occurrence of Precious Stones in N.S.W. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., XXX, 1896, 252. DALE, T. N., 1923.—The Commercial Granites of New England. Bull. U.S. Geol. Surv., 738, pp. 15-26. Daty, R. A., 1914.—Igneous Rocks and their Origin, 1914. BDavip, T. W. E., 1914.—Tectonie Geology of N.S.W. B.A.A.S. Handbook, N.S.W., p. 567. GILLSON, J. L., 1927.—Granodiorites in the Pend Oreille District of Northern Idaho. Journ. Geol., xxxv, 1927, 21-27. HARKER, A., 1904.—The Tertiary Igneous Rocks of Skye. Memoirs Geol. Surv. United Kingdom, 1904, 186. —————,, 1908.—Petrology for Students, 1908. , 1909.—The Natural History of Igneous Rocks, 1909. HARKER, A., and Marr, J. H., 1891.—The Shap Granite and the Associated Igneous and Metamorphic Rocks. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., xlvii, 278. HARPER, L. F., 1910.—KReport on a Deposit of Ochre. Avnyn. Rept. Dept. Mines N.S.W., 1910, 180. HatcuH, F. H., 1914.—Petrology for Students. Houtmes, A., 1920.—Nomenclature of Petrology, pp. 227, 194. IppINGs, J. P., 1891.—The Eruptive Rocks of Electric Peak and Sepulchre Mountain, Yellowstone National Park. 12th Ann. Rept. U.S. Geol. Surv., 1891, 588-94. ——_——, 1909.—Igneous Rocks, Vol. I, 1909. —————,, 1911.— Rock Minerals, p. 238. JENSEN, H. I., 1908.—Some Geological Notes on the Country behind Jervis Bay. Jouwrn. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xlii, 1908, 306. ‘ ——_——, 1910.—-Soils of New South Wales. Pt. I. The Soils of the South Coast. Agric. Gazette N.S.W., xxi, 1910, 95. ——— 1914.—The Soils of N.S.W. Dept. of Agric., N.S.W., 1914. Kemp, J. F., 1922.—After-effects of Igneous Intrusion. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., Xxxiii, 231-54. , 1925.—Methods of Study of Granitic Intrusives. Hconomic Geology, xx, 1925, 192 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT. Lacroix, A., 1891.—Gneissose Rocks of Salem and Ceylon. Rec. Geol. Surv. India, 1891, xxiv, pt. iii, 156-190. ‘PHILLIPS, J. A., 1880.—On Concretionary Patches and Fragments of other Rocks con- tained in Granite. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., xxxvi, 1880, 1-21. Ros#NBUSCH, H., 1905.—Microscopical Physiography of the Rockforming Minerals. Idding’s Translation, 4th Edition, 1905, 271. SEDERHOLM, J. J., 1916.—On Synantetic Minerals and Related Phenomena. Bull. Finlande, No. 48, 64. SHAND, S. J., 1927.—Eruptive Rocks, 1927, 124. SKEATS, E. W., and Summers. H. S8., 1912.—The Geology and Petrology of the Macedon District. Bull. Geol. Surv. Vict., No. 24, 20. : ; SoLLas, W. J., 1905.—Rocks of the Cape Colville Peninsula. Vol. I, 119. StUssmitcH, C. A., 1914.—Geology of New South Wales. 2nd HEdit., 1914. TEALL, J. J. H., 1888.—British Petrography, Plate xxiii. TEALL, J. J. H., and DAKYNs, J. R., 1892.—On the Plutonic Rocks of Garabal Hill and Meall Breac. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., 1892, xlviii- TYRRELL, G. W., 1926.—The Principles of Petrology. WASHINGTON, H. S., 1917.—Chemical Analyses of Igneous Rocks. U.S. Geol. Surv.. Prof. Paper 99. WILLAN, T. L., 1923.—The Gold and Arsenic Deposits at Condoin Creek, Moruya. An. Rept. Dept. Mines N.S.W., 1923, 93. Wruuiz, B. K. N., and Scorr, A., 1918.—The Plutonic Rocks of Garabal Hill. Geol. Mag., Decade V, Vol. x, 19138, 499-508, 536-545. EXPLANATION OF PLATES XV-XVIII. Plate xv. Geological Sketch map of the Moruya District. Plate xvi. : 1. Folded, thin-bedded quartzites, about one and a half miles south-west of Moruya. This is portion of a mass of sedimentary rocks which appears to have been rifted off the magma-champber (see p. 184). 2. View at Kelly’s Point, showing jointing of the tonalite and diorite-gabbro, and its influence on the direction of the basaltic dykes. Plate xvii. 1. Biotite-Granite, N.W. of Moruya, showing orthoclase with microperthite. Crossed nicols. Magnified 12 diameters. Granodiorite, quarry, 2 miles east of Moruya. Note fracture and granulation. Crossed nicols. Magnified 9 diameters. Fine-grained Granodiorite, 1 mile S.W. of Moruya, showing rounded grains of quartz included in outer zones of plagioclase phenocrysts. Crossed nicols. Magnified 12 diameters. 4. Basic Inclusion in Granodiorite, showing large plate of biotite with inclusions of felspar. Ordinary light. Magnified 9 diameters. 5. Gabbro, north of Kelly’s Point, showing large crystal of brown hornblende containing remnants of original augite; border consists of green hornblende. Crossed nicols. Magnified 13 diameters. 6. Typical Gabbro, Kelly’s Point, showing brown hornblende (dark) bordered by green hornblende (lighter); Plagioclase appears white. Ordinary light. Magnified 9 diameters. Lee) ee) Plate xviii. 1. Plagioclase in graphie intergrowth with augite, hornblende and iron-ore, in Diorite- gabbro, Kelly’s Point. Crossed nicols. Magnified 9 diameters. Portion of the above Plagioclase showing details of graphic intergrowth. Crossed nicols. Magnified 14 diameters. Hornblende-quartz-Porphyrite, Dyke, Tuross, showing granophyric structure in the groundmass. Crossed nicols. Magnified 16 diameters. 4. Mica-Lamprophyre, Lake Coila. Ordinary light. Magnified 12 diameters. 5. Cordierite-Hornfels, Yarragee. Crossed nicols. Magnified 13 diameters. 6. Quartz-mica-Schist, Yarragee. Crossed nicols. Magnified 13 diameters. bo (oe) THE LARVA OF HEMIPHLEBIA MIRABILIS SELYS (ODONATA). By R. J. Tirtyarp, M.A., Se.D. (Cantab.), D.Sc. (Sydney), F.R.S., F.N.Z.Inst., F.L.S., E.G.S., F.E.S., C.M.Z.S. (Thirteen Text-figures. ) [Read 30th May, 1928.] | Hemiphlebia mirabilis Selys is a tiny metallic green damselfly of very great - morphological and phylogenetic interest. It is entirely confined to Australia; the - only known localities for it so far being Port Denison (Bowen) in Queensland (the type locality), and Alexandra, Victoria. It is one of the smallest of living _ dragonflies, its expanse of wing being only three-quarters of an inch or a little more. De Selys (1877) placed it at the very end of his group or “legion” Agrion of the subfamily Agrioninae, next to the genus Agriocnemis; in more modern classification, this would put it at the end of the family Coenagriidae. In 1913 (De 463), I described the appendages of the male and ‘recorded the peculiar mode of courtship of these tiny.insects amongst the reed-masses of the backwaters of the Goulburn River at Alexandra, where I studied the insect in December, 1906. Later, I sent specimens to Professor C. H. Kennedy at Columbus, Ohio, for the study of the penis of the male. He came to the startling conclusion that this little insect had one of the most generalized forms of penis known within the Order Odonata (Kennedy, 1920). Later still, the discovery of ancient forms of Zygopterous dragonflies in the Lower and Upper Permian (Tillyard, 1925, 1926a, 1928) indicated a very close relationship between the original ancestral type of the whole Order Odonata and this Australian genus, while a detailed comparison of the wing-venations made it quite clear that Hemiphtebia stood quite isolated -amongst éxisting forms and must be regarded as the sole representative of a distinct family Hemiphlebiidae (Kennedy, 1920; Tillyard, 1926b) standing at the very base of the Zygoptera. It will thus be seen that the progress of researches on the Order Odonata, in the course of the last twenty years, has picked out this obscure Australian genus from a mass of unrelated forms and set it up as one of the key-genera for the right understanding of Odonate phy’ogeny. As soon as this had been done, it at once became of the utmost interest that the larva should be discovered and studied also, in order that we might see what evidence was available from such important larval characters as the wing-tracheation, the labial mask, the mandibles, the gizzard and the caudal gills. The opportunity to do this presented itself when the Commonwealth Government recently invited me to visit Australia in connection with the organization of entomological research. Arrangements were made to spend a long week-end at Alexandra some time in November. Through the kindness of Mr. Michael Martin, Manager of Sulphates Proprietary Ltd., of 395, Collins Street, Melbourne, and Mr. C. R. Lyne, of Hartley’s Proprietary, Ltd., 270, Flinders Street, Melbourne, ‘a private car was placed at my disposal, and a party was 194 THE LARVA OF HEMIPHLEBIA MIRABILIS, formed of these two gentlemen, both of whom are keenly interested in trout- fishing, Mr. G. F. Hill, F.E.S., Entomologist to the Commonwealth Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, Mr. J. Clark, Hntomologist to the National Museum, Melbourne, and myself. We drove out to Alexandra, a distance of close on one hundred miles from Melbourne, on Saturday, 5th November last, and worked the Goulburn River the same evening and on the Sunday and Monday following. I wish here to express to all these gentlemen my very sincere thanks for the assistance given me in this undertaking. I also wish to thank Mr. A. L. Tonnoir for assistance in the preparation of slides and for the drawing of Text-fig. 8; and Mr. W. C. Davies for enlarging the photograph reproduced in Text-fig. A. Text-fig. A.—Backwater of the Goulburn River, near Alexandra, Vic., showing reed-beds in foreground, where larvae of Hemiphlebia mirabilis Sel. were found. Mr. J. Clark, F.E.S., with dredging-net. [Photo. by R. J. Tillyard. My previous visit to Alexandra was in December, 1906, or nearly twenty-one years earlier. Owing to the long period of time that had elapsed, my memory of the intricate backwaters of the Goulburn River was not sufficiently clear for us to locate, at the first attempt, the exact place where the tiny insect had been found before. As the dragonflies themselves had been taken on the wing on 22nd and 23rd December, we did not expect to find any of them about early in November, but we hoped to discover the full-fed larvae. About two hours were spent on the Saturday evening searching for the original locality, but without success. On the Sunday morning the search was continued, and I extended my survey of the backwaters to a distance of well over a mile above the bridge before I suddenly came upon the very clumps of reeds where I had first seen the tiny insects executing their delightful mating dances. We discovered later that BY R. Je DIE YARD. 195 there was a good reason why the insect was confined to this small area; for, during the periodical droughts that occur, all the rest of the huge backwaters dry up; but, just at this point (Text-fig. A) there is a rather deep hole between the clumps of reeds, and this serves as a reservoir for the larvae when no other water is available. The position having been located, all five of us got to work with nets, scoops and sharp knives. The reeds were cut off in clumps, close to their roots; the water-weeds were dredged up in masses; the bottom mud was scooped up and examined; in fact, everything was done to ensure that the larvae should not escape us. Preliminary exploration of the rest of the backwater had yielded only a few common types of damselfly larvae, viz. Austrolestes analis Ramb., A. leda Sel., Ischnura heterosticta Burm. and Austroagrion cyane Sel. I was looking for a damselfly larva of a type unknown to me, since that would almost certainly prove to be Hemiphlebia. We worked for well over an hour before I noticed a small, dark brown, sluggish larva separate itself from a tangled mass of reed- stems and water-weed. An examination of this larva showed that it was of a type new to me, so we decided to continue searching for more, and to take them back alive to the hotel at Alexandra, where I had the necessary microscopes and dissecting instruments ready. At the end of three hours’ work we had about two dozen, most of which had been found clinging closely to the lower portions of the stems of the weed Myriophyllum, while a few were found clinging to the bases of the stems of reeds and submerged grasses. The lower leaves of Myriophyllum are of a dirty brownish colour, and the larvae were practically invisible in such a position until they moved. During the same afternoon, I dissected and studied four of these larvae and was soon able to determine them definitely as larvae of Hemiphlebia. The first diagnostic character used was the absence of the basal cross-vein closing the quadrilateral in the forewing; this was very clearly shown in all well-grown larvae. The only other dragonfly at present existing which possesses this character is Chorismagrion risi Morton from North Queensland; this is about four times as large as Hemiphlebia mirabilis. Apart from this, it soon became evident that the larvae possessed a number of other unique and unexpected characters which rendered it even more important from the viewpoint of phylogeny than I had imagined it would be. Accompanied by Messrs. Lyne and Clark, I again visited the locality oa the Monday morning, our captures for about two hours’ work amounting to twenty-six, all found within a few yards of the original reed-clumps where I had first taken the dragonfly. Thus we returned from Alexandra with fifty of these larvae, some alive and some carefully preserved in Blé’s solution. All of these were in the last instar, and some must have been within a week of emergence, judging by the clear formation of the imaginal antennae and tarsal claws inside the larval organs. Description of the Larva. Text-figs. 1-12. Total length including caudal gills (average), 13-5 mm.; length of abdomen, 7-5 mm.; breadth across head, 2-5 mm., across sixth abdominal segment, 1-5 mm.; length of wing sheath, 3-1 mm., of antenna, 1-4 mm., of caudal gills (lateral), 2-5 mm.; of paraprocts (cercoids), 0-5 mm.; lengths of femur, tibia and tarsus respectively: fore leg, 1:5, 1-6, 1:0 mm.; middle leg, 1-8, 2:0, 1-2 mm.; hind leg, 2:5, 2-5, 1-3 mm., the tarsal measurements including the claws. 196 THE LARVA OF HEMIPHLEBIA MIRABILIS, General colouration a dull, medium or dark brownish, with very little pattern except on the legs, which are banded with darker brown as shown in Text-fig. 1. Head more than twice as wide as long, only slightly concave posteriorly between the moderately prominent postocular lobes. which are rounded. Compound eyes prominent, dark brown, button-like; ocelli distinct, dark brown; antennae Text-figs. 1-5.—Hemiphlebia mirabilis Sel. 1. Full-grown larva. Length, including gills, 13-5 mm. 2. Antenna of full- grown larva. Length 1-4 mm. 3. Labrum (Jr) and mandibles (md) of full- grown larva (x 50). 4. Hypopharynx (hy) and paragnaths (pg) of full-grown larva (x 75). 5. First maxilla of full-grown larva (x 75). ce, cardo; p, palpus; st, stipes. smooth, hairless, rather long, 1-4 mm., consisting of seven segments, of which the first or scape is somewhat swollen, subconical, half as long again as wide, the second or pedicel longer and less swollen, about three times as long as wide, and the other five, or distalia, are elongated and very slender (Text-fig. 2); ratios of the lengths of the segments from base to apex, 14: 20: 26: 22: 20:18:17. Labrum (Text-fig. 3) more than twice as wide as deep; margin well rounded BY R. J. TILLY ARD. 197 laterally, slightly emarginate medially, with a few short, weak setae on the median portion and a few small, scattered sensillae just above them around the median line on the epipharynx. Mandibles (Text-fig. 3) very stout and strong, markedly asymmetrical, of primitive: type, showing clearly differentiated incisor and molar areas on the inner or cutting surface; the right mandible has three strong teeth placed close together near the apex of the incisor area, with a smaller one on the inner margin well removed towards the molar portion; the latter carries a strongly projecting bifid prong; the left mandible has three strong incisor teeth, two at the apex and one somewhat removed and turned curvingly inwards, while the molar area carries a much larger projection than that of the corresponding area of the right mandible; this projection has a broad, hollowed out apex, split open on the inner side, and bordered elsewhere by six irregular teeth, four fairly large and two very small. It would appear that the prong of the right mandible works into the hollow of the larger process on mh mh | mt Text-figs. 6, 7.—Hemiphlebia mirabilis Sel. 6. Labial mask of full-grown larva (x 45). Il, lateral lobe; mh, movable hook; ml, median lobe; mt, mentum. 7. Lateral lobe of same (x 140). mh. movable hook; s, seta of same. the left mandible, while the incisor teeth of one side fit more or less accurately into the clefts between those of the other. Hypopharynx (Text-fig. 4) remarkably well developed, with prominent median tongue and strongly projecting side-lobes or paragnaths; the former carries a median row of strong setae directed inwards, while the latter each bear a row of about seven long, slender hairs. Maxillae (Text-fig. 5) with short cardo, elongate stipes, and well developed inner lobe carrying two sets of teeth, the outer four in number, long and rather slender, the inner three in number, shorter and broader; the former may represent the marginal armature of the galea, the latter that of the lacinia; a few stiff hairs situated just basally from the teeth; palp short, its tooth-like apex projecting not quite as far distad as the first lacinial tooth, its outer margin at about one- third from apex slightly humped and carrying four slender, long hairs. Labial 198 THE LARVA OF HEMIPHLEBIA MIRABILIS, mask (Text-figs. 6, 7) very long and slender, 3 mm. when fully extended, with long, narrow submentum, strong hinge, mentum narrow basally but expanding widely distally; median lobe with slight indication of separation from mentum proper, and consisting of a pair of broad, flat lobes with crenulate outer margins, separated by a very deep, narrow cleft, and a pair of well separated, prong-like processes of large size, nearly as large as the movable hooks of the lateral lobes, but curved in the opposite direction; there is a stiff seta close to the base of each prong, on the side removed from the middle line. Lateral lobes of complex structure; movable hook large and strong, with a single seta projecting inwards at right angles and situated very close to the base of the hook; no other setae present on lateral lobes at all; distal margin carrying a strong tooth similar to, and nearly as large as the movable hook, and a much shorter, irregularly denticulate process; apex of lateral lobe projecting as a strong, slightly nodding tooth, with its free inner margin convexly curved and very slightly crenulate. Text-fig. 7 shows all these structures enlarged. Text-fig. 8.—Hemiphlebia mirabilis Sel. Tarsal claws of full-grown larva (x 220). ! 4 ——=s SK) pa JES Wen TY ee a8 WAZ IiS=s2 Q) a (P s FEET ABOVE HWM Af “We=M Walker F =Mt. Flaherty Main Divide -——— , Ba [Nene | ¥ Text-fig. 4.—Contour Map of Wallerawang District. Note the mature valleys broken only by the ancient monadnocks of Mounts Walker and Flaherty, the entrenched meanders of the Cox, and the asymmetry of the valley of Piper’s Flat. Wallerawang and Lithgow Valleys.—The upland valleys around Wallerawang and Lithgow form part of a valley system: which extends across the Main Divide at Rydal and Piper’s Flat, and includes the upper valleys of the Turon and Fish Rivers. In considering these valleys around Wallerawang, therefore, it is neces- BY’ F. A. ‘CRAFT. 219 sary to remember that they are types of a valley-system which is not confined to the Cox basin. I propose to apply the name “Wallerawang Valley” to that valley about the 3,000 feet level which centres on Wallerawang, and extends from Wolgan Gap and Portland to Rydal and Wallerawang. “Lithgow Valley’ will be defined as the valley stretching from Lithgow to Marangaroo, with a branch extending to the east of Mt. Walker towards Rydal. The topography of these valleys and the associated plateau regions is clearly shown in the contour map (Text-fig. 4) and block diagrams (Text-figs. 5 and 7). The two valleys are actually continuous, but the monadnocks, Mounts Walker and Flaherty, which rise from 709 to 800 feet above the valley floor, divide it into two parts. Walgan Cap — CT Yy Clans eee; MI “GY, Fur —— Mijn Y We \\ YUM Zio Yj < =~ Die WL Lap sx Z =, a \ Gu Coxs Cr f Za WwW bs pps : SS OW Z O— / a Z ——— Le L ‘ til Wit Ze an Lee Ups! j i Z j Nallerawang Z Lb ys Zroyos ZIM 4 ZAM si I Ss Lithgow Val ley ty, i} | x “yyy lh) NN, N \ 1] | Wy i) p Ae eden aS My \Y ) esi VY Tad \y “/. Ow y Ui !, ME. F laherty 3700 7 ~ Ye 7/* Solitary Cr. Ls 00 3100 2800 Text-fig. 5.—The Head of the Cox. The broad valley of Piper’s Flat Creek extends over the Main Divide into the Turon Basin. The southern margin has been affected by recent warping. The hard rocks of the plateau have been formed, by long continued erosion, into subdued ridges and mature valleys. Wallerawang Valley, on the western side, varies in elevation from 2,900 feet at Wallerawang to 3140 feet and 3150 feet at Piper’s Flat and Rydal respectively, and 3,175 feet in Wolgan Gap. The width of the valley along Piper’s Flat varies from two to four miles, and the average depth is of the order of 400 feet. The valley of Cox’s Creek is narrower, but of the same general depth. In general character the Wallerawang Valley is mature and, in common with the surrounding plateau, geologically varied. The valley floor is composed of Upper Coal Measure shale, Upper Marine shale, sandstone, and conglomerate, Devonian shale and quartzite, and granite. The plateau consists of Devonian quartzites and shales, Upper Coal Measure shales and sandstones (the latter to the north of Piper’s 220 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, Flat), Hawkesbury sandstone, and granite. There has been little differential erosion between these rock types. There is a gentle uniform rise along Cox’s Creek, for example, from Wallera- wang to Wolgan Gap, over Upper Marine, Upper Coal Measure and Hawkesbury rocks. The junction of different series cannot be detected by change of slope. A similar thing is true of ridges in this valley that run down towards Piper’s Flat from the southern side. A traverse along the Main Divide to the south of Piper’s Flat takes one over Upper Marine and Devonian rocks and granite. Again there is no notable change in topography with change in rock type. The hard sand- stones now found on the plateau to north and west of this valley once extended right across the valley, as the outlier of sandstone on Round Hill (3,720 feet) on the southern side of the valley shows. This mature valley cannot, therefore, be ascribed to differential erosion in rocks of varying hardness, but must be the result of prolonged erosion when the land surface was not far above base-level, before the main uplift which formed the present plateau. One of the most striking topographic features of the district is the asymmetry of the main valley, that of Piper’s Flat Creek. The northern side of this valley, from Wallerawang to Portland, is a steep scarp against whose base the main stream flows. The southern side of the valley rises gently and uniformly, and is little cut into by the swampy streams that flow down it. The main stream receives no tributaries at all from the north, as the divide on that side is, in general, less than half a mile away. This feature has no apparent explanation, although there may have been a gentle uplift to the south, near Mt. Lambie, causing the stream channel to migrate northwards. The valley of Cox’s Creek is not so large or important as the other branch of Wallerawang Valley. Near Wallerawang, it is two miles wide; four miles above the town, however, it is but a half-mile wide, and narrows further towards Wolgan Gap. The same stream, which is the largest single stream in the head valleys of Cox River, is very little entrenched in its valley. Indeed, in parts, its tributaries have no definite channels through the swamps. The streams of Wallerawang Valley differ somewhat in character. Cox’s Creek and its tributaries run over swampy silt flats, and swing backwards and forwards over the valley. Piper’s Flat Creek has a grade of about 30 feet to the mile, and is grading down its channel and cutting away the silt flats which it had previously deposited, which are up to a quarter of a mile wide. These silts are found along the tributaries up to four miles away from the main stream. On Thompson’s Creek, for example, four miles from its mouth at Irondale, the silts are about 80 yards wide, and at least 10 feet deep, and are built up of peaty material at an elevation of 3,300 feet, 300 feet above the main valley. The streams are now just beginning to attack their head silts at 3,200 to 3,300 feet. These silts are found on most of the other tributary creeks of the valley, and on Solitary Creek, about two miles above Rydal. One of the most interesting features of the valley is the occurrence of a line of gravels along Piper’s Flat, up to 50 feet above the modern silt flats, and up to 30 feet thick. These gravels are found in a well-defined belt along the southern side of the valley (Text-fig. 6) extending over the Main Divide at least to the outskirts of Portland. Characteristic deposits may be seen near Wallerawang station and in the railway cuttings around Irondale. The pebbles vary in size from a couple of inches to a foot or more in length along the major axis, and are BY F. A. CRAFT. 221 ellipsoidal in shape. Grey and brown quartzites, the latter being spheroidal in shape, and containing beautiful specimens of Spirifer and Rhynchonella, various porphyries, some sandstone, and pebbles of decomposed rock containing mica, which might be weathered granite, are characteristic. They are much larger than the pebbles occurring in the lower silts and in the modern stream channel. The extension of the gravels over the Divide is interesting. The biggest boulder observed is found embedded in clay in a cutting right on the main Divide. It is porphyry, and is four feet high and two feet across. The gravels are found on a variety of local rock types. Around Wallerawang, for instance, they are deposited on shale. In the vicinity of Irondale (e.g., at the mouth of Thompson’s Creek) the local rocks are sandstone and grit. On the Main Divide, again, shale is found. It is apparent that the homogeneous gravels P\PERS FLAT DEPOSITS. Coarse Gravel. an above the Stream. ). p, Fine Silk mainly). ao CEs \ hy \ NB. Fine Silt resting on |h/ coarse conglomerate. = Hi Sher Flats. _ Sad Text-fig. 6.—The Piper’s Flat Deposits. A line of gravel extends right along Piper’s Flat over the Main Divide. Consideration of a number of factors shows the possibility of it being river gravel. could not have been derived from the rocks on which they rest, although every rock-type found in them may have come from the district. The conclusion is, therefore, that they represent an old stream line about 50 feet above the modern flat, and have been put in their present position by stream action. Possibly, in time past, they extended over the area now occupied by the lower Piper’s Flat. An interesting confirmation of this view is obtained from Slaven’s Cave, four miles up Thompson’s Creek. This cave is situated on a hillside in hard porphyry, and was probably formed by the dissolving out of a small limestone pocket. Part of the roof has fallen in, but the cave.is still about thirty yards across, and twenty to thirty feet high. A small hole leads into it from the top. The floor, which is about sixty feet above the modern stream, is covered with fine brown laminated silt, although now no water flows through the cave. Other unexplored caves occur below. The floor of the cave represents a higher old stream-level, which agrees with the evidence of the gravels. 222 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, In. considering the character of the gravels, other points have to be borne in mind. Near Piper’s Flat railway station, on Gow’s Creek, coarse conglomerates are overlain by fine silts. Right along the southern side of the valley the soils are fine, with a few small quartzite pebbles. ‘The Upper Marine conglomerates between Wallerawang and Rydal weather to a depth of about two feet, giving a fine sandy soil. On the other hand, the gravels along Piper’s Flat are up to 30 feet thick, and are packed together in brown clay, especially in the type beds near Irondale. This clay is quite different from the surrounding soil, but might have been derived from weathering of granite pebbles. Be that as it may, the fact AY Amrit ILE UTT rT) Ci Wiwape ’ tT VS Wi \\ bs Ye 2 (iy < SF Z % 3 iT) Ae S 7 M// | DRY Si = ae ee Vi tooo'=t* :H=SA., Text-fig. 7—Lithgow Valley, which was eroded near base-level. Note the course of Marangaroo Creek between the two monadnocks, the valley levels at 3,000 feet cut in a plateau of average elevation 3,400 feet, the entrenched meanders of the streams, and the valley divides of Marangaroo Creek. remains that no weathered conglomerate in this district is similar to this well- defined line of gravel. There seems to be strong evidence, therefore, that these are recent stream deposits. About two miles to the south-west of Wallerawang the Cox River plunges into a gorge, a good view of which is obtained from where the Portland Road crosses the stream. This gorge attains a maximum depth of 700 feet to the east of Rydal, and ends just above the Lett River, where it emerges from a well- defined scarp. Near Hartley the river is but little entrenched in the flat Kanimbla Valley. Below Wallerawang the stream is obsequent, a fact which is interesting when considering the past stream history. This fact bears no relation- ship to the silt flats along Cox’s and Piper’s Flat Creeks, which could not have been laid down along the present slope. Also, there is no silt in the broad valley BY F. A. CRAFT. 228 to the east of Wallerawang, just above where the stream flows into the higher land. An account of Solitary Creek is given when the Cox Divides are discussed. Lithgow Valley (Text-fig. 7) is found on the same level as Wallerawang Valley, and consists of Upper Coal Measure and Upper Marine rocks, and granite. To the north rises the Blue Plateau, whilst to the south the old mountain masses of Mounts Walker and Flaherty are found. The valley is about 500 feet deep, from one to three miles wide, and is drained by Farmer’s and Marangaroo Creeks. The former shows entrenched meanders along the lower part of its course, where it has cut a steep gorge, 500 feet deep, in the valley levels near the Cox junction. The divide between this stream and Marangaroo Creek to the west of Bowenfels is almost non-existent. The break in the divide is so large that the valley between Bowenfels and Marangaroo is continuous. In view of this fact it is all the more remarkable to find Marangaroo Creek flowing into the high mountain block (Text- fig. 4). The stream is certainly antecedent, and this part of Lithgow Valley is the result of differential erosion. The stream originally flowed over a plain of Hawkesbury sandstone between the two residuals. After the uplift which resulted in the formation of the Lithgow and Wallerawang levels, the stream graded a large part of its course, but could do very little lateral cutting near its mouth on account of the extreme hardness of the steeply-inclined quartzites. Further upstream, however, after cutting through the hard Hawkesbury beds, it discovered the softer Upper Coal Measure series below, and excavated a wide valley in them. A large relic of the original plateau is preserved on the 3,300 feet level to the south-east of the junction with the Cox. The upper and middle courses of Marangaroo Creek were determined by the master-joints of the Hawkesbury sand- stones (i.e., in north-south, and east-west lines). The lower course was deter- mined by the strike—about 20 degrees east of north—of the Devonian quartzites. The lower course of the creek shows deeply entrenched meanders, relics of the old plateau surface stream. The upper course of Farmer’s Creek has also been determined by joints. The lower course is old, and is mainly in softer granite and slate, avoiding the hard quartzites. Owing to the comparatively soft granite along its lower course, the stream has, unlike Marangaroo Creek, been able to prolong the upper (Lithgow) valley levels right to the Cox, although now it is deeply entrenched in them, below Bowenfels. A small plateau at 3,400 feet is found to the east of Farmer’s Creek. The eastern side is a steep cliffi—known as Hassan’s Walls— which overlooks the Kanimbla Valley. The 3,100 feet level extends within a mile of Hartley, which is at 2,400 feet. With regard to the idea of benching as the main cause of the valley, as suggested by Mr. Sussmilch, I have no doubt that benching is mainly responsible for the level valley above Lithgow, but has been only a minor factor in the evolution of the remainder of the valley floor. Boyd and Budthingeroo Creeks.—The topography of the country around the heads of Kanangra River, Boyd and Budthingeroo Creeks is varied. Three series of valleys are found at various levels. Of these, the valleys of Kanangra Platform (3,300 feet) have already been described. The upper valleys of Boyd and Budthingeroo Creeks are at 3,750 and 3,950 feet respectively. They are mature in type, being more than one mile wide, and are occupied by sluggish streams flowing over swampy flats. On the traverse line they are both found at a depth of 300 feet below the plateau, which varies from 3,950 feet to the east of Boyd F 224 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, Creek to 4,250 feet between the two streams, attaining a like elevation to the west of Budthingeroo Creek. Here the principal rocks are granite and slate, giving a heavy clay soil. These valleys are referable to the Lithgow and Wallerawang Valiey class, and are similar to those at Oberon and Shooter’s Hill. In this vicinity, along the Tuglow-Kanangra divide, mature relic valleys at an elevation of 4,100-4,200 feet are found. These are 200 to 300 feet above the previous series, and drop steeply into the latter. These valleys are cut about a hundred feet in the soft Silurian rocks of the Jenolan Plateau, resembling the mature valleys half-way between Hampton and Jenolan, and the early mature valleys at Wentworth Falls and on the Kanangra Platform. Their present extent in this district is not great, but they appear to be relics of the Tertiary surface. Retreat, Tuglow and Fish Rivers—The upper valleys of these streams also belong to this series (i.e., Lithgow), although they are found at variable altitudes. The Retreat River at Porter’s Retreat is 600 feet below the plateau, at 3,500 feet. The Tuglow flows in a mature valley, 300 feet below the plateau surface, which is at 4,100 feet; whilst the Fish River at Oberon flows at 3,500 feet, or 500 feet below the plateau. These three valleys are cut in highly-inclined Silurian strata and in Devonian granites, and are, consequently, not due to any such action as benching, which was partly responsible for the formation of Lithgow Valley. They were formed under much the same conditions, as regards elevation, as the Wallerawang and Lithgow Valleys, are up to two miles wide, each having similar dimensions. One is struck by the fact that the Fish River at Oberon, which flows over marshy flats, is notably more mature than the same stream at Tarana—and, for that matter, Solitary Creek above that point—the latter valleys appearing to be of a “masked juvenile” type; that is to say, in point of age the valleys are young, but, owing to the softness of the decomposed granite in which they are cut, a stage closer to maturity has been reached than would have been the case in the some- what harder rocks at Oberon, for example. The grades of Solitary Creek between Rydal and Tarana, and the Fish River above Tarana, towards Oberon, are not typical of mature streams, being of the average respective orders of fifty and forty-five feet to the mile. Below Tarana, the Fish River has an average grade of eleven feet per mile into Bathurst. The thalweg of the river is that of a rejuvenated stream, supporting the conclusion that the wide valley at Tarana is of recent formation, being much younger than the more mature valley at Oberon in harder rocks. Throughout their lengths, the two branches of the Fish River show well- developed meanders, which date back either to the pre-uplift or the Lithgow Valley stage, the former being the more probable. The powerful Tuglow has cut back into the soft Silurian rocks, the head of erosion now being within three miles of the Main Divide. This short length of upland valley is, however, very mature. The Retreat River Valley shows a valley-in-valley form, the main valley at 3,500 feet being trenched to a depth of a hundred feet at Porter’s Retreat. Below here, it appears to run into deeper gorges. The occurrence of a zone containing these mature valleys entrenched from three to six hundred feet in the plateau surface is very interesting. Similar valleys are found on the Middle Wollondilly and the Cookbundoon Rivers, as I hope to show in a subsequent paper, but do not occur over the main mass of the Blue Plateau, although they are found along the Wallerawang to Mudgee railway. These facts are of significance when considering the folding and warping movements which the area has undergone. BY F. A. CRAFT. QM Ves Che a Se oT ion (yl maa Si PAG) S seen : 2 y Y ore : 2 s f 1B Text-fig. 8—Megalong Valley. Note the broad, flat floor of the valley, the great meanders of the Cox, now entrenched in the main valley floor, and the remarkably uniform increase in the depth of entrenchment of the streams from north to south. The undissected valley floor extends ten miles further northward to Hartley. 225 226. PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, Kanimbla and Megalong Valleys—Looking south from Mt. Walker, near Lithgow, a splendid view is obtained across the floor of the great Kanimbla Valley to Mt. Mouin, twenty-five miles away. Here, three cycles of erosion are clearly presented, which have resulted in the formation of the plateau (first level), the level Kanimbla Valley (second level), and the Cox gorges respectively. There is very clear evidence that Kanimbla Valley was formed not far above base-level. The northern part of the valley is clearly separated from the Wallerawang levels, the respective average elevations being 2,200 and 3,100 feet. This is especially the case near Hartley, where the two—Kanimbla being here at 2,400 feet—are a little over a mile apart. Kanimbla Valley—the southern part of which is called Megalong—extends from Hartley in the north to Mt. Mouin in the south, and from the northern cliff ramparts near Blackheath to Lowther. It has a length of twenty-five miles, a width of ten miles, and a depth of 1,100 to 1,500 feet. To the east of the Cox the valley is gently undulating; but on the western side, the valley ridges rise uniformly to the Main Divide in the vicinity of Hampton at 3,800 feet. As I have already pointed out (under the heading “Blue and Jenolan Plateau’) there is very good evidence that the western side of the valley has been subjected to warping. It might be added that the uniform rise of these southern valley ridges —some of which are granite, and others Devonian rocks, both showing long out- liers of Upper Marine rocks in parts—from the Kanimbla levels to the Divide is, of itself, good evidence of such warping. The valley is thus distinctly asymmetric, but the flat northern side varies in elevation from 1,900 feet on Megalong and Blackheath Creeks to 2,600 feet between Galong and Breakfast Creeks, the average being about 2,200 feet. The characteristic features of the valley are shown by a study of the eastern end, Megalong (see Contour Map, Text-fig. 8 and Plate xix, fig. 2). The northern and eastern confines of this valley are formed by great ramparts of Triassic sandstone, from which the softer talus rocks slope away at 18 to 20 degrees into a level valley. This valley is occupied by four main streams, Breakfast, Galong, Megalong and Pulpit Hill Creeks. The lower courses of the two former streams have cut great gorges in the valley floor, whose deepest parts are only 700 feet above the sea. They alone of the northern Kanimbla streams make accordant junctions with the Cox. Megalong and Pulpit Hill Creeks have their whole courses along the level valley, and make highly discordant junctions with the Cox. The former stream plunges down five hundred feet within a few hundred yards into the river. The canyon which the river has cut in the relatively level valley deepens rapidly downstream. At the junétion of Megalong Creek, this gorge is 800 feet deep; whereas, a little below Galong Creek, it has attained a depth of 1900 feet, the great change being due to a rapidly falling stream and a rising upper valley. A feature of the valley is the fringe of benches of Upper Marine sandstone and conglomerate on the northern and eastern sides. Much of this bench is bounded, on the outer side, by cliffs and small precipices up to eighty feet high. The main interest of the Megalong Valley lies in the series of valleys found between 1,900 and 2,300 feet (see Contour Map). The early mature valleys at the head of Breakfast Creek and in Megalong Gap are of this series, at 2,200 feet; and occur in sandstone and conglomerate. The upper valleys of Galong Creek at 1,900 feet occur in granite, 400 feet below BY F. A. CRAFT. 227 the conglomerate. Between the two streams, the eastward dip of the conglomerate is of the order of a hundred feet to the mile over*a range of two miles; whilst, from north to south it is laid down on an undulating granite surface. Megalong and Pulpit Hill Creeks flow partly over Upper Marine rocks and partly over granite. There is little change in topography in the passage from one series to the other, and no noticeable change in stream grade. From this it is to be inferred, that differential erosion has not played a great part in the formation of the valley floor. There are fairly extensive silt flats along Megalong and Pulpit Hill Creeks, consisting of flat, badly-drained silts, up to four hundred yards wide, and of some depth. These are mainly of sand; Plate xix, fig. 2, gives a typical view. These flats extend right up to the steep talus slopes, and appear to be swamp or lake deposits. They contain no stones. Obviously, these flats could not have been formed under existing conditions, as the streams are just trenching them and washing away the earth. They must have been deposited along the level valley floor before the lowest courses of the streams had their present grade, that is, before the Cox cut its deep modern gorge in the valley floor, at a time when this valley floor was near base-level. It appears highly probable that the warping of western Kanimbla affected the valley to the east of the Cox, as the edges of these eastern ridges adjacent to the river are somewhat higher than the land a little further to the east in the valley. This is also the case with Blackheath Creek. Such warping, whether near, or a good deal above base-level before the cutting of the modern gorges, would cause the creeks to slow down, depositing part of their loads of rock waste to form these flats which are, of course, rather temporary features. The topography of the remainder of Hastern Kanimbla is very similar to that of Megalong Valley, being, possibly, a little more subdued on account of the greater predominance of granite. The silt flats of Blackheath Creek at 2,000 feet are very extensive, whilst the valley of Lett River is very flat. When we turn to consider the modern course of the Cox, we are struck at once by the variations in the amount of dissection going from north to south. Near Hartley, the river is entrenched only a couple of hundred feet in the level plain. At Megalong Creek the depth of entrenchment is 800 feet; whilst for twenty miles below Galong Creek the canyon of the Cox is nowhere less than 1,900 feet deep. Turning to the tributaries, the variations are still more striking. Lett River, Blackheath, Pulpit Hill and Megalong Creeks make discordant—in the latter cases highly discordant—junctions with the river. Turning to the western side, Kanangra and Jenolan Rivers make strictly accordant junctions with the Cox. Little River and Gibraltar Creek are not strictly accordant, whilst the junctions of the other streams, Cullenbenbong, Long Swamp and Lowther Creeks, for example, are discordant. The character of the gorge is clearly shown by Text-fig. 1. The effective head of erosion for the tributaries is now at the junction of Megalong Creek, although the Cox itself has cut back further. From these considerations, two definite conclusions can be drawn: firstly, Kanimbla Valley is mature, and a fairly ancient feature; secondly, the modern gorges of the Cox and its southern tributaries have been formed recently. In other words, this valley floor has only recently been raised far above base-level. Summing up, the Kanimbla Valley represents a stage, rhythm, or pause in the uplift of the plateau, of fairly long duration. 228 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, The Relationship between the Kanimbla and Wallerawang Levels —The change from the Kanimbla to the Wallerawang levels—trom Hartley to South Bowenfels —is marked by a great change in stream-valley topography. At Hartley, the Cox is little entrenched. Going up the river, however, a deep gorge is entered, which extends almost to Wallerawang, attaining a maximum depth of 600 feet near Farmer’s Creek. The lower parts of Farmer’s and Marangaroo Creeks have also cut deep canyons in, or, in the latter case, below the 3,100 feet level. These gorges extend some three miles up the streams, and are only just beginning to attack the soft upper valley levels. Of the twenty-four miles of river line between A. ing: S Kings Tableland esoo owmun iSelect al is) erga ico: BY: = ZB MY = Zio tp th — Sy Zr 7 —- LLL < LQVGS Db a Ze Gf = = SZ - = Z —=> Text-fig. 9—The warped valley of the Kowmung River. (a) shows the rising warp as viewed from Mt. Mouin. (b) gives a view looking to the south from Mt. Solitary. In each case the warped valley floor is seen to be little dissected. (c) shows the old valley floor looking northwards from Bindook Swamp. Note the striking ‘‘valley-in-valley”’ structure, and the fault scarp to the west (left). Hartley and the head of the Cox, only the lower thirteen miles are characterized by gorges. The junctions of these two streams with the Cox are accordant, in strong contrast to the discordant junctions of the tributary streams in the softer rocks below Hartley. The limited extent of the gorges, the steep grade of the river—forty feet per mile—and the fact that Solitary Creek runs 500 feet above the Cox, and is separated from it by an insignificant valley divide, are certain evidence that the gorges have been recently cut, with a lower limit of 2,200 feet (Hartley). That is, the Kanimbla levels have acted as a temporary base-level BY F, A. CRAFT. 229 of erosion for the Wallerawang levels. The physiographic fault between the two is evidence of the same thing (see Text-fig. 12). The dissection of the higher levels has only been made possible recently by their uplift above the Kanimbla levels. That is, both the Wallerawang and Kanimbla Valley systems were formed at a constant level, and were co-extensive. Thus the upper valley once extended without a break from Piper’s Flat and Wolgan Gap to Mt. Mouin. The consequences of this conclusion are fully discussed when the folding movements are considered. Jamieson’s Valley and the Kowmung Basin.—The lowlands of Jamieson’s Valley are separated from the Kanimbla levels by a uniformly sloping surface, which has not been much dissected apart from the canyons of the Cox and Kowmung Rivers. The steady slope from Jamieson’s Creek to Gangerang Range on the south, and Mt. Mouin on the north of the Cox, is a very striking feature. The. Cox and Kowmung Rivers have cut extremely deep and narrow gorges in this surface, which vary in depth from zero at Black Hollow Creek to 2,000 feet between Mt. Mouin and Gangerang. The smaller streams flowing from the foot of Mt. Mouin are but little entrenched in this surface, although, as we have seen, the more powerful streams a little further up the Cox Valley, such as Breakfast and Kanangra Creeks, are flowing in very deep gorges similar to that of the Kowmung. 7 I} Naty pp — $< SGA L-—=— = — => =i Text-fig. 10.—lDLower Jamieson’s Valley, showing the antecedent course of Jamieson’s Creek and the stream fiats due to the rise of the warp to the south- west. The warp surface is very little dissected, and rises steadily towards the south and south-west. Cedar Creek (near the western margin) is a subsequent stream. (Drawn from Contour Map.) Jamieson’s Valley is bounded on three sides by precipitous cliffs of Triassic sandstone, the open southern margin shading almost imperceptibly into the Kowmung Basin. But for the fact that the Cox River cuts across here, it would be impossible to distinguish between the two features. On the north-east, the plateau rises 2,300 feet above the valley floor, but on the south-western margin, the elevation above the tilted western margin is only about 1,000 feet (Text-fig. 9). There are extensive silt flats along the middle portion of Jamieson’s Creek in the vicinity of 500 feet (see Text-fig. 10) similar in many respects to those of 230 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, Megalong. Along Reedy Creek especially, islands rise from these flats like islands from the sea. The flats themselves are absolutely level, and consist of fine sands and clays. There are no large stones in these silts, and very few small ones. Doubtless there were some in the original deposit, but owing to the subsequent action of air and water over a fairly lengthy period, they have been disintegrated. I am strongly of the opinion that these flats are due to the deposition of silt in a body of water. They are not due to the occupation of the valley by swamps, as peat is not found in them. Sword grass and rushes are absent, and gum trees and grass grow right to the creek. For all that, the heads of the flats are, as yet, badly drained, and are submerged in wet weather to a depth of several inches. The origin of these flats is fairly obvious. The streams had cut down almost to base-level along their lower courses, forming a flat-bottomed valley. The edge of a warp has risen across the lower three miles of Jamieson’s Creek, which was not able to keep pace in downcutting with the rise of the warp. The stream was, therefore, partially dammed, causing the formation of a lake on the upstream side, in which silt was deposited. This lake acted as a temporary base level of erosion for the Jamieson’s Creek basin, and, in course of time, became almost silted up. At the mouth of the creek, the warped surface has reached a height of 775 feet above sea-level, 275 feet above the silt flats at 500 feet. Thus the creek is antecedent. On the southern side of the Cox, at the head of the Kowmung River, the warped valley surface has attained an elevation of 2,800 feet. The lower part of Jamieson’s Creek, which has a meandering course, is entrenched some 300 feet in the surface, and flows in a steep gorge cut in hard conglomerate. Headward erosion is just beginning to affect the lower margin of the flats, which have been trenched to a depth of twenty feet. The upper portion is, as yet, practically unaffected, although some terracing of the order of five feet, is shown at the junction of Reedy and Jamieson’s Creeks. The conditions of deposition appear to have been very similar to those which prevailed on the Nepean River during the deposition of the silt lakes at Wallacia and elsewhere, the general characteristics of the two deposits showing a marked similarity as regards material and stratification. The other stream of Jamieson’s Valley does not show these features, being a revived ancient stream at present having a consequent character, and is uniformly entrenched in the warped plain. In general, Jamieson’s and Megalong-Kanimbla Valleys are closely related from a physiographic point of view. The Kowmung Basin.—The topography of the Kowmung Basin is comparatively simple. In brief, the area consists of a ramp (Figs. 1, 9), which rises from 300 feet in the north-eastern corner to 2,800 feet in the south, at Bindook Swamp, and 3,000 feet near Kanangra Walls to the west. It is bounded on the east by the Tonalli Range, which varies in height above the ramp from 1,600 feet in the north to 300 feet in the extreme south, on the Wollondilly divide, the actual respective elevations of the range being 1,900 and 3,100 feet above the sea. The western edge consists of a scarp—partly valley wall, partly fault scarp—whose height above the ramp varies from 1,600 feet at Gangerang to 800 feet in the vicinity of Mt. Shivering. This surface has a remarkably uniform upward slope from the north to the south, Kiaramba Ridge, te the east of the Kowmung, being typical (Text-fig. 12C). BY F. A. CRAFT. 231 Its surface consists of Silurian, Devonian and Upper Marine rocks, and must, therefore, be a surface or plane of erosion. The streams have trenched this surface with profound juvenile gorges, up to 2,000 feet deep, but the upland form is but little altered, mature valleys being preserved right on Kiaramba Ridge. The main features of warping and past stream history are discussed under separate headings. Jamieson’s Valley and the Kowmung Basin form a great oval-shaped valley which opens in a general way into the Wollondilly Basin to the south. The outlet of the Cox is hardly noticeable in the eastern wall of this valley, being only a mile and a half wide at the top. Byrne’s Gap, at the head of the Tonalli River, which is not occupied by any stream, is almost as wide. The true beginning of the “bottle-neck” constriction of the Lower Cox-Warragamba is not below the Wollondilly junction, but below the King’s Tableland-Tonalli Range scarp. At present, the 300 feet level is the base-level of erosion for the Kanimbla Valley. This latter surface continues to the east of Megalong Gap and Mt. Mouin, sloping thence uniformly, as an almost unbroken surface into Jamieson’s Valley. Valleys of the Lower Coxz-Wollondilly—The valleys of the Lower Cox and Wollondilly are excavated in the steps and slopes leading up to the main plateau. Here the streams have a low grade and run in deep valleys, whose depth varies from 2,000 feet in Upper Burragorang, and 1,700 feet in Lower Burragorang and the Lower Cox Valley, to 1,400 feet at the junction of the Cox and Wollondilly. The lower thirty miles of the valley of the Wollondilly are known as “Burragorang”’. An idea of the general appearance of these valleys is gained from Text-fig. 1 and Plate xx, fig. 2. The Lower Cox-Wollondilly system comprises five valleys—namely Burra- gorang, the lower valleys of the Cox and Nattai Rivers, and those of Green Wattle and Lacy’s Creeks. The average width of the Burragorang between cliff lines is somewhat less than two miles (contrast with the eight-mile-wide main Kowmung Valley). That of the Lower Cox is up to a mile and a half wide; whilst the other three vary from half to three-quarters of a mile in width. The floors of the two main valleys are flat, and consist of rich alluvial deposits up to half a mile wide, which the rivers are trenching. A typical section at the junction of the two rivers is shown in Text-fig. 11, and shows small water-worn pebbles and peat under- lying horizontally-bedded silts consisting of alternate layers of roots and plant remains, and plain silt, with thin layers of peaty material. The alluvials extend up the Cox above Pearce’s Creek, and up the Wollondilly above Byrne’s Creek. Terracing is very noticeable at the junction of the two rivers, three terraces being found at 180, 200 and 240 feet, the second being the most important. The last- named is met with on Pearce’s Creek on the Cox, and also above Fitzpatrick’s Crossing on the Wollondilly, three miles above the Cox junction. Further up the Wollondilly, higher terraces are met with. At the mouth of Byrne’s Creek, twenty miles above the Cox, a level detritus and silt plain occurs at 420 feet. A certain amount of uplift towards the south is very probable. The silts extend about a mile down the Warragamba, the lowest reliable level being at 150 feet above the sea, below Gogongolly Creek. The thickness of the deposits in any one place cannot be exactly determined, but the maximum is probably of the order of fifty feet at the Cox-Wollondilly junction (this is the 200 feet terrace). These silts appear to be very similar to the silt lakes found on the Nepean at Wallacia, Penrith and Camden, and appear to have had a similar origin. In this case, a rising warp across the Warragamba caused the formation of a lake, as the 232 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, stream was not able to cut down as rapidly as the barrier was elevated. Pauses in the uplift are indicated by the formation of the root beds, when the river was able to cut down and partly drain the lake. A period of standstill is now allowing the streams to cut down and erode the deposits. These valleys are enclosed by rampart-like cliffs of Hawkesbury sandstone, which form almost unbroken walls. Two particularly fine lengths occur, the “Burragorang Walls” and the Walls of Green Wattle Creek. The former are on the eastern side of the Wollondilly above the Nattai junction, whilst the latter Wottondilly ) <—_—___—_—_—_—_+0 Y2= ~SECTION- ww: THe LOWER ALLUVIALS. (MM First Terrace.@oo) = Second Terraceey6) Others. (850-00). Modern Gravels. Scale ae M Text-fig. 11.—Silts and Terraces of the Lower Cox-Wollondilly. The section proves the nature of these silts, showing that they are old lake deposits. The peat and root beds are particularly notable. Rising terraces further to the south indicate uplift in that part. are about five miles above the Cox junction with that stream, and also have a westward aspect. In both cases, the cliffs are quite straight, and almost unbroken, and are not even notched by tributaries. Thus they are quite different from the cliffs of the Grose and Jamieson Valleys, which are deeply cut into, even where mere wet-weather streams cross them. This absence of tributaries seems to indicate a recent formation for these streams, a conclusion supported by absence of meanders, whilst the straight and unbroken character of the cliff lines would appear to indicate a recent date for the excavation of the valleys themselves, a conclusion, as we shall see, in line with other evidence. The course of Green Wattle Creek is interesting. Seven miles from the Cox the valley is almost a mile wide, the eastern edge being the straight walls just mentioned (Plate xx, fig. 1). The floor at 400 feet consists of sandy silts with layers of water-worn pebbles and of peaty material. The creek is slow and wide, running in a sandy channel. A mile below this point, the stream runs into a rocky BY F, A. CRAFT. 233 gorge, cut in a terrace of hard Permian sandstone, which is fairly extensive at 600 feet. On the stream level between three and four hundred feet, there are flat terraces up to a quarter of a mile broad, and to half a mile long, mainly on the western side at the mouth of tributary gullies. These alternate with stretches of rocky gorge cut in grey tuffs. The last mile is across the Cox Valley flats to the river, with which the creek makes an accordant junction, after wandering over the flats. The river has apparently dragged the mouth of the creek downstream. A feature of the plateau surface in this part is the occurrence of lines of sandstone residuals, or rock hills, about two hundred feet high. One line is found along the King’s Tableland; others between Black Hollow, Green Wattle, Lacy’s Creeks and the Wollondilly River; and another very fine line between the Wollon- dilly and the Nattai (Plate xx, fig. 2). In some cases, these residuals occur right on top of the modern cliffs, and appear to have extended at one time into the area now occupied by the valleys. They are hemi-spheroidal to conical in shape, cut out of sandstone of uniform hardness, and are most likely old basalt caps or residuals from which the basalt has been removed. These lines are parallel to the Mt. Tomah-Mt. Wilson residuals. No other explanation is apparent. The residuals indicate that the older valleys (pre-uplift) in this part were a good deal narrower than the modern ones. The fact that all these valleys are of the same order of magnitude is important when considering the evolution cf the stream system. The Warragamba Gorge——tThis is, perhaps, the most remarkable of all the Cox-Wollondilly canyons, not as regards depth, for its maximum depth, 1,600 feet, is only half that of Kanangra Creek Canyon, but on account of its extreme straightness. Of a course of fourteen miles between the Wollondilly-Cox junction and the Nepean, nine miles are almost perfectly straight, even the ends of the gorge being only slightly bent. Thus this stream is eminently young, and contrasts strongly with the upper and middle sections of the Cox which fiow in great meanders. For the greater part of its length the sides of the gorge are almost precipitous, the river occupying the whole width of the bottom of the gorge. Above “The Bend’, three miles below the Wollondilly, the gorge widens notably, as the soft Upper Coal Measure shales, rising gradually towards the west, are exposed to the attack of the stream, which has cut terraces or benches at high flood level. The entrance from Burragorang (Taylor’s “Warragamba slot’) is considerably wider than a view from that valley would appear to indicate. It is actually a narrowing continuation of the Lower Cox or the Lower Burragorang Valley. Going downstream into a narrowing canyon, sandbanks and terraces are met with until five miles below the Wollondilly. As the cliffs close in on the river, great boulders are found in the river bed, and on the hillsides up to high flood level, sixty to seventy feet above the stream. Coming to Monkey Creek the gorge, now sixteen hundred feet deep, has narrowed into a ravine. Immense boulders up to twenty feet long, fifteen feet high and ten feet wide are found by the side of the river, whose channel is, however, fairly clear. The cliffs come down steeply almost to the water’s edge. Towards the lower end, within two miles of the Nepean, another change is noticed. The banks of the river are almost perpendicular, and the zone of scrub, till now so conspicuous a feature within the flood limits, is absent. This is the steepest-sided part of the canyon, although it is only three to six hundred feet deep. At the junction with the Nepean, near Wallacia, shingle beds are met with. Within the Warragamba gorge, the shingle beds extend only three miles 234 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, below the Wollondilly—an indication of the swiftness of the flood waters in this narrow track, although the average grade of the river is only seven feet per mile. The zone of scrub on either bank of the river is a most remarkable feature. There are no trees within the flood limit, but scrub, with little undergrowth, is found, with the characteristic downstream bend. Above this zone rise the forest trees, grey gum and turpentine. The scrub zone is littered with boulders and flood debris, and is almost impassable. The bottom of the gorge thus has the appearance of a lane—the river—running between footpaths which are, in turn, bordered by hedges, forest trees and cliffs. The sides of the main gorge are indented by tributary gullies, all of which are discordant, coming in a little below high flood level. As these creeks only run in wet weather, they could hardly be expected to cut down to the normal low river level. Uplift had also something to do with the arrangement, as tiny wet-weather streams could not keep pace in downcutting with the main stream. The position of the uplift which caused the formation of the Cox-Wollondilly silt lakes is of some importance. An uplift of the order of three to five hundred feet at Wallacia partly blocked the Nepean in a similar manner. As this uplift is across the Warragamba also, and took place very recently, as is indicated later in this paper, it could readily have caused the partial blocking of the Warragamba also, and the formation of silt lakes at the head of the canyon. Recent faulting has also taken place across Monkey Creek, according to Willan. The significance of the newly-formed Warragamba with regard to the question of past stream flow will be discussed later. Main Folds and Warps of the Area. The folding and warping movements which have affected the regions adjacent to the Sydney Basin have been noted by Andrews (1903) and described fully by Taylor (1923). Other contributions to the subject include Professor David’s papers on the Monocline (1896) and the Kurrajong Fault (1902), and papers by Taylor, more specifically his contribution to the Pan-Pacific Guide Book (1923) ; Willan’s “Geological Map of the Sydney Basin” (1925) is also very valuable for the area which it covers. It will be seen that the main Blue Plateau has scarcely been touched. Surrounding the Sydney Basin, which is a neutral or “stillstand’”’ area, there are three main lines of warping—the northern or Hawkesbury Warp, including the country between North Sydney and Broken Bay; the Blue (Mt.) Monocline fold and warp system, which extends from the north of Kurrajong, southwards to Mittagong; and the Southern Warp, or Nepean Ramp, which, beginning at Cook’s River (Sydney), merges into the southern highlands in the vicinity of Moss Vale. This much is proved, but the actual uplift of the main mass of the Blue Plateau has, as yet, been a subject of conjecture. In this account, I propose to treat the Cox Basin specifically, making some reference to relevant adjacent areas. General Considerations of the Folding—In making a general survey of the country between the Hunter River basin and Lake George, one is struck by the regular variations of altitude. This is particularly the case near the coast, where the Sydney Basin lies between two high areas of warped country. Further to the west, in the region with which this paper deals, variations of altitude are notice- able, which can be correlated, in part, with the littoral features. BY F. A. CRAFT. 235 The dominant movement of uplift in the eastern portion of New South Wales has been extended along north-south lines. If it is thought that uplift took place simultaneously along the whole line, variations of altitude from place to place would be due to simple differential uplift; if the view is taken that these high- lands have been built up by a system of rather localized uplifts, warp and fold lines with an east-west trend would be found, marking the northern and southern limits of each movement of uplift. Such lines of warping are found to the north and south of the Sydney Basin, and continue, as will be shown in the latter case, to the west. The eastern Highlands of this State fall into three groups—the New England Plateau, rising to 5,500 feet; the Central, or Blue, Plateau, with a maximum elevation of 4,400 feet; and the Southern Highlands, extending from the Federal Capital Territory to Kosciusko, which have peaks over a wide area from 5,500 to 7,200 feet above the sea. The northern and central sections are separated by the Cassilis Geocol, at 2,000 feet; and the central and southern massifs by the Lake George geocol, at 2,100 to 2,300 feet. The Central is the most limited of the plateau massifs. A good deal of its elevation appears to be due to the over- lapping of the main northern and southern uplifts in that section. In dealing with the uplift of this central area included in the Cox region, the more recent earth movements have been described and located first, and the earlier folding movements identified by a process of elimination. The Mulgoa Step—The section of the eastern face of the monoclinal fold extending from Kurrajong Heights to Douglas Park is the result of very recent uplift. This is clearly shown by the silts of the Lower Cox-Wollondilly. Obviously the silts are of more recent age than the valleys in which they are found, these valleys, in turn, being younger than the uplift which led to their formation. The uplift responsible for the partial blocking of the Warragamba was younger than the Lower Cox-Wollondilly Valleys, and, consequently, much younger than the uplift which led to the formation of those valleys. This same uplift led to the blocking of the Nepean above Wallacia. It is suggested that this last phase of uplift only affected the country for a limited distance behind the modern monoclinal face, over a maximum width of six miles, but generally less than that, and was responsible for these features :— (i). Most of the uplift and faulting at Kurrajong Heights, which extends to the south across the Grose River, and across Blue Gum Creek, to the north of Springwood. (ii). The anticline at Glenbrook, with a fault on its western side to the south-east of Glenbrook station. (iii). Uplift at the junction of the Warragamba and Nepean Rivers, together with folding and faulting at Bent’s Basin, faulting across Monkey Creek and at Razorback Range. Most of these features are clearly shown on Willan’s map. Additional proof of the recency of this uplift is given by the undissected nature of this eastern edge; even the soft shales of Kurrajong, lying on a steep slope, are practically undissected. At Mulgoa, the uplifted step to the east of the Nepean, which has undergone a general uplift of 500 feet, rising to 800 at one point, has been but little attacked by streams. To the east of The Oaks, the soft shale slopes have not been cut into much by Mt. Hunter Rivulet, but the later uplift here has only affected the country for about three miles to the west of the monoclinal face. Razorback Range, also very little cut into, may have been affected by this recent uplift. 236 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, The undissected character of this edge is in striking contrast to the amount of dissection which the streams immediately to the west have accomplished. Blue Gum Creek, to the south of the Grose is, for instance, perched on the top of the fold. A few miles to the west, Linden and Wentworth Creeks have trenched the plateau deeply right to their heads. The western side of the Glenbrook anticline is also undissected. The river gravels scattered over the surface of Lapstone Hill, and also on the hilltops of Wallacia, are recent deposits. ‘These loosely-cemented, or uncemented deposits cannot remain long on the hillsides, as they disintegrate rapidly, and are washed away.’ They cannot be compared, in point of age, with the Kanimbla Valley, or even with the lower valleys of the Cox and Wollondilly. This is significant, as no notable stream change has taken place since these gravels were elevated, which was, comparatively, very recently. Newer Uplifts—The Kowmung Warp.—Between the Hunter River Valley and Lake George, the age of uplift of the plateau varies regularly from north to south. The Colo River and its tributaries have cut great canyons in the hard Hawkesbury Series, right to their heads. The great mass of the Southern Plateau in the districts of Taralga, Moss Vale, Goulburn and the Upper Shoalhaven, is very little dissected. At Tallong, for instance, the uplands are flat and swampy. only two miles from the Shoalhaven gorge; and there are large areas of mature valleys in the Upper Wollondilly and Abercrombie basins which have no counter- part in the Grose and Colo systems. The Cox represents an intermediate stage, where the eastern section is deeply dissected, but the western part has suffered little dissection. The idea that the southern part of these highlands has been, in general, uplifted at a more recent time than the northern part, receives striking confirma- tion when a detailed examination of the topography and physiography is made. I have applied the name ‘“Kowmung Warp” to the warping movement which is typified by the tilted plain of the main Kowmung Valley between the Cox River and the Kowmung-Wollondilly divide between Mts. Colong and Shivering. The characteristics of this surface are shown clearly in Text-fig. 9. _ Two lines of evidence—geological and physiographic—go to prove that the whole surface comprised in the valley floor which stretches from Mt. Solitary in the north to the Kowmung-Wollondilly divide in the south is a warped surface. The Kowmung Valley, part only of which is occupied by the Kowmung River system, rises southwards in a gentle, almost unbroken, slope. To the west of Jamieson’s Creek, a similar ramp leads up to the Kanimbla levels near Mt. Mouin, and the Gangerang Range. These slopes, which are very even, are trenched by the great gorges of the Cox and Kowmung, but these gorges occupy a relatively small part of the valley floor. This ramp, or upper valley surface, could not have been cut at its present elevation above base-level. It is clearly an old plane, or surface of erosion, which has recently been uplifted and trenched by juvenile canyons. That this uplift is recent is shown by the fact that streams rising near the base of Mt. Mouin, and flowing south and east to the Cox, have not cut down much, and are merely nibbling away the edges of the Cox gorge. The more powerful streams, such as the Cox and Kowmung Rivers, Cedar Creek and, to the west, Breakfast and Kanangra Creeks, have graded their channels, but still flow in extremely narrow gorges. Black Hollow Creek is not much entrenched in the surface, and the shale beds leading down from Kiaramba Ridge to the Cox near Black Hollow Creek are almost undissected. BY F. A. CRAFT. 237 The evidence offered by Jamieson’s Creek very definitely confirms this idea of warping, and is of the utmost value as a positive proof of the nature and recency of the warping. The relationship of the valleys to the tilted plain is clearly shown in Text-fig. 12. Thus Kanimbla-Megalong Valley bears the same relationship to Jamieson’s Valley as the Wallerawang levels bear to the Kanimbla. In either case a flexure separates the valleys. The other evidence in the matter 1S More geological in character. Portlana ee a Hartley EN | see a ae io Blue Plateau.3s00., Katoomba Kowmung i - (oye) ” oe eel ee | Kanimblax Megalong im we Se seers i GI ee SS x = a Cox se L@MILES @=-Upper Warped Surface ane @)-Upper Valley Level ER A wit tanglint eet )-River Level. 22) Block WWwane-Litheow. Sie eae Se eS 3000 ae : As ‘Kowmun King's ? Slade age roel arineleiana step\s lee a Ean £0x River (c) > V:H=el g55 MILES Bindook Swam sooo cee are ty iL Big Plain Mt Alibi : SS Berra | i mses ae iL ADO ar aA Ls Nie = fi After NSWGR) 2bMILES Hat)-S. a E. Divides of Kowmune iW Scarp of Tonalli Ra Text-fig. 12.—The Relationship between the Plateaux and Valleys of the Area. (A) shows the parallelism of the valley levels of the Cox with the plateau surface. Comparison is possible by projecting the two section lines of unequal lengths (broken lines) on to a straight line of uniform direction, thus giving the components of the various slopes, and hence the amount of folding in the given direction. (B) shows the two flexures in the former co-extensive valley levels, and their influence on the grade of the Cox River. (C) illustrates the effect of the Kowmung Warp on the plateau and the valley floor, and the rise up to the high Jenolan Plateau from the Blue Plateau level. Graph (i) is perpendicular to (ii) and (ili), and intersects them at Bindook Swamp. ‘These figures constitute a deductive proof of the folding theories of this paper. The deformation due to late warping is clearly shown by the Upper Marine sandstones between Jamieson’s Creek and Mt. Mouin. These beds rise at the rate of 280 feet to the mile into Megalong Gap, and present an almost unbroken surface, very similar to that of the Hawkesbury sandstones of the Blue Plateau. An area of relative depression exists between the foot of the Mt. Solitary talus and Mt. Mouin (Text-fig. 9B) to the south-west. Here there is a marked change in the 238 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, slope of the sandstone. To the east, and under Mt. Solitary, the beds are sub- horizontal; to the west, they rise at the rate of 280 feet per mile—a slope far greater than that of the corresponding part of the Blue Plateau between Went- worth Falls and the Marked Tree (beyond Katoomba) which is of the order of 130 feet per mile, or the 170 feet to the mile rise of the Upper Coal Measures between Woodford and Katoomba. These, it may be noted, are maximum slopes. To the north of Megalong Gap, the series is sub-horizontal to Hartley, to the north of which there is a step up of the order of 500 feet to the Lithgow- Wallerawang levels. Cedar Creek, to the south-west of Mt. Solitary, flows along the north-eastern margin of the steep slope leading up to Mt. Mouin and its slight, uniform gradient in a gorge up to 600 feet deep, distinguishes it from Jamieson’s Creek, the mouth of which only has been affected by the warping (Text-fig. 124). It is highly probable that the bedding planes of the sandstones are not parallel to the general warped surface, since the thickness of the beds varies considerably within small areas, the warped surface of erosion in such parts apparently cutting across the bedding planes. This variation is well marked to the west of Jamieson’s Creek. At the junction of this stream with the Cox, the Upper Marine beds have a thickness of 300-400 feet. Below Cedar Creek, the river flows through a breached anticline of intensely hard metamorphic Devonian rock which here outcrops on the warped slope on either side of the river, being obscured to the east and west, away from the stream, by the newer sandstone. Still further up the river, the sandstones form a capping, up to 200 feet thick, on the highly-inclined Devonian beds. A notable thickening to a maximum of 450 feet is observed in the neighbourhood of Megalong Gap and Mt. Mouin. Three miles north of the Gap, on the same level, granite is exposed on the valley floor, capped in places with a thin layer of sandstone and conglomerate. Again, erosion appears to have taken place across the bedding planes. These Upper Marine beds are found right along Kiaramba Ridge, on the eastern side of the Kowmung River, and outcrop near Mt. Colong, on part of the Kowmung-Wollondilly divide. Towards the head of the main Kowmung Valley, highly-inclined Silurian rocks, which contain the Colong Caves, outcrop on the upper valley floor, and their bevelled edges form part of the general warp slope. Other ridges on the western side of the Kowmung—Gingra, for instance, which leads down from Kanangra Walls—are level benches, part of this valley being cut in tilted Devonian strata. Near the junction of the Kowmung and Cox, the tilted surface is prominent on both sides of the Kowmung. This main valley, eight miles wide, is hardly scarred by Black Hollow Creek, but the great canyon of the Kowmung is prominent. After passing the gap in the Cox divide near the end of Kiaramba Ridge, which is only 800 feet above the Cox, the river pursues an antecedent course, flowing into the highlands, and joining the Cox in an upstream direction in a gorge 2,000 feet deep. The gradual slope down to the Cox on the east of this part of the Kowmung Valley is unbroken by large gullies, although it consists largely of soft shales. There are also relics of mature valleys on the Kowmung-Wollondilly divide which are treated later. In passing, it may be noted that Byrne’s Gap, to the east of Mt. Colong, may once have been occupied by a stream flowing northwards from the present Tonalli River area into the Kowmung. An assumption that these great valleys were formed as a result of differential erosion in hard and soft strata is not justifiable, not only on account of the BY F. A. CRAFT. 239 evidence given above, but also because it would imply that weak streams, such as Black Hollow Creek, were capable of great lateral erosion after rejuvenation, but before doing much down cutting; and also because the rocks which were eroded to form this valley were hard, being Hawkesbury sandstones, Upper Coal Measure and Upper Marine Series, which were all littoral deposits. The really soft rocks of the area lie on the Kowmung-Wollondilly divide, between Bindook Swamp and Mt. Werong, which are highland areas. It is interesting to note that similar theories of sharp local warping are being advocated by Mr. Sussmilch for the Upper Hunter basin. The Extent and External Relationships of the Kowmung Warp.—So far, field evidence has been advanced which has shown, inter alia, that Wallerawang, Kanimbla, Megalong, Jamieson’s and the Kowmung Valleys were once coextensive and have been subjected to differential uplift, so that they are now separated by sharp flexures. It is possible to correlate these valley levels, and the earth movements producing them, with the levels and movements which produced the present Blue Plateau. Text-fig. 124A, which is based on simple mathematical projection of broken lines on a fixed line—the latter joining Glenbrook and Mt. Lambie, and running in a W.N.W. and H.S.E. direction—shows the relationship between the two. Each curve gives the component of the slope along fixed lines in the constant direction, and thus shows the folding movements of each line in that direction, which latter is generally taken to be the average slope of the Blue Plateau Monocline, and is certainly perpendicular to the Kurrajong-Glenbrook- Mittagong fold. Proceeding eastwards from the Main Divide it is seen that the Piper’s Flat- Wallerawang Valley is subparallel to the plateau surface, the latter being inter- sected by the valley of Cox’s Creek. A kink in the plateau surface corresponds to a kink in the valley curve, and indicates a relative downthrow area. The Hartley flexure has no exact counterpart on the plateau surface, although the high ridges at Clarence (not shown) are possibly related. The Kanimbla-Megalong levels are parallel to the main plateau. The curve of the Kowmung Warp between Mt. Mouin and Jamieson’s Creek is distinctly related to the curve of the plateau between Woodford and Katoomba. Below Jamieson’s Creek the old distinctive valley levels end. It is seen that the profiles of the upper valley levels and of the plateau are distinctly sympathetic. When one considers that the warping and faulting of the Jenolan Plateau have taken place not far to the west of these valleys, the correlation is still more striking. Obviously, the earth movements which produced the flexures in the valley floor also affected the plateau surface, or, in other words, since the curves show such a striking sympathy of contour, they were produced by the same earth movements; that is, the valley levels are older than the more recent flexing movements. The nature of the original folds which produced the surface in which the valleys were originally incised will be shown later. This piece of correlation also throws light on the extent of the Kowmung Warp, since this warp is clearly shown on the present plateau surface, the eastern edge extending across the country between Katoomba and Wentworth Falls, by Mts. Hay, Tomah and Irvine, and apparently dying out gradually to the north. A definite scarp exists along this line. One result of this is to give Katoomba an average annual rainfall of 56 inches, whereas, without the scarp, the rainfall would probably not exceed 40 inches. G 240 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, The warping may also be correlated with the Nepean Ramp, extending south- wards from the neighbourhood of Sydney towards the Shoalhaven River. The edge of this warp is not perpendicular to the general north-south line of the mono- cline, but runs to the south-west from (near) Sydney to Picton, where the Razorback Range, at the point where this warp crosses the monocline, is probably a-fault block. To the north-west, the hinge is somewhat indefinite towards Oakdale, owing to the flattening of the warp and great erosion in the soft shales by tributaries of the Nepean, but the southern rise is plainly shown on both sides of the Burragorang Valley. To the west of Burragorang, the uplift appears to have been more intense, as the plateau to the west at 3,100 feet is 600 feet higher than the plateau to the east of this valley at 2,500 feet. It is extremely probable that this part of the valley of the Wollondilly has been excavated along a fault line, the valleys of Lacy’s and Green. Wattle Creeks probably following smaller faults. I hope to discuss this matter fully in a future paper on the Wollondilly Basin. On the east of Burragorang, there is a rise of 400 feet on the plateau from the. Warragamba to the Nattai Valley, a distance of seven miles. To the west, the long ridges between the Wollondilly and Black Hollow Creek rise from 1,900 feet in the vicinity of the Cox to an average of 3,100 feet on the plateau around Mt. Colong over a distance of nineteen miles (Text-fig. 12C), giving an average slope of 63 feet per mile. The rise of Kiaramba Ridge from the Cox to Bindook Swamp on the Kowmung-Wollondilly divide is 2,500 feet (all of which is not due to warping, although most is) over a distance of 23 miles, giving an average slope of the order of 119 feet per mile. Thus there is a regular change of slope along the lines perpendicular to the edge of the warp as one moves from the east of Burragorang to the north of Jamieson’s Creek. The average mean slopes are of the order, in feet per mile, of: Plateau from the Warragamba to the Nattai, 59; plateau between the Cox and Bindook Creek, 63 (Text-fig. 12C) ; Kiaramba Ridge in the Kowmung Valley, 109; upper valley slope from Jamieson’s Creek to Megalong Gap, 280; plateau between Wentworth Falls and Katoomba, 140 feet. It will thus be seen that the warping reached a maximum of intensity to the north-east of Gangerang Range. To the west and south-west of Gangerang, the movement of uplift became so intense that faulting took place, as we have seen in the study of the Kanangra Platform. The Nepean Ramp-Kowmung Warp thus has the general form of a plunging syncline. It will be noted that the greatest thickness of Permian and Triassic rocks lies at the focus of the northern edge of this syncline; that is, the old Permian and Triassic geosyncline has been revived and intensified by late warping movements. The latest uplift of Jenolan Plateau, which differentiates it from the main Blue Plateau, has already been discussed. A well-marked warp runs from the western side of Mt. Lambie to the north of Rydal, and thence on the western side of Kanimbla Valley between the Cox River and the main Divide. This warp has also affected the eastern part of Megalong Valley to the south of Megalong Creek. Still further south, it passes into a fault, which begins near the junction of the Cox and Kanangra Rivers and runs parallel to the latter. Indeed, the course of this stream and its great canyon have been determined by this fault. Continuing to the south of Kanangra Walls, the fault becomes indistinct in the soft rocks of the Kowmung-Wollondilly divide, but appears to continue into the © Wollondilly Basin, and to be connected with the Lake George fault system. I hope to discuss this matter in a later paper. BY F. A. CRAFT. 241 The physiographic fault at Hartley is, I think, not nearly so extensive as this other fault on the west of the Kowmung. Apparently the main warp some five miles to the north of Hampton bifurcates, one branch continuing in a less intense form to the north, towards Mt. Lambie, the other branch going to the north-east across the mouth of Lowther Creek, where it is probably responsible for Blaxland’s Swamp, and continuing to the west of Hartley, and for some distance to the north of the high ridge at Mt. Clarence (up to 4,000 feet). The kink in the plateau and upper valley surfaces near Lithgow appears to be a part of this earth ripple. In the foregoing discussion, the existence of older folds has been kept in the background. Having determined and localized the newer earth movements, it is now possible to identify the older folds. a THT EN Aan Wy WW) I}, f \ Text-fig. 13.—Pre-uplift Peneplain Surface. Primitive folds and basalt residuals are found in meridional lines, with a different stream arrangement from that obtaining at the present time. The broken line shows the crest of the first extensive fold, which was an anticline. The Old Blue (Mt.) Anticline—The existence of a monoclinal fold in the vicinity of Kurrajong and Glenbrook was proved by David. At Kurrajong Heights, a maximum vertical displacement of 1,900 feet has been caused by folding and faulting. Near Glenbrook, the amount of uplift varies from 600 to 800 feet. As the fold between Kurrajong Heights and Bent’s Basin is composed of hard sand- stone, and is of recent formation, it is well preserved. That this fold continues to the south is clearly shown by sections of Wianamatta shale near The Oaks and at Mowbray Park, between Picton and the Nattai River. To the west, the shale is sub-horizontal, but it dips sharply to the east on to the flat country near Camden and the more elevated land in the vicinity of Picton. 242 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, To the south of Picton and the west of the Nepean River there is a definite dip of the land surface to the east, as the railway heights indicate. The more easterly new line through Bargo is, on the average, 150 feet lower than the older line to the west, through Picton Lakes and Balmoral. At Mittagong, the mono- clinal fold again appears to be present, rising 500 feet above the plain. Mt. Alexander, to the north of the town, is composed of sandstones which dip to the south at an angle of 11°, according to Taylor. This dip would be sufficient to account for the vertical displacement of 500 feet without faulting, although it is probable that both folding and faulting are involved. Still further to the south, the monocline as a distinctive topographic feature appears to die out. The southern portion of the fold is superimposed on the Kowmung Warp and the Nepean Ramp. It has already been shown that, between Picton and Kurrajong Heights, the face of this monocline is of recent development. The old eastern face of the main Blue Plateau uplifts was from three to six miles to the west, and the fold had a much more uniform slope at its base, as the Mulgoa Step had not been formed. From Razorback southwards, however, it is probable that the original fold face is preserved. The nature and extent of the first folding move- ment may be determined by subtracting the later movements from the sum total. This is readily done by reducing the Kowmung-Kanimbla-Wallerawang Valleys to their original level. We have already seen that all of these valley floors were, in the past, co-extensive. By flattening out the later flexures, therefore, the original contour of what is now the plateau surface will be obtained, as in Text-fig. 14. At Wallerawang, the plateau surface was 600 feet above the local base-level of erosion (not 600 feet above sea-level); Kanimbla Valley was entrenched 1,200 feet in the plateau surface, Jamieson’s Valley, 1,500 feet, and the Kowmung Valley from 1,400 feet at the Cox junction to 400 feet at Bindook Swamp. Thus the surface takes the form of an asymmetric anticline (Text-fig. 14), with a steep eastern limb and a gently sloping western limb. It attained a maximum elevation of 2,000 feet along the Bilpin-Hazelbrook-King’s Tableland line, which step con- tinued across the present Lower Cox Valley, and is still found to the east of Burragorang Valley. If a hinge or line of folding were developed along some part of an asymmetric anticline, near the crest, and the limb of the original fold away from the hinge and the crest were uplifted, then that part of the fold adjacent to the original crest of the anticline, and along the new hinge, would be rather flattened, that is, its curvature would be decreased. That is to say, there would be a change of slope—or ‘‘step’—in the final fold curve near the position of the crest of the original anticline. That such a position has arisen in this region is shown by the topography of the plateau surface. The land near the crest of the old anticlinal fold is now represented by the Bilpin-Hazelbrook-King’s Tableland step at 2,200 feet. That this step was the crest of the old fold is clearly shown by the decreasing depth of the upper valleys as one goes to the west (Text-fig. 12), and by the still- existing uniform slope to the east. This theory has four specific advantages :— 1. It explains the erosion of the great Jamieson’s Valley almost to the Grose Divide, and the formation of the Lower Cox and the Burragorang Valleys. All of these are located on, or near, the supposed anticlinal crest, which would be the main line of weakness and erosion. The continuous and almost straight line of these valleys is most striking. It is also notable that the Kowmung Valley is not included in this system. BY F. A. CRAFT. 243 2. It also explains the peculiar topography of the King’s Tableland, which can only be mentioned briefly here. A number of small streams rise on this step and flow westwards into Jamieson’s Valley, rising in broad, swampy mature valleys between 1,800 and 2,000 feet. They plunge into the higher land from ae agi ib c 4 ac ee ea Bs - Ce Myr Colo Nae pee ZY f Wy $24 Tm —— PO ie su ae — TpeNepean Mp £7 iyi Yn = oS Aye > Ss y Wollondilly Vinee, Text-fig. 14.—The Old Blue Mountain Anticline. The old anticline had a steep eastern face, but sloped gently to the west. The heights given are above the local base levels of the respective districts. The elevation of the western portion (marked 600 feet) was probably of the order of 1,000 feet above modern sea-level. The central heights are approximately correct on both standards, as are the eastern. 2,200 to 2,300 feet before entering the valley, flowing through narrow little gorges. They appear to be antecedent, and their swamps may have formed by the partial blocking of the streams caused by a slowly-rising barrier to the west—the newer fold, or Kowmung Warp. I hope to discuss this more fully in a future short . paper. 3. The formation of the Nattai Valley is explained. At the present time the Nattai is a misfit, trickling over the floor of a big valley. The cliff walls are much cut up and dissected, in strong contrast to the straight, new cliffs of Burragorang. As the Nattai shows small meanders such as are not found on the lower Wollon- dilly, its valley is also older. This agrees with the previous conclusion that the latter is a recently-formed stream, its position being determined by the location of the old anticlinal crest. This point will be further discussed later. 4. Such a fold as is postulated in Text-fig. 14 accounts for the very extensive dissection of the hard rocks which has been accomplished by Erskine, Glenbrook and Euroka Creeks, the Grose River and its tributaries, the Colo system and the 244 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, Nattai. The country which was more affected by the later warping and folding, although now more elevated, has not suffered anything like the same degree of dissection.. Again, the newly-raised Nepean Ramp and the Southern Tablelands around Goulburn are comparatively little dissected. In general, the mature valley systems (Kanimbla, etc.), which have been described, fit in very well with this theory. Turon-Cox- Kowmuns Valley ' 3500! ‘ Stillstand Warragamba Gorge -Nepean ‘Ramp’ \' \\ Vee ie \’ Text-fig. 15.—Analysis of the Fold Systems (generalized). The principal modern tectonic features of the region are here summarized. Overlapping of folds gives greater elevation, so the most elevated part (Jenolan Plateau) has undergone three uplifts. The superposition of the old anticline on the Kowmung Warp, and its effect on the altitude of that part of the region are shown. This is an extension and generalization of Text-fig. 2. Scale: 1 inch = 30 miles. Cox divide shown thus - ----- : Text-figs. 13, 14 and 15 show the whole process of folding which the Cox Basin has undergone. Text-fig. 13 is further discussed later. Text-fig. 14 is a restoration of the old anticline, based on the data shown in Text-fig. 12, whilst Text-fig. 15 shows the principal modern features of the topography, and summarizes the conclusions as to the nature of the post-basaltic earth movements which have affected this area. The northern edge of the warping and folding movements which uplifted the southern highlands of this State is represented by the Kowmung Warp. The southern edge of the main northern uplift is represented by the Hornsby Warp across the Hawkesbury, and the old anticline. Direction of Forces Causing Uplift—Whilst it is very unsafe to base any very general conclusions as to the direction of forces causing these uplifts on the evidence offered here alone, a few suggestions might not be out of place. There BY F. A. CRAFT. 245 is, I think, very little evidence to justify the possible suggestion that the uplift of this region is largely the result of purely compressive (tangential) forces. On account of the general low angular value of the warping movements, the absence of great overthrust faults, and the formation of purely plateau topography, the forces of uplift would appear to have been, in the main, normal to the surface of the earth. This would involve a certain amount of compression, as two normal forces at different points would give rise to a certain resultant tangential force. It has been suggested that the uplift of this plateau was the result of forces acting from the Pacific. Alternatively, another opinion has been expressed that the later phases of uplift were largely caused by forces from the west. A tentative conclusion might be, that the principal uplifts were the result of normal forces, and the tangential forces which they set up acted mainly from the west, although forces acting from the east were not unknown. Streams of the Area. Stream Characteristics and Relationships——The general characteristics of the streams of Hastern Australia have been outlined by Taylor (Physiography of HE. Australia), who has discussed many specific anomalies of flow. These streams fall into two main classes—longitudinal and transverse. The first class includes many of the tributaries of the Upper Murrumbidgee, the greater part of the Wollondilly, Shoalhaven and Nepean, the Upper Cox and some streams of the Upper Hunter. Such streams as the lower parts of the Clyde, Shoalhaven and Hawkesbury, the Upper Abercrombie and Turon, the Grose, Colo, Goulburn and Lower Hunter Rivers may all be classed as transverse streams. In general, each main river system includes many streams of each type, but the highly irregular, meandering courses throughout their lengths of the composite rivers give evidence that the present anomalous arrangement is, in general, of some age. In the Cox Basin -itself the streams fall naturally into two classes, according to geographic distribution. Those in the western part of the area, such as the Cox above Jamieson’s Creek, the Kowmung, Tuglow, Upper Wollondilly Rivers and many smaller streams flow in highly irregular meandering courses (Text-figs. 4 and 8), although, for the most part, they are now entrenched in deep canyons. These meanders have been inherited from earlier cycles. The eastern streams, such as the Lower Wollondilly, Warragamba, Lower Cox and, a little to the north, Erskine Creek and Grose River, do not show meanders. They are generally straight, with bends and curves of low angular value. In fact the main river— the Warragamba—is absolutely straight for nine miles of its fifteen-mile course. These streams are quite different from, and of much more recent formation than, those of the first-mentioned class, which show structural affinities with the ancient rivers of the Western Slopes, the Macquarie and Abercrombie. On these grounds one might reasonably believe that the Western Cox Basin once belonged to the Western stream system. The Cox River Basin occupies an oval-shaped area at the centre of a radial drainage system. Many of the main streams of east-central New South Wales rise on the Cox watershed. They include the Grose and Colo Rivers, the Turon, Campbell and Fish Rivers of the Macquarie system, the Abercrombie River, and tributaries of the Wollondilly and Nepean. At first glance it might be thought that the Cox is a simple consequent stream, whose origin is directly traceable to the uplift of the Blue Plateau and which has eroded its present complicated series of canyons directly in that surface, enlarging itself at the expense of surrounding 246 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, streams. Field evidence is quite against this, as the Upper Cox itself is threatened with capture in places, and that part of its basin is in a state of siege. Divides of the Cox.—In places where the original plateau surface is well preserved, such as Katoomba, Hampton, Shooter’s Hill, and King’s Tableland, the divide is comparatively wide and flat. It is the remains of an ancient peneplain, dissected to a depth of 200 feet by mature valleys, the direction of short streams being largely determined by local geological structure. To the north and north-east of Lithgow, for example, the influence of two perpendicular sets of master joints has given the streams a trellis pattern. The small cores of undissected country on the eastern and southern divides are being attacked by steep streams on either side of the watershed. At some places local captures are pending, as Wentworth Falls (Taylor), and also near Mt. Werong, where Werong Creek, of the Kowmung system, has captured part of the head of the Abercrombie on an ancient plain. The Main Divide between Rydal and Jenolan is a high ridge flanked on either side by sub-mature valleys. Here there is no prospect of any marked stream readjustment. In other places the divide is very unstable. At Wolgan Gap it has been breached, and Cox’s Creek rises above a yawning valley in which the Wolgan River flows, 1,200 feet below. Capture of the high stream has proceeded to some : Cr. Me Wale amnnRe : = ——__ Mt Lambie 3600 \ SS : SSS SS Se, = Zig y—)-3500 Text-fig. 16.—Solitary Creek. Note the high-level valley of the Creek, and the steep canyon of the Cox. The high-level valley of the Cox between Rydal and Mt. Walker is shown, and the meanders of the Cox. Solitary Creek is on the point of capture. Note the small antecedent tributary on the west in the diagram. Scale: 1 inch = 2 miles. extent. Again, at Piper’s Flat the Main Divide is represented by a ridge which rises forty feet above the plain, and is about a quarter of a mile wide. This runs across a valley four miles wide and 400 feet deep, and appears to be a local fold in shale. On the northern side Dulhunty’s Creek, a tributary of Williewa Creek (Turon), is flowing at a lower level than Piper’s Flat Creek, and with a steeper grade—100 feet per mile as against 30 feet. It is cutting back in the soft ridge, and threatening to capture Piper’s Flat Creek. A few miles to the north the head of Gow’s Creek, flowing in a broad valley at 3,500 feet, is being captured by a BY F. A. CRAFT. 247 small tributary of Solitary Creek. Here a slight change only is involved. Two great breaches in the western divides, at Rydal and Bindook Swamp, call for special attention. Solitary Creek.—Solitary Creek (Text-figs. 4 and 16) rises on the northern side of Mt. Lambie and, turning, flows southwards through Rydal and later, with the Fish River, pursues a westward course through Bathurst, thus forming part of a spiral. Between the Lambie block and Mt. Walker the upper valley surface of the Cox is prominent at 3,100 feet, stretching south to the scarp near Hartley. Immediately to the south-west of Solitary Creek Plain between Wallerawang and Rydal, a continuous scarp rises, which is a continuation of the Western Kanimbla Warp. A small tributary of Solitary Creek flows into the warp (right centre, Text-fig. 16), whilst a little lower down Solitary Creek flows across the warp line on to a plain, re-entering the higher scarp just above Rydal. Six hundred feet below, and only two miles away, the Cox flows in a juvenile gorge sawn in tremendously hard quartzite, whilst steep tributaries are threatening to capture Solitary Creek from the east and north. Immediately to the north of Rydal the Main Divide is only half a mile from the creek, and fifteen feet above it, the valley, along which the Western Railway runs, being quite continuous. The Cox shows very fine meanders in extremely hard rock, and so must have followed its present course before the cutting of its modern trench. On the other hand, it is not possible that Solitary Creek should have maintained its present relative course for long, since tributaries of Piper’s Flat Creek, but slightly rejuvenated, are in the course of capturing it. The presence of the continuous Wallerawang-Rydal Valley and the boathook bend of Solitary Creek, together with the age and power of the main river, show that some stream change has taken place. A reconstruction of the topography when the Wallerawang and Kanimbla levels were co-extensive is instructive. Then the Cox flowed sluggishly over the plain floor of its valley. The local “kink” in the valley floor and the plateau near Wallerawang (Text-fig. 12) could not then have existed, as it is lower in the valley than the contemporaneous valley levels on all sides at 3,000 to 3,200 feet. At that time Solitary and Piper’s Flat Creeks, and the Main Divide at Piper’s Flat were on much the same level. Later, probably in conjunction with the fault at Hartley, the area around Wallera- wang lagged behind a little in the continuous uplift, forming a small tectonic hollow. Uplift and tilting of the Wallerawang Valley took place towards the west and south-west. Piper’s Flat now has a grade of 30 feet per mile, and is being eroded. Experience shows that streams—e.g., the Lower Cox and Wollondilly— erode previously deposited alluvials when flowing at a grade of only ten feet per mile. Piper’s Flat, now being eroded, could not have been formed at its present slope. At the same time, the Cox could not have readily captured Solitary Creek, as it had not then its present advantage of grade. But to suppose that Solitary Creek at that time flowed as it does now, leaves unexplained the great Wallerawang- Rydal Valley, which is quite dissimilar to other valleys of tributary streams just to the west, and has been carved in hard conglomerate and quartzite by stream action. Also, the anomalies of the present Main Divide—here partly valley, partly slope divide—are not explained. On account of the permanence of the Cox, one is forced to the conclusion that a stream once occupied Wallerawang-Rydal Valley, and flowed from Rydal to the Cox. This would place the Main Divide near Tarana, and might include Antonio’s Creek, which runs northward into Solitary Creek and parallel to the Main Divide, in the Cox system. This old Divide would have passed in a normal 248 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, manner over Mt. Lambie, and would have consisted of very soft, decomposed granite, similar to that at Sodwalls. After the inception of the present topography, but before the sagging around Wallerawang, the Fish River and its tributaries, tearing back through the soft granite, captured Solitary Creek near Tarana. Then the Cox, being rejuvenated in this part, cut back past Mt. Walker, and the slight sagging around Wallerawang gave the small tributaries of Piper’s Flat Creek a higher grade than previously, so that now Solitary Creek, entrenching slowly, is threatened with recapture by the Cox. The thalweg of Solitary Creek below Rydal supports this theory. The head of entrenchment is at Rydal. The grade from here to Tarana (12 miles) is 50 feet per mile, whilst from Tarana to Bathurst, Fish River has only a grade of 11 feet per mile. The steepest portion, between Rydal and Sodwalls, just above Antonio’s Creek, has a grade of 70 feet Q00. OMY YY MISEL Uy! TS \Z, 2000 eee acgatl 4 ANic \ NW Wp \VE SE; Ma wt Y) Ay we yavaes sa0riyi\t ' Text-fig. 17.—The Breached Divide at Bindook Swamp. Lannigan’s Creek is on the point of capturing the high-level swamps. Note the erratic course of Bindook Creek, and the sandstone residuals in a late mature valley. per mile. Considering these figures, and the softness of the decomposed granite, one concludes that the tributary of Fish River, flowing at a low level, was quite competent to capture Solitary Creek from the Cox when the latter was at a standstill. Rejuvenation has since moved upstream from the supposed ancient divide. Thus Cox River is now about to recapture Solitary Creek. Bindook Swamp.—Bindook Swamp lies on the Kowmung-Wollondilly divide four miles south-west of Mt. Colong. The swamp lies in a great level valley, 2,800 feet above the sea, to the east and west of which the plateau rises to an elevation of 3,200 feet, and is cut in sandstone (horizontal) and slate (Text-fig. 17). Two isolated sandstone hills are left in the valley, which is cut in very soft Silurian ‘ BY F. A. CRAFT. 249 strata. Bindook Creek flows north over a level valley to within a couple of hundred yards of the divide, which is only a few feet above the stream and is absolutely flat. It then turns south, and flows to the Wollondilly. This condition of affairs is obviously transient, as Lannigan’s Creek is on the point of capturing Bindook Creek. The gap in the divide is three-quarters of a mile wide, and the valley of which it is part is mature to late mature in type. It forms a link between the Kowmung Valley on the north and the Wollondilly Valley on the south. It represents at present an air gap in the divide formed by stream erosion. The relationship of this to the Kowmung and Wollondilly is discussed later. Cox River and its Tributaries. Relative Stream Ages—The general classification of streams into a newer and an older type has already been mentioned. This classification would, how- ever, fall to the ground if ancient streams following meandering courses were to assume meandering courses subsequent to uplift and rejuvenation. But such ancient streams will continue to enlarge their meanders after rejuvenation, as tangential horizontal forces still act at the bends, eroding on the convex stream bends and causing the channel to migrate. Fine examples of these meanders enlarged by a revived stream flowing down a warp are observed on the Cox near Jamieson’s Creek. The long straight courses of the Lower Wollondilly and the Warragamba especially, which are consequent streams, and the straight character of their gorges, with a slight overlapping of spurs, indicate that they are certainly newly-formed streams. Many similarly revived streams in this region—the Colo and Macdonald, for example—have preserved fine meanders, and it does not seem reasonable to suppose that such a straight stream as the Warragamba, flowing under exactly similar conditions to the Colo and Macdonald, could have divested itself of all traces of antiquity since uplift. It will be seen that these newer streams are confined to deep valleys and gorges on the eastern side of the Cox Basin. The great valleys of the Kowmung and Cox, from eight to fifteen miles wide, are occupied by ancient streams. The meanders and horseshoe bends of these streams are not local features, but are found in all varieties of rock types, including horizontal and tilted shale and sandstone, highly-inclined slate and quartzite, and porphyry and granite. The amplitude of the bends varies inversely as the hardness of the rocks in which they occur, but the actual type and character do not change. The actual form of the valleys of such streams as the Lower Wollondilly and Green Wattle Creek suggests that they are of recent formation. For mile after mile the sandstone cliffs flanking the eastern sides of parts of these valleys are absolutely straight, and are known as Burragorang and Green Wattle “Walls” respectively. They are hardly notched at the top and show no embayments. No tributary streams come over these cliffs to the main streams below. The cliffs of Jamieson’s and Grose Valleys are deeply embayed on all sides, and deeply notched at close intervals, even where mere wet-weather streams cross them. These walls are, generally, less than a mile from the river, as close as are the cliffs of the Grose to their river. This would seem to indicate that these walls and the valleys which they flank are of very recent development. For a few miles on the western side of the Wollondilly around Byrne’s Creek and Tonalli River much more erosion has been accomplished, but this may have been initiated by streams 250 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, flowing westward through the present air gaps near Yerranderie to the Kowmung. The levels of the passes seem to indicate this. In the case of the Lower Cox Valley, the river above King’s Tableland shows characteristic meanders, but downstream these do not appear. Just where the river crosses the King’s Tableland-Tonalli scarp a great double “S” bend has been developed on a small unwarped plain just above the scarp. This feature is of recent origin, and is quite different from other Cox meanders, not being fully developed. The Kowmung-Jamieson’s Valley stretches from Wentworth Falls to Bindook, and from King’s Tableland to Gangerang Range, having a north-south length of 30 miles and an east-west width of eight miles. The eastern outlet is a gap in the rocky walls less than a mile and a half wide. As the Kowmung Valley has been cut in a series of rocks similar to, although somewhat harder than, those of the Lower Cox Valley, an explanation by differential erosion, particularly in the light of the warping indicated, is out of the question. Also the Cox Valley below this point is quite juvenile. Even the overlapping spurs are preserved. The Lower Wollondilly has every appearance of having developed along a fracture or fault of a linear character. This is not the case with the Nattai, which has a rather tremulous appearance, and is probably an old stream preserving part of its original course, although part has been wiped out by newer streams. Werriberri (Monkey) Creek, which is not much entrenched on the average, and has remarkably few tributaries, also appears to be a relic of an old meridional stream which has been deprived of most of its water by newly-formed streams. Thus the Upper Wollondilly-Kowmung-Upper Cox form an old stream line, whilst the Lower Cox-Wollondilly is of much more recent formation. Anomalies of Direction——A survey of the Cox basin shows many anomalies in the direction of stream flow. The normally-branching type of stream is almost absent, and the whole pattern is curiously twisted. Many of the streams are subsequent, being largely determined by rock strike. Hollander’s and parts of the Tuglow Rivers, Mumbedah Creek, Breakfast Creek, Marangaroo Creek and many smaller streams come under this heading. The Kowmung runs partly along the strike of the Devonian beds, and also probably follows an ancient fault. A number of the tributary streams join the Cox in an upstream direction. Lowther, Farmer’s, Lett, Mumbedah, Kanangra Creeks, the Kowmung and Little Rivers are good examples. These, especially the first-named, which flows in granite, may be due to a former westward drainage. The great arc of the Hollander-Tuglow is parallel to lines of basalt residuals strung along the Kowmung- Wollondilly and Main Divides between Shooter’s Hill, Oberon and Yerranderie. Residual streams flowing just along these divides are also parallel to the main are. The basalt flows, now almost obliterated, appear to have influenced these streams, which are also parallel to the general rock strike. The Kowmung Basin in particular is asymmetric. It receives no tributaries of note from the east, owing to the proximity of the Black Hollow Creek divide in the main upper valley. Air gaps in the Tonalli Range to the east, however, may indicate the former flow of westward streams into the Kowmung, which might also have received streams from the present area occupied by Black Hollow Creek before the last phases of uplift caused a longitudinal channel to form along the warp in the eastern part of the valley. Mature relics of valleys on the Kowmung-Black Hollow divide indicate such a possibility. The Warragamba is BY F. A. CRAFT. 251 also asymmetric, as its northern divide is less than four miles from the river. Parts of the Lower Wollondilly are also similar in this respect. As the streams flow at present, boathook bends, especially that of the Tuglow- Kowmung line, are not at all rare. It is quite impossible to suggest a scheme of stream flow in the past, and post-basaltic, which would be theoretically normal and fit in with observed physiographic facts. It is considered, therefore, that this stream system has been abnormal over a considerable period of time, and its evolution has been determined by very many factors—normal erosion, Bec erica structure, vuleanism and tectonics all having been prominent. Relationship between the Kowmung and Wollondilly.—The remarkable breach in the divide between these two streams at Bindook Swamp has already been discussed. The asymmetry of the divide is notable, as it is nine miles from the Wollondilly and three miles only from the Kowmung. A large area of the Bindook Swamps and level valleys of the former system, extending three miles south of the divide, is in danger of imminent capture by the Kowmung. This is the only notable gap in the divide between Mts. Colong and Werong, although numerous narrow gaps occur in the soft Silurian rocks along the divide. The gap becomes even more significant when the course of the Wollondilly is studied. At the junction of Murruin Creek—into which Bindook Creek empties itself—with the Wollondilly, the river turns through 120 degrees, forming the “Murruin Elbow,” flowing eight miles in an easterly direction before resuming a northward course. The character of the river also changes at this bend. Above here it swings backwards and forwards in great meanders, which are cut in a canyon 2,000 feet deep. Below the elbow the river has few bends, these few certainly not being meanders. As in the case of the Cox, this indicates different ages for two sections of the stream. The case of the Wollondilly is the more impressive, however, because the character of the gorge does not change here, the deep, broad canyon persisting far upstream. To the north of the divide at Bindook the ancient Kowmung flows, ANG Sweeping past this point in a great turn. Unlike the Wollondilly it shows meanders both above and below the bend. The conclusion is, that before the uplift of the Blue Mt. Anticline (here 400 to 600 feet), the Upper Wollondilly and the Kowmung formed a continuous stream, which was broken up by capture, giving the present arrangement. This stream line is post-basaltic in age, as it cuts across the line of old basalt residuals. Apparently at one time the basalt extended continuously along this divide. If that is so, the Upper Wollondilly, Kowmung and Cox originated in Late Tertiary times, and developed their meandering structure after the basalt flows, and before the first uplift of the old anticline. History of the Stream System.—The conclusion has already been reached that the Kowmung, Jamieson’s, Kanimbla and Wallerawang Valleys were once coextensive near base level. The conclusion that the original uplift was here of anticlinal form with the crest near the King’s Tableland-Lower Wollondilly line leads one to the corollary that this great valley was cut in the western flank of the fold. The depth varies from 400 feet at Bindook Swamp to 1,500 feet near King’s Tableland, gradually shallowing to 1,200 feet in Kanimbla and 500 feet near Wallerawang. The continuous valley opening out from Piper’s Flat into the Turon Basin could not have been entirely eroded by the streams now occupying it (cf. Cox’s Creek Valley). The line of gravels also points to the presence of a large stream, which once flowed over the present Main Divide. The evidence of 252 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN, relative age of the various streams proves that the stream system had no outlet to the east. In view of all these facts, then, it appears that the Upper Wollondilly- Kowmung-Cox flowed to the north-west into the Turon before the initiation of the posi-basaltic uplifts. After the uplift of the anticline numerous consequent streanis, such as Erskine Creek, Grose River and the Warragamba, were formed on its steep eastern face. These obliterated the old (feeble) drainage, leaving only a few relic streams, such as Werriberri (Monkey) Creek and the Nattai. Pushing back along joint planes, and possibly along fracture lines, these streams cut through the hard plateau sandstones and found the soft Coal Measure shales beneath, rapidly enlarging their valleys. In this way the valleys of the Lower Cox and Wollondilly, Lacy’s and Green Wattle Creeks and the Nattai were formed. The valleys of the smaller streams are surprisingly large and well graded, and do not compare unfavourably as regards size with the Wollondilly Valley (Burragorang) itself. This is further evidence that the latter was not always occupied by a large stream. Thus before the initiation of the main Kowmung Warp these streams were attacking the divides of the old Kowmung line to the west. When the Kowmung Warp commenced, the flow of the Cox was considerably retarded, as the river was pushing against the uplift. The Kowmung and Upper Wollondilly were thrust up, but were not able to cut down very much, on account of the hanging up of the Cox. Thus the low-lying Lower Wollondilly, cutting along lines of weakness, was enabled to capture the high-level, sluggish Upper Wollen- dilly, and to push back the new divide at the expense of the Kowmung. The Lower Cox River, which had previously almost obliterated the divide between it and Jamieson’s Valley, continued this erosive work, and the middle Cox and Kowmung being quite unable to hold to a northward flow against the rapidly rising warp, were, in course of time, captured and reversed. That the Kowmung was able to keep to its original course is shown by its antecedent nature before its junction with the Cox. During this time the flexure at Hartley had been developing, cutting the Upper Cox off from the Kanimbla streams. The Upper Cox, flowing over Piper’s Flat, “deposited the older gravels. Using Kanimbla Valley as a base-level of erosion, the Cox above Hartley began to trench its upper course and gradually the whole of the river was reversed. Before this took place, Upper Solitary Creek had been captured and reversed by a tributary of Fish River. The stream flowing along Piper’s Flat being reversed, it began to cut into the older valley a little, forming the modern “Piper’s Flat’, extending from Wallerawang to the present Main Divide. A slight sagging of the crust around Wallerawang, together with some tilting towards Mt. Lambie, caused this flat to dip east, and revived the streams flowing along it, causing erosion of the flat, which is now proceeding, and allowing small tributaries to attack the valley divide of Solitary Creek. At the head of Cox’s Creek, Wolgan River, which had been considerably affected by the old anticline, had cut through the Hawkesbury Sandstone—here fairly thin—and had cut a great gorge in soft underlying Coal Measure strata. At the present time Cox’s Creek is being gradually captured. Since these various stream changes have taken place, the Upper Wollondilly has been able to cut back, and is now entrenched as far upstream as Paddy’s River. Kowmung River has cut a profound canyon up to 2,000 feet deep almost to its head, and small tributaries are capturing Bindook Creek, tending to make the BY F. A. CRAFT. 253 divide here more symmetrical. Marked asymmetry of this divide was caused, in the first place, by the captured Upper Wollondilly being able to cut back in the old high-level valley before the Kowmung was rejuvenated to the great bend. Cox River has cut two series of great canyons, between Wallerawang and Hartley, and between Megalong and Jamieson’s Creek. At the present time the stream system is in a state of neutral equilibrium, and only comparatively small captures are pending. These conclusions have been previously arrived at, in part, by Taylor, who postulated a westward flow for the Cox-Wollondilly. This paper varies his conclusion by suggesting the Upper Wollondilly-Kowmung-Cox as the old stream line. With regard to the streams of the Nepean system, there is no evidence that they have drained into the western rivers since the commencement of the folding which caused the Blue Mountain anticline. Such a direction of flow, as Taylor has suggested in his papers, was possible before the commencement of this series of uplifts, although I rather incline to the opinion that the Nepean, Cordeaux, Cataract and Avon are comparatively recently-formed streams of consequent type. Taylor’s theory of the formation of Kanimbla Valley in the western side of the first fold is definitely established. Past History of the Area. a. Earth Movements. Silurian.—Subsidence. Deposition of sedimentary rocks, since metamorphosed. Now found in western part of area as slates, claystones, limestones, etc. Unconformity. Devonian (Lower?).—Further subsidence. Deposition of shales, sandstones, con- glomerates, etc., since largely metamorphosed to quartzites, slates, ete. Devonian? or Carboniferous.—“‘Kanimbla Epoch’. Great folding and mountain building movements. Intrusion of batholith of granite, with sills and dykes of quartz-porphyry. Regional metamorphism. Erosion. Carboniferous.—Great cycle of erosion. Granite exposed and a peneplain formed. . Great Unconformity. Permian.—Subsidence and deposition of Upper Marine Series. Present Jenolan Plateau just below sea. Formation of Coal Measure swamps. Deposition of Upper Coal Measures. Continued subsidence. Triassic.—Deposition of Narrabeen and Hawkesbury beds conformable with Permian. Deposition of Wianamatta Shale to east. Since the close of Triassic, dominant movement here is of uplift. Cretaceous.—* Uplift and Peneplanation (?). (Sussmilch). Tertiary (Lower and Middle).—Formation of peneplain. Old rivers, since obliterated by basalts, formed. *Slight subsidence and deposition of river leads. Slight uplift and basalt flows ‘(Older Basalt). Tertiary (Upper) (Physiographic Record).—Hrosion. Outpouring of the Newer Basalts (e.g. Robertson). Formation of great peneplain. Present plateau surface. Cox-Wollondilly systems take form. Slight uplift. Valleys of Wentworth Falls type. * Signifies no reliable evidence in this area. 254 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE COX RIVER BASIN. Post-Tertiary ?—Uplift to the north. Formation of old Blue Mountain Anticline. Post-Tertiary.—General uplift to south and west. Kowmung Warp and Jenolan Dome. Hartley fault and Mulgoa-Kurrajong ‘‘Step”’. Recent.—Canyon Cycle. Erosion of great canyons still proceeding. b. Stream History. Upper Tertiary.—Upper Wollondilly-Kowmung-Cox formed. Late mature valleys gave meandering courses. Hastern streams (Nattai, ete.) flow northwards. Blue Mt. Anticline—Kowmung-Kanimbla-Wallerawang Valley cut in fold. Formation of consequent streams—Lower Cox-Wollondilly, Warragamba and Grose. These eroded deep gorges. Older gravels, Piper’s Flat (?). Kowmung Warp.—Capture of Upper Wollondilly by present Lower Wollondilly. Capture of Middle Cox and Kowmung by present Lower Cox. Reversal of Cox in Kanimbla Valley. Capture of Upper Solitary Creek by Fish River. Hartley Fault.—Cox forms canyons above Hartley. Modern Piper’s Flat formed. Slight depression near Wallerawang. Upward movement towards Mt. Lambie. Solitary Creek threatened with capture. References. ANDREWS, E. C., 1903.—Geography of the Blue Mts. and Sydney District. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxxvii, 986. ——————.,, 1910.—- Geographical Unity of Eastern Australia. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xliv, 420. Davip, T. W. E., 1896.—Anniversary Address. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., Xxx, 33. ,1902.—An Important Geological Fault at Kurrajong Heights. Proc. Roy. Soe. N.S.W., xxxvi, 359. Davis, W. M., 1898.—Physical Geography, p. 282 (Ginn & Co.). , 1909.—Geographical Essays. pp. 413-484, Rivers and Valleys of Pennsylvania (Ginn & Co.). FENNER, C., 1918.—Physiography of the Werribee River Area. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., Seog CNS, eer HEDLEY, C., 1911.—A Study of Marginal Drainage. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xlvi._ Taytor, G., 1911.—Physiography of Eastern Australia. Bulletin 8, Commonwealth Meteorological Bureau. , 1918.—The Australian Environment. Memoir 1, Advisory Council of Science and Industry. , 1923.—The Warped Littoral Around Sydney. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., lvii, 58. ,1923a.—Guide Book to Excursions to Blue Mts., ete. Pan-Pacific Science Congress, Sydney, 1923. EXPLANATION OF PLATES XIX-XX. Plate xix. 1. Piper’s Flat. View from the Main Divide showing the asymmetric valley; the modern silt flats; and the site of older gravels in middle distance. 2. Silt Flats, Blackheath Glen, Megalong Valley. Note the sharp rise of the talus slopes from the level plain. Plate xx. 1. Walls of Green Wattle Creek. The flat in the foreground at 400 feet contains rounded pebbles. The straight walls are unbroken for some miles. View up Burragorang Valley. Wollondilly on right and Nattai on left. The valley is approaching maturity. Note the peak residuals on the edge of the cliffs. These are arranged along north-south lines. bo FOSSIL PLANTS FROM THE UPPER PALAEHOZOIC ROCKS OF NEW SOUTH WALES. By A. B. Watkom, D.Sc. (Plates xxi-xxili; one Text-figure.) [Read 27th June, 1928.] This paper contains descriptions of a number of fossils which had been submitted to Professor A. C. Seward at Cambridge by Professor Sir T. W. Edgeworth David. During 1927, while holding an International Education Board Fellowship in Science I spent about nine months working at Cambridge under Professor Seward, and he suggested the examination and description of these specimens as-part of my work. During the progress of the work he maintained a close interest in it and helped very materially by suggestions and notes on many points that arose. I desire to acknowledge freely my indebtedness to Professor Seward, not only for his assistance in this particular piece of work, but also for his kindly interest in all that I was able to do whilst working with him and for the inspiration afforded by the privilege of close association with him and his work. To the International Education Board of New York and the Council of the Linnean Society of New South Wales I am deeply indebted for the opportunity to work at Cambridge and other places abroad. The species described are Lepidodendron Osbornei, n. sp., Ulodendron minus L. and H., and Pitys (?) Sussmilchi, n. sp., from the Volcanic Stage of the Kuttung Series; Stigmaria ficoides Brongn., from both Volcanic and Basal Stages of the Kuttung Series; Dadoxylon farleyense, n. sp., from the Ravensfield Sandstone at the base of the Farley Stage of the Lower Marine Series; and Dadoxylon Arberi Seward from the Newcastle Coal Measures at Lake Macquarie. The relative positions of the horizons from which the fossils were obtained are shown on the following vertical sections of the Carboniferous and Permo- Carboniferous succession in New South Wales, compiled from information kindly supplied by Professor Sir Edgeworth David, and Mr. G. D. Osborne, B.Sc., of the Geology Department of the University of Sydney, who has done much detailed field work on the Carboniferous rocks of the district. Feet. ; Wipper Seager (awe Recved ostn, casa vekay tee 600 Mo wedettc. Series ee STATE CMY EA un he Manes bu- ylang 80 Olen TeO00 MOTTA OMS CITES hss ieetagiey au lemma ce a UNTO MEM aaae oath i Sie! le a aa 500 - 1,800 (Chaenomya LENO oem MBL oHT ears oT rita Te 100 - 150 Moneriarine Series’ KCrinoidalin Shales we wee veuecieneenan nel 0 Ou s000 Muree Beds SOT ur oey ated fate eat ae NS DES 400 Branxton Beds eo ceo oe tudes PAOD) core XN) Greta Series MARRS aig | Gora) Sumi) area Oi) ty ERRCmRee RCI ene T ane aes: mien? 300 MARL ey MOtaese wash anell k HERE eee hers 1,000 Lower Marine Series .. { Buthertor SIMA Sign Ae. sopeagee tial c 1,070 Mochinvyarw Stacem nace ee eee 2,635 EH 256 FOSSIL PLANTS FROM UPPER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS OF N.S.W., Feet. Glaciale Stazeneee ae ee eee 4,200 Kuttung Series {Yoteani Stage Pea Tan erten nN s:8 “ars 3,000 Basal “StaZe: vitesse ee a eee ene 2,300 Burindi Series. The above section shows the complete succession from the base of the Carboniferous to the top of the Permian. Where to place the junction between the two systems is a much-debated question amongst Australian geologists. Formerly the dividing line was placed between the Kuttung Series and the Lower Marine Series, but in view of the fact that the flora of the Kuttung Series is typically Lower Carboniferous, as judged by the standard of European fossil floras, it is possible that the Lower Marine Series represents the Upper Carboniferous in Australia. Further detail of the succession in the Kuttung Series (kindly supplied by Mr. Osborne) is as follows: Upper part: main glacial beds, 1,900 feet. Glacial Stage, 4,200 feet .. {Patenon toscanite, 300 feet. Lower part: sandstone, tuffs, etc., about 2,000 feet. : if Chiefly lavas, tuffs and conglomerates. Moleanie Stage, COC ECote: | hiemiate Creek hornblende-andesite at base. Basal Stage, 2,300 feet Upper part: tuffs and sandstones. ‘ones part: essentially conglomerates. The horizons in the Kuttung Series from which fossil plants have been obtained are: (1) About 50 feet below the top of the Basal Stage, where Lepidodendron and Stigmaria occur. (2) At the top of the Basal Stage, just underlying the Martin’s Creek andesite, where silicified specimens, probably of (7?) Pitys, have been obtained. (3) In the Volcanic Stage about 800 feet above the Martin’s Creek andesite is the Welshman’s Creek Horizon from which abundant plant fossils have been obtained. (4) Rhacopteris occurs on a horizon about 100 feet above the Welshman’s Creek horizon. (5) In the Glacial Stage, about 1,700 feet above the Volcanic Stage, Lepido- dendron and Rhacopteris have both been recorded. The Ravensfield Sandstone is a band some 20 to 30 feet thick forming the base of the Farley Stage; the beds at Lake Macquarie from which the specimen of Dadoxylon Arberi was obtained are about 140 feet below the top of the Upper Stage of the Newcastle Coal Measures. Although the number of species described from the Welshman’s Creek horizon is small, they indicate without doubt that the age of the beds is Lower Carboni- ferous. The species from the Ravensfield Sandstone shows close resemblance to species from rocks of ‘‘Permo-Carboniferous” age in other parts of the world. (a) Plants from the Kuttung Series. LEPIDODENDRON OSBORNEI, n. sp. Plate xxi, figs. 1, 2. A specimen from the Volcanic Stage of the Kuttung Series at Welshman’s Creek has on one side an example of Ulodendron (described below) and on the BY A. B. WALKOM. 257 other a flat impression, about 15 cm. x 3-5 cm., of a Lepidodendroid stem. The general surface of this Lepidodendroid impression is marked by numerous more or less parallel vertical wrinklings, and the most striking feature is the presence of very elongated spirally-disposed, kite-shaped leaf cushions (PI. xxi, fig. 2). Both above and below, the elongate leaf cushions are continued in the form of a narrow groove; they are 3:5-4 cm. long, and only 4 mm. wide at the widest part, which is somewhat above the middle, 1-2-1-5 cm: from the apex. Situated just above the widest part is a rather small, rounded leaf scar which does Mot occupy the whole width of the cushion; the leaf scar is about 2 mm. in diameter and in some cases there is a suggestion of a small central scar, and also perhaps of a ligular scar just above the leaf scar. ; The leaf cushions are well separated from one another and the general appearance of the impression is very characteristic. It is quite unlike any species previously recorded from Australia, but bears a more or less striking resemblance to species which have been figured from Carboniferous rocks in the Northern Hemisphere. The resemblance is very close indeed to Lepidodendron spetsbergense Nathorst from the Lower Carboniferous rocks of Spitzbergen (Nathorst, 1894, p. 37, Pl. 7; 1914, p. 37, Pl. 2, 3, 4, 18, 14). L. spetsbergense has similar elongated, kite-shaped leaf cushions which, however, are wider in comparison with their length than in L. Osbornei; the leaf scar of L. spetsbergense, as in L. Osbornei, does not occupy the whole width of the cushion, but in the latter it appears to be situated higher up than in the former. Other species showing considerable degree of resemblance are L. rimosum and L. Glincanum. The decorticated ‘yer of L. rimosum Sternberg, figured by Zeiller (1886, Pl. Ixvii, fig. 4) from the coal basin of Valenciennes, has elongate cushions which resemble those of L. Osbornei, but are wider in comparison with their length, and are also much closer together. Zeiller’s fig. 5, however, which he also calls L. rimosum, shows little resemblance to our specimen and indeed does not appear to be referable to the same species as his fig. 4. White (1899, p. 196) described specimens as L. rimosum var. reticostatum, one of which (PI. liv, fig. 3) he described as representing “the impression of the cortex of a stem that seems to be in a Ulodendroid condition’. I can see no evidence of this in his figure. The cushions in White’s figures 3 and 4 are similar to those of my specimen, and in fig. 4 the vertical wrinkling of the surface between the cushions heightens the resemblance. The leaf scar as seen in the figures of var. reticostatum varies in position in that variety, being sometimes at the point where the cushion is widest and sometimes well above this; it does not occupy the whole width of the cushion, a feature in which it also agrees with my specimen. ‘The specimens described by White were obtained from the Lower Coal Measures of Missouri. Zalessky (1904, p. 88, Pl. 2 and 3) figures several specimens of L. rimosum from the Carboniferous basin of Donetz which are undoubtedly of the same general type as L. Osbornei. He discusses the differences in the diagnosis of the species by different authors and figures the species under four varietal names; of his examples, those figured as var. a and var. alternans (PI. 2, figs. 7 and 8) are similar to L. Osbornei, except that, as in other examples of L. rimosum, the cushions are comparatively broader and are closer together. The examples of L. rimosum figured by Rydzewski from the Polish coal basin are similar to those figured by Zalessky from Donetz, and Rydzewski considers the varieties as repre- senting different states of preservation. In general, his figures do not show 258 FOSSIL PLANTS FROM UPPER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS OF N.S.W., cushions so elongated in their lower half as those of ZL. Osbornei; the scar in the Polish examples is above the widest part of the cushion as in our specimen, Of the variety of specimens figured by Kidston (1903, Pl. 2-5) from Canonbie as L. Glincanum only one (PI. 5, fig. 41) resembles L. Osbornei in the leaf cushions, which are fusiform with long slightly bent extremities and separated by irregularly longitudinally striated cortex. Another species from the Kulm flora of Spitzbergen described by Nathorst as L. Kidstonii (1920, Pl. 3, figs. 1-7) shows a close resemblance to our specimen in the narrow fusiform leaf cushions with the scar above the widest part. It is clear that this specimen from New South Wales is very closely allied to species widely distributed in the Northern Hemisphere in rocks of Carboniferous age, e.g., L. spetsbergense, which occurs in Lower Carboniferous rocks in Spitz- bergen, L. rimosum from Carboniferous rocks in Poland, the Donetz basin, Valenciennes and in the Missouri Coal Measures, and L. Glincanum from the Lower Coal Measures of Canonbie. Of these species the resemblance is closest to L. spetsbergense—a Lower Carboniferous species. ULODENDRON MINUS Lindley and Hutton. Plate xxi, fig. 3. On one surface of an irregularly. oblong specimen, about 22 cm. x 7 cm. x 4 cm. thick, there are two circular areas about 4 cm. in diameter and separated from one another by 2-3 mm. The circular areas have a narrow, flat or slightly concave border, about 4 mm. wide, and in the centre an approximately circular depression about 1 cm. in diameter. Between this central depression and the narrow border the surface is slightly convex, and is smooth in the upper«half and covered with rows of small projecting knobs in the lower half. The specimen is very similar to that of a Ulodendroid scar of Lepidodendron Veltheimianum figured by Kidston (1885, Pl. 3), though not so large. In Kidston’s figure the scar is more elongate (44 inches by 24 inches), while in our specimen it is circular (4 cm. diam.), but the two agree in having the smooth narrow border, a central depression, and the intermediate area smooth in one half and tuberculate in the other half. The specimen figured by Kidston came from the Carboniferous Limestone Series of Midlothian. It is also very similar to the specimen figured by Zeiller (1886, Pl. lxxiii, fig. 2) as Ulodendron minus from the Eschweiler Mines, in its general appearance as well as in the size and the close proximity of the two scars to one another. Zeiller’s figure shows again the smooth narrow border, central depression, and intermediate raised area, tuber- culate in one half and-smooth in the other. Similar Ulodendron stems are figured from the Culm supérieur of France by EH. Bureau (1913) as U. majus (Plates xlvi-xivii) and U. minus (Pl. xlviii). ; Another somewhat similar example, to which our specimen does not show so close a resemblance, is that figured by Nathorst from the Culm flora of Spitz- bergen (1920, Pl. 4, figs. 1, 2) as Lepidodendron mirabile. In this the scars are more elongate, about 3:5 by 2:5 cm.; the nature of the markings on the surface is not quite clear, but appears to be similar to that in our specimen. The specimen so resembles described examples of Ulodendron minus from other parts of the World that it seems justifiable to refer it to that species. In comparing impressions such as these it must be remembered that the characters available are perhaps insufficient for accurate specific determination. The specimen was obtained from the Volcanic Stage of the Kuttung Series at Welshman’s Creek. BY A. B. WALKOM. 259 STIGMARIA FICOIDES Brongniart. Plate xxi, fig. 4; xxiii, fig. 4. The specimens from three localities in New South Wales may be referred to this “species” which represents in general the underground rhizome of such plants as Lepidodendron and Sigillaria. At all three localities the rocks are part of the Carboniferous system of New South Wales, and from two (? three), remains of Lepidodendron have been recorded. (a) Stigmaria from the Basal Stage of the Kuttung Series at Clarencetown, N.S.W. (PI. xxi, fig. 4). A large specimen, one surface of which is an almost flat impression of the surface of a Stigmarian axis preserved in a rather coarse sandstone. The impres- sion is about 22-5 cm. long and has a maximum width of about 8 cm., but is bounded on all sides by broken or incomplete margins. ‘The surface is marked by numerous regularly arranged circular scars in some of which there is a small central umbilicus; the scars are arranged in regular spirals and are as much as 9 mm. in diameter. Parallel to the length of the impression and a little to one side of the middle there is a shallow groove about 6 mm. wide which extends the whole length of the specimen. This groove is superimposed on the impression of the surface of the rhizome and does not interrupt the regularity of the circular scars, some of which it covers but does not hide from view. It represents the remains of the pith and is marked by a number of parallel, longitudinal, discontinuous wrinkles which may be compared with those shown in a specimen figured by Williamson (1887, Pl. xiv, fig. 68, a). On one side of the specimen, on a surface perpendicular to the impression just described, there are numerous long narrow flattened impressions of rootlets, in some cases obviously connected to the circular scars on the surface of the rhizome. They are at least 8 cm. long; the flattened impression is as much as 1 cm. wide close to the stem, and tapers gradually, being only 4 or 5 mm. wide at the limit of the specimen, some 8 cm. from the scar. The form of this specimen closely resembles some previously figured examples of Stigmaria with rootlets, among which may be mentioned those figured as Stigmaria ficoides by Williamson (1887, Pl. xii, figs. 40, 74), Zeiller (1886, Pl. xci) and Seward (1910, fig. 205). Our specimen is the first example with rootlets attached to be described from Australia. Stigmaria does not appear to have been noted in descriptions of the Australian Carboniferous flora, but it is possible that some, at least, of the specimens which have been recorded as Cyclostigma may be more correctly referred to Stigmaria. (0) Stigmaria ficoides from the Volcanic Stage of the Kuttung Series at Welshman’s Creek, Wallarobba. A large specimen consisting of portion of a thick, gradually tapering axis. The specimen is somewhat flattened, being elliptical in cross section; it is 21 cm. long, the maximum and minimum dimensions at one end being 16 cm. and 9 cm., and at the other end the corresponding measurements are 13 cm. and 6 cm. The surface is marked by numerous, spirally-arranged circular scars, each with a raised central portion at the apex of which there is a small central depression. The surface is irregularly wrinkled parallel to its length and in addition to the wrinkles there are a number of narrow elongate ribbon-like depressions on the surface; these represent the impressions of rootlets which have not been detached but which have been pressed flat against the surface of the rhizome. 260 FOSSIL PLANTS FROM UPPER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS OF N.S.W., Embedded in the matrix filling the rhizome there is, at the broader end of the specimen, part of the cast of the medullary cavity, with spirally-arranged elongated superficial ridges which, as figured by Williamson (1887, Pl. xiii, fig. 64) represent “prolongations of the medulla into the inner extremities of the primary medullary rays” of the vascular cylinder. Judging from the size and curvature of the portion of this medulla cast preserved, the pith was nearly 1 cm. in diameter, thus corresponding closely in size with that of the specimen described above from Welshman’s Creek. (c) Stigmarta ficoides from Rouchel (Plate xxiii, fig. 4; Specimen F1403, Geological Survey of N.S.W.). : Two specimens from this locality are casts of portion of the external surface of Stigmarian axes. They show the spirally-arranged circular scars, each about 7 mm. in diameter, with a raised central ring, the centre of which is occupied by a small depression. The surface between the scars is finely wrinkled and the specimens are indistinguishable from those figured by Williamson (1887, Plate xiv, fig. 75) who also explains their structure by his diagram (PI. xii, fig. 76). A similar specimen is also figured by Nathorst (1914, Pl. 7, fig. 5) from the Culm flora of the sandstones of the Pyramidenberg and other places in Spitzbergen. Examples of Stigmaria ficoides similar to all three types above described are figured by H. Bureau (1913) from the Upper Culm of the basin of the Loire in France. Pitys (?) SuUSSMILCHI, n. sp. Plate xxii, figs. 1-3. A petrified specimen from Welshman’s Creek, Wallarobba, N.S.W., on a horizon near the base of the Kuttung Series, has only portion of the secondary wood preserved, without any of the pith or primary wood, or of the cortex. Transverse section (Pl. xxii, fig. 1) shows the secondary xylem to be made up of regular radial series of four or five sided tracheids, of rather uniform size. The cells are small, the sides being approximately equal and about 0-05 mm. long. The primordial wall is quite distinct and thin; it has been considerably thickened. The pitting of the radial walls rarely shows in transverse section. The medullary rays are numerous, 1- to 4-seriate. In radial section (fig. 2) the walls of the tracheids are frequently completely occupied by bordered pits; these pits are usually in three vertical rows, alternate, closely crowded and hexagonal in outline, and have an elongate-oval pore. Some- times there are less than three vertical rows of pits, and when there is a single row the pits are often in contact and slightly flattened above and below; the single row of pits does not cover the whole wall of the tracheid. The medullary rays consist of radially elongated parenchymatous cells whose radial walls are pitted, the number of pits in the field varying from a single large THT SUE L oval pit to 6 or 7 small circular bordered pits. The most characteristic appearance of the wood is that in tangential section (fig. 3), where the medullary rays are very characteristic. They are from one to four cells wide and from one to twenty-four cells high and are very abundant. Occasionally the tangential walls of the tracheids are pitted in the same manner as the radial. walls. The characters of the secondary wood of our specimen allow a reference with little hesitation to the Pityeae and probably to the genus Pitys. Of the species already included in Pitys three, P. Withami (L. & H.), P. antiqua Witham and P. primaeva Witham (see Scott, 1902) are characterized BY A. B. WALKOM. 261 e by having primary xylem strands confined to the peripheral region of the pith; a fourth species, P. Dayi Gordon, of which an abbreviated account only has been published (in Scott, 1923, 256-260), is distinct from the three above-mentioned species in having primary xylem strands scattered through the whole of the pith region; in this character it shows close relation to the genus Archaeopitys, described from the Waverley shale (Lower Carboniferous) of Kentucky by Scott and Jeffrey (1914, 345), which may ultimately have to be included in Pitys. The three species of Pitys, viz.: Withami, antiqua and primaeva may be distinguished from one another by the characters of their secondary wood, particularly by the medullary rays; our specimen shows closest resemblance to P. Withami L. & H. In the absence of any knowledge at all of the structure of the pith and primary wood in the New South Wales specimen it would be unsafe to refer it definitely to one of the species already described, more especially since the stratigraphical evidence available indicates that our specimen comes from a higher horizon than the three European species which all occur in the lower division of the Calciferous Sandstone (Lower Carboniferous). Attention may be called to the similarity to species of Pitys exhibited by the tangential section of Sigillaria (?) muralis from Brazil figured by David White (1908, Pl. xii, fig. 2). In this figure the medullary rays resemble those of Pitys very closely, but the South American species is apparently quite distinct from Pitys in the general character of the secondary wood, which is described as “soft and spongy” (White, 1908, 467). (b) A fossil wood from the Lower Marine Series. DADOXYLON FARLEYENSE, n. sp. Plate xxii, figs. 4-9; xxiii, 1-3. The specimen is part of a stem from the horizon of the Ravensfield Sandstone in the Lower Marine Series, near Farley, N.S.W. The Lower Marine Series is the lowest division of what is usually known as the Permo-Carboniferous System in Australia. In New South Wales the Glossopteris flora makes its first appear- ance with the occurrence of Gangamopteris in association with a marine fauna on a horizon about 2,000 feet above the base of the Lower Marine Series. The Ravensfield Sandstone is a belt of solid sandstone containing abundant marine fossils, and occasional pieces of fossil wood; it is at the base of the Farley Stage, and about 3,800 feet above the base of the Lower Marine Series. The specimen described below is well preserved and shows pith, primary xylem and an incom- plete portion of the secondary xylem. In section it is roughly oval, about 9 x 7 cm.; it is not, however, preserved symmetrically about the pith which is not in the centre of the specimen, the longest radius of secondary xylem from the pith being nearly 4 cm. The pith is comparatively small, about 7-5 x 4-5 mm. Annual rings are present, but the greater part of the secondary xylem has been fractured; the structure of the wood itself has not been greatly disturbed by this fracturing, which appears to have been due to a crushing force possibly after petrifaction had been completed or nearly so. The pith.—The pith is small and broadly oval in transverse section, the longest and shortest diameters being 7:5 and 4-5 mm. respectively; the margin of the pith is a series of almost straight lines giving it the outline of an elongated octagon, from some, at least, of the angles of which, leaf-traces appear to depart. The central portion of the pith is not preserved, a piece about 2 mm. diameter being missing, but the outer part is mostly well preserved (Pl. xxii, figs. 4-6). There is a certain amount of differentiation in the cells of the pith. In the 262 FOSSIL PLANTS FROM UPPER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS OF N.S.W., central part the cells are regularly rounded or hexagonal, with rather thick walls, and fairly uniform in size, about 1004 in diameter. Outside this there is a zone, irregular in width, in which the cells are thin-walled and exhibit great variation in size, from 35 u to 140 u in diameter. At the margin of the pith there is perhaps a narrow region, not more than a few cells wide, where the cells are small (30 1-35) and not always easy to distinguish from the primary xylem. This region, however, does not form a distinct medullary sheath like that described in such species as Dadoxylon indicum Holden (1917), and our specimen may rather be compared with D. Lafoniense Halle (1911). In longitudinal section (PI. xxii, fig. 4) the cells of the pith are short, rectangular, parenchymatous cells, arranged in fairly regular vertical series; the vertical dimension is on the average about the same as the horizontal, varying from about one-half to twice—70.4 to 1004 wide, 35 u to 200 u high. Occasionally the fusion of two or three cells in a vertical row produces an elongated cell as much as 280 u high. Seattered irregularly through the pith are nests of thick-walled cells, filled usually with dark brown contents. In transverse section (PI. xxii, fig. 4) the cells of these sclerotic nests do not differ in size or shape from the cells of the central zone of the pith, and in longitudinal section (fig. 5) they are observed to form part of the regular vertical series: of cells. Generally many of the cells in a single nest are shorter vertically than horizontally, and often the horizontal cell walls are oblique, giving the cells of the nest a pseudo-radial arrangement. Occasionally the vertical row of cells on one or both sides of a nest is made up of shallow cells, perhaps the result of horizontal divisions of pith cells. The walls do not appear to be pitted. These nests are roughly spherical in shape, some- times ellipsoidal with longest diameter either vertical or horizontal. The number of cells making up a single nest averages about 15 (varying from 6 to 23) as seen in transverse section; in longitudinal section the nests spread over a number of vertical rows of cells, ranging from 2 to 9, averaging about 6, while the average height of a nest is also about 6 cells. Sometimes adjacent nests are continuous, either vertically or horizontally, connection being made by a few thick-walled cells similar to those forming the nest. The number of such nests observed in the portion of the pith preserved in transverse section was about 20, and as about half of the actual pith is preserved the number in a complete transverse section would be about 40. Sclerenchymatous groups of cells, giving the pith a very characteristic appear- ance, have been described in a number of genera, including Calamopitys (Scott, 1902, 342), Mesopitys (see Scott, 1923, 283), Rhexroxylon (Walton, 1925, 11) and Lyginopteris (Williamson and Scott, 1895, 717; Seward, 1917, 41), and they are probably not of special importance. No lacunae have been observed near the margin of the pith of D. farleyense such as those described by Halle (1911) as mucilage canals in D. Lafoniense from the Falkland Is., and which also occur in Poroxylon. Scattered irregularly through the pith there are numerous small, oval, brownish-coloured spots (Pl. xxii, fig. 4) usually about 1504 by 100, but some- times considerably smaller, 80 by 60 u. The primary xylem.—The primary xylem forms a zone (PI. xxii, fig. 6), about 6-8 cells wide, not distinctly marked off from the secondary xylem, nor indeed from the small parenchymatous cells of the outer pith. There are some definite bundles of primary xylem, but they are not distinctly defined as in the genera Mesoxylon, Calamopitys, Mesopitys, etc. On the whole the tracheids of the BY A. B. WALKOM. 263 primary xylem are roughly hexagonal in section and tend to be somewhat larger (up to 48 uw by 36 4) than those of the secondary xylem (40 yu by 32. or less); they are not regularly arranged in radial rows like those of the secondary xylem, but there is quite a noticeable degree of regularity in the arrangement of many of the tracheids of the primary xylem. Where primary bundles can be recognized, it is chiefly by the fact that the rows at the sides of the bundle converge from the inner boundary of the secondary xylem. In the bundles it is not possible to differentiate any protoxylem elements in transverse section, though this is perhaps possible in longitudinal section by the presence of annular thickening or very extended spirals. It does seem certain that there is no development of centripetal xylem which is an important feature in determining the generic position of the specimen. In some places the primary xylem bundle appears to extend in two narrow strips into the pith region and to enclose one or two fairly large parenchymatous cells, giving somewhat the appearance exhibited in sections figured by Miss Holden in D. indicum (Holden, 1917, Pl. xix, figs. 13, 14). In radial longitudinal section the primary xylem is formed of some six to eight rows, of which the inner one or two may show annular or very extended spiral thickening, three or four rows show close spiral thickening and two er three rows show scalariform and reticulate thickening, these being followed by the reticulately pitted tracheids of the secondary xylem. The zone of primary wood is not continuous, and in the areas between the indefinite primary bundles the parenchyma of the pith is continuous with the medullary rays. The secondary xylem (Pl. xxii, figs. 7-9) —The secondary xylem shows the usual regular arrangement in radial rows, of more or less equidimensional rectangular cells with uniseriate or biseriate medullary rays. Annual rings are clearly distinguishable, there being a distinct line of demarcation between the summer wood of one ring and the spring wood of the succeeding ring; on account of the shattering of the stem it is not possible to follow the rings right round the stem, but they can be traced for considerable distances and always end abruptly where the wood has been fractured. In radial section also there is a distinct difference between summer wood and that of the succeeding spring. The rings vary from about 5 to 8 mm. in width. The radial walls of the tracheids have one or two, occasionally three, vertical rows of large, alternate, circular bordered pits (see fig. 8). When there is only a single row the pits are sometimes in contact and flattened, but at other times they are separate from one another and retain their circular outline. When there is more than a single row the pits are in contact but are not so closely packed as to have the hexagonal outline so common in woods of similar type to our specimen. Occasionally the pits in two vertical rows are opposite instead of alternate. The pore in the bordered pits is small and broadly elliptical in cut- line, generally elongated transversely. The medullary ray cells are parenchymatous and generally from three to seven times as long (radially) as high. Their radial walls are pitted with small elliptical bordered pits, the number varying up to about seven in the field. Tangential sections (fig. 9) show the rays generally to be uniseriate, occasion- ally biseriate, and varying from 2 or 3 to 21 cells in height. No pitting was observed on the tangential walls of the medullary ray cells but occasionally there appeared to be one or two rows of alternate bordered pits on the tangential walls of tracheids of the secondary xylem. ry % fr™. . f™ 264 FOSSIL PLANTS FROM UPPER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS OF N.S.W., General Discussion. Dadoxylon farleyense agrees very closely in many of its characters with Dadoxylon Lafoniense described by Halle (1911, 177) from Permo-Carboniferous rocks of the Falkland Is.; the two species resemble one another especially in the absence of marked distinction between primary and secondary xylem and in the absence of centripetal xylem. The presence of annual rings and the pitting of the radial walls of the tracheids add to the resemblance. In the former species the medullary rays are considerably higher than in D. Lafoniense, and the presence of an abundance of sclerotic nests in the pith of D. farleyense is another point of difference. The genus Mesopitys Zalessky, in which annual rings are well marked, has definite strands of primary xylem described by Zalessky (1911, 28) as being wholly endarch, an observation which has not been entirely borne out by re- examination of his material (see Seward, 1917, 295; Scott, 1923, 283); the leaf- trace is a single strand where it passes through the secondary xylem. Our species differs from Mesopitys in having apparently no centripetal xylem and in having only very indefinite primary xylem bundles; it has also much higher medullary rays, but has a similar type of pith with abundant sclerotic nests. D. farleyense is another addition to the species of Dadoxylon with structure of the central region preserved, from the Gondwana flora. Although silicified woods are very common on some horizons in rocks of Permian (Permo- Carboniferous) age from the Gondwana region, in very few cases has the structure of the central region of the stem been sufficiently well preserved for. description. The cases in which knowledge of the pith and primary wood is avail- able include Dadoxylon Pedroi Zeiller (1895) from Brazil, D. Lafoniense Halle (1911) and D. Bakeri Seward and Walton (1923) from the Falkland Islands, D. indicum Holden (1917) from India, D. sclerosum Walton (1925) from South Africa and the stem described as Araucarioxrylon Daintreei from Queensland (Chapman, 1904, 320). Very little is known of the pith or primary xylem of D. Arberi Seward (1919, 255), the characters of the species being those of the secondary xylem; Walton (1925, 2) has described a specimen of D. Arberi from South Africa in which some crushed remains of pith and primary wood are preserved. D. farleyense differs from D. Arberi in having numerous sclerotic nests in the pith, and also in the character of the pitting on the radial walls of the tracheids. D. farleyense may be closely related to the stem from the Bowen River Coal Measures in Queensland described by Chapman (1904) as Araucariozylon Daintreei but in the latter the medullary rays appear always to be uniseriate and the bordered pits on the radial wails of the tracheids are often in 4 to 6 vertical rows and have.an oblique slit-like pore. D. Bakeri Seward and Walton (1923, 325) is a similar type of wood occurring in association with Glossopteris in the Falkland Is.; it does not possess secretory reservoirs or canals like D. Lafoniense Halle, it has a zone of tissue lining the inner side of the primary bundles such as is present in D. indicum Holden, and the pits on the radial walls of the tracheids are often in stellate groups recalling the distribution of pits characteristic of the genus Callixrylon which occurs in the Upper Devonian of Indiana. In all the features just mentioned D. Bakeri is to be distinguished from D. farleyense. Recovery from wound and development of callus. Plate xxiii, figs. 1-3; Text-fig. 1. The sections of this specimen of D. farleyense have been cut through portion of the stem where there was a roughly circular projecting scar, about 15 mm. in BY A. B. WALKOM. 265 diameter, with a fairly well defined outer rim about 1 mm. wide and a depressed central area (PI. xxiii, fig. 3). From these sections it appears that this scar is the result of a wound, perhaps the breaking of a branch, which has been repaired by the development of callus growth and the gradual lateral extension of wood over the wound area. The figures (PI. xxiii, figs. 1, 2) show close similarity to examples of callus growths (cf. Hartig, 1878, Plates v and vi; Kiister, 1925, figs. 51, 53, 78, 82, 102, 105), and the specimen is thus of considerable interest as being one of the very few cases so far recorded amongst fossils. It also shows, as of course is to be expected, that the methods of recovery from wounds were the same in bygone ages as they are to-day; both in outward appearance and in sections the fossil is very similar to recent examples of the same phenomenon. Plate xxiii, fig. 2, shows a section near the central portion of the wound; fig. 1 one near the margin. The general structure is well shown in transverse section (Text-fig. 1). At Xa in the figure is a normal annual ring of the secondary wood. The next succeeding ring, Xb, is abruptly broken off after the spring wood has been developed to a thickness of about 0-7 mm., whereas the annual ring Xa is about 3°7 mm. thick. On the level at which the slide is cut this break of the secondary wood has a lateral extent of nearly 2 cm. Where the wound has been received, and particularly at the outer margins, groups of rather loose parenchymatous cells Text-fig. 1—Recovery from wound in Dadoxylon farleyense. Diagram illustrating Plate xxiii, fig. 2. Explanation in text. have been developed (A, A', H). These cells have very much the appearance of cortical tissue and their formation has been accompanied by the secretion of a considerable amount of resin as evidenced by numerous cells in the vicinity filled with darkish-brown contents. Such loose parenchymatous tissue is characteris- tically developed in the formation of callus wood (see Kiister, 1925, fig. 48). At A and A’ it appears that some of the cells of this tissue must have developed cambial activity for, from the outer margins of the two groups, series of regularly arranged rows of tracheids radiate, and by spreading inwards they commence to repair the damage caused by the wound. At the lines marked B and B* there is every appearance of the termination of a season’s growth, but this radial discontinuity dies out laterally in a very short distance (3 or 4 mm.) and would perhaps seem to have been due to. some check in growth round the wound. Along the surface where this check took place there is a narrow wedge 266 FOSSIL PLANTS FROM UPPER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS OF N.S.W., (D, D*) of loose cells, resembling cortical tissue, which expands when it reaches the edge of the wound region into an extensive mass of loose cells forming a callus over the broken edge of the wound (C, C'). In a radial direction this passes gradually into the series of regularly arranged rows of tracheids of the secondary xylem. The narrow wedges (D, D') just mentioned are also succeeded radially by regular rows of tracheids and a little further out (at L and L?*) there is the normal well-defined boundary of an annual ring. The ends of this outer part of the annual ring (M, M*) encroach further on to the wounded region than those of the earlier part (N, N°). In the central part of the wound area there are confused masses of cells (EF) where, for the most part, the structure is not well preserved and it is possible that some of the groups of cells may have belonged to the basal part of a broken branch. On either side there is a zone of loose irregular thin-walled parenchyma (F) (similar to that at C, C!) and merging into the secondary xylem which finally completely encloses the wound’ zone. At K there is a small group of large, rather thick-walled cells very like those forming the pith, and scattered through the whole of the wound region there are numerous small oval brown spots whose presence in the pith has been noted above. In places, particularly in the vicinity of A and A‘ and in the rows of cells radiating therefrom, and also at J, many of the cells are filled with darkish-brown contents, perhaps resinous secretion induced by the wounding. The small circular mass at G consists of a small central group of rather large thick-walled cells surrounded by a zone of thinner walled cells and then a narrow zone several cells wide in which the cells are arranged in regular radial manner. Radial sections show very distinctly the sudden change from the secondary xylem to the loose callus tissue, and in the outer portion of this the appearance is very similar to Ktister’s figure of abnormal fibre formation in response to injury (Ktster, 1925, fig. 82, p. 120). (c) A fossil wood from the Newcastle Coal Measures. DapoxyLon ARBERI Seward. Portion of a petrified stem from Lake Macquarie, on a horizon within the Newcastle Coal Measures, is referred to Dadoxylon Arberi. The specimen consists of portion of the secondary wood from the outer part of the trunk. Distinct annual rings are present and from the curvature of these rings it is obvious that the stem was more than 12 inches in diameter. The rings are fairly regular and are from 3 to 6 mm. in width. The radial rows of tracheids and the medullary rays are considerably distorted and do not follow ‘a straight radial direction. In transverse section the tracheids of the spring wood are small, approximately square, about -:05 x -:05 mm., and are two or three times the dimension of the summer wood tracheids in a radial direction, the latter being approximately -05 x -02-04 mm. The greater part of the annual ring is made up of the spring wood; there are up to 20 rows of thicker-walled tracheids in the summer wood, occupying less than 1 mm. in width, and the rings vary from 3 to 6 mm. in total width. The preservation of the pitting of the walls of the tracheids is very imperfect and incomplete. The radial walls have large, approximately circular bordered pits with a wide border and a fairly large transversely oval or circular. pore. There may be as many as four vertical rows of pits or only a single row. When BY A. B. WALKOM. 267 there are four rows they are alternate and so crowded that they are hexagonal in outline and they cover the whole surface of the radial wall. When there are only one or two rows of pits they are not always in close contact and may be circular or slightly flattened top and bottom by contact with adjacent pits, and may be opposite instead of alternate. The medullary rays are only poorly preserved and no example was observed of pits communicating with the tracheids. In tangential section the rays are very abundant and almost always uniseriate; occasionally one or two cells near the middle of the ray may be divided into two vertically. The height of the ray varies from 2 cells to 30 cells, the majority being between 6 and 15 cells high, and the cells are almost square, with somewhat rounded corners. The number of rays visible in tangential section is about 20 per square millimetre. It seems more than probable that the specimen belongs to the species originally described by Arber (1905, 191) as Dadozxylon australe, now known as D. Arberi (Seward, 1919, 255), with which it agrees fairly closely in most of its characters. Arber’s specimens were from the Newcastle Series at Newcastle and Lake Macquarie, and our specimen comes from the latter locality. Walton (1925) has recently described D. Arberi in greater detail than the original account. In our specimen the diameter of the pits on the radial walls of the tracheids is about -01 mm., and that of the tracheids themselves about -05 mm. It was in this species that Arber (1905) first called attention to the development of well-marked annual rings in fossil woods from Permo-Carboniferous rocks. Several additional species showing this feature have since been described and in most of them the structure of the central portion of the stem is known, but we still know comparatively little of the structure of this region in D. Arberi. Two Indian species described by Miss Holden (1917) both differ from D. Arberi, D. indicum particularly in the pits on the radial walls of the medullary rays and D. bengalense in having the rays always uniseriate. Other species of Dadoxylon such as D. Lafoniense (Halle, 1911) and D. farleyense (described above) have secondary wood very similar to that of D. Arberi, but the name D. Arberi is perhaps best reserved for secondary wood alone, other specific names being used when knowledge of the central region of the stem is sufficient to justify use of a separate name. Two species from Brazil, D. nummularium and D. meridionale, described by David White (1908, 579, 583) have secondary wood of much the same general type as D. Arberi, but in neither species is there any evidence of the development of annual rings. References. ARBER, E. A. N., 1905.—The Glossopteris Flora. Brit. Mus. Catalogue. BureAuv, E., 1913.—Bassin de la Basse Loire. Descriptions des flores fossiles. Paris, UG)I155, CHAPMAN, F., 1904.—On a collection of Upper Palaeozoic and Mesozoic fossils from West Australia and Queensland, in the National Museum, Melbourne. Proc. Foy. Soc. Vict., N.S., xvi, Pt. ii, 1903 (1904). Habe, T. G., 1911.—On the geological structure and history of the Falkland Islands. Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, xi, pp. 115-229. Hartic, T., 1878.—Anatomie und Physiologie der Holzpflanzen. Berlin. HoupEN, RutTH, 1917.—On the anatomy of two Palaeozoic stems from India. Ann. Bot., seo, WOW, ww, BilH. Kipston, R., 1885.—On the relationship of Ulodendron, Lindley and MHutton, to Lepidodendron, Sternberg, ete. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xvi, 1885, 162. 268 FOSSIL PLANTS FROM UPPER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS OF N.S.W., Kinston, R., 1903.—The fossil plants of the Carboniferous rocks of Canonbie, Dumfries- shire, and of parts of Cumberland and Northumberland. Trans. Roy. Soc. EHdinb., xl, 1903, 741. KUster, H., 1925.—Pathologische Pflanzenanatomie (3rd Ed.). Jena. NaAtTHoRST, A. G., 1894.—Zur Palaozoischen Flora der arktischen Zone. K. Sv. Vet.- Akad., Handl. 26. ,1914.—Nachtrage zur Palaozoischen Flora Spit Dennene. Stockholm, 1914. 1920.—_zur Kulmflora Spitzbergens. Stockholm, 1920. RYDZEWSKI, B., 1919.—Flore houillére de la Pologne. 1¢ Partie. Genre Lepidodendron. Soc. des Sciences de Varsovie.—Paleontologie de la Pologne, No. 2, 1919. Scott, D. H., 1902.—On the primary structure of certain Palaeozoic stems with the Dadoxylon type of wood. Trains. Roy. Soc. Edinb., xl, 1902, 331. , 1923.—Studies in Fossil Botany, 3rd Ed., Part 2, 1928. Scort, D. H., and BE. C. JErrrey, 1914.—On fossil plants, showing structure, from the base of the Waverley shale of Kentucky. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., B205, 1914, 315-373. SEwarpD, A. C., 1910.—Fossil Plants, Vol. ii, 1910. , 1917.—Fossil Plants, Vol. iii, 1917. , 1919.—Fossil Plants, Vol. iv, 1919. Srwarp, A. C., and J. WALTON, 1923.—On fossil plants. from the Falkland Islands. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., \xxix, 19238, 313. WALTON, J., 1925.—On some South African fossil woods. Annals S. Af. Mus., xxii, 1925, 1-26. WuHite, D., 1899.—Fossil Flora of the Lower Coal Measures of Missouri. Monographs U.S. Geol. Surv., Vol. 37, 1899. ————, 1908.—Report on the Fossil Flora of the Coal Measures of Brazil, in Final Report of Dr. I. C. White, Chief of the Brazilian Coal Commission, 1908, p. 337. WILLIAMSON, W. C., 1887.—A monograph on the morphology and histology of Stigmaria ficoides. Pal. Soc., London, 1887. WILLIAMSON, W. C., and D. H. Scorr, 1895.—Further observations on the organization of the fossil plants of the Coal-Measures. Part iii, Lyginodendron and Heterangium. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., B186, 1895, 708. ZALESSKY, M. D., 1904.—Végétaux fossiles du terrain Carbonifére du Bassin du Donetz. Mém. Com. Géol. St. Pétersburg, Livr. xiii. —————,, 1911.— Etude sur ]’Anatomie du Dadoxzylon Tchihatche ffi Goppert sp. Mem. Com. Géol., Nouv. Ser., Livr. 68, 1911. ZEILLER, R., 1886.—Bassin Houiller de Valenciennes. Htude. Gites Min. France, Paris. —, 1895.—Note sur la flore fossile des gisements houillers de Rio Grande do Sul. Bull. Soc. Géol. de France, Ser. 3, t. 23. EXPLANATION OF PLATES XXI-XXIII. Plate xxi. Figs. 1,2. Lepidodendron Osbornei, n. sp. Welshman’s Creek, Wallarobba, N.S.W. 1. Photograph (slightly enlarged) of specimen; 2. Drawing, by Mr. T. A. Brock, of Cambridge, showing the very elongated, kite-shaped leaf cushions (slightly reduced). : Fig. 3. Ulodendron minus L. and H. (x 3). Welshman’s Creek, Wallarobba, N.S.W. Fig. 4. Stigmaria ficoides Brongniart (x 3). Clarencetown, N.S.W. Showing the remains of the pith and of the numerous flattened rootlets. Plate xxii. Figs. 1-3. Pitys (?) Sussmilchi, n. sp. Welshman’s Creek, Wallarobba, N.S.W. (x 25). 1. Transverse section; 2. Radial longitudinal section, showing the alternate, closely- crowded pits; 38. Tangential section showing the characteristic medullary rays. Figs. 4-9. Dadoxylon farleyense, n. sp. Ravensfield Sandstone, near Farley, N.S.W. (x 25, except fig. 8, which is x 60). k 4. Transverse section of portion of the pith; showing three of the “sclerotic nests’’ and, in the top left hand corner, some of the oval brownish-coloured spots which are of frequent occurrence not only in the pith, but in other. parts of the wood. 5. Longitudinal section of the pith. 6. Transverse section showing outer portion of the pith, primary xylem and secondary xylem. 7. Transverse section of secondary wood showing junction between two annual rings. 8. Longitudinal section of the secondary wood showing pitting of radial walls. 9. Tangential section of the secondary wood. BY A. B. WALKOM. 269 Plate xxiii. Figs. 1-3, Dadoxylon farleyense, n. sp. 1. Transverse section (x 4) near margin of wound caused, probably, by breaking off of a branch. The callus tissue repairing the wound shows in this section as an elongate band of cells, similar in appearance to cortical g¢ells, extending for about two-thirds across the middle of the photograph. 2. Transverse section (x 4) nearer the centre of the wound than Fig. 1. The details shown are explained in the text and in Text-fig. 1. 3. Photograph (approx. nat. size) of the specimen after sections had been cut. Fig. 4. Stigmaria ficoides from Rouchel, showing root scars (approx. nat. size). REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF THE GENERA CURIS, NEOCURIS AND TRACHYS, TOGETHER WITH NOTES AND DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES OF OTHER COLEOPTERA. By H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S. [Read 27th June, 1928.] Cerambycidae. ATHEMISTUS NODOSUS, N. SD. Chocolate brown; tarsi, apex and base of tibiae pale fawn colour; head and raised parts of upper surface with close adpressed downy pubescence; antennae and tarsi more strongly pubescent. Head with a few punctures on vertex, antennae _ stout. Prothorax convex, sides evenly and very lightly rounded, sides without apparent tubercles, whole surface very uneven and dotted with coarse, subfoveate punctures, dise with five small tubercles, three'in a line near middle, two smaller and closer behind these, the five outlining a subplanate area (found in other species). Scutellum very small and round. Hlytra narrowly ovate, apices bluntly, separately rounded; each with three rows of prominently raised, obtuse nodules, the second row containing the larger nodules, at the base forming a crest, giving an irregular outline to base of elytra; two prominent triangular tubercles on apical declivity; on each side of suture and between the pustules are rows of large punctures more conspicuous than in A. monticola Blkb. Dim.: 7:5 x 3 (—) mm. Hab.—Victorian Alps (Bogong High Plains, above 5,000 ft. alt., Mr. F. E. Wilson). Two examples, one certainly ¢, have been sent by their captor for description. The species is readily distinguished from its nearest allies A. punctipennis Cart., and A. tricolor Cart., by the uneven pronotum, and the large size and small number of the elytral nodules besides the crested humeri. Holotype in Coll. Wilson. Buprestidae. Neobubastes aureocincta Blk. = Castelnaudia australasiae Obenb.—In Sbornik Entomol. Nat. Mus. Praze, 1923, p. 14, Dr. Obenberger describes a species that is clearly identical with Blackburn’s species, while he uses a generic title that was used by Tschitscherine in 1891 for a genus of the Carabidae (since altered to Castelnaudina, Sbornik, 1924, p. 17). Buprestina prosternalis Obenb.—In the following page to that which contains the above species occurs a description of a new genus Buprestina with its geno- type B. prosternalis Obenb. This, in many respects, is very near the genus that I (at a later date—July, 1924) described as Notobubastes, but certain incon- sistencies make this uncertain. Thus in Buprestina the elytra have the “apices conjointement subarrondi”, while in Notobubastes the apices are ‘tridentate’. Yet in a specimen of WV. orientalis from Wide Bay, Queensland, I find the apices irregular, the left hand apex-being subtruncate, the right hand one lightly tridentate. There is also a curious contradiction in Dr. Obenberger’s description. Thus in the generic diagnosis the prosternum is said to be “densement ponctué’, BY H. J. CARTER. 271 while under the species “Prosternum sans ponctuation, lisse” makes determination a little difficult. Diceropygus maculatus Deyr. = D. quadritinctus Obenb.—I have recorded D. maculatus Deyr. from Darwin, North Australia (Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1923, p. 103). Obenberger’s description evidently shows the same insect. Briseis conica L. and G. = B. sagitta Obenb.—I believe also this synonymy holds good. There is no value in describing species which are so evidently close to well Known species without clearly indicating their definite distinction. Hypocisseis Thoms.—In Archiv fiir Naturg., 1924, p. 106, Dr. Obenberger disagreed—without giving a reason—with my placing Cisseoides Kerr. as a synonym of Hypocisseis. However, in Sbornik Entom. Mus. Praze, 1924, p. 24, he follows this up by stating the four characters which he considers differentiate Hypocisseis. He has hereby strengthened my former considered opinion after a re-examination of material. For the purpose of replying to my critic I will compare two well known species, H. latipennis Macl. = laticornis Thoms., the genotype of Thomson, with AH. suturalis Saund., which Kerremans redescribed (1) as Cisseoides albopicta and (2) as Hypocisseis aeneipes (afterwards corrected to Cisseoides aeneipes in the Genera Insectorum) and whose types I examined in 1922. The four characters stated by Obenberger are:——(1) ‘la taille beaucoup plus large, robuste et subdéprimée”; (2) “la présence de deux faisceaux de poils élevés sur le front”; (3) “le marge basale du corselet, qui est trés largement rébordée”; (4) “la forme de tibias (sic) postérieurs, qui sont, au cdté externe, légérement relevés en gouttiére (vraisemblement pour y loger les premiers articles de tarse au repos) et dont partie apicale et extérieure est subglabre ou tres €parsement unisériatement épineuse, tandisque les é6épines citées sont chez Cisseoides denses et subégales, unisériatement disposées sur toute la longueur de tibie’’. ' With regard to (1), there is no more difference in size and form between the species in my tabulation than in other genera (e.g. Cisseis). Thus dimensions of A. latipennis are 10-12 x 43-5 mm., of AH. suturalis 63-10 x 3-4 mm. Also mere size has little to do with generic distinction. (2). The tufts of hair are merely crests to elevations bordering the eyes. All the species in my table have this elevation more or less, without the tufts of hair, as also has A. brachyformis Deyr., which Dr. Obenberger admits into Hypocisseis. (3). This seems quite imaginary. I find no mention of it in the original description, nor any sign of distinction between the species in my tabulation. (4). The hind tibiae of the two species differ, but only to a slight extent. There is little sign of the “gouttiére’. Both are flattened near apex, this flattened area extending farther in “latipennis” than in “suturalis’, but both have the exterior edge sharp and strongly “unisériatement épineuse”. There is nothing of a generic character that warrants the separation of Cisseoides from Hypocisseis. Monsieur Théry has already noted his accord with this opinion (Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., 1927, p. 33)- As with all widely distributed species, H. suturalis Saund.—found on Exocarpus cupressiformis (the Native Cherry) in New South Wales, probably on allied trees in Western Australia—is very variable in size and pattern, the latter easily abraded. The four species described as Cisseoides carteri, C. maduri, C. gebhardti and C. nigrosericea are under suspicion as possible additional synonyms of this already four times described species. I 272 SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, Anthaxoschema Obenb. = Notographus Thoms.—There seems little doubt of this synonymy. The characters specially mentioned by Obenberger—the antennary cavities unseen from in front, with “ligne antérieure . . . un peu élevée latéralement en caréne’’,, the form of pronotum, and the apical segment of abdomen are all exactly the characters which distinguish Notographus from Anilara. Anthaxoschema terraereginae Obenb. must be very close to the species I have hypothetically diagnosed as Notographus yorkensis Obenb., but the abbreviated descriptions contained in the tabular form (Hntom. Bldtter, 1922, pp. 72, 73) do not enable me to state this synonymy with certainty. Both descriptions fit large and small examples of a species variable in size and widely distributed in Queensland, a fresh example of the larger fitting N. yorkensis, a small, stained or abraded example fitting N. terraereginae. Stigmodera cara Blkb.; S. placens Kerr.—This is a well known species in the Stanthorpe district, S. Queensland. The ° (not mentioned by either author) has the abdomen concolorous with the rest of the underside—blue or violet—this region being more or less yellow in the g—a sexual variation noted in other species (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1916, p. 83). = Diceropygus (Melobasis) suturalis Macl.—Monsieur Théry has_ recently indicated, in correspondence with me, that this species is a Diceropygus, though described as a Melobasis, and so included in my Revision. This author also shows that Diceropygus can only be maintained with subgeneric rank. Synechocera elongata Thoms. = 8S. (Aphanisticus) occidentalis Macl.—This synonymy is established by the comparison of a paratype of Thomson’s species, sent by Mons. Théry, with an example in my collection that is identical with “Macleay’s type. Cisseis elliptica Cart. = ?C. carteri Obenb.—There is nothing but a slight difference of size in Obenberger’s description to distinguish it from elliptica. Meliboeithan Obenb.—I cannot find anything in the description of this genus to distinguish it from Paracephala, while the species described under it, M. fissus Obenb., might well be Paracephala intermedia Kerr. MELOBASIS PUSILLA, nl. Sp. Oblong; metallic green above and below, including appendages. Head, including eyes, slightly wider than apex of prothorax, front wide, slightly widening in front of eyes, densely and regularly punctate. Prothoraz: Apex and base lightly bisinuate (especially the former), sides lightly widened in middle, all angles subobtuse, disc closely covered with round punctures, becoming denser and coarser at sides, these. punctures superimposed upon a minutely roughened surface, seen more distinctly on oval prescutellary impunctate patch. Scutellum transverse, oval. Hlytra widening behind shoulders, lightly compressed near middle, sides subparallel, apical margins serrulate; dise closely punctate with rather vague indications of a linear arrangement, the punctures very dense (also colour brighter) near base, the humeral callus impunctate. : Underside of head and prosternal episterna coarsely, prosternum densely, metasternum less strongly, punctate; abdomen with elongate ‘‘finger-print” impres- sions, open behind; these very dense towards apex—except on margins; apical segment of gj truncate between two short spines; the larger example (? 9) has lost the abdomen. Dim.: 6-74 x 2-24 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Bowen (A. Simson,-in Simson Collection, South Australian Museum). BY H. J. CARTER. 273 Two examples of this pretty little species sent amongst some Neocuris are, I think, correctly placed in Melobasis—though at first glance taken for a Pseudanilara. The bispinose abdomen and the form of head and pronotum point to this position. The very slightly lineate arrangement of the elytral sculpture is not very far removed from a similar occurrence in M. wuniformis Cart., and M. macleayi Cart., while it is nearer the latter in colour, but of a brighter green. M. macleayi, however, has the sides of prothorax quite straight, its surface punctures with a transverse tendency, and the elytral series more clearly traceable. Holotype and allotype in the South Australian Museum. ANILARA DODDI, Nl. sp. Short and rather convex; nitid blue-black, glabrous. Head deeply immersed in prothorax, and much narrower than it, front generally convex but clearly channelled in middle, eyes with internal margins parallel, vertex wider than the transverse diameter of an eye. Prothorax more convex than usual, apex arcuate, the front angles acute and depressed; base nearly straight, sides well rounded, widest at basal third, thence arcuately narrowed to apex and lightly to the subobtuse posterior angles; whole surface minutely, not densely punctate, with transverse rugae near base; without medial line or foveae. Scutellum nearly circular, nitid. Hlytra slightly wider than pro- thorax at base, jointly at apex, basal margin raised, having a large subhumeral depression behind it; finely scalose-punctate, the punctures more distant than on pronotum. Underside nitid and almost impunctate. Dim.: 3 mm. long. Hab.—Queensland: Kuranda (F. P. Dodd). A unique example in the South Australian Museum is another of the well ‘known naturalist’s captures in this prolific region. Its abbreviated, rather wide and convex form and depressed, anterior angles suggest generic distinction. The elytra in the holotype are dehiscent and disclose a wide, nitid band at base of pronotum, with a fine, sharply serrulate margin; this band usually covered by elytra. Holotype in South Australian Museum. STIGMODERA MACULIFER Kerr.—I have already noted (These ProckEepineGs, 1924, p. 19) the distinction of this eastern species from the western S. rubriventris Blkb. They are so frequently confused that the following comparison may be * useful :— ji rubriventris. nvaculifer. Form— Narrower, sinuate, attenuate behind, each Wider, oblong oval, rounded behind, apex obliquely acuminate. each apex lightly bispinose, with small lunation. Elytral intervals— Clearly punctate. sub-laevigate. Both species have the apical margins denticulate, but so faintly in rubriventris that its author may be excused for failing to see this; unless with the aid of a binocular microscope. Other differences, especially of colour, are less constant, but I have lately seen sueh striking variations. in examples from Stanthorpe, Q., that, for the present considered as a variety, may later be deemed of specific value. S. MACULIFER Kerr. var. AERICOLLIS Cart. Head, pronotum and underside, except abdomen, brilliant golden coppery; elytra chiefly testaceous, fasciae 274 SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, variable. In one case only the post-medial dark fascia is present with a minute apical patch; in another example even this fascia is reduced to two lateral spots and the apical patch is wanting. PARACEPHALA BICOSTATA, N. Sp. : Short, rather wide; above and below obscurely coppery, thickly clothed with recumbent silvery hair, head, pronotum and underside showing slight metallic gleams, elytra more opaque. Head suborbicular, with deep longitudinal furrow, situated in a cuneiform excision. Prothorax very convex, apex advanced in middle, base strongly bisinuate, sides slightly arcuate in middle, and a little sinuate behind, posterior angles sub- acute, the anterior quite rounded off; disc without channel, the thick, bristly hairs tending to form an oval around a nude, raised mediobasal area. Hlytra as wide as prothorax at base, sides subsinuate, slightly widest behind middle, shoulders forming callosities, a sinuate costa extending from each shoulder to apical declivity, parallel to suture on its hinder half; the sculpture hidden by clothing. Under- side much more sparsely pilose except at sides; rather strongly punctate. Dim.: 4:5 x 2 (4+) mm. Hab.—Queensland (National Museum); Western Australia: Pinjarrah (A. M. Lea); Australia (S. Aust. Museum). Seven examples examined, two from the National Museum, four in the South Australian Museum and one (No. 7303) in Mr. Lea’s Coll. show a species of shorter and proportionally wider form than usual. It is clearly not one of the three species inadequately described by Dr. Obenberger*, while I think I know the other described species. It is the most densely hirsute species known to me, also the only one having a defined elytral costa (P. intermedia Kerr., shows a subcostiform impression due to the presence of a subsutural groove), the costa emphasized by the clothing, as with the raised part of pronotum. I cannot distinguish any sexual characters. Var.—A specimen from Ardrossan, S.A. (G. Tepper), in the Adelaide Museum is I consider conspecific, differing from the typical form in its larger size (6 mm. long) and more metallic but strongly pubescent surface. Holotype and paratype in National Museum. SYNECHOCERA LONGIOR, nN. SD. Hlongate, parallel, depressed; black, subnitid; everywhere with a short, sparse, inconspicuous pale pubescence. Head globose, the front with a deep incision, dividing it into two lobes; eyes not prominent, antennae having segments 6-11 dentate, the 5th also a little enlarged at apex. Prothorax: Apex lightly, base more strongly sinuate; anterior angles produced but deflexed, posterior obtuse; widest at anterior third, there as wide as elytra at shoulders, thence arcuately narrowed each way; dise with elongate-oval depression at anterior middle, with small, sparse, setose punctures. Scutellum rather large, acutely triangular. Hlytra parallel for the greater part (very slightly obovate), widest at subgibbous shoulders and behind middle, apices very slightly dehiscent and separately rounded, their margins entire; disc covared with lightly impressed punctiform depressions, each bearing a short white hair, * Archiv fur Naturg. 1924, p. 155. No comparison with existing species is given, nor any note to show the author’s knowledge of them. Moreover, there is little in the description of P. niveiventris to distinguish it from P. strandi, while I think it is certain that P. impressicollis Obenb. = P. transsecta Cart. BY H. J. CARTER: 275 each elytron with a faintly indicated costa throughout its length; underside even more lightly than the elytra but similarly impressed. Dim.: 7-5-9 « 2-2-5 mm. Hab.—Victoria, South Australia and Western Australia. Five examples are before me, that I had provisionally labelled elongata Thoms., but Monsieur Théry has recently sent me a paratype of Thomson’s species that is unmistakably identical with occidentalis Macl. S. longior differs from elongata in larger size, black colour, much finer sculpture, stronger frontal excision; the pronotum longer and relatively narrower, its front margin less produced in middle; the base of elytra less strongly bent (almost forming two semicircles in elongata). Three examples (the type series) were taken by Mr. J. HE. Dixon at W. Warburton, Victoria; one is from a series taken at Lucindale, S. Australia and the fstth was taken by myself at Geraldton, W.A. This distribution is very wide, but I cannot separate the individuals specifically. The Geraldton example is a more nitid black with, possibly, finer sculpture and less obvious setae, but it is, at most, only a variety. S. setosa is smaller and more cylindric, while S. tasmanica Thoms., has a subcircular prothorax. Type series in Coll. Carter. Revision of the Genus Curis L. and G. Though I have only one new species to add there are some corrections to make in the nomenclature, and a tabulation to add that will, I trust, make the study of this beautiful genus clearer. The Synopsis of Fairmaire, published in 1877 (Ann. Soc. Ent. France) was the last general survey of the group, since when six species have been added, cne each by C. O. Waterhouse and Blackburn, three by myself and one by Obenberger. Twenty names have been published for species, of which six are, I consider, synonyms, while one, ©. despecta Fairm., is unknown to me. The remaining thirteen are tabulated below, together with the new species. The genus is specially interesting in that it is, I think, alone of Buprestidae, in having representatives in South America, three species being recorded by Kerremans in 1902 from Chili. I have one of these, ©. bella Guér., kindly sent by Mons. Théry, that is strikingly close to some of the Australian species. Fairmaire’s synopsis contains so many inconsistencies, while the characters Ly which he defines his groups are of so doubtful value that I have not made much use of his arrangement. Thus C. perroni L. and G. is placed, together with C. despecta Fairm., under group A, of which the chief distinction is “caput antice non aut vix impressum”, yet in his following description oecurs ‘“capite longitudinaliter impresso”. A little further on he says “elytris apice acuminatis, tenuiter serrulatis, apice obtuse rotundato”. If one may adopt the second part in each of these cases and eliminate the first, the determination of this name by the late Canon Blackburn for an insect in the South Australian Museum—labelled Australia—is, I think, correct. This interpretation is corroborated, so far as concerns the frontal impression, by the note under despecta which states that “téte . . . plus largement et moins profondément excavée”’ though this leaves the group character of A still more incomprehensible. Colour.—Bewilderingly varied in some species, so that I have, except where colour characters are more or less constant, taken structure and sculpture as a surer guide. Structure.—Dr. Obenberger lays much stress on the width and form of the interocular front of head. I find this is partly a matter of sex; as is also the 276 SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, question of dimensions. Thus in examples of C. splendens Macl., taken by Mr. C. F. Denquet at Armidale, N.S.W., I find the fellowing:— A. g (113 x 4 mm.) front passes from 1 (+) mm. at base to about 1% mm., at its widest. B. @ (18 x 6 mm.) from 13 mm. at base to 2 (+) at widest. Thus in A it would approach the term “parallel” as used by Obenberger, while in B it would be clearly “divergent”. I note similar sexual distinctions in other species. In both sexes the abdomen is bispinose and emarginate at the extremity, though this is much obscured and less evident in the female, by the presence of the produced apical sternite and I have noted one species, C. obscura Cart., in which the spines are reduced to tubercles. I have already published (These Procrerpines, 1924, p. 531) my reasons for considering the genus Neocuropsis as redundant. iv Table of Curis. iL, > TKD ASL © TOKEN OVAOMUIS!”. aos 6's u.otd.0 Gla Glo o iia eam Oooo oreo ecco ole bolder De Rk bo O16 UGS Odio INS 2 IBAA, TAOS Ore NESS VEVIGSNIGC! soonscngoensanouboadoon es oobonoD DO aODO OCS OOO NWO 6 QP eninlycran nalliaantiyaemle tallies as, wakes cists & eaeecccsie Suen weiss, ayo) apes circantes cr com cache: suey one eet cans eae 3 IIAP, QOSGOMED TOU DIGS OPO -s oo conc ovogubGosnuDO Odo e ad abodooDanoOD obscura Cart. nd OY EAH oe Hh GLO ON DYER AEs chip chee aco ccd CERRO CI Glee Se once IEE ERE oer e cue ech acecme ase hones srcite corusca Waterh. Elytra metallic green, blue or purple ............... Behe. Me nes Sona eteds. de a eeee enema 4 4. Elytra finely punctate-striate, intervals not rugose .................. spencei Mann. Elytra coarsely punctate, intervals rugose ............. IN Ga hee Sree ere Hic ono eae 5 5. Pronotum concolorous, in middle carinate anteriorly, lightly excavated. posteriorly Ryle aeaviswoncaee Hesse nineteen ee poodgeqouegdaccacodcuascbonuDooDOUaOUE viridicyanea Fairm. Pronotum, medial area violaceous; medial excavation continuous throughout with- OWE (CATIA ecearet cicca este cclo tin eae bene, eine cers aie Reheat nse meea hy tree eee raea a elie syniee eerehys chloriantha Fairm. 6. Elytra without raised costae (lines that represent them are traceable) .......... Poy 5 Ri ie ites gee Syne ane Fe PORES Se Ut Sb bo Ne eo, eee YA Pa Bet ie GRRE Ee eth ere eA Ua RD AMG olivacea Cart. Hl ytra:, MOre: Or LESS -COStWACE ss se she tees ates Recent aule Lente Gr Oke Pe ee See hen ree eee ome neue 7 7. Margins of elytra serrulate, elytra of normal length ......................... 8 Margins of elytra entire, elytra abbreviated ................ 99040 splendens Macl. 8. Elytra ‘‘fusco-aenea” save for marginal coppery vitta ......................... 9 Bright metallic area of elytra limited to basal region .............. regia, N. sp Bright metallic area of elytra not limited as above .......................-.- 10 9. Pronotum concolorous, elytral costae prominent, intervals finely punctate ........ Nae cts ai ebccy edie, eaieies a El aos Pale Fania apateesha) Say epee aye SinOM wns Shek ee REE VELUOMN ss. Tay cevnia: (G. Pronotal margins coppery, elytral costae not prominent, intervals coarsely punctate PEGS ea Rea ete ice A EE Ned or ene CRNA Eto sop ead Ae einai a rE AMM eae Ar Ac intercribrata Fairm. 10. Bright metallic area of elytra limited to base and margins ........ discoidalis Blkb. Bright metallic area of elytra limited to suture and margins .................: 1i 11. Sutural metallic area narrow; elytral punctures sublineate ....... ... adurifera Ti. & G. Sutural metallic area expanded behind, elytral punctures irregular ............ lle 12. Pronotal colours in vittae, hind tibiae normal (narrow) .......... caloptera Boisd. Pronotal colours not in vittae, hind tibiae wide .................. yalgoensis Cart. Synonymy. 1. aurifera L.& G. = aurovittata Boh. (typ. comp. Saunders). 2. caloptera Boisd. = dives Hope (typ. comp. K. G. Blair) = awrovittata Kerr. (nec Boh.) var. formosa Gestro (also det. Kerr.); var. confusa Obenb. 3. splendens Macl. = brachelytra Fairm. = splendens Cart. (nec Fairm.) = fairmairei Cart. Notes. C. despecta Fairm. is unknown to me, and has been omitted from my table. BY H. J. CARTER. 277 C. chloriantha Fairm. is not a synonym of spencei Mann, as stated by Kerremans (Gen. Ins.). Two specimens from Western Australia (Coll. Lea and S. Aust. Mus.) are clearly distinct from both spencei Mann, and from viridicyanea Fairm., as stated in my table, though it is much more closely allied to the latter. C. corusca Waterh.—A mutilated example of this is in the South Australian Museum from Adelaide. Its author gave no locality. C. spencei Mann.—I possess a single example of this taken by Mr. H. Giles at the Drysdale River, N. W. Australia. C. viridicyanea Fairm.—A widely distributed species from various parts of North Queensland (one example is labelled Adelaide in the South Australian Museum). It varies in colour from bright green to blue or violet-blue. OC. splendens Macl:—Through a misidentification my note on this species (These ProcrEpINnGs, 1924, p. 531) is erroneous. C. splendens Macl. = C. splendens Fairm., and the superfluous name fairmairei Carter must be sunk. -C. perroni L. & G.—A single specimen of this rare insect is in the South Australian Museum, Blackburn Coll., without a legible locality label. It was described from Kangaroo Island. tee C. discoidalis Blkb—The author thought that this was closely allied to intercribrata Fairm., but it is abundantly distinct by its sculpture, apart from colour, the margins of pronotum and elytra being coarsely and definitely punctate, while in Fairmaire’s species the sides of pronotum are closely rugose and of the elytra very finely punctate. C. caloptera Boisd. var. formosa Gestro.—With a long series before me I find a perfect gradation from the normal to the more brilliantly coloured form that is clearly formosa and which appears most often in Queensland examples. I have also specimens from Victoria. C. confusa Obenb. cannot be separated from formosa. The distinctions stated by this author are, I consider, merely individual or sexual. CURIS REGIA, N. sp. ®. Oblong; head golden green, pronotum with wide margins and narrow medial vitta golden green, cyaneous on each side of the latter; elytra chiefly purple with cyaneous gleams, these showing especially on the subobsolete costae; basal margins and the suture near scutellum golden, underside metallic peacock-blue- green, the margins of segments, apex of abdomen, antennae and legs blue. Head widely and deeply excavate, strongly, not densely, punctate, inner margins of eyes sub-parallel. Prothorax: Apex nearly straight, slightly produced at the acute anterior angles, base strongly bisinuate (more so than in caloptera Bdv.), sides lightly rounded, widest near middle, thence sub-obliquely narrowed each way, rather more strongly so in front than behind; posterior angles subacute and a little produced, this emphasized by an elongate depression near basal margin; a deep elongate-elliptic fovea at middle, covering basal half, having a fine carina visible at bottom of this, continuous with a smooth medial line on apical half; surface at middle and sides moderately punctate—the punctures more distant towards sides and subobsolete on the convex blue area. Scutellum circular, with a longitudinal depression. Elytra rather sharply and separately rounded behind, not quite covering body, margins serrated; three unusually faint and nitid costae just apparent, the punctures of intervals moderate near base, soon becoming gradually finer from base to apex, with a perceptible lineate arrangement. Under- side moderately punctate, more strongly on prosternal episterna than elsewhere, punctures otherwise very fine and shallow. Dim.: 13 x 5 mm. 278 SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, Hab.—King Plains, North Australia. A single female example in the National Museum is nearest—though not very close—to C. caloptera Bdv., but differs, besides markedly in colour, in the more deeply excavate pronotum with its more strongly bisinuate base, less rounded sides, and the much finer surface punctures, both of pronotum and elytra. In fact it is the most finely punctate of all except olivacea Cart., while in its little raised costae it is intermediate between caloptera and olivacea. J wanting. Holotype in the National Museum. The name is suggested by its purple elytra as also by its habitat. Revision of Neocuris Fairm. Since Fairmaire published his Synopsis of Curis and Neocuris in 1877, a good deal of uncoordinated work has been done. Blackburn has already pointed out (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1887, p. 249) the unsatisfactory diagnosis of Neocuris given by Fairmaire, in which the one character, of those mentioned by him, which distinguishes Neocuris from Curis is the shorter basal segment of the hind tarsi. Other unmentioned distinctions are (a) pronotum without medial impression, (6) elytra non-striate, rarely with any sign of seriate arrangement of sculpture. Thanks to help from my friends of the British and respective Australian Museums, considerable material is at my disposal, and I have been able to identify with some certainty the majority of recorded species. There are, I find, 38 published names, two by Hope, two by Macleay, eleven by Fairmaire, four by Blackburn, six by myself and thirteen by Obenberger. Of these the following is the result of my inquiry: Species removed to Pseudanilara, 3; Synonyms or varieties (as below), 11; total, 14; leaving 24 good species, to which three more are added below, making 27 existing species, of which 25 are tabulated as follows (two, smaragdifrons Oben., and nickerli Obenb.. are omitted as unknown to me): Table of Neocuris. o Deyretsl Let) ket, wo Bye Na BIN AD NYCoN LON aaa vu Penis ear be Nantg/ Oe Gee uc cn a eRaney olsen tad et ere ben aro katong or 67 oro" a.c gnc 6 GAoNo 2 IDI NAIC, Walla ASCE TOMRESGSNOMS cocoonocccoossn nov an bv aN UDSDDOUO CTO BDO DdOOOOGS ra dU UAE WeRND GDL CXC) Ko) 85 pene tere ein) Aerie ane ene ovcute cer oma de re avanoxc inet Gln ntnrard a tol vou oro Abararole 8 2. Yellow markings consisting of a transverse medial fascia ............ guérinit Hope. Mellow anarkines otherwils Gy ys Sviaciesacietotevarcaen ye) ue eu vices bcatetiou tle na enable eae Mellott emerakar 3 3. Yellow colour pervading whole elytra ..................+.+--- asperipennis Fairm. APICESHOL Ely tray Gary vets sc cedcsek es an ier nee SaieMSHeH Cons teRGE Tee TH Oe EERO oe a ce ou Metois faker 4 4. Dark colour widely invading the yellow area both at base and apex .... ornata Cart. Darksrcolourvok, Elyitray MOESO! share oree errs CREEP ees ake ee Te eae ea eSB EN CTicy ctrerteageies 5 5. Pronotum brown with metallic gleams ..................-2--0-- discoflava Fairm. IETROMOLUD AN SHRENSI OP WKOEVGXOUS Gano aooboooppeocnod noun douebooO CoD dD ODEO OGOdOOD 6 6. Elytral punctures distinct and frequent .....................00-0000- browni Cart. Elytral punctures indistinct and sparse ....................+-+.+++-+0- doddi, n. sp. 7. Elytra atro-violaceous, with three coppery impressions ............ fortnumi Hope. Elytra blue with eight golden pubescent impressions .......... auro-inupressa Cart. Se erOnotumM awh mMarcins mCateleast ne tallli ci merserae ieorcneeiennieieerneieicioneieicieeatia ore 9) IE LONOCUIN UWNMICOLONOUS are ciisiererc eee te een See eee UN he Ee SE eee Gre oe cra eaen 15 QeeMES EY Gr ah MOS Sey SL e Le ladahi le anda em ARON etch os ccs) DESMA SORT E CEES, ISDN a OE BMRB wats poh eB a MRT 10 ID Winey OMSK DOINAS Or IMROK .oaooodedsontoodebenoooneooousacccouasocoeaeud 12 10. Whole, or great part of, pronotum fiery coppery .............. thoracica Fairm. Maresin's "only: mre tallies: cary ecnws eee oan ch oasis canes be paleo tn ciacias. oe RAT ascii eee ee a ete en ial 11. Form wide, subobovate, pronotum rounded at sides, front clearly impressed ...... AG si AIM NERS) o, 5 (SASHAS: clin Lo eRGNE A, SOT ta HOI EREAEE Bae Rs eo A Ree eR ae Paar cuprilatera Fairm. Form narrow, subparallel, pronotal sides nearly straight, front not impressed Et OIOLH thane bs aarcsore meCtePen caneerteat ty cecatyla sais. atch der) arcadia otoTOmA Lc On tele aces o weet *gracilis Macel. 12. Form rather wide, elytra dark violaceous bronze ............ anthaxioides Fairm. Orn MENON, Ghyowe, WAC Ss wir MEENA? SO coaccacoccavanrcosovdcnsurobeaoaanuace 13 BY H. J. CARTER. 279 SS ee HEE T ew DOL ACHSS Paacts steps icc. cd ps mati com eReN have Lat eo eR Per een ebete ele) gas haw a bee ¥ 2? obscurata Obenb. Elybpraw Obscure lyaihronZey Or) MRO My! ciciewewene eye le cged sive) sy) Gotha gas wtyerses th ore we oiton e/a) etewereue ie us i> 14 4 eM oOrmaGepressech SUD ODAGUes rscnseusie cee neNouioue: ciepens Sos (ous! dra) 4, a wnelene 318 +? carteri Obenb. HOLIIUMSUD CONVEX. MLULG We atinqtee eens aici c ee CURR Lon ena Gle soe ss arrs ns awe a sane pauperata Fairm. UD SUL ACe MSAD LOUS!! nos Saco te seaen Lo cheese TEMS cc Eis Save Rela W Siete cada @ a EUs, eho Ge bream ome 16 SUK Comp ILOSEH ye Aaa Cee eR EaY Ae OR ER ica coh awa a Ney cet hay cca oh rencub Hous euakeayd ue hatoers 22 LGaMoOUBracen DREN amt ya name tail Cauley prn- phe icus MeN eI cawene: ons cis seuae tus; apdists Seb ewepatemeuectuslatata aleve spas 7 SULbLAaCenGdarkeCOlOUMEM ain savers oe puowcu cored mM eee see Se soisac-e! oe sia oh s) sca aR reyyarran ERED eho 0: Oievie) toueiieie neve 20 17. Bicolorous, pronotum green, elytra coppery ................0.0000- dichroa Fairm. Unicolorouss, (SreEenecOr DUE ress hemmed eo Ree bsceo elena danbodiabcnevelwweie Sed opalelets auersneleuors 18 18. Length 8% mm. (or more), elytra ‘“obsoletissime costulatis’, colour peacock-blue eleehintotatoce ty OP mOCSITOIEA IG ciclo choke She Chala odie. Gigi CA ORo nen ORO CIDE RCM Te Ronen as monachroma Fairm. Length less, elytra not as preceding, colour generally green .................... i9 19. Length 5-7 mm., colour peacock green (not rarely blue: var. sapphira Cart.), head INTPRESSEGS cai Mees sie sic et Sales) sna ee Ee RMR a RS ee ese Ee Eyal, kb Oar DP viridimicans Fairm. Length 4 mm., or less, colour golden green, head convex ........ viridiaurea Macl. 205 (Colour) (of pronotum) at) least), blwe-wlack Sos se nsss4s..5500555050 44 fairmairei Blkb. ColounmCofspronotum av ease) moronzer eae ace acae ace Sciacca creel acim cic Pail 21. Length 8 mm., elytra subviolaceous, prothorax converging from base to apex CRSA acl oh ate chant din dus cattle tena ick emer oriaW hala cnmeaudis vcltcg® foe caus a Shae hy Moors 7 crassa Obenb. Length 4 mm. (or less), elytra concolorous with pronotum, prothorax subparallel Sia e eSB SPe PEL a ier SyVenG: ues = dateetaslua: aren ia cae ORCI OME MEM Renriee akii- cess eres soeseesee-- MENESCENS, N. Sp. 22. Form wide, head clearly impressed, upper surface coarsely punctate, hairs long .. 23 Form narrower, head convex, upper surface finely punctate, hairs short ........ BEE rT a red eiae tat Tet let isan hee tea he Iran an eee CORE So ec Sia eI bag a ard violacea, Nn. sp. 23. Colour clear indigo-blue, elytra rugose punctate ................ coerulans Kairm. Colour nearly black, elytra much more closely and simply punctate .. pubescens Blkb. * Colour variable in gracilis and pauperata; in oid examples sometimes nearly black, with the cyaneous tinge faint. ~ + Hypothetically determined. Synonymy. 1. N. ornata Cart. = hoscheki Obenb. 2. N. browni Cart. = ? luteo-tincta Obenb. 3. N. cuprilatera Fairm. = ? indigacea Obenb. 4. N. gracilis Macl. = soror Fairm. = ? var. atra Obenb. = ? var. ignota Obenb. = oblongata Obenb. = var. lepida Obenb. 5. N. anthaxioides Fairm. = var. livida Cart. 6. N. viridimicans Fairm. = var. sapphira Cart. 7. N. coerulans Fairm. = ? pilosula Obenb. 8. Pseudanilara (Anthaxria) cupripes Macl. = N. dilataticollis Blkb. 9. Pseudanilara (Anthaxria) purpureicollis Macl. var. nigra Macl. = N. nigricans Blkb. 10. Pseudanilara (Neocuris) pilosa Cart. = N. pilosa Cart. The first name holds good in each case. Notes on Synonymy. With regard to (1) and (2), I understand that Dr. Obenberger was unaware of my paper (These PROcEEDINGS, 1912, pp. 509-510 with text-fig. of N. ornata) when he published his first two (above) in Col. Rundsch. 1917; but in Sbornik Ent. National Museum of Prague, 1923, he has described no less than eleven new species, in addition to naming two new varieties, these eleven descriptions containing no single word of reference to recorded species. In small insects, difficult to determine from description—even when it is given in some detail— a note of comparison with its nearest allies is highly desirable, and would serve to show the author’s knowledge of such species. Dr. Obenberger, however, gives himself away at the beginning of his first description (N. pilosula) by the state- 280 SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, ment, “Differs from all known species by her pilose body”, when three known species -have a similar clothing to that described by him, of which in two cases, pubescens Blkb. and pilosa Cart., this clothing is indicated in the name; while in coerulans Fairm., there is an unfortunate omission in the author’s description— though the fact of its pilose clothing is well known, and is shown in an example sent from the British Museum. Except for the words “head without median impression” the description of pilosula would fit coerulans Fairm., or ‘pubescens Blkb., and this is a variable character in some species. I have hypothetically determined three of Obenberger’s species, namely, carteri, obscurata and crassa, from the material under examination, while two are unknown to me, smaragdifrons and nickerli. I believe the remaining six to be synonyms or varieties of recorded species. N. guérini Hope var. subtilis—Nothing in his description of this is incon- sistent with quite usual forms, included in the descriptions of Saunders (Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1868, p. 20) or of Fairmaire, and the name swbtilis is superfluous. N. indigacea Obenb.—The description of this clearly applies to a species that is moderately common around Sydney and the Blue Mountains, that I have long ago determined as cuprilatera Fairm., though the habitat of this is stated by its. author as King George Sound, W.A. There is nothing like it amongst the W.A. material before me. (5). Allowing for considerable variation in size, the two examples of N. livida Cart., in the Melbourne Museum are conspecific with N. anthaxioides Fairm. (as determined by C. O. Waterhouse and Blackburn) and my name should not be retained, except as a variety. The five other examples before me agree with Fairmaire’s dimensions, 4-6 mm. long. Both examples of livida are 8 mm. long. (8, 9, 10). I have already published the synonymy of N. dilataticollis Blkb. with Pseudanilara cupripes Macl. I now find from a specimen, compared with type, that N. nigricans Blkb., is identical with Ps. purpureicollis var. nigra Macl. N. pilosa Cart., is also clearly a Pseudanilara, distinct from P. cupripes in colour, clothing and sculpture and must be known as Pseudanilara pilosa Cart. ; There is considerable variability in colour and size. With regard to colour Fairmaire’s group I.b is defined by ‘‘Prothorax cupreo- aut cyaneo- aut viridi- marginatus”. But amongst these are species like pauperata Fairm., in which the “plus minusve”’ of his description is amply justified, since this common South Australian and Victorian species shows every variety from those in which this character is clear to others where only the faintest gleam is discernible. Again N. gracilis Macl., shows colour variation from “cupreo” to “viridi-marginatus” that is associated with its wide distribution from North Queensland to Sydney; and which Fairmaire stated of soror, the Sydney form, which cannot ‘be dis- tinguished from the type of gracilis from Gayndah, Q. The variation from metallic green to blue or violet is common in this genus as with Melobasis and Stigmodera. I did not sufficiently allow for this when describing N. sapphira, which name must be sunk, as below. In more than one species I have seen variations of size from 4 mm. to 7 mm. (in one case to 8 mm.) long. The following show the distribution of the species from examples examined: — guérini Hope.—N. S. Wales, S. Qld., and S. Aust. fortnumi Hope.—Vict., and S. Aust. gracilis Macl.—Sydney, N.S.W., to Cairns, N. Qld: viridiaurea Macl.—N. W. Aust. asperipennis Fairm.—S. Aust., a long series from Oodnadatta (Blackburn). BY H. J. CARTER. 281 thoracica Fairm.—s. Aust., W. Aust., and Western N. S. Wales (Bogan R.). discofliava Fairm.—Perth and Fremantle, W. Aust. cuprilatera Fairm.—N. S. Wales. anthazioides Fairm.—S. Aust. to W. Aust. pauperata Fairm.—Vict., and S. Aust., W. Aust., and Western N. S. Wales (Bogan R.). dichroa Fairm.—S. Aust.; and W. Aust. monochroma Fairm.—North Vict., and S.W. of New South Wales (Young). viridimicans Fairm.—W. Aust. (in Geraldton district, Mrs. G. A. Waterhouse found this in several instances inside an “everlasting” flower, Helichrysum sp.). coerulans Fairm.—N. S. Wales, Vict., and Qld. pubescens Blkb.—S. Aust. to W. Aust (1 ex. Qld.). fairmairei Blkb.—S. Aust. ornata Cart.—S. Qld. browni Cart.—Cue and Southern Cross, W. Aust. Of the rest the material is more scanty. Neocuris are not numerous in collections and are seldom found otherwise than in single examples, generally on flowers, especially of Hucalyptus and Leptospermum. The following are new species: Z NEOCURIS DODDI, n. sp. Ovate, head, pronotum and scutellum violaceous blue, pine yellow, with a narrow basal and sutural border shoulder spot. apices (widely) and apical half of lateral margins violet-blue; underside and appendages dark blue. _Head wide, impressed and lightly canaliculate on front, strongly and closely punctate. Prothorax widest at base, sides obliquely—scarcely arcuately narrowed to apex, apex arcuate, anterior angles (seen from above) a little advanced, base bisinuate, posterior angles subrectangular, an indistinct triangular impression at base; disc very nitid with sparse shallow punctures at middle, round, large, close punctures at sides. Scutelluwm small. Elytra as wide as pronotum at base, separately rounded and finely denticulate at apices, with deep triangular depression near shoulder; scalose-punctate, the punctures somewhat transverse, in places showing faint signs of a seriate arrangement; underside clearly punctate, clothed with decumbent silvery hair. Dim.: 5:5 x 2-5 mm. Hab.—S. Queensland; Chinchilla (Mr. A. P. Dodd). A single specimen, kindly given me by its captor, shows an affinity with the Western Australian species N. browni Cart., from which it differs by its con- colorous and nearly straight-sided pronotum, besides other colour distinctions. The deeply excavate subhumeral depression is a marked character. A second example has (since writing the above) been shown me by Mr. J. Armstrong from Bogan River, N.S.W., and a third example from Warra, S. Queensland, is in the National Museum. Type in Coll. Carter. N.B.—I find that I described N. browni as having the elytra finely punctate- striate, but (as also in the above species) the punctures only very vaguely show any seriate arrangement and are nowhere striated. NEOCURIS AENESCENS, Nl. SD. Oblong, moderately convex, dark bronze above, elytra tending to purple or coppery towards apex; head and antennae green or coppery, legs and underside purple-bronze; entirely glabrous and nitid. 282 SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, Head wider at eyes than apex of pronotum, front not impressed, slightly diverging behind; closely and evenly punctate. Prothorax: Apex and base bisinuate, sides nearly straight, very lightly narrowed from base to apex, densely (contizuously for the great part) covered with punctures larger and more shallow than those on head, the apical border metallic, like the head. EHlytra of same width as prothorax at base, shoulders with an elongate swelling, a light depres- sion inside this, sides a little sinuate, with a wide incurved bay behind shoulders, apices separately, obtusely rounded, their margins serrulate, surface irregularly scalose-punctate; underside lightly punctate. Dim.: 4 (—) mm. long. Hab.—N. S. Wales: Bogan River (Mr. J. Armstrong). A rather narrow, convex little species, without any tendency to metallic side margins to pronotum. Nearest to pauperata Fairm., but without a sign of frontal impression, and more convex than that species besides colour differences. Holotype in Coll. Carter. NEOCURIS VIOLACEA, nN. Sp. Elongate, oblong and depressed; above uniformly violaceous, clothed with short, rather dense, upright white hair; underside nearly black, femora and margins of abdominal segments violet, oral organs, antennae and tarsi castaneous; the apical segments of antennae pilose. Head, at eyes not as wide as apex of pronotum, with a short sulcus only at extreme vertex, dotted closely with very small punctures, each bearing a short upright hair. Eyes rather prominent, the frontal interspace diverging in front and behind them. Prothorax short and wide, apex nearly straight, lightly pro- duced at the depressed, obtuse anterior angles, base lightly bisinuate, posterior angles obtuse, sides well rounded, widest behind middle, thence subsinuate behind, and arcuately narrowed to the front; disc closely dotted with small piliferous punctures. Scutellum small, subcircular. Elytra wider than prothorax at base and about four times as long, sides subparallel (very little compressed in middle), separately rounded behind and minutely crenulate at hind margins; closely covered with small round punctures; underside with more distant and shallow punctures and bearing more sparse recumbent hairs. Dim.: 5 (+) mm. long. Hab.—N. S. Wales: Nambucca River (H. J. Carter). I took a single 9 example near Bowraville. It can only be confused with coerulans Fairm., and pubescens Blkb. In both of these the form is wider, the head concave, the elytra more convex and the whole surface much more coarsely punctate with longer hairs, and the antennae are metallic. It is in form some- what like a species that I have provisionally determined as obscurata Obenb. 3S wanting. Holotype in Coll. Carter. TRACHYS. I have before me 40 examples of the genus Trachys that belong to, at least, seven distinct species, allowing for some variation. These forty vary in size from 2 mm. long to slightly more than 3 mm. long. The chief distinctions lie in ground colour, presence and pattern of pubescent clothing, outline and, especially, the form of the head. In the last the anterior outline may be nearly straight, or deeply arcuately excised, with varying width. All have the sublateral carina on the elytra except 7. blackburni Kerr., of which a type example has been sent BY H. J. CARTER. 283 from the British Museum (Kerremans labelled all his examples of a new species “Lye a): Hight names have been published for Australian species, of which the earliest was T. australasiae Gestro in 1877. It is curious to read that both Van d. Poll and Macleay claim their respective species (frenchi—1887 and australis—1888) to be the first Australian species to be described, yet Gestro’s seems to be quite distinct from those later described in having its “prothorax vittis tribus’” in combination with the other characters mentioned. I have determined a single example from the South Australian Museum as 7. australasiae Gestro as being (a) the only specimen before me that can be fitted to Gestro’s description, (0) also taken at Somerset, C. York (C. T. McNamara), Gestro’s locality. Of the other seven names, I have examined types or examples that have been compared with types of five, viz. australis Macl., blackburni Kerr., frenchi V. d. Poll., nigra Macl., and socialis Lea, while I have hypothetically determined a unique from Somerset as pauperula Kerr., though this species is said to come from New South Wales. This determination, with a query, is preferable to describing as new a unique example that is at least very near to Kerremans’ species. I have, with less doubt, determined five examples (three from Somerset in the South Australian Museum and two, from Cape York and Cairns respectively, in the Macleay Museum) as TZ. albo-picta Kerr., a species described as from New Guinea but likely to occur on Cape York. Synonymy.—T. frenchi V. d. Poll. = 7. nigra Macl. = ? T. hackeri Obenb. This synonymy seems certain. An example of frenchi from Kuranda, Q. (compared with type by its author) has been sent me from the British Museum and is identical with the unique type of nigra in the Macleay Museum. Two other specimens in the Macleay Museum from Cairns are also conspecific, though of a rather brighter metallic ground colour. This character agrees with V. d. Poll’s description. It is probable that the darker surface of nigra, as also of the British Museum example of frenchi, is due to immersion in spirits. JT. hackeri Obenb., is vaguely described, the only reference to the anterior outline of head being (a@) “front between eyes rather strongly attenuate anteriorly” and (b) “without distinct median impression”. Interpreting the latter to mean that the anterior outline is nearly straight, I find this character true of only one of my seven species, namely, 7. frenchi—and the remainder of Obenberger’s description is in agreement with the example of V. d. Poll’s insect before me. The seven species may be tabulated as follows:— 1. Species having elytra without sublateral carina ................... blackburwi Werr. SOSCIES Inehvahaesr Ghiies, wyrida Goloikeicee Careline -soc0ancnaceousosoosenncudsscosaone 2 2. Head with front lightly arcuate, almost straight ................. frenchi V. d. Foll. Head with front more or less deeply, and arcuately excised .................... 3 Bo IAROMOUBIT WA WernaluAUS ONT ANESNES s56550cc0scuugaobcoouuoeus australasiae Gestro. IPIKGINGIDUAM, VG ANOWKG Oly AW TSTKCSNGS odacocacsucgnasuvugnaoduuseddooucbueonaoseuD 4 4. Ground colour of upper surface golden or brassy* ...............-..- australis Macl. Ground colour of upper surface purplish or bronze ..............--+-++-+22e20-:- 5 Ground colour of upper surface black or nearly so ................ ? albo-picta Kerr. He Size llareBeIr, INGAGCL MENETROWEIP cocoons ssamoncsdeoob0bcdn oo bedoe Rao edesaO"S socialis Lea. Size smaller, head wider and less deeply excised ......... pauperula Cart. (? Kerr.) * Four examples from Townsville (F. P. Dodd) in the British Museum collection are apparently only a colour variety (ground colour a darker bronze) of australis Macl., which I should hesitate to describe as distinct. + The punctures arranged in lines, on the elytra, are much larger than in the case of australis Macl., in which they are very fine; otherwise some examples of socialis are like a large australis. 284 SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, Tenebrionidae. ; Synonymy.—Leichenum seriehispidum Mars. = L. variegatum Klug. = Endothina squamosa Cart. s In my “Check-list of Australian Tenebrionidae” (Aust. Zool., 1926) I stated (p. 123) the possibility of Hndothina being congeneric with Leichenum. Mr. kK. G. Blair now confirms this, after an examination of specimens I sent him from Cairns. The geographical distribution of this sea-beach dweller is very remark- able, in Australia occurring, at least, from Sydney to Cairns; L. seriehispidum is from China and Japan, and L. variegatuwm was described from Madagascar. The name Hndothina thus drops out. ‘ ‘ MICROCRYPTICUS (PLATYDEMA) SCRIPTIPENNIS Fairm.—Four examples of this, taken by Mr. F. H. Taylor, at Townsville, Q., have been determined by Mr. K. G. Blair. The wide distribution of this insect is even more remarkable than that of Leichenum. The type is from HE. and W. Africa, while there are examples in the British Museum from India, Ceylon, Java, Borneo, Celebes, New Guinea, West Indies and Brazil. Saragus confirmatus Pase. = S. opacipennis Macl. Specimens of the latter, determined by me, have been compared with Pascoe’s type by Mr. Blair. In each of the above the first name takes precedence. NOTOCERASTES TRICORNIS, N. Sp. Oblong, opaque chocolate-brown, variegated by an adpressed clothing of paler colour, appendages more or less concolorous brown. Head with two small triangular horns at sides of clypeus, formed by a sub- vertical extension of antennal orbit, and a frontal horn transversely triangular between the eyes; eyes large and prominent, antennae stout, pilose, extending to base of prothorax when at rest; segments 1-2 cup-shaped, 1 wider than 2, 3-8 widely oval, 3 longer than 4, 9-11 much wider than preceding, forming a lcose club. Prothoraz: Apex vertically and horizontally sinuate, anterior angles wide and depressed, apical margin rising in middle towards two parallel crests and hollowed between these; base lightly sinuate, widest near front, here rather widely rounded, thence lightly narrowing to the dentate but obtuse hind angles; lateral margins irregularly crenate, rather widely concave within these; disc with surface uneven, clothed with a dense recumbent mat of coarse hair having a transverse tendency except at the two medial ridges near apex, where hairs are arranged longitudinally. Scutellwm transverse. Elytra wider than prothorax at base and about two and a half times as long; shoulders narrowly rounded and prominent; sides parallel, lateral margins only visible from above at apical third, here clearly serrulate; each with four lightly raised costae, the suture also a little raised; between each pair of costae two lines of foveate punctures (in places obscured by derm), the paler clothing occupying a wide basal area, a less wide fascia near apical declivity and irregular patches elsewhere. Underside and legs as in N. blackburni Cart. Dim.: 6 x 2-6 (approx.) mm. Hab.—Queensland National Park, MacPherson Range. I took a single ¢ example in January last by beating the dense foliage at the edge of the scrub. It is certainly conspecific with N. blackburni from which it obviously differs in (1) wider and more depressed form, (2) the three-horned head of g, (3) the costate elytra. The coarse, pilose derm is similar: but more variegated, the antennae are coarser and more strongly clavate, the eyes are larger and the pronotal surface more uneven. Mr. K. G. Blair, to whom I sent BY H. J. CARTER. 285 the insect for examination, now suggests the synonymy of Notocerastes with Phaennis; and the armature of the head of the above species certainly agrees with this suggestion—as also the antennal structure. The clothing of Phaennis is quite different, having the long upright hairs characteristic of Hctyche, whilst the excised hind part of the pronotum continues the likeness. For the present, therefore, I would retain these genera as separate. Holotype in Coll. Carter. ADELIUM ABNORME, 0. SDP. Widely oblong ovate; nitid black, tarsal clothing red with white hairs interspersed. Head finely rugose-punctate, clypeus rounded, not raised nor prominent in front of eyes, antennae not extending to base of prothorax; segments subconic, 3 about as long as 4-5 combined, 9-10 transverse, 11 pyriform, wider and longer than 10. Prothorax very transverse, apex and base about equally wide, apex arcuate- emarginate, anterior angles acute, base subtruncate, posterior angles rather squarely dentate, its points directed outward, forming an angle of about 80°; widest behind middle, sides widely rounded, arcuately converging in front, strongly sinuate before hind angle; disc coarsely, irregularly punctate, with close elongate punctures, having slightly rugose boundaries near middle and sides, elsewhere punctures round and contiguous; sculpture continuous to margins, without special foliation; medial channel clearly impressed throughout. JHlytra considerably wider than prothorax at hbase, widely oblong (5 x 4 mm.), humeri obtusely rounded, epipleural fold forming sharp ridge; sulcate, the ten sulci irregularly and sparsely punctate; intervals 1-5 convex, 6-8 sharply costate, all intervals strongly punctate; a few larger punctures within the sulci on sides of intervals. Prosternum coarsely punctate, abdomen sublaevigate, post-intercoxal process trun- cate; postcoxae with 1st segment longer than 4th. Dim.: 8 x 4 mm. Hab.—S. Queensland: Stanthorpe (Mr. E. Sutton). A single example given me by the above keen local naturalist, shows a small wide species readily determined by its combination of wide form, strongly dentate hind angles of prothorax, and the unusual sculpture of the elytra. This is uniformly sulecate, and devoid of any regular seriate punctures. A. striatwm Pasce. is the only species in which the sulci are entirely impunctate. A. violaceum Cart. has the seriate punctures small and inconspicuous, but is differently shaped and coloured. The black colour extending to the appendages—even to the tarsi, except the clothing—is also unusual. ; Holotype in Coll. Carter. ADELIUM SPINICOLLE, N. SD. Oval; chocolate-brown, subnitid, oral organs, antennae, tarsi and margins of pronotum reddish. Head rather coarsely and closely punctate, front depressed, labrum prominent, clypeus rounded, its sides widened and prominent (subangulate) in front of eyes, clypeal groove straight; antennae short, segment 3 not as long as 4-5 combined, 4-10 submoniliform, apical segments little widened, 11 oval. Prothoraz: Apex arcuate-emarginate, wider than base, its anterior angles sharply dentate and advanced; base lightly bisinuate, posterior angles triangularly dentate, forming an angle of about 75° pointing obliquely outward and backward; sides well rounded, widest at middle, extreme border widely crenate, with from 6 to 8 blunt 286 SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, spines limiting the crenations; foliate margins rather widely explanate; disc closely rugose-punctate, medial channel deeply impressed throughout. EHlytra considerably wider than prothorax at base, irregularly striate-foveate, the punctures in first four striae large and irregular, in the fifth and sixth forming large canecellate foveae; the first four intervals widely convex, the fifth more strongly raised than the preceding, the seventh, ninth and the margin forming sharp costae, converging and forming sharp ridges in humeral region. Prosternum with sparse, round punctures, metasternal epimera and epipleurae coarsely punctate; post-intercoxal process widely rounded, legs moderately long, tibiae straight, post- tarsi having first segment as long as fourth. Dim.: 10 x 4 mm. Hab.—Queensland National Park, MacPherson Range (H. J. Carter). I took a single example under a log on the edge of the rain forest. It is so distinct from its nearest ally as to suggest generic separation, but as this dis- tinction chiefly applies to the spinose-crenate border of the pronotum, it may, for the present, be included in this polymorphic genus. The brown colour may be due to immaturity, which is indicated by its rather soft tissues. The raised parts of surface are very nitid. Holotype in Coll. Carter. DYSTALICA ANGUSTA, Nl. SD. Oblong, subdepressed; sub-opaque black, antennae and tibiae piceous, tarsi reddish, upper surface and appendages clothed with short, bristly hair; under- side of tarsi pilose. Head granulose and punctate (basal area rugose-punctate), anterior regions granulose, eyes rather round; antennae extending nearly to base of prothorax, segment 3 as long as 4-5 combined, 4-7 subtriangular, 8-10 successively more transverse, 11 pyriform, nearly twice as long as 10. Pronotum nearly as long as wide, apex arcuate-emarginate, anterior angles acutely produced, base feebly bisinuate, sides evenly, moderately rounded, scarcely sinuate behind; posterior angles sharply rectangular; disc opaque, densely punctate and bristled, the latter giving a granular appearance and producing a fine fringe at margins, these not at all explanate. Scutellum semicircular. Hlytra subnitid, wider than prothorax at base, shoulders rather squarely rounded, sides subparallel in d, slightly obovate in 9; striate-punctate, the deep striae containing large round punctures, rather closely placed, intervals slightly raised, granulose (where abraded of clothing). Underside opaque, the whole surface closely pitted with large, deep punctures. IDiTpe® $5 S< ass) sanen, Hab.—Queensland National Park (Mr. R. Illidge). Another discovery of the veteran Queensland entomologist, who has kindly sent me a pair. It is a puzzling species to place generically, but its combination of bristly, coarsely punctured surface, somewhat rounded eyes, oblong form and pilose tarsi point to Dystalica rather than to Adelium, from which it also differs in the longer and less transverse pronotum. It is certainly not a Brycopia. Holotype and allotype in Coll. Carter. LEPTOGASTRUS WILSONI, Nn. sp. Elongate-ovate; dark purple-bronze, subnitid, upper surface moderately clothed with long upright dark hairs. Head coarsely punctate, eyes oval and rather prominent, antennae moniliform, segment 3 little longer than 4, 7-10 successively widening, 11 pyriform, much BY H. J. CARTER. 287 larger than 10. Prothorax: Apex subtruncate, base feebly sinuate, anterior angles subacute, as seen from above, but scarcely advanced; widest near middle, sides lightly rounded, narrowed but scarcely sinuate on basal half, posterior angles defined and subrectangular; base feebly sinuate; disc coarsely punctate, medial channel lightly impressed throughout. Scutellwm minute, scarcely visible. Hlytra wider than prothorax at base, shoulders rather widely rounded, sides subparallel for two-thirds of their length; striate-punctate, the striae deeply impressed, the seriate punctures large and close, intervals narrow, nearly flat, each with a row of large setiferous punctures placed more widely than the seriate punctures; underside subnitid, glabrous, moderately punctate. Dim.: 5 x 1:5 mm. Hab.—New South Wales; Albury (Mr. F. E. Wilson). A single example taken by this indefatigable collector is clearly distinct from its congeners by its combination of bronze colour, flat elytral intervals, and defined hind angles to the pronotum. Holotype in Coll. Wilson. PODAMARYGMUS, nov. gen. AmMarygminarum. Differs from Amarygmus in the abnormally elongate fore legs and their unusual tarsal clothing, the fore legs, including tarsi, when extended, being longer than the insect itself. The fore tarsi are much widened by a dense brush of long stout black hairs. These spring from the underside along the whole length of the segments, the hairs being slightly curled downwards at the tips. The mid and posterior legs as in Amarygmus, mandibles notched at apex. PODAMARYGMUS ALTERNATUS, Nl. SD. _ Ovate, convex, upper surface brilliantly metallic; head and pronotum versi- colorous; elytra with 1st, 3rd, 5th and 7th intervals purple, the 2nd, 4th, 6th and 8th golden green; underside and appendages black; mid and hind tarsi rufo-pilose. Head: Antennae as in typical Amarygmus, segment 1 stout, 2 short, 3 neariy as long as 4 and 5 combined, 8-11 enlarged. Eyes very close, separated by a narrow dissepiment—slightly wider in the 9 than in the ¢ and widening in front and hind part of eyes. Prothorax strongly transverse, apex subtruncate, base feebly bisinuate, sides arcuately narrowed from base to apex with a narrow border continuous along apex; disc with fine sparse punctures, sometimes with a trans- verse linear impression near base. Scutellum triangular, finely punctate. Elytra striate-punctate, the punctures sublatent in well impressed striae, intervals moderately convex, sublaevigate, a few minute punctures discoverable thereon, the second much narrower than the first or third, underside laevigate. Dim.: 6, 7x 4mm.; 9, 8-9 x 5 mm. Hab.—Malaya: Kuala Lumpur and Penang (Mr. A. M. Lea and party). Four examples (14, 39) were amongst a collection of Tenebrionidae sent by Mr. Lea for examination. Holotype and allotype in South Australian Museum. Cistelidae. ALEMEONIS RUFO-VITTIS, N. SD. ¢. Black; the mandibles, palpi, three basal segments of antennae, tibiae, tarsi (except the lamellae) and a sub-lateral vitta extending from shoulders to apex of K 288 SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, elytra (but not quite reaching extreme margin) castaneous; upper surface rather thickly clad with silvery upright hair, especially on apical half of elytra. Head closely and strongly punctate, eyes large and prominent, separated by a space of the diameter of one eye; antennae with segment 1 stout, 2 short, 3 long and subcylindric, 4-10 elongate triangular, of equal length but successively wider at apex, 11 at least as long as 10, finely lanceolate. Prothorax rather wider than head, and a little wider than long, apex and base truncate, sides parallel, anterior angles rounded off, posterior rectangular; disc evenly and rather closely punctate and pilose; medial line indicated by a depression terminating near base in a small fovea. Scutellum transverse, triangular, punctate. Hlytra considerably wider than prothorax, widest at shoulders, thence very lightly attenuated to a sharply acute apex; striate-punctate, the rather wide and deep striae containing punctures that crenulate the sides of the wide and lightly convex intervals; the latter each with an irregular row of unequally placed punctures; the castaneous colour of vitta irregularly spreading over the apical area. Underside less pilose than above; mid-tarsi lightly bowed, post-tibiae hollowed and excised near middle; post-tarsi with basal segment as long as the rest combined. Dim.: 10 x 2-5 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Ferntree Gully (F. E. Wilson). \ A single male specimen is readily distinguished from its nearest ally, A. paradoxrus Cart., by the castaneous vitta of the elytra, the pale tibiae and dark femora, the pale tarsi and black lamellae. I have not cared to remove it from the card on which it is gummed to examine the underside more closely. Type in Coll. Wilson. CHROMOMOEFA MAJOR, N. Sp. Head and pronotum piceous, elytra and underside red, the former somewhat obfuscate near apex, appendages red, antennae (partly) and knees sometimes infuscate; lamella on penultimate tarsi black; above and below finely pubescent. Head and pronotum with very fine, close, uniform punctures; eyes distant, not prominent, antennae moderately slender, segments subtriangular, 3 scarcely longer than 4, 4-10 subequal (or very slightly diminishing outwards), 11 shorter than 10. Prothorax nearly squarely cylindric—though appearing longer than wide—very slightly narrowed and rounded at the anterior angles—apex and base truncate; medial impression well marked at base, traceable throughout. Scutellum sub- quadrate. Hlytra wider than prothorax at base and four times as long, sides parallel for the greater part; striate-punctate, the punctures in striae not uniseriate but rather confusedly poly-punctate; intervals convex and rather finely punctate and, where not abraded, clothed with pale recumbent hair; underside more strongly pubescent and finely punctate; post-tarsi having first segment much shorter than the rest combined. Dim.: 13 x 3-5 mm. Hab.—New South Wales: Wahroonga and Bodalla (H. J. Carter). This species is not uncommon, but has been confused—at least by myself— with C. rufescens Bates. I have, however, a cotype of Bates’s species which shows clear distinction; rufescens being smaller (9-94 mm. long), with narrower antennae and uniseriate punctures in the elytral striae. It is separated from C. oculata Cart., by its narrower head and less prominent eyes and from @. picea Macl., by its convex elytral intervals. The black tarsal lamellae are characteristic. The two examples before me are females. Type in Coll. Carter. BY H. J. CARTER. 289 HoOMOTRYSIS RUFIPILIS, nN. sp. 4. Hlongate, subparallel, nitid black, pilose; palpi, apical part of antennae and tarsi reddish; whole surface rather thickly clad with upright red hair—this shorter on under surface. Head and pronotum closely, uniformly and strongly punctate, eyes large and prominent, separated by a space equal to half the diameter of one; antennae linear, segments 3-11 subequal, scarcely at all widened at their apices, 11 not wider than 10. Prothorax: Apex slightly produced in middle, base truncate; widest in front of middle, thence widely rounded anteriorly, slightly narrowed without sinuation posteriorly; hind angles subrectangular; a narrow medial impression on basal half and two small basal foveae. Hlytra considerably wider than prothorax at base; shoulders rather squarely rounded, sides parallel for the greater part; striate-punctate, the seriate punctures rather large and close, intervals lightly convex and strongly setiferous. Underside moderately punctate, the sternal area more strongly than the abdomen; fore tibiae dentate on inside near middle; subcircular forcipital sexual appendage apparent. Dim.: 10 x 3 (4+) mm. Hab.—n. Queensland: Watton (Mr. F. H. Taylor). A single ¢ recently sent me by Mr. Taylor can, I think, only be confused with H. nigricans Hope, in being comparatively small, black, nitid and hairy; but nigricans has the pronotum widest at base, with subacute hind angles, the elytra more oval, little wider than the prothorax at base, with a different sculpture and the protibiae of ¢ undentate. Holotype in:Coll. Carter. HYBRENIA ANGUSTICOLLIS, N. SDP. ®. Black, sub-nitid, glabrous, oral organs and labrum red; underside and legs reddish-brown, tarsal clothing red. Head unusually elongate, densely and finely punctate, eyes prominent, separated by about the width of half the diameter of one eye; front between eyes to vertex deeply sulcate; antennae elongate, segments lineate, 3 much longer than 4, 4-11 subequal. Prothoraz little wider than head, moderately convex, apex a little produced in middle, base subtruncate, widest in front of middle, anterior angles depressed and rounded, posterior rectangular; disc strongly and closely punctate, medial line rather widely and strongly impressed throughout; a transverse depres- sion near base. Hlytra much wider than prothorax, sides subparallel; striate- punctate, the deep striae containing close, subcancellate, rather small punctures, intervals impunctate, strongly but irregularly convex, the first three especially convex on basal half, sternal area coarsely, abdomen more finely but distinctly punctate, legs elongate. Dim.: 15 x 5 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Townsville (F. H. Taylor). A single female sent by Mr. Taylor, is an ally of H. angustata Macl., and H. subsulcata Macl., in its elongate, parallel form, but is distinguished from the former by its suleate and less nitid pronotum and the much finer punctures of the elytral series. From both it is distinguished by its sulcate head and the unusually narrow prothorax as compared with the elytra. Holotype in Coll. Carter. HYBRENIA YEPPOONENSIS, N. Sp. 9. Black, nitid, with short sparse pubescence; underside, femora, oral organs reddish, antennae brown. 290 SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA. Head and pronotum closely and strongly punctate, eyes large and prominent; separated by a distance of about the diameter of one eye; antennae having 3 longer than 4, thence to 10 subequal, each enlarged at apex, 11 narrowly lanceolate. Prothorax convex, apex and base truncate, sides parallel on basal half, rounded near apex, posterior angles slightly produced and subacute; disc evenly punctate, with two gentle depressions at base near angles. Elytra obovate, moderately convex, wider than prothorax at base, sides gradually widening to apical third; striate-punctate, the striae narrow and deep, containing close, small, rather elongate punctures; intervals nearly flat except near base, with large punctures rather closely placed, the interstitial punctures gradually smaller towards apex; third interval narrower than the rest. Sternal area strongly punctate, abdomen with light shallow punctures. Dim.: 14 x 5:2 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Yeppoon (H. J. Carter). I took four examples (all ?) in November, 1924. It is nearest in general appearance to H. vittata Pasec. var. concolor, but may be distinguished by its more convex pronotum and strongly punctate pronotum and elytra as also by its widely spaced eyes. 4 wanting. Holotype in Coll. Carter. THE AUSTRALASIAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS NEMOPALPUS (PSYCHODIDAE, DIPTERA). By CHARLES P. ALEXANDER, Massachusetts Agricultural College, Amherst, Massachusetts, U.S.A. (Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) (Two Text-figures. ) [Read 27th June, 1928.] The remarkably generalized group of Diptera that includes Nemopalpus Macquart has been represented hitherto in the Australasian Region only by Nemopalpus zelandiae Alexander, found in both islands of New Zealand. The discovery of an undescribed species of the same genus in New South Wales is thus a matter of great interest. The fly was included in collections of crane-flies sent to me by Mr. William Heron and was taken on the Dorrigo Plateau where the collector has made so many discoveries of unusual insects. I am greatly indebted to Mr. Heron for his kind interest in collecting specimens of Tipulidae and related groups. Historical. Tillyard (1926) says of Nemopalpus: “This genus, placed by some authors in Tanyderidae, unites that family with the Psychodidae, and is probably one of the oldest existing types of Diptera’. This concise statement of facts gives us a clear idea of the essentials of the case. The first species of Nemopalpus (spelled Nemapalpus in the original), serving as genotype, is N. flavus Macquart (1838a, 183860) from the Canary Islands. The fly appears to be a very rare one. Loew (1845) and Eaton (1904) evidently possessed additional material, while Becker (1908) who secured a specimen on La Palma, gave a detailed description, with figure. Dr. Elias Santos Abreu (in litt., June, 1924) tells me that during his long residence on the islands he has secured but a single badly preserved specimen, that continued search has revealed no further material, and that he is now inclined to believe that the species is extinct. In any case, the fly, like virtually all of its known relatives, must be held as being excessively rare. Meunier (1905) proposed the genus Palaeosycoraz for the Baltic Amber species, tertiariae Meunier. This genus is now placed in the synonymy of Nemopalpus, as is Nygmatodes Loew (1845). Edwards (1921) described a second species from the Baltic Amber as N. molophilinus. Alexander (1921) described the New Zealand species, N. zelandiae. Tonnoir (1922) summarized our knowledge of the group and. described a new species, N. pilipes, from Paraguay. Alexander (1920) proposed the second genus, Bruchomyia, for the single known species, B. argentina Alexander, of the Argentine. 292 AUSTRALASIAN SPECIES OF NEMOPALPUS, Systematic Arrangement of Nemopalpus and allies. The curiously annectant nature of Nemopalpus and Bruchomyia is best shown by the systematic positions assigned to the group by the various authors. Macquart (1838a, 1838b) placed the genus Nemopalpus in the Psychodidae. Haton (1904) placed it in the subfamily Phlebotominae, a course in which he was followed by Tonnoir (1922). Alexander (1920) proposed a new subfamily group, the Bruchomyinae, placing it in the Tanyderidae, in which course he was followed by Cole (1927). Edwards (1921) proposed the new group Nemopalpinae to receive Nemopalpus, Palaeosycorax and Bruchomyia. Crampton (1925) elevated the group to family rank, the Bruchomyidae, later (1926a) reducing it to subfamily rank, Bruchomyinae, in the Psychodidae. As above stated, these diverse assignments of Nemopalpus and allies indicate clearly the annectant character of the group. The Oligocene genus of Tanyderidae, Macrochile, is another type that must be placed far down in the series (Crampton, 19260) and there can be no reasonable doubt but that this genus and Nemopalpus have sprung from some common ancestral type in late Mesozoic times, the former leading to the remaining and higher Tanyderidae, the latter to the more specialized groups of Psychodidae. The actual relationship of Nemopalpus and Macrochile is much closer than is shown on paper and I know of no other case in the Nematocera where so close a relationship exists and yet requires the respective genera to be placed in different families of flies. The thoracic morphology of Nemopalpus and Bruchomyia has been described and figured by Crampton (1925, 1926a). The venation has been shown by Becker (1908), Edwards (1921), Alexander (1920, 1928), Tillyard (1926) and Tonnoir (1922). The general appearance of the flies of this subfamily is shown by Alexander (1920, 1928) and Tillyard (1926). The structure of the genitalia by Tonnoir (1922) and Cole (1927). Key to the Subfanvilies of Psychodidae. 1, Re Sexorere, IRE AION TOS lOAMG NES cocasocbovnoucoobdoood muon baboon b oO aDOOS 2 ReVOeyl SercuGie, IRS ANalil Woes lIAMONES soccoccccvcc0sc0od0cudc0sonde TRICHOMYINAE. Distal section of vein Cu, elongate, extending generally parallel to vein M,, cell M, at wing-margin approximately equal in width to cell M,; cell Cu sometimes very bo WC, QxGoeolinyss GE Ml, nosocodsccnbosourgb nocd de duduDOHsOOONNE PSYCHODINAE. Distal section of Cu, short to very reduced, longest in Bruchomyia; cell M, at wing- margin always wider than cell Cu, usually very wide ..................... 3 3. Rs pectinately four-branched, R, being captured by the upper fork of the sector; mouthparts of female elongate, formed for blood-sucking .... PHLEBOTOMINAE. Rs dichotomously four-branched, R,,, and R,,, being present; mouthparts normal, not fOnMed = tOrrMblOOG=SiuUClksine sw csicns vee ese ee ULM Ire BRUCHOMYINAE. In some species of Phlebotomus, such as P. signatipennis Newstead, cell R, is so reduced in size as to presage its total loss by fusion to the wing-margin of veins R, and R,. It is very curious and suggestive that in the Phlebotominae the anterior branch of the posterior fork of the primitively dichotomous sector should have been captured by the upper fork, quite as in three tribes of the Limoniine Tipulidae. Key to the Genera of the Bruchomyinae. 1. Antennae with 380 segments; distal section of vein Cu, long, approximately as long as EHS HD ASAIMSECLION a cusrsres ccna eyo eH Ne ee Oh aetna TC Bruchomyia Alexander. Antennae with 16 segments; distal section of vein Cu, short, curved strongly to the ATLA LS NAT BAN) here te Cs ecole ahs os RN ee eETaS Sea eee eee Nemopalpus Macquart. BY C. P. ALEXANDER. 293 Key to the Australasian Species of Nemopalpus. 1. General coloration of the body dark brown, with chiefly dark setae; thoracic pleura dark with a broad pale yellow dorsal stripe; wings without black setae; R, relatively short, less than one-half 15%, ZVlONNVS. (CSI) coo. a tukin 8 odawwiGlo o,oltnb 6 ola 6 Davo re Ly 675: OLOSey GED ICO DAG fo CREEG HOLT UCL CEDIA OL OR TE ae (New South Wales) N. australiensis, n. sp. veneral coloration of the body reddish fulvous, the setae concolorous; thoracic pleura uniformly dark fulvous; wings with scattered black setae on the basal half, including a larger area near the fork of M; R,,, elongate, nearly as long as R, AlonemGHigs 2) aeusemh ce hee (New Zealand, both islands) N. zelandiae Alexander. Text-figures 1, 2.—Wing-venation of Nemopalpus. 1. Nemopalpus australiensis, n. sp. 2. Nemopalpus zelandiae Alexander. NEMOPALPUS AUSTRALIENSIS, N. Sp. General coloration of mesonotum dark brown, the posterior sclerites more yellowish; pleura brownish-black with a dorsal pale stripe that widens out behind; wing greyish-yellow, densely clothed with long trichiae, the costal fringe more cinnamon-brown; R,,; only a little longer than R,,, and less than one-half the length of R, alone. Female.—Length about 3-5 mm.; wing, 4:2 mm. Rostrum brown, the palpi pale brown, not conspicuously elongated. Antennae yellow; flagellar segments elongate-cylindrical, with very long brownish-yellow verticils. Head brownish-yellow, darker medially, with very long and conspicuous setae, shorter and more yellowish in front, longer behind. Posterior pronotum light yellow. Mesonotum dark brown, with very abundant and conspicuous erect pale setae; posterior sclerites of mesonotum passing into testaceous yellow, this including the scutellum, lateral portions of the postnotal mediotergite, most of the pleurotergite, the metanotum, and the dorsal portion of the pteropleurite. Pleura brownish-black, the dorso-pleural region and the more dorsal pleurites pale yellow, as above described. Halteres dusky, the base of the stem pale yellow. Legs with the coxae and trochanters obscure yellow; remainder of legs pale brown, densely clothed with dark setae. Wings subhyaline 294 AUSTRALASIAN SPECIES OF NEMOPALPUS. to greyish-yellow, the veins with dense fringes of long trichiae, the costal fringe very dense, bright cinnamon-brown, the apical and posterior fringes more yellowish- brown. Venation (Fig. 1): Sc relatively short, Sc, apparently ending about opposite one-third the length of R,,,; R.,; relatively short, considerably less than one-half R, alone and only a little longer than R,,;,; cell M, short-petiolate; m-cu on M, just beyond its base. Veins R,,, and M,,. not incrassated as in zelandiae. Abdomen brownish-black, with long scattered yellow setae. Ovipositor consisting of two pale yellow, highly compressed, spatulate blades, with a dense brush of dusky setae immediately beneath their origin. Hab.—New South Wales. Holotype, 9, Brooklana, Eastern Dorrigo, altitude about 2,000 feet, along a stream, November 5, 1927 (Wm. Heron); in the author’s collection. ; Bibliography. ALPXANDER, C. P., 1920.—A new subfamily of Tanyderid flies (Diptera). An. Hut. Soc. America, 13, pp. 402-407, plate. ————,, 1921.—Two undescribed Tipuloidean flies from New Zealand. Insect. Inscit. Menst., 9, pp. 157-159. ———,, 1928.—Genera Insectorum, Fasc. Tanyderidae, figs. 1-3 (in press). BrckKer, THEO., 1908.—Dipteren der Kanarischen Inseln. WMitteil. Zool. Mus. Berlin, 4, pp. 71-72, pl. 2, fig. 28. Cour, F. R., 1927.—A study of the terminal abdominal structures of male Diptera (Two- winged Flies). Proc. California Acad. Sci. (4), 16, p. 409, figs. 2, 3. CRAMPTON, G. C., 1924.—Remarks on the phylogeny and interrelationships of Nematocerous Diptera. Psyche, 31, pp. 288-242, fig. —, 1925.—A phylogenetic study of the thoracic sclerites of the non-Tipuloid Nematocerous Diptera. Amn. Hnt. Soc. America, 18, pp. 49-74, 5 plates. ————, 1926a.—A phylogenetic study of the thoracic sclerites of the Psychodoid Diptera, with remarks on the interrelationships of the Nematocera. Ent. News, 37, pp. 33-39, 65-70, 2 plates. , 1926b.—The external anatomy of the primitive Tanyderid Dipteran, Macrochile spectrum Loew, preserved in Baltic Amber. Bull. Brooklyn Hnt. Soc., 21, pp. 1-14, 2 plates. HaTon, A. E., 1904.—New genera of European Psychodidae. Ent. Wo. Mag. (2), 15, p. 55. IDWARDS, EF. W., 1921.—A note on the subfamily Bruchomyiinae (Diptera Nematocera). Amn. Mag. Nat. Hist. (9), 7, pp. 437-439, fig. LoEW, HERMANN, 1845.—Dipterolog. Beitr., 1, p. 9. MAcQUART, J., 1838a.—In Webb and Berthelot, Histoire naturelle des files Canaries. Ent., Dipt., p. 101. , 1838b.—Diptéres exotiques, 1, pt. 1, pp. 81-82, pl. 12, fig. 1. MEUNIER, F., 1905.—WMiscell. Hnt., 13, p. 50. TILLYARD, R. J., 1926.—The insects of Australia and New Zealand, p. 350, figs. W30, W831. TONNOIR, A., 1922.—Notes sur le genre Nemopalpus (Dipt. Psychodidae) et description p d’une espece nouvelle. Ann. Soc. Hnt. Belgique, 62, pp. 125-136, plate. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, No. xiv. By J. R. MALLocH. (Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) [Read 27th June, 1928.] In connection with the presentation of this series of papers I may at this time be permitted to make a brief statement. The work was originally undertaken at the request of the late Dr. Eustace W. Ferguson, and was intended as an aid to him in his biological work in Australia. With the passage of time, however, the scope of the project was broadened to include practically all the Cyclorrhapha except the Syrphidae and some related families. The amount of time which I can devote to Australian Diptera is but small, being but a fraction of my leisure time and no portion of my official time is given to them. As my leisure time only can be devoted to systematic work on Diptera, and my studies on the latter include those on material from all over the world, and that time is further cut into by work upon Hemiptera and Hymenoptera, it can be seen that papers on Australian Diptera must form but a minor part of my output on systematic entomology, and that they can under the present circumstances not be monographic, and certainly not so thorough as I would like them to be. In addition to lack of time, one must also consider the paucity of material and lack of field knowledge of same. I have thus been compelled to adopt a quite conservative course and it is but seldom that I have ventured to present data upon families other than those I have had a good representation of, even when such data might be used in the classification of Australian forms, unless I considered it absolutely necessary that such data, usually previously unpublished, should be made available to Australian students of Diptera. One case in point is to be found in the remarks on the family Asilidae presented herein. The literature on Diptera is increasing very rapidly and many of the old works are both rare and expensive while some of the more important papers on the order appear in magazines or other publications that are not readily procurable in Australia. Consequently many students find it impossible to consult important papers dealing with the groups in which they are interested, and frequently lacking a knowledge of extralimital forms formulate schemes of classification which are not tenable when the world’s fauna is considered. This statement applies equally well, of course, to students similarly situated in any part of the world. My own knowledge of Diptera is not as extensive as I would have it, but my facilities for study of material, and the available library facilities, are greater than they are with most students so I have presumed to express in a few cases ideas that appear to me to be worth consideration in attempting to classify Australian flies. It is not to be assumed that the genera of many families are better known in South America, Africa, or the Orient, than they are in Australia, and though I L 296 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XiV, have before me a published paper which on the face of it presents a comparative list of the Brachycera of Australia and other faunal regions, I venture to suggest that the day is still far distant when such a presentation can Test upon anything but a very unstable basis. Family Asilidae. By far the greatest amount of work on Asilid genera has been done by Loew, and the present classification of the family rests largely upon his work which was published in the first two decades of the last half of the nineteenth century. Therefore, if one desires: to understand the system in use today, a knowledge of these earlier papers is imperative. But Loew’s knowledge of Diptera, extensive as it was, did not include an appreciation of many of the characters recently introduced for the differentiation of genera, and his distinctions are largely based upon the structure of the antennae, head, legs, and wings, with some attention being given to the chaetotaxy of the thorax, and the structure of the genital organs of both sexes. More recent workers have introduced other characters, and in America the major grouping is based upon the structure of the palpi, whether one-segmented or two-segmented, while just recently in Australia a suggestion has been made to place more importance upon the presence or absence of genital spines in the females than ever Loew cared to suggest. In fact this latter character has been refused recognition as of even subgeneric value by one recent worker in North America. Unquestionably all of these characters have a greater or less value as indices to relationships, but the use of any one of them exclusively as a distinctive criterion will not produce a perfect classification. I do not believe, of course, that an absolutely perfect classification is attainable, but the application of the standards referred to results in some incongruous assignments of genera which may possibly be avoided, I think, by accepting other characters as criteria for group purposes. The palpi are not invariably segmented in accordance with the assignments of Williston in North America, and I find that in many cases the student attempting to make use of the character would be in doubt whether to consider the raised base or pedicel of the palp as a segment or not. The aristae are so various that any attempt to segregate subfamilies on the basis of their structure is impossible because of the exceptions to any rule adopted. The venation of the wings is also quite variable, and any cell that may be accepted as a criterion may be-closed or open in any of the subfamilies. The presence of genital spines in the female is a character that may be associated with the method of oviposition of the species having them, but apart from being applicable to but one sex, and therefore not a commendable character to use for generic purposes unless a co-ordinated character is present in the male, adaptive characters due to habits or habitats are not reliable as indices to relationships, so many parallelisms occurring in all groups. It is noteworthy that in the Muscid genus Hylemyia Robineau-Desvoidy there are a few species which have similar genital spines and, so far as I Know, these species deposit their eggs at the bases of cereal plants, such as wheat. Those species have not been separated generically from the normal species of Hylemyia which lack genital spines, some of which species have similar egg-laying habits to those that possess spines. There are also other Muscid genera in which either all or a part of the species have genital spines in the female but nothing is known of their methods of oviposition. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 297 In connection with the subdivision of the old genus Asilus Linné, in which the genital spines have been used to some extent as distinguishing characters, it may be well to mention that American authors have disregarded Loew’s genera, though some European authors attempt to make use of them. One result of trying to segregate both European and American species of Asilus, sens. lat., in accord- ance with Loew’s concepts, is that a number of additional genera, or subgenera, would have to be erected for the reception of species which do not fall readily into any of the genera proposed by Loew. An examination of his work shows that originally he proposed the named segregates of Asilus as subgenera, but later, in his paper on African Diptera (1860), he presented a key to the group and gave them full generic rank. As one of the major groupings is based upon the genital structure of the females, and quite a few of the genera are distinguished merely by colour characters, the scheme can hardly commend itself to anyone who desires generic distinctions to consist of structural characters segregating groups and applicable to both sexes, which incidentally in my opinion is the only method to pursue if one intends to attain any degree of permanency for the system, and especially if one hopes that it will be generally adopted. Subfamily LAPHRIN AE. Genus Atromosta Macquart. This genus is listed as occurring in Australia and, judging from the characters given by Miss Ricardo in her key to the genera of Laphrinae, the species placed here by her ought to run very close to the genus if not actually belonging here. I have no species of the genus from Australia, but have one before me which can be placed in neither that genus nor Aphestia, though it most closely resembles the former, and in some respects also is very similar to Laphystia Lcew, or at least the North American species placed therein. I have carefully examined the geno- type of Atomosia and compared it with the Australian species and this comparison shows that though the two species are superficially similar there are a number of quite important characters in which they differ. The marginal (ambient) vein of wing is. discontinued at the apex of fourth branch of media in Atomosia, the margin from there to base of wing, including alula, lacking a distinct vein, the alula is quite poorly developed, and the second branch of radius connects with first well before apex of latter, the cell between the costa and first branch being rather wide to tip. In addition to these venational characters the metanotum has on each side a group of hairs mixed with bristles, and there are deep punctures on dorsum of thorax, part of pleura, and dorsum of abdomen. The Australian species agrees with Atomosia and Laphystia in having the prosternum all in one piece, uniformly chitinous, and connecting with the dorsal portion of the prothorax, forming thus a continuous collar, as distinguished from the structure of the prosternum in Deromyia Phillippi, and most other genera, in which there is a well defined central chitinous plate separated by a membranous, or submembranous, section of variable width on each side from the upper chitinous portions. This complete prosternum is present in all the genera of the subfamily Laphriinae seen by me, and might prove of more significance as a distinguishing character than the single venational character now in use for separating the subfamily from Dasypogoninae. The occurrence of the complete prosternum in a few genera now placed in the latter group may indicate that these are wrongly placed, but further investigation of the matter is desirable 298 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XiV, before a definite decision can be expected. The genera referred to are Lasiopogon Loew, Holcocephala Jaennicke, and Stichopogon Loew. The same character occurs in Leptogastrinae. It may appear strange that except for a very recent reference by Ricardo, the discontinuance of the marginal vein has not been noted in this group, as the continuous marginal or ambient vein is generally accepted as one of the out- standing group characters, but nevertheless it is lacking, as above noted, in Atomosia and in Cerotainia Schiner, or at least in the North American species placed in the genus, and in Laphystia Loew from the same region it is lacking on the alula, and from the anal angle to the apex of anal cell, and present on outer side of the cleft between the anal angle and alula. The alula in the last-mentioned species is quite large and a little pointed at outer lower angle as distinguished from the regularly rounded form in most genera. In the Australian species before me the ambient vein is complete, distinct even on alula, and the second branch of radius connects with costa rather than with first branch of radius, but I expect there may be some variation in this last character as is the case in Laphystia which it closely resembles in this respect. I note here that the genus Triclis Loew, or at least the American species placed in the genus, has the marginal vein complete and if this holds for the genotype it is distinct from Laphystia and not a synonym as stated by some authors. There are no metanotal hairs in Laphystia nor in the Australian species. The latter has the third antennal segment hardly longer than the first two combined, and the abdomen is not distinctly punctate; it can not be referred to Atomosia for the reasons stated above, and it can hardly be placed in Aphestia Schiner because of the much shorter antennae. Whether it belongs to some described genus or not I am unable to say at this time. Genus Nusa Walker. This genus has but recently been elucidated by Ricardo, and Dasythrix Loew has been sunk as a synonym of it by that author. It was erroneously recorded as occurring in Australia, the present distribution confining it to Africa and the Orient. In this genus we find a recurrence of the incomplete ambient vein as in the genera discussed under Atomosia, but the first and fourth posterior cells of wing are closed, and the apices of the branches of media are evanescent, being hardly traceable to margin of wing. None of the genera above referred to agrees with it in those characters. The species previously recorded as belonging here is now removed to Andrenosoma Rondani. Genus LApPHRIA Meigen. This genus is based upon a Huropean species which I do not have access to at present, and if published records are dependable it is cosmopolitan. Here again we find a complete prosternum, and in the North American species there are two groups, one with hairs on each side of the metanotum, and the other without hairs. I consider these groups are entitled at most to subgeneric distinction. All the large stout hairy species in North America usually placed in the genus Dasyllis Loew have the hairs present, as do most of the species of slender build which have the dorsum of abdomen densely haired, the smaller slender species which have fewer hairs on the dorsum of abdomen lack the hairs, as does also gilva Linné. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 299 Genus ANDRENOSOMA Rondani. This genus differs from the preceding one in having the first posterior cell of wing closed, and the male hypopygium with the forceps extending beyond the basal lateral arms as a rule, the forceps of Laphria species usually being more or less hidden between the lateral arms. One species from Mexico (formidolosa Walker) and another from British Guiana (pyrrhopyga Weidemann) evidently belong here. Both of these species have the metanotum haired on each side. The Australian species tectamus Walker is evidently congeneric though in it the metanotum is bare. These two groups are similar to the two in Laphria above referred to and may constitute distinct subgenera. Genus Matra Schiner. Another genus very similar to Laphria, but the face is less prominent below, and the metanotum is bare. I have seen the genotype and one or two other species that I consider ‘belong here, one from New Guinea in the United States National Museum being named aenea Fabricius by Coquillett. Subfamily DASYPOGONINAE. This subfamily is more extensive than Laphrinae and presents a more diverse habitus in its constituent genera. The usual method of separation is by means of the wing venation, the marginal cell being given as closed invariably in Laphrinae, and open, or but rarely closed, in Dasypogoninae. However, as already indicated, there are variations in the venation which preclude it being adopted as an invariable index to subfamily segregations. I do not purpose to go farther in defining the two groups than I have already gone in indicating the complete and incomplete prosterna as possible indices to the divisions, and below offer merely some notes on genera which either occur, or are reputed to occur, in Australia. The data presented are drawn from material in the United States National Museum collection of Australian species, which is not at all comprehensive, and from my own collection. Genus Deromyia Phillippi. This genus has been recorded from Australia. I have not seen an Australian species of the genus, but have before me the genotype, gracilis Phillippi, from Chile, lent me by the United States National Museum. A number of years ago Williston published the statement that Diogmites Loew is Synonymous with Deromyia, and Osten-Sacken objected to that opinion, asserting that they were at least entitled to subgeneric separation. However, most recent workers have accepted Williston’s dictum, and the North American species con- generic with Diogmites platyptera Loew have all been considered as belonging to Deromyia. It appears to me, after a careful examination of the genotypes, that Deromyia is not congeneric with Diogmites for the following reasons: The ocellar region has on it in Deromyia a few microscopic hairs only, while in Diogmites there are two very strong bristles; the fore tibial spur in Deromyia is blunt at apex and is opposed to a short ridge or wedge-shaped elevation on basal portion of the ventral surface of fore metatarsus, while in Diogmites the spur is sharp at tip and rests in a depression surrounded in part by a number of short stout spines; the basal two antennal segments in Deromyia are subequal in length, while in Diogmites the basal one is much shorter than the second, and in the former the 300 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, Xiv, third segment has a few fine hairs above at, or just beyond, middle while in Diogmites there are hairs on almost the entire basal half of upper surface. It is also worth noting that the apex of fourth posterior cell is truncate in Diogmites, with the vein closing it as long as the cross-vein above it, while in Deromyia the cell is pointed at apex, with the vein closing it at least twice as long as the cross-vein above it. From the above data one may be able to determine if the genus Deromyia occurs in Australia. Genus SAROPOGON Loew. I have not any species of this genus from Europe and lack the genotype, so my deductions are based upon an examination of North American species placed in the genus by previous workers. The American representatives of this genus are rather similar to Diogmites, differing essentially in having the fourth posterior cell almost invariably open, and in having from six to ten quite strong ocellar bristles. The part of ventral surface of basal segment of fore tarsus opposed to the tibial spine is usually raised, tuberculate, but not so much so as in Blepharepium Rondani. In the latter, which is closely allied to this genus and Diogmites, the fourth posterior cell is closed and the ocellar region has only short hairs, while the pulvilli are not more than half as long as the claws, being much shorter than in the other genera. The species of New Zealand Asilidae placed by Hutton in Saropogon that are in my collection now do not agree with the North American forms, having the ocellar region without well developed bristles, and the third antennal segment without hairs above on basal half. These hairs are possessed by all four American genera mentioned in this and the preceding discussion of species. Genus CHRYSOPOGON Roeder. This genus is readily distinguished from its relatives by the strong spine situated on a short elevation on each side of mesonotum just above base of wing. I have seen only albopunctatws Macquart. Genus Nrosaropocon Ricardo. I believe no genotype has been designated for this genus, so name princeps Macquart, the first included species. It is possible that with the accession of more material I may be able to present some more notes on this family at some future date. The foregoing may, however, prove of some small value to those interested in a group which presents interesting features both in taxonomy and biology. The succeeding part of this paper is devoted mainly to descriptions of new species and to completing work already partly done in previous papers of the series. It has been my intention to present synoptic treatments of all groups dealt with as the work progressed as I have no guarantee that I may be able to continue the series and consider that such synopses are essential to others should I cease now. Family Chloropidae. Subfamily BoraNosiinae. In part xiii of this series of papers I presented a key to the genera of this subfamily, but did not include a key to the species of the following genus. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 301 Genus PARAHIPPELATES Becker. Since the publication of my key to the species of Parahippelates in the first paper of this series (These ProckEDINGS, xlviii, 1923, 620) I have described some additional species of the genus in part iii (Id., xlix, 1924, 329-331) and in part vi (Id., 1, 1925, 96). It thus appears necessary to publish a new synopsis of the species, which is presented below. One of the species is made the basis of a new subgenus, and possibly it might be accorded full generic rank, but the segregation of a single species does not appear advisable at this time. Should more species occur in which the mesopieura is hairy, full generic status might be accorded the group, as the presence of mesopleural hairs is quite exceptional in this family. bo iat) -1 Key to the Species. Wing with a large well defined black mark either in centre or on costa .......... 2 Wing without a well defined black mark, at most with a brownish costal LODE EUSBVOS OWE, ais Ceo a ceeru ator or otr a oto Otol nin Crome OG Ionn CLOteae ri Gren oeey Encl RENO ono a cece Oat Ooo 3 Wing with a large black patch in middle, covering about one-third of its area; arista practically nude, not twice as long as third antennal segment; femora leroy Jolevoles ier, Bosman sdoondeguandoeda0bonooncdc ornatipennis Malloch Wing with a large black mark on costa which extends from a little beyond apex of first vein to just beyond apex of second, but not behind third vein on disc; arista. with short hairs, its length about three times that of third antennal SSYED GUE ONES hes ches ererol A ae Gahbten ceeoie byt cca volo CeTICE ROMS Ich Oi eaab RC RO ER CIENTS costomaculata Malloch ' Arista white, with dense short white hairs; femora and tibiae largely or entirely fuscous; halteres fuscous brown; wings hyaline, last section of fourth vein more than twice as long as preceding section; thorax dark fulvous, with distinct, _ WOME TOE CeMnse, WIG GChisgninAy 5os5cccccedoooodousnagsobUadogGbD albiseta Malloch AmIstarandoits hairs dark: snot winiters os Aeis cee siesta Sea eT auc a ae eed are eee teers 4 Costa of wing rather noticeably browned from apex of first vein to apex of fourth; dorsum of thorax fulvous yellow, very distinetly shining, with very faint dusting; third antennal segment largeiy brown; longest hairs on arista about AS OMe AS mds joasayl climes ssoscsncnconoonosdensobode brunneicosta Malloch Mines Siiwithout evident costal clouding ses.) see en eee lee eeeeeee ace: 5 Arista densely short haired, the longest hairs distinctly longer than its basal GUVATNIE HOT” i orrgu ernie cay ue een eee emn pose ios er aie ceivci-sh a hae Wat cae ee eRe ne Ren mat meen seme eevee 6 Arista almost bare, at most with pubescence which is not as long as its basal GUAMTE TCT” Wea seis see ice Se eh as oa) Gee eNO eee eine a eee: ds ene abou snes 7 Pleura and lateral margins of mesonotum rufous yellow, sternopleura black belew; mesonotum not shining, and without distinct vittae; outer cross-vein at almost WMS TS) OyyAn VSO ROMA AYN OF WN oocosacangdccaaneues duplicata Malloch Thorax black, propleura rufous yellow, mesonotum shining, distinctly vittate; outer cross-vein at a little more than its own length from apex of fifth vein ...... OO CRME INCL OtS Gl SSMS ES EEC OOo aE ET AREA eto CROC COPE RC TS Suet fect eles aequalis Becker ~ Hind tibial spur straight, very small and fine, and not nearly as long as tibial diameter, sometimes even indistinguishable ........................-2::- 8 Hind tibial spur curved, and stout, at least as long as tibial diameter ........ 10 Mesopleura with fine pale hairs on entire surface; disc of scutellum with fine dark hairs and some on sides below level of the bristles; upper extremity of outer ecross-vein nearer base of wing than lower, i.e. the outer cross-vein sloped towards base of wing from lower to upper extremity ....................---. payin Sp aee Reece oes aes Losubrsenus Rerraerneqinia, nov.) dasypleura, ns Sp: Mesopleura bare; scutellum with a few stiff hairs or setulae on disc; outer cross- vein sloped outward from lower to upper extremity ................... 5) eo) Legs testaceous yellow, only the apical two tarsal segments of mid and hind legs slightly darkened; fifth visible tergite and hypopygium of male yellow, the former with several rather. fine long black downwardly directed bristles on its sides; thorax with the dorsum evenly and densely coated with grey dust; a line drawn in continuation of outer cross-vein to costa would pass through Second eine elose tories amid Glenys ans feos ces leletel cher tebeiete ee forts) ores) aero seticauda, n. sp. 302 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, Xiv, Legs with at least the hind femora and tibiae largely fuscous; dorsum of thorax - glossy purplish-black, with quite faint dust centrally, most distinct on two narrow submedian vittae; a line drawn in continuation of outer cross-vein would strike costa close to, or even slightly beyond, apex of second vein Sls Tae arei tiki Ro eeu ONSITE Wee etaGes tec aiGla le are G) oaiarel ole Suess ehelG 0 eactoie ae Ee TOM Clam Mahoch: 10. Eye distinctly higher than long, and about three times as high as cheek; small species, about 2:75 mm. in length; all femora broadly infuscated at middle Tih gies Hen alee Vvn Geen sid eaectoencr: os, Oso Ona Ren nan NPE MAE RP ECT CEs eee ORE aa icare ACSC a suaks 5 Sud parva, n. sp. Eye distinctly longer than high, and not twice as high as cheek; larger species, THaKOVASY [easy Guy sgayrals whol Inked Sago emeninc oo coast ooMo os ooddas Hoodoo oad boo 11 11. Femora entirely tawny yellow, or very faintly darkened in middle .. nudiseta Becker Femora blackened except at apices and, very narrowly, at bases .. fuscipes Malloch N.B.—I believe that I have two additional species before me, one from Sydney, N.S.W., the other from Blue Mts., but there are only single specimens of each available, so I am leaving them aside pending the receipt of more material. PARAHIPPELATES SETICAUDA, N. Sp. Male and female.—Head bright lemon-yellow in male, duller yellow in female, frons above, including the upper portion of the triangle, and the occiput except its lower third, fuscous, and grey dusted, antennae and palpi yellow; aristae fuscous, basal two segments yellow; all hairs and bristles generally black in female, only those on frons black in male. Thorax black, slightly shining on dorsum, densely grey dusted, without dorsal vittae; a few pale hairs on mesosternum. Abdomen of male dark brown, with the apices narrowly, and incurved lateral portions of visible tergites 1 to 4 broadly, and all of tergite 5, yellow, in the female the tergites are dark brown, with narrow apical yellow margins. Legs yellow, paler in male, apices of tarsi slightly browned. Wings hyaline. Halteres yellow. Frons at vertex about one-half the head width, and about as wide as long, not noticeably narrowed in front, triangle extending about three-fourths of the way to anterior margin; eye about 1:25 times as high as long, vertical, and about three times as high as cheek, rather less in female; arista subnude. Thorax with the dorsocentral bristles quite well developed, the acrostichals very weak, and one bristle on anterior margin mesad of each humerus; pleura bare, even the sterno- pleural bristle normally lacking; basal scutellar bristles half as long as apical pair, the discal hairs weak. Fifth visible tergite of male with quite long down- wardly-directed black bristles on margin. Hind tibial spur indistinguishable. Ultimate section of fifth vein subequal to penultimate section of fourth. Length, 2°25-2-75 mm. Type, male, Sydney, N.S.W., 25.1.1925; allotype and four paratypes, same locality, 26.11.1924; one female, Warburton, Vict., 13.1.1924 (F. E. Wilson). The Sydney specimens were taken by Dr. HB. W. Ferguson. PARAHIPPELATES PARVA, Nl. SD. Female.—Head clay-yellow, frons brownish above, triangle fuscous and grey dusted, upper occiput coloured as triangle; third antennal segment brown above; palpi yellow; inner mouth margin not darkened. Thorax fuscous to black, dorsum slightly shining, evenly and rather densely grey dusted, the vittae very faintly indicated. Abdomen coloured as thorax, more evidently shining, and less dusted. Legs pale testaceous yellow, all femora broadly infuscated in middle; apical two tarsal segments of hind legs very slightly darker than basal three. Wings hyaline. Halteres yellow. Hairs on coxae, sternopleura, and part of fore femora, white, elsewhere dark. Frons at vertex more than half the head width, and wider than long, narrowed to anterior margin, triangle broad, extending beyond middle of frons; lateral BY J. R. MALLOCH. 30 ) setulae long; arista with distinct pubescence; eye about 1:25 times as high as long, and about three times as high as cheek. Thorax with the dorsocentrals weak except posterior pair, the acrostichals fine and short, sometimes one or two pairs rather long; scutellum with the basal bristles shorter than apical pair, and the two discal hairs weak. Hind tibial spur black, curved, close to apex, and about as long as the tibial diameter. Ultimate section of fifth vein subequal to penultimate section of fourth, the latter about one-third as long as its ultimate section. Length, 2°5-2°75 mm. Type, Sydney, N.S.W., 29.12.1923; paratypes, same locality, 29.1.1925, and 1.2.1925. The two species of which I am uncertain are closely related to the above, and are about the same length. PARAHIPPELATES (TERRAEREGINIA) DASYPLEURA, n. Subgen. et sp. This species is placed in a separate subgenus, of which it is the only known species, on the character of the finely haired mesopleura. The dorsocentral bristles are very short and fine except the posterior pair, the acrostichals are represented by microscopic hairs, the scutellum is thicker than in typical Parahippelates, has many microscopic hairs on the dise and on sides, and the basal bristles are placed higher than in the other group. The backward inclination of the outer cross-vein of wing is very pronounced. I do not cite any but the haired mesopleura as a subgeneric character. Female.—Head testaceous, anterior margin of frons more orange-yellow, upper portion of frons, including triangle, brownish-black, shining, distinctly grey dusted, anterior portion of frons, face, and cheeks anteriorly, yellowish-white dusted, posterior portion of cheeks and the occiput densely white dusted, centre of occiput above brownish-black; antennae and palpi orange-yellow, slightly white dusted; arista fuscous. Thorax fuscous, dorsum distinctly shining, slightly brownish-grey dusted and with three rather evident brown vittae; pleura densely greyish-white dusted, and white haired. Abdomen brown, slightly shining, apices of tergites yellowish, and grey dusted. Legs testaceous yellow, coxae greyish, fore pair white dusted, all pale haired; all femora broadly fuscous on middle, grey dusted, and mostly pale haired, fore and hind tibiae slightly browned centrally, all tarsi with all of fourth and fifth segments, and apex of third, fuscous. Wings clear, veins pale, yellow at bases. MHalteres pale yellow. Frons at vertex more than half the head width and almost twice as wide there as at anterior margin, triangle extending well beyond middle of frons, evanescent anteriorly. all bristles rather short and weak; eye about as long as high, diagonally placed; cheek pale haired, one-third of the eye height; vibrissae short and fine, yellow; third antennal segment orbicular; arista swollen at extreme base, from there to apex filiform, practically bare. Thorax with the bristles as in genus, but rather weak. Hind tibial spur short and straight, pale coloured; basal segment of all tarsi more than half as long as tibiae. Penultimate section of fourth vein about one and a half times as long as ultimate section of fifth. Length, 4 mm. Type, Macknade, Qld., 1918. 304 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XIiV, Family Lonchaeidae. This family is quite generally recognized by systematists now, but a few years ago it was considered as’ a subfamily of Sapromyzidae. In my opinion there are no structural similarities in: the two groups that justify their being placed in one family, as such concepts are entertained today in the Acalyptratae. In fact there are evidences of a closer approach to the Ortalidae than to the Sapromyzidae in certain structures of Lonchaeidae. At this time, however, we are primarily interested in discovering what species occur in Australia and not so much in solving the matter of group affinities. Until recently Lonchaea Fallen was the only genus accepted by systematists, with Haromyia Zetterstedt, Dasiops Rondani, and Teremyia Macquart considered as synonyms. A few years ago Bezzi undertook some work on African and Oriental forms, and in 1920 he erected two new subgenera, Lamprolonchaea and Carpolonchaea. There is also another named segregate, Acucula Townsend, erected as a genus for the reception of saltans Townsend, a Peruvian species. Bezzi attempted to link up certain structural characters of the adults with the food habits of the larvae in distinguishing the subgenera. Lonchaea he defined as containing “saprophagous species living in decaying vegetable matter or in excrement, and those apparently parasitic on various parts of vegetables’, the adults with “a bare or only microscopically pubescent arista, rather long antennae, which reach at least to the middle of face, and well developed chaetotaxy”. Dasyops Rondani, he considered, contained “the gallmaking species” in which the adults “have a bare arista, very short antennae, not reaching middle of face, and an inflated head, with less developed chaetotaxy”. The third group he considered in his first paper as containing “fruit inhabiting species, which have a more or less plumose arista (with the exception of aurea), very long antennae, reaching to or even extending below the mouth border, and a much developed chaetotaxy”. He subsequently removed aurea from this third group on the basis. of the bare arista. With reference to the larval habits I have this to state: Bezzi cast doubt on the record of Perris of predaceous habits in the larvae of Lonchaea, stating that he had no real observations to offer. I have, however, on several occasions reared L. polita Say in North America and find that the larvae readily feed upon larvae and puparia of other species, and even their own. This species lives under bark. There are also two species known to me which belong to Lonchaea in the strict sense, which have been reared from heads of thistles, and from the nest of a wood-boring bee. Also I consider it highly probable that many species which normally feed in the larval stages in excreta or decaying vegetable matter will be found to infest over-ripe or injured fruits and vegetables. Thus I am of the opinion that a careful investigation of the larval habits under diverse conditions will prove that there is very little specialization, and that there is no invariable relation between the larval feeding habits and the structure of the adults. There is practically no distinction between feeding upon decaying fruits and upon over-ripe or injured fruits, and it is difficult to decide in some cases whether the injury in which the larvae are found was caused primarily by them or by another insect, or some other agency. We find in some families species which feed in the larval stages upon dead insects and upon those which are only injured, and occasionally they occur upon perfectly sound specimens. A peculiar habit of the larvae of at least some of the species of this family is that of springing or leaping. I have found that this is accomplished by the larva BY J. R. MALLOCH. : 305 forming a circle while lying on its side, attaching the mouth hooks to the anal extremity, and on the exertion of muscular force releasing the hold, upon which the violent straightening of the body against the surface propels the larva through the air many times it own length, at times as far as four or five inches. I found also that this springing could be induced by placing the larva upon a dry surface, and that so long as the surface remained dry the specimen exhibited exceptional muscular reactions, either springing or rolling over. My interpretation of this reaction was that the dry surface being unsuitable to the: larva, causing a rapid drying out of the tissues, active springing or violent motion was resorted to in order more rapidly to locate a more favourable and damp situation. This impression was strengthened by the actions of the larvae when they were placed upon a damp surface, as they uniformly resumed the normal crawling motions of related forms. I have found that there is a similar reaction produced in larvae of many Cecidomyiidae under the same circumstances, but in the latter there is a structure, known sometimes as the “breast-bone’’, which is utilized in propulsion. Below I present a synopsis of the Australian species of Lonchaea, sens. lat., available to me, and records of the occurrence of the species. Key to the species of Lonchaea. 1. Frons with large irregular pits on practically the entire surface; face with a broad central carina which is slightly sulcate above, and on each side with a distinct antennal fovea; arista bare; bright metallic green species; legs black, basal segment of all tarsi except the tip yellow ................... rugosifrons Bezzi Frons entirely without large pits, sometimes with minute punctures .............. 2 Face with a broad well developed central carina which is distinctly suleate in centre above, and on each side with a broad antennal fovea; arista bare; antennae not extending to mouth margin, third segment about two and a half times as long as wide; in colour similar to rwgosifrons ..............+++++0-+ aurea Macquart Face almost flat, at least without well defined antennal fovea; antennae extending to, or below, mouth margin, third segment more than three times as long as wide; bo colour black, with or without a blue tinge; tarsi black or brownish .......... 3 BEES duUamaeawhitevor yellows the fringes paler ye se. se oes cieceua se eieicocieereieueyeiclcnena orercne 4 SOMAVINEIE [Heo Ge iTISCOWE, Wold simlnSses GEV So5cccoeosccusvucusdousasccuboundoS 7 4. Arista with short pubescence, the longest hairs not nearly as long as its basal diameter; species with a distinct blue tinge, especially on abdomen ............ Bee Aro ay CRC HR EET OAORG: Odin te CLO COELRG OCC OOPS CROMER RO RCC CHEGH [a Etro Sictaitio Gira ied choreoides Bezzi Arista with short hairs, the longest about half as long as width of third antennal SCRMIVE MEY s seataeet settee stented man ctr ars eictectlae Syst cs sal cue lc ipst foliage mem eae ees CRA soc siyaselmyaide Pectertal oy rare au erro ators D 5. Tarsi with at least the basal segment yellowish-brown, and quite evidently paler than tibiae; female ovipositor much broader than usual, distinctly wider than third antennal segment except at apex; scutellum bare, or with at most one or two microscopic hairs in addition to the usual four bristles; fifth tergite of abdomen of male not excised at apex .................. Be Aad a yee RNG Mebane Mts on aS hilli, n. sp. Tarsi black, not paler than tibiae; female ovipositor slender, not as wide as third antennal segment on an apical section as long as that segment; scutellum with some hairs on sides and at apex, in addition to the four bristles ............. 6 6. Fifth tergite of male abdomen elongate, more than twice as long as fourth, tapered to apex, and with a deep central notch at tip, the lateral apical prominences more densely setulose than usual ................ 0002 eee ee aee excisa Kertesz Fifth abdominal tergite of male abdomen broad, not more than twice as long as fourth and without any central notch at tip; usually in the same sex there is a long yellow hair-like penis projecting straight backward beyond apex of abdomen 612) ©-C OSL OR DIENER CHOPS ORO ONCC eNO ecto. ACRE NCR ae aE MERE ou earn rietioenarieic hats hae Cie filifera Bezzi 7. Scutellum, when viewed from behind, with quite dense brownish dusting; hind femur with a series of anteroventral bristles, most of those on apical half about as long as diameter of femur; scutellum with many setulose hairs apically ....... Beate BOO CIO OTE. OOr SOOO BS OROREU CH aCe LORD TO REED EE NTO TINS MORES TeV eIS eee ro che Dera Sua RO aeicES citricola Bezzi Scutellum, when seen from behind, without any dusting; hind femur without well developed anteroventral bristles; scutellum with few hairs apically .......... 8 306 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, Xiv, 8. One of the bristles in the series along lower margin of cheek at least twice as long as ATEN? Ge WE OUNEES s5ccc5 encores o0cg00FD oF G0GG Gar DSOnE DODO DC CODHAOOOD species 1 None of the bristles in the series along lower margin of cheek conspicuously elongated species 2 LONCHAEA RUGOSIFRONS Bezzi. This species is readily distinguished from its allies by the coarsely pitted frons. There is a North American species, vibrissata Malloch, which has the frons similarly pitted, but it has a strong outstanding genal bristle, and is black in colour. E Described from New South Wales, South Australia, and Victoria. I have it from Como, N.S.W., swept from flowers (H. Petersen). LONCHAEA AUREA Macquart. Bezzi records this widely distributed species from Eidsvold, Qld.; I have it from Townsville, Qld. LONCHAEA CHOREOIDES Bezzi. Originally described from Sydney, N.S.W.; I have two males from Como, N.S.W., swept from flowers (H. Petersen). These specimens were in the same lot in which I discovered the type specimen of Pachyneres australis Malloch. LONCHAEA HILLI, nN. Sp. Male and female.—Glossy black, with a pronounced blue tinge on dorsum of thorax and abdomen, most pronounced in the female. Frons shining black, upper orbits blue-black, glossy; antennae and palpi black. Legs black, tarsi brownish, the basal segment palest, but not conspicuously so. Wings hyaline, veins brown, paler basally. Squamae and their entire fringes yellowish-white. Knobs of halteres black. ; Frons of male at vertex about twice as wide as third antennal segment, a little narrowed anteriorly, inner vertical, ocellar, and the pair of orbital bristles rather long, outer vertical pair shorter than inner; surface with rather sparse hairs, those on central front portion longest; lunule haired; frons of female about one-third broader than that of male; antennae extending a little below mouth margin, third segment about three and a half times as long as wide; longest hairs on arista about half as long as wide; cheek not higher than width of third antennal segment, with rather short even marginal hairs. Thorax with two pairs of postsutural dorsocentrals, one pair of prescutellar acrostichals, no hairs adjacent to stigmatal bristle, the pteropleura bare, and the scutellum slightly dusted on disc, but with no fine hairs. Hypopygium of male small, fifth tergite tapered to apex, without an apical notch; ovipositor of female fully as wide as third antennal segment, flat, and rather abruptly pointed and bare at apex. Apices of auxiliary and first veins very close together; first posterior cell slightly widened at apex; inner cross-vein a little proximad of middle of discal cell. Length, 3 mm. Type, female, and allotype, Darwin, N.A., taken in copula (G. F. Hill). LONCHAEA EXCISA Kertesz. I have before me one male of this species from Brisbane, Qld. (Dr. Turner). The species is readily distinguished by the long, rather slender, tapered, and excised apical abdominal segment in the male sex. It occurs throughout the Malay Archipelago, but has not heretofore been recorded from Australia. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 307 LCNCHAEA FILIFERA Bezzi. I identify as this species a number of specimens which are glossy black in colour, with yellowish squamae and fringes, slightly grey dusted scutellum, and in which the males have a long slender hair-like yellow penis which is usually exserted beyond apex of abdomen, often almost as far as the length of last tergite. The species was originally described from the Philippine Islands and has not been recorded from elsewhere up to the present time. I have a number of specimens from Cairns, N. Qld., and one pair from Palm Island, Qld. (F. H. Taylor). LONCHAEA species 1 and 2. I believe one or other of these species was listed as citricola Bezzi by Bezzi, but neither in my opinion may be identified with the Philippine species. I hope to revert to this matter later. LONCHAEA CITRICOLA Bezzi. I have before me two specimens from the Federated Malay States which I think belong to this species, but have none from Australia which correspond with them. Family Sepsidae. I have recently received a paper by Dr. O. Duda in which he presents a monographic study of this family. This paper bears on the front page the date 1925, and on page 153 the notation “Erschienen Dezember 1925”. The actual date of publication is of importance, as my paper dealing with the Australian Sepsidae appeared on the fifteenth of the same month, 1925 (These PRocEEDINGS, p. 311), and the decision as to the priority of Awustralosepsis Malloch and Saltelliseps Duda depends upon the day of issue apparently, though the dates of publication appearing upon many continental European magazines since 1914 are notoriously unreliable. In connection with Duda’s paper it may be pertinent to note that the genus Formicosepsis de Meijere does not belong to Sepsidae. Genus LASIONEMOPODA Duda. In my paper above referred to, I suggested the possibility of segregating Sepsis hirsuta de Meijere from the others contained in my concept of Sepsis. My suggestion was that the species might be considered as a distinct subgenus, but Duda has gone farther than this and erected the above genus with hirsuta as genotype and sole species. The characters of the genus are as listed in my paper, the haired frons being the outstanding feature mentioned by Duda. Genus AUSTRALOSEPSIS Malloch. As already indicated there is some question as to whether this name has priority over Saltelliseps Duda. AUSTRALOSEPSIS FULVESCENS Malloch. This species is apparently close to, possibly even the same as, niveipennis Becker var. robusta Duda described briefly in the paper by Duda above referred to. Typical niveipennis occurs in Africa and South-Eastern Asia, variety robusta 308 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XivV, in Formosa. Only a comparison of material from the different regions will determine the status of the species, though a wide distribution is to be expected in species which are scavengers in the larval stages as this undoubtedly is. Genus PoDANEMA Nov. This genus belongs to Duda’s group Nemopodinae which latter, despite the evident intent of Duda as indicated by the name, is not entitled to consideration as a subfamily. The new genus is distinguished from related forms in Duda’s paper by the projecting lower margin of face, a quite exceptional character in Sepsidae, the presence of one pair of orbital bristles, the short stout ocellars, postverticals, and inner verticals. The outer verticals listed as “Po” by Duda are lacking. In most characters the genus resembles Nemopoda Robineau-Desvoidy, but the outer verticals are present in the latter. From Pseudonemopoda Duda it differs in having quite a strong pair of orbital bristles, and in some other characters. Genotype, the following species. PopANEMA ATRATA, Nl. SD. Female.—Black, slightly shining. Frons slightly brownish in front, face and antennae brownish-yellow, with greyish dust. Thorax entirely and quite densely dusted, brown on mesonotum except the sides, the latter and pleura pale grey dusted. Abdomen more evidently shining than thorax, with grey dusting, the apex of first complete tergite with a broad fascia of silvery white dust, most conspicuous when seen from behind. Legs black, trochanters rufous. Wings hyaline, narrowly black along costa to apex of auxiliary vein. MHalteres black. Frons at posterior ocelli about one-half the head width, and about as wide as long, slightly narrowed to anterior margin, surface with some faint longitudinal striae, orbits with dense white pile along anterior portions; postvertical bristles longer than any of the others, the verticals, ocellars, and orbitals, about equal in length; face slightly produced from upper to lower margin, with a depression on each side in which the antennae lie; vibrissal angle with two bristles and some much shorter hairs; third antennal segment about four times as long as second, tapered to apex; arista not much longer than antenna, bare; palpi very small but evident, with one or two apical hairs. Thorax with the following bristles: one humeral, two noto-pleurals, one supra-alar, one post-alar, one pair of dorsocentrals, one mesopleural, and two scutellars; the dorsal hairs almost indis- tinguishable. Tergites without outstanding bristles. Legs slender, fore coxae with a few apical bristles; prosternum with fine hairs; fore femur with a rather closely placed series of short spines on apical half of anteroventral and postero- yentral surfaces, and no processes; fore tibia slightly thickened apically; fore tarsus broadened from before apex of basal segment to tip of fifth; mid femur with a depression near middle above; mid tibia with one or two posterodorsal and about seven posterior bristles, all short; hind femur with a number of bristles along anterodorsal surface; hind tibia with three or four very short anterodorsal bristles. Fourth vein bent down basally so that the basal cell is wider than discal for some distance at base of latter; first posterior cell not twice as wide at apex as at base, owing to the forward slope of apical section of fourth vein; sixth vein not extending to margin of wing. Length, 5-6 mm. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 309 Type and two paratypes, Townsville, Qld. (F. H. Taylor). The genus is distinguished from Sepsis by the presence of but one pair of dorsocentral bristles, and a mesopleural bristle. To this genus also belongs viduata Thomson, but it has no dark basal streak on costa, and the bristles are shorter on thorax and head, the humeral almost indistinguishable, and ocellars minute. Family Piophilidae. I have previously recorded the genus Piophila Fallen, with two species, as occurring in Australia. Below I am adding a new genus of the family. Genus CHAETOPIOPHILA Nov. This genus has the same wing venation as Piophila, the costa and first vein being fused from just beyond apex of the auxiliary vein and presenting the appearance of a thickened costal vein which gradually tapers apically, the inner cross-vein is unusually short, and the sixth vein is obsolete at apex. The frons has a pair of quite prominent setulose hairs, or fine bristles, near anterior margin which are about equally distant from each other and eyes, and there are two orbitals on each side, the anterior one very short. Thorax with 1 + 38 pairs of fine dorsocentrals, one pair of long prescutellar acrostichals, two bristles on each humerus, one incurved, the other backwardly curved, and the presutural bristle large; mesopleura haired, without bristles; sternopleura with one bristle. Ovipositor chitinous, lancet-like. Genotype, the following species. CHAETOPIOPHILA HYALIPENNIS, Nn. Sp. Female——Fulvous testaceous, shining. A large mark over ocellar region and a subtriangular mark at each upper angle of frons which extends down on occiput, black; third antennal segment and aristae, and palpi, except their bases, black. Dorsum of thorax in type specimen with broad fuscous suffusion, indistinctly vittate, possibly in some specimens distinctly vittate. Abdomen brown, paler at base. Legs fulvous testaceous, the femora darkened. Wings hyaline. Halteres yellow. Frons at vertex fully one-half the head width, narrowed in front, all vertical bristles and the ocellar pair long, the postverticals distinctly divergent, ocellars a little behind level of anterior ocellus; antennae short and broad; frons slightly projecting in profile; face slightly receding below; cheek at posterior margin about as high as eye, the latter a little longer than high; vibrissae long. Thorax with long dorsal hairs which are almost as long as anterior dorsocentrals; disc ot scutellum haired, basal bristles about half as long as the long apical pair. Legs normal, no preapical bristle evident on tibiae. Wings-rather narrow, inner cross-vein close to middle of discal cell. Length 2 mm. Type, Sydney, N.S.W., 14.4.1925. The genus Mycetaulus Loew is not known to occur in Australia. It has only two pairs of dorsocentral bristles, and lacks the pair of long setulae on anterior margin of frons. The genotype has also but one humeral bristle, which is back- wardly directed, and the acrostichals and discal scutellar hairs are lacking. LEPIDODENDROID REMAINS FROM YALWAL, N.S.W. By A. B. WALkom, D.Sc. (Plate xxiv.) [Read 27th June, 1928.] Some very interesting Lepidodendroid stems were obtained many years ago from the neighbourhood of Yalwal, N.S.W., and I have to thank Mr. W. S. Dun, Palaeontologist to the Geological Survey of N.S.W., for the opportunity of describing them. The material was examined at Cambridge during the tenure of a Fellowship in Science granted by the International Education Board. Yalwal is about 90 miles south of Sydney and 18 miles from the coast, and on account of the occurrence of gold in the neighbourhood, the district has from time to time been examined geologically (Andrews, 1901). The Rev. W. B. Clarke in his reports on Southern Gold-fields (see Andrews, 1901) divided the sedimentary rocks into two series: the lower, composed of quartzites, slates, etc., including the gold-bearing rocks, he placed as Silurian, and the upper, in which he recorded the occurrence of Lepidodendron and Sigillaria, he referred to the Carboniferous. The Sigillaria, however, has not been dis- covered since and the probability is suggested below that Clarke’s record was based on a specimen (possibly it was the one herein described) which I have referred to Protolepidodendron. The Lepidodendra obtained from the series which Mr. Clarke placed in the Carboniferous, were briefly described by W. S. Dun (in Andrews, 1901, p. 16) as follows: “A most interesting small-patterned Lepidodendron. The leaf bases vary in size from 3 mm. x 2:25 mm. to 4 mm. x 3 mm. Several specimens, however, show a more elongate form—7 mm. x 4 mm. The leaf cushion is well raised, about one-third along axis from the apex of the leaf base. The print of the vascular bundle is well marked. No traces of parichnos or ligule are preserved. There appears to be no doubt that this species is new. The smaller leaf bases have much the appearance of some forms described as Ulodendron (without the large rounded scars). There is an apparent resemblance to forms of L. Sternbergi and L. Heeri Nathorst from Spitzbergen”. The smaller-patterned form first mentioned by Dun would be the species described below as (?) Lepidodendron Clarkei, n. sp., and the larger form with leaf bases 7 mm. x 4 mm. is probably what is here described as Protolepidodendron yalwalense. The rocks in which these fossils occur were assigned by Andrews (1901, p. 16) to the Devonian on account of their lithological characters and their mode of occurrence. Of course, Clarke’s determination of some of them as Carboniferous was sound if his record of Sigillaria and Lepidodendron had been correct. The occurrence of species of Protolepidodendron supports the determination of the age of the rocks as Devonian. Protolepidodendron primaevum, to which the two Yalwal species show close resemblance, occurs in the Upper Devonian BY A. B. WALKOM. oe of New York, and Lepidodendron karakubense, another very closely allied species, which may perhaps belong to Protolepidodendron, comes from the Upper Devonian of the Donetz Basin. The Yalwal species form an interesting addition to our knowledge of Devonian floras in New South Wales, and it would be of considerable interest to know the time relation of the rocks in which they were found, to those in which L. australe occurs. : The few specimens here described indicate an Upper Devonian age for the rocks at Yalwal in which they occur. PROTOLEPIDODENDRON LINEARE, nl. sp. Plate xxiv, figs. 1, 2. The specimen here described (Geol. Survey of N.S.W., No. 12474) is part of the collection made at Yalwal and referred to in the report on the Yalwal Gold- field by E. C. Andrews (1901, p. 16). It bears such a close resemblance to some figures of Protolepidodendron primaevum (White, 1907) that little hesitation is felt in referring it to that genus. The specimen consists of portion of “the impression of a stem, some 9 cm. wide, in which the leaf cushions are arranged in distinct vertical series separated from one another by straight vertical grooves. The leaf cushions are narrow and elongated vertically, about 5 mm. long by 1-5 mm. wide, and the vertical grooves separating them are about 2 mm. apart; the cushions are not separated from one another vertically by groove or ridge, but merge gradually into the adjacent ones above and below. In addition to the pronounced vertical series of leaf cushions there is also a definite spiral arrangement, the lines of the spiral making an angle of about 55° with the horizontal. The leaf cushions are noticeably raised and are somewhat fusiform in shape, the greatest width being rather near the top; many of them show a median vertical ridge terminating upwards in a circular or oval area which is probably the leaf scar. It seems not unlikely that the narrow vertical ridge may represent the position of the vascular strand, made noticeable by removal of some of the sur- face tissue. No trace of the parichnos is to be seen, but in the *centre of the leaf scar there is occasionally a small single scar which probably represents the leaf trace. The most distinctive features of this fossil are the arrangement of the leaf cushions on series of vertical ridges separated by straight grooves and the absence of any distinct horizontal line of demarcation between adjacent cushions. In both respects it shows remarkably close similarity to some of White’s figures of P. primaevum from the Upper Devonian of New York (White, 1907, especially Plates 9 and 10). The regular vertical arrangement of the leaf cushions is a character in which it resembles some types of Sigillaria, whilst the -elongate- rhomboid or fusiform shape of the leaf cushion shows greater resemblance to Lepidodendron. In Protolepidodendron primaevum the cushions are somewhat larger than in my specimen (being both longer and wider but having similar general proportions), but in view of the wide geographical separation and the uncertainty of the exact horizon of the New South Wales specimen, as well as the much more complete available knowledge of P. primaevum, it is not felt that the Yalwal specimen should be referred to that species. Our specimen is quite distinct from Archaeosigillaria Vanuxemi (Géppert) which Kidston (1899-1900, p. 38) transferred from Lycopodites to a new genus, M 312 LEPIDODENDROID REMAINS FROM YALWAL, N.S.W., Archaeosigillaria, which, as White (1907, 339) pointed out, is probably synonymous with Protolepidodendron. In A. Vanuzemi the leaf scars are “contiguous, broadly fusiform on younger branches, hexagonal on older stems, having a single vascular cicatrice” (Kidston, 1899-1900, p. 38). The American specimens come from the Upper Devonian (Chemung Group) of New York, and British examples from the lower beds of the Mountain Limestone of Westmorland, probably of the same age as part of the Calciferous Sandstone of Scotland. Kidston’s figures (1885) of A. Vanuzxemi show the Lepidodendroid type of cushion only on young branches, while on branches which are older, but whose diameter is still comparatively small, the cushions are hexagonal as in Sigillaria. It is not known whether older portions of the stem from Yalwal would bear hexagonal leaf cushions, but in view of the similarity of arrangement of the cushions in general to that in Sigillaria it seems more likely that the stem here described, which would have a diameter of more than 8 ecm., represents the older Sigillarioid portion and that the younger portions of the same stem would bear cushions more resembling Lepidodendron. The Rev. W. B. Clarke recorded the presence of Lepidodendron and Sigillaria in the beds from which the specimen came, and Andrews (1901, p. 16) states that “the Sigillaria mentioned by the Rev. W. B. Clarke has not been discovered since’; it seems more than probable that Clarke’s record of Sigillaria was based on a specimen similar to that described above. PROTOLEPIDODENDRON YALWALENSE, n. sp. Plate xxiv, fig. 4. Two specimens (Geol. Survey of N.S.W., Nos. 12475-6) from Yalwal represent a species quite distinct in appearance and in the character of the leaf cushions from Protolepidodendron lineare described above, but the two species may ultimately prove to represent different parts of the stem of a single species. The leaf cushions are Lepidodendroid in general appearance, vertically elongate-rhomboidal, but are in distinct vertical series as well as spiral in arrangement. The grooves separating the vertical series are, however, sinuous and not straight as in P. lineare, so that the cushions in the vertical rows do not appear to occupy distinct vertical ridges as they do in that species. The cushions resemble those of P. lineare and other species of Protolepidodendron in not being separated from the next above and below, each one merging gradually into the adjacent vertical cushions without the interposition of any horizontal ridge or groove. This is a feature by which Protolepidodendron may be distinguished from Lepidodendron. The leaf cushions, which are about 7 mm. long and 4:5 mm. wide, have a well-marked raised area, rather nearer the apex of the cushion than the base, forming a transversely rhomboidal or rounded area representing the leaf-scar. There is in places some slight indication of the presence of the leaf trace in this area, but no trace of the parichnos. In the lower part of the leaf cushion there are occasionally a few transverse wrinkles. In general appearance this species agrees almost exactly with the higher parts of the stem of P. primaevum (White, 1907, Plate 11) in which, however, the leaf cushions are longer but narrower than in our species. The same reasons might be given for not identifying our specimens with White’s species as were given in the case of P. lineare, described above. It may be that P. yalwalense and P. lineare represent different parts of the stem of a single species, since P. primaevum shows the two types of structure at different levels of the one stem, BY A. B. WALKOM. 313 but it may be pointed out that the type of leaf cushion exhibited by P. yalwalense occurs in P. primaevum at a higher level of the stem than does the type shown in P. lineare. One would expect the leaf cushions in the higher parts of the stem to be smaller than those lower down; the cushions in P. yalwalense are considerably larger than in P. lineare, which, added to the fact that the specimen of the latter species is not a very small stem (judging by the curvature it would be at least 8 cm. in diameter), gives some justification for specific separation of the specimens from Yalwal. A plant very like P. yalwalense is Lepidodendron karakubense Schmalhausen (1894, p. 33, t. 2, f. 18, 14) from the Upper Devonian rocks of the Donetz Basin, which has similar leaf-cushions in vertical series separated by sinuous grooves and which also exhibits the absence of distinct demarcation between the cushions in a single vertical series. I. karakubense has been redescribed and refigured by M. D. and G. Zalessky (1921) who had more complete material and were able to describe petrified stems. This species and P. yalwalense show some resemblance in general appearance to L. Veltheimianum, but there is a clear distinction in the definite vertical arrangement of the leaf-cushions in P. yalwalense and L. karakubense, as well as the absence of horizontal separation of adjacent cushions in the same vertical row. The specimen of Protolepidodendron Karlsteini described by Lang (1926, 790) from the Middle Old Red Sandstone of Scotland is a much smaller stem than that from Yalwal, but the shape of the leaf-cushions is similar. In the Scottish specimen, however, the cushions in a vertical series are not so close together, being. connected by comparatively long narrow areas sometimes as much as half the length of the cushions themselves. This makes the two species quite distinct in surface appearance. * (?) LEPIDODENDRON CLARKEI, n. sp. Plate xxiv, fig. 3. A specimen from Yalwal (Geol. Survey of N.S.W., No. 12477) consists of a cast of a stem impression, 5 cm. wide, in which the leaf-cushions are very regular in size, rhombic in shape, averaging about 3-5 mm. transverse diameter and 3 mm. vertically, and sharply marked off from one another by well-defined wide diagonal grooves which show as ridges in the cast. The leaf scar is small, situated on a prominently and rather sharply raised projection close to the upper angle of the cushion (from one-sixth to one-third of the length of the diagonal from the apex). This specimen has the general appearance of L. australe except that the leaf-cushions are very much smaller than in that species even though the stem is by no means a small one. Stems of L. australe which have leaf-cushions at all approximating the small size of those in this specimen are all comparatively thin; I have before me a branching stem of L. australe which is considerably thinner than the specimen here described and which has leaf-cushions averaging about 5 mm. by 5 mm., as well as a second example of the same species, 6 cm. wide (about the same width as the Yalwal specimen), in which the cushions average 8 mm. x 9 mm. Both the examples mentioned are normal specimens of L. australe. In addition to this marked difference in the size of the leaf-cushions, it is apparent that the leaf-scar in the specimen from Yalwal was situated on a prominently raised area of the cushion, whereas there is no evidence to show that this was the case in L. australe, 314 LEPIDODENDROID REMAINS FROM YALWAL, N.S.W. The specimen described shows some resemblance to a number of other species, and, in the absence of details of structure, it is referred to the genus Lepidodendron only provisionally. Specimens from the Lower Coal Measures of Missouri described and figured by White (1899, p. 218, Pl. 65-68) as Omphalophloios cyclostigma (Lesquereux) are very similar in general appearance to (?) Lepi- dodendron Clarkei, but the Missouri specimens are larger, and the absence of details of the structure in my specimen makes it impossible at present to say whether the two are identical. Another similar species is Omphalophloios anglicus Kidston (see Seward, 1910, p. 197, fig. 193c) from the Upper Coal Measures of Somerset, but this shows distinct vertical grooves and a vertical arrangement of the leaf-cushions which are not evident in the Yalwal specimen. There is also some resemblance in general appearance to some varieties of Sigillaria Brardi, a species occurring in rocks of Upper Carboniferous and Permian age (cf. Seward, 1910, fig. 203, p. 225). Further there is the genus recently described by H6rich (1915, p. 426) as Phialophloios, of which the species P. quadratus has similarly shaped leaf-cushions with the scar at the lower angle of the cushion; the specimen from Yalwal shows a considerable degree of resemblance to Phialophloios quadratus, as also do many specimens of Lepidodendron australe, and all three may possibly be identical, but the Australian species occur in rocks of Devonian age whereas the European Phialophloios comes from the Carboniferous. References. ANDREWS, EH. C., 1901.—Report on the Yalwal Goldfield. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Mineral Resources, No. 9. HoricH, O., 1915.—Phialophloios quadratus, eine neue Lepidophytengattung. Jahrb. Konigl. Preuss. Geologischen Landesanstalt, 1914, Bd. xxxv, Teil ii, Heft 2, 1915, 426-430. KIDSTON, R., 1885.—On the occurrence of Lycopodites (Sigillaria) Vanuxemi, Gonpert, in Britain, with remarks on its affinities. Journ. Linn. Soc., Bot., xxi, 1885, 560-566, Pl. xviii. , 1899-1906.—Carboniferous Lycopods and Sphenophylls. Trans. Nat. Hist. Soe. Glasgow, vi (N.S.), 1899-1900, 25-140. LANG, W. H., 1926.—Contributions to the study of the Old Red Sandstone flora of Scotland. iv. On a specimen of Protolepidodendron from the Middle Old Red Sandstone of Caithness. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinb., liv, 1926, 790. 5 ScHMALHAUSEN, J., 1894.—Ueber Devonische Pflanzen aus dem Donetz-Becken. Mem. Com. Geol., viii, 3. SEwarp, A. C., 1910.—Fossil Plants, Vol. ii. WHITE, D., 1899.—Fossil flora of the Lower Coal Measures of Missouri. Monographs U.S. Geol. Surv., Vol. 37, 1899. , 1907.—A. remarkable fossil tree trunk from the Middle Devonic of New York. New York State Museum, Bull. 107, 1907, p. 327. ZALESSKY, M. D., and G., 1921.—Structure du rameau du Lepidodendron caracubense Schmalhausen. Annuaire Soc. Pal. de Russie, iii, 1921, 11-22. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIV. Fig. Protolepidodendron lineare, n. sp. Nat. size. Fig. 2. Protolepidodendron lineare, n. sp. (x 2). Portion of Fig. 1 enlarged to show some detail of leaf cushions. Fig. 3. (?) Lepidodendron Clarkei, n. sp. (x °/, approx.). Fig. 4. Protolepidodendron yalwalense, n. sp. Nat. size. re ON THE LIFE-HISTORY OF CHRATODUS. By TuHos. L. BANcrortT, M.B., Ch.M. (Edin.). (Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) [Read 27th June, 1928.1] From the earliest times (1870) when Ceratodus (Epiceratodus forsteri Krefft ) became known to the scientific world and was described by Gerhard Krefft of the Australian Museum, no one, not even the aborigines, was able to find the very young fish; individuals even six pounds in weight were scarce and only very rarely indeed were specimens two or three pounds in weight taken. The usual weight of fish caught in nets and by line was from sixteen to thirty pounds; larger fish are so powerful in the water that nets do not hold them and, when hooked, they cannot be landed, as the fleshy lips tear away. Few people have seen larger specimens than thirty pounds, yet it has been often stated that the fish grows up to eighty pounds in weight and five feet in length. Fish six pounds in weight are not sexually mature. The conditions for the favourable propagation of Ceratodus no longer occur. ; Fertile spawn is produced in large quantities every season, during August and September; it is the annual festival for fish, particularly large jew-fish (Tandanus tandanus) and for wood ducks (Chenonetta jubata); these animals eat up every particle of spawn they can find, and any that does escape them is devoured by prawns, insect larvae and little fish. Ceratodus is the living representative of that ancient group of fishes which swarmed the palaeozoic seas, but just why it survived in the Burnett and Mary Rivers is hard to conjecture. It is possible that a few individuals remain in other rivers in Queensland, but owing to their rarity have not been noticed. The late Thomas Illidge wrote a good article on Ceratodus, published in the Brisbane Courier, August 6th, 1902, in which he stated that he had, whilst living at Gayndah, on the Burnett River, for ten years tried by every possible means to find small forms of Ceratodus, but without success; the smallest he did find was fifteen inches in length. My experience, lasting over seventeen years, has been similar to that of Illidge and gives the impression that there are now no young fish growing up or only an odd one or two; in other words Ceratodus is nearing extinction. e In the inland seas which existed in Queensland the conditions for Ceratodus were favourable; possibly they were shallow seas with abundance of water plants, but without the enemies which now occur in the freshwater rivers. When the seas dried up, Ceratodus had to adapt itself to new and less suitable conditions. Another theory that might be advanced is that in ancient times Ceratodus had good eyesight, which it has gradually lost, for at the present 316 ON THE LIFE-HISTORY OF CERATODUS, day it is practically blind. That the fish is now almost blind can be demonstrated on old specimens as well as on the larval forms, for one may move a straw about closer even than one inch from the eyes without disturbing it. The hearing too is less acute than in other fishes. Professor Semon, in 1892, with the assistance of Mrs. McCord, of Coonambula Station on the Burnett, reared Ceratodus larvae up to ten weeks, and afterwards the late Thos. Illidge likewise reared them to ten weeks and, during the last year he resided at Gayndah, succeeded in carrying a few past their critical period and up to eight months, which specimens he then preserved. In 1910, the year I arrived on the Burnett, I reared a few up to ten weeks, when they sickened and died; subsequently every year I reared a number, sometimes as many as five hundred, but only two, out of the many thousand hatched during seventeen years, lived through the critical three months stage. If they can be kept alive over three months, they thrive well afterwards. How to tide the young fish over this critical stage was the problem which had to be solved, and which until recently seemed insoluble. It was generally considered that the fish was constitutionally weak from in-breeding. Many scientists, to whom I appealed for suggestions as to how to carry the fish over its critical period, were unanimous in considering that it was entirely a question of the proper food. That idea has been probed thoroughly. The larval Ceratodus just hatched, which occurs four or five weeks after ovi- position, still has some yolk left, but this is used up during the first week; the little fish thrives well for a time, feeding on minute algae. TJandanus larvae have been reared in conjunction with Ceratodus and were alive and growing well after all the Ceratoduws were dead, which proved that the food supply was not at fault. At one time it was considered that the non-success in rearing Ceratodus larvae past their critical period was the want of a sufficiently large body of water. — Professor Edgeworth, of the University of Bristol, was anxious to secure larval Ceratodus for study of the laryngeal muscles; the University sent me a glass aquarium 34 in. x 17 in. x 17 in., but year after year any larval Ceratodus introduced into it succumbed within a week. Although this aquarium has not been of use in rearing Ceratodus larvae, yet it has served a useful purpose in that it put me on the track to solve the mystery. I used it as an ordinary aquarium set up with water weeds and different little fish from the river; algae grew on the glass; frog spawn and young tadpoles were introduced in the hope that they would keep the glass clean, but to my astonishment they only lived a week; it was soon found out that the water was too deep for them. As this was so for frogs, might it not be the same for Ceratodus larvae? Eventually half an inch of water was found to be the best depth for the young Ceratodus, but quite recently a further discovery was made in that the larvae were observed to rest with their heads out of water and at times with the whole body out of water; when disturbed they will go right out of water and rest there for a while before wriggling back again. The cardinal points in rearing larval Ceratodus are: firstly, to keep them in a very confined space supplied with abundance of food; they seem to be blind and when the food is scattered about they do not find sufficient; and secondly, to keep the depth of water as near half an inch as possible, and to have a diminutive sand-bank on which the fish can rest out of water. BY T. L. BANCROFT. 317 Technique of rearing larval Ceratodus. Early in August search for suitable spawning grounds on the river in deep lagoons known to harbour Ceratodus. Look in the shallowest parts of the lagoon close to the water’s edge for water weeds, particularly Vallisneria and Hydrilla, although, if there are none of these plants, the fish will then spawn in Nitella beds, of which there will almost certainly be some; Nitella is the first plant to appear after a flood. It is usually the middle of August when the first spawning occurs. The eggs are scooped out with a strong landing net with mosquito-net bag; scrape hard on the bottom through the weeds. Put the eggs immediately into a pickle-bottle full of water, the bottle being inserted into a large jam tin or billy- can and kept from direct sunlight. On réaching home transfer each egg to a bottle of water to itselfi—four ounce medicine bottles are suitable; if the eggs are kept together and one dies, they all die. The bottle should be kept in a dark place and need not be examined again for four or five weeks. When hatching occurs, the water and fish are poured out into a glass cell or other aquarium and a quantity of alga (fine Spirogyra if possible) added, the cell being shaded from too much light. The larvae do quite well for a few weeks in glass jars with about two inches of water, after which they must be transferred to shallow dishes; 12 in. x 9 in. enamel pie-dishes answer well. The water must not exceed half an inch in depth; at one end of the dish place a couple of handfuls of sand to make a sloping bank. Add abundance of algae of different kinds, also mosquito larvae, and arrange a small slate to shade one end. Float the pie-dish in a larger dish and put the whole in a shaded place. It is advisable to cover the whole with mosquito-net to exclude frogs. Every second day drop in a small piece of hard-boiled yolk of egg, a piece the size of a grain of wheat well rubbed up with a pinch of pollard; I think the fish eat this mixture, but at any rate it serves as food for the mosquito larvae and does not pollute the water. As evaporation occurs a little water must be earefully added, also more algae and mosquito larvae. The fish do well in the pie-dishes until they are four months old, when they can be transferred to large aquaria with deeper water, but it is advisable so to arrange the bottom as to give varying depths from half an inch to six inches; the aquaria should be shaded in places with slates and should have abundance of Vallisneria. I once reared a Ceratodus until it was two years old in a half ship’s iron tank, when a hail storm occurred, filling the aquarium with ice; the fish appeared to be dying, so was preserved. To avoid any such occurrence the aquaria should be under cover. om ‘ee P 5 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. LATE XY. 5 GEOLOGICAL SKETCH MAP OF THE MORUYA DISTRICT COUNTIES OF ST. VINCENT AND DAMPIER RS ; Boy ) Broulee Island | (ea) Mill , \\! yh ryt i aN TASMAN Cry, ~ SEA : SG, MOGENDOURA "Win both \Pedro Point & ) ) Congo Point GS }) Mercers Head (( ay PARISH \ ; SCALE Waa = 3) )Mullimburra Head 8s a0 jeo CHAINS ; a Lee sie ina eel ' 2 MILES LEGEND \ VKelly's Point SEDIMENTARY i POST - TERTIARY ( Swamps | 2 Alluviun CAINOZOIC 4 ) COILA \ Sand = { TERTIARY j Sandstones. Grits \ and Conglomerates DEVONIAN Conglomerate SILURIAN OR Slates, Schists | and Phyllites PALAEOZOIC{ { ORDOVICIAN Contact zone IGNEOUS CAINOZOIC Basalt { Biotite Granite - | Granodiorite and fs % 2% Tonalite PALAEOZOIC § Diorite-Gabbro x” x” ma Porphyry | Dykes F3) \Pt Marka Boundaries ,~ Parish ———, Geological - ~~~ 1 AR. delt Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. PLATH XVI. 1. Folded quartzites, near Moruya. 2. Jointing of tonalite and diorite-gabbro, and basaltic dykes at Kelly’s Point. ™ te on 0 nis - Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. PLATE XVII. Rocks of the Moruya District. 1. Biotite-granite. 2, 3. Granodiorite. 4. Basic inclusion in Granodiorite. 5, 6. Gabbro. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. PLATE XVIII. Rocks of the Moruya District. 1, 2. Graphic intergrowth of minerals in Diorite-gabbro. 3. Hornblende-quartz-porphyrite. 4. Mica-lamprophyre. 5. Cordierite-hornfels. 6. Quartz-mica-schist. ee ¥7 } sh i Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. GATE xox 1. Piper’s Flat. View from the Main Divide. 2. Silt Flats, Blackheath Glen, Megalong Valley. ifs ’ me iar ey ni ESP Ail eae aes Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. WAH exe 1. Walls of Green Wattle Creek. 2. View of Burragorang Valley. el a 0 ee 5 1) as cee res SS — - = oe pe ar omen a er “ae PLATE XXI. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. ron minus. Ulodend it, S195 Bo “LEU, 1, 2. Lepidodendron Osboi 4. Stigmaria ficoides. oe af —meytte oe— in : PLATE XXII. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. sp. 4-9. Dadoxylon farleyerse, n. Pitys (?) Sussmilchi, n. sp. 1-3. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1923. PLATE XXIII. 1-3. Dadoxylon farleyense, n. sp. 4. Stigmaria ficoides. ; f 5 ; PLATE. XXIy. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. Proc. Sp. n. (?) Clarkei, 3. Lepidodendron 4. Protolepidodendron yalwalense, n. sp. 1, 2. Protolepidodendron lineare, n. sp. ken Ny ae NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, No. xv. By J. R. MALLocH. (Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) (Five Text-figures. ) [Read 25th July, 1928.] Family Sapromyzidae. TRIGONOMETOPUS (NEOTRIGONOMETOPUS) ALBIBASIS, nN. SD. Female.—Yellowish clay-coloured. Frons grey dusted, with the ocellar spot fuscous, and a faint dark longitudinal central line; occiput grey dusted: aristae fuscous, paler at bases; all cephalic hairs and bristles black. Thorax with four rather faint dark vittae, most evident anteriorly, the outer pair broadest; scutellum and pleura entirely pale testaceous. Abdomen not marked. Legs unicolorous pale testaceous. Wings, including the veins, at bases to just beyond humeral cross-vein and almost to apices of basal cells, white, from that point outward pale brownish hyaline, darker just beyond the white portion, the veins yellowish except at that point where the colour of wing changes. MHalteres yellow. Frons about 1:25 times as long as broad, quite copiously haired on front half and especially on angle between each antenna and eye; ocellar bristles small and fine; both pairs of orbitals long and strong, but not as long as inner pair of verticals, the latter twice as long as outer pair; postocular bristles quite long and strong, continued along cheek below eye, and practically connecting anteriorly with the series of long bristles near lower margin; parafacials narrow, with some microscopic hairs on lower half of inner margin; arista with very short pubescence; third antennal segment rounded at apex. Thorax with 1 + 2 dorso- centrals, a strong pair of prescutellar acrostichals in line with the posterior pair of dorsocentrals; two series of intra-dorsocentral hairs, no presutural present, and the anterior sternopleural very short and fine; scutellum subconvex above, edge thick, with a slight central depression, and four bristles. Legs normal. Wings as in fuscifrons Malloch. Length, 4 mm. Type, Cairns, N. Queensland, 1907 (Coll. Lichtwardt, Deutsches Ent. Inst.). From the above species, fuscifrons Malloch differs in having the bristles on cheeks much more numerous and weaker, the area between antenna and eye with only one or two fine hairs, the frons deep fuscous except a narrow line on each side posteriorly, the occiput with a large subtriangular blackish mark on each side on upper half which does not extend to margin, the scutellum blackish on central basal portion, and the white area at base of wing falling short of humeral cross- vein and bases of basal cells. I have, in a paper in the press, erected the subgenus Neotrigonometopus for the reception of fuscifrons Malloch, distinguishing it from Trigonometopus by the fact that the anterior of the three pairs of dorsocentral bristles is in front of the A 320 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XV, suture. I have seen no species referable to the subgenus Trigonometopus from Australia. It is incumbent upon me to correct an error in my generic key recently presented in this series of papers. Through a slip the genus Trigonometopus is stated to have the anterior orbital bristles incurved and Paranomina these bristles recurved. The reverse is the case. From Paranomina the species from Australia which I have referred to Trigonometopus may be readily distinguished by the presence of a pair of strong presutural dorsocentral bristles, the three pairs in Paranomina being all postsutural, and weaker. HoMONEURA (HOMONEURA) PUBISETA (Kertesz). I have, since sending my paper on the Australian species of Homoneura to the press, obtained specimens which I consider belong to this species. All the specimens are males, and the species runs down to caption 10 in my key. ‘There is no dark central spot on any of the tergites, a character which distinguishes it from gordoni, and the arista is pubescent only, which distinguishes the species from indecisa, in which the arista is plumose. The hypopygium has a long slender heavily chitinized process on each side, evidently the outer forceps, which, when at rest, project almost straight across the venter, crossing each other and lying close against the ventral surface of abdomen. I have included this species in a key to the Oriental species of the genus and have drawn the hypopygia for inclusion in that paper. Length 3 mm. Locality.—Palmerston, N. Australia, November, 1908 (Coll. Lichtwardt, Deutsches Ent. Inst.). One specimen sent to Dr. Mackerras for placing in some Australian museum. HoMONEURA (HOMONEURA) ARMATA Malloch. In Part x of this series of papers I figured the hypopygium of what I believed to be the male of this species. Since then I have discovered that there are two very closely similar species and that I figured the wrong male. The male with the foliate and serrate edged inner forceps is evidently distinct. The process of the apical tergite, or the superior forceps, consists of two long slender curved spines in armata, while in fergusoni it consists of one, which is variously dentate or spined at apex. The inner process in armata consists of a tapered hook. The apical plates of the female in armata are tapered to tips and there more or less blackened. I have seen this species from Seaford and Ararat, V., and Narrandera and Bourke, N.S.W. HoMONEURA (HOMONEURA) FERGUSONT, nN. Sp. Distinguishable from armata by the genital characters in both sexes. Figure 10 in part x of this series of papers is that of fergusoni and not armata. I find that the apex of superior forceps is quite variable in form here owing to the presence of a number of thorns, and the armature of the inner process is also rather variable, though always pronounced. The apical plates of the female are not blackened at tips and are much wider there than in armata. Length, 6-7 mm. Type, allotype, and 8 paratypes, Narrandera, N.S.W., 25.3.1925-6, 6.5.1926, and 7.10.1925 (EK. W: Ferguson). BY J. R. MALLOCH. 321 Named in honour of the late Dr. H. W. Ferguson who collected the material and submitted it to me for identification. As indicated above the species will run to armata in the key in part x, but it is readily distinguished from it and perthensis by the yellow genital plates of the female, and the structure of the male hypopygium. The genital plates in the female of perthensis are asymmetrical (Text-fig. 1, 0), those of the other two species are not. Genus TrypaNEOIDES Tonnoir and Malloch. This genus contains at present about a dozen Oriental and one New Zealand species, to which total I am now able to add one from Australia. I included it in my generic key in part xiii of this series in the belief that some species of the genus would be discovered in Australia and the characters there cited will serve to distinguish from its allies. aia z SS __ Text-fig. 1—Genital segments of females; a, Homonewra armata; b, H. fergusoni; c, H. perthensis. Text-fig. 2—Trypaneoides australis, wing. TRYPANEOIDES AUSTRALIS, N. SD. Male.—Head fuscous, ocellar triangle and the frontal orbits grey dusted, the latter with a brown spot at base of the upper bristle; face brownish testaceous, grey dusted, with a faint dark central mark; a brown spot below each eye; occiput and postocular orbits grey dusted; antennae, aristae, and palpi black, third segment of antennae yellowish at base. Thorax and abdomen fuscous, and grey dusted, the former with dark brown marks as follows: a vitta between acrostichals and dorsocentrals from anterior margin to third pair of dorsocentrals which connects with the spot at base of third bristle, a short vitta behind suture laterad of the dorsocentrals, a more irregular vitta over the posthumeral and supra-alar bristles, a spot at base of each hair and bristle, and a broad margin on scutellum; pleura with three oblique brown vittae; abdomen with a brown spot at base of each bristle, very large and confluent at apices of tergites. Legs dull testaceocus, femora largely fuscous basally. Wings black, with clear spots (Text-fig. 2). Halteres black. 322 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XV, Frons at vertex wider than long; all bristles strong; arista with its longest hairs about half as long as width of third antennal segment. Thorax with 1 + 3 pairs of acrostichals and dorsocentrals, all strong, and practically no other surface hairs; mesopleura with one discal and one hind marginal bristle; both sterno- pleurals strong. Apices of tergites with long erect sparse bristles. Fore femur without anteroventral comb; hind femur with a strong anteroventral bristle about one-third from apex. Length, 2 mm. Type, Innisfail, Queensland (F. H. Taylor). Resembles fenestralis de Meijere, but that species has the abdomen glossy black. Family Sciomyzidae. I have not attempted heretofore, nor yet in the present paper, a revision of the Australian species in this family, having on hand but few specimens referable to it. There is a paper by Dr. A. L. Tonnoir and the writer in the press dealing with the family in New Zealand which may prompt someone to make a study of the group in Australia, and the present is accepted as an opportune time to give a few notes on certain forms in the material now before me. A definition of the family was given in part vi of this series of papers (These ProcEEpinGs, 1, 1925, 80). The family has been divided into three subfamilies. The Tetanurinae, with a cylindrical ovipositor, and seven abdominal segments in female, and the arista subapical, occur only in Europe as far as known now. The other two, in which the ovipositor is not strongly developed, the abdominal segments beyond fifth are more or less telescoped, and the arista is near base of third antennal segment, are almost cosmopolitan. The Sciomyzinae are distinguished from the Tetanocerinae by the presence of a distinct propleural bristle. The Tetanocerinae are divided into several tribes, representatives of one of which are before me now. Tribe Sepedonini. This tribe is distinguished by the presence of but two scutellar bristles, the lack of a humeral bristle except in Neosepedon, and usually the elongated hind femora. There are three genera recognized in the tribe, Thecomyia Perty, Sepedon Latreille, and Dichaetophora Rondani. A careful examination of material from various regions convinces me that it is advisable to recognize some groups of species as subgenera. Key to the Genera. 1. The vertical area above bases of hind coxae and below base of abdomen as heavily chitinized as pleura, not depressed; metapleural callus bare; ocellar bristles lacking ; none of the femora much thickened, all of them spinose below at apices; ATIStawplUuMOSeyank- sre ee iene Thecomyia Perty (longicornis Perty) The vertical area between bases of hind coxae and base of abdomen membranous, and NE) OO JES ClOREsKECls Einisue, Somes leweeeel pGooscaccndncubsodecouosupcoUbboS 2 Zaavietapleural callus? hainedinis cnc sence y eke 1 ratte. lated coe ee ree dectisi mo lene Sepedon Latreille Metapleunralcallusmwithoute hairs ein ienea laine nr nena Dichaetophora Rondani Genus SEPEDON Latreille. It is evident to me that this genus as represented by the material before me is susceptible to subdivision into at least two subgenera. One of the subgenera is BY J. R. MALLOCH. 323 restricted to the group to which the genotype, sphegeus Fabricius, belongs, the other contains several American species. As the matter does not bear directly upon the Australian species I am not proposing a new name for the second segregate herein. I have seen no Australian species of either segregate. Genus DIcHAETOPHORA Rondani. The Australian species before me belong to this genus but do not agree in all particulars with typical species thereof. I consequently propose to erect a new subgenus for their reception, basing its definition as in the following synopsis. Synopsis of Subgenera. A. Ocellar bristles present but small; humeral bristle present; second antennal segment not longer than third, the latter narrowed beyond insertion of arista, its apex bluntly rounded; fore and hind femora thicker than mid pair, and spinose below ; first wing vein extending beyond inner cross-vein .... Subgenus Neosepedon, nov. AA. Ocellar bristles lacking; humeral bristle lacking; second antennal segment much longer than third, the latter pointed at apex; hind femur much thicker than mid and fore pairs, and more strongly spinose below; first wing vein ending proximad of inner cross-vein ................ Subgenus Dichauetophora Rondani Subgenus NEOSEPEDON, nov. I place in this subgenus two Australian species and cite as the genotype, the first included species, punctipennis, n. sp. The description and comparative notes should serve to distinguish the species. DICHAETOPHORA (NEOSEPEDON) PUNCTIPENNIS, Nn. sp. Male.—Head testaceous yellow; frons fulvous, ocellar spot and a mark against each eye near upper margin black, central glossy stripe brown; orbits narrowly white dusted on outer edge anteriorly; a dark mark between each antenna and eye; face, and especially the parafacials, densely whitish dusted; antennae brown, third segment fuscous apically; arista yellow; palpi testaceous yellow. Thorax brownish testaceous, with grey dust, the dorsum with two narrow submedian and two broad sublateral reddish-brown vittae; scutellum reddish-brown, grey dusted on sides; pleura with a brownish vitta on upper margin. Abdomen shining brownish testaceous, with posterior lateral angles of tergites grey dusted, sixth tergite grey dusted, with a pair of large shining reddish-brown discal spots. Legs testaceous yellow, apices of femora faintly, and of tibiae distinctly, infuscated, apex of third and all of fourth and fifth tarsal segments fuscous. Wings greyish hyaline, with numerous small fuscous dots, 6-8 in the cell in front of second vein beginning below apex of auxiliary vein and extending to apex of second, about three along lower side of apical section of second vein and one on costa between apex of that vein and apex of third, about ten arranged alternately on apical section of third vein, four above and six below, about the same number on apical two sections of fourth vein, and about six on fifth vein along discal cell, the spots all touching the veins. Frons at vertex half of the head width, central glossy vitta depressed and com- plete; postverticals and both pairs of verticals quite long and strong; orbital repre- sented by a short hair; second segment of antenna parallel-sided, slightly shorter than third, the latter slightly and gradually narrowed from insertion of arista to apex, the latter rounded; arista about as long as antenna, pubescent; face carinate above, slightly receding below, and with some microscopic black hairs on lower half of sides; cheek about half as high as eye, the latter slightly higher than long. Thorax 324 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XV, with one humeral, two notopleural, one supra-alar, two postalar, and one pair of dorsocentral, bristles; mesonotum and dise of. scutellum with short hairs; meso- pleura, sternopleura, centre of hypopleura and pteropleura, lower part of pro- pleura, and the prosternal plate, with microscopic black hairs. Fore and hind femora thicker than mid pair and with short stout spines on apical half of antero- ventral and posteroventral surfaces; mid femora unarmed below. Inner cross-vein close to middle of discal cell; first posterior cell slightly narrowed at apex; outer eross-vein bent outward at middle. Length, 6 mm., exclusive of antennae. Type and one paratype, Botany Bay, N.S.W. (H. Petersen). This and the next species were sent to me by the late Dr. C. F. Baker of the Philippine College of Agriculture. DICHAETOPHORA (NEOSEPEDON) CONJUNCTA, nN. Sp. A specimen in poor condition differs from the foregoing in having no evident dark spot between each antenna and eye, and the wings with the dark spots along veins connected across the cells, those in apical portions of submarginal, and discal cells, and all of those in first posterior cell, furthermore connected by means of a longitudinal dark streak in centre of cells, leaving in these sections only small round clear spots along the side of each of the veins. The dark colour in the anal and second posterior cells is also in the form of clouds and there are similar small hyaline spots along the lower sides of the veins as is the case in the others just mentioned. Length, 6 mm. Type, Botany Bay, N.S.W. (H. Petersen). It is possible, but hardly probable, that this is a variety of punctipennis, but the specimen has been badly eaten by some pest and the antennae and abdomen are lacking, so that it is impossible to determine even the sex of the specimen. Both of these species will be sent to Dr. Mackerras so that they may be deposited in some suitable Australian museum where they may be available to anyone desiring to make a study of the family. Subfamily ScriomMyziIn Ak. The members of this subfamily are distinguished from Tetanocerinae by the presence of a distinct propleural bristle immediately above fore coxa. I have seen two genera from Australia. Genus Hernosciomyza Hendel. This genus is readily distinguished from any other in the family by the very prominent bristles on the costal vein. It is confined to Australia and New Zealand. There are two Australian species known to me which are referable here. One of these is the genotype, already briefly described by me in this series of papers, and a new one which is closely related to one occurring in New Zealand. They may be distinguished as below. AvP teropleuras bare: Fein wii tis Sfte cerns Neb nlsbivctore dee tmeberencenketecerdichans ferruginea Hendel ‘AVA: (Pteropleura: isetulose scentralliy) sha c jac ais con tense oi) chee ereltebea-petie ts ulevetens aliena, nm. sp. HELOSCIOMYZA ALIENA, nN. Sp. Male and female.—Head testaceous yellow, cheeks, frontal orbits and occiput, white dusted, ocellar region and a central vitta extending beyond middle of frons, on BY J. R. MALLOCH. 32 a mark at base of outer vertical bristle, and another on middle of occiput behind each eye, dark brown; antennae reddish testaceous, third segment fuscous above and at apex; arista fuscous; palpi testaceous. Thorax testaceous, densely whitish- grey dusted, dorsum with four brown vittae, the median pair fused posteriorly and continued over disc of scutellum, the sublateral pair divided by a narrow longi- tudinal line behind suture; pleura brown below humeral callus. Abdomen brownish testaceous, paler at apices, darker at bases, of tergites. Legs testaceous, femora darker, fore pair grey dusted, apices of hind pair, and of hind tibiae, and apical three segments of all tarsi, blackish. Wings greyish hyaline, cross-veins slightly clouded. MHalteres yellow. Anterior orbital about half as long as posterior one, rather close to it, and not much proximad of middle of frons; anterior portion of frons sparsely black- haired; face with a slight vertical carina; cheek about as high as width of third antennal segment, sparsely haired on lower half; arista pubescent. Thorax as in ferruginea, with two pairs of strong postsutural dorsocentrals; propleura with one strong bristle, the stigmatal bristle also present but very short; pteropleura setulose; anterior sternopleural bristle shorter than posterior one. Male with a pair of leaf-like processes at apex of hypopygium. Legs stouter in male than in female. First posterior cell of wing not narrowed at apex. Length, 4-5 mm. Type, male, and allotype, Broken Hill and Sydney, N.S.W., 9.6.25. A smaller, darker, and more slender, species than ferruginea, from which it may yet be distinguished at least subgenerically. Genus MELINA Robineau-Desvoidy. I have one species before me which is referable here. Hendel uses the generic name Graphomyzina Macquart for the group to which it appears most readily referable, but Cresson has placed the genus as a subgenus of Melina. Hendel uses the genus name Sciomyza instead of Melina, basing his contention upon the refuta- tion of the claim that Westwood actually fixed types in his 1840 paper. Most authors accept Westwood’s paper as fixing types and if it is so accepted then Melina ought to be accorded the right to stand as the name for the present genus. Melina, as accepted herein, is distinguished from Helosciomyza by the lack of long bristles on the costa. The pteropleura is setulose, the arista long haired, the fore tibia has but one preapical dorsal bristle, and the inner cross-vein is beyond the middle of discal cell of wing. The eyes are elongate and longer than high in the only species before me, thus placing it in the subgenus Graphomyzina, the true Melina species having the eyes round, or higher than long. I have but one specimen of this species before me and, in the hope that it may be possible for me to obtain more material in the family later, I defer describing it until such time as my collection will permit a more thorough survey of the Australian forms. Family Borboridae. Genus LEproceraA Olivier. This genus has been divided into a large number of subgenera by Dr. O. Duda, the two species dealt with herein being referable to Collinella Duda. 326 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XV, LEPTOCERA (COLLINELLA) TRIFASCIGERA, Nl. SDP. Female.—Head dark brown, anterior margin of frons, centre of cheeks, palpi, and most of antennae, testaceous yellow. Thorax shining black, slightly grey dusted and with a faint dark central vitta on dorsum, notopleural margin and sutures of pleura yellowish. Abdomen with the dorsum unicolorous black, slightly erey dusted. Legs fuscous, knee-joints, a median band on each tibia, bases of fore tibiae, bases of fore tarsi, and all of mid and hind tarsi, fulvous yellow. Wings faintly infuscated at bases, with a rather pronounced median fascia, and a fainter one at apex, both darkest on the third vein (Text-fig. 3). Halteres yellow. Frons strongly bristled, the ocellars long; antennae porrect, divergent, third antennal segment rounded; arista slender, distinctly short haired, and almost as long as mesonotum; one long vibrissa on each side. Lower humeral bristle down- wardly directed, upper one and scapular bristle directed mesad; three pairs of postsutural dorsocentrals, becoming shorter and more widely separated anteriorly; surface hairs quite strong, about eight series between the anterior dorsocentrals; sternopleural bristle long; scutellum flat and bare above, with four long and two short (intermediate) bristles. First visible tergite as long as next two together, second about half as long as third, and subequal to fourth, the bristles fine and short. Mid tibia with two anterodorsal and two posterodorsal bristles and a ventral one near apex; basal segment of hind tarsus slightly thicker and about half as long as second. Venation as in Text-fig. 3. Length, 1-5 mm. 5 Text-fig. 3.—Leptocera trifascigera, wing. -fig. 4.—Leptocera myrmecophila, wing. Text-fig. 5.—Atherigona bidentata, apical abdominal process of male from above and the side. Type, Mt. Molloy, Queensland (F. H. Taylor). This species has the wings very similar to those of subtinctipennis Brunetti, which occurs in India, Formosa, and some of the islands in the Indian Ocean, but that species has eight scutellar bristles. JL. myrmecophila Knab and Malloch has the wings as Text-fig. 4. Family Muscidae. ATHERIGONA BIDENTATA, 0. sp. Male.—Head fuscous, occiput, frontal triangle, and orbits, face, and cheeks densely yellowish-grey dusted; lower portion of face testaceous; antennae, aristae, and palpi black, aristae slightly paler basally, interfrontalia dark brown. Thorax BY J. R. MALLOCH. 327 fuscous, densely grey dusted, humeral angles and propleura yellowish, dorsum with three faint brown vittae. Abdomen fulvous yellow, more or less obscured on dorsum with grey dust basally, first three visible tergites each with a pair of black spots, very large on second, smallest on third, and on these tergites an additional faint central brownish vitta, fourth tergite and hypopygium yellow. Legs honey-yellow, apical third of fore femora and tibiae, and basal three segments of fore tarsi blackened. Wings clear, with a faint dark streak at apex of auxiliary vein. Calyptrae and halteres white. Head of the usual form; third antennal segment long, and rather broad; arista densely pubescent, the second segment longer than thick; palpi short, and dilated at apices as in varia Meigen. Thorax normal; some setulae besides the three bristles on sternopleura. Abdomen slightly tapered to apex, none of the tergites excessively enlarged, the hypopygial process as Text-fig. 5. Fore femur not excavated above, with at least one preapical posteroventral bristle; fore tibia without exceptional armature; fore tarsus exceeding in length the tibia by about the extent of apical two segments, slender, and without exceptional hairing. Inner cross-vein but little before middle of discal cell, penultimate section of fourth vein about two-thirds as long as ultimate, first posterior cell very slightly narrowed at apex, outer cross- vein erect, at less than its own length from apex of fifth vein. Female.—Similar to male, but the abdomen not so sharply marked and with a pair of small dark spots on fourth tergite, the fore legs except coxae and knee- joints black, mid and hind tarsi and hind tibiae except bases fuscous. Length, 3-5 mm. Type, male, allotype, and 4 female paratypes, Bellavista, Papua, 4,600 feet (D. M. Stewart). Genus LIMNINA, Nov. This genus is closely related to Limnophora Robineau-Desvoidy, but is distinguished from it by the presence of some setulae near middle of under surface of the auxiliary vein, some microscopic hairs on base of stem vein below, and hairs on sides of scutellum which invade the ventral surface to some extent. There are several other characters which I mention in the specific description that may be of generic import, but I omit mention of these as generic criteria, lest by so doing I engender the erection of additional genera for species yet unknown to me which might differ in some of these less important characters and yet agree in the essential features already cited. Genotype, the following species. LIMNINA ELONGATA, TD. Sp. Male.—Black, with pale grey dusting on head, thorax, and abdomen. Head with silvery dust on frontal orbits and parafacials, interfrontalia velvety black when seen from behind. Thorax fuscous on disc, the lateral margins pale grey dusted, and the areas between the five blackish vittae less distinctly pale dusted, the vittae not conspicuous; dise of scutellum and upper margin of pleura fuscous, remainder of pleura blue-grey dusted. Abdomen with a pair of large deep black opaque spots on each of basal three tergites, those on second and third very narrowly separated in middle and covering almost all of dorsum, fourth with a pair of dark submedian lines and a dark apex. Legs black. Wings slightly smoky. Calyptrae white. Halteres yellow. . 328 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XV, Frons at vertex about one-fifth of the head width; orbits linear above, widened in front, interfrontalia of uniform width throughout, frontal orbital bristles rubbed off in type, but apparently all weak; arista very short haired; parafacial linear in profile; vibrissal angle hardly produced. Thorax with 2 + 3 pairs of dorsocentrals, the anterior intra-alar lacking, and very few fine surface hairs, the presutural acrostichal area with three series of hairs; sternopleurals 1 + 2. Abdomen elongate, tapered to apex, fifth sternite about twice as long as fourth, projecting beyond apex of hypopygium, transverse at apex, and with a small central wedge-shaped notch in centre. Fore tibia without a median posterior bristle; mid tibia with one median posterior bristle; hind femur with a preapical anteroventral bristle; hind tibia with one anteroventral and one anterodorsal median bristle. Inner cross-vein at one-third from apex of discal cell; fourth vein but slightly bent forward apically; third vein setulose at base both above and below. Length, 5 mm. Type, Bellavista, Papua, 4,600 feet (D. M. Stewart). This specimen as well as those collected by Mr. Taylor recorded in this paper were sent to me by Dr. A. H. Baldwin of the Australian Institute of Tropical Medicine, and the types will be returned to him for disposition in Australia. Genus LIMNELLA, Nov. This genus is erected for the reception of Limnophora orthoneura Malloch and is distinguished from Limnophora by the presence of short setulose hairs on the upper surface of the first vein. The eyes of the males are widely separated above, which is very rarely the case in Limnophora, and never the case in Myiographa Malloch which latter has the first vein setulose above also. In Limnella the fourth, vein is not at all forwardly curved, while in Myiographa it is very conspicuously curved forward. At present I have referred but one species to this genus, though it is probable that more will be discovered in the Australian region. HKamily Calliphoridae. Genus MELINDA Robineau-Desvoidy. There is before me one species which I refer to this genus. It closely resembles the European polita Macquart, and is about the same size. MELINDA MINUTA, N. SD. Male and female.—General colour aeneous black, the whole slightly grey dusted and distinctly shining, mesonotum with four narrow black vittae, the sub- median pair continued a little behind suture, the lateral pair broken in front of suture and wider there than behind it. Abdomen metallic greenish-black, with white dust, the dorsum with a faint narrow dark central vitta. Legs black. Wings greyish hyaline. Calyptrae whitish. Halteres yellow. Hyes bare; narrowest part of frons about 1-5 times as wide as third antennal segment; parafacial as wide as third antennal segment, haired on upper half; facial ridges setulose on lower halves; third antennal segment fully twice as long as second; arista plumose on basal half or more; vibrissal angle slightly produced; cheek fully twice as high as width of parafacial. Thorax with 2 -- 3 dorsocentrals, 2 + 2 or 3 acrostichals, the posterior one of the sublateral bristles lacking, and the anterior one microscopic or absent. Abdomen narrowly ovate, bristles on apices of BY J. R. MALLOCH. 329 third and fourth visible tergites, and on middle of fourth well developed; sternal hairs setulose and moderately numerous. Leg bristles as in Calliphora species. Inner cross-vein a little beyond apex of first vein and about two-fifths from apex of discal cell; outer cross-vein close to midway between inner and bend of fourth; first posterior cell closed, and with a short petiole. Female.—Frons at vertex a little less than one-third of the head width, widened to one-third at anterior margin. Thorax more greenish than in male and with the median vittae more noticeably continued to behind suture, the postsutural acrostichals in type five in number. Abdomen broader than in male, and with slight evidences of checkering in the dusting. Tibiae a little brownish. Inner cross-vein a little closer to middle of discal cell, outer a little beyond midway from inner to bend of fourth. Length, 3-5-4 mm. Type, male, and allotype, Como, N.S.W., December, 1923, swept from flowers (H. Petersen). The male of polita which I have examined has the frons narrower than the above species, and the second abdominal tergite with a pair of strong bristles on middle of hind margin, and another pair on disc of third segment. The above description was inadvertently omitted from the paper on this family recently published by the writer though written at the same time as the others which appeared therein. Genus Hu?TroNoBESSERIA Curran. In a paper recently published by Mr. H. C. Curran in Europe this genus is erected for the reception of the species described by the late Capt. Hutton under the name Gymnophania perniz. I have had an opportunity of examining a specimen of this species and find that it belongs to the Calliphoridae, and not to Tachinidae where both Hutton and Curran have placed it. The lack of a developed postscutellum inevitably prevents it from being considered as referable to Tachinidae, and though the arista is pubescent only, it is without question close to Melinda. It is a glossy black species with black legs and, being without setulae on the posterior side of the stem vein above, falls into the segregate above indicated, but the lack of long aristal hairs readily distinguishes it from any related genus occurring in Australia. So far as known at present the species occurs only in New Zealand. Genus PAUrRoTHRIXx Bezzi. This genus was erected for the reception of two Samoan species. It has much the appearance of Melinda, but one of the species has a few hairs on the supra- squamal ridge; the other lacks these. The upper part of the parafacials is bare and so also is the disc of lower calypter. The posterior sublateral bristle is absent, a character which distinguishes it from Luciliella Malloch. I have seen only females sent to me by Dr. Buxton for examination. Family Tachinidae. Tribe Ameniini. When I wrote my previous paper dealing with this tribe I did not have before me the genus Paramenia Brauer and von Bergenstamm, but subsequently I had an opportunity to examine it in the United States National Museum. The principal 330 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XV, characters distinguishing it from Amenia and Stilbomyia are the non-carinate face, and the bare prosternum and central portion of propleura. The anterior post- humeral bristle is also slightly mesad of the posterior one. The three genera may be separated as below. Microtropeza Macquart is still unknown to me. If it belongs to the tribe Ameniini it may be distinguished from the others by the non-carinate face, and the bare arista, as well as its less evident metallic coloration. Kkey to the Genera. 1. Face not carinate; prosternum and central portion of propleura bare .......... Beara sie ee ORT en CICS Ie RO oS Et nt ORO ROI aac eon te ne Paramenia Brauer and Bergenstamm Face conspicuously vertically carinate in middle; prosternum and central ‘portion of TOVOVON SION hea nN WEIN GKeXG anna Ce Hee Gaeta yet oe on Ree ee nt moines ER MME, Por yD PL Sc. ey Sent icid nighonosdod: ti 2 Frons of male much narrower than that of female, and without strong forwardly directed supra-orbital bristles; height of cheek always decidedly greater than bo engeGhe OR MAMCEMMNAE oa ee ek ee, ete Sere nro eens nee a oleae Amenia Robineau-Desvoidy Frons of male not narrower than that of female, and in both sexes with two or more strong forwardly directed supra-orbital bristles ........... Stilbomyia Macquart Genus PARAMENTA Brauer and Bergenstamm. This genus is the same as Calliphoropsis Townsend, and the genotype, semi- auriceps B. and B., is the same as Musca macularis Walker, the genotype of Calliphoropsis, as identified by Townsend. Paramenia agrees in the structure of the postscutellum with the other two genera included in the tribe by me, and has the abdominal sternites quite broadly exposed at apices, broadly V-shaped. It has even thore evidences of relationship to the Calliphoridae than have the other two genera, the head being quite similar to that of some species of Calliphora, except that the parafacials are bare. The anterior posthumeral bristle is slightly mesad of the posterior one, and the inner cross-vein of the wing is below a point about midway between apices of auxiliary and first veins. ; PARAMENIA MACULARIS (Walker). This is the only species known to belong to the genus. It has the frontal orbits and upper half of parafacials white dusted, the lower half of parafacial and the entire cheeks golden yellow dusted; antennae black; palpi fuscous. Thorax and abdomen deep metallic blue, with violet reflections, the former whitish dusted, most densely so on notopleural and supra-alar regions, and with a large white dusted spot on the mesopleura and another on the sternopleura; abdomen with a conspicuous white dusted spot on each side of second tergite, and an even larger one on each side of fourth; wings darkened at bases; calyptrae black, whitish at bases. Arista plumose; face not carinate; each orbit with two strong forwardly directed supra-orbital bristles in female. Thorax with 2 + 3 dorsocentral bristles, presutural acrostichals rather inconspicuous, prescutellar pair strong. Strong bristles present only on apices of third and fourth abdominal tergites, apex of latter transverse. Fore tibia with some short anterodorsal bristles basally. Length, 11-15 mm. Locality — Buderim Mt., Queensland. Tribe Rutiliini. When I wrote my previous paper, already referred to, I had available only the specimens in the collection of the United States National Museum, but I have BY J. R. MALLOCH. : 331 now had an opportunity to examine the species in the collection of the Deutsches Entomologisches Institut, through the kindness of Dr. Walther Horn, and I am thus able to present data upon many species previously unknown to me. Genus RuTiriA Robineau-Desvoidy. A very careful examination of all the species now before me shows that the prosternal plate is not invariably bare. In some species it is absolutely devoid of hairs, in some others it is apparently so, but there are some hairs on the membranous region surrounding the anterior portion of the plate and these appear so at times that they seem slightly to invade the latter, while in a few species the hairs actually are situated upon the lateral margins of the plate as well as on the contiguous membranous region. Below I present a synopsis of the 16 species now available to me, including therein a number of those submitted by Dr. Horn, and as these were used by Dr. Engel in his recent work on the group there is a great probability that the identifications are correct, except in one or two cases which are dealt with in the notes on the species involved. Key to the species. 1. Hind tibia with one or two prominent bristles and no uniform fringe of closely placed regular short bristles on anterodorsal surface ..................... 2 Hind tibia with a fringe of closely placed, quite regular, short bristles on the antero- dorsal surface, and very rarely one of these bristles beyond middle slightly loner than the tOERERS) 8c .e te cca eacs rec cre Sere ee Oe ane Sisde edah Oe ss eoepenneuewer mene ue 3 2. Thoracic dorsum metallic blue-green, with four black vittae, the areas between the vittae in front of suture white dusted, and in addition with the following con- spicuous white dusted markings: presutural lateral margins, a spot between these and the presutural white vitta just in front of suture, a larger one in line with it behind suture, and an elongate spot on each side of median line near posterior margin; abdomen of male brownish-yellow, coppery at apex, with a black dorsocentral vitta, and blackish apices to tergites, the most evident white dust being on sides of second tergite and a submedian mark on each side of third segment; abdomen of female blackish-green, the black and white markings as in male, but more extensive, and the fourth tergite conspicuously wihiteradustedion isid GS. scr nrq sere etic e, tae nr ea alors a ain aes lewcosticta Schiner Thoracic dorsum brownish fuscous, with slight whitish dusting, which is nowhere disposed in spots, and four dark vittae anteriorly; abdomen brownish-yellow, greenish apically, with a dark dorsocentral vitta and dark apices to tergites BE PPR APENO Cnnc 015.0 0.6 10 Gane Eee EROES OR OLR ERO ca ieaeRER Rots fa 6 OCHO RAG cia-c.cio EAs vivipara (Fabricius) 3. Distance from mouth margin to apex of third antennal segment not more than three- fourths as great as length of that segment ................... inornata Guérin Distance from mouth margin to—apex ,of third antennal segment distinctly greater thanglene th wotethat (Se caine titers: secs oS cnet ro meee EIEN Rey) SIS: BL en ane et ete wee en 4 4. Face, cheeks, parafacials, and frontal orbits, brownish or fuscous, rarely testaceous, YONG “TayEWIS-fem enya GMD USTLEYO LL ey cheterigeals aH int ER: Hee I enS nto Geel Ocak -cLIGKEA AE GA CR REM EE tas astO-o.c) chino lava. Graccuro rosa 5 Face, at least the anterior and upper portions of cheeks, and the parafacials, testaceous yellow, or orange-yellow, with bright yellow, and not grey, dust .. 12 5. Length averaging 20 mm. or more; thorax dark metallic blue-green, with quite distinct white dusting, the dorsum with four slender black vittae anteriorly ; abdomen bright metallic green, with a central vitta and apices of tergites 2 and 3 black, the green portions of these two tergites with white dust when seen from behind; parafacials haired to about midway from base of antennae to lower margin of eyes; pleural hairs all black; wings hyaline, with a black fascia near LSE! Go: Secrets noc te aeRO. Cha sAlcisic. 5 GREER einen HHS Toler arco Bla 6 c1ojois eee regalis Guérin Length averaging less than 20 mm.; thorax and abdomen not coloured as above .. 6 6. Thorax and abdomen similarly coloured on dorsum, uniform deep metallic blue- green, very like some of the large species of Luciliini, the thorax with slight dust and very faint traces of four blackish dorsal vittae, the abdomen with a 332 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XV, faint blackish dorsocentral vitta and even fainter dark apices to tergites 1 to 3; wings greyish hyaline, with a dark fascia near base, and all the veins narrowly margined with dark brown; no outstanding bristle on vibrissal angle; pleural hairs entirely black; calyptrae fuscous, darker on the margins; parafacials not haired belowmiddlle Of eyes) se oe eel rey eel le reeled ele een Samoan species Thorax and abdomen usually dissimilarly coloured, or neither uniformly dark metallic blue-green; the wing veins either without a trace of dark clouding, or if there is any such present it is very faint and yellowish ...................-+.-+---- 7 7, IPiewveal Inenbes pvlll joley@ke Gir TMSOOWIS Gocobaccbadunoodovaongoos oad sound oD dno oouHaDOOA 8 Pleural hairs mostly or entirely pale, yellowish ...........-.0--..+++-+5-++-ee-- 9 8. Thorax black, the dorsum with a coppery tinge, abdomen nowhere brilliant metallic IDE Oe ONWO4APEGIN scocccocegboagouabodbooOUaDUoKoOUOOOOS viridinigra Macquart. Thorax and abdomen brilliant metallic blue-green or green, with distinet black MOEN NOES | Aco, cuckoo. B-0'0-6'0 0 ©: acea Gah OOo Ain ofornle) 6.0 Olosuid oplo WM O.0.d10-018 tg tnd BEG Re enone 13 9. Prosternum absolutely devoid of hairs both close against the anterior lateral margins of the chitinized plate and on the two large lateral subvertical anterior mem- branous areas; species about 18 mm. in length; general colouration of thorax and abdomen brownish testaceous, the thorax almost fuscous and without any metallic sheen, mesonotum rather densely grey dusted and with four quite distinet dark vittae; one quite prominent bristle amongst those on vibrissal angle ; parafacial hairs not descending below level of second antennal segment ...... the chitinized plate or on the two large lateral subvertical anterior membranous areas, in the latter case the hairs are fine, pale and adherent to the surface so that they are visible only when the head is pressed upward well clear of the anterior margin of the thorax; species not more than 16 mm, in length; the thorax always more or less evidently metallic green or blue-green on dorsum .. 10 al ). Some conspicuous long bristly hairs on prosternum contiguous to anterior lateral margins of the chitinized plate, none on the large subvertical anterior membran- ous areas; one moderately well developed bristle amongst the finer series on each vibrissal angle; legs fuscous; dorsum of thorax quite evidently metallic green, the surface whitish dusted, and rather faintly quadrivittate; scutellum testaceous; abdomen in both sexes testaceous or brownish-yellow, with a dark dorsocentral vitta and, at least in the female, with a faint dark apex to each tergite, fourth tergite in male with, in female without, a metallic green tinge; dorsum of thorax very largely white haired in front of suture, and entirely black haired behind! pitta) seyacoil Goxiiices a eynaies Alert einen Me Meee kot Sem pellucens Macquart? The prosternal hairs very fine and almost entirely decumbent, confined to the two large anterior subvertical lateral membranous areas; dorsum of thorax with IAOK Inepbesy joyoyla, inn inorme Ore Syoxel Joslin! SNORE .oseconcacasvangues0es eae ili 11. One of the bristles on each vibrissal angle quite noticeably longer than the others; thorax quite brilliantly metallic green or blue-green, with whitish dust and four dark vittae on dorsum; scutellum concolorous with mesonotum; legs fuscous; abdomen testaceous or brownish testaceous, with a black dorsocentral vitta and apices to tergites, the surface coppery or golden tinged, and apex of fourth tergite hat Loom Keay foyrilheioie somes BIRAEN, coobcovoooevasccvodunucvoube lepida Guérin None of the bristles on vibrissal angles outstandingly developed; thorax not very conspicuously green, the scutellum usually more or less noticeably testaceous, and paler than mesonotum; abdomen in male rather inconspicuously greenish tinged, in female without green colour, legs testaceous or tawny yellow ...... MORN eS hs TO HE .'./6-0- SORE GUER ECL USE Or OF CRE TOL Ge CS Ao OURO eR RCE TAAL Samoan species 2. Pleural hairs nearly all bright golden-yellow; thorax bright metallic green or blue- green, without white dusted spots on dorsum or pleura; fourth abdominal tergite of female not impressed at apex in centre; raised portions of the cheeks opalescent green; parafacials haired to lowest level of the eyes CAS, ec CRONE Pen cuore LAAT 00.6, oo 0 O tos a ACO co Cp 6 formosa Robineau-Desvoidy Bieme espe Res Uk Sp ol die en ae eae sche eran Ie en earners Sine 13 13. Thorax violet-black, metallic bluish on the posterior margin and scutellum, with a white-dusted blue-tinged spot on each humerus and another on each side behind suture on mesonotum, pleura with only one white spot, on mesopleura ; abdomen concolorous with thorax, second and third tergites each with a trans- verse series of four small round white-dusted blue-tinged spots, and fourth with BY J. R. MALLOCH. 333 a pair of much larger similarly coloured marks; the black sub-basal fascia on wing as dark from beyond humeral vein to base of wing in costal cell as at any other portion; both calyptrae white at bases, blackish at apices; hairs on anterior third of frontal orbits, the parafacials, and cheeks, golden-yellow, prosternal hairs SAO “AAG 1OIEKOe® S540 4a 0. oH 0 Sd 0 6.0 Clolniololna mo OOO tile cla ow argentifera Bigot Thorax largely metallic blue or green on disc, if violet-black then with two pre- sutural green vittae; the abdomen never with four small round white-dusted spots on second and third tergites, the outer pale mark always transverse when there is a small submedian pale spot on each side of median line ...... 14 14. All hairs on frontal orbits, parafacials, and cheeks, dark, either black or fuscous. those on parafacials quite dense and conspicuous, continued broadly to iower level of eye, the three portions mentioned with more or less dense grey dusting, especially noticeable in the female, the face, parafacials, and anterior half of cheeks, testaceous yellow ; thoracic dorsum metallic blue or blue-green, with four black .vittae, the submedian pair extending to or slightly beyond suture, the sub- lateral pair a little broader and complete when seen from certain angles; abdomen brilliant metallic green, with a complete, rather broad, dorsocentral black vitta and black apical margins to the tergites except fourth, the latter extended forward at a little distance from the central vitta in male, and on third tergite usually. reaching anterior margin, leaving a small submedian green spot FETS sath OW OY KDI HIE KOH Ta edge: o'g cae eemnt al obaie oftiity one6 te bake uciDiG deol ous ck O aD IOs to imperialis Guérin All hairs on cheeks and all, or almost all, of those on parafacials golden-yellow, all Oye WAH OH WAH Gyr iron! Orlolis Ceyak< te CORI Sa coccscccuceuounsocosdce WU 15. Dorsum of thorax absolutely without distinct white dusting except an inconspicuous Hatchyon Nea ChwMuUuNLE GUS ia sccs: x. sek cence) pores eat oy cules lela ousnouceh aeseen eaaliee tea athe, oe ue aluaee 16 Dorsum of thorax quite conspicuously white dusted, with two or more pale spots on CaAChmala Cera Mla Sams cea cei ware an Siwomenal cd cs gehen alle ire Raye Cae eats na Spisigah clsclietics for tens Spsee re ae er ees Ieee 7 16. Humeral angles rather inconspicuously, but quite evidently white dusted when seen from behind; mesopleura also faintly white dusted centrally; sub-basal dark mark on wing black and conspicuous, continued along costa to base of wing SPM RENCE cE bloae Urea tess on Sec ohiamnel ysis Meg ORR Schr heceeeead Aes Susie Nlcitel ahh suee i: Seis ulase-s occu ea eR Sa nitens Walker? Humeral angles and centre of mesopleura not at all white dusted; sub-basal dark mark on wing brownish and inconspicuous ..........-........... Ceylon species 17. Dorsum of thorax mostly shining black, with two narrow submedian presutural vittae, and four spots an each lateral margin, green, and white dusted when Seem iron loesauingl socacabscnagsoaecvadgcoc oon os sb oD SOK C OOOO OCS erichsoni Engel Dorsum of thorax mostly metallic blue or blue-green, with four shining black vittae, the intervening areas white dusted in female when seen from behind, the sub- median dark vittae not complete; lateral margins of mesonotum each with four white-dusted spots, the pair at suture sometimes very faint .. splendida Donovan In the case of species included in my previous paper which appear to require no further elucidation, I do not add to what I have already published, but the species which are not included in that paper are dealt with herein to a greater or less extent in order that they may be rendered recognizable to students of the group. I have listed in the key two species from Samoa which will be dealt with in a paper on the Diptera of Samoa, and also one species from Ceylon sent to me by Dr. W. Horn, which I am unable to identify at this time. I merely introduce these species in the key to indicate specific characters which may serve to distinguish also some of the Australian species as yet unknown to me. RuTILIA VIVIPARA (Fabricius). The specimen I accept as vivipara has some hairs on prosternum close to anterior margin of the plate. The pleural hairs are yellow except the pteropleural tuft and those on disc of mesopleura. The parafacial is haired to opposite apex of second antennal segment. Cy NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XV, (Se) (3c) nS RUTILIA REGALIS Guérin. The largest species of the genus I have seen. It is very dark metallic blue or blue-green on dorsum of thorax and abdomen, the former is whitish dusted but without conspicuous lateral white spots, and has four dark vittae, the submedian pair discontinued at or just behind the suture; the abdomen has a narrow black dorsocentral vitta and black apices to the tergites, broadest apically. The head is black, with whitish dust, and the hairs are black except those on occiput, which are white. Pleural hairs black; anterior spiracle pale brown. Parafacials haired almost to lower margin of eye; antennae short, about half as long as height of cheek. Two or three pairs of short acrostichals before suture; hind margin of mesonotum with about eight bristles; prosternum haired in front of anterior margin of plate; scutellum flattened above, subtriangular, with about 18 bristles. Sometimes one or two short bristles at apex of second visible tergite centrally. Hind tibia with a regular anterodorsal fringe of short bristles. Length, 20-22 mm. Queensland and New South Wales. I have examined specimens identified by Dr. Engel, and some in the United States National Museum which were identified as formosa by Coquillett and, as that species, used as the genotype of Chrysorutilia by Townsend. The species is a true Rutilia. RUTILIA VIRIDINIGRA Macquart. I am accepting as this species the one. identified as such by Hngel, a female specimen of which I have before me. It is quite similar to the preceding one, but is smaller in size, averaging less than 18 mm. in length, and is darker in colour, the thorax especially being less noticeably metallic green, and the scutellum more brownish. The mesonotum is less strongly bristled than in regalis, with but one pair of weak presutural acrostichals, and the scutellum has fewer bristles (14). Three specimens identified as desvoidyi in the United States National Museum (one by Bigot) were accepted as correct by me when I wrote my previous paper. These differ from the specimen identified by Engel in being more pronouncedly green, and in having the abdomen, especially in the male, largely translucent brownish at bases of the tergites. RUTILIA DESVOIDYI Guérin. I am accepting as desvoidyi the female before me so identified by Engel. There are three similar specimens in the United States National Museum, one of them with a rather noticeable bristle in the anterodorsal series of setulae on hind tibia. There is some doubt as to the correctness of Engel’s identification of this species as he confused with it the male of a species of the genus Formosia, which rather closely resembles it in colour. I shall deal with this genus later. RUTILIA LEUCOSTICTA Schiner. A very pretty species, with the thorax marked as in splendida except that there are two white-dusted spots on hind margin of the mesonotum. The male and female before me present a striking difference in the colour of the abdomen, the former having it largely brownish testaceous, with a broad dorsocentral vitta and narrow apices to the tergites black, while the female has the ground colour coppery or greenish, and the black portions much more extensive, the third tergite being black, with a pair of small submedian white dusted spots, and the BY J. R. MALLOCH. 335 fourth tergite black, with the sides very broadly white dusted. The two white- dusted pleural spots are very conspicuous. The face and cheeks are yellow, densely golden yellow dusted, and with yellow hairs. The hairs on the parafacial in the male descend sparsely almost to lower level of eye, but in the female they are invisible below level of apex of second antennal segment. The scutellum is slightly convex on disc and there are, besides the six or eight marginal bristles, four to six other weaker bristles slightly anterior to them. The specimens before me are from New South Wales. RUTILIA PELLUCENS Macquart. Some specimens doubtfully referred here resemble small examples of desvoidyi, but the thoracic dorsum is more greenish than in that species, the base of costa is more evidently produced forward, or humped out, and in the characters cited in key it differs also. Length, 12-14 mm. Locality, Cairns, N. Queensland (J. F. Illingworth). RUTILIA LEPIDA Guérin. This species has much the appearance of formosa, but the head is brownish, with whitish-grey dust on cheeks, parafacials, and frontal orbits, and dark hairs on the two last, as well as on a portion of the mesopleura. I have seen only Queensland specimens. RUTILIA IMPERIALIS Guérin. This species rather closely resembles splendida, but may be readily separated by the characters listed in the foregoing key. I have seen only specimens from New South Wales. RUTILIA NITENS Walker. A small species belonging to the splendida group, the identity of which is in doubt. TERRESTRIAL ORCHIDS OF BARRINGTON TOPS, N.S.W. By the Rry. H. M. R. Rupp, B.A. (Five Text-figures. ) [Read 29th August, 1928.] On January 18, 1928, I left Eccleston, with the late Mr. John Hopson as guide, for an excursion to the Barrington Tops in search of orchids. I had described (These Proc., li, Part 3, 1926) a new species, Diwris venosa, from specimens brought to me, and I was anxious to examine this plant in its natural surroundings. - Imperfect material of other orchids from the same locality which had come into my hands increased my desire to investigate at first hand, and I also wished to test an opinion I had formed, that a careful examination of this somewhat isolated plateau at an elevation of 5,000 feet might disclose the presence there of orchids hitherto regarded as purely southern forms. From the point of view of a botanist, the Barrington Tops plateau may be described as consisting of low hills (which are, of course, the summits of the whole range of mountains) divided by broad grassy or Swampy moors, which are traversed by streams that give birth to half a dozen rivers. We were compelled to make the ascent from the Allyn River with as little delay as possible, for bad weather was threatening, and I was therefore unable to make a careful search of the mountain slopes until we came down. Epiphytes were visible in the lower brushes, but Cleisostoma tridentatum was the only one flowering. Higher up I found one or two fine racemes of Dipodium punctatum, and in one place Chiloglottis reflexra (presumably) was showing small buds. The first orchid I saw on the plateau proved to be Fitzgerald’s Pterostylis coccinea. In many specimens the beautiful reddish tint, which does not seem to be always present, was very marked. Moore and Betche record this species from Grafton—a surprising locality for what appears to be characteristically a highland orchid. Next came Gastrodia sesamoides, Prasophylum brevilabre, and another Pterostylis, referred to below. Gastrodia proved to be abundant, extending to the highest elevations. The Barrington form is very robust, and one plant was almost exactly 3 feet in height. After passing Carey’s Peak (5,260 feet) we went down a gentle slope to the moors of the Upper Barrington River. Among the innumerable flowers that studded these moors, I recognized Diuris venosa (Text-fig. 1). In my former text- figures of this species, drawn from scanty material, the labellum appears relatively narrow. While this is not exactly incorrect, I should now say that the typical form has a decidedly broad labellum, the colour of which ranges from the palest lilac to dark purplish-brown. The veining on the surface of the lamina is irregular and often absent, but it is constant and very striking on the back of all segments except the lower sepals. The flowers have a somewhat nodding habit, and are delicately fragrant. On the authority of a friend I had described the plant as BY H. M. R. RUPP. Sol occurring “in bogs and wet places,” but I can hardly confirm this. It grows in great profusion on these moors, often near the swamps, but quite as frequently well back on rising ground. It does not extend to the hillsides. Even more abundant than Diuris venosa was Dr. Rogers’ Prasophyllum odoratum. This species seems to have an extensive range, having been confused with P. patens for many years. In one or two details the Barrington Tops flower does not conform to the type, but the differences hardly justify any separation. P. odoratum is an attractive Prasophyll, and its fragrance perfumed the very air in some places on the Barrington moors. Like the Diuris, it does not seem to extend to the hillsides. P. brevilabre is more generally distributed, but is nowhere in great quantities. On the margins of the swamps and in boggy places, Thelymitra venosa was abundant. A hope I had entertained of finding the Blue Text-fig. A.—A typical moor on Barrington Tops. (Photograph lent by P. Laney.) Mountains form of this species was not realized, though the Barrington form is hardly typical. Dr. Rogers has made the following comment on it: “The lateral appendages of the column are barely involute, and the beak of the anther is more or less depressed and does not appear to be bifid”. Equally abundant, and rarely far from water, was a rather robust and almost leafless form of Pterostylis parviflora, with very dark red-brown flowers. This species exhibits some perplexing variations in habit-and season, and I am not satisfied of the identity of one or two forms at present included under it. On‘our second day on the plateau three orchids of great interest were found. The first was Lindley’s Chiloglottis Gunnii, the presence of which (in abundance) confirmed my opinion that southern orchids might occur on these northern high- lands. So far as I can learn, this species has not been previously recorded north of the Australian Alps, which lie some 350 miles to the south of Barrington Tops. The Barrington plant appears to conform in all respects to the southern type; the flowers are of good size and colour, and elongation of the fruiting stalk is well marked. Many plants were growing in sphagnum at the mouths of gullies dis- 338 TERRESTRIAL ORCHIDS OF BARRINGTON TOPS, N.S.W., charging into the moor-swamps, and only these were flowering. Leaves were abundant in places on the hillsides, without flower or fruit, and it is just possible that they belong to another species. The second discovery was made above the mouth of the gully where the Chiloglottis was found. In the sphagnum numerous solitary leaves invited further investigation; and a careful search brought a few fruiting stalks and some very withered flowers of Fitzgerald’s rare Adenochilus Nortonii, hitherto only known in a few Blue Mountains localities. It is not impossible that the Barrington plant may prove to be distinct, for the fragmentary specimens obtained (Text-fig. 2), while leaving no room for doubt as to the generic character, are of little use for further determination. Since A. Nortonii is the only known species in Australia, we may leave it at that for the present. I should say that the Barrington plant would probably be found flowering in November. Text-fig. 1.—Diuris venosa Rupp (x 34). Barrington Tops. Text-fig. 2.—Leaves, fruiting stalk, and withered flowering stalk of Adenochilus from Barrington Tops. (x #). At the mouth of the next gully, and practically growing in water, was a large colony of the fine Pterostylis falcata—another species hitherto supposed to belong to the south. I think that its discovery on Barrington Tops should be credited to the late Professor Launcelot Harrison. In a letter written shortly after the University excursion to this locality in 1925, Professor Harrison told me that ne BY H. M. Rk. RUPP. 339 believed he had found P. Baptistii on the plateau; but he had lost his specimens. I have no doubt that the supposed P. Baptistii (a lowland plant of warm climates) was really P. falcata; and the Professor wrote to me only a few days before his death, accepting this view. Among all our “Greenhoods” in Australia, P. falcata is the only serious rival to P. Baptistii in the size of the flower, and the two plants have much in common superficially. I had last seen P. falcata in bogs near Mt. Barrow in Tasmania, and there seem to be no differences of importance between the northern and the southern form. Text-fig. 3—The Barrington Tops Pterostylis decurva Rogers (b), compared with P. obtusa R. Br. (a) and a typical P. decurva (c). (x 3). Text-fig. 4.—Prasophyllum Ruppit Rogers, from the mountain-slopes below Barrington Tops. (a) Plant (x 4); (bv) Flower opened up, from the front; (c) Labellum from the side; (d) Column from the front. (b), (c), (d) variously enlarged. Another Pterostylis abundant on the plateau was P. cycnocephala. This brings us to the last member of the genus which I found—alluded to above as having been seen soon after we reached the plateau. In 1926 Mr. Charles Barrett brought me a few half-pressed specimens of this plant, which I took to be a leafy form of Dr. Rogers’ P. decurva. Mr. W. H. Nicholls and others pointed out that it seemed to differ in some important respects from the type of that species, and I was glad to have the opportunity of inspecting it in situ, and of collecting ample material for examination (Text-fig. 3). It is very plentiful on the hillsides, and ascends to the very summit of Carey’s Peak; I also traced it down the mountain-slopes to 3,500 feet. Dr. Rogers and other workers have carefully examined the material sent by 340 TERRESTRIAL ORCHIDS OF BARRINGTON TOPS, N.S.W., me, and I have done the same with a large number of specimens. It appears to vary so greatly, even in this restricted area of Barrington Tops, that we do not think it wise at present to separate it from P. decurva. Some of the large plants show apparently constant features which would appear to justify separation, but they are linked up with almost typical P. decurva by numerous intermediates; and until more exhaustive investigation is made on the spot, it is better to include it under this species than to give cause for confusion by attempting to raise it to specific rank. Thelymitra ixioides was nearly past flowering. This plant does not grow tall here, but the flowers are even larger than the type. Microtis parviflora was fairly common in many places. A few undoubted Corysanthes leaves were found, but they were insufficient for identification. In a marshy depression on a hillside some distance down the Barrington Valley from our camp, there was a Prasophyllum which seemed distinct. It was a moderately tall plant with greenish flowers, just perceptibly perfumed. It is described below under the name P. Rogersii. During our descent from the Tops, in one of the higher Nothofagus brushes, I noticed, high up on a large tree, a fine clump of Dendrobium which I was satisfied must be D. falcorostrum. In the neighbourhood of 3,000 feet there was very good “orchid country.” Pterostylis parviflora reappeared here—a form with flowers as red as those on the plateau, but the plants were taller and less robust. It was rather surprising to find Orthoceras strictum, which had been seen during a visit © to Bullahdelah a week before under totally different conditions. Near by was a scattered colony of “pigmy’’ Prasophylls which I could not determine; in general appearance the flowering-spike resembles that of P. viride, but the likeness is superficial only. Dr. Rogers was unable to match this plant with any species hitherto published, and a description appears below under the name P. Hopsonii. A little further on quite a number of excellent specimens were found of another of these pigmy Prasophylls (Text-fig. 4), which I had discovered twelve months earlier in a tea-tree scrub near Paterson, and which Dr. Rogers has described as P. Rupp (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., li, 1927). In the middle of this colony was a single plant, with every flower perfect, of P. fimbriatum. To sum up the results of the excursion: Three species were found which are not known at present in any other locality—Diuris venosa, Prasophyllum Rogersii, and P. Hopsonii. The range of habitat has been considerably extended to the north in the case of Chiloglottis Gunnii, Pterostylis falcata, P. decurva, Thelymitra venosa, and Adenochilus; to which should perhaps be added Prasophyllum jfimbriatum. Within the limits of four days, evidence was secured of the existence in this locality of 23 species of terrestrial orchids. (Long-withered specimens of a second Diuris, not mentioned above, are included in this total.) I think it is probable that a visit in November or early December would be rewarded by the discovery of other species which were not flowering in January, though the late Mr. Hopson considered that the latter month is the time to see the Barrington Tops flora at its best. Descriptions of Two New Species of Prasophyllum. PRASOPHYLLUM ROGERSI, 0. Sp. Planta gracilis, 30-45 cm. alta. Folium erectum, non inflorescentiam excedens. Spica laxa cum 12-20 floribus subsessilibus. Flores virides, vix tandem odorati. Sepalum dorsale fere erectum, latum, ovatum, acutum, 5:5 mm. longum, 5-nervium. Sepala lateralia separata, lanceolata, 5-5 mm. longa, 3-nervia. Petala erecta, obtusa, lata, 5-5-5 mm. longa. Labellum ovatum marginibus integris, basi fere erectum, in BY H. M. R. RUPP. 341 parte tertia ad apicem flexum: pars callosa prominens et lata, supra flexum extendens. Columna brevis, laciniis parvis. Anthera altior laciniis, humilior rostello. Plant comparatively slender, 30-45 cm. high, with the leaf-sheath produced into a lamina apparently not exceeding the inflorescence. Flowers 12-20 in a loose spike, almost sessile, greenish, faintly perfumed. Dorsal sepal nearly straight, broadly ovate, acute, 5-5 mm. long, with three prominent nerves and a finer one on each side. Lateral sepals free, spreading, lanceolate, equal to or somewhat longer than the dorsal one, hardly acute, 3-nerved. Petals erect, obtuse, nearly or quite as long as the dorsal sepal, broader than the lateral sepals. Labellum straight for two-thirds of its length from the base; the anterior third merely curved, not sharply reflexed; the whole labellum somewhat broadly ovate, but contracted towards the apex, margins entire; greatest width about 2:75 mm. Callus portion prominent, especially where it extends just beyond the curve, broader towards the base. Column short, the lateral appendages small. Anther broad, higher than the lateral appendages, scarcely as high as the rostellum. In examining this and the following species for purposes of description, I am indebted to Dr. R. S. Rogers, who sent me the notes he had made on specimens forwarded to him. These made the task of checking my own original notes with moistened herbarium material much less difficult. The character of the labellum of the present species at once marks it as very distinct, and I have ventured to name it after our recognized leader in the field of Australian orchidology. It was growing along a marshy depression on a hillside at a little over 5,000 feet, and about a dozen plants were collected. PRASOPHYLLUM HOoPSONTI, Nn. SD. Planta gracillima, 10-25 cm. alta, cum bractea sub inflorescentia. Flores 4-12, minutissimi, virides, labellis fuscis. Sepalum dorsale 2 mm. longum, ovatum, cucullatum, saepe apice glanduloso. Sepala lateralia 2-2-5 mm. longa, separata, basi gibbosa, supra aliquantum concava, apicibus glandulosis. Petala erecta, brevissima, fere triangula, acuta. Labellum unguiculatum, ovatum, supra convexum cum notatione fusco in medio, mucronatum apice recurvo. Margines depressi, breviter ciliati. Columna brevis et lata, laciniis bifidis altioribus rostello; chele anterior breviter ciliata, longior et angustior posteriore. Anthera erecta, lata, altior rostello. Ovarium magnum, !ongius flore. A very slender plant, 10-25 cm. high, with a sheathing leafy bract just under the flowering spike. Flowers 4-12, minute, greenish, the labellum darker than the other segments. Dorsal sepal broadly ovate, rather strikingly cucullate, acute, often with an obscure gland at the tip. Lateral sepals quite free, gibbous at the base, somewhat concave on the inside, slightly longer than the dorsal sepal, prominently gland-tipped. Petals erect, acute, almost triangular, very short (about 1-5 mm.). Labellum on a movable curved claw, ovate, convex above with a dark median line not well defined, mucronate with a sharply recurved apex. Margins depressed, very shortly and irregularly ciliate. Column short and broad, with bifid lateral appendages higher than the rostellum; anterior segment slightly ciliate, longer and narrower than the blunt posterior segment. Anther erect and broad but acute, higher than the rostellum. Ovary rather large, longer than the flower. Dr. R. S. Rogers (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Australia, li, 1927, p. 294) has tabulated the published species of Prasophyllum which possess ciliated floral segments. The 342 TERRESTRIAL ORCHIDS OF BARRINGTON TOPS, N.S.W. new species would occupy a place in this table near P. intricatum Stuart; but while it agrees with the latter in the incidence of ciliation (labellum and column- appendages), the cilia are developed far more vigorously in P. intricatum, and there is little resemblance between the two otherwise. I have named the present species after the late Mr. John Hopson of Eccleston, N.S.W., who located several specimens for me, and to whom I was much indebted for assistance in collecting other orchids of the district. A List of the Terrestrial Orchids Recorded in this Paper, with References to Illustrations. Dipodium punctatum R. Br. (Fitzgerald, I, 7). Gastrodia sesamoides R. Br. (Fitzg., II, 5). Thelymitra ixioides Swz. (Fitz., II, 3; Hook., Fl. Tas., I1). venosa R. Br. Diuris venosa Rupp. (Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., li, 3, 1926, and this paper). sp. ? (withered). Orthoceras strictum R. Br. (Fitzg., I, 3). Prasophyllum odoratum Rogers (Rogers, “South Australian Orchids’, Plate 6). brevilabre Hook., f. (Fitzg., II, 1). jimbriatum R. Br. (Fitzg., I, 5). Hopsonii Rupp. Rogersii Rupp. Rupp Rogers (this paper). Microtis parviflora, R. Br. (Fitzg., II, 1). Corysanthes (leaves only). Pterostylis falcata Rogers (Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 28 (N.S.), I, 1915). coccinea Fitzg. (Fitzg., I, 4). decurva Rogers (Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., xlvii, 1923, and this paper). parviflora R. Br. (Fitzg. I, 7). cycnocephala Fitzg. (Fitzg., I, 2). Adenochilus Nortonii Fitzg. (Fitzg., I, 2, and this paper). Chiloglottis Gunnii Lindl. (Fitzg., Il, 2; Rodway, Fl. Tas., p. 208). reflera (Cheel). (Fitzg. and Rodway, loc. cit., as C. diphylla R. Br.). References thus (Fitzg., II, 5) are to R. D. Fitzgerald, Australian Orchids, Sydney, 1882. 2 vols. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTHRA, No. xvi. By J. R. MALroc#. (Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) (Four Text-figures.) [Read 25th July, 1928.] Family Ortalidae. Subfamily PLATYSTOMINAE. Genus Euprrosopra Macquart. This genus occurs from China southward through the Orient to Australia, many of the species occurring in New Guinea, and five being recorded from Australia. Of the latter, australis (Walker) is unknown except from the original description, but even if it is a valid species the name is preoccupied by australis Macquart, which latter is a synonym of maculipennis Guérin. A peculiar character of the genus is the haired basal section of radius. This vein is very frequently setulose in Ortalidae, but the setulae are almost always confined to that section of the vein beyond level of the humeral cross- vein. Another very striking feature of certain species of the genus is the forward extension of the tegula, which normally is but a small scale covering the root of the wing, and at first I was tempted to consider the species in which the | tegulae are carried forward to the humeri as entitled to at least subgeneric distinction, an opinion which I subsequently abandoned on the discovery of the male with normal tegulae and on examining all the species available to me here. Nothing is known of the economic status of the species of the genus, but amongst the material before me are two species which bear ms. labels ‘ex corn’ and ‘ex scrub’ respectively, though without further indication of what the ‘ex’ means. I have included in the subjoined key all the species available to me which are likely to occur in Australia or which are new. It is extremely probable that there are many more species to be discovered in Australia. Unfortunately most of the material before me belongs to the United States National Museum and some types must be deposited in that institution, so that they will not be available even on loan to Australian students of the family. Key to the Species. 1. Seutellum with a quite pronounced linear depression in centre of apex, and on each side of it glossy black and pronouncedly convex .............:......-..-.--- 2 Scutellum without a distinct central depression at apex and lacking glossy black TEN IGTCR (EERE G Ghg Aor NCR CMEEE aco nO ora Toc etG Pre ORME o onceoinng Bia GDfSIo ol Gene Soeiele He. cere OI ke 3 2. Hind margin of second abdominal tergite with pale lanceolate scales; apical dark spot on wing not connected with the preapical dark fascia, a dark streak on costa between the stigmatal fascia and the one over outer cross-vein .. separata Hendel 344 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVI, Hind margins of second and third tergites, middle of third, and all of fourth and fifth, with pale lanceolate scales; apical dark spot on wing connected with preapical fascia on costa, no dark streak on costa between the stigmatal fascia and the OM GiyGie OuUliee GHCSSAWEIMN sosncavcesocos0a0c000nD boc CKD CDDNS conjuncta Hendel 3. Entire fore legs and all of mid and hind tarsi black; scutellum with a very slight central depression at apex and two short bristles on each side of it; third and fourth abdominal tergites of female and third to fifth in male with sparse pear- shaped pale scales on entire surface; third antennal segment not longer than distance from its apex to mouth margin; central facial area finely transversely furrowed; arista with short hairs at base; tegulae carried forward to the humeri in female, almost normal in male ...............- macrotegularia, n. sp. Some part of fore legs yellow or white; scutellum without any indication of a central apical depression and with four or six quite long bristles; abdomen of female without scales, the hairs normal; tegulae not carried beyond middle of meso- IGA, WMEWANNK, ine! soocovbcop Dodds ODD DDDOO OU OD DOOD OOD OND ODS OODDODDOCS 4 4. Scutellum with four bristles; third antennal segment at least 1:5 times as long as distance from its apex to mouth margin; wings brown, with numerous small pale spots, arranged along, and touching, the veins in the narrow cells; pleura blackish-grey, with three golden-brown dusted vittae, one on upper margin, one below middle of mesopleura, and another on upper half of sternopleura; centre Oie i#ACO woallowss WESWS monn! sooobconda0dc ooo o0asadbOOasOSOS miliaria Hendel Scutellum with six bristles; wings pale, with dark markings, and usually more or less GhigninoUhy wAOINI (Gx, GOCCOWWAGIUMS) oaococosconn ons andbadaonDG Conc OC UODaOOSOS 5 ye CNG eriSyershts OVE ee) onary Be A Hoste Blea OO SLO OOO OE OOo iO OLE Oran orn tia. bce od oe cad oc Grad Gb d biokoG 6 Arista distinctly haired at base, the hairs longer than its basal diameter ...... 7 6. Wing with a blackish fascia extending from stigma over inner cross-vein to middle : of second posterior cell, widest on costa, an almost uniformly wide complete fuscous fascia from before apex of second vein which encloses outer cross-vein, a dark spot on wing tip from apex of second vein to apex of fourth, a small streak at anterior extremity of same, and one on costa between the fasciae, and some spots and streaks on basal half of wing; head as high as broad; antennae short, third segment about three times as long as wide; metatarsus of fore legs of male with two compressed, pointed, outwardly bent, bristles at apex ........ ME ee a ECS Choro) aia co Arora Or G.O Oo DIRKG Ee GOO OI ORO aracaCno DD cron tenuicornis Macquart Wing with small, rather faint, dark spots, the most conspicuous being a _ sub- quadrate black mark at stigma which extends to, or slightly over, second vein, no fasciae beyond this; antennae distinctly more than half the length of face; male without a pair of apical bristles on fore metatarsus .. maculipennis Guérin 7. Face yellow, with numerous dark dots on the central flat area; tegulae normal; head not much higher than wide; third antennal segment about twice as long as ChICAINGS) ROA, eS AOENS WO MON wMeBEEIH oooonccncgbs0dss00000 punctifacies, Nn. sp. Face yellow, without dark dots on central flat area; tegulae produced forward, finger- like, to almost above middle of mesopleura; head about twice as high as wide; third antennal segment about as long as distance from its apex to mouth TIVE UTD Sree aee el ces slate pavers (AAS SMe Men en ane lene colieteemts Va ttalet io fonerciier als cunteiote 4) sites tegularia, n. sp. EUPROSOPIA SEPARATA ,Hendel. Head clay-yellow, white dusted along sides of eyes, the centre of frons broadly brown or fuscous, its entire width dark posteriorly, except a patch of grey dust on each orbit; antennal foveae and a streak from each to mouth margin fuscous; sides of labrum and centre of palpi black; antennae orange-yellow. Thorax brown, densely grey dusted, with seven rather faint brown dorsal vittae, the central one evident only in front and behind; scutellum with the lateral convexities glossy black; most of the pleural hairs and bristles white. Abdomen coloured as thorax, paler at base, the tergites brown at apices. - Legs reddish-brown, nearly all of tibiae, apices of mid pair faintly, and of hind pair distinctly, blackened, all tarsi black, the basal segment white except at extreme apex. Wings with some short transverse black streaks in cells of basal third, a wedge-shaped fuscous fascia extending from stigma over inner cross-vein almost to hind margin, which encloses several yellowish patches on and near costa, a small dark streak beyond BY J. R. MALLOCH. 345 this on costa, a complete and almost uniform dark fascia from before apex of second vein over outer cross-vein which has pale enclosed patches at costal end, an incomplete dark fascia at apex of second vein, and an isolated dark apical spot extending from before third vein to beyond fourth. Calyptrae white, margin of upper one fuscous, outer half of lower one brownish. Head higher than long; arista bare; third antennal segment more than three times as long as wide, and fully 1-5 times as long as distance from its apex to mouth margin. Bristles on hind margin of mesopleura slightly lanceolate; secutellum with four bristles. Fore femur without well developed ventral bristles. Length, 8-9 mm. Cairns, N. Queensland (A. P. Dodd). Labelled ‘ex corn’. EUPROSOPIA CONJUNCTA Hendel. I have not seen this species which, however, ought to be readily distinguished from the preceding one by the characters listed in the key, which are culled from the original description. — Both this and the preceding species were described from Townsville, N. Queensland, and conjuncta was also recorded from Port Darwin. EXUPROSOPIA MACROTEGULARIA, Nl. Sp. ; Female.—Head clay-yellow, frons fulvous yellow, narrowly fuscous in centre of anterior half, entirely fuscous posteriorly, and with the posterior orbits broadly, and remainder of orbits narrowly, grey dusted; face with a black streak emanating from each antennal fovea and extending to, or almost to, mouth margin; labrum black except in centre; antennae orange-yellow, third segment browned except at base; arista fuscous, pale at base; palpi black, yellow at bases, and whitish dusted at apices. Thorax brown, with grey dust, mesonotum with three fuscous presutural vittae which are fused except in front, and three complete and four intermediate partial. vittae behind suture, some of which are brown instead of fuscous; scutellum concolorous with mesonotum, with three brown vittae; pleura grey dusted in part, and without evident vittae. Abdomen largely dark brown or fuscous above, sides of second tergite, two spots in centre of posterior margin of third tergite, and two on anterior and other two on posterior margin of fourth tergite, grey dusted, fifth tergite with pale pile centrally in front and scale-like pale ornamentation laterally. Legs black, mid and hind tibiae, except their apices, brownish-yellow. Wings hyaline, with fuscous markings as in Text-fig. 1; tegulae greyish testaceous. Calyptrae white, margin of upper one fuscous, dise of the lower one pale brown. MHalteres yellow. Head about 1:25 times as high as wide; frons depressed in centre; only the outer vertical bristles present, short and stout; ocellars lacking; antennae short, third segment not more than 2-5 times as long as wide, and shorter than distance from its apex to mouth margin; arista short haired at base; flat central portion of face finely transversely furrowed; palpi slightly widened, lanceolate. Dorsal bristles on thorax short, neither humeral nor notopleural bristles present owing to the great development of the closely adherent tegulae; suprasquamal ridge without trace of the long pale hairs so prominent in separata; scutellum with a slight central apical depression, and on each side of it two short rather closely placed bristles; mesopleura black-haired on disc, the series of hairs on hind margin white, those. on upper portion of series slightly thickened. 346 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVi, Abdomen with pale sparse pear-shaped scales on third and fourth tergites, all hairs on second tergite fine, the fifth tergite with a granulose appearance on sides. Tarsi of fore legs thicker than those of other pairs; fore femur without ventral bristles. Venation of wing as in Text-fig. 1; tegulae elongate, shaped somewhat like the seed of some grasses, extending to humeri and adhering closely to noto- pleural suture, slightly scaled anteriorly, and with a tridentate scale below at apex in type (sometimes lacking). Male.—Differs from female as noted in the key. Length, 8 mm. Type, Kuranda, Queensland (F. P. Dodd); allotype and 3 paratypes, Cairns, N. Queensland. Text-fig. 1. Huprosopia macrotegularia, Wing. Text-fig. 2. H. punctifacies. Wing. 3 Text-fig. FE. tegularia. Wing. EUPROSOPIA MILIARIA Hendel. This species is smaller and much duller coloured than macrotegularia, and has the wings dull brownish, with many small, paler, hyaline dots. Hendel describes this species as new under the above name, but lists under it Platystoma pectorale Walker, with the name Huprosopia diminutiva Walker (of de Meijere) aS a synonym. Why the species name pectorale is not used by Hendel I do not know. The records are from the New Guinea region and Molucea. The single specimen before me is from Arawe, New Britain (Dr. Heydon). EUPROSOPIA MACULIPENNIS Guérin. This species was described as Platystoma australe by Macquart, and thus, if Platystoma australe Walker is a distinct species of Huwprosopia, it will have to be renamed. I have not seen maculipennis, but it has been recorded from Australia and Tasmania. The characters cited in the key ought to suffice for its recognition. EXUPROSOPIA PUNCTIFACIES, 0. Sp. Male.—Head testaceous, upper orbits, triangle, and vertex grey dusted; the frons slightly browned in part above; face with numerous small black dots on BY J. R. MALLOCH. 347 the raised central portion; third antennal segment reddish, becoming brownish above; palpi testaceous yellow; cephalic hairs pale, bristles black. Thorax fuscous, quite densely grey dusted, dorsum with traces of seven dark vittae, none of them complete, the submedian pair distinct only for a short distance behind suture; pleura grey dusted, with a faint brown mark on mesopleura; hairs on thorax mixed pale and dark, the bristles black. Abdomen coloured as thorax, with a brown spot on each side of the median line on tergites 3 to 5, and a transverse brown streak near hind margin of tergites 2 to 4, which is more or less interrupted, and usually connected with the submedian spots on tergites 3 and 4. Legs brownish testaceous, femora darker, especially at apices, the apices of tibiae fuscous, basal segment of all tarsi white, its extreme tip and all of segments 2 to 5 black. Wings with dark brown markings as in Text-fig. 2. Calyptrae white, margin of upper one fuscous. MHalteres yellow. Head almost as wide’ as high; frons slightly depressed, ocellars microscopic; verticals all strong; postverticals lacking; third antennal segment about twice as long as its distance from mouth margin; arista short haired at base; face not furrowed; bristle on lower occiput long and strong. Humeral and both notopleural bristles present, four bristles on hind margin of mesonotum, and six on scutellum; hairs on hind margin of mesopleura not lanceolate. Abdomen without scales. Fourth wing-vein slightly curved forward at apex. Posteroventral bristles on fore femora well developed and quite numerous. Length, 8 mm. Type, Magnetic Is., Queensland (F. P. Dodd 7). There is no collector’s name on the label, but it is similar in appearance to those belonging to the collector suggested above. EUPROSOPIA TEGULARIA, N. Sp. : Female.—Head reddish testaceous, with a brownish streak from each antennal fovea to mouth margin; frontal and facial orbits grey dusted; third antennal segment brownish above; palpi rufous yellow; hairs pale, bristles black. Thorax fuscous, with dense yellowish-grey dust; mesonotum with three rather broad, conspicuous black vittae which are continued over the scutellum; hairs mixed black and yellow, bristles black. Abdomen coloured as thorax, with a broad black vitta on each side of dorsum. Legs rufous, coxae fuscous, tarsi black, basal segment oi mid and hind tarsi broadly, of fore pair narrowly, reddish at base. Wings marked with fuscous as in Text-fig. 3. Calyptrae brown, margin of upper one fuscous. Halteres yellow. Head nearly twice as high as wide; frons at vertex not twice as wide as third antennal segment, gradually widened to anterior margin where it is fully twice as wide as at vertex and fully one-third as wide as its length; vertex with one pair of bristles; postverticals minute; ocellars lacking; third antennal segment more than three times as long as wide and about equal in length to distance from its apex to mouth margin; arista short-haired at base; face not transversely furrowed in centre; cheek about as high as length of thir¢ antennal segment. Thorax with the posterior notopleural bristle on a prominent elevation; both notopleurals and humeral bristle present; scutellum with six bristles; suprasquamal ridge long-haired (almost bare in miliaria, punctifacies and macrotegularia). Abdomen without scales. Fore femora without well developed posteroventral bristles. Length, 11-13 mm. 348 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVi, Type, Solomon Is., July-Aug., 1909 (W. W. Froggatt). One paratype with ms. label apparently ‘Alu’ or ‘Ala’. The very distinctly vittate thoracic dorsum must be very similar to that of tigrina Osten-Sacken, but the pleura in tigrina bear two golden vittae which are not present at all in tegularia. Possibly the tegulae in the male are normal. Genus LAMPROGASTER Macquart. This genus has many characters in common with Huwprosopia, but differs in having the radius bare basad of the level of humeral cross-vein. I have not sufficient material to permit me to arrive at a conclusion as to the other characters that can be used for the distinction of the two genera. MHendel cites in his generic key only the fact that the species of Lamprogaster have the abdomen metallic, at least in part, and those of Huwprosopia have it never metallic. It may be that the presence of a strong bristle on the upper hind margin of mesopleura in Lamprogaster and its absence in Huprosopia is a constant character, as indicated by my species, but I cannot say definitely without access to more material. There are more than 20 valid species of the genus, many of them Australian. I have before me several Australian species of the genus, and below I give a short synopsis of the available species to enable students of the group to identify them. I use different characters for my major grouping from those used by Hendel, as I always prefer to make use of structural rather than colour characters in such cases. Key to species known to the author. 1. Scutellum with many hairs on dise in addition to the marginal bristles .......... 2 Scutellum without hairs on disc, only the marginal bristles present ............-.- 5 2. Wings with a conspicuous broad dark brown costal vitta, and the outer cross-vein Con'spicuouslyaclonudedswith browne eee cero stenoparia Hendel Wings either entirely yellowish hyaline or with quite faint brownish marks on costal 365} 41 (0) OBER Meme so See orp NaN one a Nema HE Min Merit U3 Gita Gain Gor armed cla moe o mOmOIm 3 (Jt) Face with a broad fuscous streak from each antennal fovea to mouth margin; labrum with a fuscous mark on each side; wings yellowish hyaline, without (Cen alley podkeh id Gh oa Peres ner lose cece ES tA AMER 9 clea ae eantenG GAO eeGLS Oe xzanthoptera Hendel Macegand lao ru ye OW ye cea esicoe soso se eed eee ye Oe TERE eae ee ROE OI ee 4 4. Wings entirely yellowish hyaline, without any indication of brown markings; hairs andmbristleswentirelywuceOUS eee oie eeiniceine zelotypa Hendel Wings more intensely yellow along costal half, and with indications of a brownish streak from costa to inner cross-vein, a small pale brown spot near apex of second vein, and a darker brown cloud along tip of costa; hairs and bristles of GOLSUM DVLA Chas eat ora ances ecese ecsise Shoe eRE NOI Weal SUCRE eae ir alrciscirce indistineta, n. sp. 5. Wing with a conspicuous zig-zag black mark extending from humeral cross-vein across dise to apices of posterior basal cells, and in addition three other black marks along costa, the largest extending over inner cross-vein, a smaller spot near apex of second vein, and a narrow streak round apex of costa; thorax metallic blue- green in centre of disc, the sides and pleura fulvous yellow .... bicolor Macquart No conspicuous black mark basad of the one on costa which extends to inner cross- 92300 Lee i Ei See Atty AY oho sot CBee oui CURE Bands by ode Glo pea NS PLO teh as devas SoM ek eects 6 6. Thorax fulvous yellow, with a broad metallic blue-green stripe on dorsum, on which are three grey-dusted vittae; the dark mark on costa at level of inner cross-vein large and subquadrate, deep black; outer cross-vein not Cloude cine een elieWichronle: fore te\w vou 'o: is. lobia lar auietethe sce dates he uestayteiee tomtehe ettomec adeno Sua ofeneeee meneame mer onc /eRe flavipennis Macquart Thoracic dorsum entirely metallic blue-green, without noticeable grey dusted vittae; the dark mark on costa at level of inner cross-vein narrow, usually pale brown except on inner portion, where it becomes black; outer cross-vein quite noticeably OObWEGh acacia ooo monOGebtan 6 Dow Sbload o 60 oO b0 ob OU COMdacoD lepida Walker BY J. R. MALLOCH. 349° LAMPROGASTER XANTHOPTERA Hendel. This species is dark blue-green, with a strong violet tinge on dorsum of abdomen, and the legs are entirely yellow except for the dark tips of tarsi. In addition to the dark marks on head mentioned in the key the cheeks are brownish. Originally described from New Britain; I have before me a specimen from the Solomon Islands, collected in 1909 by W. W. Froggatt and sent by him to the United States National Museum. LAMPROGASTER BICOLOR Macquart. This species is one of a group which has the costal margin of the wings marked more or less distinctly with black or brown spots, the greatest number being four, as in the present species. One might be pardoned for doubting the claim of the various forms to more than varietal rank, but I believe, from an examination of the material in hand now, that the differently marked forms are really valid species, offshoots of one parent species. The species are very similar and it may be that the names given by Hendel are not correctly applied, but only an examination of the types, if these are in existence, will determine this. It appears possible that laeta Macquart might be the same as the species now before me. Locality.—Mt. Kosciusko, N.S.W., 1893. LAMPROGASTER FLAVIPENNIS Macquart. I have but one specimen which I refer here before me. The large black mark at level of inner cross-vein is very conspicuous, the apical dark mark is less evident, and the small dark spot on second vein is quite inconspicuous. The legs are almost entirely black in the male before me, but there is evidently some variation in this character in this species, as there is a variety named nigripes. Locality.—Gisborne, V. (Lyell). LAMPROGASTER LEPIDA Walker. Readily distinguished from the preceding two species by the uniform metallic blue-green dorsum of thorax and abdomen, and also by the less intense black colour of the spot on costa at level of inner cross-vein; the apical costal mark is usually darker than the other markings. Localities—Hamilton and Gordonvale, Queensland. LAMPROGASTER INDISTINCTA, Nl. SD. Male.—Head fulvous yellow, frons and cheeks brownish-red, orbits and lower occiput yellow dusted, antennae and palpi orange-yellow. Thorax fulvous yellow, centre of mesonotum broadly metallic blue-green, the dark colour not sharply margined laterally, and without grey vittae; scutellum without metallic lustre; hairs on mesonotum and all bristles black. Abdomen glossy brownish testaceous, with but slight metallic tinge, hairs mostly dark. Legs fulvous yellow, apices of tarsi fuscous. Wings yellow hyaline, with four faint rudimentary brownish marks situated as in bicolor, the apical costal one most evident. Calyptrae yellow. Arista pubescent at base; head as in bicolor. Scutellum with a slight apical central depression, and eight marginal bristles. Outer cross-vein of wing sloping towards base of wing at its anterior extremity; veins 3 and 4 very slightly incurved at extreme apices. Length, 10 mm. Type, Banks Island, N. Australia (W. W. Froggatt). Type specimen in United States National Museum. 350 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVi, LAMPROGASTER ZELOTYPA Hendel. This is one of the few species of the genus in which the wings are without dark markings. The entire head, thorax, and abdomen are yellow in the male before me, the last having but a slight indication of a violet tinge on dorsum, though it is glossy. The hairs and bristles are yellow, and the strong bristle on upper hind margin of the mesopleura is hard to distinguish from the hairs on this account. I have before me one specimen from Cairns, N. Queensland. Hendel cites L. ventralis Walker as the same species, and lists it from New Guinea and Australia. LAMPROGASTER STENOPARIA Hendel. This species has the general colour of thorax and abdomen bright metallic blue, the abdomen more amethyst, the wings with a broad costal cloud of dark brown, and the outer cross-vein with a brown cloud. The legs are yellow, with the apices of the tarsi brownish. The mesopleural bristle is black and prominent. The specimen before me is from Cairns, N. Queensland (A. P. Dodd). Known only from Queensland. Genus Duomyta Walker. This genus was placed in the ‘Stenopterini by Hendel, but my opinion is that it belongs to the Platystomini, the cephalic characters being very similar to those of Lamprogaster and Euprosopia. In fact, when one considers the head structure, large lower squama, and thoracic characters, no other conclusion remains but that its affinities (or at least those of the genotype) are with the two genera above named. I have before me the genotype of Duomyia and cite as the distinguishing characters of the genus only those possessed by that species. It may be that at least some of the species included in Duomyia by authors do not agree with these characters in all respects. One Australian species before me does not. Hendel, in distinguishing the tribes of Platystominae, selects the habitus of the insects as criteria almost exclusively, separating those with ant-like structure from the others, and further subdividing the remainder into groups of slender bodied and plump species after removing Trapherini on the structure of the epistome. The system is not an unqualified success, as can be seen from the inclusion in the slender bodied group Stenopterini, of the genus Duomyia, the genotype, obscura Walker, being one of the most robust species available to me at this time. The material at my disposal, however, is insufficient to permit of an exhaustive survey of even the Australian species, so I merely deal with some of the more outstanding forms in this paper. The genus Duomyia, as represented by the genotype, is readily distinguished from HLuprosopia by the lack of hairs on the radius basad of the humeral cross- vein, and by the presence of fine hairs on hind coxae above bases of the femora. From Lamprogaster it is distinguished by the last-mentioned character, and the lack of a bristle on the upper portion of the hind margin of the mesopleura. Of the 13 species placed in the genus by Hendel, 12 occur in Australia, and 1 in Chile. The last-mentioned species may not be congeneric with the Australian forms. BY J. R. MALLOCIZ. 351 DUOMYIA OBSCURA Walker. A synonym of this is Stenopterina gigas Macquart. Two males, Brisbane; one female, Banks Island. Genus AcHIAS Fabricius. The species of this genus have the head widened, generally more so in the males than in the females, usually distinctly wider than the thorax, and in some cases with the eyes on prominent processes or stalks, much as in the family Diopsidae. In addition to this character, the arista is long haired on almost the entire length, the central plate of face has a sharp edge along inner margin of each antennal fovea and there is no bristle on the upper portion of hind margin of mesopleura. _Hendel records no species of the genus from Australia, but I have seen two from Kuranda, Queensland. There are about 16 described species, many of them from New Guinea. I am not certain of the identity of the two Australian species at present. Subfamily RIVELLIINAE. This subfamily is readily distinguished from the genera above dealt with by the very much smaller lower calypter. I may have an opportunity to go into more detailed definition of these groups at some future time if more material is available. Most of the specimens of the family collected by the late Dr. E. W. Ferguson were sent to Dr. Bezzi before the death of the latter and, unless that material is returned so that it can be used for a survey of the family, fresh specimens will have to be obtained from other sources. Genus RIivELLIA Robineau-Desvoidy. I have two species of this genus before me from Australia. Only one of them I have been able to identify as already described. RIVELLIA CONNATA (Thomson). Localities—Coramba, Dorrigo Rd., 1,000 feet, 31.1.22; and Belaringar, 9.9.23, N.S.W.; Tammin, and Merredin, W.A., 1926 (HE. W. Ferguson). Genus ELASSOGASTER Bigot. This genus is placed in Stenopterini by Hendel. The only distinguishing character which he cites for the group that applies to this genus is the shape of the abdomen. This is rather elongate, more or less compressed from the sides, and about uniformly wide from base to apex. The Rivelliini have the abdomen more ovate, and the Platystomini have it broad at base and tapered to apex. I hardly dare to suggest the use of such a character to anyone who does not have first a strong intuitive inclination to put the insects into their proper segregates, and incline to disregard the grouping. I have not seen the genotype of Hlassogaster, which is metallicus Bigot. Three or four of the 16 known species of the genus occur in New Guinea, and several in Africa. The records below are the first from Australia. ELASSOGASTER SEPSOIDES Walker. A metallic blue-green species. Antennae reddish-yellow; palpi black; frons dark brown; vibrissal angles yellowish. Thoracic dorsum somewhat granulose, 352 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVi, with a narrow central vitta of grey dust which is divided into two a little behind suture. Legs rufous yellow, usually with the mid and hind femora browned in part, fore tibiae and tarsi and apices of mid and hind tarsi fuscous, hind tibiae sometimes browned. Wings clear, with a large fuscous spot at apex as in Text-fig. 4. Text-fig. 4. Hlassogaster sepsoides. Wing. Frons with only the four verticals present; arista subnude; face convex centrally, without sharply defined foveae; palpi broad; third antennal segment fully three times as long as wide; labrum broadly exposed. Prosternum broad, hairy; only the bristle near humeral angle present on anterior margin of thorax, the acrostichal pair undeveloped; mesopleura with a strong upper hind marginal bristle; humeral and both notopleural bristles present; scutellum with four marginal bristles and no fine discal hairs. Wing venation as in Text-fig. 4. Length, 6-8 mm. Localities—Hamilton, Queensland, January, 1890; Cairns, N. Queensland, ‘dung’ (J. F. Illingworth). A widely distributed species, occurring in Ceylon, Formosa, Amboina, Philippine Islands and New Guinea. The material which I have examined from the Philippines is the type series of Plagiostenopterina hendeli Knab, which is a synonym of sepsoides. The speci- mens are labelled, ‘larvae feeding on egg-pods of Locusta migratoria’. The larvae may be more or less scavengers as indicated by the record on the specimen collected at Cairns. ELASSOGASTER TERRAE-REGINAE, 0. Sp. Male and female.—Similar to sepsoides in general colour, but the wing tips are without a dark spot, there being only a faint narrow pale brown suffusion along the apical portion of costa beyond apex of second vein, the legs are honey- yellow, except the fore tibiae and tarsi which are deep black, the dorsocentral white dusted vitta on the mesonotum is a little wider, not divided behind suture, and continued on to base of scutellum. Structurally the two species are quite similar, but the fourth wing-vein in the new one is but slightly curved forward at apex, ending behind tip of wing and almost directly below apex of third, the disc of scutellum is not bare, but has many pale fine hairs similar to those on mesonotum, and the frons is distinctly broader and quite distinctly punctured. Length, 6 mm. Type, male, and allotype, the latter fragmentary, taken in copula, Townsville, N. Queensland (G. F. Hill); 4 paratypes, Como, N.S.W. (H. Petersen). Returned to collector. BY J. R. MALLOCII. 353 This species is closely similar to albopilosus de Meijere described from New Guinea, but it has a vertical band of white dust on the pleura which that species lacks. It is also rather similar to metallicus Bigot, described from Rodrigues Is., but the tibiae and tarsi of the latter are brown, and the thorax has three bluish vittae, the face is evidently more testaceous, and there are some other colour distinctions. Genus PLAGIOSTENOPTERINA Hendel. This genus was distinguished from Stenopterina, a New World genus, by the structure of the frons, which is puffed out (‘wulstig’) in Stenopterina and not so in the other, by the lack of an orbital bristle, and the distinctly narrowed first: posterior cell of the wing. From Hlassogaster Bigot it was distinguished by the obliquely placed inner cross-vein of wing, Hlassogaster having this vein erect. I have before me the genotypes of the two first-named and find it difficult to appreciate the puffed out frons, while the lack of an orbital bristle does not apply in all species of Plagiostenopterina. . I find, however, that Stenopterina brevipes Fabricius, the genotype, has no strong bristle on the upper hind margin of mesopleura, and has the notopleurals 1 + 2, while all species of Plagiostenopterina before me have a strong mesopleural bristle, and the notopleurals 1+1. PLAGIOSTENOPTERINA AENEA (Wiedemann). The genotype. A metallic bluish or greenish black species, with hyaline wings, the latter marked with two narrow fuscous vittae, one extending along costa from apex of auxiliary vein to apex of fourth, the other extending from base of wing to, or almost to, outer cross-vein, filling basal cell, and hardly encroaching on discal cell. The scutellum has four marginal bristles and many fine discal hairs. Arista short haired on basal third or more. Length, 8-11 mm. Locality—Cairns, N. Queensland (J. F. Illingworth). Hendel. records it from Townsville, Queensland. The same author places Dacus basalis Walker in Plagiostenopterina. It was described from Port Essington, N. Australia. I have not seen the species. Family Ephydridae. Genus BRACHYDEUTERA Loew. In a previous part of this series of papers I presented the description of an Australian species of this genus, and below I describe a second one. All three species known to me are very similar in structure, the specific distinctions consisting of slight differences in chaetotaxy, venation of the wings, and colour. The two Australian species may be distinguished as below. A. Anterior notopleural bristle lacking; abdomen hardly shining, with dense grey dust on dorsum, most of the tergites with dark brown basal and apical fasciae, broadest on second tergite, and connected by a dark streak in centre on fourth, and sometimes on fifth; upper portion of mesopleura with yellowish or brownish Gustyshowanden Or th) SOV pyc cae ranier sro ai ai Sitspe Geel ccueie cecal sydneyensis Malloch AA. Anterior notopleural bristle present, not as long as posterior one; abdomen olivaceous black, slightly shining, with grey dust on lateral angles of dorsal exposure of tergites, and on most of apical tergite; entire pleura densely: whitish grey GUSTO a aeharte-s Sie ohe crete HEME Me ares. chic Settss Shae Swe ove Me peter sects kobe Mielke. oy Shek a pleuralis, n. sp. 354 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVi, BRACHYDEUTERA PLEURALIS, N. Sp. Male and female.—Head brownish-black; frons dull; occiput brownish dusted above, lower half, cheeks, and face whitish-grey dusted, centre of latter darker; antennae black; palpi white. Thorax olivaceous black on dorsum, and with traces of three or five brown vittae, the humeral angles, and to a lesser extent the lateral margins of mesonotum, whitish-grey dusted; pleura entirely covered with dense whitish-grey dust; scutellum slightly grey dusted at base. Abdomen olivaceous black on dorsum, whitish-grey dusted on the incurved lateral parts of tergites, the pale parts showing slightly at anterior and posterior angles of tergites from above. Legs clay-yellow, coxae densely whitish-grey dusted, apices of mid and hind femora faintly brownish on upper surface, tarsi fuscous. Wings clear. Calyptrae and halteres white. Structurally similar to sydneyensis but smaller; the anterior notopleural bristle present; second wing-vein slightly curved; outer cross-vein slightly bent, its upper portion sloping slightly towards base of wing, and the fourth vein slightly deflected apically, causing the first posterior cell to be slightly widened at tip. ; Length, 2-5 mm. Type and allotype, Townsville, Queensland (F. H. Taylor). The label bears the notation ‘Larvae live in water’, and mounted with each of the specimens is an empty puparium similar to that of the North American species. Family Drosophilidae. I present below the description of a new species belonging to one of the recently described genera closely related to Drosophila. I hope to be able to present an enlarged key to the Australian genera of this family shortly. Genus LiopRosopHiILA Duda. This genus is quite similar to Drosophila Fallen, but there is no closed anal cell in the wings, the anal vein being short and curved, but the cell is open. In most characters the genera agree quite closely, but in the only species I have seen from Australia and in most of the other species of Liodrosophila the thorax or abdomen is at least partly metallic blue or green. The species described below appears to be distinct from any already known, though rather similar to metallescens de Meijere, which occurs in Java, Formosa, and New Guinea. | LIODROSOPHILA AUSTRALIS, N. Sp. Female.—Head fulvous yellow, frons entirely glossy, and with a metallic blue tinge except in front; antennae and palpi concolorous with head. Thorax glossy fulvous yellow, mesonotum gradually becoming more deeply suffused with metallic blue from middle to hind margin; scutellum dull fulvous yellow, paler at apex. Abdomen entirely metallic dark violet-blue above, the sternites yellowish; hairs and bristles black. Legs yellow, Wings clear, with an oblique dark cloud running from alulae forward along first vein to costa. Knobs of halteres dark brown. Frons at vertex as wide as long in centre; postverticals short; all vertical bristles and the ocellars long and strong; proclinate and posterior reclinate orbital long, anterior reclinate very short; some setulose hairs in a curved series above antennae on each side extending backward to about middle of frons; arista with four rays above and two below; facial keel long, and rather flat above. vo Or ol BY J. R. MALLOCH. Thorax with about eight series of intradorsocentral hairs, two pairs of dorso- centrals, no prescutellar acrostichals, and two long sternopleurals; basal pair of seutellar bristles not half as long as apical pair. Legs normal. Second and third costal divisions of wing subequal; penultimate section of fourth vein about two- thirds as long as ultimate section. Length, 2 mm. Type, Mossman, Queensland (F. H. Taylor). Family Sapromyzidae. Genus SApPpRoMyzaA Fallen. I have already presented descriptions of many species of this genus and given a synoptic key for the identification of most of them. Since the key was published I have had access to more material and the appearance of the descrip- tions of many new species of the genus in two recent papers has made the key quite inadequate for purposes of identification. I therefore present below a new key, which I hope will serve to identify the 43 already described species, and have a longer period of usefulness than the preceding one. It is of course quite evident to me that there are many still undiscovered species of the genus in Australia, because with almost every lot submitted there are species which I have not previously seen, so that it will be merely a matter of time until this key also is out of date, and the sooner more material is available, especially from localities other than those from which the previous shipments emanated, the sooner this will take place. I describe one new species in this paper, and also redescribe a species of Macquart’s which he placed in Sciomyza. This species is redescribed from the type specimen and, unless most of Macquart’s other species are available in type material, it will be impossible to place them correctly, as many were described in genera to which they do not belong, and only colour characters were used in his descriptions. ; Key to the species. 1. Thorax with four pairs of strong dorsocentrals, the anterior pair in front of SULGUIG CU een cprtts: of drag ee ecm ice cae eats ep ewes i crac ee) (6 9.7) ice ceva sedan orcs ras wes eke ain: SuSEE EME AT Oona Ns sod NGI | may ersie 2 Thorax with three pairs of dorsocentrals, the anterior pair slightly, or distinctly, behind suture, and sometimes rather short and weak ...................... i 2. Wings distinctly marked with dark colour, or almost entirely fuscous .......... 3 Wings yellowish or greyish hyaline, without dark markings .................... 6 (Je) Fore femur with an anteroventral comb of minute setulae apically; thorax with about five pairs of strong acrostichal bristles; arista long haired .......... 4 Fore femur without an anteroventral comb; thorax without strong acrostichals except the prescutellar pair, only weak hairs present in two series anteriorly ; ALISta wil CLOSCODICAl lyme pDUDESCEN Eee ly ein eraeiciets ches oisich ti iticdn urease iemeneone 5 4. Wing with a dark brown cloud on costa from apex of auxiliary vein to tip, which becomes paler behind and disappears at or before reaching fourth vein, and does not connect with the two clouds over the cross-veins; thorax densely grey dusted, with six broken brown vittae on dorsum ........ plumiseta Malloch Wing with a blackish-brown cloud from apex of auxiliary vein to tip, which extends inward over third vein from just beyond the cloud over inner cross-vein, but does not connect with the latter, and fuses with the one on middle of apical section of fourth vein, the second posterior and anal cells with fainter dark clouds; thorax densely grey dusted, with four brown vittae, the submedian pair narrower, fused behind, and carried over disc of scutellum ........... peterson Malloch 5. Wings infuscated at bases, the dark colour extending to a little beyond humeral eross-vein, to furcation of second and third veins, and to apices of the basal ~I 10. ik i, NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVI, , cells; thoracic dorsum grey dusted, with two broad submedian brown vittae which are blackish on their inner margins, and numerous large lateral brown MV AT KAN ES ot pou weteeehe ter suse ene Mete ose ots) Gale: s Geel Sre.cah dh shee, AEM eee Reuse hieroglyphica Malloch Wings almost uniformly deep fuscous brown; thorax shining brownish testaceous, not evidently vittate or marked with brown .................. suffusa Malloch Only the posterior two pairs of acrostichal bristles long and strong ............ 7 Four or more pairs of the acrostichal bristles long and strong .............. 8 Arista with its longest hairs about as long as its basal diameter; fore femur with a distinct anteroventral comb on apical half; third antennal segment narrowed just beyond insertion of arista, slightly tapered to apex; abdomen subopaque, brownish or fuscous; mid femur with a series of stout bristles on apical half of anterior surface; mid tibia with two long apical ventral bristles ........... ESAS cae hee eae arte oO ae aN tete sah celle on sakes Uettan opesniscdan aMeranNh a renee setae Montemelee hirtiventris Malloch Arista practically bare; fore femur without an anteroventral comb; third antennal segment hardly longer than wide; abdomen glossy black; mid femur without anterior bristles; mid tibia with only one long strong apical ventral TOROIESH EIN Sian or Siey reeset cis. eee eta te ane Cateye EY NPR, mkt NS es, pilifrons Malloch Arista ranging from almost bare to distinctly pubescent, the longest hairs not noticeably longer than its basal diameter; fore femur without an antero- ventral preapical comb; mid tibia with but one long strong apical ventral DTT SEL Crue ay pets Cote ee oa cnt eee ee ee rev Ieee gee TORT POR REM RCT SOA Gh ane PaO Ron eae nt a me SIE 9 Arista with its longest hairs conspicuously longer than its basal diameter, at least as long as half the width of third antennal segment; fore femur with an anteroventral preapical comb; mid tibia with two long strong apical ventral 1 BY GHIA UENS} 4 ies ig Lr Ee eit oe oo Ree PICER MeceIoP CRE I RCE RPE REM chor). 5:ic) OE RIES Ee TOLLS Gog 10 Head and thorax fulvous yellow, the former with ocellar spot, a spot below each eye, and one on each side of face, fuscous; abdomen yellow, glossy black on dorsum except at base; legs entirely fulvous yellow; frons entirely shining a LS het ESTO ee eat MEI Mea etn garde roeie Tansee tS cains aie | etal San SB ainnnata tab eats neu and rancueh eiamae tonnoii Malloch Head fulvous yellow, the ocellar spot and labrum fuscous, orbits hardly darkened, antennae bright fulvous; thorax black, with slight greenish tinge, the entire surface densely grey dusted; abdomen black, with conspicuous greenish lustre; legs yellow, fore pair except knees, mid and hind femora at bases, and same tibiaesandetarsivat apiGesm blacker irene ill ienel subaeneiventris Malloch Arista short haired, the longest hairs not, or but little, longer than half the width of third antennal segment; palpi, third antennal segment, apices of femora, of tibiae, and of mid and hind tarsi, and all, or most, of fore tarsi black; frontal triangle, the lines on which the fronto-orbital bristles are situated, and a line along each lateral part of anterior margin silvery dusted; submedian thoracic WMC WONEC TIAN soccccsnsccab0oucDDDOCeDDDODODUOOODDeKOROD bicoloripes Malloch Arista plumose, the longest hairs more than half as long as width of third antennal segment; antennae yellow, third segment at most brownish; legs not sharply bi- coloured, either uniformly yellowish, or the femora infuscated except apically EWR eer sEstie SE Sacaseenie has ealdnie Gy Sn ee NERC HANera loch ESSA MCMC OAT Gea eR TS Ren Ae rs nA ena eR ene ial Femora infuscated except apically ; thorax with four narrow brown interrupted vittae on dorsum, and a broader dark brown one on upper part of pleura; abdomen densely opaque grey dusted, a medianly interrupted chocolate-brown fascia on base of each visible tergite from second to fifth, and a brown spot on the incurved lateral part of each tergite from first; the one on fourth connected With basal” Fase wees kel ch ee hire Sleeves ue cep menee shale vale ee reasons variventris Malloch Legs unicolorous tawny or testaceous yellow; pleura not vittate, thoracic dorsum very faintly or not at all vittate; abdomen unicolorous, or very faintly marked Pee Taree ES Shh nin ease eos RGU aC eR reer ed a GOO oe rorEre TC spinigera Malloch Antennae as long as head, third segment more than three times as long as wide, first and second segments subequal in length on outer side, or the first longest, first with a few microscopic hairs below at apex; parafacials white dusted, with a velvety black mark between each antenna and eye; abdomen glossy black .. 13 Antennae much shorter than head, first segment much shorter than second ...... 14 Mesopleura with two long strong bristles, which are rather closely placed and above the middle on hind margin; mid tibia with two long apical ventral bristles; thorax without dark dorsal vittae; wings honey-yellow, apices narrowly and faintly brownish; third antennal segment fully three times as long as wide .... oto Conc De a ET ee ec Ors ciatcla ek ituaroren iG Sy cunt.o a oie aoide magiicornis Malloch 14, Te 18. IS). 20. 20. 26. 27. “28. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 3 oO ~] Mesopleura with one long strong bristle above middle on hind margin; mid tibia with one short and one long apical bristle; thorax with two submedian vittae, and the lateral margins conspicuously whitish dusted; wings honey-yellow ; third antennal segment more than six times as long as wide .... tenwicornis Malloch Thoracic dorsum with the anterior one or two pairs of postsutural dorsocentral bristles much weaker than the posterior pair, almost hair-like, the anterior pair almost invariably well behind suture; arista pubescent or almost bare .... 15 Thoracic dorsum with the three pairs of postsutural dorsocentrals almost equally long and strong, the anterior pair very close to, or at suture; arista variously TOE TU EeYO | PRO ete tnne ator G, outro Groh eORGISO GO: Gls ic Gc DLOKCIOIORCEG: Ose fil CEPI DIEEE O aaeSIenS. OF CAR CLE TG: ARO, BOE eOrG 34 Frons and face deep black, the parafacials yellowish or whitish .............. 16 At least the face yellow or brownish-yellow ............-....2++eeeceeeeeeses 17 Entire frons shining; third antennal segment fully twice as long as wide; knobs of halteres| black 277a255-.- Bas pl CSIC AB TR CRD RCE CUCM ALE CHML TRG: PRN ee sciomyzina Schiner Frons opaque velvety black, orbital stripes and ocellar triangle glossy; third antennal segment very little longer than wide; knobs of halteres pale yellow .......... it erst ead hiiatsa: NOR Eee SRM C Ns AEA uantie ca A ticten cane hae Reps bates brevicornis Malloch Entire insect including head and its appendages, and the legs testaceous yellow .. 37 At least some part of the head, body, or legs, black or fuscous ................ 18 Pleura, metanotum, and abdomen black, densely grey dusted; dorsum of thorax and the head yellow, upper occiput and ocellar spot fuscous; antennae and palpi black; fore and hind femora and bases of mid pair fuscous SE csieies eh ica eet me tise She wrenteu ss Giiel suece es Ncuante, Stee sinsieMene act Soiey ob caenel weno: Saekanea ee flavodorsalis Malloch SPECIES ENO ELCOlOUPEANAS AD OVE a atc ewe yspietcas olen sear ees Cute sigemensilon a ialenay Tas oneal euspallcbiaive alin onan eeenel Gane 19 Frons entirely opaque, the orbital stripes forming two complete grey or dark VAL DEL C mee temrteicsureiceaWet eera ate eat oie ness Re He. ter anemen ey elepaiial ev emalra iene cones oh Slate er sy aureycnclasreelccive act areleniemn ees cus 20 Frons with at least the orbital stripes shining and undusted ................... 21 Frontal orbits densely pale yellowish-grey dusted; wings without dark markings; thoracic dorsum with two conspicuous brown vittae; mesopleura largely fuscous; scutellum reddish-yellow, darker on disc, with a deep black spot at base of each apical bristle, grey dusted between them ............ riparia Malloch Frontal orbits black, forming two velvety vittae; wings conspicuously spotted with fuscous; thoracic dorsum and pleura conspicuously vittate with black; scutellum flattened and black on disc, yellow on sides ............... magnifica Malloch AMUGMMAG leiAselky OP emubreElhy IEC seco ocoodonov sooo oD oo DU CDDGeODUDOKNOS ou0C6 22 AMGEN AEeL EnciTeliye sy ClO Ws we cles ocacs enatencdaehcad ameuetenaiepesemeeeeuey areierensret ere tems re, 2: seswen enon shenen a ets 32 Femora and tibiae testaceous yellow ....................... immaculipes Malloch Femora and tibiae of one or more pairs of legs marked with black .......... 23 PENT: OTT SO Let CLO tice aig as actes ans eu bina) “aisle MIE ey eo ee Sy RSE cs MeL ieee eed sul wetted on suretetebre ele Weikna st ae Rear use a 24 IDTPOINS Wana? WelON, Cre wCMlOnmISINe RONAN socoocgconoods ob boohoo bos COCK UGONnUOOS 25 Frons black, face yellowish-white, occiput tawny yellow; the fore femora blackened [SXSnOMEKOUN I OFENSEHL WIG ONDE!” “Resin arate Coos GAC oe OI oreo OB eo me tie oo ode alboatra Malloch Frons, centre of face, and occiput black; fore femora entirely black .. mariae Malloch Frons yellowish brown; occiput with a large black mark on each side of upper half; allptemonamMlaneelye lake Versa crererale. etehe ole eusteweas) acs) cls el eierete ry wlan occipitalis Malloch Frons tawny yellow; occiput without black marks on upper half ............ 26 WHS Wwatine mie GClerlke mews cCodgcoaccsoncuscceucoueoccosuouOd REP RA SSA eH 27 Wings with distinct dark markings .......... PEIN AS cuts lee as yacateeds Shrtaiey f= 5) 6i'aa shea CoAT ROPES 31 Face with a black line along sutures between central part and parafacials; abdomen black, yellow at base; humeri with some microscopic fine hairs besides the strong bristle; areas mesad of the humeral angles very sparsely furnished with weak setulae; fore tarsi with a lanceolate bristle at apex of basal segment on posterior side which is about as long as width of the segment ........ lancifer Malloch Face entirely tawny yellow; fore tarsi without abnormal shaped bristles at apex Or lOACEY| SSSUNCOe Cin, OOSIEPIOre GCI oaodauoodeackacucqsoacodGnocboooddouoe 28 TeAhon [omORGly Joeolsravexcl ENS ANOMKCES sono hongooebosceocsoudoucucousuccuncosnoouL 29 TRYIN SiON Bid.o cla CI Ree CI EHSEERDIEN Oia OG Le CHE Coe mean RER ANEMIC I HEPC SSC Goo. OL cdc) ct Grate cecmemete 30 Fore legs except the coxae and trochanters blackened, mid and hind pairs yellow; ole, Guiry allo ecscoscocaaenoaecodcucseeodbC OOS OOmboE atrimana, Nn. sp. Fore, mid, and hind legs all with the femora narrowly black at apices, and the tibiae more broadly blackened at apices; mesopleura blackened on upper margin, WAGE TereoRellbye loNMbVCl Goo ococbo cuconuoadadoo0gcoOde000 nigricornis (Macquart) (ae) bo (7h) (Je) (tt) Ol (JX) 1 40. 41. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVI, Humeri exceptionally prominent, bare except for the single strong bristle, the hairs on mesonotum adjacent to humeri much more numerous, shorter, and bristle-like Le akan ok WDhsubel) BG Ganla ots etcra ocd (ents ccck GPE AGI PEM aes Cotas cl eitensat Sep Sahat cacao regalis Malloch Humeri not unusually prominent, with a few microscopic fine hairs besides the single strong bristle, the hairs on mesonotum adjacent to humeri neither exceptionally TELLS KOOKS Woe Gero walkin WWE) Sos sassccanu0ouducadse0dgoe06 avicola Malloch Wing with a narrow fuscous cloud extending from base along costa to apex of fourth vein, and another faint brownish cloud over outer cross-vein; thoracic dorsum bivattate: swiltlaefuscou's Vel eieee Goce © fis ORE. Shere mintalels lacs caeies fuscocostata Malloch Wing with the dark markings confined to a fuscous suffusion of the cell between apices of auxiliary and first veins; thorax not vittate ...... stigmatica Malloch Legs with conspicuous black markings; abdomen largely glossy black; arista almost Levey Ee Amcor try Or okie ct tion: SSL OLIN G, CeCRC ATOZ GUST e ALR eI I nT NPS PROMS 38 Soha it cM macho osha sc 393 Legs and abdomen testaceous yellow; arista long pubescent, the longest hairs fully asiMong asp its basailm diameter in. siceialsecrchele on sialon arelisecieeied tones parviceps Malloch Face flat or slightly coneave, not at all evident between bases of antennae, and distinctly less shining than the uniformly shining fulvous frons; fore femora blackened except basally; mesopleural hairs weak; fore tarsi yellow, but little darker apically; fifth tergite of male produced downward on anterior margin, and with a slender backwardly directed process on each side which projects on each side of the very large hypopygium .................. flavimana Malloch Face prominently convex vertically, quite prominent between bases of antennae, and very distinctly shining, the frons opaque black except the glossy orbital stripes; fore femora black at apices; mesopleural hairs almost bristle-like; fore tarsi blackwexcepenthembasaluseemenittaneiaa a eiiceicieecicien nonionic aioner: mariae Malloch Arista plumose; a well developed bristle present on thoracic dorsum slightly behind and mesad of the supra-alar bristle; fore femur without an antero-ventral DOG Coral) Ow mMd WIS SAGAS erhoascosonoccccvos00ddcob 0b oouUGOOddOOS 35 Arista very short haired or indistinctly pubescent; no evident bristle on thoracic dorsum behind and mesad of the supra-alar bristle ........................ 36 Submedian pale brown vittae continued to anterior margin of mesonotum; no con- spicuous spots on posterior margin of mesonotum .......... aberrans Malloch Submedian pale brown vittae broken near anterior margin of mesonotum; a pair of black spots on posterior margin of mesonotum which appear velvety in some lights and which extend on to base of scutellum .......... maculithorax Malloch Longest hairs on arista distinctly longer than its basal diameter; wings copiously spotted with fuscous, appearing reticulated; face with two dark spots; frons with two brown vittae; mesonotum with four brown vittae; mesopleura with two brown spots; fore femur without a comb; antennae entirely black; mid tibia with two unequal apical ventral bristles ................ ocellaris Malloch Arista very indistinctly pubescent, the hairs not longer than its basal diameter; wings without dark spots, sometimes with clouds along veins .............. 37 Entire insect, including the legs, shining testaceous yellow; fore femur with a distinet preapical anteroventral comb of minute black setulae .......... 38 Entire insect not shining testaceous yellow, bicoloured, the legs partly black .. 39 Inner cross-vein of wings a little beyond apex of first vein, the penultimate section of fourth vein fully two-thirds as long as ultimate section; legs stout; anterior pair of orbital bristles about twice as long as, and much stouter than, ocellar TOHMbES I yhAS Gra Giniashas lovwwohy SaroOwls coscdoasovavdccvceavg000 unicolorata Malloch Inner cross-vein of wing below apex of first vein, the penultimate section of fourth vein not more than half as long as ultimate section; legs slender; anterior pair of orbital bristles not as long as ocellar pair; hairs on body weak ............ BRO ARR eee elias Sucks tart SLE ease AC Nat aE Sich ERC SERRE ERS ci chiey Cloveioree etolaws ite, DHO-o urbana Malloch Thorax entirely fulvous yellow, conspicuously shining, without evident dusting or vittae; head yellow; antennae almost entirely black; ocellar bristles micro- SCODIC. veces cee enero eee EMI aoe tie Raotat euaner anCeMASOENcieet cheoNeicae strahani Malloch Thorax black or brown, densely dusted, and not vittate, or yellowish, with con- SpicuoUs! “orsalll Pvat tales yh cs Rue tree yet scsi Se CMOS STE TPG) bes eee arate Mearns es 40 Thoracic dorsum not vittate, densely greyish or brownish dusted ............... 41 Thoracic dorsum conspicuously vittate, densely greyish or brownish dusted .... 43 Thoracic dorsum with a dark dot at base of each hair and bristle .............. SIO Oa RO OR OE RRO EELS Eitri a. corm oc teoechceosto ols Gols ba ot ote punctiseta Malloch Thoracic dorsum -without dark dots ony dorsumien ease tie teria aeiae 42 BY J. R. MALLOCTII. 359 Pas LERNUAT 42. Face with a dark vertical central stripe; dorsum of thorax brownish dusted ~~ ; ; a y 5 dts EERO FOSD ODOT CRORES Od CFCC ONC ORGLO CRU OGENS.. Cie aen nen a anne aureocapitata Malloch ; "2 Face without a dark central stripe; dorsum of thorax grey dusted .......... i + @. Bt € PR ee chaste -tay al AMG cal ate) eee GREW SHEP RENT eer ee MOMSEN ana 6d ale) ay Suau eee olelals griseodorsalis Malloch aR ' . Fi v 43. Frons rather densely covered with short black setulose hairs anteriorly; face with = a vertical line on each side, and frons with a central line, blackish; thoracic, ~~- dorsum with linear blackish vittae, the lateral pair short and indistinct; costal and second wing-veins, and outer cross-vein, and sometimes also third vein, bordered with fuscous ........ MSU ey seem eh ae ei cite foveeC ia saree aaa fuscolimbata Malloch Frons practically bare except for the strong bristles; face and frons without fuscous lines as above; thoracic vittae brown, quite broad, and all four entire; veins of WALNS TAGE locke! Wal MINSCOWS oosnanconcodnevndo0ddonvd oD OUD nDOHOUOOE 44 44. Palpi yellow; fronto-orbital bristles situated on a narrow grey stripe which is separated from the grey margin anteriorly by a narrow stripe of the same golden colour as the interfrontalia; fore femur without an anteroventral comb by SPO acn eA RD BASS. OF esa WAe Go et A MGS shi Nia, ci cehssi Taurens) oats beocdosbounsuccons MBOFIIG Minion Palpi black; fronto-orbital bristles situated on the wide whitish lateral stripes; fore femur with a weak but evident preapical anteroventral comb .............. Foe aR ONS Vine aera 5.) ee i RE eee Bey Chal Eta Jo! Seria Con ee ric tote alos, Oey a Then brunneovittata Malloch SAPROMYZA NIGRICORNIS (Macquart). Female.—A testaceous yellow species, with frons dull, the orbital stripes shining, third antennal segment black, second yellow, palpi broadly black at apices, upper margin of mesopleura fuscous, more broadly so posteriorly, thoracic dorsum shining, not vittate; abdomen shining, without black markings. Legs yellow testaceous, apices of femora narrowly, of tibiae more broadly, black, apical three tarsal segments fuscous. Wings yellowish hyaline. Halteres yellow. Frons a little longer than wide, all the bristles well developed; postocular fringe strong, bristle-like above; antennae normal, third segment slightly tapered apically and about twice as long as wide; arista pubescent; palpi normal. Thorax with three pairs of postsutural dorsocentrals, the anterior pair not very much reduced, but farther from suture than from next pair; humeral angles haired, the hairs on mesonotum adjacent to the humeri setulose. Mid tibia with two long and one short apical ventral bristles. Inner cross-vein below apex of first vein and a little beyond middle of discal cell. Length, 7-5 mm. This species is redescribed from the type specimen .sent by M. HE. Seguy to Dr. A. L. Tonnoir at his request, and sent by the latter to me. The specimen is in good condition, except that it is entirely overlaid with a fine web such as the spinning mites make. There is no locality on the label, but Macquart cited Tasmania and Akaroa in his paper. I suspect that it belongs to Tasmania only. I have placed the species in my key amongst those with the anterior postsutural dorsocentral bristle much reduced and far from suture, but if one decides to place it amongst those which have the anterior bristle little reduced and rather close to suture it will run down to strahani Malloch, from which species it may readily be distinguished by the less extensively blackened legs, and the long and strong ocellar bristles. SAPROMYZA ATRIMANA, Nl. SD. Male.—Quite similar to nigricornis in colour and structure, but the fore legs are fuscous from near base of femora to tips of tarsi, the mid and hind legs are yellow, the pleura yellow, the ocellar bristles are microscopic, the entire antennae are dark brown, the anterior pair of postsutural dorsocentral bristles D 360 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVi, is quite small, and there is one long and one short apical ventral bristle on mid tibia. Length, 6 mm. Type, Perth, W.A., Nov. 15, 1926 (Nicholson). In connection with the preceding species it may be well to indicate that Hendel lists a species under Sapromyza as nigricornis Robineau-Desvoidy. This was described as a species of Lycia and without access to the type specimen it would appear to me impossible to determine if it belongs to the genus Sapromyza. It has not been identified since its original description. Family Calliphoridae. Genus ANTHRACOMYIA Malloch. This genus was erected in my recent paper on Australian Calliphoridae, but the name is preoccupied by Anthracomyia Rondani. I therefore propose to supplant it with Anthracomyza, nn. I recently referred to this genus under the latter name in a paper on Calliphoridae of Sumatra. Family Stratiomyiidae. Heretofore I have dealt almost exclusively with families in the Cyclorrhapha, but amongst the material either in my possession or available to me there are many representatives of practically all families in the order and the following notes on a family of Brachycera may have some value to students of the Diptera of Australia. I have been in possession for some years of material in certain genera of this family from New Zealand and Australia, but press of other work has prevented me from offering any observations on the species. Miller in 1917 published a paper in which he dealt with a few genera, and in 1921 Enderlein published :a paper in which were included notes on certain New Zealand and Australian genera (Mitt. Zool. Mus. Berlin, Bd. 10, heft 1, pp. 153-214). I have decided that in view of the interest taken in the geographic distribution of genera a few notes on some of the material before me would be appropriate at this time, especially as some students consider that there is a very decided affinity between the Australian fauna and that of South America rather than with that of the Oriental region and particularly with the Aethiopean region. I incline to the opinion that in the present state of our knowledge of generic limits any conclusions drawn must be based upon rather unstable grounds, but possibly the notes below will provide grounds for thought along these lines. If one examines the various papers dealing with the family Stratiomyiidae there will be found a great similarity of treatment, but few departures from the accepted methods having taken place within the past half century, all of the authors confining their definitions and distinctions of genera to the characters presented in the structure of the antennae, wing venation, armature of the scutellum, and the abdomen. It is remarkable that in most of the tribes, or subfamilies if one elects to call them that, there is a quite commendable adherence to the general plans as specified by the various authors of these papers, but there is one subfamily, the Pachygastrinae, in which development of antennal and secutellar characters has run riot, and an appalling number of poorly represented genera has been proposed. There are almost a hundred of them now on record, and many of them are monobasic. Fortunately this is exceptional in the family, there being more stability in the other subfamilies. BY J. 8. MALLOCH. ; 361 In the course of my investigations to discover whether there were any supplementary characters for the segregation of doubtful forms, I found that there were some present which had been ignored by preceding writers dealing with the family. One instance of a striking character that is unmentioned is the presence of erect upwardly directed hairs on the prominent convex metanotum of the Sarginae, and the existence close to the base of each halter on its mesial side of a short piliferous tubercle. The great majority of the genera of other sub- families before me lack hairs on the metanotum, and it may therefore be proper to consider their occurrence in other groups as of more than specific import. In fact it appears to be possible to distinguish the genus Stratiomyia from Odontomyia by this character, the former having erect metanotal hairs and the latter lacking them. One exception to this rule is Odontomyia vertebrata Say, a North American species, but in it the metanotum has very short pale tomentum which adheres closely to the surface and is quite distinct from the erect well developed hairs present in Stratiomyia. To carry the matter further, and to apply it to an Australian example, I may cite Neoexaireta spinigera Wiedemann. The genus Neoexaireta and some closely related to it bear a very striking resemblance to the Xylophagidae, there being very little difference between the head of Neoexaireta and Xylomyia, and the wing venation being quite similar except in a few details. The costal vein is rather faint behind the wing tip in Xylomyia, but in the present genus and its allies it is lacking on the hind margin. The Xylophagidae known to me all have strong apical tibial spurs, while none are present in Beridinae, and it is noteworthy that the postscutellum, or upper convex portion of the metanotum, is very prominently convexly developed in Neoexaireta and its allies, and almost undeveloped in Xylophagidae. In some Beridinae this feature’ is rather poorly shown. We are, however, not at this time interested in this major grouping, merely introducing it because Enderlein in the paper already referred to has considered the Xylophagidae as a subfamily of Stratiomyiidae on a par with Beridinae, in which latter group he includes Neoexaireta and its allies. Subfamily BrRIDINAE. Genus NEOrXAIRETA Osten-Sacken. This name was proposed to replace Hzaireta Schiner which was preoccupied. The genotype is spinigera Wiedemann, a species which occurs in New Zealand, Australia, and Hawaii. I have before me many specimens from all three countries and find that on each side of the convex metanotum there are many white downwardly directed hairs, and there are less conspicuous hairs on the pteropleura. Both of these portions of the thorax are bare in the other species placed in Hxaireta by Hutton and Miller which I have before me. It is also noteworthy that the South American species which have been referred here have the metanotum bare, but in them the pteropleura is haired in part. It is also worth mention that the anal lobe of the wing, or alula, is much larger in Neoexaireta than it is in the other two genera. Enderlein has erected a genus, Haaeretina, for the reception of a Chilean species, auwrocoma Enderlein, distinguishing the genera on the presence of a 362 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVi, preapical transverse furrow on tergites 2 to 6 in Neoexaireta and on tergites 2 to 5 in Haaeretina. In the New Zealand species with bare metanotum there is a distinct transverse impressed line on the sixth tergite, so that in this character they differ from the Chilean species. I have examined a number of South American species which would be referable to Haairetina and in all the pteropleura is partly haired, so that I incline to the opinion that we have three recognizable genera, or if one prefers it so subgenera, distinguished as follows: 1. Sides of metanotum and part of pteropleura haired; alula well developed .......... BORO CU CREPE Chen OEE DL CREM EG CL Oe orio. Cee O ROPE ONG CROC DE AMER PRONG ene Neoexaireta Osten-Sacken Metanotum bare; alula not at all or poonlyndevelopedy an) saci ciees teen enon 2 One ECEFOPLEUTA MARE: 2c aydce ene e a ots etiam el Sei Oh Sea eared SU ecee SUOke Sy Huttonella Enderlein Eteropleunaphained sina attr: scuseiercnacscicesus oi teie ier) iene Si-eneneeite Exaeretina Enderlein NEOEXAIRETA SPINIGERA Wiedemann. As indicated above this is the only species I consider belongs to the genus. With the segregation of this species the distribution of the genus is limited to Australia, New Zealand, and Hawaii, but I should expect to it occur in some of the intervening Pacific Islands. Genus HurroneLtta HEnderlein. Both Enderlein and Miller segregated Haaireta alpina Hutton from the other New Zealand species placed in Haaireta by Hutton on the basis of the presence of but three veins emanating from the discal cell. Enderlein erected a new genus for its reception, and pointed out that there is a slight angle on the discal cell at the point where the usual vein is missing. Miller had only the type specimen of alpina before him and placed the species in the genus Berismyia, an American genus which differs in several respects from alpina. In my opinion the type specimen of alpina is abnormal and the species should not be separated from the others placed in Haaireta by Miller, all of them being referable to Huttonella. I have a number of the New Zealand species before me, but am unable to identify all of them for lack of sufficient material to permit me to judge the limits of variation in colour in the sexes. It should be noted that seolforalis Miller may lack the third vein emanating from the discal cell and then the only character that would distinguish alpina would be the slightly lower placed antennal insertions, which latter in them- selves do not amount to very much as generic indices in this group, unless strikingly below or above the middle of eyes, and in alpina they are very slightly below middle. In Miller’s key to the species of this genus there is but one species listed with very dense silvery pubescence on dorsum of abdomen, but I have at least two such species from New Zealand. Genus Neractina Enderlein. This genus has the general habitus of Beris, but the hind femora are thickened from near bases to apices, in both the species before me they are at their thickest point at least three times as thick as the hind tibiae, and they are furnished on apical portion of ventral surface with many microscopic spinules. The upper portion of the hypopleura and the central portion of pteropleura are haired, and the eyes are pubescent. Third branch of media present, but incomplete. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 363 Genotype, Actina opposita Walker, a New Zealand species. There is at least one other species of the genus occurring in New Zealand. There are no records from any other region. Genus Beris Latreille. It is extremely difficult to distinguish the genera related to Beris, and though the. keys presented by Enderlein appear very good on paper, they are not at all satisfactory in practice. In dividing Beridinae into two tribes, Beridini and Actiini, he depends upon wing venation, citing the latter as having three branches to media and Beridini as having but two. In other words, with four or three veins emanating from the discal cell, the posterior one being the anterior branch of cubitus. As pointed out in the preceding discussion the third branch of media is quite variable in length, and may in some cases be absent in specimens of a species in which it is normally present rudimentarily. Thus the selection of this character for the separation of tribes is hardly one to be commended. In fact Enderlein evidently did not bear the character in mind when he drew up his keys as he included Actina, in which the species normally have but two branched media, and Huttonella, in which the only species has the same character, in the group which he states has three branched media. At present we are concerned only with the Australian and New Zealand forms and will leave consideration of extralimital genera to others, though of course the available genera are used in determining the value of the characters as generic indices. No species: referable to Beris or closely related genera has hairs on the upper convex portion of the metanotum so they may readily be separated from Neoexaireta. From Huttonella most of the species may be at once separated by the presence of hairs on either the pteropleura or the hypopleura, or on both, or, if these are absent, by the lack of microscopic spinules on the apical portion of ventral surface of hind femora. The hind femora in all species of Huttonella and Neoexaireta are gradually swollen from near base to apex and the apical third or less of the ventral surface is furnished with microscopic stiff spinules. The only other genus of Beridinae from New Zealand in which this character occurs in Neactina Enderlein, and in it both the pteropleura and hypopleura are haired in part. Using as a basis the characters of the genotypes of the European genera recorded from New Zealand and Australia, and the characters of the species now before me, I present the following key for the recognition of those now available to me in so far as the genera are concerned. Key to the genera. 1. Hind femora thickened apically and with microscopic stiff spinules on apical third or less on ventral surface which are distinct from the long fine hairs .......... 2 Hind femora not very noticeably thickened, or, if slightly so, then without micro- SOOM Gatie Homies, OwMlhy ThA MEIRS TORING Soccvcacccconcndorvacosduuouse 4 bo Metanotum with quite long downwardly directed white hairs on each side of upper convex portion; pteropleura haired in part; alulae well developed ............ 0 'o SiS eBRR OT aE OG) ONS One ICAL ONL CRE IDS IOIS Ta. OLG tr OORT Cane Ree een ermorer tree oe Neoexaireta Osten-Sacken Metanotum without evident hairs on upper convex portion .................. ma 8G} So Jenene, Erne! inne oleneeh BRD soocasccngncouuanbooDCODOOGKaS Huttonella Enderlein Pteropleura and hypopleura haired in part ..................... Neactina Enderlein 4. Complex antennal segment (apparent third) not longer than first and second segments combined; scutellar spines slightly thickened or knobbed at apices .......... 0:0 OL DEE OOP EVOR OIE EE OPO TEN ROR CRIED Oe Orc eI teioao mmm on CRonG Jen sa acon maaan hr Berisina, n. gen. 364 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVi, Complex antennal segment much longer than first and second combined; scutellar SHINESMta pened tomar CO Sharer eye eyo! a eye) wes elctaiewelte oslo Vee UCNS) Speen s, & oo SMe Rede uel ie He Rou ome 5 5. FPteropleura bare; eyes of male bare or almost so, and not touching ................ ee eda RSS PWC I cade te UPosto eae Pee coco Vehiei ter Giro, singh ahi thay Sy solsples estenaenatneay sbi Chorisops Rondani Pteropleura Wa@ired aim Wartiig sees iscus sscew bo eases aba Mere lune Letla somes bie a eeeespspeusnst aust susp etemeee 6 Gr evlpimomchimrventaisyinmara a caakeravoue meee arcire S ) i ck latte Grohouareeeret Geet co cet omnis col eases it SR ORORe MARS Beris Uatreille iPalpilswellidevelopeds proyectin ear re se co.cc chelsea elem ats suet s heel susie) ele eeuvee Actina Meigen It will be seen from the above key that, even using the characters listed, we find Actina and Beris running very close together, and though Chorisops appears to be better distinguished, I found in the material in the United States National Museum two distinct species standing as one, and evidently so named by Bezzi. One of them has the centre of the pteropleura with fine hairs and the other has the pteropleura bare. Using only the characters of width of frons and presence of hairs on the eyes one will get different groupings than in using the above listed characters, but I believe the latter to be the best and, as they can be applied to both sexes, they are better for the purpose of associating the sexes. I have seen no species of Beris from Australia or New Zealand. Genus ActiInA Latreille. There is at least one species referable here which I have seen from Australia, victoriae Hill, but whether it is identical with one of the species included in the genus by Enderlein I cannot say. The species so included are filipalpis Macquart, fusciventris Macquart, incisuralis Macquart, nitidithorar Macquart, and nigricornis Enderlein. Only incisuralis is recorded from Australia, the others are from Tasmania. White has recorded other species, but his concept is different. The New Zealand species recorded by Miller as belonging to Actina are now in Neactina. Genus CHortsors Rondani. There is one species before me, which appears to be lJacuans Miller, that may properly be referable to this genus, but I have only one female and do not care to give a definite opinion on a single specimen, especially as I am not certain of its specific identity. Genus BrERISINA, Nov. Despite the multiplicity of genera in this group I feel that the species now before me can safely be referred to a new genus. In structure rather more robust than typical species of Beris, the mesonotum not longer than its greatest width, and the scutellum nearly twice as wide as long, with the apex almost transverse, and the four spines short and slightly thickened apically. Eyes not touching above in male, with quite long hairs centrally, becoming very short haired above; frons and face long haired, the latter widened below; basal antennal segment fully three times as long as thick and longer than second, the two combined longer than the complex third segment, the latter indistinctly segmented, terminating in a short point, and haired at apex; palpi well developed, with numerous quite long apical hairs. Pteropleura haired in part, hypopleura bare. Hind femora and tibiae thickened apically, the latter thicker than femora, basal segment of hind tarsus thickened. Venation as in Beris, three veins emanating from discal cell. Genotype, the following species. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 365 BERISINA MACULIPENNIS, Nl. Sp. Male.—Glossy black, base of hind metatarsus slightly yellowish; wings fuscous, with two hyaline spots, one between the stigma and fork of radius, the other in apex of anterior basal cell. Hairs all black. Frons about as wide as third antennal segment. Many of the hairs on dorsum of thorax, including the scutellum, long and erect, with a secondary short hairing between them. Wings extending beyond apex of abdomen. Fourth tarsal segment the shortest on all legs. Length, 5-5 mm. to apex of abdomen. Type and two male paratypes, Wanganui, New Zealand (M. M. Watt). The type specimen will be returned to New Zealand for disposition in some museum where it will be available to students in the country of origin. Genus MrErorpontaA Macquart. I have before me three specimens of the genotype. The genus is closely related to the American Allognosta Osten-Sacken, and was placed with it and several other genera in the tribe Metoponiinae by Enderlein in his work already referred to herein. Practically the only character useful in distinguishing the group from Beridinae is the lack of scutellar spines, which in my opinion is insufficient to justify the separation of the group from Beridinae either as a tribe or subfamily. I have only male specimens before me and the following characters are drawn from that sex. The eyes are finely haired, and closely contiguous on most of the frons; basal antennal segment about four times as long as thick, second much shorter, third (complex) segment longer than the two basal segments combined, with rather evident annulations, and a deep broad sulcus or channel along one side on all except the basal segment of the complex; insertion of antennae well below middle of face, the head almost horizontal from lower margin of insertions of antennae to mouth; palpi small but distinct. Pteropleura and hypopleura without distinct hairs; scutellum without spines. Fourth segment of all tarsi as long as fifth. Three veins emanating from discal cell. METOPONIA RUBRICEPS Macquart. Three males, Botany Bay, N.S.W. (H. Peterson). The specimens were sent to me by the late Dr. C. F. Baker. Subfamily PACHYGASTRINAE. I have already indicated in this paper that the subfamily Pachygastrinae has been very freely handled in so far as the erection of genera is concerned, and it is time someone with an eye to affinities indicated by more reliable indices than the structure of the antennae and scutellum gave the matter of generic limits his careful attention. Unfortunately the insects are not at all common and it will be very difficult to get enough material to check up the work already done on the group, not to mention obtaining the types of the already established genera for examination. However, an intensive study of the genera available in Australia and Tasmania would do much to determine whether trivial differences in the two characters mentioned ought to be given weight in separating genera in the subfamily. 366 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVi. Before me there are several species which, according to present criteria, ought in the main to be placed in distinct genera, but I have insufficient material to do good critical work so merely offer a few notes. Genus LONCHAEGASTER White. This genus was erected for the reception of a Tasmanian species, armata White, of which I have a specimen before me. If the species is run through the generic key to Pachygastrinae published by Kertesz it will run down to Prostomomyia Kertesz. The latter, however, is not the first name for the genus, Monacanthomyia Brunetti apparently being the first in line of acceptance, with Ceratothyrea de Meijere coming second. All three genera were erected for Oriental species and though it is possible that the species are not all the same they undoubtedly belong to the same genus, Monacanthomyia. The Tasmanian species I consider is distinct from the others. I have seen a specimen from Townsville, Qld. (G. F. Hill). Genus PACHYGASTER Meigen. I have before me a species which appears to be congeneric with an American one referred here. The antennae are short, with the third segment disc-like, and the scutellum is rounded in outline, and has some very minute warts along part of the lower lateral margin on each side. Of the two species described by Hardy, it most closely resembles whitei, but there are fewer warts along the sides of scutellum than he gives as the number distinguishing that species. However, this character is not a very reliable one for distinguishing species when they amount to more than six or eight. Locality, Brisbane, Qld., in house (A. J. Turner). It is extremely probable that careful search under bark of trees will discover the larvae of these species and provide material for a comparative study of the insects. In fact I have found the species only in this sort of habitat and amongst the material before me from Australia there is one species which was reared from larvae found under dead bark. THERE TANYDERIDAH OF AUSTRALIA (DIPTHRA). By CHARLES P. ALEXANDER, Massachusetts Agricultural College, Amherst, Massachusetts, U.S.A. (Communicated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) (Four Text-figures. ) [Read 29th August, 1928.] The remarkably paleogenic group of Diptera now included in the family Tanyderidae is represented by ten recent and fossil genera totalling slightly more than a score of species. Of this number, three genera with four species are herein recorded from the Australian Subregion. For many years the flies of this group were included in the family Tipulidae where they were ranked as a distinct tribe or placed with the Ptychopterini (Loew, 1851; Osten Sacken, 1859, 1869, 1880, 1886; Philippi, 1865; Hutton, 1900). More recently the various Tanyderid genera were distributed in the Ptychopteridae (Handlirsch, 1909; HEnderlein, 1912; de Meijere, 1915a, 19150). The group was finally accorded full family rank by Alexander (1919). The first genus to be described was the only known fossil, Macrochile Loew (Loew, 1851; Crampton, 1926; Alexander, 1927b) from the Lower Oligocene Baltic Amber. The next genus to be defined was Protoplasa Osten Sacken (1859), soon followed by the typical genus Tanyderus Philippi (1865). Virtually all of the known species, including all forms described from the Southern Hemisphere, were included in Tanyderus until the appearance of the very important paper by Handlirsch (1909) where three new generic groups were proposed (Protanyderus, Mischoderus and Radinoderus). Alexander (19276) recognized these three names as valid subgenera and added two subgeneric groups to Tanyderus, Neoderus for the Neotropical Tanyderus patagonicus Alexander (1913) and Nothoderus for the Australasian Tanyderus australiensis Alexander (1922). It now seems advisable to treat these names as was done by Handlirsech and in the present report a total of ten generic names is recognized. The most distinct group would appear to be Péringueyomyina Alexander (1921), although many of the other groups appear to be very well defined. In the Australasian fauna, Wischoderus Handlirsch is found only in New Zealand, a total of five specific names having been proposed (forcipatus Osten Sacken, 1880; annuliferus Hutton, 1900; neptunus Edwards, 1923a; varipes Hdwards, 1923a; marginatus Edwards 19230) at least one of which will probably prove to be a synonym (Handlirsch, 1909; Tillyard, 1926). Radinoderus Handlirsch includes six Australasian and an additional Chilean species (gloriosus Alexander, 19206). The species of the former group have been discussed and keyed in a paper by the writer (Alexander, 1924). Two of the Australian species belong to Radinoderus and are the largest and most beautiful species in the local fauna. Nothoderus Alexander is probably the most generalized of the living Tanyderidae, its retention E 368 THE TANYDERIDAE OF AUSTRALIA, of the free tip of Sc, being an archaic feature (Alexander, 1922, 1927a, 19270; MacGillivray, 1923). The third Australian genus includes only the very interesting little species that is described herewith as Hutanyderus wilsoni, n. gen. et sp., one of the interesting captures made in Victoria by my friend, Mr. F. Erasmus Wilson. In earlier papers, the writer (Alexander, 1920c, 19276) had included in the Tanyderidae as a separate subfamily the Bruchomyinae but these are now con- sidered as being more properly referable to the Psychodidae (Alexander, Proc. Linn. Soc. New SoutH WALES, liii, 1928, 291). Nothing is known concerning the immature stages of these flies except the brief account given by Alexander (1920a) of the supposed larva of Protoplasa fitchii Osten Sacken. This larva lives in wet decaying logs near water and presents a curious appearance, the caudal end of the abdomen being produced into a long, stout, non-retractile breathing tube that is somewhat suggestive of the much shorter tube of the closely allied Psychodidae. At the base of this tube are two large, pinnately branched anal gills that are quite unlike those of any other known Dipterous insect. Key to the Genera of the Tanyderidae. 1. Front prolonged into a slender rostrum that is longer than the combined head and thorax, the reduced mouthparts being borne at the extreme apex; wings immacu- late; male hypopygium with the styli very elongate .....................0+.2-: 3) Br amare herayateclensy eve ea isee ses (Ethiopian: Cape Colony) .... Péringueyomyina Alexander Front not greatly prolonged, the rostrum being relatively short, any elongation that exceeds the remainder of the head in length being due to the palpi and other mouthparts; wings pictured in all recent species; male hypopygium with the SEY SHOE tcc ees cet eee MH ONONG DONO ow Slee Cae ETON eo aeer eee ee EO TO IS eVnce et Sie) CE CEC TE 2 74, \NTOOEIS ThaTbeMAKODUIENKS) sonaoou006 (Fossil: Lower Oligocene, Baltic Amber) .......... 25 srl ea leusetolve PSs Ee nee oa See 6:18 eles woke ote Reward eat ret meron trairsuce eer ettee ote eeuientolon ar oi iceiteneliniteLsen Macrochile Loew Wings pictured, the pattern usually cross-banded brown and subhyaline ........ 3 Bo WSS Wath WAS WATS oy) Oe Se, WAIVE gocccoccscas0c00 (Australasian: Tasmania) FAR ey Ch SORE ET ERE ETON a ao ME IC cetinbt ouch Sins or enem ease G Nothoderus Alexander WAS THUD We iS. BID OE SG, QO UES) sooccccooecavenvco0D cob GoOHONDOOCOSO" cele 4. Cervical sclerites shorter than the pronotum, the neck-region short; male hypopygium WAlelal Cle) CHEBISIAVIG moO GP WESE JOC! soonococaccdooDbGdK oo D eb oDe HOODOO OUbUDES 5 Cervical sclerites elongate, equal to or exceeding the pronotum, the two together forming a conspicuous neck-region; male hypopygium with the dististyle simple, LSS ENS arar sie oso oro Meme acca: caeretcra oheeberray 6 5'c orca a CLOTS on ORs CeeRERSeD Gators dias oo Gcb-d Bin ee 6 5. A supernumerary cross-vein in cell M, of the wing ............ (Hastern Nearctic) ne cane eterke cecal tytivsl Gus, e(iaicar #e eRe qepraieess e"SucYsy Semele Ces ewe name cire ms a eivoutewaire tanta Protoplasa Osten Sacken No supernumerary cross-veins in any cells of the wing ....................-c.+::: SAL heron toes: 3 (Western Nearctic, Palaearctic) .... Protanyderus Handlirsch 6. No supernumerary cross-veins in any cells of the wing .......................-:. 7 Supernumerary cross-veins in certain of the radial cells of the wing 7. Rs elongate, subequal to or exceeding R,,,, the latter shorter than cell 135 thal Australian species a short fusion of R,,,,,; antennae with 18 or more segments SComO cS oa O0U (Australasian, Neotropical) ........... Radinoderus Handlirsch Rs short, about two-thirds R,,, and longer than cell R,; R,,, distinct from Ios EMoeENS Walla 15). SEEWNSMES scoocascocanoconcKKd (Australasian: Victoria) he eee IER Si het ere est Ot oy bh gedtand ts Re crOIEP MENG aia are Go Onda ceeinalotG Hutanyderus, n. gen. ASS AN Soosersnbbaaenthnie COS A\Gua rb CEI! 18e, Olly 566000000005 0000006 (Neotropical: Chile) LEONE CR MRE er eRe ucl GAGy a Che eed aaeuc nem CLOpo! Gcio,.0:.5 16 OPO aie aaotens Tanyderus Philippi Supernumerary, cross-=veins in) two) radial) cells) eee ere els <) e-lso s adeoaga 9. Supernumerary cross-veins in cells R, and R, ........ (Australasian: New Zealand) Rh hOnoie (SOR OL RERE I ROR CHD ET cic olalG.o ica cho Gordicie sio-6 0/0 6.00 cid Ole Mischoderus Handlirsch Supernumerary cross-veins in cells R, and R, ............ (Neotropical: Patagonia) er Seay SEAT aa od blaselb alah atin: cal aulecle Vania Gee oMe he rep cws (olor Maw Oh hey MewaMemeis teyiete tens Neoderus Alexander BY C. P. ALEXANDER. 369 NotnHoperus Alexander. Nothoderus Alexander, Proc. Linn. Soc. NEw SoutH WALES, lii, 1927, 45; Alexander, Genera Insectorum, Fase. 189, 1927 (Tanyderidae). Front elongate, about twice the length of the remainder of the head, the maxillary palpi basal in position, longer than the frontal prolongation. Eyes hairy. Vertex between the eyes narrow. Antennae 15-segmented, short in both sexes, the flagellar segments in the male cylindrical, the outer segments more oval; first segment of scape only a little longer than the second. Cervical sclerites relatively short, subequal to or shorter than the pronotum which is large and massive. Legs relatively short and stout, hairy, the tibial spurs distinct; claws slender, nearly straight. Wings with the general venation of Tanyderus; Sc, atrophied; free tip of Sc, preserved (Text-fig. 1), the fusion of Sc, and R, subequal to or a little exceeding the free tip itself; a single supernumerary cross-vein at near two-thirds the length of cell R,; cell 1st M., very long and narrow, only slightly widened distally; m-cu short, a little more than its own length beyond the fork of M,;,,. Veins with conspicuous macrotrichiae. Male hypopygium with the basistyle slender, only moderately clothed with setae. Dististyle terminal in position, cylindrical, gently arcuate, at the apex densely provided with erect spinous bristles; mesal face of style with scattered erect setae that are inter- mixed with smaller delicate setulae. What appears to represent the tergite is a bilobed structure- with a microscopic glabrous lobe in the emargination, the large lateral lobes armed with stout spinous setae; more basal in position are two lobules that are provided with a group of very long slender black setae. Aedeagus apparently simple at apex, relatively short, curved. Genotype, Tanyderus australiensis Alexander (Australasian Region: Tasmania). NOTHODERUS AUSTRALIENSIS (Alexander). Tanyderus australiensis Alexander, Rec. South Australian Museum, ii, 1922, 226- 227; MacGillivray, External Insect-Anatomy, 1923, p. 322, fig. 45 (wing).— Tanyderus (Nothoderus) australiensis Alexander, Genera Insectorum, 1927, Fasc. 189, fig. 9—Nothoderus australiensis Alexander, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Wii, Ua, 245, isles, aL, The type, a unique female, was from Southport, Tasmania, and is now preserved in the South Australian Museum. Dr.*Tonnoir secured a male in the Hartz Mountains, Tasmania, altitude 3,000 feet, December 10, 1922, and a second female specimen on Mt. Wellington, November 28, 1922. These are the only records known to me and the fly is apparently confined to southern Tasmania. Allotype, g. Length about 5-8-6 mm.; wing 7°5 mm. Agreeing closely with the female except in the smaller size (9, length, excluding rostrum, about 9 mm.; wing 10:5-11 mm.; rostrum alone 1:3-1:-4 mm.) and sexual characters. Pronotum and mesonotum reddish-brown, the prescutum with three broad blackish stripes; pronotum and mesonotum with conspicuous erect yellow setae. Wings with a pattern that is similar to the type female (Text-fig. 1) with the following exceptions: The brown spot at origin of Rs not confluent with the marking in the anal angle; as in the type, the broad fascia at the cord divides into three rays in the costal region, the second including Sc at its point of disappearance into R, the third surrounding the free tip of Se.. 370 THE TANYDERIDAE OF AUSTRALIA, Allotype, ¢, Hartz Mts., Tasmania, altitude 3,000 feet, December 10, 1922 (A. L. Tonnoir). The allotype and the female specimen taken by Dr. Tonnoir have been returned to him. His female agrees closely with the type (Text-fig. 1) except that the third apical dark area at outer end of cell ist M, is barely Text-fig. 1.—Wing of Nothoderus australiensis (Alexander); holotype 9°. Text-fig. 2.—Wing of Hutanyderus wilsoni, n. gen. et sp.; allotype 9. Text-fig. 3.—Wing of Radinoderus terrae-reginae (Alexander) ; holotype, sex ? Text-fig. 4.—Wing of Radinoderus occidentalis (Alexander) ; holotype @. BY C. P. ALEXANDER. 371 contiguous with the second apical spot, but broadly connected with the wide central fascia by rays in cells R, and M,, leaving an oval white spot in cell 1st M, and the adjoining part of cell M,. EUTANYDERUS, Nl. gen. Frontal prolongation of the head short, less than one-half the remainder of the head; both labial and maxillary palpi elongate, slightly exceeding the entire remainder of the head, the maxillary palpi a little longer than the labial palpi; terminal two segments of maxillary palpi relatively short, subequal to the ante- penultimate. Antennae 15-segmented, relatively short, only a little longer than the combined front and mouthparts; flagellar segments cylindrical or nearly so, with basal verticils that are shorter than the segments. Eyes hairy. Cervical sclerites equal to or longer than the pronotum, the two together producing a conspicuous elongate neck-region as in this group of genera. Legs with con- spicuous, nearly erect setae on the tibiae and less conspicuous setae on the femora; tibial spurs distinct; tarsal segments one to four with paired spinous setae. Wings (Text-fig. 2) pictured, more heavily so in the female than in the male; Sc relatively short, Sc, ending about opposite one-half to three-fifths the length of R.,,, Sc. a short distance from its tip; Rs relatively short, gently arcuated at origin; R.,, longer than either R, or R,; R,,,; more than one-fourth Rs; basal section of M, nearly equal to m-cu; no supernumerary cross-veins in any cells of the wing. Male hypopygium with the dististyle cylindrical, gently arcuated, a little longer than the basistyle. Ovipositor with small fleshy valves. Genotype, Hutanyderus wilsoni, n. sp. (Australasian Region: Victoria). Despite the points of divergence offered by the structure ot the neck region and the venation, I believe that Hutanyderus is most closely allied to Nothoderus Alexander. EUTANYDERUS WILSONI, 0D. Sp. Size small (wing less than 10 mm.); mesonotal prescutum with four brown stripes; fore coxae paler than the other coxae; femora tipped with black; wings nearly hyaline with a conspicuous banded pattern, very pale in the male, darker in the female, the areas narrowly margined with still darker brown. 6. Length (excluding rostrum) about 7 mm.; wing 8:5 mm.; rostrum about 1-5 mm. 9. Length (excluding rostrum) about 7 mm.; wing 8:5 mm.; rostrum about 1-4 mm. 6. Rostrum and palpi black. Antennae with the scapal segments brown, the first flagellar segment yellow; second flagellar segment pale brown, brighter at the sutures; remaining segments brownish-black, the third and fourth segments a trifle brightened at the sutures. Head dark grey. Cervical sclerites brownish-grey. Pronotum dark grey, with conspicuous erect white setae. Mesonotal prescutum light fulvous, with conspicuous white setae and four dark brown stripes, the intermediate pair longer and weakly separated by a pale vitta; scutum obscure yellow medially, the lobes dark brown, the lateral margins fulvous; scutellum broad, light yellow, with pale setae; postnotal medio- tergite reddish-brown with a darker brown median line. Pleura grey with a reddish cast, the dorsal region darker. Halteres pale yellow, the knobs dark brown. Legs with the fore coxae and trochanters yellow, the remaining coxae concolorous 372 THE TANYDERIDAE OF AUSTRALIA, with the pleura; middle and posterior trochanters obscure brownish-yellow; femora yellow, the tips narrowly blackened; tibiae brown; tarsi passing into brownish- black; hind legs broken. Wings nearly hyaline, with a pale pattern that is only a trifle darker than the ground-colour, these areas narrowly margined with darker brown; these pale fasciae are distributed as follows: Origin of Rs; an irregularly oblique fascia completely crossing the wing at the cord, sending two rays to the costal margin, the outer at the tip of Sc; three extensive apical areas, the first surrounding the fork of R.,,, the second apical in position, the third including the outer end of cell ist M, and thence to the caudal margin; the first and second areas are contiguous basally, separated by a narrow arm of the ground colour; the third ray is distinctly separated from both of the others; an axillary area in both anal cells. This arrangement of pattern is exactly as in the female, as figured (Text-fig. 2). Abdominal tergites obscure yellow, the lateral margins narrowly darker; hypopygium dark brown; sternites more yellowish-brown, the lateral margins infuscated, the caudal margins of the individual segments narrowly pale. ®. Generally similar to the male, differing in details of coloration. Ground colour of the prescutum and scutum duller, more testaceous; scutellum somewhat testaceous brown. The posterior tarsi are much paler yellow than the other tarsi. Wings (Text-fig. 2) with the pattern heavier than the male, the central portions of the various fasciae being only a little paler than the margins; prearcular region and bases of cells C, Sc, R, M, Cu and the anal cells darkened. Abdominal tergites pale brown, the caudal margins of the segments narrowly darker brown. Hab.—Victoria. Holotype, g,. Mountains near Millgrove, altitude 2,000 feet, October 23, 1927 (F. E. Wilson); returned to Mr. Wilson, to be placed eventually in the National Museum, Melbourne. Allotype, 2, with the male, at 2,300 feet; in the author’s collection. This striking addition to the Victorian fauna is named in honour of the collector, Mr. F. Hrasmus Wilson, to whom I am greatly indebted for many kind favours. RADINODERUS Handlirsch. Ann. k.-k. Naturhist. Hofmus. Wien, xxiii, 1909, 270. The genotype of Radinoderus, ornatissimus (Doleschall) is known only from the islands of Amboina and Obi (Osten Sacken, 1886; Enderlein, 1912). Two other species, mirabilis (de Meijere) and oculatus (Riedel), are from New Guinea, while a fourth, solomonis (Alexander), is from the Solomon Islands. The other Aus- tralasian species are from Australia and may be separated by means of the following key: i i 1. Wings broad with a heavy brown pattern, the costal rays much more extensive than the interspaces; all femora yellow with the tips broadly blackened ............ (South: Queensland) aise hore eee terrae-reginae (Alexander) Wings narrow with a more restricted brown pattern, the pale costal interspaces being more extensive than the dark rays; at least one of the femora (probably the fore pair) has a broad and conspicuous blackened ring at near midlength, in addition to the blackened tips .. (Western Australia) .. occidentalis (Alexander) No further data have become available concerning these two species and their descriptions are briefly summarized here only to complete the subject. BY C. P. ALEXANDER. 373 RADINODERUS TERRAE-REGINAE (Alexander). Tanyderus (Radinoderus) terrae-reginae Alexander, Insec. Inscit. Menst., xii, 1924, 141-142. Antennae 24-segmented; scape black, the flagellum entirely light yellow. Mesonotum pale brown with three darker brown stripes; scutellum yellow, the caudal margin and a median line dark brown; pleura dark brown, variegated with paler. MHalteres yellow, the knobs dark brown. Legs yellow, the tips of the femora broadly blackened, the bases of the tibiae similarly and subequally blackened; tarsi yellow... Wings (Text-fig. 3) whitish subhyaline, the pattern brown. Abdomen dark brown, the tergites with an oval whitish marking on either side. Brisbane, October 10, J. A. Kershaw. Type in the National Museum, Melbourne. RADINODERUS OCCIDENTALIS (Alexander). Tanyderus (Radinoderus) occidentalis Alexander, Insec. Inscit. Menst.. xiii, 1925, 32-34. Allied to terrae-reginae, differing in the following regards: Femora yellow, the fore femora (presumably) conspicuously blackened at near midlength; on the middle femora (presumably) this region is merely infuscated. Wings (Text-fig. 4) relatively narrow, the tips subfaleate; membrane whitish sub- hyaline, the brown pattern narrow and restricted in amount, with a Y-shaped marking at the cord, the outer arm, at tip of Sc, confluent with an X-shaped area that occupies the distal third of the wing. Swan River, Western Australia (J. Clark). The unique type was sent to me by my friend, the late Dr. Eustace W. Ferguson. The drawing provided herewith was made from the badly folded wing of the type and the basal portions could not be accurately figured. The type was returned to Dr. Ferguson. Bibliography. ALEXANDER, C. P., 1913.—A revision of the South American Dipterous insects of the family Ptychopteridae. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xliv, 331-335, figs. 1-3. , 1919.—The crane-flies of New York. Part I. Distribution and taxonomy of the adult flies. Cornell Univ. Agr. Expt. Sta., Mem. 25, 883. ————, 1920a.—The crane-flies of New York. Part II. Biology and phylogeny. Cornell Univ. Agr. Hxpt. Sta., Mem. 38, 769-772, pl. 18. ———, 1920b.—A new genus and species of net-winged midge (Blepharoceridae) and am undescribed species of Tanyderidae (Diptera). Arkiv fér Zoologi, xiii, No. 7, 5-7, fig. , 1920c.—A new subfamily of Tanyderid flies (Diptera). Ann. Ent. Soc. America, xiii, 402-407, Pl. 32. , 1921.—A new genus and species of Tanyderidae (Péringueyomyina barnardi) in the South African Museum (Diptera). Ann. Souwth African Mus., xviii, 231-234, fig. —, 1922.—Undescribed crane-flies (Tanyderidae and Tipulidae) in the South Australian Museum. Ree. South Australian Mus., ii, 226-227. ,1924.—Two undescribed species of Tanyderus from the Australasian Region (Diptera, Tanyderidae). Insec. Inscit. Menst., xii, 141-143. , 1925.—An undescribed species of Tanyderus from Western Australia (Diptera, Tanyderidae). Insec. Inscit. Menst., xiii, 32-34. , 1927a.—The interpretation of the radial field of the wing in the Nematocerous Diptera, with special reference to the Tipulidae. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., lii, 44-45, fig. 1. , 1927b.—Tanyderidae. Genera Insectorum, Fasc. 189, fig. 9. ,1928.—The Australasian species of the genus Nemopalpus (Psychodidae, Diptera). Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., liii, 291-4. 374 THE TANYDERIDAE OF AUSTRALIA. CRAMPTON, G. C., 1926.—The external anatomy of the primitive Tanyderid Dipteran Macrochile spectrum Loew, preserved in Baltic Amber. Bull. Brooklyn Ent. Soce., xxi, 1-14, 2 pls. EDWARDS, F. W., 19238a.—A preliminary revision of the crane-flies of New Zealand (Anisopodidae, Tanyderidae, Tipulidae). Trans. New Zealand Inst., liv, 270-272, IL Br, wiles, 21-9, IPL Bes ile, WAS. ,1923b.—New species of crane-flies collected by Mr. G. V. Hudson in New Zealand. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (9), xi, 625-626. ENDERLEIN, G., 1912.—Studien tiber die Tipuliden, Limoniiden, Cylindrotomiden und Ptychopteriden. Zool. Jahrb., Syst., xxxii, 84-85. HANpbDuirRScH, A., 1909.—Zur phylogenie und Fliigelmorphologie der Ptychopteriden (Dipteren). Ann. k.-k. Naturhist. Hofmus. Wien, xxiii, 263-272, Pl. 11, figs. 1-13. Hutron, F. W., 1900.—The Tipulidae, or crane-flies, of New Zealand. Trans. New Zealand Inst., xxxii, 48-49, Pl. 4, figs. 21-22. Loew, H., 1851.—Beschreibung einiger neuen Tipularia terricola. Linnaea entomol., v, 402-408, figs. 24-25. MAcGILLIVRAY, A. D., 1923.—External Insect-Anatomy, pp. 322-323, figs. 45-47. MEIJERE, DE, J. C., 1915a.—Diptera gesammelt durch die 3te Sud-Neu-Guinea Expedition. Nova Guinea, xiii, 51-52, fig. 1. —, 1915b.—Diptera aus Nord-Neu-Guinea. Tijd. v. Hynt., lviii, 104-106, fig. 1. OSTEN SACKEN, C. R., 1859.—New genera and species of North American Tipulidae, with short palpi, with an attempt at a new classification of the tribe. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1859, 197-256. , 1869.—Monographs of the Diptera of North America. Part iv. Smithson. Mise. Colt., 219; 316-319, fig. 7. ————, 1880.—Die Tanyderina, eine merkwitirdige Gruppe der Tipuliden. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, xxix, 517-522, figs. 1-2. —————, 1886.—-Studies on Tipulidae. Part 2. Review of the published genera of the Tipulidae brevipalpi. Berliner Ent. Zeitsch., xxxi, 228-230. PHILIPPI, R. A., 1865.—Aufzaihlung der chilenischen Dipteren. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, xv, 780-782, Pl. 29, fig. 57. TILLYARD, R. J., 1926.—The insects of Australia and New Zealand, pp. 346-347, fig. W 21. NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN ERIRHINIDES (CURCULIONIDAB). By ArrHur M. Lea, F.E.S. [Read 25th July, 1928.] The species here dealt with are all small, but one of them (Glaucopela nidicola) is of special interest, as it was obtained in large numbers from a bird’s nest in the arid district of Ooldea. GLAUCOPELA NIDICOLA, Nl. Sp. Black; antennae, tibiae and tarsi reddish. Densely clothed with brownish- grey scales, variegated with sooty and whitish ones on upper surface, becoming uniformly white on under surface and legs. A row of depressed setae on each elytral interstice. ; Rostrum about the length of prothorax, shining, curved, and with sharply defined punctures. Prothorax strongly transverse, sides strongly rounded, base much wider than apex. Elytra subcordate, base gently and evenly arcuate, with rows of large punctures appearing much smaller through clothing. Under surface strongly convex. Legs short. Length, 2:5-3-0 mm. South Australia: Ooldea (A. M. Lea). Distinct from all previously described species of the genus by its entirely black rostrum. In general appearance, except for its larger size, it is somewhat like G. instabilis and G. fuscomarmorea. The clothing on the upper surface is some- what variable; on the pronotum there is usually a pale median line and the sides are widely pale; on the elytra there is usually a sooty fascia or series of spots crowning the apical slope, beyond which many of the scales are whitish. Many specimens have the elytra obscurely mottled. The male differs from the female in having a shallow depression on the two basal segments of abdomen, and about the basal fifth of rostrum clothed. More than one hundred specimens were taken from a bird’s nest on a small wattle tree, and hundreds more could have been obtained. Two damaged specimens, apparently belonging to this species, were taken at Cue (Western Australia) by Mr. H. W. Brown. DESIANTHA MALEVOLENS Lea. A variable and widely distributed species with scales as dense on under parts as on prothorax and elytra; on each of the latter there is always a distinct pale spot on the third interstice beyond the middle. The abdomen of the female has a depression similar to that of the male, except that it is somewhat shallower (two specimens, still fast in cop., are before me). Var. VEGRANDIS Lea.—A common variety in New South Wales, which is con- sistently smaller than the typical form, and usually has nine vittae on the pro- notum, four dark and five pale (the latter often with a golden gloss); the vittae, however, are sometimes broken up into spots, or two of the pale ones may vanish. In the interior parts of South Australia (Parachilna, Cooper’s Creek, Kingoonya, Mount Painter, Farina, Oodnadatta, Bimbowrie, and the N.E. corner) F 376 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN ERIRHINIDES, a variety is common in which the clothing of the upper surface is of a pale coppery- buff colour, becoming paler on the sides, but with the postmedian spots fairly distinct. Specimens from Queensland (Cunnamulla, Brisbane, Dalby, Stewart River, etc.) vary from having the scales almost entirely pale brown or buff, to almost entirely dark brown, and the prothorax with a variable number of vittae or spots. Two specimens from Bowen have the scales of the upper surface sooty-brown and slaty-white, the latter forming a large basal spot on each side of the pronotum and a small medio-basal one—on the elytra they cover about one-third of the surface; the postmedian spots are present but not isolated. A specimen from Derby (North Western Australia) has similar prothoracic markings, but the pale parts of the elytra are smaller in extent. On an occasional specimen the pale scales of the upper surface have a faint bluish tinge. DESIANTHA FERRUGINEA, N. sp. 6. Black; parts of antennae and of legs obscurely diluted with red. Densely clothed with rusty slightly variegated scales. Rather densely setose, the setae on the elytra long and suberect. Rostrum moderately stout, the length of prothorax, with seven acute ridges partially obscured by clothing. Prothorax almost as long as its greatest width (about one-third from apex), sides rounded, base and apex subequal; with crowded, normally concealed punctures. Elytra about one-third wider than prothorax, rather long, parallel-sided to near apex, shoulders rounded; with rows of large deep punctures appearing very small through clothing, preapical callosities distinct and subfasciculate. Under surface with an elliptic depression common to metasternum and two basal segments of abdomen. Length (excluding rostrum), 9-10 mm. °. Differs in having the elytra bimucronate, the abdomen more convex, with the two basal segments feebly and not conjointly depressed in the middle. Western Australia: Cue (H. W. Brown). Allied to D. major, but the average size smaller, the clothing rustier and elytral setae more erect. The mucros of the female look like small fascicles, and are very similar on the females of that species (the male only was described by Blackburn). On several specimens the clothing on the upper surface is entirely rusty, but it is usually obscurely variegated with some slightly paler spots or patches and some small sooty spots; the pronotum is feebly trivirgate. On the abdomen and most of the metasternum the clothing consists solely of white setae, but on the prosternum, mesosternum and sides of metasternum there are some scales as well. On this, as on most species of the genus with seven acute ridges on the rostrum, the ridges are often partially obscured by scales and setae which arise from dense punctures, the seven ridges are distinct at the base, but one on each side ends before the insertion of antennae, so that near the apex there are only five (some- times only three) ; the apex itself is without ridges but is densely punctate. DESIANTHA CURVISETOSA, nN. SD. 6. Black; parts of antennae and of tarsi obscurely reddish. Densely clothed with rusty scales obscurely variegated with paler and darker spots. With dense and not suberect setae. Length, 7:0-7-5 mm. BY A. M. LEA. 377 South Australia: Oodnadatta (Rev. T. Blackburn); Queensland: Cunnamulla (H. Hardeastle). The two males before me at first glance appear to belong to the preceding species, but are at once distinguished by the elytral setae; these are much less conspicuous from the sides, and are so curved that their tips touch the scales amongst which they are set (on the apical slope, however, although curved, their tips are free) ; on the under surface, except on parts of the prosternum, the clothing consists solely of setae. Structurally also they are close, but differ from the male in having the prothorax slightly longer, elytra not quite so parallel-sided and the depression on the abdomen slightly shallower, and not distinctly joined to a depression on the metasternum (this is also smaller and shallower). On the Cunnamulla specimen the proportion of dark scales on the elytra is greater than on the type. DESIANTHA INERMIS, Nl. Sp. ®. Black; antennae and parts of legs reddish. Densely clothed with obscurely variegated scales and numerous setae; on the under surface and legs with whitish setae only. Rostrum about the length of prothorax, and with seven acute ridges. Prothorax about as long as its greatest width (slightly nearer apex than base) sides gently rounded, base and apex subequal; with crowded partially concealed punctures. Elytra rather strongly arcuate at base, shoulders strongly rounded, sides nowhere quite parallel; with rows of strong punctures normally almost or quite concealed; preapical callosities moderately distinct. Two basal segments of abdomen almost evenly convex, the intercoxal process with coarser punctures than elsewhere. Length, 6 mm. North Western Australia: Derby (W. D. Dodd). Somewhat resembles the preceding and D. major on a reduced scale, but elytra not mucronate. It has the general appearance of D. assimilis but the rostral carinae are different and the elytra (viewed from the sides) have conspicuous setae. The club is slightly darker than the rest of the antennae, and the tibiae are soinewhat darker than the tarsi. On the head and rostrum the clothing is entirely rusty, the pronotum is feebly trivirgate, the scutellum appears as a whitish spot; on the elytra the clothing is so dense that the punctures are often hidden, although the striae are never quite concealed; about half of their scales are rusty, with obscure mottlings of slaty-white and sooty-brown. On the elytra all the setae are curved, but their tips do not touch the scales amongst which they are set, as on the preceding species, being throughout much as they are on the apical slope of that species. A male obtained at the same time as the type, but so badly abraded as to be unsuitable for a type, is slightly smaller than the female, has the elytra more nearly parallel-sided, and has a shallow elliptic depression common to the metasternum and the two following segments. The rostrum at first appears to have seven acute ridges traceable to between the insertion of antennae, three on each side being close together, the median carina being more distant than the others; between it and the one on each side of it on the female, the sculpture is concealed by the clothing, but from the male the setae were abraded and remnants of another, but very feeble, carina may be seen. DESIANTHA TRIVITTICOLLIS, N. SD. 6. Black; antennae and tarsi dull reddish, tibiae somewhat darker. Densely clothed with rusty-brown scales, becoming slightly paler about apex of elytra, but 378 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN ERIRHINIDES, elytra with numerous small irregularly distributed sooty-brown spots, pronotum with three conspicuous pale vittae. With numerous subdepressed setae, becoming uniform and almost white on under parts, each femur with a distinct subapical white ring. Rostrum moderately stout, scarcely the length of prothorax, with seven acute ridges to near apex. Prothorax about as long as wide, sides almost evenly rounded; with crowded punctures. Elytra parallel-sided to slightly beyond middle, shoulders strongly rounded; striate-punctate, punctures large but appearing small through clothing, alternate interstices feebly elevated, preapical callosities distinct. Two basal segments of abdomen with a rather shallow median depression. Length, 7-5 mm. , Elder Expedition, Camp 5; unique. The type was standing in the Blackburn collection with D. maculata, but was not commented upon when the Coleoptera of that Expedition were dealt with; it is much larger than maculata and has much larger abdominal punctures. It really belongs to the group about D. major, but is smaller than that species, and has subdepressed setae. The prothoracic vittae are conspicuous. DESIANTHA FOVEATA, 0. SD. 6. Black; antennae and tarsi reddish. Densely clothed with sooty-brown or slaty-brown obscurely variegated scales, and with numerous stiff, sloping setae; under parts setose. Rostrum rather stout, dilated to near apex, with crowded punctures and three acute ridges. Prothorax slightly transverse, sides evenly rounded, apex somewhat convex in middle; with crowded punctures. Elytra parallel-sided for about half their length, shoulders strongly rounded; with rows of large, deep, partially concealed punctures, preapical callosities subfasciculate. Metasternum and two basal segments of abdomen with a deep excavation or fovea, apical segment with a fairly large impression. Length, 7-8 mm. ®. Differs in having two basal segments of abdomen flat in middle, the apical one gently convex, the legs slightly shorter, and the front tibiae less curved at apex. New South Wales: Upper Williams River (F. E. Wilson and A. M. Lea), Eceleston, in flood debris (J. H. Hopson), Sydney (Lea); Victoria: Portland (H. W. Davey). A rather large species, with the general appearance of D. praemorsa and D. nociva, but without the sudden notch on each side of the rostrum of those species; the rostrum, however, has a feeble notch on each side, but it is distinct only from below. Its upper surface has three distinct ridges, and even on abrasion no others become visible. The tibiae, coxae, and parts of the abdomen are some- times obscurely diluted with red. On some specimens the clothing is mostly sooty- brown, on others it is somewhat paler, but it is never very pale, and on the nine specimens before me there are no well-defined markings, although on some of them there is a feeble median vitta on the pronotum; in certain lights some of the scales have a slight coppery gloss. The seriate punctures on the elytra of the male are often wider than the interstices, but they usually appear much smaller through the clothing. All the tibiae are denticulate. On the Hccleston specimen the setae are suberect and the head has three fairly distinct spots of dark clothing; similar but less distinct spots may be traced on others. BY A. M. LEA. 379 DESIANTHA HUMERALIS, 0. Sp. Black. Densely clothed with rusty-brown slightly variegated depressed setae. Rostrum comparatively thin, with crowded setiferous punctures and with five partially concealed ridges. Prothorax subglobular, densely granulate-punctate, with a feeble median line. Scutellum large. Elytra with parallel sides from beyond shoulders to apical third, thence coarctate to tips, each shoulder with an oblique ridge; with rows of large deep, irregular punctures, alternate interstices slightly elevated (more noticeably at base), preapical callosities rather small. Under surface with crowded punctures. Length, 7 mm. New South Wales: Mulwala (T. G. Sloane); unique. An unusually distinct species. The scutellum is unusually large, and its clothing has a beautiful golden gloss; the abdomen and metasternum are almost glabrous, probably through abrasion. Seen directly from above the rostrum appears to be without ridges, and even from oblique directions these are not sharply defined. The elytral punctures are not in regular striaegas the elevations separating them in the rows are often on a level with the interstices; where not concealed by the clothing they are seen to be large, deep, and more or less quadrate, but some of them are much larger (two or three times the length) than the adjacent ones. As the two basal segments of the abdomen are feebly convex in the middle the type appears to be a female; the elytra are not mucronate, but there is a slight sutural notch. DESIANTHA ALPINA, 0. Sp. ©. Black. Closely covered with short, somewhat coppery setae, closely pressed to the derm. Rostrum rather stout, slightly shorter than prothorax, with crowded punctures, with rather short lateral ridges only. Prothorax about as long as the basal width, sides strongly rounded; densely granulate-punctate, with a feeble median ridge. Elytra elongate-cordate, sides gently rounded, tips very feebly mucronate; with regular rows of fairly large punctures, interstices wide and flat, preapical callosities completely absent. Basal segment of abdomen slightly depressed in middle. Length, 8-10 mm. New South Wales: Mount Kosciusko (B. Ingleby); Victoria: Alps (H. W. Davey). An alpine species with scales completely absent and a rather curious rostrum. The seven specimens ‘before me are structurally so much alike that I think they cannot belong to more than one species, but the setae differ in various forms, which may be thus noted: Form 1 (typical) —A single coppery seta in each puncture not rising above the general level (except on parts of the rostrum and legs), on the elytra dense and very short, less than one-fifth as long as the interstice is wide, and so placed that, although not in even rows, they are from four to six deep across each inter- stice. From directly above, the rostrum appears to be entirely without ridges, even a faint median line not being indicated, but on each side there are two fine ridges extending parallel with a scrobe for about half its length. The seriate punctures on the elytra are sharply defined and scarcely one-third the width of the interstices, each contains a small setiferous granule. Form 2.—Setae not quite as depressed as on the typical form (although on the elytra not rising above the general level), slightly longer and non-metallic; on the elytra they are somewhat dense (about eight to ten deep across each 380 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN ERIRHINIDES, interstice). The rostrum has a feeble shining median line (not at all elevated) from the interocular fovea almost to the apex, but the lateral ridges are less conspicuous than on Form 1. Mount Kosciusko. An almost completely abraded specimen (from the summit, W. E. Raymond) probably belongs to this form. Its interstices are seen to be densely and finely granulated, and the granules in the seriate punctures are very distinct. Form 3.—Setae slightly longer, and sparser on the elytra than on Form 2, being placed from four to six deep, and some of them are almost half as long as an interstice is wide. The interstices themselves are distinctly separately convex. The rostrum has a feeble median line and the lateral ridges are very feeble. Summit of Mount Kosciusko, in January (Dr. HE. W. Ferguson). The only male before me (taken by Mr. Ingleby) probably belongs to Form 3, as its elytral interstices are separately convex, but its elytral setae are inter- mediate between ethose of Forms 2 and 3. Its abdomen has a large shallow depression, common to the two basal segments. DESIANTHA LONGA, Nl. Sp. Black; antennae and tarsi reddish, rest of legs darker (most of femora black). Densely clothed with rusty-brown or buff scales, obscurely variegated on elytra, the pronotum with three pale vittae, and a few sooty scales scattered singly; upper surface with rather sparse semi-erect setae; metasternum, abdomen and legs with white setae, but each femur with a subapical ring of metallic scales. Rostrum moderately thin and curved, the length of sides of prothorax; with crowded punctures and remnants of five feeble ridges. Prothorax distinctly longer than wide, sides moderately rounded; with crowded normally concealed punctures. Elytra rather narrow but considerably wider than prothorax, oblong-cordate; striate-punctate, punctures partially concealed; preapical callosities rather feeble. Two basal segments of abdomen somewhat flattened in middle. Length, 7 mm. Queensland: Cairns (E. Allen); unique: A rather elongate species, in general appearance like some of the larger varieties of D. maculata, but rostrum with very feeble ridges instead of acute ones. In some lights some of the lateral scales have a greenish or coppery gloss. The type is probably a female, but its elytra are not at all mucronate. DESIANTHA ALBIDOSPARSA, N. SD. ¢. Black; antennae and tarsi obscurely diluted with red. Clothed with white or whitish scales irregularly distributed; with white setae on under parts. Rostrum of moderate length and evenly curved; with crowded punctures and seven ridges (of which four are indistinct). Prothorax slightly transverse, sides evenly rounded, base wider than apex, with crowded punctures and a feeble remnant of a median line. Elytra elongate-cordate; striate-punctate, punctures large and in places partially concealed, alternate interstices slightly elevated, preapical callosities very feeble. Abdomen with a rather shallow depression on two basal segments. Length, 6-7 mm. ®. Differs in having the abdomen evenly convex and with somewhat shorter legs. ; Queensland: Dalby (Mrs. F. H. Hobler). Not very close to any previously described species, but perhaps nearest to D. irrasa, although much smaller, with different clothing and elytra. In some BY A. M. LBA. 381 lights, parts of the elytra appear to be obscurely reddish. There are some incon- spicuous setae on the apical slope, but none on the rest of the upper surface; the elytra, owing to the irregular distribution of the scales, have a maculate appear- ance, on the pronotum remnants of three vittae are indicated. There are only three distinct ridges on the rostrum (the median one and one margining the scrobe on each side), but four others may be traced, or are indicated by rows of punctures. DESIANTHA PUNCTICOLLIS, Nn. sp. ¢. Black; parts of antennae and of tarsi obscurely diluted with red. Rather densely clothed with short rusty-brown setae, closely applied to the derm and denser on the suture than elsewhere; under parts with fine white setae, the middle and hind tibiae fringed with white hairs. Rostrum rather thin, moderately curved, shorter than prothorax, with crowded punctures and feeble ridges. Prothorax slightly longer than wide, sides strongly and evenly rounded, base and apex subequal; with crowded punctures separated by short longitudinal ridges. Elytra not much wider than widest part of pro- thorax, parallel-sided to beyond the middle; with regular rows of rather large punctures, alternate interstices somewhat elevated; without preapical callosities. Two basal segments of abdomen with a wide, shallow depression. Length, 7 mm. Tasmania (Blackburn’s collection); unique. An isolated species, although with somewhat the appearance of a large D. nigra, from which it is at once distinguished by the rostrum and prothoracic punctures. The rostrum is not entirely without ridges, the median one being represented by a feeble basal remnant, and on each side two feeble ones may be traced for about half its length. On the pronotum the punctures appear to be all more or less longitudinally confluent owing to their sides being bounded by very fine ridges; this appearance is somewhat obscured by the clothing, but on close examination is sufficiently distinct. DESIANTHA MUCRONATA, Nl. Sp. 9. Black; some parts obscurely diluted with red, antennae (club excepted) and tarsi reddish. Densely clothed with rusty-brown and slaty-white scales and setae, the pronotum trivirgate, the elytra maculate; under parts with white or whitish setae, the femora ringed. Rostrum about the length of prothorax; with seven ridges, three acute and visible from above, the others lateral and less distinct. Prothorax slightly trans- verse, sides rather strongly rounded, base slightly wider than apex; with crowded, partially concealed punctures. ,Elytra considerably wider than prothorax, sides nowhere quite parallel, tips with strong diverging mucros; with rows of large partially concealed punctures, alternate interstices slightly elevated, preapical callosities slight. Two basal segments of abdomen slightly flattened in middle. Length, 5 mm. South Australia: Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt) ; unique. In general appearance like D. maculata, but conspicuously tailed. To a certain extent it resembles D. vittata, but the elytra are not vittate, and the apical mucros are much longer, each being about the length of a claw joint. It is also allied to D. caudata and D. nigra, but the prothorax is somewhat shorter, the elytral mucros 382 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN ERIRHINIDES, are divergent instead of convergent or at least parallel, and the elytral setae are recurved and inconspicuous from above. The other species with mucronate elytra are larger and have the mucros much shorter and less conspicuous. DESIANTHA PARVONIGRA, N. Sp. 6. Black; antennae (club excepted), tibiae, and tarsi red. Moderately clothed with obscurely variegated scales, mostly dark on the upper surface, pale on the sides of prothorax and on the under surface; elytra with a row of inconspicuous setae on each interstice; sterna densely squamose in parts, rest of under surface with fine white setae. Rostrum almost the length of prothorax, with dense punctures, mostly in rows, with a shining but rather feeble median ridge and with remnants of others. Prothorax about as long as its greatest width, sides moderately rounded; with dense and rather small punctures. HElytra much wider than prothorax, parallel- sided to beyond the middle, with regular rows of large punctures, interstices not alternately elevated, preapical callosities feeble. Two basal segments of abdomen with a fairly deep elliptic impression, the apical segment with a median fovea. Length, 5 mm. South Australia: Adelaide. A small species, of which there are only males before me, but the females probably have mucronate elytra. In general appearance they are like males of D. nigra, but are smaller and with the rostrum differently sculptured. On a cotype male of that species the rostrum is distinctly seven-carinate, the median carina comparatively wide and shining, the others acute and sharply defined; on two other males and on several females the carinae are much the same; on the present species the median carina is rather feeble, and no others are distinct, but as the punctures are sublineate in arrangement several feeble ones on each side are indicated; the elytral setae are also less conspicuous. DESIANTHA METALLICA, Nl. Sp. 6. Dark brown; antennae and legs red. Densely clothed with metallic green scales, becoming greyish and opaque on sides; with sparse, short, depressed, whitish setae. Rostrum rather thin, curved, slightly longer than prothorax, with dense, normally concealed punctures and a feeble median line. Antennae long and thin. Prothorax about as long as its greatest width, sides moderately rounded; with crowded, concealed punctures. Hlytra elongate, parallel-sided to beyond the middle, with rows of large partially concealed punctures, interstices not alternately elevated, preapical callosities scarcely indicated. Two basal segments of abdomen with a shallow median depression, the apical segment sfoveate. Legs long and thin. Length, 6-7 mm. Victoria: Mallee (C. French Sen.). A narrow species with beautiful. clothing, unusually long legs and antennae, and rostrum with a feeble median line, which is continued backwards on to the head and base of prothorax. The eyes are more rounded than is usual, and the notch in front of the prosternum is unusually shallow. On a second specimen only the scales on the head and rostrum are green, the others being of a somewhat brassy-grey, but becoming opaque on the sides. I have also seen specimens from Swan Hill, in the collection of Mr. C. Oke. Bye AS vie BA: 383 DESIANTHA STENODERES, 0. Sp. 2. Black; antennae, legs and part of abdomen reddish. Densely clothed with variegated scales and rather sparse curved setae; prosternum and sides of meta- sternum and of abdomen squamose, rest of under surface setose. Rostrum slightly shorter than prothorax; with seven acute ridges, but the lateral ones partially obscured by clothing. Prothorax narrow, distinetly longer than wide, sides feebly rounded, base and apex equal; punctures normally con- cealed. Elytra much wider than prothorax, parallel-sided to near apex; with rows of large partially concealed punctures, alternate interstices very feebly elevated, preapical callosities moderately distinct. Two basal segments of abdomen slightly flattened in middle. Length, 3-5 mm. Queensland: Cunnamulla (H. Hardcastle); unique. A small, narrow, maculate species, smaller than any specimen I have seen of D. maculata, and rostrum with less conspicuous carinae; it is smaller even than D. parva and D. pusilla, and its clothing is very different. On the head and rostrum the scales are mostly rusty; on the pronotum they are also mostly rusty, but it has a trivirgate appearance; on the elytra tne rusty scales are mostly confined to the suture base and sides, the rest of the surface being occupied by slaty-grey and sooty-brown spots irregularly mingled. . DESIANTHA PARVICORNIS, ND. Sp. Black; antennae and most of legs reddish. Densely clothed with variegated scales, becoming whitish on parts of under surface; with rather sparse curved or oblique setae, very distinct from the sides. Rostrum very feebly curved, scarcely the length of prothorax, ridges feeble, or at least scarcely traceable through clothing. Antennae unusually short. Prothorax almost as long as wide, sides moderately rounded; punctures normally concealed. Elytra parallel-sided to beyond the middle, with rows of large partially concealed punctures, interstices not alternately elevated. Two basal segments of abdomen strongly convex, but slightly flattened in middle. Length, 3-5 mm. Victoria: Sea Lake (J. C. Goudie); unique. About the size of the preceding species, but with a somewhat rougher appear- ance and with shorter antennae (shorter than in any other known species of the genus); a character at once distinctive from D. parva and D. pusilla. They are about the length of those of Anorthorhinus brevicornis, but are slightly thinner. The scales are mostly rusty-brown, and are larger than usual, the pronotum is faintly trivittate, on the elytra there are paler and darker spots, but they are nowhere sharply defined. The preapical callosities are indicated by pale spots, otherwise they would be scarcely evident. DESIANTHA LATA, 0. Sp. Black; antennae (club excepted) and tarsi reddish. Densely clothed with pale muddy-grey scales, on the upper surface variegated with sooty or sooty-brown,; a distinct whitish spot on the second and third interstices on each elytron, slightly beyond the middle. Rostrum rather stout and evenly curved, punctures normally concealed except about apex. Prothorax distinctly transverse, sides moderately rounded, base and apex equal; punctures normally concealed. Elytra wide, oblong-cordate; striate- punctate, but punctures normally entirely concealed. Two basal segments of 384 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN ERIRHINIDES, abdomen gently depressed in middle. Femora stout, tibiae acutely denticulate. Length, 4 mm. New South Wales: Windsor, in flood debris (A. M. Lea); unique. A small, wide, densely squamose species, with the general appearance of D. malevolens, but considerably wider, the postmedian spot on each elytron not confined to the third interstice, and each tibia. with a much longer fringe of silken hairs. On the pronotum there is a wide vitta of sooty scales on each side of a pale median line; on the elytra the sooty scales are most numerous near the suture, the paler ones near the sides; on the upper surface there are but few setae and they are inconspicuous even from the sides. DESIANTHA ROSTRALIS, Dl. Sp. Black; antennae and tarsi reddish. Densely clothed with muddy-grey scales, obscurely variegated with paler and darker ones, an obscurely pale spot on the second and third interstices on each elytron, slightly beyond the middle. Rostrum stout, suddenly and strongly bent downwards near base, punctures concealed except at tip, ridges apparently absent. Prothorax distinctly transverse, sides evenly rounded, base and apex equal; with crowded concealed punctures. Elytra searcely one-fourth wider than prothorax, oblong-cordate; striate-punctate, striae distinct, the punctures large but normally quite concealed, interstices regular, without preapical callosities. Basal segment of abdomen depressed in middle. Length, 4 mm. New South Wales: Windsor, in flood debris (H. J. Carter). With the general appearance of D. malevolens, but rostrum very different; its base is almost on an even plane with the head, but at about the basal third is abruptly turned downwards; on malevolens the rostrum and front part of the head have an almost even incurvature. Seen from the sides the differences are very conspicuous. There are some setae on the upper surface, but as they are pressed flat amongst the scales (except a few on the apical slope) they are inconspicuous, even from the sides. On the type four irregular sooty vittae or series of spots may be traced on the pronotum; the elytra have a feebly spotted appearance, the dark scales being more abundant near the suture than elsewhere. On a second specimen the clothing is almost uniformly muddy-grey or pale brown, not much paler on the under surface than on the prothorax and elytra. CYDMAEA CRASSTROSTRIS Blackb. The type of this species was unique and is now in the British Museum. Numerous specimens now before me from New South Wales (Mittagong and Sydney), Victoria, Tasmania (Avoca) and South Australia (Mount Lofty), appear to belong to it. The clothing is somewhat variable, but on the elytra may be considered to be in four main divisions: 1, A large, sharply limited, subtriangular pale patch on the apical slope; 2 and 3, A large triangular black patch on each side, but each patch with numerous irregularly distributed pale spots; 4, A less sharply defined pale basal triangle, connected along the suture with the apical one. On the pronotum there are usually three ill-defined dark vittae. On the head there are usually three dark spots, usually isolated, but occasionally connected so as to enclose the pale spots; the scales between the eyes and base of rostum vary from almost white to brilliant golden-red. The inflation of the rostrum, as seen from the sides, is searcely evident in the female. iY AN, a, TAN, 385 CYDMAEA INVALIDA Blackb. Although only one specimen was mentioned in the original description there are two in the South Australian Museum marked as cotypes, from the original locality (Petersburg, in South Australia). Other specimens are from Melrose, Murray Bridge, Parachilna, Hergott and Barossa. The scales are opaque (a character not previously mentioned, but of importance in the genus); the pronotum has a large but usually not solid median patch of muddy-brown scales, and numerous irregu- larly distributed spots of similar scales on the elytra. ; CyYDMAEA GRISEA Lea. Two specimens received many years ago, from the Australian Museum, as coming from Queensland, possibly belong to this species; they differ from the type (from the Swan River), in having the markings (three feeble prothoracic vittae and numerous elytral spots) more conspicuous. In general appearance they are like large specimens of ©. diversa, but a larger percentage of the clothing of the upper surface is pale, and the rostrum is somewhat longer and stouter. The two basal segments of abdomen are flattened in the middle, so they are probably males; the types, which have those segments gently convex, are probably females. CYDMAEA NASALIS, N. sp. 6. Black; apical third of rostrum, antennae, tibiae and tarsi reddish. Denseiy clothed with whitish and brownish scales, obscurely mingled on upper surface, but each elytron with a large round median blackish spot; under surface with silvery- white scales, with a metallic gloss on sides. Rostrum strongly and evenly curved, slightly longer than prothorax and scutellum combined, with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures almost to apical third (where the antennae are inserted), in front with rather dense and small but sharply defined punctures. Prothorax slightly diminishing in width from base to near apex, and then suddenly to apex itself, which is only half the width of base; with crowded normally concealed punctures. Elytra oblong-cordate; with rows of large punctures, appearing much smaller through clothing. Two basal segments of abdomen gently depressed in. middle. Front coxae touching. Length, 4 mm. ©. Differs in having the rostrum somewhat longer and thinner, more of it red- dish, ridges and seriate punctures scarcely extending to middle, antennae inserted less close to apex, and abdomen evenly convex. South Australia: Gawler (A. M. Lea). A bimaculate species and from Gawler, the original locality of C. bimaculata, but differs from that species in being larger, and in having the rostrum consider- ably longer (even in the male it is distinctly longer than the prothorax) and partly reddish. A South Australian (Nuriootpa) specimen agrees well with the description of bimaculata, and three from New South Wales were so identified by Blackburn, and the differences are constant. CYDMAEA INTERMIXTA, Nl. Sp. Black; antennae, tibiae and tarsi reddish. Densely clothed with variegated scales, the under parts with silvery-white ones, with a slight bluish or coppery gloss on sides. ; Rostrum moderately and evenly curved, with fine ridges alternated with rows of punctures (squamiferous near base) to insertion of antennae (at apical two- 386 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN ERIRHINIDES, fifths). Prothorax with sides rather strongly rounded but much wider at base than at apex; with crowded normally concealed punctures. Elytra oblong-cordate; seriate punctures obscured by clothing; alternate interstices feebly elevated, with a feeble preapical callus at the junction of the fourth and sixth on each side. Front coxae almost touching. Length, 2-5-3:0 mm. Western Australia: Swan River (A. M. Lea). Structurally close to C. dorsalis, but with very different clothing. In its general appearance it resembles C. major on a greatly reduced scale. The clothing of the upper surface is irregularly intermingled, and varies from a bluish-white, through buff and ochreous, to dark brown (almost black); on the pronotum there is usually a fairly large ill-defined brown patch, with a whitish patch on each side of the base; on the middle of the side of each elytron there is a subtriangular white patch, preceded and followed by dark brown ones; on the head the scales are mostly pale brown, often with a coppery gloss, with three ill-defined dark spots. In certain lights many of the paler scales on the sides, as well as on the under parts, appear brilliantly metallic. The sexes are not very sharply defined, the male has a slightly shorter and stouter rostrum than the female, with seriate punctures in slightly longer rows, and the two basal segments of its abdomen are feebly depressed in the middle, instead of evenly convex. CYDMAEA BASALIS, Nl. SD. Black; tip of rostrum, funicle, club, and parts of legs obscurely reddish, scape paler. Densely clothed with opaque whitish and mouse-coloured scales on upper surface, white with a greenish or bluish gloss on under parts. Rostrum about the length of prothorax, strongly arched at base, almost straight in front; apical half with small, sharply defined punctures, basal half with stronger concealed ones. Antennae inserted about two-fifths from apex of rostrum. Pro- thorax distinctly transverse, sides rather strongly rounded, apex about two-thirds the width of base; with crowded concealed punctures. Elytra oblong-cordate, not much wider than prothorax, striate-punctate, but punctures normally concealed. Abdomen rather strongly convex, apex with a small open depression. Front coxae slightly separated. Length, 2-5 mm. Victoria: Birchip and Sea Lake (J. C. Goudie, No. 191). The opaque clothing of the upper surface is almost of the same shades of colour as on C. invalida, but is differently disposed; its rostrum is also consider- ably stouter than on that species, at first it appears to be of a shining black, but its apex is really obscurely diluted with red. In general appearance it is fairly close to C. cryptoderma, but the dark clothing of the upper surface is darker and the rostrum is wider, suddenly curved at the base and mostly black. The dark scales cover most of the pronotum, but appear slightly vittate; on the elytra they also cover most of the surface, the whitish scales prevailing at the base and along the suture to beyond the middle, where they join a feeble transverse fascia, so that they form a wide H (sideways); in addition there are some pale scales on ‘the tips and sides; on the head and base of rostrum most of the scales are dark, but on the latter, in some lights, they have a golden or brassy lustre. The four specimens taken, judging by the abdomen, appear to be females. CYDMABA SORDIDA, N. SD. Black; apical third of rostrum and parts of legs obscurely reddish, antennae paler. Densely clothed with opaque scales on upper surface, silvery-white with a rosy gloss on under surface. BY A. M. LEA. 387 Rostrum about the length of prothorax, strongly arched at base; with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where the antennae are inserted), in front with numerous small, sharply defined punctures. Prothorax with sides rather strongly rounded, apex slightly more than half the width of base; with dense, normally concealed punctures. Elytra oblong-cordate, not much wider than prothorax; striate-punctate, striae appearing narrow and regular through clothing, the punctures large but concealed. Front coxae touching. Length, 3 mm. Western Australia: Ankertell (H. W. Brown); unique. Larger than C. opaca, and the other species with opaque clothing on the upper surface. The rostrum is almost as strongly arched at the base as on the preceding species, and its apex is obscurely diluted with red. The scales on the upper surface are mostly of a pale slaty-brown, with a large dark patch (obscurely defined) on each elytron, and some obscure whitish spots, but on the sides of both prothorax and elytra white scales are very distinct; on the base of the rostrum the scales in some lights appear metallic. On the under parts the scales are white but in some lights with a conspicuous rosy or golden-red gloss, except on the three apical segments, which, owing to sparsity of clothing, appear black, in sharp contrast with the preceding ones; the latter are flattened or faintly depressed in the middle, so that the type is probably a male. CYDMAEA LATIROSTRIS, N. Sp. 3g. Black; densely clothed with sooty-brown scales, the pronotum with a feeble greyish median line, the elytra with numerous small, greyish spots and a small grey V, about the scutellum; under parts with silvery-grey scales. Rostrum about the length of prothorax, moderately curved, rather stout and feebly dilated to apex; with fine ridges, alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where the antennae are inserted), in front with crowded and comparatively large ones. Prothorax almost as long as wide, sides strongly and evenly rounded, base very little wider than apex; punctures normally con- cealed. Elytra cordate, shoulders strongly rounded, near base considerably wider than base of prothorax; striate-punctate, but punctures normally concealed. Abdomen with a shallow depression on basal segment, third and fourth combined slightly longer than second or fifth. Legs rather stout, front coxae touching. Length, 3 mm. Queensland: Cairns district (F. P. Dodd); unique. A somewhat aberrant member of the genus, with the rostrum dilated to the tip, and the prosternal notch deeper than usual; the scape is also shorter and stouter than usual, and its seventh joint is so closely applied to the club that at first glance it appears to belong to it. The abdominal scales in some lights have a faint greenish gloss. CYDMAEA LEUCOMELA, Nl. SD. Black; apical third of rostrum, antennae and tarsi more or less reddish. Densely clothed with black and white scales on upper surface, white with a slight greenish gloss on under parts. Rostrum rather thin, moderately curved, scarcely longer than prothorax; with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where the antennae are inserted), in front with small distinct punctures. Prothorax with sides strongly rounded, apex about three-fifths the width of base; punctures dense 388 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN ERIRHINIDES, and normally concealed. HElytra oblong-cordate, not much wider than base of prothorax; striate-punctate, striae narrow -and punctures normally concealed. Front coxae touching. Length 2-5 mm. Western Australia: Swan River (A. M. Lea); unique. A conspicuously marked species. On the pronotum the white scales form a narrow vitta on each side and some small spots in the middle; on the elytra the suture is narrowly white throughout, the three following interstices on each side are black, except at the tips, then white sublineate spots are numerous to the margins. The funicle is somewhat darker than the other parts of the antennae, which are conspicuously reddish. The two basal segments of the abdomen are flattened in the middle, and the antennae are inserted at the apical third of the rostrum, so the type appears to be a male. CYDMAEA VITTICOLLIS, nN. Sp. Black; densely clothed with black and white scales on upper surface, white with a faint metallic gloss on under parts. Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, thin, and (for the genus) rather lightly curved, with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where the antennae are inserted), in front with small sharply defined punctures. Prothorax almost as long as the median width, sides rather strongly rounded, base very little wider than apex, punctures dense and normally concealed. Elytra oblong-cordate, considerably wider than prothorax; striate- punctate, punctures almost concealed. Front coxae touching. Length, 2-5 mm. South Australia: Mount Lofty Ranges (S. H. Curnow and A. M. Lea). The seales on the upper surface are much as those on C. diversa, except that on the prothorax they are differently arranged, but the prothorax itself on that species is less rounded, with the base considerably wider than the apex. On the pronotum of the present species the white scales form a narrow median vitta and a semi-double irregular one on each side; on the elytra they form numerous irregularly distributed spots, with a tendency to a sublineate arrangement; the suture is black almost throughout. The median ridge of the rostrum is narrow, shining, and more distinct than is usual. As the basal segment of the abdomen is feebly concave on the four specimens taken they are probably all males. CYDMAEA INCONSTANS, Nn. sp. : ?. Black; densely clothed with whitish and slaty-grey scales on upper surface, Silvery-white with a slight rosy or greenish gloss on under parts. Rostrum long (slightly longer than prothorax and scutellum combined), thin and moderately curved, with fine ridges alternated with rows of punctures (squam- iferous near base) to middle (where the antennae are inserted), in front with minute punctures. Prothorax with sides rather strongly rounded and widest at base, which is almost twice the width of apex; with dense partially conceaied punctures. Elytra cordate, widest at about basal fourth; striate-punctate, punctures not entirely concealed. Abdomen evenly convex. Front coxae touching. Length, 3 mm. Tasmania: Hobart (A. M. Lea). In general appearance the type is like an unusually large pale specimen of C. diversa, but the prothorax is not quite as wide at the base, and the rostrum is unusually long and thin. From C. grisea it is distinct by its longer, thinner, and entirely black rostrum. At first glance the clothing on its upper surface appears _BY A. M. LEA. 389 to be entirely whitish, but on close examination a feeble slaty-grey median vitta may be seen on the pronotum and numerous small indistinct spots on the elytra; on each interstice of the latter the scales are in two rows, separated by setae, but the setae are scarcely visible even from the sides; on many other species, however, double rows of scales may be traced on the elytra. A female from New South Wales (Blue Mountains, Dr. EH. W. Ferguson? evidently belongs to this species, but its dark scales are confined to a wide and feeble vitta extending from the middle of pronotum almost to the apex of elytra. Another from Western Australia (Swan River, A. M. Lea), probably also belongs to the species, but its antennae and tarsi are more or less obscurely reddish, and the clothing of its upper surface is entirely bluish-white, except for some scales seattered singly. One from the Blackburn collection, without a locality label, and minus its antennae, probably also belongs to the species; the clothing of its upper surface is almost stramineous, with a slight metallic gloss, but there are some very feeble darker opaque spots; in certain lights the clothing of its under surface is brilliantly opalescent, but from most directions it has a rosy gloss. It appears to be a male, as the basal segments of its abdomen are flattened or feebly concave in the middle, and the punctures on the apical half of its rostrum are more distinct. CYDMAEA SUBUNIFORMIS, 0. sp. Black; antennae distinctly reddish. Densely clothed with whitish scales, obscurely variegated with somewhat darker ones on upper surface; on under parts silvery-white, with a greenish or rosy gloss. Rostrum thin and (for the genus) rather feebly curved, scarcely the length of prothorax, with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures on basal third. Antennae inserted about middle of rostrum. Prothorax about as long as the median width, sides evenly rounded, base scarcely one-fourth wider than apex; punctures dense and mostly concealed. Elytra oblong-cordate, conspicuously wider than prothorax, with narrow striae containing large but almost concealed punctures. Basal segment of abdomen gently convex. Front coxae touching. Length, 2 mm. New South Wales: National Park (A. M. Lea). Approaching C. diversa, but prothorax distinctly narrower at base and scales of upper surface nowhere sharply contrasted, and with the paler ones in the majority. It is also like the preceding species on a reduced scale, with the rostrum almost as thin but distinctly shorter, and the prothorax narrower at the base. The type is probably a female. CYDMAEA MULTIMACULATA, ND. SD. Black; scape reddish, rest of antennae and claw-joints darker, but not black. Densely clothed with stramineous scales, with numerous chocolate-brown spots on upper surface, silvery-white with a slight metallic gloss on under parts. Rostrum rather thin, moderately curved, the length of prothorax, with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where the antennae are inserted), in front with numerous small but distinct punctures. Prothorax about as long as wide, sides feebly decreasing in width from base to near apex, and then rather suddenly to apex itself, which is about two-thirds the width of base; punctures entirely concealed. Elytra cordate, not much wider than 390 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN ERIRHINIDES, prothorax; with series of partly concealed punctures in distinct striae. Basal seginents of abdomen evenly convex. Front coxae touching. Length, 2-5 mm. South Australia (Macleay Museum). Fairly close to C. diversa, but the pale scales of the upper surface are in the majority, and the pronotum has four conspicuous dark spots, which are somewhat angular and placed two in the middle and two behind them at the base; there are numerous spots on the elytra; on the basal third mostly free, on the median third mostly irregularly conjoined (subfasciate at the summit of the apical slope), and sparse on the apical third. The stramineous scales from most directions seem opaque, but from others have a distinct silvery lustre. Judging by the abdomen the type appears to be a male, but the sculpture of the rostrum and the insertion of antennae render this doubtful. CYDMAEA MONOBIA, N. SD. ®. Black; antennae obscurely reddish. Densely clothed with white and black scales on upper surface, silvery-white, with a rosy or greenish gloss on under parts. Rostrum moderately thin and curved, the length of prothorax, with fine ridges alternated with rows of punctures (squamiferous near base) to middle (where the antennae are inserted), in front with small but fairly distinct punctures. Pro- thorax as long as wide, sides evenly rounded and not much wider at base than at apex; punctures dense and mostly concealed. Elytra elongate-cordate, with fairly large, partly concealed punctures, in narrow striae. Two basal segments of abdomen strongly convex. Front coxae touching. Length, 2 mm. North Australia: Roper River (N. B. Tindale); unique. Allied to C. diversa, but distinctly narrower, and with elytral clothing mostly white, with a few small black spots, but the black scales are mostly scattered singly, causing the surface to appear speckled rather than maculate; on the pronotum, however, there is a fairly conspicuous median vitta. The type is the only specimen of the genus I have seen from North Australia. CYDMAEA INDISTINCTA, N. Sp. Black; antennae and legs distinctly reddish. Densely clothed with whitish and blackish scales on upper surface, the whitish ones with a more or less distinct metallic gloss, the blackish ones opaque; under parts with silvery-white scales with a faint rosy or greenish gloss. Rostrum thin, moderately curved and the length of prothorax, with fine ridges alternated with rows of punctures (squamiferous on basal fourth) to middle (where the antennae are inserted), in front with small punctures. Prothorax with sides rounded and increasing in width to base, which is almost twice the width of apex; with crowded concealed punctures. Elytra oblong-cordate; with fairly large, partially concealed punctures, in narrow striae. Basal segments of abdomen moderately convex. Front coxae touching. Length, 2 mm. Western Australia: Swan River (A. M. Lea). In general appearance like small C. diversa, but with red legs. The type has a fairly distinct dark median vitta and some small spots on the sides of the pronotum; on the elytra the whitish scales are less abundant than the darker ones, and are condensed into numerous small irregular spots, and an irregular fascia across the summit of the apical slope. On a second specimen the paler scales are ~ BY A. M. LEA. 391 more numerous and the spotted appearance is less evident. A third one is probably immature as its derm is entirely of a dingy red, not much darker than the legs. They appear to be all females. CYDMABEA EXILIS, nN. Sp. ¢. Black; antennae blackish. Densely clothed with variegated scales on upper surface, silvery-white with a golden or greenish gloss on under parts. Rostrum thin, moderately curved, and slightly longer than prothorax; with fine ridges, alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to two-fifths from apex (where the antennae are inserted), in front with small but fairly distinct punctures. Prothorax about as long as its greatest width, sides evenly rounded and very little wider at base than at apex; with crowded, concealed punctures. Elytra comparatively long, oblong-cordate, notably wider than prothorax, with large, partly concealed punctures in narrow striae. Basal segment of abdomen depressed in middle. Front femora touching. Length, 2 mm. Victoria: Carrum (C. Oke), Cheltenham (H. W. Davey). On the type, the scales on the head are mostly white, with a golden gloss: on the pronotum whitish scales (in some lights with a golden gloss) form a median line, and are dense on the sides, the interspaces having black scales: on the elytra there is a short black fascia crowning the apical slope, preceded and followed by ‘irregular white ones; there is a fairly large transverse patch of blackish scales about the middle, elsewhere the scales are mostly whitish, but often with a metallic gloss, brilliantly golden in some lights. On a second specimen, from Carrum, the scales on the upper surface are less metallic and the fasciae are less evident. On two specimens, from Cheltenham, the golden gloss is less evident than on the type, on one of them the white postmedian fascia is irregularly connected with the shoulders by white spots, so as to resemble an irregular U, on the type and the other specimens this is less evident, but they all have the median vitta of the pronotum distinct. A male, from New South Wales (Sydney, A. M. Lea) probably belongs to this species, but may be immature; it is of a dull piceous-brown, with the suture and most of the under surface black. The clothing of the pronotum is as on the type, but the fasciae of the elytra are less pronounced. On this and the next species the general outlines are much as those of Hniopea, but the elytra are without the two small nodules that are usually present on the species of that genus; they are comparatively narrow species, the prothorax with evenly rounded sides, and base and apex almost equal. CYDMAEA SOROR, nN. Sp. g. Black; legs and antennae blackish. Densely clothed with white or whitish seales, feebly variegated with pale slaty-grey on the upper surface. Sculpture as described in the preceding species. Length, 2 mm. 2. Differs in having the two basal segments of abdomen strongly convex, the rostrum slightly longer and thinner, with smaller punctures and antennae inserted slightly more distant from apex. Queensland: Blackall Ranges (H. Hacker). Structurally as the preceding species, but clothing of upper surface almost uniform, both in colour and disposition, although on close examination faintly darker markings may be seen. G 392 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN E RTIRHINIDES, CYDMAEA RUFICORNIS, Nn. SD. 6. Black; antennae pale reddish, the club slightly darker than the other parts. Rather densely clothed with whitish scales, feebly variegated on upper surface; elytra, in addition, with a row of whitish setae on each interstice. Rostrum moderately thin and curved, with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures on basal half, elsewhere with naked ones. Antennae inserted two-fifths from apex of rostrum. Prothorax moderately transverse, sides evenly rounded and distinctly wider at base than at apex; with crowded, partially concealed punctures. Elytra cordate, not much wider than prothorax; with rows of large, partially concealed punctures in regular striae. Two basal segments of abdomen flattened in middle. Front coxae touching. Length, 1:75 mm. ©. Differs in having the basal segments of abdomen strongly convex, rostrum longer, thinner, with ridges and seriate punctures shorter, and clothed only near base. Western Australia. A small species, with pale antennae and almost uniform clothing; on close examination the scales appear to be feebly variegated, but this is due quite as much to slightly different densities, as to shades of colour. The elytral setae are not very long, but are fairly distinct from the sides. CYDMAEA SCUTELLARIS, Nl. SD. 3. Bright reddish-castaneous; scutellum black. Moderately clothed with white seales, variegated with dark ones on upper surface. Rostrum not very thin, moderately curved, parallel-sided, the length of pro- thorax, with fine ridges alternated with rows of punctures (squamiferous on basal third) to apical third (where the antennae are inserted), in front with minute punctures. Prothorax distinctly transverse, sides almost evenly rounded but base one-third wider than apex; with crowded, partially concealed punctures. Elytra oblong-cordate, not much wider than prothorax; with rows of rather large, partially concealed punctures, in rather narrow striae. Two basal segments of abdomen depressed in middle. Front coxae almost touching. Length, 2 mm. ®. Differs in having the abdomen evenly convex, and the rostrum slightly longer with shorter ridges and seriate rows of punctures. South Australia: Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt). In general appearance like a small Dicomada, but the notch at the apex of the prosternum is well defined. The scutellum appears as a small black spot. Most of the scales on the upper surface are white, but in places they are sparser than else- where, giving the surface a slightly variegated appearance, but there are really some darker scales, which are condensed to form a rather wide and irregular ante- median fascia on the elytra, and a smaller and still less regular postmedian one, there are also some dark scales on the shoulders. CYDMAEA CORDIPENNIS, Nn. Sp. Black; antennae obscurely reddish. Densely clothed with variegated seales. Rostrum moderately thin and curved, very little longer than prothorax, with fine ridges alternated with rows of punctures (squamiferous near base) to apical third (where the antennae are inserted), in front with rather dense and small but sharply defined ones. Prothorax moderately transverse, sides evenly rounded, base about one-third wider than apex; with crowded, normally concealed punctures. BY A. M. LBA. 393 Elytra cordate, widest at about basal fifth; striate-punctate. Front coxae touching. Length, 2-5-3-0 mm. South Australia: Port Lincoln (A. M. Lea), Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt), Gawler (J. Faust). Allied to C. diversa, but the average size is slightly larger, and the elytra have a conspicuous postmedian fascia. It is also apparently allied to ©. cara, but the rostrum and legs are entirely black. The clothing on the upper surface of the Port Lincoln specimens varies considerably; on the head the scales are white and blackish, but sometimes the pale ones have a golden gloss; on the pronotum there is usually a dark median vitta, and a white spot on each side of the base, else- where the scales being irregularly mingled; on some specimens, in certain lights, some of the scales are brilliantly golden, but on others they are all opaque; on the elytra white, chocolate-brown and sooty scales are irregularly mingled, except that the white fascia is conspicuous; on the under surface the scales are silvery-white, with a greenish gloss, but on the apical segment they are sometimes black. On two males from Lucindale there is a dark median vitta and two dark spots on each side of the pronotum, the rest of its scales, and those on the head and on the elytral suture are of an almost golden-red. On the specimen from Gawler, all the scales on the upper surface are opaque. On specimens in good condition the elytra appear to be finely striated only, but on abrasion the striae are seen to be moderately wide, and to contain rather large and deep punctures, and the inter- stices to be densely and finely punctate. The sexual differences are not very pronounced, the male having the abdomen less convex, and the rostrum slightly shorter than in the female. CYDMAEA AEMULA, N. Sp. 6. Black; antennae obscurely reddish. Densely clothed with white and black scales on upper surface, white on under parts. Rostrum moderately thin and curved, the length of prothorax, with fine ridges alternated with rows of punctures (Squamiferous on basal fourth) to insertion of antennae (slightly in advance of the middle), in front with small but sharply defined punctures. Prothorax moderately transverse, sides evenly rounded, base about one-fourth wider than apex; punctures dense and normally concealed. HElytra cordate, not much wider than prothorax, and widest at basal third; striate- punctate. Basal segments of abdomen flattened in middle. Front coxae touching. Length, 2 mm. New South Wales: National Park (A. M. Lea); Sydney. With the black and white scales of C. diversa, but a narrower species and with a white fascia crowning the apical slope. From the preceding species it differs in being smaller and narrower, and the fascia less pronounced. The dark scales form a feeble median vitta and some spots on the pronotum, on the elytra they are irregularly mingled with the white ones and are more numerous before and behind the rather feeble. white postmedian fascia. In some lights an occasional scale on the under surface appears brilliantly golden or green. CYDMAEA METASTERNALIS, Nl. SD. 6. Black; antennae blackish, but base of scape reddish. Densely clothed with black scales and setae on upper surface, marked with whitish slightly metallic spots, on under surface with white and greenish scales, becoming brilliantly green on metasternum. (oe) We) nse NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN ERIRHINIDES, Rostrum rather thin, moderately curved, scarcely longer than prothorax, with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to insertion of antennae (slightly nearer apex than base) in front with small, sharply defined punctures. Prothorax slightly transverse, sides rather strongly rounded in middle, base slightly wider than apex, punctures normally concealed. EHlytra cordate, not much wider than prothorax; with rather large, partially concealed punctures, in striae. Basal segment of abdomen feebly depressed along middle. Front coxae slightly separated. Length, 2 mm. Queensland: Cairns district (A. M. Lea); unique. A beautiful species, in some respects approaching C. luctuosa, but scales of metasternum of a brilliant emerald-green, and elytra with black sloping setae, very conspicuous from the sides, and from behind seen to be placed in a single row on each interstice. The white scales on the upper surface (appearing coppery or greenish in certain lights) are condensed into a fairly large spot on each side of base of prothorax, some smaller ones on the basal half of elytra, and into remnants of a narrow postmedian fascia, with a few scattered singly. The tarsi are missing from the type. CYDMAEA VIRIDIS, Nn. Sp. o. Black; antennae and apical half of rostrum reddish, tarsi somewhat darker. Densely clothed with green or coppery-green scales. With pale, suberect setae, on the elytra formed into a single row on each interstice. Rostrum rather thin, moderately curved, slightly longer than prothorax; with fine ridges, alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures on basal half, with small punctures in front. Antennae inserted about two-fifths from apex of rostrum. Prothorax almost as long as wide, sides evenly rounded and about one- fourth wider at base than at apex; punctures normally concealed. Elytra cordate, not much wider than prothorax; appearing narrowly striate, with rows of punctures concealed. Basal segments of abdomen feebly depressed along middle; front of prosternum feebly grooved along middle, and rather feebly notched in front, with the front coxae slightly separated. Length, 1:75 mm. ©. Differs in having the rostrum slightly longer and thinner, more of its apex red, less of its base squamose, and basal segments of abdomen evenly convex. Queensland: Gayndah (A. M. Lea). Very distinct by its green scales and suberect setae. C. viridula is a larger species, with inconspicuous setae and normal prosternum. The faint pectoral canal and slight separation of the front coxae are insufficient for the species to be considered to belong to the Cryptorhynchides. CYDMAEA MURINA, N. Sp. Black; apical half of rostrum and antennae reddish, parts of legs somewhat darker. Densely clothed with mouse-coloured scales variegated with white on upper surface, white on under parts. With numerous sub-erect setae, on the elytra placed in a single row on each interstice. Length, 1:5 mm. Queensland: Gayndah (A. M. Lea); unique. Structurally as in the preceding species, including the slightly grooved prosternum and separated front coxae, but the clothing of the upper surface is opaque, and without the least tinge of green. The mouse-coloured scales are variegated with white on the sides of prothorax and base of elytra, with a few BY A. M. LBA. 395 inconspicuous spots elsewhere; on the under surface, from certain points of view, some of the scales have a rosy or greenish gloss. CYDMAHA’ SETIPENNIS, N. Sp. Black; antennae reddish, parts of legs somewhat darker. Densely clothed with chocolate-brown scales, variegated with whitish or coppery-white ones, becoming white with a slight greenish gloss on under parts. With short, sloping setae, on the elytra condensed into a single row on each interstice, and fairly distinct from the sides. Rostrum moderately thin, evenly curved, about the length of the prothorax; with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures on basal half, elsewhere with small punctures... Antennae inserted slightly nearer apex than base of rostrum. Prothorax moderately transverse, sides almost evenly rounded, base not much wider than apex; punctures dense and normally concealed. Elytra cordate, widest at about basal fourth; with rather large punctures in striae, partially concealed by clothing. Basal segments of abdomen gently flattened in middle. Front coxae touching. Length, 1:75 mm. Queensland: Cairns district (A. M. Lea); unique. A small species, with fasciate and setose elytra. On the head (except for an opaque median spot) and base of rostrum the scales, from some directions, appear brilliantly golden; on the pronotum the chocolate ones form a fairly wide median vitta and some lateral spots; on the elytra they are the prevailing ones, the paler scales forming irregular spots on and about the shoulders, and an irregular post-, median fascia. The type is probably a male. CYDMAEA INTEROCULARIS, N. Sp. d. Black; antennae and tarsi somewhat darker. Densely clothed with dark slaty-grey scales mixed with whitish ones on upper surface, white with a slight greenish gloss on under parts. With numerous semierect and usually dark setae, on the elytra confined to a single row on each interstice. Rostrum moderately thin and curved, the length of prothorax, with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where the antennae are inserted), in front with small punctures. Prothorax distinctly trans- verse, sides gently rounded, base about one-fourth wider than apex; punctures dense and normally concealed. EHlytra briefly oblong-cordate, striate-punctate. Basal segments of abdomen slightly flattened in middle. Front coxae touching. Length, 1-6 mm. Queensland: Blackall Ranges (A. M. Lea); unique. Another small setose species, but distinguished from the preceding one by being more robust, with the dark median part of the pronotum extending almost to the sides, instead of separated therefrom by a narrow vitta near each side. On the head the pale scales are very numerous, and they form a conspicuous spot between the eyes, on the pronotum they are confined to the sides, but each side has also a dark spot; on the elytra they are irregularly distributed in small spots, sometimes conjoined to form feeble fasciae, of which there is a very irregular bisinuate one crowning the apical slope. The scales on the metasternal episterna in some lights appear brightly green, and there may appear quite a brilliant green spot on the front of each front coxa. The elytral setae are very distinct from the sides; they divide the scales on each interstice into two rows, and these are so 396 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN ERIRIHINIDES. placed that the punctures in the striae are normally concealed, and the striae themselves appear to be doubled. CYDMAEA GEMMEA, Nl. Sp. ¢d. Black; antennae reddish. Densely clothed with black scales interspersed with white ones with a greenish or golden gloss; under parts with white scales with a distinct greenish gloss in certain lights. With numerous suberect black setae, on the elytra confined to a single row on each interstice. Rostrum rather thin, evenly curved, the length of prothorax; with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures on basal half, elsewhere with naked punctures. Antennae inserted two-fifths from apex of rostrum. Prothorax distinctly transverse, sides almost evenly rounded, base scarcely one-fourth wider than apex; with dense, partially concealed punctures. EHElytra cordate, base not much and not suddenly wider than prothorax; striate-punctate, punctures large but partially concealed. Two basal segments of abdomen feebly depressed along middle. Front coxae touching. Length, 1-5 mm. Queensland: Cairns district, attracted to lights (A. M. Lea), Bellenden-Ker (Dr. E. Mjoberg). A small setose species, with brilliant scales scattered singly; on the type a few are compacted together on the suture; on the second specimen there is a small patch on each side of the base of the prothorax. The scales on the metasternal episterna are denser than elsewhere, in some lights they appear of an opaque white, but in others of a bright green. The elytral setae are very distinct from the sides. The scape is the palest part of the antennae. A female, of which the prothorax was lost, has the rostrum longer and thinner, clothed only close to base, and with the abdomen strongly convex. NOTES ON FOUR LITTLE-KNOWN SPECIES OF KANGAROOS. By A. S. Le Sovuer, C.M.Z.S. (Four Text-figures. ) [Read 25th July, 1928.] MAcROPUS MELANOPS Gould. Proc. Zool. Soc., 1842, p. 10. Although the external differences between M. melanops and M. giganteus have been emphasized (Aust. Zool., iii (4), 1923, 145), the special skull and teeth characters of the former species have not received attention. Examination of a series of crania in the Australian Museum shows that M. melanops has skull and dental features that differentiate it from other kangaroos and justify it receiving specific rank. Skull—The anterior palate is narrow, its least breadth going 4-43 times into . the length of the diastema, as against 3-34 times in giganteus, while the posterior palate is usually more perforated than in the latter species. The basi-zygomatic is broad, twisted at right angles, and generally recurved, with the anterior angle acute (Text-fig. A). The same bone in giganteus is stouter, narrower, with the anterior face blunted and, except in aged animals, not recurved (Text-fig. C). Teeth.—M. melanops has I° comparatively small, its breadth being only two- thirds that of I? and I’ combined, while the anterior notch is not always clearly indicated (Text-fig. B). Pt is very small, its length being only one-half to two- thirds that of P*®. These teeth are thus very different in size from those of M. giganteus (Text-fig. D). MACROPUS HAGENBECKI Rothschild. Nov. Zool., xii, 1905, 509; xiv, 1907, 333; xvii, 1910, 108. The first description of this species, without skull or teeth characters, led one to believe that it was allied to M. rufus. Examination of the type in the Tring Museum, however, shows that it is closer to the robustus group, with which it agrees in build of the body, shape of the rhinarium, arrangement of hair on the face, and complete posterior palate. It agrees with M. rufus in character of the coat, which is dense and woolly, facial markings, contour of the face, a broad occipital process, and the absence of small connecting bridges to the anterior bar of the molars. The sexes are alike in colouration. In appearance it is like a red wallaroo with a woolly coat, and having the characteristic facial markings of the Red Kangaroo. It is apparently intermediate between the two, and, I judge, quite a good species. The locality from which the specimens came is unknown. Its woolly coat, however, indicated a cold climate, and one would expect to find it on the higher ranges of Arnhem Land. co Yo) (oa) FOUR LITTLE-KNOWN SPECIES OF KANGAROOS, MACROPUS BERNARDUS Thomas. This species apparently occupies a restricted territory on the South Alligator River. It is a small animal, allied to the robustus group, with which it agrees in build, character of the hair, colouration of the sexes (Aust. Zool., ii (4), 1922, 142), complete posterior palate, and some teeth characters. It differs, however, in certain Text-figs. A-D. A. SBasi-zygomatic of Macropus melanops. B. Incisors of M. melanops. C. Basi-zygomatic of M. giganteus. D. Ineisors of M. giganteus. skull formations mentioned by Thomas (Nov. Zool., 1904,° 225), and also has dental features which do not appear to have been mentioned hitherto. These, together with additional skull characters, are here recorded. Skull—Compared with robustus the adult cranium is much smaller, more lightly built and flatter in profile. The nostrils are a little bowed at the sides, BY A. S. LE SOUEF. 399 nasals expanded posteriorly, and produced anteriorly in a comparatively long blunt point; postorbital process distinctly indicated; infra-zygomatic process very short and blunt; incisive foramina long, reaching the incisive suture. The least width of the posterior palate goes into the length of the diastema about twice. Teeth.—Molars with a narrow anterior ledge and a small connecting bridge. The third and second incisors appear to be diagnostic of this species, the notch in both being strongly marked; the exposed portion of I®° is completely cleft, the tooth appearing as if double, with the anterior fold partly overlying the posterior section. MACROPUS GIGANTEUS TASMANIENSIS Le Souef. Aust. Zool., iii (4), 1923, 146. Very few authenticated specimens of the Tasmanian Forester Kangaroo seem to have been preserved in museums, and the animal has not received much attention. Gould obtained one large male, with a damaged skull, which is now in the British Museum (Natural History). Mr. Reid, curator of the Zoological Gardens, Hobart, kindly forwarded the skulls and skins of two females which have been placed in the Australian Museum, Sydney. Examination of these three Table of Skull Measurements (in millimetres). | M. melanops. | M. | M. Wl, Ge | | hagenbecki. | bernardus. \tasmaniensis. or 8 | 9 Basal length ek Oy gee yet 160 163 i733 | UB 125 147 Greatest breadth Sas bn $2 81 89 | 87 90 Nasals— | Length Cone Acari 67 76 73 67 48 64 Greatest breadt Pera 26 25 26 | 25:5 21 19°5 Central breadth mee Tit: 18 18 18 | iL 7 15 14 Palate— | Length Bee eo eR 112 114 — 96 83 99 Breadth outside M2 ec 49-5 51 51 42-5 39 47 Breadth inside M2 .. .. 3 30 oS) | 27-5 21 28 Palatal foramen .. .. .. | — — | 14) 14 | 9 m9 Diastema Ree eee Macs.ce AN 56 56 58 41 | 25 49 Basi cranial axis.. .. .. 45 45 50 | 38 35 41 Basi racial 293 25 so oo |} Walsh || ils | ia | 106 90 118 IMAGINING py See eae ale 262 262 246 | 278 257 287 specimens, together with several live ones in the City Park, Launceston, and the Hobart Zoological Garden, has enabled more definite information to be gathered concerning the subspecies. It is closely allied to M. giganteus giganteus of the mainland, apparently differing only in having the teeth comparatively larger, and the basi-zygomatic broader and recurved. External appearance is the same in the typical species and the Tasmanian subspecies. A previous description, indicating variations in colour, received from the Tasmanian Museum, was apparently based on M. ruficollis bennettii (Aust. Zool., iii (4), 1923, 145). Hair fine and dense (Autumn pelage). General colour above dark grey with a brownish wash, blackish on the dorsal area and lighter on the flanks; hairs on H 400 FOUR LITTLE-KNOWN SPECIES OF KANGAROOS. the under surface are white tipped, especially on the inguinal region and chest; head coloured like the back, back of the ears coarsely haired; thighs brownish- grey; paws and toes black; tail darkening to blackish towards the tip. The skull agrees with the typical mainland type, with exception that the basi-zygomatic is broad and recurved. The lower jaw is stouter, and all teeth comparatively larger, being 0-5 to 1 mm. greater in measurement than those of a giganteus of similar size. Very few Tasmanian Forester Kangaroos appear to be left. Although totally protected, they are nevertheless caught in snares set for Bennett’s Wallaby, and are apparently being rapidly destroyed. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN LYCAENIDAE. Panr vi. By G. A. WatrerRHOUSE, D.Sc., B.E., F.E.S. (Plate xxv.) [Read 29th August, 1928.] Part v of these notes was published in These ProcrEpines for 1912, pp: 698-702, and in 1914 “The Butterflies of Australia’, by Waterhouse and Lyell, in which the Australian Lycaenidae were thoroughly revised, was issued. Since 1914, only one new species has been described but several new subspecies have been found, and many important extensions of the ranges of known species require record. The localities given in this paper are additions to or amendments of those in “The Butterflies of Australia”. CANDALIDES Hubner. Verzeichniss bekannter Schmettlinge, 1816, 73. : The type of this genus is zanthospilos Hiibner, and good figures of the upper and under sides of both sexes were given in the first volume of his “Sammlung Exotischer Schmetterlinge’, pl. 99, but no locality was given. The dates of publication of Htibner’s work have been fixed as 1806-1819 for the first volume, so, considering the early date, it is best to consider Sydney, where the species is very common, as the type locality. Polyommatus hibneri Godart (Hncyclopédie Méthodique, 1824, 677), of which the male is described from Timor, is the same species, but the locality given is © incorrect. Hrina pulchella Swainson (Zoological Illustrations, ii, 1834, pl. 134) is the same species. Swainson gives here an enlarged coloured illustration of the upper side and under side of a male; the locality given is Australia. Miskin (Ann. Qland Mus., i, 1891, 64) gives Lycaena byzos Boisduval as another synonym, but I will show later in this paper that this is not correct. At the end of 1914, Mr. H. W. Simmonds found larvae of xzanthospilos at Stanwell Park feeding on Pimelea ligustrina. I have had numerous larvae at different times feeding on this plant and also on Pimelea linifolia and they have a distinct resemblance to the larvae of C. heathi, C. hyacinthina and C. absimilis; the pupae also resemble the pupae of those three species in that they are much flattened, with the abdomen produced to lateral ridges and so strikingly different from the usual pupae of the Lycaeninae. In December the pupal duration is 11-14 days. Now that the larva and pupa of C. xanthospilos are known, and are so different from those of Philiris ilias innotatus Miskin, I have no hesitation in claiming that Philiris is a genus distinct from Candalides as I pointed out in These PROCEEDINGS, 1912, p. 699. CANDALIDES HEATHI Cox. Lycaena heathi Cox, Entomologist, 1873, 402.—Lycaena paradoxa Guest, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 1882, 36. 402 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN LYCAENIDAE, Vi, The types of heathi came from Mt. Barker, near Adelaide, and of paradoxa from Balhannah, 15 miles ESE of Adelaide and the two descriptions undoubtedly refer to the same insect. The species has a wide range, being found in all the Australian States except Tasmania. One subspecies has been described from the Monte Bello Islands and I now add another from Mt. Kosciusko. ) CANDALIDES HEATHI HEATHI Cox. Waterhouse and Lyell, Butterflies of Australia, 1914, p. 78, figs. 382, 383. Male. Upper side: Forewing bronze brown; termen very narrowly brown- black; cilia brown-black, with tips whitish. Hindwing bronze-brown; costa and termen narrowly brown-black, with tips whitish. Under side: Forewing silky grey-white; termen with a series of small, some- times minute, dots, black. Hindwing silky grey-white; termen with a series of | dots, black. Female. Upper side: Forewing dull brown; an obscure central area reaching base and dorsum, dull bluish-purple; termen very narrowly brown-black; cilia brown-black, at tips whitish. Hindwing dull brown, tinged bluish-purple; costa and termen obscurely brown-black; cilia brown-black, at tips whitish. Under side as in male. I have only four males and one female from near Adelaide and these show the under side tinged with blue as mentioned by Cox. Specimens from Sydney only have blue towards the base of the wings, if at all. Probably if long series were obtained from Adelaide and in good condition it would be possible to separate Sydney specimens from them. My specimens from S. W. Australia are all smaller and, though not in the best condition, seem to indicate another race, but I await more material. These have a much darker under side than typical specimens. At present I would limit the typical form to S. Queensland and south along the east coast, the southern coast and the western coast to Geraldton and, as additional localities to those in “The Butterflies of Australia’, I have heathi from Clermont, Q. (Sept.), Belmont, Q. (Oct.), Eidsvold, Q. (Jan.), near Adelaide (Novy., Dec., Jan.), Busselton, W.A. (Jan.), Perth, Kojarina, W.A. (Sept.), Moonyoonootha, W.A. (Sept.). I have only found the larvae of this race feeding upon two different species of introduced Plantago, but Mathew records its food plant as Westringia rosmariniformis, around which I have often seen the insect flying. The pupal duration during December and January is 16 to 19 days. CANDALIDES HEATHI AERATA Montague. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1914, 644. This form is confined to the Monte Bello Islands and is much smaller than the typical race; it is generally darker above and on the under side of both wings; the terminal spots are more distinct than in the typical race. I have two males and one female from the type locality, caught in June. f CANDALIDES HEATHI ALPINA, N. Subsp. Male. Upper side slightly paler than the typical race, with the terminations of the veins very much paler brown, giving the wings a rayed appearance. Under side grey-brown with two terminal black dots in the forewing and six in the hindwing. Female. Upper side slightly paler than the typical race with the bluish-purple restricted to a small basal portion. BY G. A. WATERHOUSE. 403 Under side grey-brown with six terminal black dots in both wings, those of the hindwing being distinctly larger. The very distinctive under side at once separates this race, as it is so different from the silky white of the typical race. I have one male, which has a distinct pale brown border within the terminal brown-black lines to the wings above. The terminal spots on the under side of the forewing vary very much in size, and in number from two to six, though I have only one male with six and in one female they are so small as to be indistinguishable without a jens. Holotype male, Mt. Kosciusko, 5,000 feet, 10th Dec., 1921, and during the previous five days the allotype female and six perfect paratype males and two perfect paratype femaies were caught, together with several worn specimens. I found the species always flying where a species of Plantago was growing. I also have three specimens caught in November and one in January at Mt. Kosciusko. CANDALIDES CyproTUS Olliff. Chrysophanus cyprotus Olliff, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wates, 1885, 716.— Holochila purpurea Grose Smith and Kirby, Rhop. Hx«ot., pt. 39, 1897, p. 7, Pl. x, figs. 11 and 12. Olliff described both male and female from Katoomba, N.S.W., caught in September and the two specimens named as such in the Australian Museum are undoubtedly his types. In the “Rhopalocera Exotica” the male only is described and figured from Sydney and Moreton Bay. I have frequently caught specimens of the species in Sydney and they agree with those I have taken at Katoomba and also with my Brisbane specimens. In Sydney the species is only taken in the spring, but in Brisbane it is found again in the autumn. The pupal duration of this species is remarkable. In March, 1924, Mr. L. Franzen found a batch of pupae on One Tree Hill, Brisbane. He sent me two of these which produced males on 30th August, 1924, and 4th November, 1924. His own pupae produced males and females during September and October, 1924. On 8th December, 1924, he opened a pupa and found it still alive and another he opened on 8th February, 1925, was still alive and some emerged during the following months. In July, 1925, he gave me his two remaining pupae, one of which produced a male on 29th September, 1925, so it had remained as a pupa for at least 18 months. CANDALIDES ERINUS Fabricius. I have taken this species in worn condition in April at Port Macquarie, which extends its southern limit considerably. ADALUMA URUMELIA Tindale. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1922, 537, Pl. xxxi. : This species is known from two males from the Roper River (March), in the South Australian Museum and a male in the National Museum, Melbourne, from King River, N. Aust. (4th Jan., 1915). PSEUDODIPSAS DIGGLESI Hewitson. The type undoubtedly came from Brisbane, as Diggles lived there and Hewitson received the species from him. My Brisbane dates are June to September and I also have it from Yeppoon in July and near Cairns in February. 404 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN LYCAENIDAE, Vi, MILETUS DELICIA DELICIA Hewitson. Hewitson described this species from a specimen in the Grose Smith Collection from Australia. He does not mention the sex, but his description seems to indicate a female, especially as he gives the size as 2'/., inch, which is very large, much larger than my largest female which is from New South Wales. The races delos from Victoria and duaringae from near Rockhampton are both smaller than the race delicia. Druce (Trans. Ent. Soc. London, 1891, 186, Pl. x, figs. 6, 7) says that only three specimens were known to him, the type, a male in the Hewitson Collection from New South Wales and a female in the British Museum from Moreton Bay. Druce figures a male which agrees with the Brisbane race and I suggest that Brisbane be considered the type locality. In July, 1919, I found several larvae on Stradbroke Island feeding on Acacia Cunninghami which produced butterflies from the end of September to the middle of December, with a pupal duration of about one month. Mr. E. J. Dumigan also sent me a male from Killarney, Q., taken in January. MILETUS DELICIA DUARINGAE Waterhouse. Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Watss, 1903, 167; Butterflies of Australia, 1914, 85, fig. 231. When I described this in 1903 as a variety from Duaringa, Q., only a single male was known. In September and October, 1923, Mr. A. N. Burus secured a series at Westwood, which is no great distance from Duaringa. These specimens show that duaringae must be considered the northern race of delicia and not an aberration. The males have the metallic areas on the upper side much bluer and much more extended than in those from Brisbane, and on the under side the ground colour is much paler than in Brisbane specimens and the coloured markings of the forewing are yellower than those of the hindwing. The under side of the forewing has often three black spots whereas the type has only two. In the females the metallic areas are not much more extended than in delicia but they are a much paler metallic blue, the irregular tornal orange-red spot extends as a terminal band towards the apex, in one specimen almost reaching it, and in that same specimen a similar but narrower and paler band is found on the forewing. The under side is as in the male, but ground colour somewhat darker. The holotype male from Duaringa is in Mr. G. Lyell’s Collection and I have males and females from Westwood in January, September and October, and Mr. Burns has other specimens from the same locality. MILETUS HALYAETUS Hewitson. Hewitson’s locality for this species is Swan River, W.A. Until recently I only knew this species from Geraldton, but Mr. J. Clark gave me a pair he had caught at Perth. I visited the spot with him in August, but we saw none, nor was the species on the wing at Geraldton during the same month, and I think that October would be the best month for the species. I cannot see any striking differences between my Perth pair and my Geraldton series, but should a longer series from Perth show sub-specific differences, Polyommatus uranites Meyrick, described from Geraldton specimens, will be available for the northern race. I also have specimens from the Peron Peninsula in September and October. MILETUS EPICURUS Miskin. ; The types of this species are in the Queensland Museum, from Brisbane, and Mr. L. Franzen has recently taken it at Burleigh Heads. I caught a male at Coff’s Harbour in September, which is a new record for New South Wales. BY G. A. WATERHOUSE. 405 MILETUS ApoLLo Miskin. Ann. Q’land Museum, i, Supplement, 1891. Miskin described this handsome species from a male (he thought it might be a female) found between the leaves of a book, where it had been preserved with other butterflies. The locality was on the Herbert River and probably near Ingham and the holotype is now in the Queensland Museum, where I have examined it. Owing to the treatment it had received, it is in very poor condition, but is easily recognizable. This specimen remained the only one known until 1907, when I received several from Cape York from the late H. Elgner. Later on Mr. F. P. Dodd took the species in. the Cairns district, where it has also been taken by Messrs. A. N. Burns and C. H. Borch. On receipt of specimens from Mr. Dodd and Mr. Burns I found that my Cape York specimens differed very considerably from them. Mr. Burns kindly compared his Cairns specimens with the holotype in the Queensland Museum and found that they agreed with it much better than the specimens from Cape York. : MILETUS APOLLO PHOEBUS, n. Subsp. Plate xxv, figs. 6, 7. Miletus apollo Waterhouse and Lyell, Vict. Nat., xxvi, 1909, 111; Butterflies of Australia, 1914, 86, figs. 880, 881.—Hypochrysops apollo, Griinberg in Seitz Macrolepidoptera, p. 844, Pl. 1450. As this race has already been very lengthily described and figured it is not necessary to repeat the descriptions. The males are all much deeper in colour on the upper side than in the typical race and the black costal band of forewing does not extend so far basad and shows a slight downward extension at the end of cell. The underside is well illustrated in the coloured figures that are given and is very much darker and richer than in the typical race, especially the apex of the forewing and the lower half of the hindwing. The same remarks apply to the upper side in the females as in the males, with the addition that the broad black costal band of the hindwing never reaches the apex, but is usually separated from it by a broad band of colour, though in one of my specimens this is very narrow. My most heavily marked female has fewer dark markings than any of the females I have seen of the typical race. The underside is as in the male. Loc.—Cape York (Jan., Mar., May, June, August to December), Prince of Wales Is. (June). I have figured the holotype male and allotype female from Cape York in my collection and I have also six paratype males and four para- type females from Cape York. The late H. Hlgner sent me a male that had emerged from a pupa he found at Cape York. He wrote that the pupa was found lying loose in a hole in a bulbous epiphyte, which had a substance something like a potato, and from the bulb grew a stalk with leaves. The hole in which the pupa was found had been eaten, as were also the leaves, but he was uncertain if the larva fed on bulb or leaves or both. He sent me the empty pupal case, which is ovoid in section and rather elongate and it shows only very faint brown spots. MILETUS APOLLO APOLLO Miskin. Plate xxv, figs. 8, 9, 10. Male. Upper side: Forewing orange; apex and termen very broadly black; cilia orange. Hindwing orange; termen with a narrow black line and with long black scales at the terminations of the veins, especially towards the tornus; cilia orange. Under side as in the race phoebus, but the elongated spots below the apex of the forewing and the markings of the lower half of the hindwing almost 406 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN LYCAENIDAE, Vi, white and an additional large white patch at the end of the cer of the forewing cilia pale orange, at terminations of veins black. Female. Upper side: Forewing orange, paler than in male, apex and termen very broadly black; cilia pale orange. Hindwing orange, with a very broad black costal band always reaching the termen at apex; termen with a narrow black line, widest at terminations of the veins; a variable subterminal black band varying from the irregular band of Plate xxy, fig. 9 to the broad band of fig. 10; cilia pale orange. Under side as in the male, but markings whiter and the white patch at end of cell of forewing smaller; in the forewing the reddish-brown band extends irregularly to the tornus; cilia pale orange, at terminations of veins black. I have in my collection three males and three females from Mr. Dodd and Mr. Burns, and I have before me, besides these six specimens, six males and four females belonging to Mr. A. N. Burns. Whilst the males of phoebus are very constant on the upper side, these males vary somewhat in colour, being an orange-vermilion to an orange-red, but never the very rich colour of the Cape York race. In some specimens there is a dark patch of scales on the termen near the apex of the hindwing and indications of a black subterminal band of black spots, more noticeable near the tornus. In the females the greatest variation is shown on the upper side of the hindwing; this difference is shown in the figures which are from specimens given me ky Mr. Dodd. The specimens belonging to Mr. Burns show a gradation between these figures. Besides the different shade of colour of the upper sides and the very distinct under sides, this race may be distinguished from phoebus by having a black terminal line in both sexes, and in the female the black costal border reaching the termen on the hindwing above. The localities for this race are Herbert River (Miskin), Cairns District (F. P. Dodd), Meringa, near Cairns (January, February and October; A. N. Burns). Mr. A. N. Burns, who has bred this fine species, supplies me with the following notes: Larvae when fully grown about an inch long, of the usual Lycaenid shape. In colour they are translucent grey with obscure pale brownish spots which almost coalesce in the lateral areas. Dorsal line interrupted, brownish- green. Whole dorsal surface roughened, lateral margins crenulate. Ventral surface pale greenish. Both extremities depressed. Larvae live in a cellular bulbous epiphyte, on which they feed, as well as on the leaves growing from the bulbs. These bulbs, even if they do not contain larvae or pupae, are the home of a species of small brown ant (Pheidole) which, however, does not attend the larvae in the same way as ants attend the larvae of Ogyris. Pupa about five-eighths of an inch long, found attached within the eaten-out portions of the bulbs. In colour they are pale yellowish-brown, with the whole surface covered with minute dark brown spots. Mr. Burns informs me that the epiphyte belongs to the Rubiaceae and Mr. EK. Cheel identifies it as Myrmecodia tuberosa. It grows on Tristania, Melaleuca and other forest trees. The pupal shells given me by Mr. Burns show the brown markings much more plainly than the one I have of the race phoebus from Cape York. Mr. C. H. Borch (Vict. Nat., xliii, 1926, 214) has given a short account of the life history of this butterfly. He says that the bulbs of the epiphyte were honey- combed with tunnels made by small black ants and when opened had the appear- ance of a sponge. Some of the older bulbs examined were little more than shells, having been eaten out by generations of larvae. A larva pupated on 25th January BY G. A. WATERHOUSE. 407 and a male emerged on 12th February. He remarks: “It is remarkable that in travelling through the tunnels of the bulb, these butterflies do not injure their delicate wings. Apparently immediately on emergence from the pupa, they crawl towards the light, development of the wings being checked until the insects are out in the open”. : When I was returning from Perth in September, 1926, I had a number of pupae of Xenica and Ogyris in a small cardboard box. I found that the Xenica always emerged satisfactorily, but the Ogyris never properly expanded and were evidently trying to reach the light. After this experience for two. days, I examined the box every quarter of an hour in the train and as soon as an Ogyris had emerged, it was at once transferred to a large glass-bottomed pill box and so all subsequent emergences produced perfect insects. I had a similar experience with a female Pseudodipsas brisbanensis. The butterfly was placed in a large pill box in hopes that it would lay eggs. The box, which unfortunately had a hole in the lid, was placed glass side down on a window sill; when examined some hours afterwards, the wings of the butterfly were all broken in its endeavours to escape through the hole, which was only just large enough to allow the body of the insect to get through. MILETUS APOLLO WENDISI Bethune-Baker. Hypochrysops wendisi B.-Baker, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8) iv, 1909, 184, Pl. 7, iis, This is certainly another race of M. apollo, the holotype being a female in the collection of Sir George Kenrick from Wendisi, Geelvink Bay, New Guinea. No doubt other races will be found in the coastal parts of New Guinea, but the species is certainly a rare one and its habits are such that it is not easy to secure. MILETUS Byzos Boisduvyal. Lycaena? byzos Bois., Voy. Astrolabe, Lep., p. 81, 1832. This name has passed unnoticed and almost forgotten since it was first proposed, except that Miskin considered the species the same as zanthospilos Hiibner. This is unlikely as, under the name of hiubneri, zanthospilos was described by Boisduval immediately preceding his description of byzos in the same work. Boisduval describes byzos as follows:— “Alis fuscis; anticis macula discoidea crocea; posticis fuscis fascia postica crocea; omnibus subtus subluteo-griseis obscuriori punctis”. “Ailes d’un brun noiratre; les supérieures, avec une tache discoidale d’un jaune safran; les inférieures, avec une bande postérieure de la méme couleur; dessous des quatre d’un gris lavé de jaunatre, ponctué d’une couleur plus foncée. “Tl est un peu petit que Hubneri. “Hinvirons de port Jackson”. I have been informed by the authorities at the Paris Museum that the type of byzos could not be found there, but at the same time I was sent a photograph of the specimens Boisduval called hiibneri and these were undoubtedly xanthospilos. The first point I would make then, is that byzos cannot be xanthospilos, for Boisduval would not have described the same insect under two consecutive names, besides which, the description does not fit canthospilos. A free translation of Boisduval’s Latin and French description is as follows:— Wings blackish-brown; forewings with a discal saffron-yellow spot; hindwings with an outer band of the same colour; all the wings, on the under side, grey 408 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN LYCAENIDAE, Vi, tinged with yellowish, with deeper coloured spots. A little smaller than hibneri (= zanthospilos). From Port Jackson. The only species to which this description could apply is the female of Miletus hecalius Miskin, described from Victoria. In a letter, the late Hamilton H. Druce, some years ago, expressed the opinion that I was probably correct in making this suggestion. Whilst hecalius was only known from Victoria, it would have been rash to insist that it was the same as byzos, but the species has been taken freely near Sydney, and within a mile of Neutral Bay, where the “Astrolabe” anchored from 2nd to 19th December, 1826, both larvae and butterflies have been taken, and only a few years ago the food-plant was growing close to the water’s edge. Though, as a general rule, Sydney specimens of hecalius are not smaller than xzanthospilos, I have caught some considerably smaller and these are without a central orange spot on the upper side of the hindwing, as is usually the case. Further, though bred specimens are rich yellow on the under side, captured specimens are much paler, and could easily be termed “grey tinged with yellowish”’. Though many specimens are heavily spotted on the under side, in others these red spots are small and obscured and in captured specimens do not strike the eye as they do in bred specimens. As there are certain recognizable differences between the Sydney specimens and those from Victoria, two races are distinguishable. MILETUS BYZOS BYzZOS Boisduval. Miletus hecalius Waterhouse and Lyell, Butterflies of Australia, 1914, 87, fig. 217. Male. Upper side: Forewing rich purple; costa narrowly, apex and termen, broadly black; cilia dull black with tips greyish. Hindwing rich purple; costa with termen broadly black; a tornal streak usually reaching along the two branches of the cubitus, dull red, cilia grey. Under side: Forewing yellow; dorsum grey; a bar across middle of cell, a bar at end of cell, and a discal band, red edged black and metallic green; termen orange-red with a central series of dots black, dusted metallic green. Hindwing dark grey-brown; bands typical, red narrowly-edged metallic green; termen broadly red, with an interrupted central line, metallic green. Female: Upper side: Forewing brown-black; a central patch, reaching base by a narrow streak, orange; cilia brown with tips grey. Hindwing brown black; a variable spot at end of cell (sometimes absent), orange; a narrower terminal band, orange-red, this colour extending basad along the branches of the cubitus and median; cilia grey. Under side: Forewing rich yellow; dorsum grey, markings as in male, but paler. Hindwing rich yellow; bands and spots as in male but usually brighter, rarely as large as in the male, often much smaller, especially on the hindwing on which some may be absent and others only faintly indicated. Localities—Sydney (Mosman and Como; Sept. to April), Mittagong (November), Tathra (November). Males of this race are very constant and amongst a hundred specimens I have seen there are no marked differences. On the other hand the females are very variable, especially on the underside. I have good specimens that only show very faint markings on the underside of the hindwing. The larvae of this race feed upon Pomaderris lanigera. The pupal duration varies from 13 to 38 days according to the time of the year the butterflies emerge. BY G. A. WATERHOUSE. 409 Those that emerge from December to March take 13-15 days, October and November 23 to 29 days, and September up to 38 days. MILETUS BYZOS HECALIUS Miskin. Hypochrysops hecalius Miskin, Trans. Ent. Soc. London, 1884, 94, female; Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. WALES, 1888, 1516, male; Anderson and Spry, Vict. Butt., 1894, 96, figured.—Miletus hecalius Waterhouse and Lyell, Butterflies of Australia, 1914, 87, figs. 218, 226, 227 (not fig. 217). The upper side in the males differs from the typical race in that the purple is slightly more extensive and lustrous; the tornal streak on the hindwing is brighter and larger and, besides extending somewhat along the veins, in two specimens reaches the apex as a narrow red. terminal line. On the under side this sex is paler than in the typical race and the bands and spots decidedly smaller. On the upper side in the female the central spots are yellow rather than orange and the spot of hindwing is larger than in any of my specimens of the typical race. The terminal band of the hindwing is orange to orange-red and wider than in Sydney specimens. On the under side the colour is as described by Miskin, chrome- yellow, and the whole under side has a much duller appearance than the typical race. Described from Victoria, the holotype female is now in the Queensland Museum and the allotype male in the South Australian Museum. It is known from Wandin, Narracan, and Gisborne (January) and Toora (December); four males and five females are in my collection. THYSONOTIS HYMETUS TAYGETUS Felder. Described by Felder from Australia and Fiji, the latter locality being erroneous. I consider typical taygetus to be the most southern Australian race and I have extended its range south considerably for I have taken it at Port Macquarie in April, at Toronto, Lake Macquarie in April, and one female at Narrabeen, near Sydney, in December. A pupa found at Southport, Q., in July emerged in 15 days, whilst larvae from Port Macquarie that pupated in Sydney at the end of April emerged in 20-28 days. NACADUBA PALMYRA TASMANICA Miskin. The holotype male is in the Queensland Museum and, as pointed out by Miskin (Ann. Q’land Museum, 1, 1891, 59), the locality “Tasmania” is incorrect, so it is advisable to accept Cairns, given by Miskin in 1891, as the type locality. I have taken a single male at Toronto, Lake Macquarie, in April, the southern- most record known. NACADUBA ANCYRA FLORINDA Butler. The type of this species in the British Museum is from the Loyalty Islands; if this locality is correct it is unlikely that our southern subspecies of ancyra is the same. At present I do not wish to make any alteration, but would record the race we call florinda at Stanwell Park in January (G. M. Goldfinch). The food plant, Trema aspera is growing there. I found larvae on this plant at Port Macquarie in April and they pupated by the end of the month and emerged in 41-48 days. ZIZEERIA ALSULUS Herrich-Schaeffer. In April I caught a specimen of this species on the road between Gloucester and Kranback; this is a new record for New South Wales. 410 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN LYCAENIDAE, Vi, ZIZULA GAIKA ATTENUATA Lucas. Mr. G. H. Wyld has taken two or three specimens of this species in March at Beecroft, near Sydney, a record that extends its range south from the Manning River. NEOLUCIA AGRICOLA AGRICOLA Westwood. Several specimens have been taken at Mt. Kosciusko in December and January at 4,000-5,000 feet. As N. hobartensis was found there at the same time and place, there is no possibility of their being races of the same species. NEOLUCIA HOBARTENSIS HOBARTENSIS Miskin. The type is in the Queensland Museum, from Hobart. On a recent visit to Hobart, I found that this species did not occur below 3,000 feet, so the type locality is better defined as Mt. Wellington, near Hobart. At Mt. Kosciusko it occurs up to 7,000 feet. I also have it from Cradle Mountain and Underwood (2,800 feet), Tasmania, both in January. NEOLUCIA HOBARTENSIS MONTICOLA Waterhouse and Lyell. This race was abundant at Barrington Tops in January and February; by beating I secured several larvae feeding on the flower buds of an Hpacris; their pupal duration was 11-12 days. NEOLUCIA MATHEWI Miskin. The type is in the Queensland Museum, from Sydney, where the species is strictly a coastal one and found in abundance near the food plant Monotoca elliptica in September and October. I have never seen the species north of Port Stephens, where it was very plentiful in October; it was also common at Narooma in the same month. Mr. Ian Harman has recently taken it at Underwood in Tasmania in January, which is quite a new record. My greatest surprise was taking it at Blackheath in November, 1922, where six specimens were seen and captured flying round a plant very similar to the coastal food plant. The pupal duration of Sydney specimens is 16-21 days. PSEUDALMENUS CHLORINDA Blanchard. The first mention of this butterfly is in the “List of the specimens of Lepidop- terous Insects in the British Museum” (1847, part ii, p. 28), by E. Doubleday. Here Doubleday records, under the name Jalmenus myrsilus, eight specimens from Van Diemen’s Land, one presented by Rey. A. Beaufort and four from the collection of Mr. Children, who had been a former Curator of Zoology at the British Museum. No description was given. As Thecla chlorinda, it was figured from Tasmania by Blanchard on the plates of the “Voyage Pole Sud”. We are told on page 2 of Volume 4 of the text of this voyage which was published in 1853, that the plates were published several years before the text, so the latest possible date for the plate must be 1851. The next mention is as Thecla myrsilus in the “Genera of Diurnal Lepidoptera”, where it is figured from Van Diemen’s Land, but again no description is given. The next species listed in the ‘Genera’ is Thecla chlorinda, so the figures in the “Voy. Péle Sud’’ must have been before that of the “Genera”. Up to this time no description under either name had been given. The first description is that on page 401 of the “Voyage Péle Sud’, Vol. iv, 1853, where the sexes are described and Thecla myrsilus of the “Genera” sunk as a synonym. This history is sufficient to show that myrsilus must be sunk as a BY G. A. WATERHOUSE. 411 direct synonym of chlorinda as I have already pointed out. (These PRocrEDINGS, 1912, 701). In Seitz Macrolepidoptera, however, the name myrsilus is used. Three races have been described and I now add a fourth. PSEUDALMENUS CHLORINDA CHLORINDA Blanchard. Plate xxv, figs. 1-4. - Thecla chlorinda Blanchard, Voy. Pole Sud, P1.’3, figs. 15-18 (ante 1853), descrip- tion vol. iv, 1853, 401—Thecla myrsilus Doubleday, Gen. Diurn. Lep., 1852, Pl. 75, fig. 3; Waterhouse and Lyell, Butterflies of Australia, 1914, 113, figs. 863, 864. Blanchard figured both sexes and his male is very close to the figure I give on Plate xxv, fig. 1, which is from Launceston. Figure 863 in the Butterflies of Australia is also from Launceston and is also close to Blanchard’s figure of the male. I figure (Plate xxv, fig. 2) a female from Launceston without any central orange patch on the upper side of the hindwing; this figure is much duller above than Blanchard’s figure of the female, which has an irregular central orange patch on the upper side of the hindwing. Figure 864 of the Butterflies of Australia is much nearer Blanchard’s figure of the female. The most highly coloured specimens I have from Launceston are shown on Plate xxy, fig. 3 (male) and fig. 4 (female), the latter being very close to the figure given in the “Genera”, which is that of a female. I have from Launceston a long series of this race (the South Australian Museum also has a fine series from the same place) and in both sexes they pass gradually from the extremes of both sexes I have figured on Plate xxv. My figures of the under sides show that the black markings are very variable in extent. Though I consider that the types came from near Hobart, I have used Launceston specimens for illustration as I have no females from Hobart. From Snug River, near Hobart, I have but eight males, all of which agree very closely with Plate xxv, fig. 3, and all have the under side marked as in that figure; they were taken in September and October, whilst my Launceston specimens were taken from October to December and are chiefly from a large batch of pupae found by the late F. M. Littler. This race feeds on species of Acacia. PSEUDALMENUS CHLORINDA ZEPHYRUS Waterhouse and Lyell. Talmenus myrsilus, Anderson and Spry, Victorian Butterflies, 1894, 100, female figured. —P. chlorinda zephyrus, Waterhouse and Lyell, Butterflies of Australia, 1914, 114, figs. 436, 437, 438.—lalmenus myrsilus zephyrus Seitz in Seitz Macro- lepidoptera, Pl. 998, fig. 160b. The holotype ¢ and allotype 2 of this race from Gisborne, Vict., are in Mr. G. Lyell’s collection, taken in September. I have also specimens taken at Gisborne where they feed on Acacia melanoxylon. In this race the males and females are usually more highly coloured on the upper side than in Plate xxv, figs. 3 and 4, the female showing much more orange basad of the black cell bar of the forewing. On the under side in both sexes, the black markings are usually as in Plate xxv, fig. 3 and only rarely approach those of fig. 1. This race is confined to Victoria and has recently been taken at Moe in September, October and November. 412 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN LYCAENIDAE, Vi. PSEUDALMENUS CHLORINDA CHLORIS Waterhouse and Lyell. Butterflies of Australia, 1914, 114, figs. 870, 871. The holotype male, allotype female and paratype male from Katoomba (October) are in my collection. The coloured figures already given show this race very well, which is brighter on the upper side than zephyrus and a beautiful silky white on the under side. Mr. G. M. Goldfinch has recently taken a female of this race at Mittagong in November. PSEUDALMENUS CHLORINDA BARRINGTONENSIS, n. Subsp. Plate xxv, fig. 5. Male. Upper side: Forewing as in chloris. Hindwing with the subterminal coloured band much enlarged and extended to join the central coloured patch. Under side silky white, with the black and red bands as shown in the figure. This fine race is known from a single specimen which was found dead on the snow near Edwards Hut, Barrington Tops, on 30th October, 1922, by the late John Hopson, Junr. I failed to find any trace of it there in January, 1925. This specimen shows a further increase of colour from the southern races. A Mr. Schraeder told me some years ago that he had taken specimens of a Pseudalmenus near Hanging Rock, but had disposed of them. They would probably be this race. The holotype male which is at present unique is in my collection. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXV. Pseudalmenus chlorinda chlorinda, ¢, Launceston, Tas. Pseudalmenus chlorinda chlorinda, 9, Launceston, Tas. Pseudalmenus chlorinda chlorinda, ¢, Waunceston, Tas., 9th Nov., 1917. Pseudalmenus chlorinda chlorinda, 9, Launceston, Tas., 2nd Nov., 1917. Pseudalmenus chlorinda barringtonensis, holotype co, Barrington Tops, N.S.W., 30th Oct., 1922. : Miletus apollo phoebus, holotype ¢%, Cape York, Q., 2nd Oct., 1910. Miletus apollo phoebus, allotype 2, Cape York, Q., 18th Sept., 1910. 8. Miletus apollo apollo, 3, Meringa, Cairns, Q., 16th Febr., 1926. 9. Miletus apollo apollo, 2, Cairns District, Q. 10. Miletus apollo apollo, 2, Cairns District, Q. Figures from specimens in Waterhouse Collection. Ol mos to (=r) -l A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE (DIPTERA). Parr ii. By Frreperick H. S. Roperts, M.Sc. [Read 29th August, 1928.] Subfamily BoMBYLIINAE. Head usually smaller than in the Exoprosopinae, rarely transverse or wider than the thorax; occiput little convex, never bilobate or with a central cavity; eyes contiguous or subcontiguous in the male, distinctly separated in the female, their hind borders entire. Antennae approximate at the base, porrect, sometimes longer than the head, with an apical or subapical style of variable form, some- times imperceptible. Proboscis variable in length, generally elongate and porrect; palpi always one-jointed. Thorax generally arched, often much so, usually with dense furry pubescence and some bristly hairs. Abdomen usually short, broad and rounded, rarely conical, with dense furry pubescence and long bristles or bristly hairs. Legs generally long and slender, the femora with strong spines below, some- times absent on the fore femora, and a circlet of apical spines to the tibiae; spines on tibiae arranged in three rows. Wings stout, generally with well developed lobe and alula; R.., usually curved, sometimes almost straight, and arising from R,,; well distant from r-m; cells R, and Cu sometimes closed. This subfamily contains five genera in Australia, viz. Bombylius. Systoechus, Dischistus, Sisyromyia, and Anastoechus. Sisyromyia is confined to this region and Anastoechus is recorded from Australia for the first time. The descriptions of many of the species which come within the subfamily are very inferior and brief, and in many cases I have had to rely on White and Hardy, not only for the identification of these species, but for their generic position. White, fortunately, was able to examine many of Walker’s types in the British Museum, and his identifications are no doubt correct. Key to the Genera of the Bombyliinae. i iCell Re open, at most closed at the wing border <7. 2022-223). 2-2-3. - ss 2 Cell R, closedawellsbeLrorenthemwinees border iy annie eine niece near 3 2. Cell R much longer than cell M; i.e. the vein r-m is placed near or beyond the middle OG CST TM Ce cra Reece ae eet oa chee ober el a ack atl laledl eradicate e omeneN ete Dischistus Loew. Cells R and M of about equal length; i.e. the vein r-m is placed near the base of cell STG Ghd 8 1d BI CPOIS Oy SACRE RTE EEROND 1-0 > Chol IER CAOEA IPRS ey ANONG onto TS S.0' OkG 0.6 Sisyromyia White. Be OeCllseherandeVirok about, CQUal Len stiles nc. cus cc oscene scl hea reec ee sateneL ae eesti ersten etc ere 4 Cel IR wan lomase Wen Gall SooacobonacusoosdoopaccoDKOKde Bombylius Linnaeus. 4. Face prominent and moderately pilose; head not as broad as thorax ............ Face rounded and very densely pilose; head as broad as thorax ................ 414 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, ii, Genus SystorcHus Loew. Systoechus, Loew, Neue Beitr., iii, 1855, 34; White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1916, 196; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1921, 69; 1923, 83. Genotype, Bombylius sulphureus Mikan, by designation of Coquiilett, 1910. Head small, semicircular, set rather low and closely applied to thorax; occiput moderately convex; eyes in male, usually contiguous for various distances, in female, wide apart; frontal triangle of moderate size, or rather large; face prominent between the eyes, clothed with dense appressed pile and erect hairs; proboscis very long, usually slender, with rather small labella; palpi usually short and thin. Antennae usually as long as the head, sometimes longer, the first segment long and cylindrical, the second short, about half as long as the first, the third longer than the first two together, sometimes much longer, variable in shape, constricted at base, with a small jointed style, sometimes a little subapical. Thorax broad, somewhat oval, arched, with dense furry pubescence, the postalar bristles usually not conspicuous; scutellum large, semicircular, clothed like the thorax, the bristles long and slender; squamae not very large, with a rather sparse hairy fringe; halteres slender. : Abdomen short, usually broad and rounded or somewhat obconical, clothed with dense furry pubescence, and with long bristles or bristly hairs on the hind borders of the segments. Legs long and thin, with distinct spines; hind legs elongate, hind and middle femora with long spines below, more numerous on the former; pulvilli distinct; empodium minute. . Wings at rest, outspread, rather narrow, with well developed alulae; cell Sc, except towards apex, almost obliterated by the contiguity.of the veins Se and R,; R.,, usually curved at apex, never recurrent, rarely straight; r-m placed well before the middle of cell mc, so that cells R and M are of approximately equal length; celi R, closed well before the margin; cell Cu open; apical: cross-vein of cell me never or very rarely longer than r-m. Range.—World-wide. Key to the Species of Systoechus. 1. Apex of abdomen with dark tufts; abdomen with a dark band .......... se Me aera ee 2 Apex of abdomen without such tufts; abdomen without a dark band ......... Seen 4) 2. Wings usually with clear spots; fore tibiae of male with small spines of almost equal SIZE) esac cycicsis,. Suma coerauelts he FER Sys pe eae cue etm Saltese teh cieedion erfagcs sb sete uenshs sais platyurus Walker Wings never spotted; fore tibiae of male with some very large spines on its apical eS Re ete 2 is coh ace RRR TU En eS PR So UST e ee aid, senators Ca Oe 3 3. Middle tibiae with two rows of very large and-strongly developed spines; pubescence TOG? CAMESH este ab ctisie at et cities ai eo aie a uoneae ac ene hartel «reper n ewe eee callynthrophorus Schiner Middle tibiae devoid of such spines; pubescence rarely red tinted .............. 4 4. Fore tibiae with one or two much developed apical spines; apical tuft of abdomen divided at apex only; femora partly brownish .............. albiceps Macquart Fore tibiae without such apical spines; apical tuft of abdomen wholly divided ; femora ok: Ke) Glas EMEP on Rai Rete eee rey ree ME ior tee Do mua cao SIGIN OO sericans Macquart pp luaree: SPECIES withmtawnye sD UDeSCEN CE ius c..uur-s oaeasea wenn Cola meee stsy Semen Mya meio esto Oar 6 Small species with yellowish or white’ pubescence ...........................-.- 6. Head not nearly as broad as thorax;.pubescence tawny; wings smoky .......... eer Renn et A ane tia ttc A ORAM MOK oO ooo 5 plo heey oroie-dethere australis Guérin Head about as broad as thorax; pubescence bright tawny; wings almost hyaline, at most yellowish at base and along the fore margin ........ distinctus Walker Uo IP WIA CEMOS EVbaOSE Viol; woe Gob sobooobouccnoaauoos on ouDHU UM eE albohirtus, n. sp. IPUbDESGENGCe Wy ellOWASI fo) Five A epee Sees le oa aE ee CCA Cece ty eee 8 Sa Yael with swihite: Wars: oh. ces ta socs ac eee he eee Oe ee ne I eo beet) cane ee 9 BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 415 9. Third antennal segment very broad; abdomen somewhat reddish .... rwbidws, n. sp. Third antennal segment not in the least broad; abdomen with rather large yellowish LENCE GES cooponsconobnenconovooovapogabEDN wood odo Owes cinctiventris, n. sp. 10. Pubescence bright yellow; wings fairly clear .................. flavovillosus, n. sp. Pubescence pale yellow; wings smoky ..............-eeeeceeserecs pallidus, n. sp. The females of albiceps, sericans and callynthrophorus are not included in the above key. That of callynthrophorus may be recognized by the reddish colour of the pubescence in conjunction with the brownish femora; that of albiceps by the partly brownish femora and the undivided abdominal tuft and that of sericans by the black femora and wholly divided tuft, the two latter species but rarely having any reddish tint to the pubescence. Eleven species have been recognized as belonging to the genus, five being described as new. Nothing is known of the life histories of any of the species, though the habits of the adults point to their being parasitic on Hymenoptera and Orthoptera. In Europe and America this genus has been recorded as parasitic on the egg-masses of grasshoppers and the manner in which some of our smaller species alight on the ground makes it possible that the hosts of the larvae are somewhat similar in Australia. Most of the species occur from early spring to about midsummer, the larger banded species, platyurus, sericans, albiceps and callynthrophorus, being rather numerous during the flowering of Leptospermums. From the manner in which these larger species fly, and the buzzing sound produced by the rapid vibrations of their wings whilst hovering, the popular name of “bee flies’ has no doubt been derived. Distribution—The genus, so far as known, is principally distributed along the eastern portion of the Continent, and appears richest in species in Queensland. Of the eleven species known, cinctiventris and flavovillosus occur in Queensland only; albiceps occurs from Queensland, through New South Wales to Victoria, and appears mainly coastal in habitat; sericans from Western Australia, probably across the central areas, to Southern Queensland; australis from New South Wales to South-eastern Queensland; rubidus and pallidus from New South Wales to South-western Queensland. Of the remaining species, platyurus is recorded from all States, but is confined to the southern half of the Continent; distinctus and callynthrophorus from New South Wales and albohirtus from South Australia. SYSTOECHUS PLATYURUS (Walker). Bombylius platyurus, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii, 1849, 286—wSystoechus platyurus, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 69; 1923, 83—Bombylius crassus, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii, 1849, 287; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1923, 83—Systoechus crassus, White. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1916, 196.— Bombylius notatipennis, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 5, 1854, 78.—Bombylius punctipennis, Thomson, Hug. Resa, Dipt., 1868, 487. 6. Head mainly greyish, frons and upper portion of face somewhat darker; occiput moderately convex, clothed with short, dense, and equal pale golden or pale reddish hairs, which become much paler below to form a soft, whitish, sparse, beard; eyes contiguous from just below the ocellar tubercle for about one-third the length of the frons, their upper and inner facets slightly enlarged; ocellar tubercle black, rather small, with long, erect, pale golden and reddish hairs; frontal triangle large, clothed with dense, appressed, pale golden pile, the median groove distinct; face with dense pale golden and soft hairs, the basal portion of the cheeks bare; mouth opening long and broad, its borders yellowish with a short golden I 416 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, li, moustache, and bearing on the upper border a tuft of about six short, bristly, reddish hairs. Antennae longer than the head, the first segment with dense pale golden, and sometimes with some intermixed black hairs, the second short, not more than half the length of the first, the third longer than twice the length of the first and second together, somewhat elongate conical in shape, its apical fourth very slender and almost linear, and provided with a small but distinct apical style. Proboscis usually very elongate and slender, very variable in length, usually about three times the length of the oral opening; palpi small, slender, blackish. Thorax grey-black, with three black, narrow, longitudinal stripes, the whole densely clothed with short pale reddish or golden hairs which, viewed from above, appear rather paler on the sides, and from the front the whole has a very pale golden yellow sheen; the posterior portion contains many more definitely reddish hairs, which are more concentrated near the scutellum; postalar calli with tufts of black hairs below; scutellum grey-black, clothed with dense greyish pile, and provided with long, reddish bristles; pleurae and breast clothed with dense hairs, rather paler than those on the dorsum; squamae very pale with a dense pale fringe; halteres brownish with reddish knobs. Abdomen blackish, broad and rounded, clothed with dense, intermixed reddish and grey pubescence, the latter being rather appressed; posterior border of second segment with a band of dense black and intermixed reddish hairs, which extends laterally and is somewhat whitish immediately below; on the apical segments is a very dense tuft of longer black and some intermixed reddish hairs, which appears to be divided into two distinct apical tufts, the dorsum thus appearing to be clothed with dense reddish hairs with a black band and two apical black tufts; bristles reddish; venter with dense, pale reddish and intermixed white hairs. Legs mainly reddish, the basal half of the fore femora, and the bases of the middle and posterior femora, and apical tarsi, black; coxae black, and with femora below, with long pale hairs, the legs otherwise with reddish or somewhat golden scales, the femora with appearances of white scales at their bases; spines reddish; hind femora with a row of about twelve long spines below; middle femora with few similar spines below; apical spines of tibiae rather short; pulvilli pale. Wings brown at the base and along the fore margin for about two-thirds the length and one-third the breadth, the remainder of the wing greyish or pale smoky; greyish area with five fuscous spots placed on various cross-veins and bifurcations; apical cross-vein of cell me rather large. 9°. Frons very broad at vertex, clothed with appressed pale golden pile, with erect black bristly hairs and some golden or reddish, short, bristles. Length of body, 9-15 mm.; of wing, 8-14-5 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane, Bribie Is.; Victoria: Cheltenham; South Australia: Mt. Pleasant, Kangaroo Is.; Western Australia: Albany, Perth, Gerald- ton, King George’s Sound, Kelmscott, Smith’s Hill; Tasmania: Hobart, George Town, Bridgeport. I have no record of this species from New South Wales, though I feel certain the species occurs in that State, both notatipennis and punctipennis being described from Sydney. This beautiful Systoechus is the first of the genus to appear on the wing around Brisbane. Its earliest record there is the end of July. It continues till about the end of September, and is particularly common on Leptospermums from the end of August to the middle of September. In Tasmania the dates range through- out December; in Victoria, October; in South Australia, November, and in Western BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 417 Australia, December (there is only one specimen of a series of nine from this State with the date of capture on the label). In the series before me there are 17 Jg, 10 2 from Queensland, 3 ¢, 2 9 from Tasmania, 3 ¢ from South Australia, 2 J, 1 2? from Victoria, and 2 ¢, 7 ? from Western Australia, The description given above is taken from the Tasmanian form, described by White as crassus. The species from the eastern coast, and from Perth (W. Aust.) are practically identical with crassus, though the species around Brisbane is generally rather paler and smaller. On Bribie Island and at Dunwich, Moreton Bay, the pubescence becomes almost a bright red. One ¢ and two 9? from Albany, Geraldton, and King George’s Sound (W. Aust.) have the pubescence of the head white, that of the body greyish, with intermixed reddish hairs and bristles. The spots on the wings are very faint and in one specimen almost absent. This form is without doubt Walker’s platyurus, which was described from Western Australia. The specimens from South Australia appear to be similar, the spots on the wings being hardly discernible. These specimens are badly damaged and very greasy, but, as far as I can judge, the pubescence is also mainly whitish. The form platyurus is apparently very closely related to callynthrophorus and its allied species, but the fore tibiae of the male never possess the sexual spines as found in callynthrophorus. In general, platyurus is a large species, which varies greatly in colour and in the distinctness of the infuscations of the wings, the former varying from greyish through pale golden to reddish, and the latter sometimes hardly visible. The species contains two distinct forms, the grey form, platyurus, which is confined to Western Australia and possibly South Australia, and the reddish form with distinctly spotted wings, mainly to Tasmania and the eastern coast. SYSTOECHUS ALBICEPS (Macquart). Bombylius albiceps, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 3, 1848, 36—Systoechus albiceps, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 70.—Bombylius vetustus, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii, 1849, 286—Systoechus vetustus, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 69.—Bombylius penicillatus, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 4, 1850, 118. 6. Head mainly greyish; occiput moderately convex, densely clothed with long silvery white hairs, which completely cover a row of short, pale brown bristles; ocellar tubercle rather small, with some long, black, bristly hairs and some shorter, white hairs; eyes contiguous from below the ocellar tubercle for about one-third the length of the frons, the upper facets hardly larger; frontal triangle large and broad, clothed with dense, appressed, white pile; median groove very distinct; face entirely clothed with dense white hairs, which are continued to the chin, which bears a soft and rather sparse beard. Antennae entirely black, similar to those of platyurus. Proboscis elongate and slender with enlarged labella, usually about two and one-half times the length of the mouth opening, which is long and broad, with pale borders; palpi small, slender, dark brown. Thorax greyish, clothed with short, dense and equal whitish hairs, somewhat shining white in front and on the sides, and which, viewed from the front, has a beautiful silvery-white sheen; posterior half of thorax with numerous intermixed black hairs, more conspicuous immediately anterior to the scutellum; bristles mainly pale brown, with intermixed black, the presutural bristles sometimes well marked; scutellum greyish, with similar tomentum to the thorax, and long, black, and a few intermixed brownish bristles, stronger on the margin; pleurae and 418 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAB, ii, breast greyish, densely clothed with shining white hairs; squamae pale with a dense white fringe; halteres with blackish knobs. ; Abdomen greyish, broad and rounded, clothed with dense, grey, appressed, and grey and white erect hairs, the latter more conspicuous on the third and fourth segments; posterior border of second segment with a band of dense, black hairs; apical segments with a dense tuft of long black hairs, divided at the extreme apex by some whitish or greyish hairs; bristles black, rather weak and small, much longer and stronger towards the apex, where there may be a few brown bristles intermixed; venter grey, densely white pollinose. Legs: Coxae dark grey, basal half of femora, apices of femora and tibiae, and all apical tarsi black; rest of femora and tibiae somewhat brownish, the hind femora and tibiae darker, and all femora paler beneath; coxae and femora beneath with long white hairs; femora and tibiae with white scales, though the femora sometimes appear to be yellow-scaled above, and in certain lights the scales on the tibiae appear golden; fore femora with two, middle femora with about five, and hind femora with twelve long spines beneath; fore tibiae with usually four long black spines on the apical half, the spines being much longer and stronger than the remaining spines, and partly hidden by dense black and white or grey hairs, the latter appearing as a definite encircling band; two of the apical spines of the fore tibiae, the inner and outer, are much prolonged, being very much longer than the other apical spines, the outer spine generally longer and more apparent. Wings somewhat subhyaline, faintly brown at the base and along the fore margin; apical cross-vein of cell mc rarely equal to r-m. ©. Generally larger than the male, the broad frons being clothed with dense white pile, with some erect brownish bristles and soft white hairs; fore tibiae never with prolonged spines at apex or with the strong black spines and accompany- ing black and white tomentum of the male; apical tuft of abdomen very dense and not divided at apex. Length of body, 6-13 mm.; of wing, 5-5-12 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane (August to September); N. S. Wales: Sydney, Woy Woy, Wentworth Falls (October); Victoria: Williamstown (October). SYSTOECHUS SERICANS (Macquart). Bombylius sericans, Macg., Dipt. Hxot., suppl. 4, 1850, 116; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 69.—Systoechus pausarius, Jaennicke, Abhand. Senck. Nat. Ges., vi, 1867, 348; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 70. This species is very similar in appearance to albiceps, but the black band across the abdomen appears rather narrower, and the dense black hairs at the apex are divided into two separate tufts. The femora are wholly black, and the tibiae rather dark. The main difference lies in the spines of the fore tibiae. The long, strongly developed spines on the apical half, with the accompanying black and white hairs, are not so well marked as in albiceps, and the spines at the apex are all of nearly equal length, the two inner and outer spines never becoming so long and strong. There are 25 g, 5 2 in the series before me, many of which are in a more or less damaged condition. The tufts on the apex of the abdomen certainly appear distinctly separated, and the black band narrower. The difference in the develop- ment of the tibial spines, especially of those on the apex, and the wholly black BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 419 femora, form reliable characters for the separation of the two species. The pubescence of the body has also a faint tawny tinge. The female, as in albiceps, does not possess the strongly developed spines of the fore tibiae, but may be recognized by the wholly black femora, and the separated tufts at the apex of the abdomen. Length of body, 8-13 mm.; of wing, 7-12-5 mm. Hab.—Queensland: EHEidsvold (October), Chinchilla (October to September), Morven and Roma (September), Brisbane (September); W. Australia: Badgerly, Merredin (no date). SYSTOECHUS CALLYNTHROPHORUS Schiner. Systoechus callynthrophorus, Schiner, Reise Nov., 1868, 137; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 70.—Bombylius spinipes, Thomson, Hug. Resa, Dipt., 1868, 488; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 70. This species is closely related to both albiceps and sericans. From both it may be distinguished by the golden or pale reddish bristles, the intermixed reddish hairs, the band across the abdomen being mainly reddish, and the apical tuft with long intermixed red hairs. It agrees with albiceps in having the apical tuft separated at the extreme apex only, and in sometimes possessing long inner and outer apical spines on the fore tibiae, the outer spine usually being more prominent. The genital spines on the apical half of the fore tibiae are also present and, in addition, there are two rows of three very long, strong, and erect spines on the middle tibiae, which are accompanied by similar black and white hairs, though not so marked. These latter spines are always in two rows, though in some specimens, one of the rows contains two spines only. The legs have the femora and tibiae an almost unicolorous pale brownish or yellowish, the femora being at most black at the extreme bases only. The fore and middle tibiae of the female lack the long strong spines of the male, and the apical tuft of the abdomen is wholly black. Length of body, 8-11 mm.; of wing, 7-10-5 mm. Hab.—N. S. Wales: Sydney and Woy Woy (September to October). In his catalogue of the Australian Bombyliidae, G. H. Hardy (1921) identified the grey species, with the abdomen black banded and tufted, as vetustus, with which he placed sericans, penicillatus, pausarius, callynthrophorus and spinipes as synonyms. In the collections examined there were 57 J, 20 9, all of which were primarily placed under the name vetustus. A study of this material, however, revealed the presence of three distinct species, the main differences lying in the development of the spines of the fore and middle tibiae, in the colour of the femora and in the division or otherwise of the apical black tuft of the abdomen. The first character was found to be sexual and possessed by the males only, and for the separation of the females the other characters had to be utilized. Neither of these is very satisfactory, but at the present time I am unable to locate any more definite characters. In view of the inadequacy of the original descriptions, it has been rather difficult to place the three species, sericans, albiceps, and callynthrophorus. The latter species and Thomson’s spinipes are regarded as the species from Sydney with the reddish abdominal band, the yellowish legs, and reddish bristles, callynthrophorus taking precedence; sericans and pausarius are both described as possessing black femora and separated apical tufts. Here are placed the species from Southern and Western Queensland and Western Australia. The remaining 420 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, ii, species, albiceps, is determined with vetustus and penicillatus as synonyms, as in the descriptions the femora are noted as brownish or partly brownish, and the bristles of the body, black. SYSTOECHUS AUSTRALIS (Guérin). Bombylius australis, Guérin, Voy. Coq., Zool., pt. 2, 1830, 294; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 75.—Systoechus australis, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1923, 84. 6. Head mainly greyish, upper part of face and frons darker; occiput moder- ately convex, clothed with dense, equal, pale tawny hairs, with which are mingled some darker bristles; ocellar tubercle black, with some long dark hairs; eyes almost contiguous at a point immediately below the ocellar tubercle, their upper facets distinctly enlarged; frontal triangle of moderate size, clothed with appressed golden scales, and with a few pale golden hairs near the inner eye margins; face densely clothed with pale golden hairs, which become almost whitish on the chin, forming a somewhat sparse beard; the hairs on the mouth borders form a thin moustache, which does not extend the full length of the cheeks; oral opening rather broad, its borders pale yellowish. Antennae black, not as long as the head, the first segment with long pale golden hairs, much longer beneath, the third segment longer than the first two together, broadening medianly, thence tapering to a blunt apex, which is provided with a stout style. Proboscis black, usually about three times the length of the oral opening, slender, with rather enlarged labella; palpi small, slender, brownish. Thorax blackish, with reddish calli, densely clothed with short, pale tawny hairs which, viewed from the front, have a pale golden or yellowish sheen; post- alar calli with a tuft of black hairs; scutellum black, broadly reddish on the margin, with similar pubescence; bristles strong and dark brownish; pleurae and breast much paler haired, the mesopleural tuft somewhat tawny above; squamae brown with a pale yellowish fringe; halteres brown with yellow knobs. Abdomen broad and rounded, somewhat dark greyish, faintly reddish on the sides of the two basal segments; the whole clothed with appressed pale golden scales and dense tawny hairs, which are more dense laterally, and somewhat paler apically; bristles strong, dark brown, forming complete rows on the hind borders of the segments; venter densely pale haired. Legs with coxae blackish, femora, tibiae, and basal tarsi pale brownish or yellowish, the apical tarsi darker; coxae and femora beneath with long whitish hairs; otherwise clothed with whitish scales which, against the yellowish ground colour, appear pale golden; middle femora with few, hind femora with many strong spines beneath; pulvilli pale. Wings yellowish at base and along fore margin to the apex of cell Se; remainder of wing dark smoky, clearer towards apex and hind margin. 9. Frons very broad at vertex, clothed with dark golden scales and some erect black and golden hairs. Length of body, 10-14 mm.; of wing, 9:5-12 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Stradbroke Is., Mt. Tambourine (September); N. S. Wales: National Park and Woodford (November), Barrington Tops (February), Sydney (December), Blue Mts. (January). In two males from Woodford and Barrington Tops, N. S. Wales, the body pubescence is much duller than in the rest of the series and in one of these males (Barrington Tops) the basal half of the fore and middle tibiae is black. BY F. H. 8. ROBERTS. 421 SYSTOECHUS DISTINCTUS (Walker). Bombylius distinctus, Walker, Ins. Saund., Dipt., 1850, 201.—Systoechus distinctus, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 70. This species is very similar in general appearance to australis, but differs in several characters. The head is very broad, much broader than in australis, the eyes are contiguous for some distance below the ocellar tubercle, the abdomen is much broader, and the general body pubescence is much brighter, almost a golden colour. The wings are almost hyaline, yellowish at the base and along the fore margin for about two-thirds the length, in contrast to the dark smoky wings of australis. Of this species I have only seen a single specimen, a male, from Medlow, N. S. Wales, January. SYSTOECHUS RUBIDUS, N. Sp. ©. Head greyish, the frons somewhat darker; occiput moderately, convex, clothed with appressed white scales and dense, short, pale brownish, almost whitish hairs, which appear still paler below; frons at the vertex, about one and one-half times the width of the ocellar tubercle, clothed with dense, appressed, golden scales and erect pale hairs; median furrow distinct; face densely covered with appressed, clear white hairs, which do not appear to extend the full length of the cheeks to the white beard below; oral opening small, though rather broad compared with its length, its borders very pale yellowish; ocellar tubercle rather large, very prominent, with some erect, long, pale hairs. Antennae shorter than the head, the two basal: segments brownish, the first with long pale hairs; the third segment is of unusual shape, being longer than the first two segments together, broadly flattened from side to side, so that it is somewhat broadly hastate, and provided with a small but distinct style placed a little below the extreme apex. Proboscis black, brownish at base and beneath, about three times the length of the oral opening; palpi very short, hidden. Thorax grey-black, clearer grey in front and on the sides, clothed with appressed, pale golden scales, and dense, short, very pale yellowish hairs which, viewed from the front, appear whitish; bristles inconspicuous, pale golden; scutellum tinged reddish, with similar tomentum and pale, thin, bristles; pleurae and breast grey, white haired; squamae pale yellowish with a white fringe; halteres with yellow knobs. Abdomen short and oval, pale reddish, the basal segment and portions of segments two, three, and four, darker, the apical segments paler, clothed with pale yellowish hairs and appressed pale golden scales, the bristles much darker; venter yellowish with appressed white pile and numerous pale bristly hairs. Legs yellowish, coxae and apical tarsi dark, clothed with white scales, the coxae and femora beneath with long white hairs; middle femora with about two, hind femora with about six long spines below; pulvilli pale; claws black. Wings subhyaline, faintly yellowish at base and in cell Sc, clearer at apex and along hind margin. Holotype g, Chinchilla, Q’land, November, 1926, A. P. Dodd; length of body, 3-5 mm.; of wing, 3 mm. Paratype 9, Moonie River, N. S. Wales, 2nd November, A. P. Dodd. In the paratype the abdomen is somewhat conical, more yellowish- brown than red, the basal segments darker medianly. 422 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, ii, Both the holotype and paratype are not in the best condition for description, but the shape of the third antennal segment is so outstanding among the species of the genus as to warrant a description. The holotype is in the Queensland Museum. SYSTOECHUS ALBOHIRTUS, N. SD. do. Head greyish, silver grey on occiput and chin; occiput slightly swollen, clothed with dense, long, white hairs, which become much thinner on the chin to form a sparse, short, white beard; ocellar tubercle black, with some erect. whitish hairs; eyes almost contiguous below the ocellar tubercle for a short distance, the width of the frons at the narrowest point being by no means as broad as the fore ocellus; upper and inner facets little enlarged; frontal triangle of moderate size, clothed with dense, appressed, white scales, face rather narrow, little projecting, clothed with dense white hairs, which do not appear to cover the basal portion of the cheeks; mouth opening rather narrow, with pale yellow borders. Antennae about as long as the head, the two basal segments reddish, the third darker, almost black; first segment with long white hairs, longer below; second about half the length of the first; third a little longer than the first two segments together, somewhat elongate oval in shape, broadest medianly, the style spine-like, very minute but distinct, placed a little below the extreme apex. Proboscis long, slender, about three times the length of the oral opening; palpi short, slender, yellowish. Thorax blackish, grey laterally, clothed with appressed, white scales and dense, white hairs; bristles whitish, not conspicuous; pleurae and breast greyish, densely white haired; scutellum grey, with similar tomentum, the bristles longer and more easily seen; squamae whitish with a white fringe;. halteres with pale yellow knobs. Abdomen somewhat greyish, much longer than broad, clothed with appressed white scales and dense, white hairs, longest laterally; bristles whitish, not outstanding among the dense white hairs; venter white haired. Legs yellowish, coxae, fore femora at base, and apical tarsi darker, the whole with white scales, the coxae and femora below with long white hairs; hind femora only with long spines below (spines beneath middle femora possibly broken off); pulvilli pale; claws black. Wings hyaline; apical cross-vein of cell mc not equal to vein r-m, so that mc is somewhat acute at end. °. Similar to male, but frons very broad, clothed with dense white scales and some erect white hairs. Holotype J, labelled South Australia only; length of body, 9 mm.; of wing, 85 mm. Allotype 9, labelled South Australia only; length of body, 9:5 mm.; of wing, 8 mm. No paratypes are known, the holotype and allotype being from the collection of the South Australian Museum. The species is outstanding on account of the unicolorous and dense, clear white pubescence, and the completely hyaline wings. The holotype and allotype are in South Australian Museum. SYSTOECHUS PALLIDUS, N. Sp. 6. Head mainly greyish, the face and frons darker; occiput moderately convex, clothed with dense, short, equal, pale golden hairs, somewhat paler below; ocellar tubercle large, black, with some bristly, blackish hairs; eyes contiguous imme- BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 423 diately below ocellar tubercle for a short distance, their upper facets little enlarged; frontal triangle of moderate size, clothed with appressed, golden scales; median furrow distinct; face becoming grey dusted towards the chin, covered with Jong, black, bristly hairs, with a pale golden moustache, which does not extend to the sparse, white beard below; mouth opening somewhat short and broad, its borders pale yellowish. Antennae almost entirely black, not as long as head, the first segment with long black hairs, the third longer than the first and second together, the basal half broadened and somewhat oval, the apical half, linear, provided with small spine-like style, placed a little below the extreme apex. Proboscis black, rather stout, about three times the length of the oral opening, its labella rather enlarged; palpi black, slender, about one-third the length of the proboscis. Thorax black, grey on the sides, clothed with appressed pale golden scales and dense, short, equal, pale yellowish hairs, the whole viewed from the front with a somewhat whitish sheen; pleurae and breast grey, with dense white hairs, the mesopleural tuft stained yellowish above; bristles weak and small, not conspicuous; secutellum dark brownish, with similar hairs and scales, and with numerous long, pale, weak, and stronger, darker intermixed bristles; squamae pale with a pale fringe, which sometimes appears whitish; halteres pale brown with yellow knobs. Abdomen somewhat obconical, much longer than broad, dark brown with small lateral pale reddish areas to each segment, the areas decreasing in size apically; dorsum clothed with hairs and appressed scales, similar to those on the thorax, the hairs.rather more dull, and paler laterally and towards the apex, and the scales longer and paler apically; bristles numerous, long, blackish; venter grey, densely white haired. Legs with coxae grey, the remainder, except for the darker apical tibiae, pale yellow, clothed with white scales, the coxae and femora below with long white hairs; middle femora with three short, hind femora with five to seven long spines beneath; pulvilli pale. Wings yellow at base and along fore margin to the apex of cell Sc, the remainder smoky, clearing to hind margin and apex, so that both these portions of the wing are almost hyaline; veins heavily marked; venation normal; cell me sharply acute and very broad basally. Holotype g, Brisbane, Q’land, 15th August, 1927, F. Roberts: length of body, 8 mm.; of wing, 65 mm. Paratypes: 6 J, Brisbane, August to October, F. Roberts; 2 9, Brisbane, August, J. Mann. Among the series of this species is a female (Blackheath, 1st February, 1926, J. M. Mackerras) which is in too bad a condition to be made an allotype. As far as an examination will allow, the broad frons shows dark golden scales and long black hairs, the specimen being otherwise similar to the male. The holotype is in the Queensland Museum. SYSTOECHUS FLAVOVILLOSUS. Nl. SD. 6. Head grey; occiput moderately convex, clothed with dense, bright yellow hairs, which become much paler below; ocellar tubercle black, with some long, black, bristly hairs; eyes contiguous for a short distance below the ocellar tubercle, their upper facets little enlarged; frontal triangle of moderate size, clothed with appressed, golden scales; median groove very distinct; face barely projecting, clothed with black bristly hairs, the moustache thin and very pale golden, extending almost the full length of the cheeks to the sparse, whitish beard below; oral 424 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, ii, opening short and rather narrow, its borders pale. Antennae entirely black, the first segment with long black hairs, the third longer than the first two segments together, its basal half broadening and somewhat ovate, thence gradually tapering to a not very slender apex; style minute, spine-like, placed somewhat subapically. Proboscis black, rather short and not so very slender, about two and one-half times the length of the oral opening; palpi slender, blackish, about one-third the length of the proboscis. Thorax black, somewhat greyish laterally, clothed with appressed, shining golden scales and short, dense and equal, bright yellow hairs; pleurae and breast greyish, much paler haired; bristles thin, not conspicuous; scutellum black, clothed like the thorax, but with more conspicuous pale golden bristles; squamae pale with a very pale yellow fringe; halteres pale brownish with yellow knobs. Abdomen rather short and rotund, black, at most tinged reddish on the extreme lateral margins of the basal segments; dorsum clothed with appressed golden scales and dense bright yellow hairs; bristles very pale golden, very long and forming complete rows on the hind borders of the segments; venter grey, with very pale shining, yellow appressed pile and longer, pale bristly hairs. Legs mainly yellow, the coxae grey, apical tarsi of fore and middle legs, all tarsi and apex of tibiae of hind legs brownish, the femora and tibiae clothed with pale golden scales, which appear to be somewhat whitish on the femora beneath; coxae and femora below, with long pale hairs; hind femora with about five long spines below; middle femora without any apparent spines below; pulvilli pale. Wings subhyaline, yellowish at base and along the fore margin to the apex of the cell Sc; venation normal; R.,, moderately curved at apex to meet the costa at an obtuse angle. Holotype ¢, Meringa, Nth. Q’land, 17th November, 1926, Goldfinch; length of body, 7-5 mm.; of wing, 7 mm. In the female the frons is rather narrow at the vertex of the head, being about one and one-half times the width of the ocellar tubercle, clothed with golden scales and erect black bristly hairs; face with silver-white hairs; pleurae and breast white haired, the mesopleural tuft pale yellow; abdomen black, the segments with small pale reddish-brown lateral areas, larger on the basal segments and decreasing in size apically. Allotype °, Meringa, 17th November, 1926, Goldfinch. Paratypes, 2 9, same data, in the collection of Dr. I. M. Mackerras. The difference in the ground colour of the abdomen in the male and female is rather peculiar. In the male, the abdomen is almost wholly black, the basal segments tinged pale reddish laterally. In the female the colour is similar to that of pallidus, the pale reddish lateral areas being very distinct. It is possible that the condition of the abdomen as seen in the holotype is a variation, the usual colour being identical with that of the female. The holotype and allotype are in the Macleay Museum. SYSTOECHUS CINCTIVENTRIS, N. Sp. 6d. Head mainly greyish; occiput little convex, clothed with dense, equal, pale yellow hairs, which become more whitish below; ocellar tubercle black, with long pale hairs; eyes contiguous for a short distance below the ocellar tubercle, their upper facets enlarged; frontal triangle small, clothed with appressed, pale golden yellow tomentum, the median groove very distinct; face clothed with short, dense white hairs, stained yellowish below antennae, the moustache white, not BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 425 extending to the white beard below. Antennae black, as long as the head, the first segment with long, very pale yellowish hairs, the third about one and one-half times the length of the first two segments together, of similar shape to that of pallidus; the style spine-like, and placed somewhat subapically. Proboscis black, slender, about three times the length of the oral opening; palpi slender, one-fourth the length of the proboscis. Thorax dark brownish-black, greyish laterally, clothed with appressed golden scales and dense, short and equal yellowish hairs which, when viewed from the front, appear paler laterally; pleurae and breast grey, white haired, the meso- pleural tuft faintly yellow above; scutellum black, with golden scales and thin, pale golden bristles; squamae pale with a pale golden fringe; halteres with pale yellow knobs. Abdomen somewhat obconical, black, with yellow lateral areas to each of the segments, those on the sides of the second and third segments very large, the black colour thus appearing as a broad dorsal stripe, continued from base to apex, and denticulated at the borders of the segments, this denticulation being particularly noticeable on the second, third and fourth segments; dorsum clothed with golden scales and dense pale yellowish hairs; bristles very weak, pale, forming complete rows on the hind borders of the segments; venter grey, clothed with pale yellowish tomentum and pale bristly hairs. Legs mainly pale yellow, coxae grey, apical tarsi of fore and middle legs and all hind legs darker, clothed with white scales, the coxae and femora below with long white hairs; hind femora with about six long spines below; pulvilli pale. Wings yellowish at base and along fore margin to apex of cell Sc, the remainder of the wing pale smoky, clearer at apex and along the hind margin; venation normal. Holotype ¢, Chinchilla, Q’land, 14th November, B. Smith; length of body, 8 mm.; of wing, 7-5 mm. 9. Frons broad with dark golden scales and black hairs; wings clearer than in male. Allotype 9°, Brisbane, Q’land, 8th August, 1927, J. Mann. Paratypes: 6 gd, Chinchilla, Q’land, 14th November, 1926, B. Smith; 1 ¢, Chinchilla, January, 1928, A. P. Dodd; 1 g, Goondiwindi, January, 1928, F. Roberts. This species is very similar to pallidus, but may be distinguished by the brighter pubescence, the white hairs of the face, the larger pale yellowish lateral areas of the abdomen, and by the clearer infuscation of the wing. The holotype and allotype are in the Queensland Museum. SYSTOECHUS LEUCOPYGUS v. d. Wulp. Systoechus leucopygus, v.d. Wulp. Notes Leyden Mus., vii, 1883, 86; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 70. Nigricans, flavo-hirtus, mento, pectore anoque albo-hirtus; antennis rostroque nigris; pedibus luteis; alis cinereis, basi et costa testaceis; male, long 103 mm. General appearance like a European species of Bombylius. Blackish, covered with a very dense yellow pilosity, which becomes fulvous on the collar and has silvery-white reflections on the last abdominal segment; front small, trigonal; face short, both with a sericeous pale yellow pile; beard and hairs on the breast and pleurae, white. Antennae black; the first segment cylindrical, the second short, the third a little longer than the previous joints together, subulate. Rostrum black, as long as the thorax. Legs yellow, with small bristles, those on the front 426 ‘A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, 1i, legs very short. Halteres reddish-yellow. Wings greyish, at the base and along the costa as far as two-thirds of its length with a brownish white tinge. A male from Adelaide (Felder). This species has not been recognized among the material examined. Genus Sisyromy1A White. Sisyromyia, White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1916, 197; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 70; 1923, 84. Genotype, Bombylius auratus, Walker, by original designation. Head very broad, about equal in breadth to the thorax; occiput somewhat flattened above, little convex below; eyes contiguous or almost so in the male, widely separated in the female; frontal triangle rather large; face very broad, little projecting between the eyes, slightly broadening to the chin; cheeks com- paratively broad. Antennae approximated at base, the first segment slender and much longer than the second, the third as long as or much longer than the first two together, somewhat varying in form, usually rather linear with a rounded apex with a minute apical style, and some long bristly hairs at the apex. Proboscis long, frequently thickened, with the labella sometimes much expanded; palpi slender, usually small. Thorax broad, slightly arched, with the postalar bristles very weak; scutellum broad and semicircular, with very long bristles or bristly hairs. Abdomen curved, usually short and very broad, equal in breadth to or broader than the thorax, with very long bristly hairs. Legs slender, the hind legs much longer, hind femora with two rows of strong spines beneath, one of the rows very short; spines on fore tibiae very short; femora with long hairs below. Wings with well developed lobes and alulae; R.., curved apically, at most to meet the costa at a right angle; cells R, and R, never divided; cell R; open; vein r-m placed well before the middle of cell mc, so that cells R and M are of an approximately equal length; cell Cu open. Range.—Australia. This genus is confined to Australia, and as far as is known contains six species, none of which is new. Nothing is known of their habits or life histories. Distribution.—Very few specimens of the various species have been collected, so the records of the habitat, etc., are rather scanty. New South Wales possesses three species, decorata, albavitta and aurata. The former, as far as the records show, is confined to that State, though it was originally described from Western Australia. The other two species are more widely distributed, albavitta occurring in Western Australia and Queensland and aurata in Western Australia and Tasmania. Of the remaining species, limbatus is known from South and Western Australia, brevirostris from Tasmania, and tetratricha from Western Australia, respectively. ‘ Key to the Species of Sisyromyia. TAO WINES SDOCLEG! so isssiscass SVs var cuc lees poi eu eVte Mali ecuions taste meets Sel Sees sedis limbata Bigot IVINS SH MOL ASPOLTO sce cis sue, iss we Coke Wea Rete Lots UNS VERE MIE Be Re are ope err ay she (ey 2 2eeLnonraxsencircled swith whiteshialrSmeer nie icin iene nena ee decorata Walker PY Dhoras: without such “white rains esis ces ates cree eo ah chee aa 3 3. Apex of abdomen with a thick tuft of black pubescence on each side .............. BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 427 4. Abdomen with a yellow or white central stripe ...................--++e+e+ee-- 5 /Naeloraneya \aldaowit a, Gerrmeyl Seema cocacccancccoesenuceeuouune brevirostris Macquart De HeUpeSCenCene Gl dene vellOw: .r..14 Hae e RO ee icin cots ch bian Hise teed ee aurata Walker HUI ESCEN CECA GLSIM a iterate oes act ate eRe PORE Beers ere ides UM seen slants albavitta Macquart SISYROMYIA LIMBATA (Bigot). Sparnopolius limbatus, Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France (7), lxi, 1892, 369.— Dischistus limbatus, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 69. 6. Head mainly grey, frons and upper portion of face rather darker; occiput dark brown above, clothed with dense, pale brown and some intermixed, longer black hairs, the hairs becoming paler below; eyes almost contiguous for a short distance below the ocellar tubercle; ocellar tubercle black, with some long black hairs; frons between the eyes exceedingly narrow, at its narrowest point being no wider than the fore ocellus; frontal triangle rather broad, clothed with appressed, pale shining pile; median groove distinct; face clothed with long, black, bristly and pale brown hairs, the latter becoming white on the cheeks and chin, and the former more or less encircling the pale brown hairs above. Antennae with the first two segments greyish, the third black; first segment with long black hairs, third longer by one-half than the first two together, constricted at base, some- what linear in shape, the apex with five or six long black bristly hairs; style very minute. Proboscis rather short and slender, the labella not much enlarged; palpi very small, hidden. Thorax dark brown, greyish laterally, clothed with short, dense, brownish, and some intermixed black hairs, the latter more apparent posteriorly; on each side there is a stripe of short dense white hairs, which extends for the full length above the wing insertions; pleurae and breast grey, white haired, mesopleural tuft brownish above; scutellum dark brown, with a basal band of appressed, silver- white hairs, which is contiguous on either side with the lateral stripes of the thorax; bristles brownish and black; squamae pale brown with a whitish fringe; halteres with yellow-brown knobs. Abdomen short and broad, not as long as its greatest width, and pointed apically; dark brown, clothed with pale brown hairs, very long and dense on the sides of the first and second segments; remaining segments with more apparent appressed, golden brown scales, and laterally with sparse, clear white tomentum, the whole bearing long thin black bristly hairs; from the second segment to the extreme apex, there extends a stripe of silver white scales; venter white haired, longer and stained brownish towards the apex. Legs somewhat yellowish, with grey coxae, and dark apical tarsi; femora with white scales, somewhat golden above, and short white and longer black hairs below; pulvilli pale. Wings yellow at base and along fore margin, the rest smoky, rather clearer at the apex and along the hind margin, containing six suffused spots, placed on the cross-veins between M and M,, mec and M,, on im, where it joins M;,,, near the origin of R, with R,,,, and more faintly on the curves of R.,, and R,; Rz., little curved, meeting the costa at an obtuse angle. ©. Frons extremely broad, clothed with long black bristly hairs, and some appressed pale scales. Length of body, 8 mm.; of wing, 7:2 mm. Hab.—South Australia: Port Augusta (August); Western Australia: Hradu. The description is taken from a solitary pair in the South Australian Museum. Neither the male nor female is in the best condition, and the colour of the hairs 428 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDABR, ii, of the face in both sexes is somewhat doubtful. In the male there are traces oi white hairs on the posterior part of the thorax. However, the species may easily be recognized by the encircling white stripe of the thorax, the white stripe of the abdomen in conjunction with the spotted wings. Hardy was uncertain of the position of this species, and placed it in the genus Dischistus. SISYROMYTA ALBAVITTA (Macquart). Bombylius albavitta, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 4, 1850, 117; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm.. 1921, 71; 1923, 85. 6. Head mainly grey, frons and upper part of face darker; occiput clothed with dense, short, reddish hairs above, much paler and rather shorter below; eyes separated by a very narrow streak, not broader than the fore ocellus; ocellar tubercle black with some long, black, bristly hairs; frontal triangle rather large, clothed with dense, appressed golden scales; face with golden pile and long, black, bristly hairs, the latter placed’ mainly above and close to the inner eye margins and immediately beneath the antennae. Antennae mainly black, the first two segments somewhat greyish; first segment with long black hairs, third constricted at base, broader medianly, longer than the first two segments together, with a minute apical style, and some long, black, bristly subapical hairs. Proboscis entirely black, rather stout, with expanded labella, about twice the length of the oral opening; palpi very slender, pale brown, about one-fourth, or little less, the length of the proboscis. Thorax black, clothed with shining appressed golden scales, and dense, short, equal, reddish hairs; pleurae and breast paler haired, the mesopleural tuft reddish; scutellum dark, with similar golden scales, longer reddish hairs, and very thin, reddish bristles or bristly hairs; squamae pale brown with a pale reddish fringe; halteres with reddish-brown knobs. Abdomen curved, short and broad, usually hardly as long as its greatest width, blackish, clothed with appressed golden scales and long reddish hairs, very dense apically and laterally; bristles very long, black, with some paler bristles inter- mixed; from the second segment to the apex there runs a rather broad median stripe of shining whitish scales; venter densely pale haired, reddish apically. Legs reddish, coxae grey, clothed with reddish scales; femora below and coxae with long pale and some black hairs; hind .femora with long strong spines below; middle femora with few spines below. Wings somewhat smoky, yellowish at base and along fore margin for about two-thirds the length; R.,., curved apically so as to meet the costa at an obtuse angle; cell me very long and rather narrow. °. Frons very broad, clothed with golden scales and long black bristly hairs. Length of body, 10-11:-5 mm.; of wing, 11:5-14 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Mt. Tambourine (January); N. S. Wales: Mt. Kosciusko, Sydney (February); W. Australia: King George’s Sound. This species was regarded by Hardy as a form of aurata. The species appears to me to be distinct, the differences lying in the palpi, the curvature of the vein R,,, and of course, in the colour of the pubescence. In albavitta, the palpi are rather shorter and more slender, not being swollen apically as in auwrata;: in aurata Rs, is always so curved apically as to meet the costa at a right angle, whereas in albavitta, the curvature is much less, the vein meeting the costa at an obtuse angle. BY F. H. 8S. ROBERTS. 429 I have seen in the collection of the Queensland Museum a large specimen very Similar in colouration to albavitta. In this specimen the proboscis is of an out- standing length, being about as long as the fly itself. Its habitat is given as King George’s Sound, W. Australia, and in all probability it is a distinct species. SISYROMYIA DECORATA (Walker). Bombylius decoratus, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii, 1849, 291.—Sisyromyia decoratus, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 71.—Bombylius scutellaris, Thomson, Hug. Resa, Dipt., 1868, 488; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 71. 9. Head grey, the face with a narrow brown horizontal stripe immediately below antennae, and including their base; occiput clothed with pale reddish hairs above and on each side of the vertex, much paler laterally, almost whitish below; frons very broad at vertex, with erect, black, bristly hairs, on each side and above, and some appressed golden scales; face clothed with short pale golden hairs, with erect, black, bristly hairs encircling, and placed near the inner eye margins and immediately below the antennae; cheeks and chin white haired. Antennae with the basal segments greyish, the third black; third segment constricted at base, somewhat linear in shape, with a minute apical style, and some long, black, bristly, apical hairs. Proboscis black, slender, the labella little enlarged, a little more than twice the length of the oral opening; palpi very small and slender, apex with longer hairs. Thorax grey, with two broad dark brown admedian stripes and a narrow median stripe, so that the thorax appears dark brown with front and sides grey, and two narrow admedian grey stripes, the dark brown portions clothed with appressed reddish golden scales and short, dense, reddish hairs, the grey, with white scales and short, white hairs, the thorax thus appearing with reddish hairs, with two lateral and two admedian white stripes; pleurae and breast grey, white haired; mesopleural tuft reddish above; scutellum blackish, with a basal stripe of white hairs, contiguous with the lateral white stripes of the thorax, otherwise clothed with reddish hairs and provided with long, thin, black, bristly hairs; squamae with a sparse pale fringe; halteres with somewhat yellowish knobs. Abdomen short and very broad, about as long as its greatest width, the basal segment with short, erect, white hairs; remainder with appressed dark golden scales, white scales laterally, and reddish hairs, the latter forming reddish tufts on the sides, intermixed with longer, black, bristly hairs, and some pale, almost whitish hairs; apex with two long tufts of reddish and intermixed black hairs on each side; bristles very long, thin, black; from base to apex there runs a median stripe of silver white scales; venter with pale appressed hairs, longer and reddish and intermixed with black, bristly hairs laterally. Legs somewhat brownish, coxae grey, hind legs darker, almost reddish; femora appear clothed with pale golden scales, which are intermixed with white scales, more so beneath; femora beneath with long white and longer black hairs. Wings with costal cell yellow, dark brown from base to apex, and for nearly half the breadth, the colour being somewhat suffused apically; inner margin of coloured area very irregular, occupying all cell M, one-half of cell R;, thence across to the bifurcation of R, and R,, leaving a large clear area in cell R,; R:,, curved as to meet costa at an obtuse angle; R, with an appendix. Length of body 9 mm.; of wing, 10 mm. Hab.—N. S. Wales: Medlow Bath and Sydney (October). 430 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, ii, The description is taken from a solitary female. The thorax is rather rubbed and the four white stripes are only traceable. SISYROMYIA AURATA (Walker). Bombylius auratus, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii, 1849, 289.—-Sisyromyia auratus, White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1916, 198; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 71; 1923, 85—Bombylius rutilus, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., 1849, 289.— Sisyromyia rutilus, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 72—Bombylius crassi- rostris, Macquart, Dipt. Haot., suppl. 4, 1850, 117—Bombylius loewii, Jaennicke, Abh. Senck. Nat. Ges., vi, 1867, 345.—Bombylius pycnorhynchus, Thomson, Hug. Resa, Dipt., 1868, 486; Bombylius lobalis, Thomson, Hug. Resa, Dipt., 1868, 487. 6. Head mainly grey; occiput clothed with dense, short, golden yellow hairs, somewhat paler below; eyes separated by a narrow streak, not broader than the fore ocellus; ocellar tubercle with some long black, bristly hairs; frontal triangle rather large, clothed with dense, appressed, golden yellow scales; median groove distinct; face densely clothed with yellow hairs, paler on the cheeks and chin, with numerous long, erect, black, bristly hairs, which extend from immediately beneath the antennae along the inner eye margins for about two-thirds the length of the cheeks; mouth opening long and somewhat narrow, its borders brownish. Antennae black, the first segment with long black hairs, the third, much longer than the first and second together, strap-shaped, with a minute apical style and some long, black, bristly hairs a little below the apex. Proboscis black, rather stout, labella much enlarged; palpi rather stout, somewhat swollen apically about one-third the length of the proboscis. Thorax black, clothed with appressed golden scales and short, dense, golden yellow hairs, with a few black hairs intermixed; pleurae and breast grey with dense pale golden yellow hairs, the mesopleural tuft somewhat darker above; scutellum brownish, darker basally, with appressed golden scales and long yellow and intermixed black, bristly hairs; squamae brownish with a pale golden yellow fringe; halteres with brownish-red knobs. Abdomen very short and broad, usually muck curved, rounded and at most as long as its greatest width; dorsum with appressed golden scales and long golden yellow hairs, longer and denser laterally, the whole with long, black, bristly hairs; extending the full length is a broad median stripe of bright yellow scales, the golden scales rather sparse on each side and more confined to the lateral portions of the segments; venter densely paler haired, somewhat darker laterally. Legs mainly reddish-yellow or yellowish, the apical tarsi of fore and middle legs and all tarsi of hind legs dark; middle femora with about six, hind femora with ten to twelve stout bristles beneath; spines on fore tibiae rather small, well developed on posterior tibiae. Wings somewhat smoky, with the base and the fore margin for about two- thirds its length yellow; R.,, much curved at apex, so that it meets the costa at a right angle; cell me rather-long and narrow. 9. Frons very broad, clothed with golden scales and long black, bristly hairs, otherwise similar to male. Length of body, 9-12 mm.; of wing, 12-15:5 mm. Hab.—N. S. Wales: Barrington Tops, and Mt. Kosciusko (February), National Park (1st March, 1926); W. Australia: Swan River (December); Tasmania: Zeehan (January). To the synonymy erected by Hardy, I have added Bombylius rutilus Walk. BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 431 SISYROMYIA BREVIROSTRIS (Macquart). Bombylius brevirostris, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 4, 1850, 119; (?) Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt., 1850, 202.—Sisyromyia brevirostris, White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1916, 199; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 71; 1923, 85.—Systoechus eulabiatus, Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France (7), \xi, 1892, 366. This species is not represented in the material under revision, but as White determined and described it, I am rewriting his description. “g. Face covered with pale yellow tomentum, front with pale golden pubes- cence. Proboscis black, nearly three times the length of the head, with the tip slightly inflated. Antennae black, the first joint about three times the length of the second, and bearing long yellow hairs, the third about equal in length to the first two together, of a slender strap shape, with rounded style like apex. Eyes joined. Thorax and abdomen of a dull black ground colour, which in fresh specimens is entirely covered with very long, furry, yellow pubescence, but this becomes very easily detached. Legs very slender, femora black, with pale yellow pubescence, anterior and middle tibiae red, posterior tibiae brown, the whole bearing minute bristles; tarsi black. Wings hyaline, with the fore margin brownish. Female resembles the male, but the eyes are very widely separated, and the pubescence of the face and front paler. This species seems to be very local, but is probably common where it occurs. The males hover in the air in the bright sunshine at a height of some five feet from the ground, but should a cold wind arise they disappear completely. It occurs during February”. Length, 3, 6-7 mm.; 9, 6:5 mm. Hab—Bagdad, Tasmania. White has fortunately illustrated the wing of this species, and the venation is typical of the genus. The species is peculiar in that the third antennal segment does not possess the apical bristly hairs and the abdomen the central dorsal stripe so characteristic of the other four species. It is unfortunate that the species is not represented in any collection, as it is probable that brevirostris belongs to the genus Sparnopolius, which is very closely allied to Sisyromyia. The venation of the two genera is identical but Sparnopolius may be distinguished by the differently shaped antennae, the third segment being devoid of the apical hairs, so charac- teristic of Sisyromyia, and the more or less conical abdomen. SISYROMYIA TETRATRICHA (Walker). Bombylius tetratrichus, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii, 1849, 291.—Sisyromyia tetratrichus, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 72; 1923, 84. There is a single specimen of this species in the collection of the Queensland Museum, a female. This specimen is in a very bad condition, but an examination shows it to be clothed mainly with yellowish hairs, the abdomen with a tuft of black hairs on each side, and the wings greyish, faintly brownish at the base and along the fore margin for about two-thirds the length. The habitat is given as Hamel, West Australia. SISYROMYIA PRIMOGENITA (Walker). Bombylius primogenitus, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii, 1849, 292—Sisyromyia primogenitus, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 72; 1923, 85. K 432 A REVISION OF THE’ AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDABR, ii, Mas. Niger, pilis ferrugineis vestitus, capite pilis albis fulvis nigrisque ornato, antennis nigris, pedibus fulvis, femoribus basi nigris, tarsis piceis, alis-subcinereis basi et ad costam fuscis. oe Body black; head rather broad, clothed with tawny hairs behind, with black hairs on the crown, and with white hairs on the front and beneath; eyes red; mouth rather shorter than the chest; feelers black; second joint not one-third the length of the first; third joint very slightly tapering from the base to the tip, longer than the first and second; chest and breast clothed with bright ferruginous hairs; breast clothed with hoary hairs; abdomen clothed with black hairs at the tip; legs tawny and clothed with short tawny bristles; thighs towards the base and hips biack, clothed with long white hairs; feet piceous towards the tips; wings pale grey, brown at the base and along the fore border to the tip, and for one- third the breadth; wing ribs and veins black, the latter black towards the tips; poisers bright yellow. Length of the body, 3 lines; of the wings, 6 lines. Swan River. The above species has not been recognized. White compared it with Macquart’s brevirostris, remarking that the costa was more broadly brown and did not extend to the apex of the wing. Genus ANASTOECHUS Osten Sacken. Anastoechus, Osten Sacken, Bull. Unit. States Geol. Surv., iii, 1877, 251. Genotype, Bombylius nitidulus, F., by original designation. Head about as broad as thorax; face not projecting between the eyes, the mouth borders, the cheeks and the eyes being almost on the same level, clothed with dense, long and erect hairs, which conceal its outlines and the basal segments of the antennae. Eyes small, separated in the male by an interval at the vertex; a distinct line separates the upper and larger facets from the smaller and lower ones. Antennae usually longer than the head, the first segment very long, the second short, the third more distinctly attenuated than in Systoechus, the dilatation being removed further towards the middle, the slender apical half more attenuated. Thorax and abdomen similar to Systoechus. Wings with the venation of Systoechus, but the cell me is very much broader in relation to its length. Range.— World-wide. I have had to content myself with describing three species of this genus. In the material examined there are possibly at least five species which fall into this genus, but the material is neither sufficient in numbers nor in good enough condition for any further descriptions. They are all closely allied and somewhat difficult to separate, hence the need of more material. Distribution.—Two species, perspicuus and annexus, appear confined to Western Australia, and one, bifrons, to New South Wales, though this latter species possibly occurs in Queensland also. Of the species not yet described, all are from Western Australia. Key to the Species of Anastoechus. 1. Body clothed mainiy with white pubescence ..................... perspicuus, n. sp. Body clothed with brown or golden pubescence .............5.....0.eeseceeerssae 2 2. Pleurae and breast mainly white haired; pubescence bright yellow or golden, a small S012 Sir laren ait CbotGin sic ois Sar Golo oiatoln eiclerd doo Sdn Una Ocha mealn bifrons Walker Pleurae and breast mainly brown haired; pubescence mainly brown or tawny, a MEGIUMIM=SIZEA SPECIES. Vast S ees Ee RO oO eee ee annexus, N. Sp. BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 433 ANASTOECHUS PERSPICUUS, 0. Sp. 6. Head mainly dark grey; occiput, more convex laterally and below, clothed with silvery scales and dense, long, white hairs; frons very narrow between the closely approximated eyes, its width at the narrowest point hardly equal to the fore ocellus; frontal triangle covered with white pile; face clothed with dense, erect, white hairs, encircling which is a row of black hairs, which are continued along the inner eye margins to about the level of the upper mouth borders. Proboscis black, rather short, with little enlarged labella; palpi hidden. Ocellar tubercle black, with some long, black hairs. Antennae entirely black, the first segment with long black hairs, the third about as long as the first and second together, with a minute apical style. Thorax blackish, clothed with dense white hairs, with which are intermixed many bristly, black hairs; pleurae dark grey, with similar white hairs; scutellum dark grey, with white hairs and long, whitish bristles; squamae pale brown with a long yellowish fringe; halteres with yellow knobs. Abdomen black, somewhat oval, clothed with dense white hairs, longest and most dense laterally and apically; bristles pale, not conspicuous; venter greyish, white pollinose. Legs mainly black, the coxae greyish, the apices of the femora narrowly reddish, and the tibiae yellowish, clothed with white scales, the femora with long white hairs beneath, the scales of the tibiae appearing golden against the yellow ground colour. G Wings brownish at the base and along the fore margin to the apex of cell Sc, the colour descending in a curve to the apex of Cu, so that a little more than the basal half is suffused with brown, the remainder being sub-hyaline. ; Length of body, 7-5 mm.; of wing, 6 mm. Holotype male, Beverley, Western Australia; paratypes, 2 males, Capel River. W. Australia, W. D. Dodd. The holotype is in the South Australian Museum. ANASTOECHUS BIFRONS (Walker). Choristus bifrons, Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt., 1850, 198, Pl. v, fig. 5—Systoechus bifrons, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 70.- 6. Head dark grey; occiput clothed with shining yellow hairs above, becoming white to the dense beard below; frons very narrow between the eyes, at its narrowest point hardly equal in breadth to the fore ocellus; ocellar tubercle black, with some long black hairs; frontal triangle rather large, clothed with dense, erect, black hairs, which are continued along the inner eye margins almost to the chin below; face covered with dense, erect, white hairs. Proboscis rather stout, black, with enlarged labella; palpi short and slender, black. Antennae entirely black, the first segment with long black hairs, the third about as long as the first and second together, with a minute apical style. Thorax black, covered with dense, yellow or brownish hairs, rather darker laterally; scutellum with similar hairs and long, thin, pale bristles; pleurae and breast white haired, the mesopleural tuft yellowish above; squamae dark, with a pale yellow fringe; halteres yellow. Abdomen black, covered with long yellow hairs, densest laterally and with intermixed paler hairs apically, so that the apical segments have a whitish sheen; venter white pollinose. Legs mainly black, the femora white scaled, the tibiae with golden scales. 434 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, 1i, Wings suffused with dark brown from the base, the colour diluting, leaving the apex broadly sub-hyaline; R.,, meets the costa at right angles. Length of body, 6-5 mm.; of wing, 6 mm. Hab.—N. S. Wales: National Park (September). Two males collected by A. P. Dodd at Morven, Queensland, in September, are probably the same species, but the pubescence is much lighter in colour, being very pale yellowish. The female is unknown. ANASTOECHUS ANNEXUS, N. sp. g. Head with face and frons blackish, running to grey along the cheeks to the chin; occiput clothed with long brown and intermixed whitish hairs above, and short, clear white hairs to. the dense, white beard beiow; laterally and contiguous with the hind eye-margins are some silvery scales; frons very narrow between the closely approximated eyes, at its narrowest point hardly equal in breadth to the fore ocellus; ocellar tubercle with some long, black hairs; frontal triangle rather large, clothed with dense, long and erect black hairs, which are continued along the inner eye-margins almost to the chin; face clothed with white hairs, of an almost equal length and density to the beard below. Antennae entirely black, the first segment about three times the length of the globular second, clotlfed with long, black hairs, the third about as long as the first and second together, with a minute apical style. Proboscis long and slender, black; palpi very thin, and small, black. Thorax black, covered with short, dense, tawny hairs, and appressed, shining, golden scales, the hairs viewed from above appearing paler laterally; extending from the postalar callus to just above the wing base are some whitish hairs; bristles pale brown, not conspicuous; scutellum blackish, with similar hairs and long, thin, pale bristles; pleurae clothed with brown hairs, which become whitish from beneath the wing base to the base of the fore coxa. Abdomen black, not very broad, clothed with long tawny and some intermixed paler hairs, the latter predominant apically, so that the apical segments have a whitish sheen; bristles black, and pale brownish to whitish; venter black, with appressed white scales and long, black, bristly hairs. Legs mainly black, the femora with golden scales above and white scales and long pale hairs below; tibiae with golden scales; pulvilli pale. Wings with the basal half dark brown, the apical half subhyaline, the edge of the colour extending from the apex of the cell C to the apex of the vein Cu,, is gradually diluted, leaving the apical half of the wing somewhat smoky: R,,, meets the costa at a right angle. Length of body, 10-5 mm.; of wing, 10 mm. Holotype male, Hradu, W. Australia, 8th September, 1926, EH. W. Ferguson. Paratypes, 2 males, with similar data. There are also 4 males from Merredin, W. Australia, in the collection of L. J. Newman. The holotype is in the colleetion of the Macleay Museum. Genus Bompytius Linnaeus. Bombylius, Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., Wdit. x, 1758, 606; White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1916, 192; Hardy, Prec. Roy. Soc) Tasm., 19215 725 1923) 84. Genotype, Bombylius major Linn., by designation of Latreille. BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 435 Head small, but not as broad as thorax, semicircular in shape and closely applied to the thorax; occiput slightly convex above, more or less concave below, eyes usually contiguous for varying distance in the male, wide apart in the female. i Frons much reduced by the contiguous eyes in the male, very broad in the female, the median groove usually distinctly apparent; face generally prominent between the eyes, with dense, short pubescence and with a well marked facial groove. Ocelli distinct, placed on a large, rounded tubercle. Proboscis long, usually rather slender, with small labella; palpi slender and short. Antennae usually longer than head and placed well above the middle of its height; first segment much longer than the second, the third longer than the first and second together, slender, of varying shapes, usually constricted at base, then somewhat attenuated; style usually terminal, and very distinct, and sometimes possessed of a few bristly hairs. Thorax oval and short, arched, with dense furry pubescence and long inter- mixed bristly hairs; notopleural bristles usually strong and well developed, though somewhat short; scutellum broad, semicircular in shape, clothed like the thorax, the bristles longer and more conspicuous; squamae not so well developed, with a hairy fringe of varying density; halteres elongate and slender. Abdomen rounded or oval, short and usually very broad, composed of seven visible segments, and clothed with dense, furry pubescence and long bristly hairs, usually arranged in rows on the posterior borders of the segments. Legs slender, the hind legs elongate; tibiae with distinct rows of bristles and a circlet of terminal spines or spurs; femora usually with strong spines below, few on the fore femora and numerous on the hind femora; pulvilli distinct; empodium minute. Wings with well developed lobe and alula; Sc and R, contiguous to near the apex of Sc; R.,, usually curved, the curve never large, or the vein recurrent; cell R,; closed well before the wing margin; r-m placed at or beyond the middle of the cell mc, so that the cell R is always longer than the cell M; cell Cu always open; cells R, and R, never with interradial veins. Range.—World-wide. G. H. Hardy (1921) catalogued eleven species as belonging to the genus, six of which he determined, three being placed as synonyms, the remaining five not being recognized in the material under examination. The material before me is fortunately greater in quantity, and I have been able to separate seventeen distinct species, six of which are regarded as new, and three in too damaged a condition to describe. Of the old descriptions I have been unable to place three, viz., nanus. albicinctus and consobrinus. The species of Bombylius constitute some of the most beautiful of our Diptera with their multicoloured, shining scales, soft, coloured hairs and pictured wings. The adults are flower frequenters and are most. plentiful in spring and eariy summer, though some species are on the wing as late as February and March. Of their life histories nothing is known, though their larval hosts are probably as in other countries, Hymenoptera, chiefly bees. Disiribution.—Only one species, viduus, appears confined to Tasmania, the other two species known from there, tenuicornis and chrysendetus, extending to New South Wales and Queensland respectively. The only records of pulchellus and proprius are from New South Wales, whilst succandidus, bellus, dulcis, aureolatus and pictipennis occur in Queensland also; australianus ranges from Victoria to Queensland; hilaris is the only species of which I have any record from Western 436 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, Ii, Australia, its eastern and northern limit being New South Wales; both rubriventris and tenwirostris are apparently confined to Queensland. Key to the Species of Bombylius. 1. Abdomen yellow or reddish with a median, black, denticulated stripe ............ SAIde es eee cas te ae aweneerinte eM ANTS r ey cath PRN ae LUA os SUS Spa) wl che eee TLE DIM VERETIS MEI EOL AN oxcloroavern IMGIE rNOK i? Op TACHI GouscccnnveodgaddscoonsdnooGoouso soo ooo uOoODGOODS 2 2. Wings hyaline and glistening, at most tinged brown at the base and along the LORE VMAL OT scan) aheweedn oosuene RE een te Wainy Brace cue ere Soa succandidus, n. sp. Wings subhyaline or smoky with the base and fore margin brown, or hyaline with about one-half their depth brown .......................+05. SES oA ecto aaa See 3 3. Thorax with whitish or yellowish lateral stripes ............6.........-.0..-.<- 4 (MGA. VTOME GOON SUMDGS oocccdodoooodsbbouc@eoncoslobscasenadcoovoes poses 7 4. Abdomen with a central stripe of white scales ................. aureolatus Walker Abdomen devoid Of SUGCHKaARStPipes Wen okies ects custo late aietone ica acmeic ries ae eae 5 5. Wings subhyaline or smoky, the colour gradually diluting; abdomen without white SCBICS oh. ay cyte ltaatas Von av orancnst Ptcoe ee SIT UOT Ge Reo Mois Gee S tn ro australianus Bigot Wings divided into definite brown and hyaline halves; abdomen with white ISCAS So tliese vanes et aiie eam Me Cate eRe at Sete) IG A LENG a ALAS SE ST BURRESS otras) eS RE Rae et Wd gic ren 6 6. Pleurae and breast. of male white haired; abdomen with lateral tufts of black and reddish hairs; the brown of the wings with at least three hyaline spots ...... Scns Alt ka AEE CMO Cee D. otcna Cea act ACI RM ute ee MemCy certain CRAP o ia Gee ct on URAR ED pictipennis Macquart Pleurae and breast of male red haired; abdomen without black lateral tufts; the brown of the wings with a single, definite, hyaline spot .......... hilaris Walker (eA bdomenmwithwawcentralestripenotiscaleSiarm een erent ere nine eee 8 Abdomen without a central stripe of scales ...................-.0 cee eee eee eee 9 8." SPuUbescen Cem male mecwen sce icine sevens teueatere latencies cneUees sine Soe ee ReRERG oh oe tenwirostris, nN. sp. IPUDESCEM CEES Iiigia ys espace a ercertey a aeecet elise ee cca ee tane Pn SO ET RUSS HE a aol auto nite pulchellus, n. sp. 9. Abdomen with a basal band of white hairs and some white scales and hairs Ech Op Care Nh eeeewee yee Cr Oes ciel eiorcotEbeat ar cttr ia chaste cee Meee Gd eee eM iter rcN ATTRA yh) GRR AES, Gack fica 10 Abdomen with yellowish or brownish hairs only ..................2+22-.-2+00- iat 10. Wings dark brown at base and along fore margin; basal two-thirds of cell Cu GOLOUTEG! Fs Shae ee Saha ta aye aces DIG ce oat ogee eras een tes Lay ctieitby sttoiey abocaeateel seu ertomeniste decane duleis, n. sp.” Wings light brown at base and along fore margin; cell Cu almost clear ............ eRe begs ones Saud atl yay SAS oo ih matey eae sh SRa Rasa seed Hike SUR UT uate ANS CHa ancie Ac ateu aires TaD CLLALS TSS ie Pubescence ibrightyecllow, or coldene enn ee oe eee 12 Pubescence. tawny tOn? DLOWMUSH ose sos seen eee ee Aare ares tes aon cee estreateerae ore 13 12. Wings deep brown at the base and along the fore margin, the brown area distinctly marked off from the remainder of the wing .................... proprius, N. sp. Wings light brown at the base and along the fore margin, there being no such demarcairlonmo tauh em br: Oiwalieclc C Clu rme nena n eer chrysendetus White 13. Face very broad, about the width of two eyes ...................... viduus Walker Face not so broad, about the width of one eye .............. tenwicornis Macquart BOMBYLIUS PROPRIUS, 0. SD. 6. Head mainly dark grey; occiput somewhat darker above, clothed with short, dense, reddish hairs, which become longer, more sparse, and whitish on the chin; eyes contiguous from immediately below the ocellar tubercle for about one-half the length of the frons, their upper facets distinctly enlarged; frontal triangle rather small, with a not very distinct median groove; face clothed with numerous, erect, black bristly hairs and some shorter, golden hairs which are more or less confined to the region of the mouth borders; ocellar tubercle black, with some long, black, bristly hairs. Proboscis black, slender and rather short; palpi small, black. Antennae entirely black, the first segment with long black hairs, the second about one-half the length of the first, with short, sparse, black hairs, the third longer than the first and second together, slightly broadening medianly, thence gradually tapering to the apex; style small, slender. Thorax black, clothed with dense, short and equal, reddish hairs, with some intermixed red and pale golden bristly hairs, the whole seen from the front with BY F. H. S. ROBER''S. 437 a golden, tint; scutellum black, clothed with reddish hairs and bearing long black and pale yellow bristles; pleurae and breast dark grey; mesopleural tuft reddish with some black hairs intermixed, the hairs of the pleurae and breast much paler; squamae dark, with a short, pale reddish fringe; halteres black knobbed. Abdomen. broad and short, black,.as broad as the thorax and about as. long as broad, clothed with dense, pale golden or yellowish scales, and on the sides with dense, long, reddish hairs, somewhat paler apically, these reddish hairs being very conspicuous on the basal segment; bristles long and black, with a few. intermixed pale golden; venter blackish, clothed with yellow appressed hairs, reddish laterally. Legs pale yellowish-brown, the coxae dark grey,, densely clothed. with pale golden scales, the femora with long black hairs below; spines conspicuous on hind femora below, also present on middle femora, but not so apparent. Wings with base and fore margin to a little past the apex of R.,, and for a little less than half their breadth, blackish, otherwise hyaline; inner margin of the colour rather sharply defined and extending from about the basal third of the axillary lobe to a little beyond the apex of R.,,; r-m placed a little beyond the middle of cell me. ; Holotype ¢, Blackheath, N.S.W., 15th Nov., 1919, G. H. Hardy. Length of body, 5 mm.; of wing, 6 mm. The holotype is unique and is in the Queensland Museum. BOMBYLIUS TENUIROSTRIS, N. SD. 6. Head mainly grey; occiput clothed above with short, dense, reddish hairs, becoming darker on each side and white on the chin below; eyes contiguous for a short distance, their upper facets enlarged but not much more so; ocellar tubercle black, bearing long black hairs; frontal triangle rather large, clothed with appressed golden scales and some short black hairs; face rather prominent, Somewhat narrow, clothed with dense, silver white hairs, and without any black, bristly hairs; mouth opening with very pale borders, rather narrow. Proboscis very long and slender, the labella by no means enlarged; palpi short, black. Antennae somewhat dark greyish, the first segment with long black hairs, the second about half the length of the first, the third rather longer than the first and second together, the basal two-thirds somewhat oval, the apical third slender and linear; style prominent. Thorax shining black, densely clothed with short, whitish and a few intermixed pale yellow hairs, and appressed golden scales; some short black hairs prominent on each side in front of the wing base and posteriorly; scutellum black, with similar scales and stronger black and some intermixed paler bristles; pleurae and breast dark grey, clothed with dark reddish hairs, the mesopleural tuft pale yellow or somewhat whitish above; squamae pale, with a conspicuous white fringe; halteres with yellowish knobs, much paler at the apices. Abdomen black, somewhat short, obconical in shape, not very broad, not as broad as thorax and longer than its greatest width; the basal segment is clothed with dense, short, erect, white hairs which extend on each side, otherwise clothed dorsally with black scales; each segment bears a narrow band of golden scales on its posterior border; extending from the second segment to the apex there is a median stripe of similar scales; laterally the second segment bears a tuft of dense black hairs, the remaining segments white hairs, which become less dense apically; the bristles form complete rows on the hind borders of the segments, pale in colour; venter white haired. 438 A REVISION OF ‘THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, ii, Legs mainly black, coxae dark grey and femora pale brownish at face; the femora and tibiae appear covered with black scales, over which some white scales appear to be placed, the latter very conspicuous at the bases of the femora. Wings subhyaline, the base and fore margin to the apex of Se, thence directly below through r-m and cells M and R, blackish, the outline of the colour suffused. Holotype ¢, Dunwich, Q’land, September, 1926, I. M. Mackerras. Length of body, 6 mm.; of wing, 6-5 mm. ®. Frons with golden scales and black bristly hairs. Thorax with two short admedian stripes, which extend posteriorly for a short distance only; pleurae and breast white haired, the white hairs extending up on the dorsum to form a small area in front of the wing base. Allotype 9, Dunwich, Q’land, September, 1926, I. M. Mackerras. Length of body, 5-5 mm.; of wing, 6-5 mm. In the female the scales of the thorax appear to form three distinct stripes, the outer ones being white tomentose anteriorly, thence extending in a curve to the postalar calli, the median stripe being somewhat elongate, triangular in shape, and is widened basally to meet the two outer stripes. In the male the scales appear confined to the median part of the thorax, but the extent and appearance of the scales depend on the condition of the specimen. The holotype and allotype are in the Macleay Museum. BOMBYLIUS SUCCANDIDUS, Nn. Sp. 6. Head mainly grey; occiput blackish above, clothed with dense, short, whitish hairs, those behind the vertex, for some distance on either side, stained pale yellowish. Eyes contiguous from immediately below the ocellar tubercle tor somewhat less than half the length of the frons, their upper facets distinctly enlarged; frontal triangle with a distinct median groove and clothed with appressed, shining, yellow pile; face rather long and almost perpendicular below antennae, clothed with dense, soft, white hairs which are continued to the chin below to form a short and sparse beard; ocellar tubercle with some long pale yellow hairs; mouth opening rather short with pale yellowish borders. Proboscis black and slender; palpi hidden. Antennae about as long as head, black, the first segment with long dense white hairs, the third longer than the first and second together, linear, slightly curved apically and provided with a distinct and rather elongate style. Thorax black, clothed with short, dense, very pale yellow or whitish hairs, and appressed shining scales, which have bronze, violet, and greenish reflections, the whole seen from above appearing almost white laterally, and from the front, the hairs of the dorsum seeming to form two short admedian whitish stripes, which in the specimen before me extend for about one-quarter the length of the thorax; pleurae and breast grey, clothed with dense white hairs; mesopleural tuft slightly yellowish above, more so beneath the wing insertions; scutellum black, clothed like the thorax and with numerous very thin, pale bristles: halteres with darkened knobs; squamae dark with a long, pale yellowish fringe. Abdomen short, not as broad as the thorax and somewhat longer than its own greatest width; the basal segment possesses a band of dense, erect and equal, white hairs which become yellowish beneath the scutellum; the remaining segments are clothed with reflective scales, similar to those of the thorax, the violet reflections predominating; laterally the hairs are long and white, but on the BY F. H. 8S. ROBERTS. 439 second segment they are very dense and black; venter mainly white haired, the hairs on the sides of the second and third segments.being somewhat yellowish. Legs mainly. black, the fore and middle femora yellowish at base, the hind femora with basal half yellowish,-clothed with white scales, the femora with long white hairs below; tarsi with short yellow hairs. Wings clear hyaline, faintly brown at the base and along the fore margin to the apex of the vein R,, the colour being dilated from the base to tinge the basal half of cell R,. Holotype ¢, Warialda, N. S. Wales, 30th September, 1927, A. P. Dodd. Length of body, 5 mm.; of wing, 5-2 mm. Paratypes: 2 g, Biniguy, N. S. Wales, 19th January, 1924, F. Roberts; 1 J. Chinchilla, Q’land, 3rd October, 1926, B. Smith. -The holotype is in the Queensland Museum. BOMBYLIUS BELLUS, Nn. Sp. 6. Head mainly grey; occiput slightly inflated and somewhat darker above, clothed with dense, short, white hairs, which are continued below to form a short sparse beard. Eyes contiguous from below the ocellar tubercle to near the antennal triangle, their upper facets little enlarged; ocellar tubercle with some long black hairs; frontal triangle clothed with golden scales and some short black hairs; face Somewhat darker between the upper mouth borders and antennae, clothed with dense, white and numerous black hairs, the former stained yellow immediately below the antennae and the latter more or less encircling the white hairs and extending from beneath the antennae for about half the length of the face; mouth opening not very broad, its borders pale yellow. Proboscis black, rather slender: palpi slender, about one-fourth the length of the proboscis, with some long hairs at the apex. Antennae longer than the head, black, the first segment with some long black hairs, the third longer than the first and second together, with a stout apical style, which bears one or two elongate, sub-apical, bristly hairs. Thorax black, clothed with appressed golden scales and dense, pale yellow hairs which, viewed from above, appear somewhat whitish on the sides, the whole with numerous pale and black, bristly hairs intermixed; scutellum black, with similar pubescence and numerous pale bristles; pleurae and breast grey, white haired, the mesopleural tuft yellowish above and beneath the wing base; squamae dark, with a short, pale yellow fringe; halteres with pale yellow knobs. Abdomen black, the basal segment somewhat greyish, rather broad, longer than broad, the first segment with dense, short, erect, white hairs, stained yellow - beneath the scutellum, and continued laterally to form clear white basal tufts; the remaining segments are clothed with appressed black scales, with bands of golden seales on their posterior borders; laterally the second and third segments bear alternate tufts of black and vellowish hairs, the latter being contiguous with the transverse bands of golden scales: the fourth segment, a tuft of black hairs anteriorly, white hairs posteriorly, the remaining segments also with white hairs, which become less dense and more appressed apically, and encroach on the dorsum to varying degrees; bristles black and intermixed pale yellowish; venter white haired with long pale bristly hairs. Legs: coxae black, anterior femora black, yellowish at base, middle and posterior femora yellow, black apically, tibiae brown, the posterior tibiae darker, the whole mainly white scaled, the femora partly golden scaled. 440 A REVISIGN OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIID4E, ii, _ Wings dull hyaline, brown at base and along the fore margin to the apex of the vein Sc, the brown descending to colour the cell M. ‘Holotype g, Gundamain, National Park, N. S. Wales, 14th Feb., 1926, I. M. Mackerras. Length of body, 5 mm.; of wing, 5:5 mm. ; ?. Frons broad, clothed with golden scales and black bristly hese: mesopleural tuft almost pure white, the hairs extending to surround the prealar bristles; body pubescence much lighter than in the male. Allotype °, Woodford, N. S. Wales, 14th November, 1926, I. M. Mackerras. Length of body, 6 mm.; of wing, 7-5 mm, Paratypes: 2 9, G. H. Hardy, Brisbane, September, 1923; January, 1927; 1 d, 2 9, F.. Roberts, Brisbane, 9th September, 1927; 1 9, J. Mann, Brisbane, 17th September, 1927; 1 ¢, A. J. Nicholson, Como, 2nd December, 1923. . The species varies somewhat in the colour of the legs. The fore femora are usually black with the bases yellow or reddish, but the colour may vary to yellow with the apices black; the middle femora are usually yellow with the apices black, but they sometimes possess a dark reddish tinge above. The holotype and allotype are in the Macleay Museum. ' BOMBYLIUS DULCIS, Nn. sp. ¢. Head mainly grey; occiput slightly convex, clothed with short, equal, and dense white hairs, continued below to form a thin white beard. Eyes contiguous for about half the length of the frons, their upper facets enlarged. Frontal triangle rather broad, bearing short, inconspicuous black hairs and some appressed golden seales; face rather prominent, clothed with dense, long, black, bristly hairs, with which are intermixed some short, whitish, or pale yellowish hairs, and some pale, golden scales; mouth opening not very long and rather narrow with pale borders; ocellar tubercle black, with some long, erect, black hairs. Proboscis about three times the length of the mouth opening, slender, palpi slender, about one-fourth the length of the proboscis, with some sparse hairs. Antennae dark greyish, not as long as the head, the first segment with some long black hairs, the second not quite half the length of the first, the third longer than the first and second together, slightly broadening for the basal third, thence gradually tapering to the apex; style distinct and rather elongate, about one-eighth the length of the third segment, with one or two short, subapical bristly hairs. Thorax deep black, clothed with short, dense and equal pale, dull brown hairs and appressed golden scales, and with numerous black hairs intermixed, especially posteriorly and laterally; postalar bristles extremely weak, black, and rather short; seutellum black, similarly clothed, but with longer and more conspicuous bristles, much paler in colour; pleurae and breast dark grey, clothed with somewhat golden hairs, the mesopleural tuft more reddish, with some intermixed black hairs; squamae blackish with a short white fringe; halteres with yellow knobs. Abdomen very broad and short, not as long as broad, and about as broad as the thorax; first segment with numerous erect white hairs, which extend laterally, and are yellowish beneath the scutellum; these hairs appear continued over the anterior border of the second segment, but are longer and more appressed, very thin and stained yellowish medianly; remaining segments with black scales, their posterior borders with bands of golden scales, not so conspicuous apically; laterally the second and third segments bear dense, long, black hairs, pale golden where in contact with the golden dorsal bands; fourth segment with black hairs on its anterior border only, from thence to the apex the BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 441 hairs being white, encroaching to some extent on the dorsum, especially on the sides of the fourth and fifth segments; bristles in complete rows, black; venter pale haired, with some golden and white scales and white hairs, and long inter- mixed pale golden and black hairs laterally. Legs: coxae, apices of femora, and apical tarsi, blackish; otherwise brownish, clothed with golden scales, the femora beneath and at base white haired, femora also appear to possess some white scales above; middle femora with about four, and hind femora with about twelve spines beneath. Wings dull hyaline, the base and fore margin to a little past the apex of R,, deep brown, the colour descending to colour all cell M, half Cu, thence across to near the apex of R,, its inner margin somewhat suifused. Holotype g, Westwood, Q’land, October, 1926, A. P. Dodd. Length of body, 6-5 mm.; of wing, 9 mm. 9. Upper half of frons dark, with golden scales and erect black bristly hairs; face with white hairs only; hairs of thorax appear shorter, less dense, and paler, whilst the scales appear denser and brighter; pleurae and breast white haired, the mesopleural tuft yellowish beneath the wing insertion, the white hairs extending on to the dorsum and forming a small white area anterior to the wing base; venter and legs appear mainly white scaled. Allotype 9. As holotype. Length of body, 7 mm.; of wing, 10 mm. Paratypes, 1 g, 3 9, Westwood, October, A. P. Dodd; 3 ¢, 1 9, EHidsvold, Q’land, I. M. Mackerras. Specimens also from Goondiwindi, Q’land (November) and Gravesend, N. S. Wales (December to February). The holotype and allotype are in the Queensland Museum. BOMBYLIUS PULCHELLUS, N. Sp. 6. Head mainly grey; occiput darker above, clothed with dense, short, reddish hairs, which become much paler and more sparse on the chin. Eyes not con- tiguous at any point, their upper facets enlarged. Frons very narrow between the closely approximated eyes, at its narowest point about equal in width to the fore ocellus; frontal triangle rather large, with a distinct median groove and some black hairs on each side and towards the antennae; face clothed with dense white hairs, stained yellowish beneath the antennae and with numerous, encircling, black, bristly hairs; mouth opening rather narrow, with pale yellow borders. Proboscis slender, black; palpi very short, black. Ocellar tubercle black, with some long black hairs. Antennae entirely black, longer than the head, the first segment with some long black hairs, the second about one-third the length of the first, the third about as long as the first and second together, the basal half somewhat oval, the apical half slender and linear; apical style distinct. Thorax black, clothed with dense, short and equal, dull reddish hairs which, seen from the side, have a yellowish sheen; prealar bristles reddish, postalars thin, pale; pleurae and breast greyish, clothed with brownish red hairs, the mesopleural tuft darker above, but paler beneath the wing insertions; squamae dark, with a long pale fringe; halteres with blackish knobs; scutellum black, with pale golden hairs and long, pale reddish bristles. Abdomen black, rounded, rather broad, but longer than broad, with numerous black scales; first segment with erect short, pale yellowish or whitish hairs, second, third and fourth segments with narrow bands of reddish scales on their posterior borders, and some white scales medianly, which are more or less coalescent and form a distinct, median, longitudinal stripe, much dilated apically, so that the 442 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, il, apical segments appear clothed with white scales with reddish scales laterally, the white scales on the second and third segments interrupted by reddish scales; laterally the hairs are black, with intermixed long, pale brownish hairs, the hairs forming long, dense tufts on the sides of the second, third and fourth segments, the black hairs being contiguous with the black scales of the dorsum, and the brownish hairs with the narrow red scaly bands; bristles rather strong, pale brownish or reddish; venter clothed with appressed and erect brownish tomentum and bristly hairs. [ Legs mainly blackish, the femora with brownish tints, clothed with dull golden scales, the femora with long black hairs beneath; spines beneath middle and hind femora pale brown. ; Wings deep brown at the base and along the fore margin to the apex of cell R,, and for about half the breadth; the inner margin of colour is very irregular. more or less straight from the base to the cell mc, then with three conspicuous indentations and two dilatations, the first extending for about two-thirds the distance of that portion of vein M, between mec and R, and the second one to the junction of R, and R,. Holotype 3%, Woodford, N. S. Wales, 14th November, 1925, A. J. Nicholson. Length of body, 6 mm.; of wing, 5-5 mm. Paratype ¢, Como, N. S. Wales, 8th October, 1921, G. H. Hardy. The holotype is in the Macleay Museum. BOMBYLIUS TENUICORNIS Macquart. Bombylius tenuicornis, Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., suppl. 1, 1846, 116; White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1916, 192; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 73 and 1923, 86—Bombylius matutinus, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii, 1849, 281; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 73.—Bombylius fuscanus, Macquart, Dipt. EHxot.. suppl. 4, 1850, 119; White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1916, 193; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soe. Tasm., 1921, 723 1923, 86. ¢. Head mainly grey; face and frons brownish; occiput little convex, covered with short, dense and equal brownish hairs, which become paler below to the sparse whitish beard, and with numerous bristly black hairs intermingled. Hyes contiguous for a very short distance below the ocellar tubercle, their upper and inner facets distinctly enlarged; frontal triangle rather large, with a well marked median groove, clothed with depressed, pale scales and some short black hairs; face much projecting between the eyes, rather narrow and almost parallel-sided, brownish but running to grey-black on the chin, clothed with short, pale golden and longer, black bristly hairs. Proboscis black, long and slender; palpi short, black, with some long hairs at their apices. Antennae entirely black, the first segment with long black hairs, the third about one and one-half times the length of the first and second together, broadening medianly to a rather blunt apex and provided with a distinct and somewhat stout style. Thorax black-brown, clothed with dense, short and equal, brown or tawny hairs, seen from above somewhat paler laterally; the hairs near the scutellum appear pale golden in certain lights, the whole seen from the front with a very pale yellowish or whitish sheen; prealar bristles stout and brown, postalars thin and black; scutellum with similar pubescence and long, thin, black, marginal bristles; pleurae dark grey, clothed with brown and a few intermixed pale hairs; halteres with golden yellow knobs; squamae brown with a short pale fringe. BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 443 Abdomen broad and short, rather rounded, clothed with depressed pale golden seales and long, brown or tawny hairs; bristles long, thin and black; venter with intermixed depressed pale brown and erect, black, bristly hairs; the hairs on the abdomen are longest and densest on the sides and viewed from above appear some- what paler. Legs mainly brown, coxae and tarsi darker, clothed with brown scales, the femora with long, black hairs beneath. Wings subhyaline or smoky, dark brownish at the base and along the fore margin for two-thirds the length, the colour descending to darken cell M, thence diluting to the apex and inner margin, leaving about half the breadth and the apex subhyaline. The female is similar with a much wider frons. Length of body, 5-9 mm.; of wing, -6-9-5 mm. Hab.—New South Wales: Woodford (September), National Park (November), Como (October), Garden Is. (December); Tasmania: Hobart (November). It is possible that consobrinus is also synonymous with tenwicornis, being described trom both Australia and Tasmania. Macquart’s description is very inferior and short, and it may have been taken from a small specimen of tenuicornis or a large specimen of chrysendetus. The species I have determined as tenuicornis is Hardy’s fuscanus, the name tenuicornis being used by him for those species he considered allied to fuscanus. At that time, however, he was not aware that certain species of Bombylius occurred both on the mainland and in Tasmania. White compares viduus, his palliolatus, with this species, and remarks that viduus is a much more hairy insect, for, whilst tenuicornis, even in fresh specimens, has a bare and denuded look, vidwus is completely covered with a thick and long furry pubescence. The chief distinction is to be found in the width of the face, that of viduus being almost twice the width of that of tenwicornis, in comparison with the width of the eyes of the two species. BOMBYLIUS AUREOLATUS Walker. Bombylius aureolatus, Walker Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., iv, 1857, 145; Hardy, Proc. ivOyn SOG. Lasm., LOA 739923) 186: ; fg. Head mainly grey; occiput little convex, dark brown above, this area being clothed with reddish hairs, below which on each side is a paich of softer, whitish hairs, separated from the whitish beard below by some brownish hairs. Eyes contiguous for some distance below the ocellar tubercle, their upper facets distinctly enlarged; ocellar tubercle black, with some long, erect, black hairs; frontal triangle with some appressed golden scales; face not very prominent, rather narrow, with long black hairs, which are also present on the chin in front of the beard. Antennae entirely black, the first segment with long black hairs, the third longer than the first and second together, of a somewhat elongate oval shape, with a distinct apical style. Proboscis long and slender, black; palpi short, black. Thorax deep brown, greyish laterally, clothed on the brown area with golden scales and dense, short, reddish brown hairs, and on the greyish area with whitish seales and dense hairs of a similar colour, which extend for the full length and meet the white, lateral patches of the occiput, in front; prealar bristles stout, reddish, postalars long, black; scutellum reddish, black basally, clothed with golden scales and margined with dense white hairs, which meet the white lateral 444 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, ii, stripes of the thorax, the thorax and scutellum therefore appearing enclosed, except anteriorly, by a white stripe; pleurae and breast grey, reddish haired, paler below; squamae dark brown with a short golden fringe; halteres with yellow knobs. ; Abdomen black, broad, but longer than its greatest width, with reddish-golden scales and long black bristles; the first segment is clothed with short, dense, erect, reddish hairs, which are of a greater length and more sparse on the remain- ing segments; extending from the second segment to the apex is a median dorsal stripe composed of almost contiguous spots of white scales; laterally, the first segment bears short, dense reddish hairs, the remaining ‘segments some longer reddish and intermixed white hairs, the red hairs disappearing towards the fourth segment, and the white hairs becoming more conspicuous, so that the apical segments are mainly clothed laterally with white hairs; the venter is clothed with reddish hairs, very long and dense on the sides. Legs: coxae grey, femora somewhat reddish or dark yellowish, tibiae darker at apex, tarsi black; the femora are mainly clothed with reddish Beales: but with traces of black scales above, and long black hairs below. Wings subhyaline, with base and fore margin to the apex of cell R, deep brown, the colour including half cell Cu, all cell M, thence across to the apex of R.,,, including r-m. 9. Eyes almost parallel; frons with reddish-golden scales, and long, black, bristly hairs; pleurae and breast white haired; mesopleural tuft reddish above, so that white hairs of the pleurae and the white lateral stripe of the thorax above, appear separated by a red stripe; abdomen apparently predominantly white haired laterally; femora and coxae white haired. Length of body, 5-10 mm.; of wing, 5:5-10 mm. Hab.—Dunwich, Q’land (September); Sydney, N. S. Wales (October). BoMBYLIUS vipuus Walker. Bombylius viduus, Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt., 1850, 199; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 73.—Bombylius palliolatus, White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1916, 194; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 73; 1923, 86. 9. Occiput moderately convex, clothed with dense, light fuscous hairs, which become paler below to form an almost white beard. Eyes broadly separated, about the width of one eye at the vertex, their upper and lower facets of an almost equal size. Frons much broadened to antennae, blackish, clothed with appressed golden scales and long, black, bristly hairs; face brownish, rather prominent, very broad, about equal to the width of both eyes together, clothed with short golden and long black, bristly hairs; mouth opening somewhat narrow with pale borders. Antennae entirely black, the first segment with long black hairs, the third elongate and slender; style apical and distinct, with one or two minute subapical bristly hairs. Thorax dark brownish, clothed with dense, erect, brownish hairs, paler on the sides; pre- and post-alar bristles black; scutellum brownish, clothed with similar hairs, the bristles long and black; pleurae and breast pale haired, the mesopleural tuft brownish above; squamae brown, with a thin vale yellowish fringe; halteres with brownish knobs. Abdomen broad and short, hardly longer than broad, clothed with long brownish hairs, densest laterally, and bearing long black bristles; venter pale haired at base, otherwise with brownish scales and long black bristles. BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 445 Legs: coxae and basal halves of anterior and middle femora blackish, most of posterior femora black, remainder of femora, and most of tibiae brownish; the femora appear clothed with brown scales with a few whitish scales and long hairs below, the tibiae with white scales which, against the ground colour, appear at times brownish. “Wings brownish at base and along the fore margin, the colour gradually becoming paler, leaving the wing, except for the apex and hind margin, smoky. Length of body, 7 mm.; of wing, 7:°5 mm. Hab.—Tasmania: Hobart (October). The description is taken from two rather badly damaged females in the collection of Mr. G. H. Hardy. White described the male only (Proc. Roy: Soc. Tas., 1916) and, except for the contiguous eyes, it apparently differs in no wise from the female. The species is very similar to tenwicornis, but the pubescence is much lighter in colour and the face is very much broader. BOMBYLIUS PICTIPENNIS Macquart. Bombylius pictipennis, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 4, 1850, 118; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 74. 6. Head mainly greyish; occiput dark brown above, clothed with short, dense, reddish hairs, followed by a silver grey area clothed with white hairs, below which the hairs become somewhat brownish to the white beard below. Eyes contiguous, their upper facets larger; frontal triangle prominent with a distinct median groove, clothed with reddish scales on each side and above, and black scales medianly and below; face prominent between the eyes, with long intermixed reddish brown and black bristly hairs, the latter more or less encircling the former which appear confined to an area near the mouth borders; ocellar tubercle large, with long black hairs. Proboscis black, slender; palpi very small. Antennae longer than the head, the first segment with numerous black and intermixed red hairs, the third about one and one-half times the length of the first two segments together, broadening medianly and with a rather blunt apex which is provided with a slender minute style. Thorax black, greyish laterally, clothed with short, dense, equal, reddish and a few intermixed black hairs and appressed reddish scales; laterally there is a stripe of dense greyish hairs which extend from the postalar calli, above the wing insertions, to the white areas of the occiput; prealar bristles strong, reddish, postalars thin, black; scutellum black with reddish scales and hairs and long, thin, black, marginal bristles; pleurae grey, clothed with white hairs; mesopleural tuft reddish above, the red hairs appearing as a stripe separating the white hairs of the pleurae from the whitish lateral stripes of the thorax; squamae pale with a long, dense fringe of white hairs; halteres with knobs somewhat brownish. Abdomen short and broad, about as long as its greatest width; across the basal segment and the anterior border of the second extends a band of white hairs, those on the first segment being erect and equal, those on the second short and appressed; the dorsal tomentum otherwise consists of appressed reddish scales and numerous intermixed reddish and black bristly hairs; extending from the third segment to the apex are many white appressed and erect hairs, which become denser towards the apex, so that the apical segments are covered mainly with white hairs, which in an undamaged specimen form bands, the hairs being longest and densest laterally; on the sides of the second, third, fourth and fifth segments A46 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAB, ii, are numerous long, black and intermixed reddish hairs, forming tufts; venter with white appressed hairs medianly and small areas of white scales laterally. Legs reddish-brown, with the coxae greyish, clothed with reddish scales, the femora white scaled at the base and with long black hairs beneath. Wings dark brown at the base and along the fore margin for almost their total length and about one-half their breadth, the rest of the wing being hyaline; the brown area usually contains three hyaline spots, the first two being small and placed in the median basal cell and near the origin of R,, the third, rather large and contained in cell R,; the inner border of this coloured area is very irregular and is composed of three distinct curves, the basal and largest one descending to colour one-third of cell M,, the second, the basal third of cell me, and the third, which is rounded, the apical portion of mc; at the extreme apex of the brown area, a fourth hyaline spot is sometimes apparent. The female is similar, the eyes being wide apart; the frons is clothed with golden scales, with long black hairs above. Length of body, 8-10 mm.; of wing, 10-12-5 mm. Hab.—Q’land: Brisbane (August-September); N. S. Wales: Sydney (July- September). This beautiful species is apparently the first Bombyliid on the wing, two specimens in the collection of Mr. A. J. Nicholson being taken at Lindfield in July. Around Brisbane its earliest record is August, when it is rather plentiful. BoMBYLIUS HILARIS Walker. Bombylius hilaris, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii, 1849, 274; Hardy, Proc. Roy. SOG, BOS, UO, 133 UOZR, SD. 6. Head mainly grey; occiput as in pictipennis; ocellar tubercle with some long black hairs. Eyes contiguous; frontal triangle small, clothed with appressed reddish scales; face prominent between the eyes, clothed with dense reddish and numerous, black, bristly hairs, the latter more or less encircling the former; beard thin, white. Proboscis black, slender; palpi small, slender, with some longer apical hairs. Antennae entirely black, the first segment with some long black and intermixed reddish hairs, the third longer than the first and second segments together, slender, and provided with a stout style somewhat subapical in position. Thorax similar to that of pictipennis, though the pleurae and breast are red haired; halteres with darkened knobs; squamae dark, with a yellowish fringe. Abdomen short and broad, and hardly as long as broad, black, the basal seg- ment rather greyish; there is a basal white band as in pictipennis, the red scales being also present; the second segment possesses long red hairs laterally, these hairs becoming shorter and intermingled with white hairs towards the apex; from the third segment to the apex, white scales are apparent, forming thin white bands, more conspicuous on the apical segments; the bristles are long, thin and black; the venter is clothed with red scales, black towards the apex. Legs brown to brownish-red with grey coxae, clothed with somewhat golden scales, the femora with long black hairs below; pulvilli pale. Wings divided into an upper dark brown half and a lower hyaline half, the dividing line being irregular and consisting of three waves, the apices of which are practically of an equal depth in the wing; there is a single hyaline spot near the apex of cell R,. °. Frons very broad, clothed with red scales and long black bristly hairs; pleurae and breast white haired; mesopleural tuft reddish above. BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 447 Length of body, 7-9 mm.; of wing, 8-5-10 mm. Hab.—N. S. Wales: Armidale, Darlington (September); W. Australia: Mundaring. At first glance this species is very similar to pictipennis, but in the latter species the hairs of the face are more brownish than red, the pleurae in the male are mainly white haired, the abdomen bears tufts of long black and reddish hairs laterally, the venter has white scales on the sides, and in the wings the inner border of the brown is much more irregular, the apices of the waves in hilaris being almost on the same level, and the hyaline spots of pictipennis being at most replaced by lighter areas. BoOMBYLIUS AUSTRALIANUS Bigot. Bombylius australianus, Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France, (7), |xi, 1892, 364; Hardy, TEKOC, KOO, SOC, TCS, USVAL, 13 19283, SOs 6. Head mainly grey, the frons somewhat darker; occiput little convex, clothed with dense, short, equal, reddish hairs, which become paler below to the very pale golden, almost whitish beard. Byes contiguous from immediately below the ocellar tubercle to near the antennal triangle; frontal triangle small with appressed golden scales; face prominent between the eyes, clothed with golden scales and hairs and numerous, erect, black, bristly hairs; mouth borders pale brownish with a short sparse golden moustache; facial groove deep and well marked. Proboscis black, long and slender, with enlarged labella; palpi small, about one-third the length of the proboscis. Antennae entirely black, the first seg- ment with long black hairs, the third elongate, about one and one-half times the length of the first and second together, and. provided with a distinct and rather stout style. ; Thorax black, greyish laterally, clothed with appressed, golden scales, and dense, short and equal reddish hairs, with a stripe of whitish or very pale yellowish hairs on each side, which extends from the postalar callus to the collar; prealar bristles strong, short and brownish, postalars long, thin and black; scutellum reddish, black basally, clothed with golden scales and bearing long, black bristies; pleurae grey, with somewhat golden hairs, the mesopleural tuft reddish above, so that the golden hairs of the pleurae appear separated from the whitish lateral stripe of the thorax by a line of reddish hairs; halteres with yellow knobs; squamae pale with a pale golden fringe. Abdomen black, somewhat rounded, but rather longer than its greatest width, the basal segment with a distinct but narrow band of erect reddish hairs, the remaining segments with dense golden scales and scattered golden hairs, densest on the sides, and lighter in colour than the hairs on the first segment; bristles black; venter with pale golden tomentum and bristles. Legs mainly pale reddish with grey coxae and darker tarsi, clothed with reddish scales, the femora with long, black hairs below, the scales in certain lights appearing whitish, and the fore and middle femora sometimes black basally. Wings subhyaline, brownish at the base and along the fore margin to the apex of cell Sc, the colour including the basal portion of cell Cu, the basal two- thirds of cell M, and about one-half of cell R,. Q. Frons very broad, clothed with golden scales and erect black, bristly hairs; pleurae, breast, and venter white haired, the mesopleural tuft with reddish and intermixed black hairs above; legs somewhat paler, the white scales more apparent, and the femora white haired at the base and beneath. 16) 448 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, ii, Length of body, 7-12 mm.; of wing, 7:5-10 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane (August-January); N. S. Wales: Sydney (September-January), Kosciusko (February), Woodford (November); Victoria: Gisborne (December). Hardy (Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1924) makes tenuicornis synonymous with australianus. The former species, however, was described with both Australia and Tasmania as localities, and as far as is known the species identified by me as australianus is confined to the mainland. BOMBYLIUS CHRYSENDETUS White. Bombylius chrysendetus, White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1916, 195; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 74; 1923, 86. 6. Head mainly greyish, the mouth borders pale yellowish; occiput little convex, clothed with appressed golden scales and dense, short and equal yellow hairs which become much paler to the thin sparse beard below. Byes contiguous from beneath the ocellar tubercle to near the antennal triangle, the upper facets distinctly larger, their demarcation from the smaller, lower facets very evident; frontal triangle small, the median groove well marked, clothed with appressed golden scales; face with numerous black, bristly hairs and a thin but long, yellowish moustache; facial groove well marked. Proboscis black and slender; palpi short and thin, with long hairs at the apex; ocellar tubercle black, with some long black hairs. Antennae entirely black, the first segment with long black hairs, the second about two-thirds the length of the first, the third longer than the first two together, the basal two-thirds somewhat oval, the apical third linear, with a small but distinct apical style. Thorax black, clothed with short, dense and equal yellow hairs and appressed golden scales; prealar bristles stout and pale, postalars long, thin and black; scutellum black, clothed with appressed golden scales and yellow hairs and bearing long, black bristles; pleurae grey, with yellow hairs, somewhat paler on the breast; squamae yellow, with a thin paler fringe; halteres with yellow knobs. Abdomen somewhat oval, longer than broad, clothed with shining golden scales and erect yellow hairs, the former predominating and the latter rather sparse, but densest laterally, and forming a distinct band on the first segment; bristles mainly black; venter grey, clothed with paler appressed tomentum and erect bristly hairs. Legs with the coxae grey, the femora yellow, black at the apices, the hind femora more so, the anterior and middle tibiae yellow, the posterior tibiae brown, tarsi dark; the femora are clothed with golden scales, somewhat whitish beneath, and with long pale hairs; hind femora with 6-8 long spines below. Wings hyaline, with base and fore margin brown; the veins C and Sec appear contiguous except at the extreme apices, the colour appearing darker at this spot; apical cross-vein of me much reduced. 9%. Frons very broad, clothed with appressed golden scales and some erect, black, bristly hairs; face mainly covered with pale golden or yellowish hairs. Length of body, 3-5-6 mm.; of wing, 4-6-5 mm. ; Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane (October), Chinchilla (October), Hidsvold (October); Tasmania: George Town (December). White compares this species with Walker’s Bombylius nanus, and says, “This species bears a considerable resemblance to B. nanus Walk. from Western Australia. It is probably distinct, but the type being in bad condition, the question cannot be BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 449 satisfactorily settled until more specimens from Western Australia are available for comparison”. - This species varies somewhat in the colour of the legs. The series examined consisted of 12 ¢ and 9 9, 16 of which were from George Town, Tasmania. The femora are usually yellow, black apically, but in 3 ¢ from Tasmania they are dull reddish, and in two others the posterior femora are almost wholly black. The tibiae may be yellowish, sometimes black apically, and sometimes reddish, black apically. BOMBYLIUS RUBRIVENTRIS Bigot. Bombylius rubriventris, Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France, (7), |xi, 1892, 365; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 74. 6. Head mainly grey; occiput clothed with dense, short and equal yellow hairs, which become paler to the almost whitish beard below; eyes contiguous for about one-third the length of the frons; frontal triangle small, covered with appressed, yellow scales and some black hairs; face projecting between the eyes, covered with dense, erect, yellow hairs, somewhat paler on the cheeks; ocellar tubercle black, with some long, black hairs. Proboscis very long and slender, black; palpi small, black; mouth opening very broad. Antennae mainly black, as long as the head, the first segment with some long black hairs, the third longer than the first and second together, with a distinct, slender, apical style. Thorax blackish, covered with dense, short and equal yellow hairs, with some black hairs intermixed; bristles weak, yellowish; scutellum black, with similar yellow hairs, the bristles long, thin, and mainly black; pleurae and breast grey, clothed with pale yellow hairs, the mesopleural tuft darker above; squamae pale brown with a short yellow fringe; halteres yellow. Abdomen broad and rounded, the first segment black, the remainder yellow, with a median black, dorsal stripe, the stripe being denticulated at the anterior and posterior borders of each segment, the whole clothed with yellow hairs, densest laterally; bristles forming complete rows on the posterior borders of each segment, black, longest apically; venter dark grey, the posterior borders of the segments almost a pale brown, yellow pollinose. Legs mainly yellowish, posterior tibiae and apices of posterior femora, and tarsi dark brown, clothed with yellow scales, the femora with pale hairs beneath. Wings clear hyaline, light fuscous at the base and along the fore margin to the apex of cell Sc. The only female I have seen is of a much smaller size, with a broad frons, clothed with shining yellow scales and black hairs. The abdomen is more reddish than yellow, but this is possibly due to the condition of the specimen. Length of body, 6-10 mm.; of wing, 5-5-9 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Westwood (November), Pt. Denison. The identification of rubriventris has puzzled me for quite a while. There are three or perhaps four species which agree in many points with Bigot’s description. Bigot, however, mentions the wings as being hyaline, and the species described above is the only one in which this is the case. In the others the wings are smoky or subhyaline, brown at the base and along the fore margin for some depth. Unfortunately these species are only represented by one or two specimens in a rather badly damaged condition. A short description of each of these would not, I think, be amiss. 450 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, ii, 1. A large black species from the Atherton Tableland, North Queensland, clothed with golden yellow hairs and possessing a red scutellum, a deep red abdomen with a narrow, almost parallel-sided, median black stripe. The wings are subhyaline, dark fuscous at the base and along the fore margin, the colour descending to cell M, its outline suffused. ' 2. A medium-sized species from Stanthorpe, Queensland, with a_ black scutellum, a red abdomen with a broader, black, denticulated stripe, and clothed with yellowish hairs. The wings are smoky, the base and fore margin dark brown, the colour more defined and deeper than in the previous species. 3. A dark brownish species from Galston (New South Wales) and Brisbane (Q’land), clothed with a pale brownish pubescence. The abdomen is tinged red, with an extremely broad black, denticulated stripe, the apical segments appearing all black. The wings are similar to those of the preceding species. Species not Recognized. BoOMBYLIUS CONSOBRINUS Macquart. Bombylius consobrinus, Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., suppl. 2, 1847, 54; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasn., 1921, 75. : “Rlavo hirtus. Pedibus rufis. Alis fuscanis, basi limboque externoque fuscis. “Long. 2 1. $, g, 9. Trompe longue d’une ligne un tiers. Face et front @un fauve grisatre. Antennes: les deux premiers segments noirs. Thorax et abdomen en grande partie dénudés. Tarses bruns. Ailes: premiére cellule postérieure fermée, a nervure terminale aboutissante au milieu de la partie de la sous-marginale au-dela de l’angle; petite transversale située au milieu de la discoidale. “De la Nouvelle-Hollande et de la Tasmanie”’. BoMBYLIUS ALBICINCTUS Macquart. : Bombylius albicinctus, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 2, 1847, 54; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 74. fey “Rufo hirtus. Abdomine albo fascialio. Pedibus nigris, tibiis rufis. Alis hyalinis limbo externo fusco. ; “Long. 3 1. 9. Face d’un jaune blanchatre. Front a duvet fauve et poils noirs. Antennes noirs. Thorax et abdomen a fourrure fauve; quatriéme segment de ce dernier a longs poils blancs au bord antérieur. Ailes: premiére cellule postérieure fermée, 4 nervure terminale aboutissante aux deux tiers de la partie de la sous-marginale, au-dela de l’angle; petite transversale située au milieu de la discoidale. “De la Tasmanie”’. BoMBYLIUS NANUS Walker. Bombylius nanus, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., 1849,.278; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 74. “Niger, pilis fulvis rufisque vestitus, pectore albo piloso, abdomine pilis flavis rufisque vestito subtus cano, antennis nigris, apice piceis, femoribus flavis, tibiis ferrugineis, tarsis piceis, alis subcinereis, basi et ad costam fuscis. “Body black, thickly clothed with bright tawny and red hairs; a tuft of black bristles on the crown of the head, whose front is thickly clothed with shining yellow hairs; feelers nearly as long as the head; first and second joints black, and thickly beset with black bristles; 2nd joint much shorter than the first; 3rd joint piceous, spindle shaped, nearly as long as the first and second; fourth joint very small, with BY F. H. 8. ROBERTS. 451 two or three bristles at the tip; mouth black, shorter than the chest; eyes piceous; breast clothed with white hairs; abdomen with alternate bands of bright yellow and red hairs; underside hoary; legs slightly clothed with bristles and hairs; thighs yeliow, with a ferruginous stripe from the hbase to the tip, which like the shanks is also ferruginous; feet: piceous; wings slightly grey, brown at the base and along the fore border till near the tips; the brown colour occupies rather less than half the surface of the wing; wing ribs and veins piceous, the latter black towards the tips; poisers tawny. “Length of the body, 24 1.; of the wings, 64 1. ' “West Australia”. Genus Discuistus Loew. Dischistus, Loew, Neue Beitr., iii, 1855, 45; White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1916, 192; Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 68; 1923, 82. Genotype, Bombylius minimus Schnk, by Brunetti’s designation (1910). 'In general characters similar to Bombylius, but the cell R,; is open. Range.—Hurope, Asia, Africa, South America, Australia. At the present time the limits of this genus appear ill-defined. Bezzi has placed a large number of species from South Africa in the genus, the relative length of the cells R and M being apparently the only constant character. These species vary in the proximity of the antennae, the width of the frons at the vertex in the male, the bareness of the metapleurae, and the development of the alulae. The “same divergence of characters is to be found among tle Australian species, though not so noticeably. Three species are placed in the genus, all of which are regarded as new. They all agree in having approximate antennae, contiguous eyes, and wings with cell R longer than cell M. Both formosus and pallidoventer have a very short, stout, proboscis, an elongate abdomen, somewhat conical in shape, and narrow, slender wings, with the alulae much reduced, whilst in perparvus, the proboscis is very long and slender, the abdomen short and broad, and the wings stout. It is more than likely that these three species belong to two distinct genera, but at the present time their separation is not convenient. Distribution.—No records of the genus are known from South Australia or Western Australia. The most widely distributed species appears to be pallido- venter, which is known from Tasmania, Victoria, and New South Wales. Queens- land possesses the other two species formosus and perparvus, both of which no doubt have a wider southern and western range. Key to the Species of Dischistus. 1. A small species with a short and broad abdomen; wings stout .... perparvwus, n. sp. Medium-sized to large species, with a conical abdomen, and. long narrow, wings .... 2 2. Wings with the costal third for its full length, fuscous ......... pallidoventer, n. sp. Wings at most brownish at the base and for a short distance along the fore margin MeO Metre ae oa orate eee ta ote inar al are ne Geel edhe MUSE a gelae ihe meee Marga Si reaver ee formosus, N. sp. DISCHISTUS FORMOSUS, Il. Sp. 6. Head mainly grey; occiput somewhat flattened above, slightly convex below, clothed with dense, bright yellow hairs, which become much paler below to the beard. Eyes contiguous from immediately beneath:the ocellar tubercle to near the antennal triangle, which is small and clothed with appressed golden scales; face, prominent between the eyes, clothed with dense black hairs, and’ with a bright, yellow moustache; cheeks much reduced. Proboscis very short and stout, with 452 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, ii, much enlarged labella; palpi slender, about one-third the length of the proboscis. Antennae as long as the head, the first segment rather short, with dense, black hairs, the second about two-thirds the length of the first, with short black hairs, the third much longer than the first and second together, somewhat linear and stout, and provided with a small slender style placed on the inner edge of the broad apex. Thorax jet-black, clothed with appressed, golden scales, and dense, erect, short and equal, darker yellow and a few intermixed black hairs; notopleural bristles stout and black; scutellum black, with golden pile and long, thin, black bristles; pleurae and breast grey, pale yellow haired; halteres slender, with reddish knobs; squamae brownish, with a long and dense yellow fringe. Abdomen black, somewhat conical in shape, about as long as the thorax, covered with appressed, golden scales and pale golden or bright yellow hairs, densest laterally, and with rows of long, thin, black bristles or bristly hairs; genitalia brownish; venter grey, covered with appressed very pale yellow hairs, with some pale, bristly hairs intermixed. Legs mainly brown, the coxae greyish and the apical tarsi darker, the femora with pale golden scales and long yellowish hairs beneath, the tibiae with appressed black hairs; spines black; spines on fore tibiae very short and weak; pulvilli pale. Wings slender and rather narrow, pale smoky, almost hyaline, yellowish at the base and along the fore margin for about two-thirds the length; cell Sc much reduced; alula much reduced; R.,, little curved at apex; r-m placed well beyond the middle of the discal cell, the cell at this point being rather broad; cell M, almost square in shape. Length of body, 10 mm.; of wing, 9-8 mm. Holotype d, Brisbane, Queensland, 3rd September, 1927, J. Mann. The female has a much broader frons clothed with golden scales and erect black hairs, but is otherwise similar to the male. Length of body, 11 mm.; of wing, 10 mm. Allotype 9, Brisbane, Queensland, 9th September, 1927, F. Roberts. Paratypes: 8 g, 5 ?, Brisbane, September, 1927, J. Mann; 1 J, 1 9, Brisbane, August, G. H. Hardy; 1 3g, 2 9, Brisbane, September, F. Roberts; 2 J, 1 2, Brisbane, September, A. P. Dodd. The hairs of the body appear to have a greenish tinge, more noticeable on the occiput and thorax, the general colour being a golden yellow tinged green. The holotype and allotype are in the Queensland Museum. DISCHISTUS PALLIDOVENTER, 0. SP. 6. The head is mainly grey; occiput somewhat flattened above, more convex below, clothed with dense, pale yellow hairs, with a distinct fringe of longer, similar hairs above and contiguous with the posterior eye-margins. Eyes con- tiguous from immediately below the ocellar tubercle to near the antennal triangle. Frontal triangle rather small, clothed with appressed, golden pile and some short, black hairs; face projecting between the eyes, clothed with dense, soft, pale yellow hairs, which become extremely pale on the lower third of the cheeks and chin, forming a pale, shining beard; between the upper mouth borders and the base of the antennae are some dense, erect, black hairs encircling the yellow hairs of the face for a short distance; mouth opening rather narrow. Proboscis short and slender, little more than twice the length of the mouth opening; palpi small and very slender, black. Antennae as long as the head, approximate, though BY F. i. S. ROBERTS. 453 distinctly separated at the base, black, with greyish reflections; the first segment is rather short, about equal in length to the second, both first and second segments with dense black hairs; the third is longer than the first two segments together, somewhat oval in shape, being broad medianly and tapering from thence to the blunt apex; style distinct and subapical. Thorax black, clothed with appressed, bright golden scales and dense, erect, short and equal, pale yellow hairs, with numerous intermixed black and pale, bristly hairs; notopleural bristles short and black; scutellum black, clothed like the thorax, with long, thin, black bristles; pleurae and breast greyish, clothed with very pale yellow hairs, the mesopleural tuft darker above and below the wing; squamae brownish with a yellow fringe; halteres with slender, brownish stems and blackish knobs. Abdomen elongate and conical in shape, as long as the head and thorax together, jet-black, and somewhat shining on the anterior margins of the segments, and narrowly pale reddish on the extreme lateral margins; the whole is clothed with appressed, shining golden scales and erect, yellowish hairs; the bristles are thin and black, and form complete rows on the posterior borders of the seg- ments; there is a distinct band of erect, short, pale yellow hairs on the basal segment, which is continued laterally, and across the anterior border of the second segment a narrow band of white hairs, this segment also bearing pale yellow hairs on its sides; the venter is very pale greyish, clothed with appressed, dense, shining, pale hairs, densest and longest laterally. Legs mainly yellow, the coxae greyish and the apical tarsi dark brown, clothed with pale scales, these scales being white beneath the hind femora and tibiae; femora with long, pale hairs beneath; pulvilli pale; spines black. Wings long and narrow, the alula much reduced, subhyaline, but brown at the base and along the fore margin for the whole of its length, and more than one- third but less than one-half the breadth, the colour being rather paler near the apex; cell mc rather narrow, the vein r-m being placed well beyond its middle; R.,, curved so as to meet the costa at a right angle. Length of body, 9-5 mm.; of wing, 10 mm. Holotype g, Hobart, Tasmania, 14th March, 1917, G. H. Hardy. Paratypes: 1 ¢, Hobart, 10th March, 1917, G. H. Hardy; 3 ¢, Chelsea, Victoria, L. B. Thorn, 5th April, 1910, and 16th March, 1919; 1 ¢, Blue Mts., N. S. Wales, 26th February, 1922, E. W. Ferguson; 1 ¢, National Park (Gundamain), N. S. Wales, 4th April, 1925, I. M. Mackerras. The holotype is in the Queensland Museum. DISCHISTUS PERPARVUS, N. SD. 6. Head mainly blackish-grey; occiput little convex, silver grey laterally, clothed with short, dense, equal whitish hairs. Eyes contiguous for about one- third the length of the frons, their upper facets distinctly enlarged; ocellar tubercle black, with some long, bristly black hairs. Frontal triangle large, with a rather indistinct median groove; face little prominent, clothed with erect black hairs; mouth opening with grey borders, not very long or broad; chin grey-black, with a sparse, pale brownish beard. Proboscis very elongate and slender, almost three times the length of the head, with little enlarged labella; palpi extremely short, brownish, with sparse white hairs. Antennae not as long as the head, segments ~ one and two greyish, the third black; first segment not quite twice as long as the second, with long black hairs; the third about as long as the first and second together, strap-shaped, with a minute, subapical, spine-like style. 454 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BOMBYLIIDAE, ii, Thorax black, clothed with short, dense, equal, pale brownish hairs which, viewed from the front, appear whitish laterally, and appressed thin, golden scales, with intermixed pale and dark bristly hairs; scutellum similarly covered, with longer pale or whitish bristles; pleurae and breast rubbed, but the pleurae appear to be clothed with brownish hairs and the breast with intermixed black hairs; halteres pale brown with much enlarged black knobs; squamae pale, with an exceedingly short and sparse whitish fringe. Abdomen black, short and rounded, hardly as long as broad and about as broad as the thorax, covered with appressed thin, golden scales and scattered, erect, whitish, bristly hairs; the first segment bears a distinctive band of dense, whitish hairs; on the posterior border of the same segment, overlapping on to the second segment is a narrow band of silvery white, appressed tomentum, rather thin laterally; laterally, the abdomen is clothed with sparse white hairs, densest and shortest basally, the third to the apical segments bearing depressed, white pile, which encroaches on the dorsum for a short distance along the anterior borders of each segment, becoming more conspicuous apically; venter thinly white polliinose. Legs with the coxae blackish, the fore femora reddish, the middle femora reddish, pale brown apically, the hind femora and all tibiae pale brown, the whole clothed with white scales, which, in certain lights, appear brownish beneath; hind femora with some long, black spines beneath. ; Wings stout and hyaline, black at the base and along the fore margin to the apex of cell Se, the colour faintly present in cell M and around the vein r-m. Length of body, 6 mm.; of wing, 6 mm. Holotype ¢, Morven, Queensland, September, 1927, A..P. Dodd. The holotype is unique and is in the Queensland Museum. According to White, three further species apparently belong to this genus, these species being antecedens, altus, and immutatus, all of which were described ° by Walker. Macquart’s crassilabris, placed by Hardy among the species of Dischistus, I have identified as a species in which the palpi are two-jointed and therefore not belonging to the Bombyliinae. None of the three former species has been recognized, their original descriptions being appended herewith in this genus on the authority of White. DISCHISTUS ANTECEDENS (Walker). : Bombylius antecedens, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus. ii, 1849, 293.—Dischistus antecedens, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1928, 83.—Sisyromyia antecedens, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 72. “Mas. Niger, pilis canis vestitus, capite setis nigris armato, antennis pedibusque nigris, alis subcinereis. “Body black, thickly clothed with long shining hoary hairs; eyes red; front and clypeus thickly beset with black bristles; mouth much more than half the length of the body; lips black; feelers biack; first joint linear, second joint not half the length of the first; third joint much longer than the first and second, straight beneath and forming an obtuse angle above, where it is furnished with some long black hairs; legs black, clothed with some very short black hairs; wings tinged with grey; fore border slightly tinged with tawny colour; wing ribs and veins piceous, the latter black towards the tips; poisers yellow, very long with black knobs. “Length of body 2 lines; of the wings 5 lines. “New Holland’. BY F. H. S. ROBERTS. 45 oO DiIscHIstus ALTUS (Walker). Bombylius altus, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii, 1849, 288—Bombylius pinguis, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii, 1849, 290.—wSisyromyia altus, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 72.—Sisyromyia pinguis, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 72.—Dischistus altus, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1923, 83. “Rem. Cinereus, pilis fulvis et nonnullis rufis nigrisque vestitus, subtus albo Pilosus, antennis nigris, pedibus ferrugineis, tarsis piceis, alis cinereis basi et ad costam fulvis. “Body grey; head clothed with tawny hairs, and having a few black hairs on the crown; underside thickly clothed with white hairs; feelers and mouth black, the latter about half the length of the chest; chest very thickly clothed with short white tawny hairs, which are paler on each side as they approach the white hairs of the breast; the sides are also adorned with red hairs, and a few red and black hairs scattered over the chest and breast; abdomen thickly clothed with tawny hairs, which are very bright on each side towards the tip; its back is thinly clothed with black hairs, which are most frequent at the tip; the underside, with the exception of the sides and tip, is clothed with white hairs; legs ferruginous covered with a hoary bloom and clothed with short whitish hairs and a few black bristles; feet piceous towards the tips; wings grey, tawny at the base and along the sides of the veins of the fore borders for three-quarters the length; wing ribs ferruginous; veins piceous, black towards the tips; poisers ferruginous, with yellow tips. “Length of the body, 5 lines; of the wings, 14 lines. “Swan River”. DISCHISTUS IMMUTATUS (Walker). Bombylius immutatus, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii, 1849, 292. Sisyromyia immutatus, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1921, 72—Dischistus immutatus, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1923, 83. “Mas. Niger, pilis flavis vestitus, antennis femoribusque nigris, tibiis ferru- gineis, tarsis piceis, alis limpidis basi costaque fulvis. “Body black, with a grey bloom, most thickly clothed with pale yellow hairs; there are a few black hairs on the crown of the head which is covered with more and longer black hairs about the base of the feelers; the latter are black, the third joint slightly tapering from the base to the tip and rather shorter than the first and second; mouth black, as long as the chest; palpi also black and more than one-third the length of the mouth; eyes dark red with a bronze tinge; legs ferruginous, with a few black bristles which are mostly on the shanks; hips and thighs, excepting the tips of the latter, black and covered with a hoary bloom; feet hairy piceous; wings colourless, tawny at the base and along the fore borders for two-thirds the length; wing ribs and veins tawny, the latter black towards the tips; poisers tawny, the knobs mostly piceous. “Length of the body, 4 lines; of the wings, 10 lines. “West Australia’’. It appears to me that altus, immutatus, and crassilabris are synonymic. The former two species, however, were described from Western Australia, and as yet I have no record of the species I have determined as crussilabris from this State. Under these conditions, it seems best to follow White until more material is made available. M A NEW BUPRESTID FROM AUSTRALIA. By A. THERY. (Communicated by H. J. Carter.) (One Text-figure. ) [Read 26th September, 1928.] MASTOGENIUS FRENCHI, N. Sp. Length, 2°75 mm.; width, 1 mm.—Hlongate, nearly parallel, covered with very short and fine pubescence; entirely black. Head convex, longitudinally impressed in front, above the clypeus strongly and sparsely punctured with the interspaces alutaceous; eyes large, nearly parallel, not projecting and partially covered by the pronotum; clypeus depressed below the level of the forehead, broad, nearly truncate; antennae rather long, serrated from the fourth joint, the first two joints very full, the rest slender, the third slightly. longer than the second and equal to the following, the serrated joints with some erect hairs. Pronotum very convex, widest at the anterior third, without impressions; the apex straight and finely bordered, the sides arcuate and narrowed in front, very feebly arcuate behind; the posterior angles obtuse; the sides with two lateral carinae, well separated, slightly sinuate and not united before or behind. The base straight and bordered (when the pronotum is inclined) by a shining band serrated posteriorly as in the genus Ptosima. Disk punctured in middle, covered laterally and pos- teriorly with fine, concentric and superficial ridges. Scutellum flat, nearly triangular, with all the angles rounded. Elytra without humeral callus, only a little larger at the humeri than the pronotum is at base, sides straight to the apical fourth, then abruptly rounded at the apex, with an obtuse sutural angle; base bordered by a depressed carina separated from the disk by a well marked furrow; on the anterior fourth, on each side near the suture, is a paceLogents pero n. SP. feebly accentuated hump, and near the apex a small depression on each elytron; the suture depressed anteriorly and carinated on the posterior half; the sides bordered from the epipleural lobe, which is large and carinated, to the apex; the humeral carina as long as the lobe. Disk punctured on a glossy ground, the punctures distinctly seriated, the apex rugose. Some examples show the pygidium concave in the BY A. THERY. 457 middle and terminated by a thin translucent plate; this is probably a sexual character. Prosternum convex, with the anterior margin largely and arcuately sinuous and finely bordered; the surface evenly punctured, the punctures regularly spaced, rather deep, intermingled with hairs; prosternal process large, subtruncate at apex, not narrowed between the coxae, plainly punctured, not bordered. Meso- metasternal suture entire and very distinct; the sternal cavity formed entirely by the mesosternum; the anterior margin of the metasternum rounded, only touching the sternal cavity in a single place where the mesosternum is nearly divided. Whole surface plainly punctured. Posterior coxae scarcely enlarged interiorly, not at all exteriorly. Metathoracic episterna partially covered with epipleural lobe of the elytra which is well developed. First and second ventral segments united much longer than the three following together; the suture between the first two segments almost invisible and not at all parallel to those of the other segments. The second segment not longer than the third. Last segment short, broadly rounded and coarsely punctured at apex, without marginal furrow. On the first segment, the punctation is squamose, on the rest similar to that of the meta- sternum; the intercoxal process of abdomen is short and acute, rounded at the apex. The pubescence of the under side is rather long and not very dense. The abdominal episterna are limited only by a fine carina from the middle of the sides of the first segment, without any furrow. Tibiae straight, the posterior finely ciliated with yellowish hairs; tarsi strongly compressed, the joints short and subequal, the claws simple (or lobed only at base). Described from four specimens from Victoria, Australia (captured by C. French). The type and a paratype are in my collection, one paratype in that of the British Museum, the other in Mr. H. J. Carter’s collection. FOSSIL PLANTS FROM THE ESK DISTRICT, QUEENSLAND. By A. B. Warkom, D.Sc. (Plates xxvi-xxviii; four Text-figures.) [Read 26th September, 1928.] The fossil plants described in this paper comprise two collections, cne made by Messrs. J. H. Reid and C. C. Morton of the Queensland Geological Survey during their geological examination of the district, and the other by Professor H. C. Richards, Dr. W. H. Bryan and a small party of students from ihe University of Queensland during a geological excursion to the district. These collections supplement those previously described from the Esk Series (Walkom, 1917a, 19176, 1924). Several species are described as new, and others are recorded for the first time from the Esk Series. The following is a list of species dealt with here:— Cladophlebis lobifolia (Phillips) Neuropteridium moombraense, n. sp. Cladophlebis australis (Morris) Sphenopteris eskensis, n.- Sp. Todites Williamsoni (Brongn.) Sphenopteris superba Shirley Thinnfeldia eskensis, n. sp. Anthrophyopsis grandis, n. sp. Thinnfeldia talbragarensis Walkom Nilssonia eskensis, n. sp. Thinnfeldia lancifolia (Morris) Nilssonia Reidi, n. sp. Danaeopsis Hughesi Feistmantel Nilssonia Mortoni, n. sp. Asterotheca Denmeadi, n. sp. ? Pterophyllum Nathorsti (Seward) Pecopteris (Asterotheca) Hillae Walkom Pseudoctenis eathiensis (Richards) Taeniopteris crassinervis (Feistmantel) Ginkgoites cf. magnifolia Fontaine Taeniopteris Tenison-Woodsi (Etheridge Jr.) ? Ginkgoites sibirica Heer Of this list, Thinnfeldia eskensis, Asterotheca Denmeadi, Neuropteridium moombraense, Sphenopteris eskensis, Anthrophyopsis grandis, Nilssonia eskensis, Nilssonia Reidi and Nilssonia Mortoni are described as new, while the following additional species had not previously been described from the Esk Series:— Todites Williamson, Thinnfeldia talbragarensis, Danaeopsis Hughesi. Todites Williamsoni occurs in rocks of Upper Triassic age in various parts of the World, but has not hitherto been recorded from Australia. Thinnfeldia talbragarensis, a species intermediate between 7. lancifolia and T. Feistmanteli, was first described from the Jurassic rocks at Talbragar, N.S.W., and may be expected in any rocks where both the species mentioned are found; Danaeopsis Hughesi has been described previously from the Ipswich Series. Of the species described as new, those which may be used for correlation with floras in other parts of the World confirm previous determinations of the age of the Esk Series as Upper Triassic (possibly Rhaetic). Thinnfeldia eskensis is closely allied to some specimens of TJ. rhomboidalis from the Rhaetic of Nurnberg; Asterotheca Denmeadi is similar to A. Cottoni from the Rhaetic of Tonkin; Neuropteridium is a genus occurring in Triassic floras of Europe and Permo-Carboniferous floras in India, South Africa and South America; and Anthrophyopsis grandis is similar to species occurring in the Rhaetic of Greenland and Sweden. BY A. B. WALKOM. 459 In a recent analysis of the flora of the Upper Karroo Beds of South Africa, Du Toit (1927) has studied carefully the ages of so-called ‘‘“Rhaetic” floras, particularly where they occur in association with beds containing marine faunas. He confirms (p. 313) the correlation of the Queensland Ipswich Series with the South African Molteno Beds, and he regards the Molteno Flora as essentially of Upper Triassic (Keuper) age. CLADOPHLEBIS LOBIFOLIA (Phillips). Examples of this species have been described and figured (Walkom, 1924, p. 81, Pl. xv) from two localities in the Esk District. An additional specimen* (No. 1925, Q.G.S.) is here recorded from Coal Creek, 6 miles NNE. of Esk. CLADOPHLEBIS AUSTRALIS (Morris). Plate xxvi, fig. 1. Sterile examples of this type of frond are abundant at a locality on the road between Bellevue and Esk, and are mentioned in the description of Todites Williamsoni below. TopiITES WILLIAMSON! (Brongniart). Plate xxvi, figs. 1, 2. Portions of fertile pinnae belong to this widespread Upper Triassic and Jurassic type of fern. In the specimens from the Esk Series the pinnae are long, linear, up to 1:1 cm. wide; the rachis is 1 mm. wide and the pinnules alternate, short, and obtuse, at the lower margin being convex and at the upper concave, 5 mm. long by 4 mm. wide. The sori cover practically the whole surface of the pinnule (Plate xxvi, fig. 2). Specimens which appear indistinguishable from this species have been frequently described and figured from rocks of Upper Triassic and Jurassic ages, under a variety of specific names (for references see Seward, 1910, pp. 339-343). The distinctions between described species of Todites are not very clear, and in the absence of well preserved sporangia it is hopeless to try and distinguish them. The present examples are referred to JT. Williamsoni, since the fertile pinnae agree very closely with figured examples of that type both in the characters of the pinnules and in the distribution of the sporangia. Further references to some of the species are to be found in papers by Gothan (1914), Johannson (1922) and Harris (1926). The species occurs in Upper Triassic rocks in South Africa, Switzerland and Virginia and in rocks classed as Rhaetic in Tonkin, Greenland and Germany. Closely associated with these fertile fronds are numerous sterile fronds which belong to the Cladophlebis australis type, and it seems more than probable that the two belonged to the same fern. In the sterile examples the pinnules are considerably larger than in the fertile. Locality.—Road between portions 70 and 76, Parish Wivenhoe (F1728, U.Q.). THINNFELDIA ESKENSIS, Dn. sp. Plate xxvii, fig. 2; xxviii, fig. 1. Frond large, with strong, striated rachis. Pinnules large, robust, gradually tapering to rounded acute apex; upper half of lamina contracting at base, lower half broadening slightly and somewhat decurrent; midrib prominent becoming evanescent near apex; secondary veins make an acute angle (20°-25°) with midrib * The registered numbers of the specimens in the two collections described are distinguished by the letters placed after the figures. Q.G.S. = Queensland Geological Survey; U.Q. = University of Queensland. 460 FOSSIL PLANTS FROM ESK DISTRICT, QUEENSLAND, and divide, usually only once; a small number of veins at the base of the pinnule spring direct from the rachis. : In the largest specimen examined the frond is 24:5 cm. long and about 12 cm. broad, with the rachis 3 to 4 mm. broad; the pinnules are as much as 7 cm. long and 1-5 cm. wide. In the specimens available the frond is simply pinnate and none shows a dichotomising rachis like the other Australian species of Thinnfeldia. It may be, however, that further collecting will produce more complete specimens, and this species may agree with the others in this character. Among Australian species 7. eskensis may be compared with 7. narrabeenensis from the Narrabeen Beds of the Hawkesbury Series of New South Wales. In general appearance it is not so robust as the New South Wales species, the rachis not being so prominent and the pinnules being generally narrower in comparison with their length. The secondary veins also make a somewhat more acute angle with the midrib. In addition, no information is available as to the nature of the pinnules towards the base of the frond in J. eskensis. The present species seems distinct from specimens described as Danaeopsis Hughesi from the Ipswich Series in the much smaller size of the pinnules and in the venation, the secondary veins being not so close together and making a much more acute angle with the midrib. In D. Hughesi the veins make an average angle of about 45° with midrib; in 7. narrabeenensis about 30°, and in 7. eskensis, 20°-25°. The pinnules of 7. eskensis are not as narrow and pointed as those of T. acuta. The species to which these specimens show closest resemblance is the large form of 7. rhomboidalis described and figured by Gothan (1914) from the Rhaetic of Nurnberg, with which it may even be identical. It is interesting to find specimens of Thinnfeldia which appear to be practically identical, from the Northern and Southern Hemispheres. A considerable amount has been written on the genus Thinnfeldia (Gothan, 1912, 1914; Antevs, 1914; Walkom, 1917a), and, with the exception of the Nurnberg examples, there appeared to be a distinct difference between the European species and those of the Southern Hemisphere (Australia, South Africa and South America). The specimens from the Hsk Series, therefore, may lead to a better understanding of the relation between Northern and Southern species referred to Thinnfeldia. Localities—Road between portions 70 and 76, Parish Wivenhoe (F1733, U.Q.), Moombra (1939, Q.G.S.), Schultz’s Selection, Coal Creek (1929, Q.G.S.). THINNFELDIA TALBRAGARENSIS Walkom. Plate xxvii, fig. 1. Mem. Geol. Survey, N.S.W., Pal. No. 12, 1921, p. 9. This species, intermediate between the two types JZ’. Feistmanteli and T. lancifolia, was first described from the Jurassic rocks of Talbragar in New South Wales. A specimen closely comparable with this species has since been recorded from Mesozoic (probably Rhaetic) rocks in Tasmania (Walkom, 1925b), and now, among the plants collected in the Esk District, further examples are noted from Portion 366, Pine Mountain (No. 1932, Q.G.S.), the Moore-Benarkin Rd. (No. 1938, Q.G.S.) and the top of Wivenhoe Range, Bellevue (F1732, U.Q.). It is not at all surprising to find this extended range for T. talbragarensis; indeed, in view of the probability of its close relation with the other species of Thinnfeldia, one would expect to find it in association with the two species above- mentioned at any locality where they are present. BY A. B. WALKOM. 461 THINNFELDIA LANCIFOLIA (Morris): This species is represented by a good example on specimen F1731 (U.Q.) from Sheep Station Creek, near Wivenhoe Crossing of Brisbane River. DANAEOPSIS HuGHESI Feistmantel. This species also occurs at Denmark Hill, Ipswich, in beds belonging to the Ipswich Series (see Walkom, 1917a, p. 24). It occurs among the collections from near Moombra School (No. 1916, Q.G.S.). ASTEROTHECA DENMEADI, n. sp. Text-fig. 1. Frond bi- (? tri-) pinnate. Pinnules (fertile) attached by whole base, almost at right angles to rachis, traversed by prominent midrib from which a number of secondary veins are given off obliquely. Apex of pinnules acuminate. Rachis striated longitudinally. Sori arranged on either side of midrib, about ten on each pinnule. Sorus composed of 3-6 (usually 4) sporangia, apparently united by proximal end to a central receptacle, free at their distal ends. Dehiscence possibly by longitudinal slit. The pinnules are about 1:2 cm. long and 3-4 mm. wide. The nature and arrangement of the sori indicates the affinity of the specimens with species of Asterotheca. .In having the sporangia united only in the basal region and free towards their apical end, the sorus shows closest resemblance to that of species of Hawlea (Stur, 1885, p. 106; Seward, 1910, p. 400, fig. 291F), which genus is considered to be congeneric with Asterotheca (Bower, 1908, p. 522; Seward, l.c.). In many of the individual sporangia parts of the wall may be seen to have been composed of thin walled elongated cells, and in view of the fact that this can be seen in such a large number of the sporangia and also that in no case were any thick-walled cells suggesting an annulus observed, it does not seem unreasonable to suggest that the sporangia had no distinct annulus. Further, many of the sporangia have a distinct longitudinal mark which may represent a slit along which dehiscence took place (see Text-fig. 1, c, d). In Dactylotheca the sporangia are not united as in Asterotheca. Our species is of similar size to A. Cottoni from the Rhaetic of Tonkin (Zeiller, 1903, Pl. 1, figs. 4-9), but the sori are not so crowded and do not cover such a large proportion of the surface of the pinnule. The sori in A. Cottoni also appear to be more compact than in A. Denmeadi. A very close resemblance may be noted to a species of Hawlea figured by Stur: the general appearance of the pinnule and arrangement of sori and sporangia agree very closely with Stur’s figure of H. Miltoni (Stur, 1885, p. 108, Pl. lix, Ix). This species, referred to Pecopteris (Asterotheca) Miltoni by Seward (1910, p. 399) is a common Coal Measure form in Europe. A. Denmeadi is a much larger species than Pecopteris (? Asterotheca) Hillae previously described from the Esk Series (Walkom, 1924, p. 82, Pl. 17, figs. 1-3). In P. Hillae very little detail of the structure of sori or sporangia was observable but there is little doubt that it was quite distinct from the species here described as new. Locality.—Road between portions 70 and 76, Parish Wivenhoe (F1726-7, U.Q.). PECOPTERIS (? ASTEROTHECA) HiLLAE Walkom. This interesting species was described at some length among a series of specimens belonging to the Queensland Museum (Walkom, 1924, p. 82), and the 462 FOSSIL PLANTS FROM ESK DISTRICT, QUEENSLAND, Geological Survey Collection contains specimens from the same locality, Portion 42, Parish of Wivenhoe. TAENIOPTERIS CRASSINERVIS (Feistmantel). Plate xxviii, fig. 6. Specimen No. 1936 (Q.G.S.) does not agree well with examples of T. crassi- nervis previously described from Queensland, but in view of a fairly wide variation in that species, as exemplified by specimens figured from New Zealand (Arber, 1917, p. 45, Plate x), it seems wisest to refer the specimen under consideration to this species. The specimen has been a good deal broken during fossilization Bp. | \ Text-fig. 1—Asterotheca Denmeadi, nn. sp. wu.—Portion of frond, nat. size. b.—Portion of frond, enlarged (x 3). e¢.—Sorus, viewed from above (x 35). d.—Sporangium (x 25). and its length is indeterminable. The width is 4-5 cm. and the base is cordate; the midrib is about 2-5 mm. wide and the veins are at right angles to the midrib and 1 to 15 mm. apart; they divide occasionally and sometimes the two branches join again, making a small loop in the vein; apart from this, two adjacent veins occasionally join. There does not seem to be any good ground for separation from 7. crassinervis. Arber described the base of the New Zealand specimens as “suddenly contracted”, and little variation of this is needed to make the base cordate, if the form of the base in the Queensland specimen is natural and not due to distortion (as may possibly be the case). The specimen came from Portion 42, Parish of Wivenhoe, a locality where other examples of T. crassinervis have been collected. BY A. B. WALKOM. 463 TAENIOPTERIS TENISON-Woopst Htheridge Jr. Specimens referred to this species show some variation from the examples previously described. They are slightly wider, have a wider midrib:and the veins are not quite so close together. There does not, however, appear to be sufficient ground at present for giving them a separate specific name. It might be pointed out here that in my description of this species (1917a, p. 33) an error has been noted in the second line where the width is stated to be up to 8 cm.; this should read 8 mm. Examples in the collection come from the Railway Cutting at Overbridge, Ottaba (No. 1924, Q.G.S.), near Esk (1928, Q.G.S.), and from 4 mile west of Esk Post Office. NEUROPTERIDIUM MOOMBRAENSE, nN. Sp. Plate xxvii, fig. 4. Frond pinnate; upper pinnules elongate, with lobed margin, and midrib which does not persist to apex; lower pinnules rhombic in outline, attached at one of the acute angles, veins diverging from base; pinnules contracted at base and attached by contracted portion, the lower margin being decurrent. Specimen No. 1937 (Q.G.S.) is adifferent from any that I have previously examined from Australian rocks, and it agrees best with Neuropteridium, a genus which includes Triassic European species as well as some Permo-Carboniferous plants. In general appearance there is a considerable degree of resemblance to N. validum which occurs in the Lower Gondwana rocks of India and in the Permian (Permo-Carboniferous) of South America and South Africa. The pinnules are, however, notably different in shape, being much more acute at apex and more acutely contracted towards the base, a condition which results in the lower pinnules being markedly rhombic in outline and not rounded or semicircular. The specimens are among those from the Road just south of Moombra School. SPHENOPTERIS ESKENSIS, n. sp. Plate xxvi, fig. 3; Text-fig. 4. A specimen with seven or eight broadly wedge-shaped leaves which, from their disposition, appear to have been attached to an axis, differs from any specimen yet found in the Australian Mesozoic rocks. It may represent a new generic type, but in the absence of sufficient information for a complete diagnosis, it is referred to the form genus Sphenopteris on account of the shape of the individual pinnules and their venation. Pinnules wedge-shaped, 1-5 cm. from base to outer margin, which is slightly ecrenulate, traversed by a small number of radiating dichotomously branching veins. The disposition of the pinnules, as seen in the figure, at once suggests attach- ment to an axis and comparison in form with such genera as Adiantites and Rhacopteris which are of common occurrence in Carboniferous rocks. Attention may be drawn in this connection to figures of Adiantites adiantoides L. & H. (Kidston, 1923a, Pl. xlv. fig. 3) and Rhacopteris inaequilatera and R. Lindseae- formis (Kidston, 19236, Pl. xlix, 1), and R. sp. (Seward, 1910, p. 427) in all of which, however, the veins are considerably more numerous than in our specimen. Single pinnules also resemble in general appearance some species of Protor- rhipis or Hausmannia, described by Nathorst, but the absence of any trace of the reticulate venation of those species separates our specimen from them. The only figure resembling S. eskensis which I have been able to find among Mesozoic species is that described by Feistmantel as Cyclopteris pachyrhachis Gopp. from the Panchet Group of the Raniganj coalfield in India (Feistmantel, 464 FOSSIL PLANTS FROM ESK DISTRICT, QUEENSLAND, 1880, p. 84, Pl. 17a, fig: 7). The Panchet Group has been correlated with other beds as.of Triasso-Rhaetic age by Arber (1905). The generic name Cyclopteris, however, is no longer used, it having been instituted originally for modified leaves belonging to Neuropteris and Odontopteris, and it seems likely that Feistmantel’s specimen is similar to that here described from Esk. Locality. Railway Cutting, near Ottaba Railway Station (F1729, U.Q.). SPHENOPTERIS SUPERBA Shirley. , Some fine examples of this species (F1730, 1731, U.Q.) have been obtained from Sheep Station Creek, near Wivenhoe Crossing of Brisbane River. ANTHROPHYOPSIS GRANDIS, n. sp. Plate xxvi, fig. 5; Text.-fig. 2. Frond large, apex obtuse; midrib prominent, gradually becoming finer and not persisting to apex; secondary veins first at about 45° to midrib, curving outward to 70° with midrib, forming wide elongate polygonal mesh for about one-third width of lamina, and then narrower elongate mesh. The genus Anthrophyopsis, originally described by Nathorst, was later suppressed by him and all the species transferred to other genera. Recently Harris (1926) has proposed to reinstate the genus, with the two species A. Nilssoni and A. crassinervis, the former being the genotype. The structure of the cuticle of upper and lower surfaces is the more important part of Harris’s description, but an attempt to isolate the cuticle of our specimens was unsuccessful. However, the venation is quite characteristic and little hesitation is felt in referring the specimens from the Hsk district to this genus. The specimens give a good idea of the form of the leaf, which was previously little known. The leaf as preserved is incomplete at the basal end, but is a handsome one, 15 cm. long and 9-5 cm. wide. The apex is very broadly obtuse, the lamina being 3-5 ecm. wide at a distance of 1 cm. from the apex. The margin is somewhat irregular, being divided by indentations of varying depth. The midrib is relatively fine and distinct, some 2 mm. broad at the base of the leaf and gradually becoming thinner until it disappears about 3 mm. before reaching the apex. The secondary veins leave the midrib at an acute angle and for about one-third of the width of the lamina they form a wide elongate mesh with a general inclination of about 45° to the midrib; for the remainder of the lamina they form a narrower elongate mesh inclined at about 65° to 70° to the midrib; in the inner part the meshes are 1-2 mm. wide, wider in the basal part than the apical, while in the outer part they approximate to 7 or § meshes in 5 mm. of width. In the figures of A. crassinervis given by Harris (1926, Pl. viii, figs. 1, 2) there is not the same difference in width of the meshes in the inner and outer parts of the leaf, though there is a distinct difference in the length of the meshes in the two zones. The same applies to Nathorst’s figures of (Ctenis) fallax (1878-86, Pl. vii, fig. 3, Pl. xi, fig. 6, Pl. xix, fig. 5); the two last-mentioned figures give the impression that the meshes are shorter in the outer zone than the inner, whereas in our specimens the reverse is the case. Nathorst’s A. obovata (1878, Pl. 2, fig. 2) is a smaller form than ours, and the secondary venation makes a more acute angle with the midrib. All the known species have been found in rocks of Rhaetic age, A. Nilssoni in the Rhaetic floras of Bjuf and Hoganas, and A. crassinervis in the Rhaetic of Scoresby Sound, Greenland and Bjuf. Locality.—Sheep Station Creek, near Wivenhoe crossing of Brisbane River (F1724-5, U.Q.). BY A. B. WALKOM. 465 NILSSONIA ESKENSIS, n. sp. Plate xxvi, fig. 4; Text-fig. 3. An example similar in general appearance to Pterophyllum contiguum differs from that species in having the pinnae attached to the upper surface of the rachis, and also in the venation, the veins dividing but rarely. The lamina is divided into distinct segments, irregular in their width, varying from 2-5 to 4:5 mm. wide, and 2-5 ecm. long. The rachis is about 2 mm. wide and the veins fine, about 3 per mm., and rarely branching. Specimen 1920 (Q.G.S.), of this species, is from Portion 85, Parish Esk. Text-fig. 2.—Anthrophyopsis grandis, n. sp. Camera lucida sketch of venation. Nat. size. Text-fig. 3.—WNilssonia eskensis, n. sp. Sketch showing attachment of pinnae to rachis, and the venation. a, from above; b, from below (x 33). Text-fig. 4.—Sphenopteris eskensis, n. sp. Camera lucida sketch showing venation of leaves and possible arrangement of leaves about an axis, as in Rhacopteris. Nat. size. NitssoniaA REIDI, n. sp. Plate xxviii, figs. 4, 5. Frond simple; about 7 cm. wide. Lamina divided irregularly into segments from 0:4 to 1 cm. wide, attached to upper surface of rachis. The veins are straight, at right angles to apex, fine (20-25 per cm.) and rarely branching. This species is similar in general form to Pterophyllum multilineatum, already recorded from the Ipswich Series, but differs in the mode of attachment of the lamina to the rachis, which, so far as known, is lateral in specimens referred to P. multilineatum, and also in the venation, the veins dividing comparatively frequently in the latter species. In general appearance it also suggests N. princeps occurring in the Jurassic of the Indian region, but is not so large and has finer venation. Comparison may also be made with some examples of N. compta, e.g. that figured by Seward (1900, p. 227, fig. 40), but in this case also our species is not so large and has the veins closer together. Locality.—Chaillé’s Windmill, Paddy’s Gully Rd. (Nos. 1918, 1919, Q.G.S.). 466 FOSSIL PLANTS FROM ESK DISTRICT, QUEENSLAND, NizssonrA Morvoni, n. sp. Plate xxviii, figs. 2, 3, 7. Frond simple, breadth 6 em., length ? (considerably more than 10 cm.), apex broadly obtuse, gradually tapering towards base. The lamina is attached to the upper surface of the rachis, and has the margins slightly lobed; it is entire or almost so, some specimens of the basal portion showing occasional division into broad segments. Rachis 2 mm. wide, tapering towards apex, longitudinally striated. Veins fine, numerous, 30-35 per cm., rarely dividing except near their point of attachment to rachis; the veins are at right angles to the rachis, except towards the apex of the frond, where they become inclined, making an angle as low as about 60°. These leaves are quite different from any previously described from Queens- land. They have a close resemblance to some of the species recorded from Jurassic rocks in other parts of the world, particularly N. orientalis (Heer.) as figured by Seward (1912, Pl. iii, fig. 46) from Afghanistan. A similar type of frond from Rhaetic rocks is N. polymorpha. In a number of these species of Nilssonia it appears quite impossible to distinguish between Rhaetic and Jurassic types. Locality.—Road just south of Moombra School, about 7 miles SE. from Hsk (Nos. 1914, 1915, 1917, Q.G.S.). ? PTEROPHYLLUM NATHORSTI (Seward). This species has been described from Portion 28, Parish Biarra (Walkom, 1917b, p. 18) and the apical portion of a frond in the collection under description is doubtfully referred to it. . Locality —Road between portions 70 and 76, Parish Wivenhoe (F1728, U.Q.). PSEUDOCTENIS EATHIENSIS (Richards). This species appears to be of fairly common occurrence in the Esk Series. P. Footei, from the Jurassic of India (Seward and Sahni, 1920, p. 33) is a very similar type, Feistmantel’s specific name having been retained by Seward and Sahni only in view of the wide geographic separation. Locality.—Wivenhoe (No. 1921, Q.G.S.). GINKGOITES cf. MAGNIFOLIA Fontaine. Plate xxvii, fig. 3. Queenslond Geol. Survey, Pub. 259, p. 9, Pl. 4, f. 3, 4. Additional large examples may be placed with that previously referred to under the above name. They are so unlike the Australian specimens which have been referred to G. digitata that it would seem better at present not to regard them all as conspecific. These examples are large (more than 11 cm. from base to outer margin) and have the veins about 1 mm. apart. Locality.—z-mile W. of Esk Post Office (No. 1934, Q.G.S.); Manyung Railway Station (No. 1935, Q.G.S.). GINKGOITES (?) SIBIRICA Heer. This species, previously recorded from Portion 24, Parish Esk (Walkom, 1924) has now been collected from Sheep Station Creek, near Wivenhoe Crossing of Brisbane River (F1731, U.Q.). References. ANTEVS, E., 1914.—Die Gattungen Thinnfeldia Ett. und Dicroidiwm Goth. Kungl. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 51, No. 6. ARBER, E. A. N., 1905.—The Glossopteris Flora. Brit. Ifus. Catalogue. 7 BY A. B. WALKOM. 46 ARBER, H. A. N., 1917.—The earlier Mesozoic Floras of New Zealand. N.Z. Geol. Surv., Pal. Bull. 6. Bower, F. O., 1908.—The origin of a land flora. London. Du Tort, A. L., 1927.—The Fossil Flora of the Upper Karroo Beds. Any. S. Af. Mus., XXII, 289-420. FEISTMANTEL, O., 1880.—The Flora of the Damuda-Panchet Divisions. Fossil Flora of Gondwana System. Vol. iii, Pts. 2-3. Mem. Geol. Surv. India, Pal. Ind., Ser. xii. GOTHAN, W., 1912.—Uber die Gattung Thinnfeldia Ettingshausen. Abh. Nat. Ges. Niirnberg, xix, 67-80. —_————,, 1914.—-Die unter-liassische (‘‘rhatische’’) Flora der Umgegend von Niirnberg. Abh. wat. Ges. Niirnberg, xix, 89-186. /————_,, 1914a.—Nachtrag zur Arbeit iiber Thinnfeldia Ettingshausen. Abh. Nat. Ges. Nirnuberg, xix, 87-88. ‘ Harris, T. M., 1926.—The Rhaetic Flora of Scoresby Sound, Hast Greenland. Saertryk of Meddelelser om Gronland, |xviii, 43-148. JOHANSSON, N., 1922.—Die ratische Flora der Kohlengruben bei Stabbarp und Skrom- berga in Schonen. K. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl., 63, No. 5. KiIpsTon, R., 1923a.—Fossil Plants of the Carboniferous Rocks of Great Britain. Mem. Geol. Surv. Gt. Britain, Pal. Vol. ii, No. 2. , 1923b.—Fossil Plants of the Carboniferous Rocks of Great Britain. Mem. Geol. Surv. Gt. Britain, Pal. Vol. ii, No. 3. NatuHorst, A. G., 1878.—Bidrag till Sveriges fossila flora. ii. Floran vid Héganés och Helsingborg. 'K. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 16, No. 7. , 1878-1886.—Om Floran i Skanes Kolférande Bildningar. Sver. Geol. Unders. Ser. C. SEWARD, A. C., 1900.—The Jurassic Flora. Part i. Brit. Mus. Catalogue. , 1910.—Fossil Plants. Vol. ii. ————,, 1912.— Mesozoic Plants from Afghanistan and Afghan-Turkistan. Mem. Geol. Surv. India, Pal. Ind., N.S., iv, Memoir No. 4. SEWARD, A. C., and SAHNI, B., 1920.—Indian Gondwana Plants: A revision. IMJem. Geol. Surv. India, Pal. Ind., N.S., vii, Memoir 1. : Stur, D., 1885.—Die Carbon-Flora der Schatzlarer Schichten. Abh. K.K. Geol. Reichs., Bd. xi, Abth. i. Waukom, A. B., 1917a.—Mesozoic Floras of Queensland. Part 1 (contd.). Q’land Geol. Survey, Pub. 257. , 1917b.—Mesozoic Floras of Queensland. Part 1 (concl.). Q’land Geol. Survey, Pub. 259. ; —, 1924.—On Fossil Plants from Bellevue, near Esk. Mem. Q’land Mus. viii (1), 77-92. , 1925b.—Notes on some Tasmanian Mesozoic Plants. Part ii. Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas. 1925, pp. 638-74. ZHILLER, R., 1903.—Flore fossile des Gites de Charbon du Tonkin. EHtudes Gites Min. France. Paris. EXPLANATION OF PLATES XXVI-XXVIII. Plate xxvi. 1. Cladophlebis australis (Morris), sterile and Todites Williamsoni (Brongn.), fertile. (x 0:8). Road between portions 70 and 76, Parish Wivenhoe, Q. (Spec. F1728, U.Q.). 2. Todites Williamsoni (Brongn.). Portion of fertile pinna shown in Fig. 1. (x 1:6). Sphenopteris eskensis, n. sp. (x 1:6). Railway Cutting, near Ottaba Railway Station, Q. (Spec. F1729, U.Q.). 4. Nilssonia eskensis, n. sp. Natural size. Portion 85, Parish Esk, Q. (Spec. 1920, Q.G.S.). 5. Anthrophyopsis grandis, n. sp. (x %). Sheep Station Creek, near Wivenhoe Crossing of Brisbane River, Q. (Spec. F1724, U.Q.). Plate xxvii. 1. Thinnfeldia talbragarensis Walkom. (x #2). Moore-Benarkin Road, Q. (Spec. 1938, Q.G.S.). 2. Thinnfeldia eskensis, n. sp. (x 0:7). Schultz’s Selection, Coal Creek, Q. (Spec. 1929, Q.G.S.). 468 FOSSIL PLANTS FROM ESK DISTRICT, QUEENSLAND. 3. Ginkgoites cf. magnifolia Fontaine. (x 0:5). Manyung Railway Station, Q. (Spec. 1935, Q.G.S.). f 4. Neuropteridium moombraense, n. sp. (x 0:8). Road at Moombra School, Q@. (Spec. 1937, Q.G.S.). 5 Plate xxviii. 1. Thinnfeldia eskensis, n. sp. (xX 0:5). Road between Portions 70 and 76, Parish Wivenhoe, Q. (Spec. F1733, U.Q.). ; 2, 3. Nilssonia Mortoni, n. sp. (2, x 2; a x 8/,). Moombra (Q.G.S. Collection). 4, 5. Nilssonia Reidi, n. sp. (x 0:5). Paddy’s Gully Road, Q. (Spee. 1918, 1919, Q.G.S.). 6. Taeniopteris crassinervis (Feistmantel). (x 0:6). ‘Portion 42, Parish Wivenhoe, Q. (Spec. 1936, Q.G.S.). 7. Nilssonia Mortoni, n. sp. (x 1:5). Portion enlarged, showing attachment of veins to upper surface of rachis. (Q.G.S. Collection). THIRD CONTRIBUTION TOWARDS A NEW CLASSIFICATION OF AUSTRALIAN ASILIDAE. By G. H. Harpy, Walter and Eliza Hall Fellow in Economic Biology, Queensland University. [Read 26th September, 1928.] Introduction. About 80 years ago Loew laid the foundation for a classification of Asilidae, with three sections of subfamily rank; to these a fourth was added by Schiner. Various other writers have classified the Asilidae on this basis, either accepting or disregarding the fourth subfamily Leptogasterinae. Many of the papers made advances on Loew’s work, but apparently the basis was accepted as more or less satisfactory; in other cases attention has been drawn to the unnatural status of the system which is now becoming more widely recognized as being quite inade- quate for modern needs. Several authors have pointed out the impossibility of maintaining a distinction between Dasypogoninae and Laphriinae under the existing definitions, whilst others have apparently been satisfied with their status. On the whole no actual movement was made towards the betterment of the classification of the Asilidae. Some of the more recent works have incorporated a study of the larvae and pupae and along these lines Melin seems to have achieved the néarest to a constructive criticism of the position. He pointed out that genera grouped under the Dasypogoninae are considerably more heterogeneous than those of the Laph- riinae and Asilinae; the discrepancies in the larval characters are referred to in this respect and he then proceeds: “Now as the Dasypogonina flies and pupae do not show any great degree of accordance with one another either, I do not consider that what has hitherto been known as the Dasypogonina species can be brought together under one group ranking with the Laphriina and Asilina subfamilies. Instead of this they ought to be divided amongst several groups, which of course cannot be delimited in detail until some future date. With regard to the genus Leptogaster that is widely separated from most of the other Asilids not only through several imago characters . . . but also through several characters in their stages of development” (Melin, 1923, pp. 206-7). Melin’s criticism, based as it is upon biological grounds after about ten years’ intensive study, must bear greater weight than any criticism levelled against it on general grounds, and to a great extent it justifies my action in gathering together the related Australian genera, showing affinities to each other, into groups, these groups being based upon characters of a fundamental nature rather than those that have so long been accepted in the systems adopted after Loew and which are found so futile for the Australian element. With the present paper will be found a study of the prothorax of the Dasypogoninae, this structure having a character of tribal importance. It has 470 CLASSIFICATION OF AUSTRALIAN ASILIDABE, enabled me to propose a new tribe which, though defined, is left unnamed pending further information. Following on Hermann, the tribe Laphriini is divided also. In concluding these remarks, I would express my indebtedness to Professor R. H. Painter who has kindly supplied me with a few North American Asilidae, one genus of which comes well within a new tribe proposed hereunder. Also Mr. EK. Jarvis has kindly allowed me to retain for study some described North Queens- land Laphriini and Atomosiini that he submitted for determination some years ago. These especially have been valuable towards drawing up a comparative study based upon Hermann’s paper of 1912. On the prothorax of the Dasypogoninae. In the Brachyrrhopalini, a tribe of undoubted homogeneous nature, the pro- sternal plate which is placed ventrally and adjacent to the anterior coxae, is distinctly separated from the dorsal portion of the prothorax by a definite mem- brane that, in some cases, is larger than normally found, and sometimes there are wrinkles in this membrane that indicate its probable flexibility when in the living state. The actual size of the ventral plate is sometimes a little smaller than usual, but invariably the membrane folds beneath its lateral edges. In the Saropogonini, including Thereutria and Metalaphria, but excluding Clinopogon and Cryptopogon, the defined genera have the ventral plate clearly perceptible, but as in the Brachyrrhopalini, there would appear to be gradations with respect to the density of the membrane, some being of a sturdier form than others. In the Phellini, Phellus has the plate amalgamated with the other parts, but ridges mark lines of fusion, so it would appear here as if the membrane had become completely chitinized; on Psilozona the membrane is normal. Finally, in the Laphriini there are no signs whatever of the components of the prothorax, the whole having a smooth surface of uniform chitinous nature; the same applies to the Atomosiini. A NEW TRIBE. The two exceptions mentioned above under the Saropogonini, namely Clino- pogon and Cryptopogon, to which must be added the American genus Neopogon and possibly others, all have the prothorax similar to the Laphriini type. All disagree with the Laphriini in the nature of the female genital parts, the. shape of the head, venation and sundry other characters, whereas they agree in these matters amongst themselves. They will form a new tribe divided from the remainder of the Saropogonini in the nature of the prothorax and in the front. I have not seen Stichopogon, so am uncertain if this genus is related. CryproroGon White. White erected this genus for a somewhat Therevid-like Asilid, having an interradial crossvein. It comes near Olinopogon and is not easy to distinguish from small specimens of that genus. I have before me an undoubted Cryptopogon that is without the interradial crossvein, but compares very favourably in all other respects; the venational character would therefore appear to be specific, not generic, in importance. The characters of the genus would thus be:— Front very broad at summit, very narrow at antennae, face widens from there (this apparently is a tribal character). Antennae with the fourth segment rather long, about twice as long as broad. Moustache composed of a number of bristles BY G. H. HARDY. 471 in a dense mass restricted to an area near the oral margin (White states ‘confined to” but that term is a little misleading as there is more than one row of bristles). Prothorax of one piece; scutellum without bristles; abdomen of moderate length, parallel-sided. Femora somewhat swollen (apparently another tribal character) ; tarsi with extra long bristles. Venation with or without an interradial crossvein; all marginal cells open, except the anal which is closed slightly before the margin. CRYPTOPOGON OBSCURUS, N. Sp. A brownish species with much white tomentum which completely covers the face and forms a pattern on the dorsal area of the thorax. Abdomen black, with white tomentose side spots and more or less interrupted cross bands at base of segments; tomentum also on coxae and traceable on femora. Hair on front and bristles behind ocelli black, elsewhere on head white. On thorax and abdomen the hair is mainly black, but white hair occurs in places. Hair on legs white, bristles there both black and white. Legs mainly black, but basally the tibiae are brownish to a varying extent. Wings hyaline with a strong tendency towards dark infuscations at crossveins. In other respects White’s specific description of C. vernaculus also applies to the present form, but it is at once distinguished by the lack of the interradial crossvein, the black spots at crossveins and the darker legs. Length, 7-8 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Sunnybank, near Brisbane, 2 males and 2 females. November, 1925, 1927 and March, 1928. Occurs in the bush on the ground, but its small size and obscure colouring make it very difficult to detect. C. vernaculus also occurs in Queensland, but seems to be confined to more inland districts. ’ Tribe Saropogonini. CHRYSEUTRIA, Nn. gen. Antennae with four segments and a minute apical spine; moustache confined to a row of oral bristles. Thorax with a lateral spine just anterior to the trans- verse suture as in Chrysopogon; prothorax with ventral plate clearly defined; scutellum without bristles. Abdomen rather long and parallel-sided, each segment slightly bulging on the dorsal area; genital spines of the female conspicuous; first segment with an apical lateral spine. Legs with a spur on the anterior femora. Wings with all marginal cells open. This genus differs from Chrysopogon and its allies in the structure of the female genitalia and in the more generalized type of abdomen being parallel-sided and more elongate, whereas on Chrysopogon it expands from the base towards the apex. From Thereutria and its allies it is distinguished by the presence of the thoracic spine and again in the abdomen, that of Therewtria tapering towards the apex. The genus belongs to the Saropogonini. CHRYSEUTRIA NIGRINUS, N. SD. Black with white tomentum and hairs. Head of usual shape; the white tomentum runs from the oral margin in two broad lateral stripes, meeting on the area surrounding the base of the antennae. The moustache is formed by an irregular row of about 16 white, more or less parallel bristles. Palpi and antennae with mainly black hairs. The whole area behind the eyes is completely covered with white tomentum and long white hairs are fairly plentiful there, but two pairs of black bristles occur behind the ocelli, arranged in a transverse row. Some white tomentum occurs conspicuously on the prothorax, from the humeral tubercle, N 472 CLASSIFICATION OF AUSTRALIAN ASILIDAE, along the lateral suture, and on to the scutellum; also along the transverse suture and as a very faint design on the dorsal area. It also occurs over the larger part of the ventral area. On the abdomen it lies along the transverse marginal sutures and forms up to five pairs of lateral spots, one on each basal segment. Coxae with white hairs and tomentum. Femora very scantily supplied with short hairs and these are sometimes black; long white hairs occur on the ventral area of the anterior pair. A row of scattered black bristles is on the posterior side of the anterior femora, on both sides of the intermediate, and on the anterior side of the posterior femora. Tibiae and tarsi studded with short white depressed hairs and black bristles. Halteres yellow. Wings suffused with black-brown, very heavily so along the veins. Length, 14-15 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Sunnybank, near Brisbane. Two females, November, 1927. The holotype was taken flying backwards and forwards from a termite’s mound to a spray of tall grass in seed, a distance of about two or three feet, coming to rest at each visit. The paratype was captured about a fortnight later, thirty yards from the same place with an Humenid wasp as prey; it was skimming an inch or two above the grassy ground, not attempting to rest. These were the only two seen, and it has not been detected in any other collection. It might readily be mistaken for a Chrysopogon, but apparently it has not been described under that genus. Genus NEOSAROPOGON Ricardo. The type of this genus was fixed in 1921, namely Dasypogon princeps Macquart, but recently it has become evident that more than one form might have been placed under the name by Ricardo. In the original definition is recorded “the absence of any style to the third segment of the antennae’. Hitherto I had not met with any specimen in Australian collections agreeing in this character, but now I have a pair from Brisbane that misses the fourth segment. On re-examining the material in the Ferguson, the Queensland Museum and the Australian Museum collections, I find a variation in the size of the fourth segment (so called style) and also variations in markings, but judging from the Queensland pair referred to there is a tendency to dimorphism which complicates the study. Tribes Laphriini, and Atomosiini, n. trib. Hermann in 1921 divided certain Asilids into Acanthocneminae, which have a spur on the anterior tibiae, and the Hremocneminae which are without the spur. The latter is again divided into the Atomosiinae and Laphriinae. It will readily be seen that Thereutria and Metalaphria, if placed in the sub- family Laphriinae as originally done, would fall into the first of these major divisions, but their affinities are too close to the Saropogonini to permit separation under such an arrangement. Hermann placed four genera in his first division, but I do not know how they compare with the Australian genera. Judging from the complex hitherto placed in the tribe Laphriini, the Australian forms would contain, under Hermann’s group Laphriinae, all the species recognized as being Laphria, also Nusa queenslandi Ricardo and Laphria tectamus Walker. The last of these Bigot placed in the genus Andrenosoma, and there can be little doubt such a position is superior to that of Nusa where Ricardo placed it. Although having the venation comparable to the last form, Nusa queenslandi seems to have more affinities with Laphria, and taken as a whole all these, and presumably BY G. H. HARDY. 473 Maria, would form the tribe Laphriini as opposed to the remainder, the Atomosiini. To this extent the Australian forms uphold Hermann’s groups, but suitable characters for dividing them into tribes have not yet been fully ascertained. As an immediate guide the manner in which the veins M, and M, coalesce may be used. Under the tribe Atomosiini come Atomosia, Adeolus and Cyanonedys. References. Harpy, G. H., 1927.—Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. WALgss, lii, 1927, 387-398; which see for references. Bzrzzi, 1910.—Ann. hist.-nat. Mus. hung., viii, 1910, 147-153. HERMANN, 1912.—Nova Acta Leop. Carol., Halle, 1912, 1-275. MELLIN, 1923.—Zool. Bidr. Uppsala, viii, 1-317. WuHt1ter, 1918.—Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1917 (1918), 72-1038. FEATURES OF THE VEGETATIVE ANATOMY OF THE AUSTRALIAN WHITE BEECH (GMELINA LEICHHARDTII). By W. D. Francis, Assistant Government Botanist, Botanic Gardens, Brisbane. (Plates xxix-xxxi; nine Text-figures.) [Read 26th September, 1928.].- Introduction. The Australian White Beech is a large tree. It is a constituent of the luxuriant rain forests of Hastern Australia. In recent years these forests have dwindled rapidly before the penetration of settlement into areas of the continent possessing a bountiful rainfall and fertile soils. Like the majority of the species of the heavy rain forests of eastern and north-eastern Australia the White Beech is allied to Papuan and Malayan types. These Papuan and Malayan types are sharply contrasted with the Australian element of the flora as exemplified by the commoner components of the Eucalyptus and Acacia forests. The genus Gmelina, of which the White Beech is a species, is distributed in India, Ceylon, Malaya, South China, the Philippines, Papua and Australia. Three species are found in Australia. The one under discussion, Gmelina Leichharatii, is recorded from as far south as Shoalhaven in New South Wales (35° S.) by J. H. Maiden (1904). The writer has seen it as far north as the Hungella Range in Queensland (AL? Sy : Gmelina Leichhardtii is mesophytic in character and in vegetative features possesses little in common with the large section of Australian vegetation which is adapted by xerophytic characteristics to withstand drought, desiccation and the effect of bush fires. The trees in their natural state are now rare, owing to the extent to which the wood has been sought after and the trees felled for commercial timber. In the future the species may be planted extensively in reforesting operations on account of the commercial value of the wood. The popularity and economic value of the White Beech are attributable to the qualities of its wood. Although it is neither highly figured nor particularly ornamental, the wood is durable in exposed situations and can be worked with remarkable ease. In view of the extent to which it has been used it seems some- what remarkable that the timber has not been anatomically described; at least, no microscopical accounts of it have come under the notice of the writer. In this paper a number of the more important features of the vegetative anatomy of the tree will be outlined. The anatomy of the wood will be described and illustrated as this commodity is an important one from an economic aspect. The microscopical characters thus portrayed will be of value in identifying the wood in critical instances. Features such as the shedding of the bark and the structure and mechanism of the stomata deserve consideration on account of their physiological significance. BY W. D. FRANCIS. 475 Some attention will be given to microchemical subjects. An account of the occurrence and distribution of hesperidin or a hesperidin-like substance and some details of the exact location in the wood of the white deposit known as gmelinol are included. Data of this kind may be of assistance in eventually elucidating the biological functions of these and similar compounds. THE Hairy AND GLANDULAR COVERING. The young shoots, young branchlets and petioles are covered by a fine, but dense, brownish pubescence, consisting of short, blunt hairs. Hach hair is situated upon an epidermal cell and consists of 1-5 short cells. When there are more cells than one in each hair the cells are superposed and the terminal cell of each hair is often broad and somewhat expanded (Text-fig. 2). The cell walls of the hairs stain red when treated with an alcoholic solution of Sudan III, indicating that they are cutinized or partly cutinized. The upper surface of the leaf is free of hairs, except on the larger nerves which are sometimes very sparsely clothed with the four-limbed glands shown in Text-figs. 3 and 4. In addition, the leaf surface above the larger nerves in some cases was observed to carry occasional short, Text-figs. 1-4.—Gmelina Leichhardadtii. 1. Types of hairs on under side of leaf. x 50.—2. Portion of epidermis and hairy covering of branchlet. x 70.—3. Four-limbed gland on vein on upper side of leaf, viewed partly in profile. x 300.—4. Four-limbed gland on under side of leaf, surface view. x 300. stellate hairs. The under side of the leaf is furnished with comparatively long, soft hairs which are most abundant on the raised nerves and veinlets. They are mostly composed of two or three superposed cells. The basal cell of each hair is often very short, but sometimes it is elongate (Text-fig. 1). The four-limbed glands illustrated in Text-figs. 3 and 4 are fairly frequent on the under side of the leaves. These peculiar glands are attached to the epidermis by a single globose cell. It is not evident whether these glands serve merely a protective purpose or are concerned with physiological processes such as secretion and exchange of gases. OUTLINE OF ANATOMICAL FEATURES OF THE BRANCHLET, STEM, LEAF AND Root. Branchlets 3-5 mm. in diameter were examined. The epidermis consists of exceedingly small cells which are faintly shown on the outer side of the periderm in the figure of the lenticel (Plate xxix, fig. 4). The most conspicuous feature of the anatomy of the branchlets is the interrupted ring of sclerenchyma between the cortex and phloem. It consists of thickened and lignified bast fibres which in transverse sections often show as semicircular or crescent-shaped groups. A few lenticels occur on the branchlets. They are pale in colour and spindle-shaped in outline. A transverse section of one of them is shown on Plate xxix, fig. 4. 476 VEGETATIVE ANATOMY OF GMELINA LEICHHARDTI, In the bark of the stem of large trees, the interrupted ring of strongly lignified bast fibres which is characteristic of the branchlets has disappeared with the shedding of the outer bark. Scattered groups of thickened and lignified paren- chyma cells are fairly frequent (Plate xxxi, figs. 7, 8, 9). Parenchyma, tangential rows of sieve tubes and rays constitute the other tissue elements of the living bark of large trees (Plate xxxi, figs. 7, 8, 9). The outer dead bark consists of tissue elements of the same categories as those of the inner, living bark. It is separated from the inner, still active bark by a continuous layer of cork-like tissue or periderm. This separating or abscission layer will be considered in more detail subsequently. The sieve tubes are in a collapsed condition even in the living bark some distance inwards from the layer of periderm which defines the inner limit of the dead bark. Apart from the midrib, nerves and veins, the blade or lamina of the leaf is thin and delicate. The venation is strongly raised on the underside of the leaf and imparts firmness to the entire organ. The photograph on Plate xxxi, fig. 10 shows the great degree to which the midrib projects on the underside and the extent to which the midrib exceeds the non-vascular portion of the leaf in thick- ness. The midrib contains a ring of several collateral vascular bundles. Hach vascular bundle is partly enclosed on the outer side by sclerenchyma or thickened tissue which is crescent-shaped in outline in cross sections. The structure of the non-vascular portion of the leaf biade is diagrammatically represented by Text-fig. 5. Very thick cuticle is absent from both surfaces. The stomata are confined to the lower surface. The structure of the stomata is 7 C) a ee eee COREY 8 Text-figs. 5-9.—Gmelina Leichhardtii. ». Part of section through lamina of leaf. The thickened cells on the upper left represent a small vascular bundle in section. In some of the cells the chloroplasts are shown as appressed to the cell walls. In a few cells the nuclei are outlined. x 222.—6. Stoma, surface view. x 700.—7. Stoma in longitudinal section. x 700. 8. Stoma, transverse section through middle. x 700.—9. Stoma, transverse section towards end. x 700. 6 diagrammatically shown in Text-figs. 6, 7, 8, 9. The structure of the stomata will be described and its relationship to the movements involved in opening and closing the aperture will be discussed subsequently. All of the stomata seen were of the type illustrated. The anatomy of the root presents few prominent features. The sclerenchyma on the inner side of the cortex in secondary roots 3 mm. in diameter is much BY W. D. FRANCIS. : 477 less conspicuous and decidedly more discontinuous than that in the branchlets sectioned. The periderm on the outer side of the cortex forms a fairly thick sheath. THE Woop. The wood of branchlets, secondary roots and large stems was examined. It consists of wood fibres, vessels, wood parenchyma and rays. The wood fibres are septate and bear simple pits which are more frequent on the radial walls. The vessels are single or in rows of 2-6; the rows are mostly arranged radially. The perforations of the lateral walls of the vessels consist of numerous crowded bordered pits. Tyloses are frequent in the vessels. The wood parenchyma is scanty and generally confined to the immediate neighbourhood of the vessels. The rays are several cells in width (Plate xxx, figs. 5, 6). The freshly-cut wood of large trees is pale or yellowish-white in colour. Its economic properties consist principally of its durability, its freedom from insect attack and the facility with which it can be “worked” by tools. It possesses a principle which attacks iron. Nails which are driven into it are corroded in the course of time. The white deposit which sometimes occurs in the vessels and rays of the mature wood will be dealt with in detail subsequently. In discussing the durability of the wood the tyloses which are frequent in the lumina of the vessels and the septa crossing the lumina of the wood fibres are to be considered. H. P. Brown (1925, p. 51) states: “Tyloses are indicative of durability in wood because they impede the movement of air and moisture. Fungi and insects are the chief enemies of timber and the former require oxygen and suitable temperature for growth; if these are restricted below the optimum, fungal growth is thereby inhibited. Many of the woods which prove to be durable in contact with the soil and make suitable railway sleepers are featured by abundant tyloses”. As the septa in wood fibres exercise a similar impeding effect on the movement of air and moisture they may also be structural factors which promote the durability of the wood of Gmelina Leichhardtii. The substance gmelinol which is present in the lumina of the vessels, ray cells and sometimes in the lumina of the wood fibres may have a preservative effect on the wood in a chemical way. THE STRUCTURE AND MECHANISM OF THE STOMATA. Sections cut through the middle of a stoma and transversely to the slit or orifice show on each side of the orifice two horizontal cells, one below the other (Text-fig. 8). The walls of the lower cell are thickened. Sections cut in the same plane but towards the ends of the stoma indicate that the cell which was on the lower side in the sections through the middle of the stoma is placed at the outer side and the cell which in the middle of the stoma is on the upper side projects downwards to the lower and inner side (Text-fig. 9). The superficial view diagrammatically shown in Text-fig. 6 demonstrates the position of the cells at the surface of the leaf. The thickening of the walls observed in the lower cell in the section through the middle of the stoma is also noticeable in the same cell when cut towards the ends of the stoma. The two cells shown as the lower ones in the section through the middle of the stoma may be regarded as the guard cells and the two upper ones as the subsidiary cells. Von Mohl (quoted by Haberlandt, 1914) experimentally demonstrated that changes of turgor provide most, if not all, of the motive power in the process of opening and closing stomata. Among other important factors Schwendener 478 VEGETATIVE ANATOMY OF GMELINA LEICHHARDTII, (quoted by Haberlandt, 1914, p. 448) showed that the peculiar distribution of thickened and unthickened areas in the walls of guard cells under the influence of turgor variations produces important changes of shape which are often © requisite to the opening and closing of the orifice of stomata. The structure of the stomata of Gmelina Leichhardtii suggests that the subsidiary cells perform a very important part in the opening and closing of the orifice. Those parts of the subsidiary cells which project downwards to the surface of the leaf towards the ends of the stomata may be specially active in the movements involved in opening and closing. As the turgor of the subsidiary cells increases, these end portions of the cells may expand, press against each other and force the guard cells apart. In this manner the orifices of the stomata may be opened. That the walls of the guard cells are rigid for a great part of their length can be inferred from their thickening. It is possible, however, that the walls of the guard cells may be not thickened at the extremities of the cells and that the extremities of these cells are subject to turgor variations and cooperate with the subsidiary cells in forcing the guard cells apart in the act of opening the orifice. The subsidiary cells may contribute to the opening of the orifice in another way. As their turgor increases their outer lateral walls may be pressed outwards. In this movement the comparatively rigid guard cells would be carried with the outer lateral walls of the subsidiary cells in a direction away from the orifice. CoMPARISON OF ANATOMICAL FEATURES WITH THOSE OF OTHER VERBENACEAE. The trichomes on the surface of the leaf of Avicennia nitida as figured by Solereder (1908) are similar to some of the short hairs on the young branchlets of Gmelina Leichhardtii (see Text-fig. 2). The same author (1908, p. 634) also remarks that a composite and continuous sclerenchymatous ring is rarely present in the bark of the Verbenaceae. Gmelina Leichhardtti is not an exception in this respect, as the sclerenchymatous ring is interrupted in the bark of the twigs, stem and secondary root. According to a Plate figured by H. P. Brown (1925) the wood of Gmelina Leichhardtii resembles that of Gmelina arborea, an Indian tree, in possessing septate wood fibres, paratracheal parenchyma and vessels with bordered pits on their lateral walls. The wood of Gmelina Leich- hardtii resembles that of Indian Teak (Tectona grandis) in having septate wood fibres and frequent tyloses in the vessels, but Teak wood is readily distinguished from Australian White Beech by the arrangement of the vessels in interrupted tangential lines in the spring wood, a feature in wood which is often described as ring-porous. .#. B. Copeland’s figures (1902) of the stoma of Oxydendrum arboreum show that its structure is somewhat similar to that of the stoma of Gmelina Leichhardtu, but in Oxydendrum the guard cells and subsidiary cells are not superposed in the middle of the stoma. From the superficial view the stomata of Gmelina Leichhardtii are somewhat similar in appearance to those of the grasses. THE SHEDDING OF THE BARK. The bark of the stem is mostly grey in colour and scaly in appearance. The outermost dead bark is cast off in small, rectangular or irregular pieces. The bark measures about 14 mm. (0°6 in.) in thickness on a tree with a stem diameter of 60 cm. (2 ft.). The inner, live bark is pale yellowish-brown in colour and is strongly contrasted with the outer, dead bark which is very dark grey or almost black internally. The dead bark constitutes one-third to one-fifth BY W. D. FRANCIS. 479 of the total thickness of the bark. When the bark is severed from the stem, the outer, dead bark readily separates from the inner bark. Microscopic preparations show very distinctly the tissue which separates the living from the non-living bark. The region of division between the two kinds of bark is characterized by the development of a prominent layer of periderm which consists of series of horizontally arranged cells. In the outer- most part of the periderm the cells are collapsed and pressed together. In the intermediate portion of the periderm a few rows of the cells have thickened tangential walis. When fresh sections of the bark are treated with an alcoholic solution of Sudan III the walls of the entire layer of periderm are stained red. This staining by Sudan III is an indication of the presence of a fat-like substance in the cell walls. The layer of periderm is impermeable to moisture. Through its property of preventing the transfer of solutions it acts as a separa- tion or abscission layer between the inner and outer bark. In this way the cells of the bark on the outer side of the periderm are cut off from the supply of nutrient solutions and severed from active cooperation with the inner, living and generative tissues and in consequence cease to function as living cells. Drying out or desiccation follows upon the death of the outer bark and is accom- panied by contraction and cracking. The fracturing which results from contraction is the cause of the scaliness of the bark. The absence of elongated tissue elements of a hardened character in the bark of. large stems facilitates the transverse fracturing which is a part of the processes involved in producing the scales of the bark. The centrifugal pressure developed in stem growth must be a very potent factor in producing longitudinal fractures or fissures in the dead bark. The scales are detached on the inner side along the layers of periderm. As it is often only the outer part of the dead bark on large stems that is cast off, the scales in such cases are freed along layers of periderm which are situated in the outer part of the dead bark. Layers of periderm are produced periodically in the outer part of the living bark and as each layer is generated the layers formed previously are forced outwards. THE OCCURRENCE AND DISTRIBUTION OF HESPERIDIN. In the mounted sections of the branchlets conspicuous needle-shaped crystals were cbserved. These crystals were often arranged in the form of spheres (sphaero-crystals or spherulites), hemispheres, rosettes and paint-brush-like forms. They were yellow or yellowish-brown in colour. Some of the crystal aggregates could be seen in the cells of the pith when sections were freshly cut and mounted on a slide without any medium. From this observation it is concluded that at least some of the crystals probably exist in the plant while it is in the living state. The crystals are insoluble in glacial acetic acid, 50 per cent. hydrochloric acid, concentrated hydrochloric acid, hot and cold water, alcohol, xylol. They are soluble in concentrated sulphuric acid, concentrated nitric acid, 5 per cent. solution of caustic potash and hot glacial acetic acid. H. Molisch (1921) figures Similar crystals under the name of hesperidin. The solubility and insolubility of hesperidin in various reagents as outlined by Molisch (1921, p. 183) and Schneider and Zimmerman (1922) correspond fairly closely with the properties of the erystalline substance occurring in the Australian White Beech. It is therefore assumed provisionally that this crystalline substance is hesperidin. Chemical investigation of the substance is necessary for confirmation of this assumption. 480 VEGETATIVE ANATOMY OF GMELINA LEICHHARDTIHI, The microscopic appearance of the crystal aggregates of hesperidin in the pith of Gmelina Leichhardtii is shown in Plate xxix, fig. 3. The crystals were observed, chiefly in mounted preparations, in the cells of the following parts of the branchlet: the pith adjacent to the wood (copious); the vessels of the wood; the phloem and cortex on the inner and outer side of the sclerenchyma groups (fairly abundant); the cambium (less abundant). The crystals were absent from or very scarce in the central portions of the pith. Minute crystals and crystal groups were very abundant in and about the walls of the protoxylem elements (spiral vessels) and the inner vessels of the secondary wood. In the leaf the crystals were found in the following places: some of the cells of the tissue surrounding the vascular bundles of the midrib, especially on the outer side of the sclerenchyma bands which are situated on the outer side of the vascular bundles; many of the chlorophyll-containing cells of the spongy tissue of the lower side of the lamina; some of the cells of the xylem of the smaller veins. A few crystals were seen in some of the cells of the xylem groups of the vascular bundles in the midrib. The crystals were not seen in the seasoned wood of large trees. Mounted preparations are satisfactory for determining the distribution of the crystalline substance because it is insoluble in the reagents used in preparing the mounted sections. Hesperidin is a glucoside. According to authorities quoted by F. Czapek (1925) it has been decomposed into hesperetin (or hesperitin), glucose and rhamnose. The same author states that phloroglucin and hesperitic acid have been obtained from hesperitin, that hesperitic acid is identical with m-oxy-p- methoxycinnamic acid and that hesperitic acid yields isovanillin on oxidation. Molisch (1921, pp. 182, 183) states that hesperidin is fairly widely distributed in the Rutaceae, that it also occurs in the Umbelliferae, Labiatae, Scrophulariaceae, Lobeliaceae, Valerianaceae, Lythraceae, Compositae and Papilionaceae. The hesperidin in the White Beech appears to originate in the spongy tissue towards the under side of the lamina of the leaf. It may be a secondary product of photosynthesis. If it were a primary product one would expect to find it in the palisade cells towards the upper part of the leaf where the photo- synthetic activity is presumably greater on account of the more intense illumina- tion. From the lamina of the leaf the hesperidin is apparently transferred to the branchlets through the medium of the vascular system of the leaf. Some of the more minute crystalline aggregates observed in the vessels of the wood of the branchlets possibly represented the compound in course of translocation to other parts of the branchlet or to other parts of the tree. The distribution of hesperidin is too general to indicate very clearly where it is used. The fact that it contains carbohydrates and an aromatic compound suggests that it may be utilized in the construction of wood. Czapek (1925, 1 Bd., p. 688) states that for a long time aromatic substances have been obtained from wood. The same author (1925, 1 Bd. p. 684) quotes analyses to the effect that the dry substance of various woods consists of 48-56 per cent. of the complex carbohydrate, cellulose. THE LOCATION OF GMELINOL. The white substance which is often seen in the vessels and rays of the seasoned wood of large trees has been termed gmelinol by H. G. Smith (1912) who investigated it. According to Smith it is crystalline. In the examples examined by the writer no crystals were seen. The material had a granular appearance BY W. D. FRANCIS. 481 and possibly was in the colloidal state. The wood specimens from which the writer’s material was taken might have been exposed to conditions different from those to which Smith’s samples were subjected. In this way the different states, crystalline and granular (colloidal ?), which were observed by Smith and the writer, may be accounted for. That the material investigated by Smith and that examined by the writer represent the same chemical substance in different states is evident from the similarity in their behaviour towards reagents. The writer found the white material to be soluble in concentrated sulphuric acid, alcohol, ether, xylol and glacial acetic acid. Concentrated sulphuric acid formed with it a dark red solution. It was insoluble in concentrated hydrochloric acid and 5 per cent. solution of caustic potash. The material was found to be located in the cells forming the tyloses in the lumina of the vessels, in the lumina of ray cells and sometimes in very minute quantities in the lumina of the septate fibres of the wood. It was not found in the young or living parts of the plant, but was observed only in the seasoned wood of large trees. It is probably present in the walls of the tissue of the seasoned wood in a diffused or adsorbed condition as the tissue of old wood was often coloured deep red throughout when acted upon by concentrated sulphuric acid. Viewed between crossed Nicols the white substance, when separated from the wood and mounted in water, was seen to be strongly doubly refracting. Smith’s measurements of the optical activity of the material are given in his paper. He proposed the following structural formula for gmelinol: eee ee a 5 Cc HE CH HC Coch, OCH, There is evidence to indicate that gmelinol is or may be a product of the partial decomposition of the wood. Smith states that the material collects in the cracks of unsound wood. The inclusion of the substance in the cells of the tyloses in the vessels of the wood also indicates that it is at least a secondary product. An additional reason for regarding it as a secondary product is the fact of its absence from the young, freshly-formed wood. Smith obtained protocatechuic acid from gmelinol by fusion with potasn. Protocatechuic acid together with other substances has been obtained from wood by heating it with caustic alkali according to Czapek (1925, 1 Bd., p. 688). The furfurane, which was considered by Smith to constitute the side chain in gmelinol, may be derived from a pentosane of the wood. 482 VEGETATIVE ANATOMY OF GMELINA LEICHHARDTII, SUMMARY. The structure of the hairs investing the young shoots, branchlets, petioles and under side of the leaves is described and illustrated. The form of peculiar four-limbed glands, which are most frequent on the under side of the leaves, is also dealt with descriptively and diagrammatically. The occurrence and discontinuity of a ring of hardened bast fibres in the bark of the branchlets and secondary roots between the phloem and cortex are outlined. Fairly frequent groups of thickened and lignified parenchyma cells are remarked upon as constituting the sclerenchymatous elements of the bark of the stem of large trees. The anatomical characters of the mature wood of large trees are detailed. In discussing the durability of the wood the effect of the tyloses and the septa of the wood elements in impeding the movements of air and water is referred to. Xerophytic characteristics are lacking in the leaves. The stomata are confined to the lower surface. The structure of the stomata is described and illustrated. It suggests that the subsidiary cells perform a very important part in opening and closing the orifice. The short, blunt hairs of the young shoots and branchlets, the interrupted sclerenchyma ring in the bark of the branchlets and roots and the anatomical characters of the wood are correlated with similar structures in other representatives of the Family. The appearance and structure of the bark of the stem are described. The physical means by which the outer dead bark is resolved into scales and shed are outlined. The results of microchemical investigations of the occurrence and distribution of hesperidin or a hesperidin-like substance in the species and the location in the wood of a white substance termed gmelinol are stated. It is suggested that the hesperidin may be a secondary product of photosynthesis and that it may be used in the construction of wood. Locative and chemical considerations form the basis of a suggestion that gmelinol, which H. G. Smith investigated chemically, may be a partial decomposition product of the wood. References. Brown, H. P., 1925.—EHlementary Manual of Indian Wood Technology. Pl. 14. COPELAND, H. B., 1902.—The Mechanism of Stomata. Ann. Botany, xvi, 327, Figs. 48-51. CZAPEK, F., 1925.—Biochemie der Pflanzen, dritte Auflage, dritter Band, 455. HABERLANDT, G., 1914.—Physiological Plant Anatomy. Translated from 4th German Edition by M. Drummond; p. 448. MAIDEN, J. H., 1904.—Forest Flora of N. S. Wales, vol. i, 188. MouiscH, Hans, 1921.—Mikrochemie der Pflanze, Zweite Auflage, 183. SCHNEIDER, H., and A. ZIMMERMAN, 1922.—Die Botanische Mikrotechnik, 208. SmitH, H. G., 1912.—On the Crystalline Deposit occurring in the Timber of the Colonial Beech, Gmelina Leichhardtii F.v.M. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales, xlvi, 187. SOLBREDER, H., 1908.—Systematie Anatomy of the Dicotyledons. Translated by Boodle and Fritsch; revised by D. H. Scott; vol, i, p. 632. EXPLANATION OF PLATES XXIX-XXXI. The photomicrographs are of sections stained with Heidenhain’s iron haematoxylin and safranin. Figs. 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 were photographed with a 16 mm. apochromat (N.A, 0:3). Figs. 2 and 3 were photographed with a 4 mm. apochromat (N.A. 0:95). Compensating and periplanatic oculars of various powers were used in conjunction with the objectives. BY W. D. FRANCIS. 483 Plate xxix. Gmelina Leichhardti. Fig. 1.—Transverse section through branchlet 3 mm. in diam. About one-half of the entire section is shown. The uppermost dark irregular band represents the hairy eovering of short blunt hairs; beneath it the lighter band consisting of 3-5 rows of cells is the periderm. Below the periderm is the broad cortex consisting of rounded cells with very dark walls. Below the cortex the pale hemispheric or irregularly shaped areas indicate the position of the interrupted sclerenchyma sheath. The dark band below the sclerenchyma shows the position of the phloem; below it the broad, lighter band is the wood (xylem). The white roundish areas in the wood are vessels in section. Following on the wood and occupying the lowermost part of the picture is the pith or medulla; the dark spots in it represent crystal aggregates of hesperidin. x 60. Fig. 2.—Part of transverse section of branchlet 3 mm. in diam. The uppermost part of the picture shows part of the cortex extending inwards between two groups of sclerenchyma (bast fibres). The walls of the bast fibres are thickened and light in colour. The dark-walled cells occupying the middle of the picture and extending across it from left to right constitute the phloem ; the cells in the upper part of the phloem with cut ends showing as roundish apertures consist of phloem parenchyma and sieve tubes; the cells in the lower part of the phloem which are arranged in series and whose cut ends appear somewhat rectangular constitute the cambium or generative tissue. Below the cambium and occupying the lowermost part of the figure is the wood; it is lighter in colour than the cambium. The two large apertures in the wood towards the right are vessels in section. The dark-walled cells in series in the wood constitute the rays. x 210. Fig. 3.—Part of transverse section of branchlet 3 mm. in diam. showing part of the pith adjacent to the wood. The erystal aggregates (spherulites, etc.) of hesperidin are seen in many of the cells as dark bodies or granules with dark margins. The dark roundish bodies on the lower right show the indistinct images of spherulites of hesperidin which are out of focus. On the uppermost side of the picture the elements of the wood are indistinctly seen. The smaller cells on the upper left are the spiral vessels of the protoxylem in cross section; they are out of focus and show false doubling of the walls. x 210. Fig. 4.—Cross section of lenticel of branchlet 3 mm. in diam. The pale tissue is periderm. Above the periderm on each side of the broad opening of the lenticel the small-celled epidermis is indistinctly visible; it has dark walls. Above the epidermis the hairy covering is disposed and is represented as a dark confused mass. To the left of the aperture of the lenticel a short hair is shown in which the junction of two cells is shown; the upper cell has a broad base and rapidly tapers at the apex. The layer of dark cells in the opening of the lenticel has stained deeply with the haematoxylin and resembles in this respect the hairy covering. The phellogenetic cells are shown below the pale mass of periderm cells which are situated towards the middle of the lenticel. The dark tissue in the lowermost segment is the cortex. x 100. Plate xxx. Gmelina Leichhardatii. Fig. 5.—Transverse section of mature wood of large stem. The large apertures represent the vessels in section. Projecting inwards from the walls of the vessels are the tyloses. The elongated cells arranged in long lines from top to bottom of the picture constitute the rays. The meshwork of small, roundish apertures shows the wood fibres in section. x 120. Fig. 6.—Tangential section of mature wood of large stem. The broad irregular pitted band towards the middle of the picture shows a vessel in longitudinal section. The numerous spots on the vessel walls show the positions of the bordered pits. The two slightly oblique lines crossing the vessel are transverse walls. The irregular lines in the upper- most part of the vessel represent tyloses. A small amount of wood parenchyma is shown on the lowermost left side of the vessel. The lens-shaped areas with honeycomb-like pattern are rays in section. The long, wavy dark lines passing from top to bottom are the walls of the wood fibres. The short lines at right angles to the walls of the wood fibres are the septa which cross the lumina or cavities of the wood fibres. x 120. Plate xxxi. Gmelina Leichhardti. \ Fig. 7.—Transverse section through the outer bark at the junction of the living and dead tissue. The light, wavy line across the middle of the picture marks the beginning of the abscission (or separation) periderm layer. Above the white wavy line 484 VEGETATIVE ANATOMY OF GMELINA LEICHHARDTII, is the dead tissue. The tissue extending upwards in the figure for about one inch from the white, wavy line consists of periderm. Above the periderm and occupying the upper- most portion is parenchyma with some sclerenchymatous cells at the upper extremity. Below the white wavy line the regularly seriate cells constitute the phellogenetic tissue from which the periderm originates. Two large groups of sclerenchyma are shown on the lowermost and lower left parts of the picture. x 40. Fig. 8.—Transverse section of the outer living bark on the inner side of the abscission periderm. From and above the middle, large groups of sclerenchyma occupy the picture; the cells in this kind of tissue are only imperfectly defined in the picture. The irregular perpendicular bands on the lower side are the rays of the phloem. The dark, irregular, horizontal lines represent areas of collapsed sieve tubes. The roundish cells composing the ground tissue constitute the parenchyma. x 40. Fig. 9.—Longitudinal section through the outer bark at the junction of the living and dead tissue. Shows the same tissues as Fig. 7 but in longitudinal section. The abscission periderm is shown as the broad, perpendicular band towards the left. The dead tissue commences at the light portion of the perpendicular band and extends to the left of it. The dark, irregular, perpendicular lines on the right represent areas of collapsed sieve tubes. The lens-shaped area of large celis on the extreme right constitutes sclerenchyma. Smaller-celled sclerenchyma is shown below and to the right of the centre. On the extreme right above the large sclerenchyma cells portion of a phloem ray is represented by small horizontally arranged cells. x 40. Fig. 10.—Transverse ‘section through midrib of leaf. Several hairs are shown on the exterior. The dark-walled and thick-walled cells beneath the epidermis (of super- ficial layer of cells) consist of collenchyma. The principal feature of the internal part of the midrib is the ring of eight collateral vascular bundles. The outer side of each vascular bundle is partly enclosed by sclerenchyma which is not shown in detail. The larger, irregularly seriate cells on the inner side of the vascular bundles constitute the xylem. The very minute dark-walled cells of the outer side of the xylem in each bundle form the phloem. The central part of the midrib is occupied by large-celled parenchyma. The large cells between the vascular bundles and the collenchyma also consist of parenchyma. x 40. WILLIAM AITCHESON HASWELL. 1854-1925. (Memorial Series, No. 1.)* (With Portrait.) One of a large family of an Hdinburgh banker, Haswell was born at Gayfield House, Edinburgh, on the 5th August, 1854. While other members of the family showed ability in art and music he, in early life, displayed a preference for quiet reading. His school was the famous Edinburgh Institution, whence he proceeded at a comparatively early age to the University of Edinburgh. Here, at this time, by a happy coincidence, an extraordinary combination of some of the most brilliant teachers of the period found in young Haswell an eager and responsive student, who showed unusual aptitude in these spacious intellectual pastures. After winning high distinction in widely different subjects, he fitly completed a great University career in 1878 by graduating as B.Se. and by winning the Bell-Baxter Scholarship awarded to the most distinguished Natural Science student of his year. He had already graduated as M.A., and in 1887 he achieved his D.Sc. His friend and former colleague, Professor J. T. Wilson, writes: “It must be regarded as a fortunate circumstance that Haswell’s period of training in Natural Science coincided with Professor Huxley’s temporary occupation of the Chair of Natural History in Edinburgh. He thus came under the scientific and personal influence of that great master of animal morphology”. He studied zoology under Wyville Thomson and Huxley: geology under Sir Archibald Geikie, of whose class he was medallist; surgery under Lord Lister. His earlier intention appears to have been to follow medicine as a profession, but even the greatest of surgeons could not induce any deviation from the path set by him in the later years of his University life, and his love of Natural History drew him irresistibly to a scientific career. ‘‘There can be no doubt”, says Professor J. P. Hill, “it was the teaching of Wyville Thomson and Huxley that gave Haswell that bent for marine zoology that characterized him throughout his life’. A friend and fellow student at Edinburgh was Lord Haldane, with whom he studied Mental Philosophy and Logic, and with whom he used to take long walks. According to Lord Haldane, Huxley discovered his conspicuous aptitude in zoology and took much notice of his work. Lord Haldane himself describes the Haswell of that period as a man of real mark, very accurate and devoted to study and interested in knowledge in many forms. ‘‘These early characteristics were precisely those which, within my knowledge of the writer during a long associa- tion, remained throughout as the outstanding and distinctive qualities of a greatly esteemed colleague’. * The Memorial Series will comprise memorials prepared, from time to time, under the direction of the Council, of distinguished Members of the Society who have died.—Eb. 486 WILLIAM AITCHESON HASWELL. Professor W. L. McIntosh, of the Marine Laboratory, St. Andrew’s, in a recent letter to Mrs. Haswell relates the following: “Professor Haswell when a young graduate in Edinburgh and I happened to meet after a celebrated professor’s lecture, and he came to me and said: ‘Did you notice that Prof. gave the wrong number of vertebrae to a certain specimen?’ He was quite right and from that date his wonderful accuracy and acuteness were characteristic to ~ the end. The same care characterized his drawings.” But all the branches of Natural Science, -together with Mental Philosophy and Logic, were not enough to satisfy this avid assimilator of learning. Besides winning seven University medals Haswell also won the prize poem of his year on the subject of the “Death of ‘Livingstone’”’. Amongst the many letters from his Edinburgh teachers is one from Professor P. G. Tait, who states that Haswell was in “Natural Philosophy” “first, with another, the highest place in a very strong year.” Sir Archibald Geikie also wrote of his geology: “You carried everything before you in my class and, what is more, you earned the affectionate remembrance of your class fellows and teacher. In an excursion I had abundant opportunity of cultivating your personal acquaintance and I was led to form the highest opinion of your attainments.” Professor Sir J. Wyville Thomson wrote: “I have the great pleasure in recommending my friend and former pupil, Mr. Haswell, for any appointment connected with Natural Science. Mr. Haswell is an excellent Naturalist, both theoretical and practical and an accomplished and thoroughly reliable gentleman.” Typically characteristic of the adult Professor was the reticent attitude of this modest young prize winner. Only through public notices or through friends did his own family hear of these successes, for he himself would never speak of them. During his longer vacations he found time to travel to some extent through Hurope, and to study in Germany. He apparently missed the summer term of 1877 to attend a course in zoology, anatomy, petrography and histology at Leipzig University, a certificate of which is amongst his papers. Once also he went to America. But with a not over-strong physique the strain of this work was telling on him, and, by way of recuperating his health after taking his degree in 1878, he sailed for Australia. Here he was almost at once welcomed by Sir William Macleay—always on the look out for men through whom, or means by which, he could advance his beloved Natural History. Just as eagerly did the young zoologist respond— scarcely seeming to understand the word holiday or only interpreting it in a way commonly found with men of great mental activity, as change of occupation. Huxley, during his memorable voyage in “‘the Rattlesnake’ spoke of Port Jackson as affording an ideal and prolific region for the marine biologist. It is certain that Haswell must have had this in his mind at this period. At any rate with Sir William Macleay’s help and encouragement a small marine zoological labora- tory was established in a hut at Watson’s Bay, and here Haswell initiated that long series of researches that only came to an end with life itself. The collections resulting from the “Chevert”’ Expedition to New Guinea were being examined and Haswell took a willing share in working on this material. Thus, too, came about the beginning of a long association with this Society, his first contribution being “A description of six new species of Annelids”. This paper was read on 25th November, 1878, but his actual presence at the meeting is not recorded. Nor is there any record of any official employment until his appointment as Curator >) ae ee) ‘ a 18 7 +) ips a p rs al a : \ A i a Mf ra eS = “ v Jia ‘ i = ; ? ae H , ke a é * = : MEMORIAL NOTICE. 487 of the Brisbane Museum in December, 1879, but during the previous twelve months he contributed no less than nine papers to the ProcEEpiINGes of this Society besides two to the Annals and Magazine of Natural History, chiefly on widely different branches of marine zoology. Professor Hill writes of this period: “Young and enthusiastic, Haswell threw himself with great energy into the study of the rich marine fauna of Port Jackson and the adjacent coasts, and in the course of a few years published in the Proceedings of the Linnean Society of N.S.W., numerous papers, mainly of a systematic character, on the Crustacea, Annelida and Bryozoa of the Aus- tralian seas. In particular we owe to him the first description of the giant Phoronis that occurs in Port Jackson and which he named Ph. australis in 1882. Later in the same year he exhibited drawings of the early stages of its development to the Linnean Society. During this period, however, he by no means confined himself to the systematic Zoology of the Invertebrata, but con- tributed papers of value to the Linnean Society on such diverse subjects as the anatomy of birds, the structure of the paired fins of Ceratodus, the skeleton of Elasmobranch fishes, and the early stages in the development of the Emu. In 1886 he described in the Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science the remarkable striate muscle fibres in the wall of the “gizzard” of Syllis, and in 1889 he published the results of a comparative study of the same fibres, in the course of which he described certain remarkable relations between the nerve cells related to them which were of very great interest from the point of view of the neurone theory, and which well deserve reinvestigation. In 1888, also in the Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, he gave the first detailed account of the anatomy of that interesting ectoparasitic Trematode, Temnocephala, a form which will always be associated with his name.” Professor Wilson adds similar testimony “of the scope of his investigations and the catholicity of his interest in the animal kingdom.” Haswell was present as a visitor at the January meeting, 1879, of this Society and was elected a member on April 30th of that year. From January to November of the following year he was at the Brisbane Museum, from which he resigned “under the strong inducement to carry out work nearer to his heart. At the annual meeting of the Linnean Society of New South Wales, 27th January, 1881, Haswell was elected a member of the Council of the Society, on which he served with the greatest regularity till his death. In this year, following the example of Darwin, Huxley, Hooker and Murray in their zeal for first hand knowledge by travel, and metaphorically following the wake of “H.M.S. Rattlesnake’, Haswell seized on the opportunity afforded by the invitation to join “H.M.S. Alert” on a surveying cruise to the Great Barrier Reef. It is regrettable that Haswell himself recorded so little of the incidents of the voyage, but, always a good sailor, he must have revelled in this occasion to study—all too briefly—this illimitable wonderland of marine life. In “Four years in Patagonian, Polynesian and Muscarene Waters, 1878-1882”, by R. W. Coppinger, Staff-Surgeon, R.N., C.M.Z.S., p. 180, this reference occurs: “On leaving Sydney we received a welcome addition to our number in the person of Mr. W. A. Haswell, a professional zoologist, residing at Sydney, who expressed a wish to accompany me as far as Torres Strait in order that he might have the opportunity of studying the Crustacean fauna of the east coast of Australia. He was consequently enrolled as an honorary member of our mess, and Captain Maclair kindly accommodated him with a sleeping place in his cabin. I am indebted to Mr. Haswell for much valuable information concerning the marine zoology of Australia.” oO 488 WILLIAM AITCHESON HASWELL. On his return he carried out an engagement to Sir William Macleay— who thus showed his thorough appreciation of the brilliant young naturalist— by giving a series of twenty lectures on Zoology at the Garden Palace under the auspices of the Linnean Society of New South Wales. In 1882 he was appointed Demonstrator in Comparative Anatomy, Physiology and Histology in the University of Sydney; the title being changed in November, 1884, to Lecturer in Zoology and Comparative Anatomy and Demonstrator in Histology. Always interested in the Australian Museum he published that year a valuable Catalogue of the Australian Stalk- and Sessile-eyed Crustacea and. during the absence of Dr. E. P. Ramsay from March, 18838, to February, 1884, he was Acting-Curator of that Institution. On the 8rd February, 1891, he was elected a member of the Board of Trustees of this Museum, in which capacity he gave his valuable services until his resignation in December, 1923. “Such was the reputation Haswell had established for himself as an original investigator and teacher that the Senate of the University, when the Challis Professorship of Biology was instituted in 1889, offered him the Chair, and this he held continuously until his retirement in 1917” (J. P. Hill). The title was, however, altered to that of Professor of Zoology in 1914, on the appointment of a Professor of Botany. On his retirement the Senate of the University conferred on him the honoured title of Professor Emeritus. During his tenure of the Chair, he three times obtained leave of absence from the University of Sydney for the purpose of visiting many Huropean Universities as well as those of England, Scotland and Wales. In 1891 the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science held its biennial meeting at Christchurch, New Zealand. Haswell was President of the Biological Section and thus came into intimate contact with Professor T. Jeffery Parker with whom he formed a close friendship, leading to their joint authorship of the famous Text-book. Of importance, too, was the meeting which followed with a gifted young pupil of Professor Parker, Josephine Gordon Rich, co-author with her teacher of a paper on the Myology of Palinurus. Miss Rich was a cousin of his friend, Lord Haldane. Quite naturally Haswell became the guest, then and during following visits to New Zealand, of her father, W. Gordon Rich, at his beautiful home, Toi-Toi. Just as naturally, too, this friendship, commenced through, cemented by, and continued in congenial tastes, led in 1894 to the happiest of marriages and real life mateship, for Mrs. Haswell to the end took the keenest and most sympathetic interest in the work of her husband, generally accompanying him on his expeditions and on his two forms of relaxation, trout-fishing and golf. Mrs. Haswell also contributed a valuable share to the drawings of the Text-book of Zoology. Not the least of Haswell’s legacies to the University of Sydney was the Zoological Museum founded by him and continually developed throughout his career as a valuable supplement to the oral and written work of his teaching. Many visiting teachers from German and other Universities have paid tribute to the high standard and value of this Museum. “Outside the ranks of professional zoologists Haswell is perhaps best known to the scientific world as the joint author, with his staunch friend the late Professor T. Jeffery Parker, of the monumental Text-book of Zoology’, now (1928) - in its 4th Edition, “which was first published in 1898 after several years of unremitting toil on the part of the authors” (J. P. Hill). This has become the standard text-book in the Hnglish language; and it is used extensively and highly appreciated in America as well as throughout the British Empire. Owing MEMORIAL NOTICE. 489 to Professor Parker’s death shortly after the publication of the original edition, the second (1910) and the third (1921) editions were entirely prepared by Haswell; as was also the abridged “Manual of Zoology” first published in 1899 and reprinted in 1908, 1913 and 1918. The fourth edition of the Text-book was issued in 1928. This contains 1,536 pages in two volumes, and includes valuable supplements on Distribution (23 pp.), Philosophy of Zoology (24 pp.), and History of Zoology (22 pp.). “The Text-book is a monument of scholarship and is apt to disconcert the unwary student who, deceived by the ease of its English, fails to realize the compression of its matter throughout.” (R. H. Cambage). The late Professor Launcelot Harrison wrote in 1926 of this work: “It has maintained its pre-eminence for nearly thirty years. To the zoological con- fraternity in the United States the University of Sydney was known as Haswell’s University.” Then in discussing the future of Zoology he wrote: “The trend of Zoology is changing. The experimental method, still in its infancy, is making rapid strides and its results are so important that they, together with recent advances in physiology, must largely replace the pure morphology of current text-books. But ‘Parker and MHaswell’ will always hold its place as an Encyclopaedia of Morphology and Comparative Anatomy to which the zoologist must refer, just as he still refers to the ancient Owen’s ‘Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates’ for facts which are not otherwise easily accessible.” The wide use and appreciation of the “Text-book of Zoology” is further indicated by its translation into Russian by M. A. Menstier (Moskva, 1908). as Ze ei Nena Se ONSET ey ee 7)! t a ? a arsed a SM (( |e 4 i Dy ene ALIN) Ce) Wy \ a “WW Text-fig. 12.—Transverse section of two anther lobes showing young spore tetrads, and inner tapetum (t,). Starch grains are in wall and anther tissue. Gice Text-fig. 13.—Inner tapetal cells showing heavy granular cytoplasm, multi- nucleate condition and reticulate “exine’”’ (et). x 495. Text-fig. 14.—Three spores, of a tetrad in the wheat-grain condition, cut along the groove, transversely and obliquely. ep, thickened part of the exine; -I BY I. V. NEWMAN.- 51 The megasporangium is early initiated at the tip of the receptacle (nucellus) as a unicellular hypodermal archesporium (Text-fig. 17). The archesporium undergoes the normal periclinal division to form the primary parietal and sporogenous cells (w and p, Text-fig. 18). The receptacle, beginning to bend about this time, becomes differentiated into funiculus (f), chalaza (C), and a further portion lying to each side of and projecting slightly beyond the sporogenous cell (Text-figs. 20 and 24). The indefinite tapetal function is carried out by adjacent cells of the receptacle and parietal tissue and by the non- functional spores (Text-figs. 20 to 26, 42, 43 and Plate xxxvy, fig. 27). Several. Sporogenous Tissue. The sporogenous tissue will be described in a separate section of the paper. f Text-fig. 16.—Serial section, from the apex down, of an anther, showing an origin of four loculi by the bifurcation of two initials. 1’ and 1”, apices of the two primary loculi which divide into the branches l,, 1, and 1,, 1, respectively. The dead-black is the stomium region. a-f x 20, g and h x 10. Parietal Tissue. The ultimate development of the parietal tissue is very massive. By a few anticlinal divisions the primary parietal cell develops into a single layer across the top of the primary sporogenous cell (w in Text-figs. 19 and 20). Its further growth- can only form a cap above the sporogenous cell which is distinctly sunken in the receptacle tissue. Periclinal divisions, setting in before synapsis, make a three-layered wall at that time (Text-figs. 21 to 23). Further divisions increase the layers to about seven at the stage of the functional spore (Text-fig. 42 and Plate xxxiv, fig. 21). eg, unthickened part of the exine facing the groove; g, bottom of the groove. x 495. Text-fig. 15.—Part of transverse section of two loculi of an anther showing the beginning of dehiscence, the dense contents of certain epidermal cells border- ing the sinus, the bands of thickening in the tissues, the persisting “exine’”’ of the inner tapetum (et). x 147. LIFE HISTORY OF DORYANTHES EXCELSA, i, 518 ory N re — Now = Wane mein rata Ww, (nucellus) ; p, primary sporogenous cell; cells from the primary parietal cell wo 2p oO * BEKO ES sa8 ge Sage Bees Ss i. cS 4 7G BQ ES ZS @) SI ey OY np > 3 3 aS SS) ai a O @ 6 (5) 25) mS 5 orc GE. o 2 n Ce oH cD) ome ge Bnx sm oR me 2, m tel Gel te Oca fel si! (2) Io 3H 5: mae PH ie} tel Se gay 1! eon oo © Ho fe] ef et as Gy a= PPozEaSs 3 fe wag Go on O oe mc tener: Seren nee I — & Bo #3) oe cane wm n oa as 8 ap fl © is fe e088 Bs .§ to © & f=] ane {e) i = the development of the megasporangiun o =| ay op ~ D dH 5° n ok So G ou) 1 ° 4 ra) © 6 Hod 0 | 2 Par m 2 BY I. V. NEWMAN. 519 During this development the wall attains a markedly radiate appearance, which is clearly shown in the photomicrograph presented on Plate xxxv, fig. 27. There is a slight beak (0) projecting into the micropyle. The parietal tissue is here quite distinct in appearance, compared with the receptacle (nucellus) tissue at the sides of the embryo-sac. It is still evident in the seed, the crushing of its inner layers having been compensated by cell division in the outer regions. Receptacle tissue. The receptacle, in the adult condition, is massive, a feature which becomes manifest soon after the bending differentiates it into funiculus (f), chalaza (C), and the further portion, generally known as “nucellus’ (2) which undercups the mother cell and derivative structures. This “nucellus”’ is very broad towards the chalaza, producing a pear shape. The funiculus extends into the loculus to form the beginning of what will be the wing of the seed (Text-fig. 27). The develop- ment of the funiculus, chalaza and “nucellus’” is to be seen in Text-figs. 19, ai, 24-27, Plate xxxiv, fig. 21, and Plate xxxv, figs. 23 and 27. Text-figs. 24-26.—Stages of the development of the ovule. The differentia- tion of the placenta, and growth of the integuments. 1, “‘nucellus’’; C, chalaza ; f, funiculus; ii and oi, inner and outer integuments; S, margin of carpel; t, and t,, inner and outer zones of tapetal function. x 90. receptacle curved; ii, inner integument primordium; », “nucellus”’, p, primary sporogenous cell becoming mother cell; t, and t,, inner and outer zones of tapetal function; w, wall layer of four cells, x 430. 21: Receptacle completely curved and differentiated into funiculus (f), chalaza (C) and “nucellus” (12); ui, inner integument; oi, outer integument primordia; p, megaspore mother cell; S, margin of carpel; t, and t,, inner and outer zones of tapetal function ; w, parietal tissue, x 250. 22: Early stage of synapsis in the mother cell; wall about 2 layers thick x 410. 23: Late stage of synapsis (chromatin loops) lettering as in fig. 21. x 430. 520 LIFE HISTORY OF DORYANTHES EXCELSA, i, The inner integument is originated by increased growth in a ring of epidermal cells level with the base of the young mother cell about the time the placenta begins to bend sharply. In similar manner the outer integument starts soon after- wards, though the bending of the placenta prevents it being a complete ring (Text-figs. 20 and 21). Developing as a collar two cells thick, the inner integument grows faster at first than the massive outer integument, which catches up after the inner has bent over the top of the sporangium (Text-figs. 23, 25, 26 and Plate xxxiy, fig. 21). The inner integument forms a micropyle of medium length. In this region it is more than two layers thick, the two sides of the integument appearing club-shaped in longitudinal section of the ovule (Text-fig. 27, Plate xxxiv, fig. 21 and Plate xxxv, fig. 27). The cells lining the micropyle are elongated and glandular. The early receptacle (nucellus) tissue is uniform (Text-figs. 18 and 19), but about the time the inner integument arises, some of its cells adjacent to the mother cell take on a tapetal function (t,, t., Text-fig. 20). As the megaspore begins to germinate, certain cells of the “nucellus” at the chalazal end of the rap Bae Pe Text-fig. 27.—Transverse section of a loculus showing a mature ovule. Epidermis has dense contents. The megasporangium, with functional spore germinated, is heavily outlined. ep, appressed epidermes of abaxial sides of carpel (sporophyll) ; f, funiculus; C, chalaza; 1, loculus; m, thick-walled cells at base of sac; n, “nucellus’”; p, sporangium; S, margin of carpel (sporophyll) ; w, beginning of wing development of funiculus. » 66. BY I. V. NEWMAN. 521 growing sac become very thick walled with a mucilaginous appearance; the thickening extends for a depth of several cells towards the vascular supply which ends blindly in the chalaza (m in Plate xxxv, figs. 27 and 28 and Text-fig. 27). Tapetal Tissues. The receptacle cells of tapetal function are in two zones, the inner of which, t,, is composed of large clear cells and organizes the nutrition received from the disintegration of the outer, t, (Text-figs. 20-26). The zonation is very irregular, but persists till the production of the spores; after which it is obliterated by the growing sac. The growth of the sac, by crushing adjacent placental and parietal cells and the non-functional spores, brings these elements into the tapetal function (Plate xxxv, fig. 27, Text-figs. 42 and 43). DISCUSSION. Relation of Sporangia to Sporophyll. Though the anther, which is more than four microsporangia, and the ovule, which is more than a megasporangium, are now organs sui generis, it seems desirable to describe them in terms which indicate their continuity with the ancestral forms. Risking the charge of using a rigid morphology, such an attempt has been made in this paper. In the case of some plants, great modifications in structure or displacement of position, or both, make such a presentation difficult. Doryanthes excelsa presents neither of these difficulties. In the megasporangium the archesporium is clearly marked. In connection with the microsporangium, however, a difficulty is introduced by the failure to locate a definite archesporium. This may be due to the primary sporogenous function gradually settling on a small group of cells (Plate xxxiv, figs. 16 to 19 and Text-fig. 8), or to a strictly localizable archesporium not manifesting the typical staining reactions referred to by Coulter and Chamberlain (1903, p. 33). This doubt only involves the allocation of the wall of the sporangium. If Plate xxxiv, figure 16 record the hypodermal origin of the microsporangium, then all the apparent wall tissue is sporangial. If Text-figure 8 present the position of the archesporium from which are formed primary parietal and primary sporogenous cells, then not all the apparent wall can be regarded as sporangial, and the zonation of this wall shown in Text-figures 9 and 10 would be accounted for, the region t, being the true parietal tissue of the sporangium, and the larger cells to the outside sporophyll tissue. The evidence does not warrant a definite pronouncement, though I regard it as favouring the latter interpretation, in which case an interesting analogy could be drawn between this sporangium and that of the Kusporangiate Filicales, where the archesporium is more or less deeply sunken. Campbell (1898, p. 8) describes the archesporium in Lilaea subulata as arising from the outermost layer of the plerome. In the present instance the archesporium is too far from the vascular bundle to allow of such an origin. The non-hypodermal origin of the archesporium has also been recorded for Naias flexilis and probably Zannichellia (Campbell, 1897, pp. 13 and 41). The position of the archesporium in the hypodermal layer of the receptacle (nucellus) is quite normal for the megasporangium. The recognition of the structure S in Text-figure 6, as the margin of the sporophyll and not a placenta, and the restriction of the term sporangium to the products of the archesporium, involve modifications in the terminology of the ovule. Only a primary parietal cell or its products can be strictly regarded as sporangium wall, and therefore a tissue so derived is no more “nucellar cap’ than is the embryo sac part of the 522 LIFE HISTORY OF DORYANTHES EXCELSA, i, “nucellus’”. Coulter and Chamberlain (1903, p. 62), referring to the primary parietal cell, say, “. . . . we shall call it the parietal cell—that is, a cell that develops in part the wall of the embedded sporangium”. In view of the implied homologies, it seems better to regard as wall only the tissues derived from this cell. Under this view, the “‘nucellus’ becomes part of the receptacle, bearing a monosporangiate sorus. There is an histological distinction between sporangium wall and receptacle tissue (Plate xxxiv, fig. 21, Plate xxxv, fig. 27, and Text-fig. 42). The chalaza and funiculus are regions of the receptacle, and the integuments are indusial outgrowths from it. A point in connection with confusion of. terms from the aspect of implied homology may be mentioned here. In the Filicales the receptacle is a region of the sporophyll on which sporangia arise; in the Angiosperms the receptacle is the term generally used to refer to the region of the stem on which sporophylls arise. The term has been used in this paper to correspond with its use in connection with the Filicales. The interpretation given above for the sporangial structures is strongly suggested by the appearances in Doryanthes excelsa. The chief objection will probably be raised in connection with the megasporangium which is generally regarded as being represented by the ‘nucellus.”’ Goebel (1905, p. 614) says: “We distinguish usually in it* a stalk or funicle, one or more integuments, and the nucellus enveloped by the integuments. The nucellus is the megasporangium. This is undoubted.” But previously he says, in reference to the sporangia of Pteridophyta (p. 601), “So far as I can see the. simplest expression of the facts regarding the first inception of the sporangia is this: the essential content of the sporangium—the sporogenous cell-mass + sporangial wall-—can be traced back to a superficial cell, cell row or cell mass. This divides by periclinal walls. In this way the primordia of the wall and the sporogenous cell-mass are separated. Hi This restricted origin does not seem consistent with regarding the “‘nucellus” as the sporangium, but is consistent with the interpretation given in the present paper. Bower (1923, p. 258) refers the origin of the sporangia to definitely localized regions, of one or few cells. Coulter and Chamberlain (1903, p. 62) say that the primary parietal cell ‘‘develops in part the wall of the embedded sporangium”’. If the nucellus is the sporangium, in what is the sporangium embedded? The interpretation given in this paper appears to be implied by the statement of Coulter and Chamberlain. The contention is that this interpretation is supported by the accounts of other writers (quoted), and is necessary for accurate homologies. Campbell (1918, p. 603) states: “The integument of the ovule is, with very little question, homologous with the indusium”; and indicates a great similarity between the young megasporangium of Azolia and the developing ovule. Cheaveaud (1892, p. 142) after describing the abaxial ovules in the Asclepiadaceae says: “On admettait jusqu’ici que toutes les Angiospermes produisent leurs ovules sur la face supérieure ou sur la portion marginale de leurs bords carpellaires, et ce caractére constituait l’une des différences invoquées pour séparer le groupe des Angiospermes de celui des Gymnospermes ... . Or chez la plupart des Cryptogames vasculaires, les sporanges sont situés a la face inférieure des feuilles; les Angiospermes, par la situation de leurs ovules, se distinguaient done des deux autres groupes de plantes vasculaires. L’observation précédente montre que cette distinction n’existe pas.’’ *7.e., the ovule. oO i) Ww BY I. V. NEWALAN: Sporangium Wall. The unusually massive wall (parietal tissue) of each sporangium is in line with the great size of the flower. Goebel (1887, p. 368) records Agave americana with 8 to 12 layers in the wall of the microsporangium; Doryanthes excelsa has about 10 to 11; whereas Coulter and Chamberlain (1903, p. 34) regard 3 to 5 as the usual number. It has already been shown that there is a little uncertainty as to the morphological unity of the apparent microsporangial wall on account of its zonation and undiscovered initial. Fullmer (1899, p. 82) in Hemerocallis fulva describes the primary “tapetal’” (parietal) cell dividing to “. . .. a wall layer and an inner layer. The inner layer divides once, forming an intermediate or middle layer, and the layer which develops into the peripheral part of the tapetum.” Mascré (1919a, p. 1120), in Datura arborea, describes the primary parietal layer giving rise to an outer layer and the tapetal layer, the outer layer giving rise in its turn to the transitory layer and the parietal layers (‘‘assises , transitoire et parietales”). The zonation in the wall of Doryanthes excelsa might quite well be a massive counterpart of the zonation described by the two observers just referred to, particularly in view of Mascré’s statement that, by the time the pollen grain acquires an exine, the transitory layer has dis- appeared; as has the zone t, in Text-figures 10 to 15. In Doryanthes excelsa the amplification of the parietal tissue accompanies that of the sporogenous tissue, the usual occurrence according to Coulter and Chamberlain (1903, p. 38); but in Hemerocallis fulva (Fullmer, 1899, p. 82) it does not develop till the “sporogenous cells are enlarging”’. The wall of the megasporangium is massive, and with its radiate appearance simulates the tissue developed from the several-celled primary parietal layer in the Rosaceae. In the Monocotyledons the tendency is to suppress the parietal tissue. In other members of the Amaryllidaceae there is marked suppression. Nevins (1927, p. 372) describes Furcraea (Fourcroya) andina (one of the Agavoideae) as having one or two layers. Pace (1913, Plate xiii, fig. 4) figures no parietal layer in Atamosco (Zephyranthes or Hebranthes) texana. Church (1916, p. 399) describes no parietal layer in Cooperia Drummondii. Stiffler (1925, p. 212) describes a sub-hypodermal mother cell and says that no “tapetal’” cell is cut off in Cyrtanthus parviflorus. In general, what parietal tissue there is seems usually to be destroyed by the developing sac, though Coulter and Chamberlain (1903, p. 103) record cases where it remains a cap over the embryo sac, as in D. excelsa. Receptacle tissues. There is no clearly marked receptacle in the anther. The massive “nucellus’” of Doryanthes excelsa is primitive compared with the suppression of it to an axial row in the highest orders, as Orchidaceae, Lobeliaceae, Rubiaceae, and Compositae (Coulter and Chamberlain, 1903, p. 58). The thick mucilaginous walls of some cells of the “nucellus” at the base of the sac are not associated with an haustorial development thereof (the usual case), the antipodal pocket remaining quite small. Schiirhoff (1926, p. 484) divides the Amaryllidaceae into three groups, those with two, one and no integuments; the first have the normal four megaspores and the other two follow the Lilium type. The following members of the Agavoideae have two integuments and four spores, from one of which the embryo sac develops: Agave clorantha and A. attenuata (Schlimbach, 524 LIFE HISTORY OF DORYANTHES EXCELSA, 1, 1924), Fourcroya cubensis (Ernst, 1918), #F. altissima (Schlimbach, 1924), F. andina (Nevins, 1927, pp. 371-2). D. excelsa also falls into this group. Dehiscence. A possible indication of dehiscence connected with the megasporangium is the occurrence of heavy mucilaginous walls at the base of the embryo-sac. These may be vestiges of ‘‘transfusion tissue” (cf. Jeffrey, 1917, ch. 15). Jeffrey (1917, ch. 15) regards the endothecium (fibrous layer) of Angiosperm microsporangia (usually limited to the outer parietal layer, Coulter and Chamber- lain, 1903, p. 34) as being descended from a massive endothecium connected to the centripetal wood (of Gymnosperms). The connection has disappeared in D. excelsa, but little spatial restriction has occurred. There is, however, a restriction in time, the bands of thickening being laid down about the time of division of the microspore nucleus, later than the usual tetrad formation (Coulter and Chamberlain, 1903, p. 38). In D. excelsa the stomium lacks precise organiza- tion, appearing crude beside the neat, specialized stomium of Lilium. Tapetum. In spite of the disparity of precision in the origin and organization of the tapetal tissues connected with the two kinds of sporangia in Doryanthes excelsa, there is an underlying uniformity, consisting in the formation of two functional zones, the inner of which organizes the food supplied by the disintegration of the outer for the nourishment of the sporogenous tissue. The zones are less clearly distinguishable in the ovule; but in both cases the inner zone is itself used up about the time of the first division in the germination of the spore. Whereas the highly organized tapetum of the microsporangium is of primary sporogenous origin, the tapetal zones for the megasporangium are of receptacle origin only. In connection with the microsporangium, Coulter and Chamberlain (1903, p. 37) consider the most frequent origin of the tapetum to be from the innermost layer of the parietal tissue. However, they record its origin from the primary sporogenous cells in Zostera (Rosenberg, 1901), some Asclepiadaceae (Frye, 1901) and probably in Ranunculus (Coulter, 1898) and Astilbe (Webb, 1902). Mascré (1919a, p. 1120) describes the origin of the tapetum partly from the primary parietal layer and partly from the cells of the connective in Datura arborea. Ina later communication (1919b, p. 1214) he confirms this by describing it in Datura tatula, D. stramonium, Solanum dulcamara, Hyocyamus, Nicotiana and Atropa), and concludes (p. 1215): “Ce ne sont pas, comme on a prétendu, des cellules archesporiales (ou sporogénes) stériles, redevenus végétatives. Leur évolution est bien é€videmment déterminée par leur position et leur réle physiologique.” But D. excelsa has a definite early sporogenous origin for its tapetum. Schiirhoff (1926) regards the tapetum as of early sporogenous origin; he says (p. 239): “Die Staubbeutel stellen Mikrosporangien dar und die sich in ihnen entwiekelnden Pollenkorner sind als Mikrosporen aufzufassen. Durch der Oberfliche parallel gehende Teilungen der auf die Epidermis folgenden Zellschicht wird die Bildung des Pollen bildenden Gewebes eingeleitet. Die inner Lage dieser Zellen liefert nach Abgabe der Tapetenzellen in weiteren Teilungen die Pollenmutterzellen.”’ He proceeds to give evidence from the nuclear phenomena in the tapetum for regarding its cells as primarily sporogenous. The multinucleate condition is described as due to normal mitosis; the previous interpretation of it being due to amitosis was a misinterpretation of later nuclear fusions for this process. Such fusions produce BY I. V. NEWMAN. 525 “syndiploid” or tetraploid nuclei which, in further divisions, show double the normal chromosome number. Bonnet (1912) describes the division of the tapetal nuclei by two successive mitoses into four nuclei, homologized with the four nuclei derived from the mother cell. With this, and further study of the tapetal cytology, he proposes to establish the tapetum as a sterilized product of the primary sporogenous tissue. Such a study has not been carried out with Doryanthes excelsa, but the two normal mitotic figures at the same stage in one tapetal cell of Text-figure 11 suggest the findings of Bonnet, as above. Further evidence for this interpretation in Doryanthes excelsa is the “exine”’ developed on the walls of the tapetal cells. Mascré (1919a, p. 1121) describes what appears to be a similar phenomenon. Mascré (1919a, 1919b) describes the tapetum as. receiving supplies in solution, remodelling and temporarily storing them; finally giving them up and degener- ating. In the present case, however, the tapetum does not disappear till the micro- spore nucleus is dividing, so it would appear that there must be some passage of material through it. Doryanthes excelsa does not show any periplasmodium (dissolution of the walls of the tapetum producing a multinucleate plasmodium) or marked projection of the tapetum among the young microspores as recorded for some cases by Schiirhoff (1926, pp. 240 and 241). Juel (1915) finds the periplas- modium more frequent among the Monocotyledons than among the Dicotyledons. Schiirhoff (1924) concludes that the periplasmodium is a late development, as yet not general, and occurring frequently with another advanced state, namely the tri-nucleate pollen grain. Again Doryanthes excelsa does not manifest the advanced condition. SPOROGENHSIS. DESCRIPTION. MICROSPORE. Sporogenous tissue. The cells of the young sporogenous groups are typically straight-sided, have large clear nuclei with prominent nucleoli, and dense cytoplasm minutely vacuolate (Text-fig. 9). Hach group is uniform in appearance. Text-figure 10 shows the deeply staining group as having increased from seven to seventeen cells in diameter, and become differentiated into sporogenous and tapetal groups. There are two zones in the sporogenous group, an outer (p,) whose radially elongated cells have more copious, minutely vacuolate cyto- plasm, and an inner (p.) whose nearly isodiametric cells have scarcer, largely vacuolate cytoplasm. The nuclei of both these sporogenous zones are large and clear, with. very prominent nucleoli. The form aspect of this zonation persists somewhat till the early stage of synapsis (Plate xxxiv, fig. 20). This zonation is to be correlated with the disintegration of many of the more central mother cells, due probably to their greater distance from tapetal sources. The disintegration provides a nourishing fluid matrix in which the dividing mother cells float freely (Plate xxxv, fig. 29). This fluid was observed during collection of the material. The typical stage of synapsis is shown in Plate xxxiv, fig. 20. Reduction Division. In the formation of chromosomes the usual loop-like processes with chromatin dotted along them (Text-fig. 28), extend across the nuclear cavity (Text-fig. 11) and give rise to the chromosomes opposed in pairs (Text-fig. 29). The uniformly 526 LIFE HISTORY OF DORYANTHES EXCELSA, i, dense, minutely vacuolate cytoplasm of the synapsis stage has now become zoned, the inner zone staining more deeply and being denser with larger vacuoles (Plate xxxv, fig. 29, Text-figs. 29 and 30). The nuclear membrane disappears and the simple bipolar spindle appears in a lenticular cavity (Text-fig. 30). There is no sign of multipolar origin for the spindle. The egg-shaped chromosomes pass Text-figs. 28-37.—Stages in the division of the microspore mother cell. Some plasmolysis present. 28: Loosening of the synaptic knot, and disposition of chromatin granules. 29: Paired chomosomes and band of dense cytoplasm. 30: Equatorial plate stage of reduction division. $1: Metaphase of reduction division. 32: End of telophase of reduction division. 33: Evanescent cell plate. 34: Three consecutive sections of the second division, equatorial plate stage. 35: Metaphase of second division. (Spindle not all included longitudinally). 36; Simultaneous wall formation. 37: Young tetrad with dark bodies in cytoplasm. 28, x 985. 29-33, x 960. 34, x 1030. 35, x 1040. 36-37, x 1000, BY L. VY. NEWMAN. or bo -1 somewhat irregularly to each pole, where a nuclear membrane is formed and a reticulum begun. An incipient cell plate is not completed and disappears together with the spindle and zonation of the cytoplasm (Text-figs. 31-33). A comparison of the number of chromosomes in Text-fig. 29 (about 40) with that in Text-fig. 31 (two groups of approaching 20 each) shows that a reduction has taken place. The Second Division. Without entering into a resting condition, the two free daughter nuclei proceed to the second division. The chromosomes are curved and longer than in meiosis (Text-fig. 34) and pass more regularly to the poles of the spindle. The spindles are perpendicular to the meiotic spindle, but are at various angles to one another (Text-fig. 34, right angles, and Plate xxxy, fig. 25, parallel and inclined). They are, moreover, independent of one another. The four Gaughter nuclei invariably take up a tetrahedral position before simultaneous wall formation occurs, shutting off the four spores, each with its complete wall, within the mother cell wall (Text-figs. 36 and 37). Text-figure 12 shows the tetrahedral arrangement without exception; the division is therefore simultaneous. The young spores (Text-fig. 37) have the cytoplasm as a close network with several deeply staining bodies scattered through it. Nucleoli have formed (cf. Text-fig. 36) and a linin network is forming, but the chromosomes are still definite. The Spores. The wall of the mother cell soon disappears; the spores maintain their tetrad position for some time (Text-fig. 14 and Plate xxxv, fig. 24), but ultimately become separated. When the exine gains its reticulate thickening (ep) the contents of the spore appear to diminish temporarily so that the pore, which occupies one side of the surface, is drawn inwards, giving the spore a wheat-grain appearance (Text-fig. 14). The spore is replenished from the tapetum and the groove is almost obliterated, the mature spore then being about 45 » long with reticulately thickened exine and single large pore (Plate xxxv, fig. 24). The chromatin is in a light open reticulum—not in a complete resting condition—and the cytoplasm is light with large vacuoles. MEGASPORE. Sporogenous Tissue. The primary sporogenous cell enlarges considerably as it becomes the mother cell (p, Text-fig. 20). The early stage of synapsis occurs when the inner integu- ment has reached the top of the sporangium (Text-fig. 22). Reduction Division. The lateral net-work ball of synapsis sends across the nuclear cavity, loops (Text-fig. 23) having chromatin dotted along them (Text-fig. 38, c). The egg- shaped chromosomes, numbering about 40, are opposed in pairs (Text-figs. 38-40). There are two zones in the cytoplasm, and the only spindle seen was definitely bi-polar. The end of this division was not observed. In the second division of tetrad formation, there are approaching 20 chromo- somes in each group passing towards poles of the spindles (Text-fig. 41); reduction has therefore taken place. 528 LIFE HISTORY OF DORYANTHES EXCELSA, i, At the end of reduction division a wall is formed (iw, Plate xxxv, fig. 26). It is clear that the left hand (micropylar) cell is by no means as well developed as the right hand (chalazal) one (see also Text-fig. 41). The Second Division. The second division follows quickly. The micropylar cell, though already beginning to disintegrate, enters upon division (Plate xxxv, fig. 26) and usually completes the process. As with microsporogenesis, the chromosomes in this second division are longer and curved, and the cytoplasm loses mest of its zonation. At the close of the division, walls are formed shutting off the four spores. The spore formation is of the successive type. Spores. Of the four young spores (Text-fig. 42) the two micropylar ones (p, and p,) are always insignificant and much disintegrated; the two chalazal ones are larger. Text-figs. 38-41.—Stages in the division of the megaspore mether cell. Some plasmolysis present. 38: a and 6, consecutive sections showing the chromosomes in pairs with zonation of the cytoplasm; c, two retarded chromatin loops (1, in a@) showing disposition of the granules. 39-40; Consecutive sections showing the equatorial plate stage of reduction division. 41: Metaphase of the second division; w, wall formed after first division. 38, a, b. x 450; ¢, x 975; 39-40, x 965; 41, x 1005. BY I. V. NEWMAN. 529 The upper of these chalazal spores is smaller and already showing evidence of disintegration; whereas the lower one is healthy and turgid. The functional spore comes to maturity (Text-fig. 43) at the expense of the three upper (micro- pylar) spores. Its cytoplasm is plentiful but largely vacuolate with massive strands supporting the nucleus in the central region. The chromatin of the nucleus appears to attain to a resting condition as a fine network. DISCUSSION. Homologies. The term spore has been used here to denote each of the four uni-nucleate products of tetrad division. The term “pollen” is reserved for the partially germinated microspore that is shed. The term “embryo-sac”’ is employed directly the megaspore nucleus divides, development proceeding through the two-, four-, and eight-nucleate stages. Such a terminology seems to be more consistent with the implied homologies, than to call the embryo-sac and completed pollen, “‘spores”’, for, though the gametophyte truly begins with the reduced number of chromo- somes in reduction division (Coulter and Chamberlain, 1903, pp. 41-42), the spore, being the first reasonably definitive element in the gametophyte, is more suitable for description as generated by a sporophytic element than is any product of its own further development. oe Text-figs. 42-43—The megaspores. 42: Showing the megasporangium and part of the nucellus; p,,, the spores; w, the wall of the sporangium. 43: The functional spore with resting nucleus; crushed spores at the top. 42, x 450; 43, x 975. 530 LIFE HISTORY OF DORYANTHES EXCELSA, i, Rutgers (1923, pp. 15 and 16 and fig. 10), discussing the morphology of the embryo-sae structures as affected by the suppression of divisions in the megas- pore mother cell, records Ernst’s (1908a and 19080) division of the production of the sac into two processes: Embryo-sac formation and embryo-sac development. The end of the first process corresponds to the organization of the functional spore. Such a distinction of processes agrees with the selection of the spore as the point at which to break off the account. Schiirhoff (1926, pp. 244 and 247) and Campbell (1918, p. 603) homologize the spores of the Angiosperms with those of the heterosporous Pteridophytes. For _the facilitation of this the terminology of this paper has been arranged. But, according to the views expressed in the present paper, if the pollen is more than uni-nucleate when shed, the microspore has begun to germinate before shedding, and therefore the microspore as well as the megaspore is retained, at least partially. The Sporogenous Tissue. Two or three divisions usually occur between the primary sporogenous and microspore mother cells (Coulter and Chamberlain, 1903, p. 38), but in conformity with its large size, D. excelsa shows five or more (Text-fig. 8 and Plate xxxiv, fig. 20). The hypodermal archemegasporium, producing primary sporogenous and primary parietal cells with the functioning of the primary sporogenous cell as mother cell, is typical. Stiffler (1925, p. 212), in Cyrtanthus parviflorus, describes a megaspore mother cell which is sub-hypodermal, yet states that no “tapetal”’ cell is cut off. Is the hypodermal layer in that case derived from a primary parietal cell, cut off together with the “mother cell” from a hypodermal archesporium? In other members of the Amaryllidaceae, such as Atamosco texana (Pace, 1913, p. 377) and Cooperia Drummondii (Church, 1916), the hypodermal archesporium functions as mother cell, a condition advanced over that of Doryanthes excelsa. The process of synapsis in D. excelsa suggests the findings of Lawson (1911) who describes the nuclear membrane being distended by great osmotic pressure in the karyolymph, so that the chromatin ball is left in the centre or to the side, according as the distension varies between uni- and equilateral. Schaffner (1909, pp. 201 and 202), on the contrary, after studying living material of the Amarylli- daceous Agave Virginica, concluded that synapsis is an artifact. Reduction Division. In Doryanthes excelsa, the dark-staining zone of cytoplasm round the reduction spindle is a sure means of distinguishing it from a spindle of the second division. Lloyd (1902, pp. 71, 72) describes such a zonation in the cytoplasm of the Rubiaceae. Fullmer (1899, p. 81), in recording a similar occurrence in Hemero- callis fulva, suggests that it is an artifact due to the chromic acid in the killing solution. In Agave Virginica, Schaffner (1909, Figs. 48, 52, 56, 57, 59) depicts a slightly dark zone in a similar situation, at the anaphase in some cases, but not during the metaphase, when there is sometimes a slightly darker zone at the poles only (Figs. 76, 77, 81). The figures in both Schaffner’s paper and this paper are of preparations from material killed with chrom-acetic acid solutions. There would seem, therefore, to be support for the suggestion that the phenomenon is an artifact. BY I. V. NEWMAN. ‘ 531 The spindle of Doryanthes excelsa is bi-polar from the beginning, as is that in the microspore mother cell of Agave Virginica, described by Schaffner (1909, p. 206) who regards multipolar spindles as artifacts caused by mutilations during sectioning. Fullmer (1899, p. 82) describes spindles bi-polar from their inception in Hemerocallis fulva. Doryanthes excelsa is to be added to Schiirhoff’s (1926, p. 485) record of Tziolirion montanum (Stenar, 1925) as the only member of the Amaryllidaceae to have the simultaneous type of microspore development. Since simultaneous division is characteristic of Dicotyledons, and successive of Monocotyledons, Doryanthes excelsa must be considered primitive in this respect. The megaspore formation is of the successive type, but, by the inequality of the daughter cells of the reduction division, is seen to be tending to the Lilium type where the mother cell functions as the spore. Nevins (1927, p. 372) describes successive division for Furcraea andina, a closely related species; but the Lilium type is recorded for several members of the Amaryllidaceae: Cyrtanthus parvi- florus (Stiffler, 1925, p. 212), Atamosco terana (Pace, 1913), Cooperia Drummondii (Church, 1916), Narcissus (Guignard, 1882). Second Division. It seems that in true simultaneous tetrahedral division the second division spindles should be at right angles. The presence of parallel spindles in this division, and an evanescent cell plate in reduction division of microsporogenesis indicate a trend towards the successive division more characteristic of the Mono- cotyledons. Fullmer (1899, p. 82) reports the spindles in Hemerocallis fulva to be mostly parallel, but occasionally oblique. In his figures the four daughter nuclei appear to be in a plane, but with simultaneous wall formation. This would represent a further stage towards successive division. The tendency shown by D. excelsa to suppress the divisions in megasporo- genesis is carried a step further by two other Amaryllidaceae: Galanthus nivalis (Stenar, 1925) has the division of the micropylar daughter cell suppressed, whereas Pancratium maritimum (Shadowsky, 1925) has the chalazal one suppressed; in both cases the chalazal element functions as the spore. If such a progress towards the Lilium type of embryo-sac formation is evolutionary advance, then the Agavoideae group of the Amaryllidaceae is, so far as described, of the more primitive type. The Spore. The single pore in the microspore is Monocotyledonous. But the sculptured exine is a Dicotyledonous characteristic (Coulter and Chamberlain, 19038, p. 131); and therefore might be regarded as a primitive feature in a Monocotyledon. The deeply staining bodies in the very young microspores suggest wandering chromo- somes or karyomeres. Lary de la Tour (1908, pp. 835 and 836) describes similar ‘bodies giving rise to supernumerary nuclei in the nearly related Agave attenuata. Though a slight irregularity in the ‘drill’ of the chromosomes in the ‘second division of the mother cell suggests an origin of these bodies, their organization as supernumerary nuclei has not been observed in Doryanthes excelsa. The functioning of the innermost megaspore is normal. But in the nearly related Furcraea andina, the micropylar spore functions (Nevins, 1927, p. 373). Cc 532 LIFE HISTORY OF DORYANTHES EXCELSA, 1, CHROMOSOME NUMBER. A brief examination of the chromosomes during the reduction and second divisions for both spores indicates a number approximating 20 haploid and 40 diploid chromosomes. This is seen best in Text-figs. 29, 31, 34, 38, 39, 40, 41. Other confirmatory accounts have been made in the case of microsporogenesis. In one division of a microspore nucleus there were 20 pairs of haploid chromo- somes ranged around the equator of the spindle. In several vegetative nuclei in the ovule, approaching 40 diploid chromosomes were counted. I would say that there is a reasonable probability that the number for Doryanthes excelsa is between 18 and 22 haploid chromosomes. CHRONOLOGY AND SYNCHRONOLOGY. GENERAL. No very precise statements can be made in regard to the seasons (chronology ) of development. The flowering stems are produced over a period of two or three months, and the inflorescences each take a number of weeks to expand their full complement of flowers. Thus, in one inflorescence examined on 14th September, 1927, there were 156 flowers ranging from about 0:5 centimetres long to those whose perianth had fallen, i.e. from before organization of an archemicrosporium or of the ovule primordia to fertilization. The relative times (synchronology ) for the stages of development in any one flower can be ascertained with reasonable accuracy. CHRONOLOGY. The flowering stems for the 1928 season appear in late November and in December of 1927, though some still make their appearance during the early months of 1928. The first flower buds begin to form at the tip of the stem in late February and early March. The archesporial stage in the anther is probably first formed in March; it has been collected at the end of June, and has been found, just beginning to wither, in September. The first microspore mother cells attain synapsis early in April, by which time the primary megasporogenous cell can be identified. Even these dates are probably late, as the largest flower so far referred to would be three centimetres long, whereas flowers 17 centimetres long with complete embryo sacs and mature pollen were collected on 26th May, 1927, and others at about the time of fertilization on 4th July of the same year. In contrast, microspore reduction was collected on 26th November, 1926. It appears, therefore, that any stage can be collected over a period of about five months, and that reduction is occurring during the whole of the winter. By collecting from traumatic flowers, it is possible to obtain a wide range of stages even in January, at the end of the season. SYNCHRONOLOGY. The synchronology will be presented in a table. From the preceding section it will be clear that time units can not be used. The time periods will be repre- sented by periods of growth in length. The length of the flower is measured from the insertion of its pedicel on the axis. The left hand column gives the terminal length for each period. The lines of development are correlated as organogeny, microsporogenesis and megasporogenesis. BY I. V. NEWMAN. Table of Synchronology. 533 The stage of the archesporium is in italics, that of synapsis is in SMALL CAPITALS. Max. approx. length of Organogeny. Microsporogenesis. Megasporogenesis. flower in cm. 0:02 First sign of outer perianth. Pl. XxXxiii, figs. 10, 11. 0-1 First sign of outer stamens. 123, XXxiii, figs. 10, 11. 0-138 First sign of carpels. Text-fig. 2, flower 4. Carpels occur between Sections 68 and 88. 0:3 Carpels closing into the | General grouping of | centre; fusion of meri- | cells under anther lobes. stematic zones. Pl, | Pl. xxxiv, fig. 16. Sooo, iss, 125) ii 0-6 Differentiation of sta- | Primary sporogenous | Bee into filament and | group first definite, anther. ; primary parietal three layers. Pl. xxxiv, figs. 17-19; Text-fig. 8. 1-2 Carpels taking form as | Sporogenous group in-rolled sporophylis; | about 8 x 10 cells; | perianth-stamen tube | parietal tissue 6 to 7 definite. cells across. Text-fig. 9. 2-0 | Carpel surfaces ap- | Differentiation of tape- | First sign of ovule pressed; anthers grow- | tum and _ sporogenous | primordia. Text-fig. 5; ing down over fila- | groups and their zona- | Plate xxxv, fig. 22. | ment. Text-fig. 4. tion. Text-fig. 10. 2°5 Stalked carpel fused at Placenta definite. back to perianth-stamen tube. Text-fig. 5. 3°0 | Placenta bending. Hypo- dermal archesporium. Text-fig. 17. By SYNAPSIS; INNER PAR- | Primary sporogenous IETAL ZONE CRUSHED; | and primary parietal COLLECTION OF STARCH. | cells. Text-fig. 18. | P). xxxiv, fig. 20. 5:0 Margin of sporophyll | Reduction division and | Inner integ. begins; well advanced. Text- | tetrad formation; outer | Megaspore mother cell; fig. 24. tapetum crushed. Pl. | placenta curved; first XXXv, figs. 25, 29; Text- | tapetal function. Text- figs) 11, 12, 28-3i7- figs, 19-24; Pl. sxxxv, fig. 23. 7-5 Outer integ.; periclinal division in parietal layer. Text-fig. 21. 534 LIFE HISTORY OF DORYANTHES EXCELSA, 1, Table of Synchronology.—Continued. The stage of the archesporium is in italics, that of synapsis is in SMALL CAPITALS. Max. approx. | length of Organogeny. Microsporogenesis. Megasporogenesis. flower in cm. 8-5 Microspore: exine thick- | SYNAPSIS; INNER INTEG. | ened, wheat grain shape; | LEVEL WITH TOP OF fluid matrix; exine on SPORANGIUM ; OUTER IN- | tapetum. Text-figs. 13, TEG. HALF WAY. ‘Text- | 14. figs. 23, 25. 9-0 | Reduction and second divisions; four spores; inner integ. over sporang.; outer integ. ANE (OO, IE sxcrocy, ities, 26; Text-figs. 26, 38- 42. See also Text-fig. 5) “1b 10 | Microspore filled out, | Functional spore; other | mature. Pl. xxxv, fig. 24. | three disinteg.; Pari- etal six layers; Micro- pyle; outer integ. above sporang. Pl. xxxiv, fig. | 21; Text-fig. 43. CONCLUSION. Detailed conclusions will be reserved for Part 2 of this paper. Certain general considerations are presented at this stage. The Amaryllidaceae are placed high among the Families of the Monocotyledons; Doryanthes excelsa exhibits numerous characters which have been interpreted as primitive; and despite its “epigyny,’ it even appears in several instances more primitive than the Liliaceae (hypogynous). There are therefore indications that Doryanthes excelsa must be placed systematically low among the Amaryllidaceae. Because of the clearness with which Doryanthes excelsa shows some of its primitive features, I have ventured to suggest that some of the terms used in Angiosperm morphology should be reconsidered in the light of the homologies implied by them between phenomena in the Angiosperms and in more primitive phyla. The terminology in this paper was arranged with this end in view. It is in the interpretation of the carpels and ovules that the changes are most noticeable. SUMMARY. Doryanthes excelsa belongs to the Agavoideae section of the Amaryllidaceae. Occurring only on the east coast of Australia, its local distribution is governed by edaphic factors, the boundaries of communities being frequently very sharp. It has the habit of a large herb with radicle leaves. There is a “forerunner tip” on the leaves (possibly on the perianth and stamens), which is suggested to be a vestigial pneumatophore. The plant is regarded as an “evergreen bulb”. The inflorescence is a compound raceme; the flowers are large and numerous. In the flower the whorls arise acropetally, their members spirally but with alternation in successive whorls. The separate primordia later merge to produce the perianth-stamen tube with the carpels adnate; so that the flower is regarded oT i) oO BY I. V. NEWMAN. as not truly epigynous, nor the gynaecium truly. syncarpous. The anther has four sporangia. The character, growth, form and tissues of the carpels clearly reveal them as involute leaf structures, with abaxial ovules. The floral development points to the leafy shoot origin of the flower. The sporangial structures offer facilities for indicating homologies with organs of more primitive Phyla. In the microsporangium, the deeply sunken origin of the sporogenous tissue without clear formation of a primary parietal cell suggests the sporangium of the Eusporangiate Filicales. The tardy appearance of the extensive fibrous layer is a step towards its restriction. The tapetum of the microsporangium is of sporogenous origin; its details of function and its possession of an “exine”’ indicate a primitive condition. One exceptional case of two bifur- cating sporogenous groups was observed. In the ovule, only the products of the archesporium—the spores and parietal tissue (‘‘nucellar cap’’)—are regarded as the sporangium which is sunken in the receptacle (“‘nucellus”). The parietal tissue is histologically distinct from the nucellus, the massiveness of both tissues being primitive, and unusual for a monocotyledon. Thick-walled cells at the base of the germinating megaspore suggest a vestige of dehiscence. Though of different origin and slightly organized, the tapetal function corresponds physiologically with that of the microsporangium. There are two integuments. Normal reduction takes place in the development of both spores, the occur- rence of a band of deeply staining cytoplasm (recorded by other writers) being probably an artifact, due to chromic acid in the fixing agent. The spindles are bi-polar. In microspore development, however, the spindles of the second division may be oriented, the daughter nuclei become tetrahedrally placed, and the spores are formed by simultaneous wall development (among the Amaryllidaceae occurring only in Iziolirion montanum and D. excelsa). A trend to the successive type (monocotyledonous) can be observed. The single pore is monocotyledonous, the sculptured exine dicotyledonous. The unicellular -megasporogenous tissue functioning as mother cell is primitive beside the condition in some other Amaryllidaceae. Megaspore formation is by successive division; but by the weakness of the micropylar product of reduction division is seen to be tending to the Lilium type. The inner megaspore functions. The term “spore” is restricted to each of the four uninucleate products of tetrad division, so that not only is the megaspore retained, but also the microspore. The division of the spore at this point is in line with Ernst’s division of embryo-sac production into ‘formation’ and “development”. The haploid number of chromosomes is between 18 and 22. The time during which flowering occurs is very extended. Any one stage can be collected over a period of five months. The critical period of reduction is occurring all through the winter. Synchronology is presented in a table. In general, Doryanthes excelsa is primitive among the Amaryllidaceae. Certain of the appearances in it have suggested changes in the terminology of the flower and of spore production. Acknowledgements. This work was begun under the direction of the late Professor A. A. Lawson, from whom much helpful criticism was received. During the whole time I have been in close touch with Mr. P. Brough, of this Department, under whose personal 536 LIFE HISTORY OF DORYANTHES EXCELSA, 1, supervision some work was done on this investigation during the course for the Honours degree, B.Sc. His interest and encouragement have meant a great deal to me. Professor Osborn’s criticism has been of great assistance in preparing this paper for publication. I would thank Assistant Professor McLuckie for advice given from time to time. Mr. C. E. Boden, B.Sc., B.Sc.N.A., and Mr. H. G. Gooch prepared many of the photographs and photomicrographs reproduced in this paper. Literature Cited. ARBER, AGNES, 1925.—Monocotyledons, A Morphological Study. Cambridge, At the University Press. BONNET, J., 1912.—Recherches sur l’évolution des cellules nourriciéres du pollen chez les Angiospermes. Areh. Zellforsch., Bd. 7. Bower, F. O., 1919.—Botany of the Living Plant. Macmillan, London. , 1928.—The Ferns (Filicales). Vol. 1. Cambridge, At the University Press. CAMPBELL, D. H., *1897.—A Morphological study of Naias and Zannichellia. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sc., Series 3, Bot. Bd. 1. —_———_—, 1898.—The Structure and Development of the Flower and Embryo in Lilaea subulata. An. Bot., Vol. 12. , 1918.—Mosses and Ferns. Macmillan, New York. CHEAVEAUD, G., 1892.—Sur lVinsertion dorsale des ovules chez les Angiospermes. C. &. Acad. Sci. Paris, Tome 114. CuHurcH, A. H., 1908.—Types of Floral Mechanisms. Pt. 1. Clarendon Press, Oxford. CuHuRCH, M. B., 1916.—The Development of the Embryo sac and Embryo of Coopevia Drummond. Bull. Torrey Bot. Cl., Vol. 438. CORREA DE SERRA, J., 1802.—On the Doryanthes, a new Genus of plants from New Holland, next akin to the Agave. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., Vol. 6. CouLtTer, J. M., *1898.—A Contribution to the Life History of Ranunculus. Bot. Gaz., Vol. 25. COULTER and CHAMBERLAIN, 1903.—Morphology of Angiosperms. (Reprint 1912). Appleton, New York. ENGLER and PRANTL, 1889.--Die naturlichen Pflanzenfamilien. Vol. II, 5. Leipzig. Ernst, A., $1908a.—Zur Phylog. des Embryosackes der Angiosp. Bev. dewts. bot. Ges., 26a. , £1908b.—-Drgebnisse neuerer Unters liber den Embryosack der Angiosp. Verh. schweiz. naturf. Ges., 91 Jahres-Vers. Glarus. Bd. 1. ———— —, 71918.—-Bastardierungals Ursache der Apogamie im Pflanzenreiche. Wine Hypothese zur Experimentellen Vererbungs-und. Abstammungslehre. Jena. FARREL, M. E., 1914.—The ovary and embryo of Cyrtanthus sangwineus. Bot. Gaz.. Vol. 57. Frye, T. C., 1901.—The Development of the Pollen in some Asclepiadaceae. Bot. Guz., Vol. 32. FULLMER, I. I, 1899.—The Development of the microsporangia and microspores of Hemerocallis fulva. Bot. Gaz., Vol. 28. GOEBEL, K., 1887.—Outlines of Classification and Special Morphology. English Trans- lation. Clarendon Press, Oxford. ———+—,, 1905._-Organography of Plants. Pt. II. Eng. Trans. (1. B. Balfour). Claren- don Press, Oxford. : GUIGNARD, L., *1882.—Recherches sur le sac embryonnaire des Phanérogames Angio- spermes. Arn. Set. Nat., Bot., Bd. Vi, 13. HABERLANDT, G., 1914.—-Physiological Plant Anatomy. Eng. Trans. (Drummond). Mac- millan, London. JEFFREY, If. C., 1917.—The Anatomy of Woody Plants. University of Chicago Press, Chicago (2nd Impression, 1922). JuEL, H. O., 71915.—Untersuchung tiber die Auflosung der Tapetenzellen in den Pollen- sacken der Angiospermen. Jahrb. wiss. Bot. Bd. 56. LARY DE LA Tour, E., 1908.—Sur des particularités cytologiques du développement des cellules-mére du pollen de l‘Agave attentuata. C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, Bd. 146. Lawson, A. A., 1911.—The Phase of the Nucleus known as Synapsis. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, Vol. 47, Pt. 3, No. 20. Luoyp, F. H., 1902.—The Comparative Embryology of the Rubiaccac. Mem. Torrey Bot. (Glee Wb Bia INIO, ap Re. 7A ‘ co “1 BY I. V. NEWMAN. or Lotsy, J. P., 1911.—Vortrage tiber Botanische Stammesgeschichte. Vol. III, Jena. Mascr&, M., 1919a.—Sur le role de l’assise nourriciére du pollen. C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, Bd. 168. ————, 1919b.— Nouvelles remarques sur le r6éle de l’assise nourriciére du _ pollen. C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, Bd. 168. Moore, C., 1893.—Handbook of the Flora of New South Wales. Govt. Printer, Sydney. NEVINS, B. I., 1927.—The development of the Macrogametophyte of Furcraea andina. Amer: Journ. Bot., Vol. 14, No. 7. Pack, L., 1913.—Apogamy in Atamosco. Bot. Gaz., Vol. 56. RENDLE, A. B., 1904.—The Classification of Flowering Plants. Vol. I. rymnosperms and Monocotyledons. Cambridge, At The University Press. ROSENBERG, ©., *1901.—Utber die Pollenbildung von Zostera. Medd. Stockh. Hogsk. bot. Inst. Ruvcers, F. L., 1923.—The female gametophyte of Angiosperms. Ann. Jard. bot. Buitenzorg, Vol. 33. SHapDOWSKY, A. E., 71925.—itber die Entwicklung des Embryosacks bei Pancratiwm maritimum. Ber. deuts. bot. Ges., Bd. 43. ScHAFFNER, J. H., 1909.—The reduction division in the Microsporocytes of Agave Virginica. Bot. Gaz., Vol. 47. SCHLIMBACH, H., 71924.—Beitra’ge zur Kenntnis der Samenanlagen und Samen der Amaryllidaceen mit Berticksichtigung des Wassergehaltes der Samen. Flora, N.F., Bad. 17. ScHURHOFF, P. N., +71924.—Zytologische Untersuchungen in der Reihe der Geraniales. Jahrb. wiss. Bot., Bd. 63. ————,, 1926.—Die Zytologie der Bltitenpflanzen. Ferdinand Enke. Stuttgart. Scott, D. H., 1917.—An introduction to Structural Botany, Pt. I. Flowering Plants. A. & C. Black, London. STENAR (S. son), A. H., 71925.—Embryologische Studien. II. Die Iimbryologie der Amaryllideen. Akad. Afh. Upsala. STIFFLER, EH. G,, 1925.—Development of the embryo sac in Gasteria, Cyrtanthus and Velthemia. Bot. Gaz., Vol. 79. : WeEsBB, J. E., *1902.—A Morphological Study of the Flower and Embryo of Spiraea. Bot. Gaz., Vol. 33. For correction of names see REHDER in Bot. Gaz., Vol. 34, p. 246. * Cited on the authority of Coulter and Chamberlain, 1903. 7 Cited on the authority of Schtrhoff, 1926. + Cited on the authority of Rutgers, 1923. EXPLANATION OF PLATES XXNII-XXXV. Plate xxxii. 1. Railway clearing one mile south of Waterfall Station, showing habit. Inflorescences not fully expanded. Southern gully near Menai showing protusion of Doryanthes in the Eucalyptus forest. No flowering; at the time of profuse flowering at Waterfall. General view of inflorescence. Lower flowers expanded, upper still closed Subtending bracts are discernible. About 1/,, natural size. 4. Part of an inflorescence, showing details of flower. ¢, tip on perianth; st, stigma; n, nectar. About 4 natural size. Young ‘‘forerunner tip’’ at the apex of the leaf. Diagonal line at end of lamina. 4 natural size. 6. “Forerunner tip”, withering; end of the leaf also withering. Diagonal line at end of lamina. 3 natural size. 7. “Forerunner tip’ and end of leaf withered. Diagonal line at end of lamina. 4 natural size. 8. Stem bearing ‘‘traumatic flowers” after the head has been cut off. bo Os ol Plate xxxiii. The model. A, bract of youngest flower; B, bract of next older flower; C, final minute bract: PS or SP, perianth-stamen tube; a, youngest flower; b, flower next in age; c, carpels; g, groove in carpels; p,, outer perianth; p,, inner perianth ; Ss, outer stamens; s,, inner stamens; ¢, tip on perianth (‘forerunner tip’). The variegation has no significance. Magnifications are of the original apex. 538 LIFE HISTORY OF DORYANTHES EXCELSA, i. 9. General view. Two young flowers to either side with bracts trimmed away, and in the centre two bracts enclosing younger flowers. x 12:5 (horizontal), x 15 (vertical). 10- and 11.—Two youngest flowers and bracts (central portion) cut through and opened out, L.S. x 14 (horizontal) and x 17 (vertical). 12; and 13. Oldest flower (left hand portion) cut through L.S. x 17:5 (horizontal) and x 21 (vertical). 14. and 15. Next younger flower (right hand portion) cut through 1.5. x 21 (horizontal) and x 25 (vertical). ‘ Plate xxxiv. 16. Transverse section of a young anther. No archesporium showing. x 180. 17. Transverse section of a slightly older stage of the anther. Two lobes of each of two anthers shown with a vague grouping of cells and density of cytoplasm under each lobe. x 200. 18. Part of a longitudinal section of one lobe of an anther with the early sporogenous group organized about three layers below the’ epidermis. w, wall of the sporangium. x 180. 19. Transverse section of part of two anthers, showing the early sporogenous groups : at the same age as that shown in fig. 18. w, wall of sporangium. x 180. 20. One microsporangium, early synapsis stage. Zonation of sporogenous tissue shown. t, and t,, inner and outer tapetum. Starch is present in the wall. Transverse section. x 120. 21. At the time of the functional megaspore; showing flow of tissue into margin (S) of carpel rather than into the funiculus (f). C, chalaza; w, sporangium wall; n, ‘“nucellus”. T.S. gynoecium. x 90. : Plate xxxv. Photomicrograph of another section of the transverse series selected for Text-fig. 5. ‘Showing tissue differences and epidermes of the carpels which appear as involute leaves adnate to the perianth stamen tube. x 6:5. 23. Photomicrograph of part of a transverse section of an ovary showing that the tissue difference between carpel and perianth-stamen tube encloses the midrib of the carpel. Six double lines of carpel epidermis are shown radiating from the central region. The young ovules are at the same stage as that of Text-fig. 19. The right hand placenta (nucellus) contains a primary sporogenous cell. e.p., two of the epidermis lines; N, placenta (nucellus); S, margin of carpel; v, midrib of carpel; W, approximate limit of carpel tissue. x 36. 24. Part of loculus in anther showing mature microspores with exine formed (reticulate) and the tapetum with its ‘‘exine”’. ep, exine on microspores; et, ‘‘exine”’ on tapetum; P, pore of microspore; t,, inner tapetum. T.S. x 240. 25. Part of a loculus of the anther showing parallel and oblique orientation of spindles in. the second division of the mother cells. t,, t,, inner and outer tapetum. Saxe 4 0: 26. Second division in the megaspore mother cell showing the wall (iw) between the two first daughter cells.. (Micropyle to the left). x 480. 27. Part of the ovule showing the sunken megasporangium after the functional spore has germinated. b, beak on wall of sporangium; c, chalaza; m, thick-walled cells at base of the sac; n, base of the ‘‘nucellus’’; ¢, crushed “nucellar”’ cells; w, wall of the sunken sporangium. T.S. gynoecium. x 120. 28. Showing the thick walls of the cells of the placenta (nucellus) at the base of the embryo-sac. m, thick wall. T.S. of the gynoecium. x 360. 29. Loculus ‘of the anther showing various stages of reduction division, the zonation of cytoplasm and the thick walls of the mother cells. The mother cells towards the left (place of dehiscence) are more advanced. The inner tapetum has broken away from the outer tapetum. t,, inner; t,, outer tapetum; T.S. x 120. bo bo NEW AUSTRALIAN MYDAIDAE (DIPTERA). By I. M. Macxkerras, B.Sc., M.B., Ch.M. {Read 31st October, 1928.] Since the review of this family by Mr. G. H. Hardy (These ProcrEpDINGs, 1, 1925, 139-144), five new species have come to hand and I present here descriptions of these, together with a key to the Australian species of the family and notes on additional synonymy based on information received by Mr. Hardy from Major E. E. Austen, of the British Museum. Nearly all the material before me comes from the Macleay Museum, University of Sydney, and the types of the new species will be lodged in that Institution. It has been possible to recognize all the known species, with the exception of Miltinus sordidus Westw. I am indebted to Mr. A. Musgrave of the Australian Museum for material assistance in elucidating the problems presented by some of the older descriptions. The wing venation of the Mydaidae is rather complex and is interesting in that the disposition of the branches of media is practically identical with that of the Nemestrinidae. The “oblique vein” is present and, but for the uniform presence of r-m, has practically the same constitution; it is, however, more irregular and more transverse in position. The media of Trichophthalma and Nycterimyia figured in a previous paper (These PROCEEDINGS, 1, 1955, fig. 3a, p. 495, and fig. 15b, p. 553) corresponds very well with that of Diochlistus and Miltinus respectively. While this resemblance is striking, it cannot, I think, be used for phylogenetic purposes unless supported by other structural similarities. The length of the antennae (principally of that part composed of the elongate third segment) offers a useful character for subdivision within the genera. These groups appear on other grounds to be natural ones and the distinction between species with long antennae and those with short antennae is sharply defined in both genera, with the single exception of Miltinus maculipennis Westw., which is intermediate in structure, although apparently to be allied with the species with short antennae, to which group M. dentipennis, n. sp., also belongs. Key to the Species. 1. M, and M, separate, i.e. two veins reaching the wing margin between R, and the EM OYSD:< Paes toes a llth lo Isc hee cui MAY R A aianl CRG SE PRUE Rl op aL sey rte ee oi Genus Diochlistus ...... 2 M, and M, fused, i.e. one vein reaching the wing margin between R, and the apex 8g DOD CETE IS -GRERS NE GER GEA GSS PEROT Oh teu Cache CH ONO CIC EAI Gtct- aL Pasa SICH BERRA A Genus Miltinus “eiaheaai ses 6 2. Antennae markedly elongate, third segment at least five times the length of the HES anh SECON KtORESEMEI | porta oat snstste coer eee) Re apa el sre Rae SS aah asa er See peamnte 3 Antennae much shorter, third segment but little longer than the first and second EOIN” Mois G hecrend O MIONE Codi Glo eo O ERO POI O ha Erol athe ors ial Hee metoha bin G sto Gis cial ola siete 5 3. Wings mostly bright orange, opaque; abdomen orange with indefinite transverse black markings towards the base ......................- D. auripennis Westw. Wings brownish, transparent; abdomen with alternating black and lemon-yellow TOME Ea NERS) Pl ayy Ce ame CER TIGHD GR OAEES Feo CASIO) CUORERO Re CORREO CECI CIRO cic acioss Gitta crcl Sic: GREE Rene a eter 4 4. Face and apical half of hind femora orange to bright brown; robust species ...... Te ection, sh coreieursme eu me re mep sadly krone! a te nm Kesar sine ie eyes D. melleipennis Westw. Face and apical half of hind femora black; smaller, more slender species ........ Eee pe ne. eet ERRATA SEN MSY Aaa ce bespaitld a Sanne Bcahaueme er Waele See ead D. gracilis Macq. 540 NEW AUSTRALIAN MYDAIDAE, 5. Abdomen black, without pale bands; wings deeply suffused with dark brown .... SCE CHORES ROR RORE CROMER ECE OO 0.0" 550 De OLE eRe (6 Gon OO CiorUrS D. nicholsoni, n. sp. Abdomen grey to black, with conspicuous, narrow, pale yellow fasciae; wings [hi o) ont geu buaVonMes His IN ea. O Ose tar iain be TOR Once cee Dacre o.oo So cle alot OI o D. mitis Gerst. G WAS Walle GomspiGniews Gleycdke loropian saMepAnrss 5 oococcceocc occu n sous sueocoKS "7 Wings hyaline or more or less infuscated, never with a definite pattern .......... 8 7. Wings hyaline, with pale yellow fore margin and a single large dark brown patch TT EVE MC OMIM es ian he Hee OS, teins eucheap ales ee Coe muietseegehe temas pene M. maculipennis Westw.. Wings with the anterior two-thirds dark brown, the posterior margin of the dark colour being irregularly dentate ..................-.. M. dentipennis, n. sp. 8. Antennae markedly elongate, third segment more than three times the length of the firsteandeiseccondmtrosechermlancsemSDECIESH Mann ah oieeieieieieeieeneicieieioienieaneionen 9 Antennae much shorter, third segment little more than twice the length of the first and second together. small, slender Species) 2a5 45 so eee oie cian 13 9. Thorax and abdomen bright orange, the latter with basal and small lateral black LAE ELAN ghestoymcNG cache ClOme Rona Occ a Pence ae eO GEICO cieRCe CreEEEG Sinton oc M. cardinalis Gerst. INGE ISTUICHY ISWECIOS) co a cowsteicucle eh et sirei ese sreueeua piso goutel = ew ueh nies Sa eH GuG etree POMOC CS RCM CE CRE Src metres prs ete menS 10: 10. Abdomen with large and conspicuous, triangular or rounded, sublateral pale Mewes Cin AOS Cre WHEE SESS soacavenccogco oD HD Cob ben bODGOUOO MOOS 11 Abdomen with narrow silvery grey basal sublateral or transverse markings on a variable number of segments, never broadened on more than two segments .. 12 11. Secutum entirely black; abdomen with four large, triangular, luteous lateral patches Lee cee eT Te NT Sates Be SSCS STE: Me metter aU sais telat cosas nd: Saelie sayin ALE Neca RMT eT ease etter ME M. sordidus Westw. Scutum black with conspicuous creamy markings; abdomen with large, rounded, sublateral, creamy patches on all segments .............. M. musgravei, n. sp. 12. Abdomen with the apical half or more of the ground colour red, the remainder | oko) eect token choca Geencr Re ERC RCRONCa a aica aie tees ie Slarclaicntecmaat ts M. stenogaster Westw. Ground colour of the abdomen black, or very dark brown for its entire length Seen ORO clan cl cireGr ie on ee a ean ane ROS ROS Gira oa Ron MM. viduatus Westw. 13. Abdomen orange, with a narrow dark brown fascia on each segment ............. PRET RCRD ROR ECE RRO Ae eae oie CRESS. REACT TOs oe MRE MRT PERE TI ety on or aeh CpRco eee eer M. tenuis, n. sp. Abdomen black or dark brown, with small transverse silvery markings on a variable number of Vsesments: Ve Veer ec aiedsde sie! oie. shee Peek ede seen on enemeroue M. minutus, n. sp. Genus DI0CHLISTUS. DIOCHLISTUS MELLEIPENNIS Westwood. This species was listed by Hardy as a synonym of D. gracilis Macq. Austen (in lit.) pointed out that it differed from that species, a finding which is confirmed by a study of a good series of both sexes of the two forms. Mydas clavigera Walker, 1848, and Mydas effracta Walker, 1857, are synonyms. DIOCHLISTUS NICHOLSONI, nN. SD. A black species with short antennae and deeply infuscated wings. ©. Head black, pale grey dusted around the eyes and on the occiput; hairs: rather sparse, black, mixed with some grey behind the vertex and below the antennae. Antennae black, about two and one-half times the antero-posterior diameter of the head; first segment elongate, slender, second smali and rounded, third as long as the first and second together, fourth a little longer than the third, broadly spatulate, almost rounded. Proboscis small, projecting but little beyond the oral margin. ; Scutum pale grey dusted, with three broad black vittae extending throughout. its length giving it a predominantly black appearance. Scutellum black. Pleurae shining black. Legs black, tarsi brownish-black, knees bright brown. Hind femora slightly incrassate, with two ventral rows of stout bristles on the apical two-thirds. Wings deeply suffused with dark brown, which is darkest along the veins and sometimes completely fills the cells. The colour extends from the base to a little beyond the tip of R, and posteriorly through the bifurcation of M,,, to the tip of BY I. M. MACKERRAS. . 541 Cu,. The cubital and anal cells and the distal part of the wing are clear. The cell C is less deeply clouded than the wing below it. Abdomen elongate conical, black, tomentose, with a narrow zone at the apex, and inconstantly at the base, of each segment bare and shining. 5 Length: body, 15 mm.; wing, 12 mm. Holotype 2 and one paratype 9, Ooldea, South Australia, 18th Aug., 1926, A. J. Nicholson. A very distinctive species which is apparently most nearly related to D. mitis Gerst. Named in honour of the collector. Genus MILTINUS. MILTINUS STENOGASTER Westwood. Midas stenogaster Westwood, Arcana Entomologica, i, 1841, p. 53, species xxxi, Pl. 14, fig. 38. Swan River, Australia—WMidas bicolor Westwood, loc. cit., p. 53, species xxxii, Pl. 14, fig. 4. Western Australia. Austen found from an investigation of the types that the above two names applied to the same species, a conclusion at which I had also arrived after studying the series available to me, including a pair taken in copula, the male of which agreed very well with the description of M. stenogaster, while the female was an undoubted M. bicolor. MILTINUS DENTIPENNIS, Nn. Sp. A small, slender species with short antennae and pictured wings. ©. Head black, somewhat greasy, occiput and parafacialia pale grey dusted, hairs mainly creamy. Antennae brown, about twice as long as the antero-posterior diameter of the head; first and second segments short, the former about twice the length of the latter, third segment slender, about twice the length of the first and second together, fourth segment a little shorter than the third, stoutly pyriform with the narrow end directed basally and with a mammilliform tip. Proboscis about twice the length of the oral aperture. Scutum dark brown tinged with russet, with the lateral and posterior margins broadly, and the scutellum entirely, bright orange brown. Pleurae shining yellowish-brown. Legs uniformly bright yellowish-brown. Hind femora moderately incrassate, with two ventral rows of strong spines. Wings with a dark brown pattern extending the full length of the anterior margin to the tip of M,,. and posteriorly to Cu,, with slight suffusion of the cubital and anal cells. The hind margin of the coloration is well defined and there is a hyaline indentation between the tips of Cu, and M,,, extending into the middle of the discal cell and a second clear area just distal to the composite transverse vein extending forward almost to R,; the curvature of Cu, makes a third indentation. There is a small clearer area in the brown near the tip of the appendix to R, and another below and basal to the origin of Rs. Abdomen elongate, slender, almost parallel-sided, bright yellowish-brown in colour with the basal segment, two or three of the apical segments and a narrow transverse zone at the apex of each of the intervening segments dark brown. Length: body, 15 mm.; wing, 10 mm. Holotype 9, South Australia, without further data, from the collection of the Macleay Museum. A second 9 in the collection of the Department of Public Health is from Bright, Victoria, H. W. Davey, and is slightly larger, measuring 18:5 mm. This specimen is greasy. M. dentipennis can be immediately recognized by the wing markings. 542 NEW AUSTRALIAN MYDAITDAE, MILTINUS MUSGRAVEI, 0D. Sp. A long bodied, short winged species with long antennae and conspicuous, paired, creamy spots on the abdominal tergites. 6. Head covered with creamy tomentum except for a small bare black area above the antennae; face prominent, pale yellow; hairing of head and face relatively long and dense, creamy in colour. First segment of antennae short, cylindrical, about three times as long as broad, second segment as long as broad, third segment (in 9, missing in the ¢) elongate, rather more than three times the length of the first and second together, remainder of the antennae missing but the type obviously corresponds with that of WM. viduatus Westw. and its allies. Proboscis short, not longer than the oral aperture. Scutum black, with a series of large, oblong or irregular, dull creamy yellow patches arranged in a ring round the margin. Scutellum inconspicuous, black; post-scutellum dull cream coloured with a narrow median black vitta. Pleurae shining black, with an elongate patch of creamy tomentum below the anterior spiracle. Legs bright brown; the hind femora are a little darker in colour, strongly incrassate and bear the usual double row of strong ventral spines. Wings subhyaline, almost clear and without any darker suffusion. Abdomen elongate, slender, black. Hach segment except the first bears a pair of conspicuous, semicircular, dull creamy patches which enlarge progressively posteriorly and become confluent in the mid line on some of the apical segments. Length: body, 23 mm.; wing, 15 mm. 9. The only female before me is in poor condition, but appears to differ from the ¢ only in the somewhat duller markings on the abdomen, which is, as usual, broader and more parallel-sided, and in the wings being faintly tinged with brown. Length: body, 25 mm.; wing, 17 mm. Holotype 0, allotype 2 and one paratype J, all labelled South Australia, with- out further data, from the collection of the Macleay Museum. The nearest relative of M. musgravei appears to be M. sordidus Westw., which I have not seen, but which differs in the original description and coloured figure in having an entirely black thorax and only four larger, differently shaped, luteous spots on the abdomen. It is just conceivable, if Westwood’s description were based on an extremely greasy specimen, that this may be his species, but I think it is extremely unlikely. Named after Mr. Anthony Musgrave of the Australian Museum. MILTINUS TENUIS, Nn. Sp. A very small, slender species with short antennae, hyaline wings, and orange abdomen which is narrowly banded with dark brown. 9. Head shining black, grey dusted below the antennae and on the occiput; face shining orange yellow; hairs sparse and inconspicuous, grey to creamy in colour. Antennae short, the basal segments short, black, the first about twice as long as the second, third segment brown, about twice as long as the first and second together, fourth segment brown dorsally, bright orange yellow ventrally, about three-fourths the length of the third, broadly pyriform in shape with the narrow end directed basally. Proboscis about twice the length of the oral aperture. Scutum black with the humeral and post-alar calli bright yellow; there is a pair of pale grey dusted dorsocentral vittae and a broader, paler vitta along each lateral margin. Scutellum dark brown, shining; postscutellum orange yellow, with BY I. M. MACKERRAS. 543 a narrow, indefinite, median brown vitta. Pleurae shining brown, orange yellow below the wing root. Fore and mid legs bright yellow, hind legs more or less deeply tinged with brown; hind femora strongly incrassate. Wings perfectly clear, without any darkening whatever. Abdomen slender, parallel-sided, bright orange, with narrow dark brown basal and apical fasciae and lateral vittae to each segment; the bands also tend to be drawn out to form indefinite median vittae, which vary considerably in different specimens, being sometimes almost complete. Length: body, 14 mm.; wing, 9 mm. Holotype 9°, South Australia, without further data, from the collection of the Macleay Museum. There are other females, all apparently from the same locality, in the Macleay collection. All these are somewhat rubbed and the scutal ornamenta- tion is consequently not well seen. A very distinct little species on account of its slender form, clear wings, dark thorax and orange abdomen. MILTINUS MINUTUS, N. Sp. A small, dark species, with short antennae, silvery grey vittate scutum end narrowly silvery fasciate abdomen. &. Head covered with silvery white tomentum contrasting strongly with the dark eyes, hairs white. Antennae dark brown, first and second segments short, the first slightly bulbous, third segment slightly more than twice the length of the first and second together, fourth about two-thirds the length of the third, stoutly pyriform, almost globular in shape. Proboscis about twice the length of the oral aperture. Scutum dark grey, with a pair of dorsocentral greyish-white vittae which broaden out anteriorly and posteriorly, and with a broader, white dusted vitta along each lateral margin. Scutellum dark grey; post-scutellum dark grey with extensive greyish-white dusting. Pleurae dark brown. Legs dark brown, hind femora strongly inecrassate. Wings hyaline, without darker suffusion or markings. Abdomen brownish-black, the basal five segments with narrow silvery white bands which are evanescent in the mid line and broader laterally, where they tend almost to form a pale dusted marginal vitta. The first fascia covers the apex of the first tergite and the base of the second, the remainder are basal in position. Length: body, 13 mm.; wing, 8 mm. ®. Differs from the male in being more robust, of brown rather than blackish general coloration, in the wing being distinctly suffused with brown, and in the pale markings of the abdomen being fewer in number (generally three) and distinctly narrower. Length: body, 14 mm.; wing, 10 mm. Holotype g, Western Australia, Newman, and allotype ?, South Australia, both without further data, are from the Macleay Museum. This species might be taken for a very small form of M. viduatus Westw., but differs markedly from that species in the structure of the antennae. REVISION OF HESTHESIS (FAM. CERAMBYCIDAE), TOGETHER WITH THE DESCRIPTION OF A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES OF THE BUPRESTIDAH. By H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E-S. (One Text-figure. ) [Read 31st October, 1928.] HESTHESIS Newm. : The genus Hesthesis contains what are known in Australia as the “wasp” longicorns and these are found commonly on flowers of Leptospermum, Eucalyptus and Angophora. In life their jerky, restless movements, their short elytra and evident wings make their resemblance to some of the Thynnid wasps very remark- able, especially in the females with their shorter antennae. In most species it is curious that the females are much more common than the males. This resemblance is so strongly marked in H. ferruginea Boisd. to Exeirus lateritus Shuck. that I have in early collecting days had cause to regret a hasty seizure and hastier release of the wasp, while on other occasions allowing the longicorn to go scot free, though a desirable capture. Mr. J. E. Dixon, of Melbourne, a keen entomolo- gist and observer, has bred out H. cingulata Kirb., from “mallee” Hucalyptus roots, and H. plorator Pase., from the roots of Leptospermum scoparium. Indeed it is to the work of this naturalist that I am indebted for determining with certainty the ¢ of cingulata, which I found nowhere so labelled in Australian collections,* though sometimes it was confused with H. moerens Pasc., which it somewhat resembles except in the shape of its elytra. So distinct is the genus that it forms a separate subfamily in the Junk Catalogue, edited by Professor Aurivillius. Of the thirteen names included here, auricoma Newm., must be transferred to another genus. It was described as Necydalis auricomus in the same paper as that in which Newman described the genus Hesthesis, giving a list of the three species to be included—variegata F., ferruginea Boisd., and cingulata Kirby—and adding a fourth H. bizonata. Its inclusion under WHesthesis is doubtless due to the suggestion contained in Lacordaire’s note (Lac., T. viii, p. 478). A letter from Mr. K. G. Blair to me, I think, solves the problem. He writes: “There can be little doubt from the description that it’ (Necydalis auricomus Newm.) “is Agapete kreusleri Pasc., and this probability is strengthened by a curious error in White’s Cat. Col. Brit. Mus., in which Pl. vy, fig. 4 is credited to A. carissima Newm. (an error repeated in Aurivillius’ Catalogue). From the description of this it differs strongly, also from Saunders’ figure in Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., and it appears probable that the name A. carissina Newm., should really have been A. auricoma Newm. At any rate, the figure represents A. kreusleri and the species is indicated by White as being in the British Museum. Of A. carissima White (= vestita Pasc.+) we have * A similar thing is true of H. fervwginea Boisd., which in all Australian collections known to me was only represented by females. 7 For this synonymy I rely on Newman’s description and Saunders’ figure compared with Pascoe’s type (Kx. G. Blair). BY H. J. CARTER. 545 only Pascoe’s specimens which did not come in till 1893. Of A. kreusleri Pasc., we have one specimen (no name attached) received in 1853, with the legs and antennae of one side in the position of White’s figure and this example was no doubt the original of the figure assigned to A. carissima (recte auricoma Newm.).” H. bizonata Newm.—It is unfortunate that neither Saunders nor Pascoe identified Newman’s species of which the unique type was said to be “in Mus. Soc. Zool. Lond.” I had already concluded by the process of exhaustion that either vigilans Pase. or ornata Saund., was synonymous with bizonata when I received Mr. Blair’s letter noted above, in which he says “H. bizonata Newm. We have a single 9, the only data “New Holl. Vigors Coll. 59.57”, that agrees exactly with the description”. Here follows a detailed description which clearly indicates H. ornata Saund., except for rather darker legs “apical half of femora being black’’. With this slight variation I have little hesitation in placing ornata Saund., as a synonym of bizonata Newm. H. moerens Pase. = H. murina Pasc. — fide K. G. Blair, who has sent me an example that has been compared with the types of both. Curiously, all the examples examined, of which 25 are before me, are males. It is a rather common species in the neighbourhood of Sydney. The complete absence of females to match this species is mystifying. Mr. Blair suggests that it is the male of either plorator Pasc., or of cingulata Kirby. The latter alternative may be ruled out, since I have before me evident males of cingulata, in which the elytral hind margin corres- ponds with that of the females. Similarly I have many of both sexes of plorator, chiefly from Victoria and Tasmania where it is common. I have not seen a Sydney example of plorator which is readily differentiated from cingulata by the spinose sutural hind angle of the elytra. This is not characteristic of moerens Pasc., apart from the different ventral bands of these species. H. vigilans Pase.—This is also an exception to the rule of prevalence of females. Only three females occur amongst the 25 examples before me. I have both sexes of all except moerens. Thanks to the courtesy of the several Australian Museum authorities I have been able to examine long series of nine of these. The tenth, H. bizonata Newm. (= ornata Saund.), appears to be rare, five examples only being identified. Three new species—or subspecies—have been added. Characters.—The long series available has enabled me to study the variations and distribution of the several species, and to obtain some knowledge of the constant characters that delimit them. The species vary considerably in size, ferruginea, cingulata and angulata being the largest and acutipennis, montana, variegata and ornata the smallest; but in all species the male is generally much smaller than the female. Thus in ferruginea an average of eight males gives 18 mm. long; of eight females, 274 mm.; in acutipennis, males range from 10 mm. long, while females measure up to 19 mm. long. Similarly with other species. The males of cingulata, ferruginea and vesparia are generally darker in colour than the females. The only structural characters by which the species can be separated are (1) the hind margins of the elytra and (2) to a much less extent, the sides of prothorax. This latter character is apt to be illusive, the sides being more often subangulately widened than as stated by authors, acutipennis, montana, variegata, ornata, vigilans and crabroides often—though not invariably—showing a decided angulation. In the other species the sides are variably, but more or less strongly, rounded. 546 HESTHESIS AND NEW GENUS OF BUPRESTIDAE, The hind margins of elytra are thus the most defined of the structural characters, and the species fall into two fairly well distinguished groups on this alone, (a) having hind margins obliquely ‘divergent—angulata, cingulata, assimilis, plorator, montana, ferruginea and acutipennis, the last very slightly and variably.* (0) hind margins more or less truncate—the remaining species. The number, colour and arrangement of the pale pubescent bands on the abdomen are subject to little variation in the same species, with a few exceptions. These abdominal bands vary with the species, both in the case of the dorsal and ventral bands, but are generally constant in the same species. These bands are not true zones, that is, are not carried round the body, except the one, or two, near apex. © Thus in ferruginea, acutipennis and montana the bands on the fourth and fifth dorsal segments are continuous with the third and fourth ventral. In cingulata, plorator and vigilans the dorsal fourth segmental band is continuous with the ventral third; the bands near the dorsal base not corresponding with ventral bands. ‘ These bands are in general as follows:— Dorsal Ventral 2 1 moerens Pasc. 2 2 bizonata Newm., vigilans Pasc., crabroides, n. sp. 2 3 angulata Pase., cingulata Kirb., plorator Pasc. 3 2 variegata F. 3 4 acutipennis Pasc. 3-5 4 montana, nN. Sp. 4 3 or 4 assimilis, n. sp., vesparia Pasc. 4 4 ferruginea Boisd. To which the following variations occur:— cingulata. In the male the ventral bands beyond the basal are variably, often feebly, marked (very much as in moerens), but are otherwise inseparable from others normally banded. In rare cases—two females from Armidale, N.S.W., in the Macleay Museum and one in the National Museum labelled Plenty Ranges— I find Var. I, in which two or three dorsal bands occur at the base, and the ventral bands tend to a yellow colour. Var. II is a small female in the Macleay Museum, 15 mm. long, from Sydney, without any dorsal subapical band, but with two dorsal basal bands. Distribution. angulata W.A. (King George’s Sound). cingulata Vict., Tas., N.S.W. (1 ¢ in Macleay Mus. labelled King George Sound). assimilis Clarence River, N.S.W., also Swan River (?) (in Macleay Mus.). plorator Vict., Tas., S. Aust. montana N.S.W., Mt. Kosciusko. acutipennis Q’ld., N.S.W. (1 example labelled Melbourne). variegata N.S.W. and S. Aust. (1 example labelled Beverley, W.A., in S. Aust. Mus.). * “The type” (of acutipennis) “is abnormal, having the left elytron as described, the right truncate”. (fide K. G. Blair). With a very long series before me I find examples with more variation of elytral hind margins than in other species; in general very lightly oblique with a tendency to spinose extension at the suture. BY H. J. CARTER. 547 bizonata N.S.W. MOECrENS N.S. W. ferruginea N.S. W. crabroides Stanthorpe, S. Q’ld. vesparia Rockhampton, Port Denison, Dawson River, N. Q’ld. The following species are new, or, if subspecies only, deserve description and a name. HESTHESIS CRABROIDES, Nn. sp. Black with brilliant orange markings; elytra castaneous with a wide orange band bordering the anterior, interior and posterior area and occupying the greater part. The other édrange markings as follows: front of head extensively, pronotum, apical ring and isolated parts of base, metasternum, a medial and two (sometimes three) lateral spots; abdomen above with two orange bands, below with two bands, in the male basal band white, on third segment orange, in female both orange; the apical segment wholly yellow, antennae and legs orange. Prothoraxz subangulate at sides, elytra subtruncate at apex, with sutural angles slightly dentate, especially in the male. Dim.—,. 13 mm. long; 9. 15-22 mm. long. Hab.—S. Queensland: Stanthorpe (Mr. H. Sutton). I am indebted to a local naturalist and keen observer, Mr. Sutton, for a long series (2 g, 14 9) of this species. At first I was inclined to consider it as a sub- species of H. vigilans Pasc., but after a close comparison with long series of H. variegata F., and of H. vigilans Pasc., I note the following constant differences, amidst numerous variable characters, that are best exhibited in a tabular form:— variegata F. vigilans Pase. crabroides, n. sp. Antennae. Dark brown, as in variegata orange basal segments reddish. Elytra. Brown or black, as in variegata, widely orange apex and base slightly more yellow. yellow. Abdomen. Apical segment dark red or yellow dark. pale zones, 3 above, 2 2 above, 2 below 2 above, 2 below ~below (basal white, (both red). 6 as in variegata } subapical red). @ as in vigilans { Holotype and allotype in Coll. Carter. HESTHESIS ASSIMILIS, N. Sp. or subsp. Tawny brown; front of head, basal and apical bands of pronotum, wide horse- shoe band of elytra, margins of metasternal episterna bright yellow; abdomen with four bands below and four bands above (two at base, two near apex) also yellow; antennae brown, femora (and sometimes tibiae) reddish. 6. Head with vertex brownish-black, whole face clothed with yellow hair; prothorax nearly black, a medial carina on apical half, sides well and regularly rounded. Elytra less sharply diverging behind than in male of cingulata K. (also than in the female examples of assimilis), otherwise similar in form to cingulata Kirby, a narrow external area only a tawny brown, the greater part occupied by arcuate flavous band. ®. Differs in larger size, pronotum largely clothed with yellow hair, the hind margins of elytra strongly oblique and angulate externally. Abdomen with three bands at base and four (sometimes five) bands below a clear yellow. 548 HESTHESIS AND NEW GENUS OF BUPRESTIDAE, Dim.—g. 17 mm.; 9. 23-25 mm. long. Hab.—N.S.W.: Clarence River; W. Aust.: Swan River (in Macleay Museum). Two examples (1 g, 1 2) labelled Clarence R., a 9 labelled N.S.W. and 2 2 labelled Swan R., are specifically inseparable, and suggest a subspecies of cingulata Kirby, of which the range is similarly wide. But in the long series examined, about fifty examples, of cingulata, I find the upper abdominal bands to consist of two only (with rare exceptions noted above), while the black and white of the typical cingulata is here replaced by brown and bright yellow respectively. Holotype and allotype in the Macleay Museum. HESTHESIS MONTANA, N. SD. Black; front with minute spot (sometimes wanting), prothorax with more or less complete apical band, and sometimes with parts of a basal band, a small transverse mark on apex of elytra, two spots (at apex and base respectively) of metasternal episterna pale yellow or white; segments of abdomen with (at least) three above—one on first, others on fourth and fifth margins—and four below pale yellow or white; elytra dark castaneous, their exterior margins black. Antennae dark red, legs a brighter red, knees black; abdomen black. Head and prothoraxz very similar to those of acutipennis Pasec. Elytra with hind margins obliquely divergent as in cingulata Kirby, but their sutural angle slightly produced, forming an obtuse angle, the exterior angle rounded off at the extremity. Dim.—Q. 11-16 mm. long; 9. 16-20 mm. long. Hab.—N.S.W.: Mt. Kosciusko (Professor L. Harrison, Mr. A. J. Nicholson and the author). Forty-seven examples before me show a small, narrow species very near to H. acutipennis Pasc., but separated by the much greater obliquity of the hind margins of the elytra. H. plorator Pasc. (of which a long series is before me) is separated by the constant occurrence of two pale dorsal zones and three ventral on the abdomen; the coloration is more suggestive of plorator and cingulata, the ground colour being everywhere black except on elytra. In some examples aS many as five dorsal bands can be made out on abdomen. Holotype and allotypes in the Macleay Museum. Table of Hesthesis. i Apicaluserment wot sabdomenvdanrkegys see mise oe nee eee eee 2 INDICA FOS WAIE OH Aloolormneymn seililony Ge weGl so cohcaccccasconocoasoassuosscuescss 11 4, IAN, @olbiowehy choyamseme ISA 56555905060 53030005905555000506559550000555005 3 IWAN) TAOS OP MSHS WRLIMCAE 1OEINNCGL oo sc cancadsocdbaadssdasouoedbonsovcusoaes 8 3, Iolhyiiee, Clivensinngs sieoon Bioorlie Ingle WEAF oo ccoscancnceccususocesuoens angulata Pasc. Elytra diverging behind half way .............. einer gin Ut | Ria Rate ee Iowan as 4 ah IPN LOE Ot ailclorncin, yO® Cloreseil, Wo Webel oscc5cacesccacconecsnocengees 5 Palesbands) of tabdomen otherwise a jicrce tae Cn oe eee ee 6 5. Sutural hind angle of elytra produced (dentate) .................. plorator Pasce. Sutural hind angle of elytra not produced ....................... cingulata Kirby GE SIAeS MOL pLOLMORAxaeSU avid S11 UU ine eee regres ewe ene eae 7 SHC) OP TyHOWNONeI< Gyromuhy mowiNClCl concnsonas conned nccconsneanes assimilis, n. sp. 7. Hlytral margins strongly oblique, abdomen black, bands white ..... montana, nN. sp. Elytral margins less strongly oblique, abdomen brown, bands orange ............ lis. loies atlas eta: atte wrac elraterte Meanie NOME Usee Doteica, omelet braptcr oy SERS 2 an are ee AMR oy et ee ees me acutipennis Pasc. 8. Abdomen with one defined ventral band, colour dingy ............. moerens Pasc. Abdomen with two defined ventral bands, colours brighter .................... 9 9. Abdomen with three defined dorsal bands ........................... variegata F. AN KClovaNEA Wrkoa NiO Cleiakhoeel Clos IOAINGIS oascoccaccccooc os ooenosunsoobdacucccss 10 Ol; “Wentral bands \Oranees soc6 25 ee pee nt ok AEN a ge RAE th eRe A SEN vigilans Pasc. WVierntrail bands Mw ites aetaiaek es eae Aa eure anRE eee e bizonata Newm. BY H. J. CARTER. 549 Wil, Ihe, Oobichiaky Chhwesibvs loclubo! 5 .550nbdoobounoudn0d00UecuoUDE ferruginea Boisd. IDI KVira) ITO) Oye NESS Wobhoveeyny [oyobnol oascncaaso now ssoc suomi ucoslodo COU oO UnmIAnc5 2 121, ANocloroainey! TEAC, ih\yi0) GloyesENE Iwo) Vermeil Goagncucunssaodg0505054 crabroides, nN. sp. Abdominal bands, four dorsal, three or four ventral ............... vesparia Pasc. Synonymy. H. bizonata Newm. = ornata Saund. H. moerens Pase. = murina Pasce. Further evidence may show bizonata, vigilans and crabroides to have sub- specific value only. At present I think they are sufficiently differentiated to be considered distinct. EPANIA AUSTRALIS, N. Sp. ©. Black nitid; head and prothorax black, with slight tendency to metallic sheen, the latter bordered castaneous at apex and base, elytra rufo-testaceous, antennae dull brown, the two basal segments castaneous, anterior and intermediate legs flavous, apices of mid-tibiae and their tarsi dark, posterior legs metallic black, abdomen with short white lateral pubescent band on each side, not connected below, a slight similar pubescence of metasternal episterna. Head finely and closely punctate, antennae extending beyond the apex of elytra, their segments subequal (except the short second). Prothorax elongate- ovate, convex, contracted and finely pubescent within the apical and basal borders; densely cellulose-punctate with short, upright pile. Scutellum pubescent. Elytra dehiscent from about half way, rounded behind, rather closely punctate with short, upright, white hairs; wings not as long’as body, iridescent; legs very hairy. 6 wanting. Dim—9 x 2 mm: Hab.—N. Queensland: Cairns and Kuranda (F. P. Dodd). Two examples, both 9, are in the South Australian Museum with the generic determination by Mr. A. M. Lea. They correspond very closely with Pascoe’s figure of H#. discolor (Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1869, pl. xxi, f. 7), but the apices of elytra are not “tinged with chalybeate’, the posterior legs show colour differences, and there is no mention by Pascoe of the lateral pubescence on the abdomen and metasternum, so evident in #. australis. Holotype in South Australian Museum. N.B.—A second species has been sent from the British Museum, amongst some Hesthesis, that was taken by Mr. G. F. Bryant at Kuranda, but the antennae and two legs are wanting so that it is unsuitable for description. The above adds another genus to the Australian list, as well as another to the many links in the chain that connects the Australian with the Malayan fauna. THERYAXIA, noy. gen. Anthaxites. (Fam. Buprestidae). Head wider than the pronotum in front, forehead lightly convex and coverea with well-marked reticulation; epistoma truncate, labrum bilobed, antennary cavities terminal, small, round, nearer the epistoma than the margin of the eye; mentum subtrapezoidal; maxillae angulately projecting at the base, antennae slender, toothed from the third onwards, the fourth and following furnished with terminal pores, at least on the apical segments. Pronotum wider than long, reticulated like the head, margined at sides, surface uniform. Scutellum of moderate size. Elytra: Surface uniform, without striae, its sculpture microscopic and silky; the posterior margins finely denticulate. Prosternum truncate anteriorly, finely margined, its process trifid. Mesosternum entirely divided, the lateral branches rather long and straight; posterior coxae straight on the anterior margin, dilated behind internally; the suture of the first two abdominal segments 550 HESTHESIS AND NEW GENUS OF BUPRESTIDAE. clearly visible, the first suture not parallel to the following; the apex of the last segment rounded; the whole underside more or less reticulate; the lateral pro- longation of the abdomen entirely concealing the metathoracic epimera. Legs slender, femora furrowed along their lower margin, tibiae subcylindric, tarsi elongate, their first segment as long as the succeeding two combined, the fifth very short, not extending beyond the fourth. THERYAXIA SUTTONT, nN. Sp. Rather elongate, convex, its greatest width at the posterior fourth of its total length. Head and pronotum coppery, the latter turning to green at the lateral margins; elytra green bordered with red, except for a narrow green margin; underside coppery; antennae black, except the last two segments. 1.—Theryaxia suttoni, n. sp. 2.—Tarsus of Melobasis. 3.— Tarsus of Theryaxia suttoni. (Drawn by C. Deane.) Head very wide, eyes large, very prominent and regularly continuous with the frontal outline, their anterior margin nearly straight; antennae extending to the front coxae, the first segment clearly longer than the two following combined, the second much longer than wide, a little shorter than the third, the rest sub- equal and furnished with stiff hairs. Pronotum strongly projecting in a rounded lobe at anterior margin, sides straight, feebly converging towards the apex, base widely bisinuate, the medial lobe widely rounded, sides margined by a very fine carina not extending to the front margin. Scutellum subtriangular, very finely sculptured. Elytra little prominent at shoulder, widening in a straight line towards the posterior third, thence rounded and narrowed to the apex, there separately rounded and very finely denticulate; margins, also suture nearly to the scutellum finely bordered; disc extremely finely sculptured, nearly smooth at the middle, without distinct punctures; prosternal process terminated by three points, the middle one not extending to the base of the sternal cavity; anterior margin of the metasternum rounded, the meso-metasternal suture very distinct; the last abdominal sternite more strongly reticulate than the others; posterior tibiae lightly enlarged at apex; tarsi about three-fourths the length of tibiae, narrow and enlarging only from the third segment onward. This genus belongs to a small group of the Anthaxites having the head and pronotum distinctly reticulate, a group that includes Xenorhipis, Tetragonoschema, Anilara, Anthaxia and Agrilaxvia, from all of which it is separated by the head being much wider than the apex of pronotum and the short fifth tarsal segment. Din.—4:-75 x 1:75 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Stanthorpe (Mr. E. Sutton). I am indebted to Mr. Sutton for examples of this interesting Buprestid, one of the many discoveries of this keen entomologist in an interesting district; and also to Mr. C. Deane for his drawing. NOTES ON CORYSANTHES AND SOME SPECIES OF PTHROSTYLIS AND CALADENIA. By the Rev. H. M. R. Rupp, B.A. (Four Text-figures. ) [Read 31st October, 1928.] CoRYSANTHES. In “A Review of the Australian Species of Corysanthes” (Rupp and Nicholls, 1928) Robert Brown’s name for this genus was retained by the authors in preference to Salisbury’s, reference being made to Mr. EH. H. Pescott’s treatment of this point in the Victorian Naturalist for May, 1926. It has been suggested that, inasmuch as strict conformity to the international rules of the Vienna Conference requires that Corybas Salisb. shall have preference over Corysanthes R. Br., we ought not only to have given our reasons for transgressing those rules, but also to have recognized their authority, at least to the extent of including the revised nomenclature in our review. In deference to the second of these suggestions, we give below the names of the seven Australian species for which recognition is sought, as they should appear if Salisbury’s nomenclature is to prevail :— Corysanthes fimbriata R.Br. .. .. .. becomes Corybas fimbriatus. Corysanthes diemenica Lindl. .. .. becomes Corybas diemenicus. Corysanthes pruinosa Cunn. .. .. .. becomes Corybas pruinosus. Corysanthes dilatata Rupp and Nicholls becomes Corybas dilatatus. Corysanthes undulata Cunn. .. .. .. becomes Corybas undulatus. Corysanthes bicalcarata R. Br. .. .. becomes Corybas aconitiflorus Salisb. Corysanthes unguiculata R. Br. .. .. becomes Corybas ungwiculatus. With regard to our reasons for having retained the generic name Corysanthes, if we transgress the strict letter of the Vienna rules, we cannot feel that we transgress their spirit. The rule particularly concerned, it is true, aims at restoring order from the confusion created by the arbitrary exercise of private opinion; but in the fulfilment of this aim it surely ought not to ignore the principle of “honour to whom honour is due.” Bentham (FI. Aust., Vol. vi, pp. 850, 351) long ago gave the soundest of reasons—which so far aS we are aware have never been refuted—why Brown's Corysanthes should be preferred to Salisbury’s Corybas. Australian and New Zealand botanists in general have accepted Bentham’s standpoint, which we venture to hope may yet be adopted by international agreement. The range of habitat of the species discussed in our review as Corysanthes, bicalcarata R. Br. is wider than has been supposed. It occurs in New Zealand, where it has been known as C. Cheesemannii Hook. We have examined numerous specimens kindly sent by Mr. H. B. Matthews of Remuera, Auckland. Ol Ol i) CORYSANTHES AND SPECIES OF PTEROSTYLIS AND CALADENTA, PTEROSTYLIS. In earlier papers (These Proceepines, li, 1925, 299, and lii, 1926, 184) I endeavoured to supplement available information in regard to a number of Australian species of this genus, and to suggest cases where further investigation was desirable in order to check current determinations. Some of the questions then raised have since been satisfactorily settled, and further knowledge of Australian forms has been gained. Some additional notes may therefore be of interest to orchid students. A few points previously raised have been incidentally treated in an illustrated article, “Greenhood Orchids of the Paterson District” (Australian Naturalist, February, 1927), but the present notes will be found supplementary to this also. P. ACUMINATA R. Br.—In September, 1926, Mrs. Edith Coleman sent me living specimens of the Victorian spring-flowering form of this species, which were unquestionably identical with our northern autumn flower. A year later the same collector sent, from Healesville, living specimens of the form associated with the name of Mr. A. J. Tadgell (Rupp, 1926). These “giants” were nearly twice as large as the type form in all their parts, but I found that otherwise there was no difference which could in any way justify separation from Brown’s species, and I think that a varietal name must serve to distinguish them. The existence of such giant forms in several species of our orchids is exceedingly interesting, and merits further study. Caladenia carnea R. Br. var. gigantea Rogers may be cited as an analogous case, and similar instances may be found among two or three species of Dendrobium. I propose that the Pterostylis here referred to be recognized as P. acuminata R. Br. var. ingens, n. var. P. FALCATA Rogers.—I have noted that the late Professor Launcelot Harrison accepted my determination of the large Greenhood found by him on Barrington Tops (Rupp, 1926, note on P. Baptistii Fitz.; also Rupp, 1928) as P. falcata. New locality for this fine species. P. GRACILIS Nicholls (Vict. Nat., March, 1927). —This is undoubtedly the plant previously discussed as of doubtful identity (Rupp, 1925, No. 8, and Text-figure 3). Mr. Nicholls concurs in this opinion after inspecting my specimens. P. nuTANS R. Br.—Mr. H. B. Matthews, of Remuera, New Zealand, recently sent me herbarium material, in admirable condition, of a large number of New Zealand orchids. Some of these are conspecific with Australian forms, though in several instances known in New Zealand under different names. P. nutans is a case in point. The New Zealand plant named by the late T. F. Cheeseman P. Matthewsti is undoubtedly identical with R. Brown’s species. P. NANA R. Br. and P. pyRAMIDALIS Lindl—No distinction can be detected between the former of these two species and the New Zealand P. puberula Hook., and they should be regarded as conspecific. The distinction between P. nana and P. pyramidalis (the latter being endemic in Western Australia) in the typical forms appears to be quite sufficient to endorse specific separation; but Lieut.-Col. B. T. Goadby has prepared a series of dissections of Western Australian forms which present some difficulties in determination. The type form of P. nana has an extensive range through all the southern States of Australia (including Tasmania), and is found in New Zealand. Except in Western Australia it displays little variation, except in size, and is readily determined. In the west, however, it would appear to be sometimes difficult to determine in regard to some forms whether they should be included under P. nana or the endemic P. pyramidalis, and it will probably be found that the two species, which are BY H. M. R. RUPP. 553 closely allied, hybridize freely in Western Australia. The same remarks will apply, in my opinion, to P. barbata Lindl. and P. turfosa Lindl. The range of the former is practically identical with that of P. nana, except that it comes further north in eastern Australia. P. turfosa is a closely-allied Western Australian endemic. In Western Australia—and there only—forms occur which might be included under either species, and are probably the result of hybridization. P. ALATA Reichb. f., P. REFLEXA R. Br., P. REVOLUTA R. Br., and P. ROBUSTA Rogers (Text-figs. 1-3).—If the notes numbered 19 (Rupp, 1925 and 1926) be read in conjunction with No. 8 (Rupp, 1927), it will be seen that there has been considerable confusion between forms included under one or other of these species. The recognition of Dr. Rogers’s new species P. robusta (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., li, 1927) should clear this away. P. robusta was formerly known in the southern States and Western Australia as P. reflexa, but it is very distinct from Brown’s species. It is nearer to P. alata, and was included in this by Ewart and Sharman as var. robusta, but Dr. Rogers gives good reasons for separating it. The Western Text-figs. 1-4. 1. Pterostylis reflexa. 2. P. revoluta. 3. P. robusta. 4. Caladenia dilatata. var. concinna, n. var. Australian form has a narrower flower and a deeper colour than the type. It seems desirable to maintain Brown’s separation of P. reflera and P. revoluta, at all events until their relations have been more thoroughly investigated. The range of the latter is far more extensive than that of the former, and the differences, though slight, appear to be constant. P. TRUNCcATA Fitzg.—Since the publication of the earlier papers (Rupp, 1925, 1926) I have found quantities of this interesting species near Martin’s Creek in the Paterson Valley, and Mr. W. H. Nicholls has recorded it on the Keilor Plains to the north of Melbourne. P. CYCNOCEPHALA Fitzg—It would be interesting to know whether this and the very closely-allied P. mutica R. Br. ever occur together. P. cycnocephala is 554 CORYSANTHES AND SPECIES OF PTEROSTYLIS AND CALADENTA. very abundant on the Barrington Tops, at 5,000 ft., but I could find no trace of P. mutica. Some 40 miles lower down, between Paterson and Maitland, the case is reversed: P. mutica is in great profusion but P. cycnocephala is absent. P. TOVEYANA Hwart (See final note in Rupp, 1926).—The specific rank of this plant seems now well established. I have specimens from Frankston, Victoria (Mrs. Coleman). The same collector has sent some beautiful photographs of this orchid and its supposed “parents”, P. alata and P. concinna; while I am indebted to Mr. T. Green, of Melbourne, for admirable stereoscopic studies of all three. In the Victorian Naturalist for July and August, 1926, will be found two illustrated articles on ‘‘The Greenhood Orchids of Victoria’, by W. H: Nicholls, which will be very helpful to all students of these interesting plants. CALADENIA. C. pinaTATA R. Br.—Mr. G. V. Scammell forwarded living specimens in the spring of 1927 from Griffith, N.S.W., which show a marked divergence from the type-form of this species, perhaps meriting varietal distinction. The plants are consistently short-stemmed, the leaf being large in proportion. The paired sepals are not prolonged into filaments, and are equal in length to the petals, all being short. The dorsal sepal is slightly longer. These five segments are all acuminate, without any clubbed points. The point of the labellum is very short, and the long marginal combings so characteristic of this segment in the type-form are reduced to minute teeth. The colour-scheme agrees precisely with the type-form. The absence of combs to the labellum and of long points to the sepals gives this flower so neat and compact an appearance that I venture to propose its recognition as a new variety under the name C. dilatata R. Br. var. concinna (Text-fig. 4). C. CARNEA R. Br.—Inconstant variations of this species are very common, but Dr. R. S. Rogers has described two consistent variants under the names var. gigantea and var. pygmaea. I wish to call attention to a third, which I have now had under observation for several years, and which appears to me to have originated by hybridization between the typical C. carnea and C. caerulea R. Br. The colour and markings are unquestionably those of the former, but in almost all other respects the plant closely resembles C. caerulea. It is extremely slender and rarely 6 inches high, and of many hundreds seen during three seasons I have failed to find one with more than a single flower. The leaf is broader than that of the typical C. carnea, and is very often flat on the ground, as in ©. caerulea. As in the latter also, each petal is divided from the lower sepal by a fairly wide sinus. A faint bluish tinge is sometimes perceptible at the tip of the segments. This little plant occurs in great profusion in tea-tree scrubs of the Paterson Valley, where both the supposed parents are abundant. It is contemporary with C. caerulea, and precedes the typical C. carnea by a few weeks; but all three are found flowering together. References. Rupp, H. M. R., 1925.—Notes on species of Pterostylis. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1, 1925, 299. ,1926.—Further notes on species of Pterostylis. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., li, 1926, 184. , 1927.—Greenhood Orchids of the Paterson District. Awst. Nat., Feb., 1927. Rupp, H. M. R., and W. H. NicHouus, 1928.-—-A review of the Australian species of Corysanthes (Orchidaceae). Proc. lann. Soc. N.S.W., liii, 1928, 80. NOTES ON SOME ADDITIONS TO THE GLOSSOPTERIS FLORA IN NEW SOUTH WALES. By A. B. WALKom, D.Sc. (Plate xxxvi, and thirteen Text-figures. ) [Read 28th November, 1928.] This paper includes the results of the examination of portion of the collections studied at Cambridge during 1927 whilst holding an International HKducation Board Fellowship in Science. The descriptions included comprise those of (i) a collection of small Glossopteris leaves which belonged to the late John Mitchell, (ii) two terminal shoots (from the collection of the Geological Survey of New South Wales) which may possibly represent part of the plant which bore Glossopteris fronds, and (iii) a collection of seeds belonging to Mr. T. H. Pincombe. The small Glossopteris leaves are of interest in that they show that the very small leaves are of the same form as the larger ones, which does not bear out Zeiller’s suggestion that there is a gradual passage from the so-called “seale-leaves” to the normal leaves of Glossopteris. Some of the seeds in Mr. Pincombe’s collection resemble very closely seeds described from Upper Carboniferous and Permian rocks in Europe and thus form a link between northern and southern floras of Upper Palaeozoic ages. I take this opportunity of expressing my indebtedness to Mr. T. H. Pincombe and the late Mr. John Mitchell, both of whom collected extensively from the Neweastle Coal Measures, for their kindness in lending their collections for description. (i). Some small Glossopteris leaves from Belmont. GLOSSOPTERIS BROWNIANA Brongniart. (Text-fig. 1, 1a.) (See Arber, 1905, p. 48.) Three small leaves of the G. linearis type, with venation making a wide angle with the midrib, and with a fairly open, elongate, polygonal network are referred to G. Browniana. In such small fronds the venation must be regarded as the main feature for distinction since there is little, if any, difference in shape of the frond between those small leaves which have G. Browniana type of venation and those with G. indica type. Localities—Dirty Seam (Newcastle), and Belmont. GLOSSOPTERIS INDICA Schimper. (Text-fig. 2, 2a.) (See Arber, 1905, p. 64.) Three specimens from Belmont are referred with some hesitation to this common species. They differ somewhat from one another, but so long as the E 556 ADDITIONS TO THE GLOSSOPTERIS FLORA, venation forms the chief diagnostic feature of leaves of Glossopteris, as it does at ‘present, there must be uncertainty in attaching definite specific names to many examples. The specimen figured (Text-fig. 2) is one of the smaller leaves of Glossopteris, having a long petiole. In general appearance it might be compared with figures of G. linearis, more especially one figured by Feistmantel (1890, pl. xx, fig. 6), but the character of the venation, particularly the acute angles made by the short connecting veins, seems to me to justify comparison with G. indica rather than G. Browniana. The whole specimen is 5-9 cm. long, with greatest breadth 1:3 cm.; the apex is obtusely rounded and the leaf gradually narrows towards the base to a petiole which is about 1 cm. long. The midrib is prominent, 1-5 to 2 mm. wide Text-figs. 1, la.—Glossopteris Broiwniana Brong. 1. Outline of leaf, natural size; la. Portion enlarged, showing venation (x 3). Text-figs. 2, 2a.—Glossopteris indica Schimper. 2. Leaf, natural size; 2a. Portion enlarged, showing venation (x 3). Text-figs. 3, 3a—-Glossopteris angustifolia Brong. 3. Leaf (x 2); 5a. Portion enlarged, showing venation (x 3). Text-figs. 4, 4a, 4b, 5, 5a.—Glossopteris angustifolia var. taeniopteroides Seward. 4, 5. Portions of leaf, natural size; 4a, 5a. Portions enlarged, show- ing venation (x 2); 4b. ? silicified cuticular cell structure (x 17). BY A. B. WALKOM. af ( at base of leaf, and becoming narrower towards apex; the secondary veins make an acute angle with midrib and curve gently outwards to margin. Of the other examples one is a broad leaf, 3 cm. wide, and probably about 9 cm. long with venation more like that of typical G. indica than G. Browniana; the second is a narrower leaf, also perhaps comparable with some figures of G. linearis, but again the venation appears to place it closer to G. indica than any other species. It is probable that a re-examination of the whole of the Glossopteris species of New South Wales would solve some of the difficulties of determination, the bulk of the description being that in Feistmantel’s work published in 1890. Locality.— Belmont. GLOSSOPTERIS ANGUSTIFOLIA Brongniart. (Text-fig. 3, 3a.) (See Arber, 1905, p. 72.) Two specimens from Belmont agree with Feistmantel’s figure of an example from Blackman’s Swamp, Newcastle, which he compared with G. angustifolia Brong. They are both abnormal, as was apparently Feistmantel’s specimen, in having the lamina of different widths on the two sides of the midrib. The fronds are about 7:5 em. long, the lamina being 4-5 mm. broad on one side and 2 mm. on the other. The lamina narrows very suddenly at about 1 cm. from base of petiole which itself is about 6-7 mm. long. The secondary veins make an acute angle with the midrib and form an elongate, narrow, polygonal mesh. The Belmont examples compare very closely in size as well as in venation with Feistmantel’s figures of young leaves of the species from the Raniganj Coal- field of India. Locality. Belmont. GLOSSOPTERIS ANGUSTIFOLIA Var. TAENIOPTEROIDES Seward. (Text-fig. 4, 4a, 4b, 5, 5a.) (Seward, 1908, p. 113.) The leaves described under this varietal name from the Vereeniging Sand- stone of Transvaal are characterized especially by the rarity of anastomoses of the secondary veins. In the shape of the leaf and the general appearance of the venation they correspond very closely with G. angustifolia Brongn., but differ from typical examples of this species in the almost complete absence of cross- veins connecting the secondary veins. Two incomplete leaves are referred to this variety, one showing the basal portion of the leaf. As will be seen from the sketches of the venation (Text-figs. 4a, 5a@) the veins frequently branch soon after leaving the midrib, but do not anastomose at all in the central portion of the lamina, and even near the outer margin cross connections are rather rare. There certainly appear to be more of such cross-veins than in the South African plants figured, but they are sufficiently rare in our leaves to justify some distinction from the typical G. angustifolia. It is possible that further discoveries may show that a complete series of inter- mediate forms exists, showing various stages between the species angustifolia and its variety taeniopteroides. The Belmont specimens were probably considerably more than 6:5 cm. in length, and had a maximum breadth of about 1:5 cm.; the midrib is about 2 mm. wide at the base of the leaf, and gradually becomes narrower towards the apex; whether it persists to the apex or dies out before reaching it is not shown in these specimens. The midrib shows a number of vertical striations, apparently repre- 558 ADDITIONS TO THE GLOSSOPTERIS FLORA, senting the downward continuation of the secondary veins. The secondary veins leave the midrib at an acute angle and curve outwards to the margin of the leaf; in the marginal region there are approximately 12 veins per 5 mm. of length of leaf. In portion of one specimen some of the cuticular cell structure appears to have been silicified and preserved. This shows a series of more or less regular polygonal cells, without trace of stomata, apparently representing the upper surface of the leaf. The sketch (Text-fig. 4b) represents a small portion of this structure highly magnified. Locality —Belmont. Text-figs. 6, 6a, 6b, 7.—Glossopteris conspicua Fmtl. 6. Leaf, natural size; 6a, 6b. Portions enlarged, showing venation (x 3); 7. Small leaf (x 3). Text-figs. 8a, 8b.—Glossopteris spathulato-cordata Fmtl. 8a. Small leaf (x 4); 8b. Leaf showing venation, natural size. Text-figs. 9, 94—Glossopteris Mitchelli, n. sp. 9. Leaf (x 4); 9a. Portion of venation (x $3). GLOSSOPTERIS CONSPICUA Feistmantel. (Text-fig. 6, 6a, 6b, 7.) (See Arber, 1905, p. 86.) Arber’s description is ‘Frond fairly large, spathulate, or oval-lanceolate. Midrib distinct. Secondary nerves forming very large, open, elongate meshes of approximately the same size throughout the lamina. Meshes oblong-polygonal, transversely.elongate, much longer than broad.” BY A. B. WALKOM. 5ag Several specimens from Belmont belong to this species. The venation is characteristic, very closely resembling that of Feistmantel’s figured examples, and differs from that of any other species of the genus. The size of the Belmont specimens (3:4 cm. long and about 8 mm. wide) is much less than that of those described from India. It may be pointed out that Arber’s remark (1905, p. 87) on this species that the meshes are probably “. . . more open (i.e. broader in comparison with their length) than in any other known representative of this genus” is obviously incorrect and at variance with his remarks in the previous paragraph on the same page. Locality. Belmont. GLOSSOPTERIS SPATHULATO-CORDATA Feistmantel. (Text-fig. 8a, 8D.) (See Feistmantel, 1890, p. 128.) Specimens were figured by Feistmantel under this name, but he did not give a diagnosis of the species. He considered that they may have represented a developmental state of a species of Glossopteris and simply gave them a distinguish- ing name, pointing out that they occurred in Tasmania as well as New South Wales. Arber later (1905, p. 93) suggested the possibility that the specimens figured by Feistmantel might belong to the species G. orbicularis described by the same author from the Raniganj group of the Damuda division of India. There appears, however, to be considerable difference between the figures of the two species, not only in shape of leaf, but also in venation. Two specimens in the present collection show close similarity with Feist- mantel’s figures of G. spathulato-cordata, more particularly his figures 7 and 8 (1890). Leaf broadly oval, petiolate, apex widely emarginate; midrib very prominent, becoming narrower towards apex where it is not conspicuous; secondary veins at an acute angle to midrib, curving outward slightly, and forming very elongate mesh. The larger of the two leaves does not show base or apex; it is 1:9 cm. wide at widest part and would probably have been approximately 5 cm. in length; at the margin there are about 5 veins per cm. The smaller leaf does not show the venation so clearly as the larger, but it is complete, having a total length of 2:9 cm. and greatest width of 1:4 ecm. The lamina is broadly oval and the wide petiolar portion is about 7 mm. long. The species is certainly distinct from any other Australian species of Gloss- opteris, and also appears to me to be distinct from the Indian G. orbicularis to which Arber suggested its possible reference. It is perhaps interesting to note that the larger of the two specimens here described is a good example showing the continuation of the secondary veins as striae for a considerable distance along the midrib region. Locality. Belmont. GLOSSOPTERIS (?) MiTcHELLI, n. sp. (Text-figs. 9, 9a.) One specimen shows a single frond, almost complete, elongate oval in shape, with a length of approximately 13-15 cm., and breadth of 3-8 em. Apex obtusely pointed; midrib distinct, about 1-5 mm. wide near base and becoming very fine towards apex but persisting. Secondary veins make an acute angle (25°-30°) with midrib, pursuing almost a straight course to margin and anastomosing very occasionally. 560 ADDITIONS TO THE GLOSSOPTERIS FLORA, It is perhaps doubtful whether this specimen is rightly placed in Glossopteris. The differences between it and Palaeovittaria lie in (1) the midrib persisting to the apex whereas in P. Kurzi it is “scarcely visible, except in the basal portion of the frond, but indicated by a median fold.” (Arber, 1905, p. 130), and (2) the presence of occasional anastomoses. P. Kurzi, the only species of Palaeovittaria recorded, has been found in the Raniganj Coal Measures of India and in the Triassic Rocks of Tonkin (Zeiller, 19038, p. 81, Pl. xvi, fig. 1). In specimens such as the one described here, it is difficult to know where to draw the line between Glossopteris and other genera. G. Mitchelli seems very close to Palaeovittaria Kurzi and it may be that the two are representatives of a single genus. Locality Belmont. (ii). Terminal portions of shoots, possibly belonging to Glossopteris. Two specimens (Plate xxxvi, figs. 1, 2) from Gloucester, N.S.W., where they occur in rocks of the Upper Coal Measures (Permian), are the remains of the terminal portion of shoots in which the axis bore small pointed leaves arranged in a spiral manner. The larger specimen is about 6 cm. long and 1:6 cm. wide at lowest part, tapering to an acute apex; the smaller is 4:5 em. long and 2-5 cm. wide, thus being comparatively much broader than the larger specimen. The small leaves vary somewhat in size, some being about 1-5 cm. long by 1 cm. wide, others more rectangular, 1-5 em. long by 1:5-2 cm. wide; those nearer the tip of the shoot are longer and more slender than those below. They are traversed by a number of slightly divergent, dichotomously branching veins—about 2 veins per mm. of width—which, so far as can be observed, do not anastomose. In the larger of the two specimens the portions of some 14 or 15 leaves can be seen, and in the smaller about 10 leaves are visible. These specimens are quite unlike any that have come under notice by the author and it is hoped that the publica- tion of a description and figure may lead to the discovery of additional specimens and a more complete knowledge of their nature. The only published figure, observed by the author, closely resembling the two specimens here described is that of a specimen from the Permo-Carboniferous rocks of Kashmir (Seward, 1905, Pl. ix, fig. 2). This occurs in association with Gangamopteris kashmirensis and it was suggested by Seward (lc., p. 5) that possibly the specimen represented an imperfectly preserved piece of a stem with leaf bases. The arrangement of the supposed leaf bases appeared to be spiral and the distal margins were vaguely outlined and irregular. The general appearance of the specimen is very like our specimens and it seems probable that it is of similar nature. These specimens seem to be shoots showing the mode of occur- rence of the so-called scale leaves of Glossopteris, of which isolated individuals have been recorded and figured from India (Zeiller, 1902) and Australia (Arber, 1905; Walkom, 1921, 1922), and as such they are of considerable interest in view of their possible relation to Glossopteris and Gangamopteris. In the scattered examples of single leaves described as scale leaves of Glossopteris, no definite connection with Glossopteris has been proved, though there is a constant association with the Glossopteris flora. Figured examples show considerable variation in shape, but no more perhaps than can be observed in those of our specimens. Frequently also it has not been quite certain whether the veins of some of these scattered leaves anastomosed, so that the apparent BY A. B. WALKOM. 561 absence of anastomosis in our specimens is consistent with previously described examples. An example of one of these single scale leaves is figured for comparison (Plate xxxvi, fig. 3), and others can be seen on Plate xxxvi, fig. 4. Whilst there is a strong possibility that these so-called scale leaves may represent portions of shoots borne by the same plant which bore Glossopteris fronds, it must not be forgotten that some small leaves which bear a rather close resemblance to them have been described as species of Cordaites (see Seward, 1917, p. 237, fig. 468 C) and that the general form of the specimens described above is not unlike the inflorescence of Cordaites as restored by Grand-Hury (see Scott, 1923, fig. 99, p. 269; also Grand-Eury, 1877). Zeiller, in his account of some of the scale leaves from India, suggests (1902, p. 18) the existence of series of leaves making a gradual passage between the scale leaves and the normal leaves of Glossopteris, but this does not appear to be the case in Australia, since very small leaves of Glossopteris do not differ in shape from the larger ones. Some of the small normal leaves are described and figured above (pp. 555-9). If then, these “scale” leaves belong to the plant which bore Glossopteris leaves they might be either scale leaves, as suggested by Zeiller, comparable with the scale leaves of Struthiopteris (= Onoclea) or the leaves borne on special modified fertile shoots. A feature worthy of consideration, not only in our specimens, but in other known examples, of the single isolated ‘‘scale-leaves” is the marked convexity of the leaf. This convexity suggests the possibility that the leaf perhaps covered a seed which may have been attached to the inner surface of the leaf since, in many cases, the leaf, though detached from the axis of the shoot, has been preserved with its markedly convex form, as though the seed might be still attached. It may be then that these were shoots which were reproductive in character, seeds being borne on the inner surface of small leaves in somewhat the same way as they are borne in the cones of many conifers. Whether they belonged to Glossopteris or Gangamopteris or to a member of the Cordaitales is uncertain. I have before me also some very convex examples of the ‘“‘scale-leaves” from the Upper Coal Measures, on the horizon of the Dirty Seam at Dudley in the Neweastle District, N.S.W., with which are associated groups of the small bodies which Arber (1905) described as the probable microsporangia of Glossopteris. These groups are about 1 cm. in diameter and contain numbers of the “micro- sporangia’, aS many as thirty being visible in a single group on the weathered surface of the specimen (Plate xxxvi, fig. 4). Whether they are actually micro- sporangia is uncertain, for one of them has been treated with hydrofluoric acid and then macerated with Schulze’s solution, but no spores were detected. Further experiment is necessary in this direction. Some similar bodies from the Glossopteris-bearing beds of South Africa have been examined in the same way by Mrs. Thomas at the Botany School, Cambridge, and she also has been unable to find any spores actually in the “microsporangia”’, though spores were obtained from the shale in which the fossils occurred. Associated with the single scale leaves and groups of “microsporangia”’ from Dudley, there are also examples of the large winged seed described below (which seems too large to have been covered by the scale leaves in the manner suggested above) and also irregular masses of thin linear structures which may be the remains of masses of rootlets or may be of inorganic origin. It is perhaps more 562 ADDITIONS TO THE GLOSSOPTERIS FLORA, probable that they are rootlets since they seem to show remains of a central vascular strand; it is impossible to say to what plant they may have belonged. Glossopteris is abundant on the reverse side of the specimen, which is less than 1 cm. thick, and there are also a few fragments of Glossopteris leaves on the same surface as the scale leaves, ‘“microsporangia’”’, seeds, etc. (iii). Some seeds associated with the Glossopteris flora. -In addition to the large seeds previously mentioned and described below as Samaropsis Pincombei, quite a number of small seeds have been collected by Mr. T. H. Pincombe at Belmont and Warner’s Bay. They are all preserved as impres- sions and do not add much to our knowledge of the structure of the seeds, but they are of interest in that they have not previously been described from these localities, and they all represent types which are known from Upper Palaeozoic rocks of other parts of the world. The very close resemblance between some of these specimens and such types as Samaropsis moravica and Carpolithes granulatus is specially interesting as these types occur in Upper Carboniferous and Permian rocks in Europe associated with floras which have little, if anything, in common with the Glossopteris flora. SAMAROPSIS PINCOMBEI, n. sp. From two localities in the Upper Coal Measures of the Neweastle district specimens of a large winged seed have been obtained. The localities are (1) Bar Beach, Merewether, where the seeds are associated with Phyllotheca, Glossopteris and Noeggerathiopsis, at about the horizon of the Dirty Seam, and (2) Dudley, where they are associated with Glossopteris, scale-leaves (?) of Glossopteris, and clusters of the so-called microsporangia of the same genus, also on the horizon of the Dirty Seam. An example of these is figured (Plate xxxvi, fig. 5). The spread of the wings is approximately 2:7 cm., and they are about 1 cm. in extent vertically. The seed itself is pear-shaped, about 8 mm. long, prolonged into a narrow spine-like apex about 1:5 mm. long. At its widest (near the apex) it is 5 mm. wide, narrowing to about 1:‘5 mm. near the base and then expanding at the place of attachment, where it is about 3 mm. wide. No detailed structure is shown beyond a number of vertical striations. The wings are attached to the main body of the seed as well as to the narrow apical projection, and are marked by numerous striations extending outwards from the edge of the seed in a gentle curve to the outer margin of the wing. Reference may be made to a degree of similarity of the present species with S. Zignoana figured by Nathorst (1886, Pl. xxv), from the Rhaetic flora of Bjuf, Sweden. Localities—Bar Beach, Merewether and Dudley. SAMAROPSIS MORAVICA (Helmhacher). (Text-fig. 10.) One type of small seed is represented by specimens from Belmont in which the seed is about 4:0 mm. long and 1:5 mm. wide, each end being rather sharply pointed. There is a wing-like border which is incomplete but has a wide extent. The specimens (Text-fig. 10) resemble S. moravica (cf. Zeiller, 1892, Pl. xv, figs. 8-10) so closely that no good purpose would appear to be served in giving them a separate specific name. This type of seed has been recorded widely from Permian rocks in Europe, as well as from the Upper Carboniferous. Some specimens of: BY A. B. WALKOM. 563. 8. Seixasi, associated with Gangamopteris in the Santa Catharina beds of Brazil, and figured by D. White (1908) as Cardiocarpon Seixasi resemble S. moravica rather closely. Locatity.— Belmont. CARPOLITHES BELMONTENSIS, n. Sp. (Text-fig. 11.) Small seeds, about 4 mm. by 3-5 mm., preserved as flattened impressions which show a central area bounded by a narrow flat region about 0:75 mm. wide. The central area has a few vertical ribs and the outer flat area is marked with fine striae parallel to the circumference; its continuity is interrupted by an apical depression, and at the base it ends against a concave lower surface of the seed. This type of seed is the most abundant in the collection available. Text-fig. 10.—Samaropsis moravica (Helmhacher ). Text-fig. 11.—Carpolithes belmontensis, n. sp. Text-fig. 12.—Carpolithes sp. Text-fig. 13.—Cordaicarpus sp. (narrow border not shown). [Text-fig. 10, x 4; Text-figs. 11-13, x 8.] The specimens -exnibit a close resemblance to Carpolithes granulatus, originally described by Grand-Eury (1877), and figured under the name Samaropsis granulata by Zeiller (1892, p. 94) from the Basin de Terrasson in rocks belonging either to the top of the Upper Carboniferous or to the Lower Permian (Zeiller, 1892, p. 119). The Belmont specimens are not referred to the species granulatus in view of the suggestion that C. granulatus represented seeds of Pecopteris (Seward, 1917, p. 168). Localities.—Belmont and Warner’s Bay. i" 564 ADDITIONS TO THE GLOSSOPTERIS FLORA, CARPOLITHES sp. -(Text-fig. 12.) A Small oval seeds, one of which is figured in Text-fig. 12, probably belong to Carpolithes. They are about 3-5 mm. long by 2-5 mm. wide, and have a narrow flat outer area about 0-5 mm. wide, which is separated from the convex inner portion (nucellus) by a very narrow groove. Both the outer flat region of the impression and the nucellus bear fine vertical striations and the nucellus has a small vertical protuberance just below its apex. Localities—Belmont and Warner’s Bay. _ CorDATCARPUS sp. (Text-fig. 13.) A small, roughly triangular, platyspermic seed about 4 mm. long and 4-5 mm. wide, with a broadly rounded base and a narrow border enclosing the nucellus. This seed is referred to Cordaicarpus rather than Samaropsis on account of the narrow border, which is only about 0-5 mm. wide. In general appearance it is not unlike C. Cordai (see Seward, 1917, fig. 502C). Locality Belmont. List of References. ARBER, E. A. N., 1905.—The Glossopteris Flora. Brit. Mus. Catalogue. FEISTMANTEL, O., 1890.—Geological and Palaeontological Relations of the Coal and Plant-bearing Beds of Palaeozoic and Mesozoic Age in Eastern Australia and Tasmania. Mem. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Pal. No. 3. GRAND-Evury, C., 1877.—F lore Carbonifére du Départment de la Loire et du centre de la France. Mém. Acad. Sci. Paris, 1877. NatHorst, A. G., 1866—Om Floran i Skanes Kolf6rande Bildningar. {I. Floran vid Bjuf. Sver. Geol. Unters., Ser. C. Scott, D. H., 1923.—Studies in Fossil Botany. 3rd Edit., Vol. 2. SEWARD, A. C. (and A. SMITH WoopwarD), 1905.—Permo-Carboniferous Plants and Vertebrates from Kashmir. Mem. Geol. Surv. Ind., Pal. Ind., Vol. v, Mem. 2. SEwarD, A. C., 1908.—Fossil plants from South Africa. Quart. J. Geol. Soc., Ixiv, p. 83. , 1917.—Fossil Plants, Vol. iii. 3 Waukom, A. B., 1921.—On Nummulospermum, gen. nov., the probable megasporangium of Glossopteris. Quart. J. Geol. Soc., \xxvii, p. 289. —————, 1922.—- Palaeozoic floras of Queensland. Part i. The Flora of the Lower and Upper Bowen Series. Q’land Geol. Surv., Pub. 270. Wuite, D., 1908.—Report on the Fossil Flora of the Coal Measures of Brazil. ZHILLER, R., 1892.—Basin Houiller et Permien de Brive. Fasc. ii. Flore fossile. Etudes des gites minéraux de la France. : , 1902.—Observations sur quelques plantes fossiles des Lower Gondwanas. Mem. Geol. Surv. Ind., Pal. Ind., N.S., Vol. ii, Mem. i. , 1903.—F lore Fossile des Gites de Charbon du Tonkin. Etudes Gites Min. France. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXVI. Figs. 1, 2.—Terminal shoots, possibly representing modified shoots of Glossopteris or of Cordaites. Gloucester, N.S.W. Nat. size. Fig. 3—‘“Scale leaf’ of Glossopteris, for comparison with leaves of shoots shown in Figs. 1, 2. Nat. size. Fig. 4.—a, “‘Scale-leaves” of Glossopteris; b. Groups of so-called “microsporangia”’ of Glossopteris; c, Rootlets (?); d, Samaropsis Pincombei, n. sp. Nat. size. Fig. 5.—Samaropsis Pincombei, n. sp. (Drawing by Mr. T. A. Brock, of Cambridge). x ioe, THE CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS BETWEEN GLENNIES CREEK AND MUSCLE CREEK, HUNTER RIVER DISTRICT, NEW SOUTH WALHS. By G. D. Ossorne, B.Sc., Lecturer in Geology, University of Sydney, late Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology. (Plate xxxvii and seven Text-figures.) [Read 28th November, 1928.] Introduction. The area described in this paper is part of the Carboniferous belt which runs along the northern and north-eastern margin of the Hunter Valley towards New England. In a former paper (Osborne, 1926) a detailed account was given of the structure and stratigraphy of that part of this belt which lies just to the north and north-east of Singleton, and the area about to be described extends directly from the western margin of the former district. The map (Plate xxxvii) embodies, on its eastern side, a little of the western portion of the map given in the paper cited above, in order to indicate quite clearly the relation between the two areas. Altogether about 140 square miles in the County of Durham have been mapped in detail, this area being bounded on the south and south-west by the great over- thrust fault which is so important a feature in the geology of the Lower and Middle Hunter, and on the north by the line of ridges in which many of the southward-flowing streams, Goorangoola Creek, Bowman’s Creek and others, have their rise. On the west the boundary is taken as Muscle Creek. The field work was carried out in the course of two visits, and the successful completion of the work was made possible by the excellent hospitality and kindly interest shown to the writer by the local people. To Mr. H. M. Bailey and family of “Greylands’”’, and Mr. J. Brosi and family of “Glen Alvon’’, Mr. and Mrs. Tom Glendinning of Muscle Creek and Mr. C. Ball and family of Bowman’s Creek, and many others who have helped, the writer wishes to express his gratitude. Also he is indebted to Dr. W. R. Browne for helpful discussion of this paper during its preparation. In the following pages the stratigraphy and structure will form the main topics of discussion, and a brief account of the outstanding features of the physio- graphy will be given, but the petrography will not be treated at all. Practically no geological work has been carried out in this area in the past, the only reference to it being in an Annual Report of the Mines Department of New South Wales. This deals with the occurrence of ironstone and limestone in the neighbourhood of Yellow Rock, Parish of Balmoral (David, 1886). STRATIGRAPHY. PRELIMINARY. The Carboniferous rocks are well developed in the area, representatives of the two series in New South Wales occurring, namely, the marine Burindi Series and 566 CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS BETWEEN GLENNIES CREEK AND MUSCLE CREEK, the terrestrial Kuttung Series. On account of the general belt-like arrangement of the Upper Palaeozoic terranes along the north-eastern side of the Hunter, and because the broad structure in these belts is a general dip towards the centre of the great geosyncline of Eastern New South Wales, the Burindi rocks outcrop to the north and north-east of the Kuttung rocks. But, as far as the limits of the present area are concerned, the Burindi rocks have in each case come into their present position against the Kuttung Series as a result of heavy normal faulting. THE BURINDI SERIES. The Burindi Series has not been studied in great detail, since the main problems of the area are associated with the Kuttung Series and its relation to the Permian System. Further, it is rather disappointing to try and unravel the detailed features of stratigraphy and structure in the Burindi areas, because of the nature of the beds and the absence of persistent horizons. Neither the base nor the top of the Series was observed and the greatest thickness of strata noted in the area was approximately 1800 feet. These rocks are almost entirely sedimentary, one or two lavas being inter- bedded with the clastic rocks, and a few small felsite dykes occurring. The lavas are all sodic and felsitic and not unlike the general type met with in the Kuttung Series. The sediments comprise agglomerates, tuffs, shales, limestones, some of which are oolitic and some very impure, and breccias. The limestones vary a good deal in texture and composition, and at times grade into calcareous tuffs. They carry a varied fauna, and the fossils collected appear to be the usual Burindi forms which have been listed and described in many papers upon the Carboniferous rocks of New South Wales. The tuffs are peculiar in appearance, being at times very finely textured, and at other times quite coarse and variable. Most of the rock fragments are acidic and the mineral chips comprise quartz, albite and orthoclase. The general matrix is also acidic, often containing a certain amount of biotite. The breccias are related to the tuffs, and are never very extensive, but point to the presence of volcanic foci where explosive eruptions occurred from time to time. The conglomerates vary very much in texture and in general composition. In the majority of cases the constituent pebbles are up to a maximum of nine inches in diameter, with an average of about three and a half inches. The matrix is generally tuffaceous or arkosic, and amongst the pebbles there is a great variety of acidic igneous rocks, quartzites and cherts. But in some cases these conglomerates become very different in character from the dominant type. An example of this is to be seen in the left bank of Fishhole Creek near Portion 33, Parish of Herschell, where the pebbles in the conglomerate are no greater than three-fourths of an inch in diameter. In some of the shaly bands among the tuffs there are plant remains, chiefly indeterminate stems and macerated material, but occasionally some definite examples of Lepidodendron Veltheimianum, and other species are seen. There is no distinctive order in the sequence, but, taking the rocks as a whole, there is a greater amount of limestone and tuff in the lower portion of the Series and a dominance of thinly bedded mudstone in the upper portion. Distribution of the Burindi Series. The Burindi rocks outcrop in the upper portions of the streams which flow southward to the Hunter River. Thus these rocks are seen near the heads of BY G. D. OSBORNE. 567 Glennies Creek, Bowman’s Creek (Foy Brook), Goorangoola Creek and at the locality Known as Yellow Rock in the Parish of Balmoral. There are two main areas of Burindi rocks. The first stretches from the head of Lincoln’s Creek past Yellow Rock towards Rouchel Brook. This area is the surface of a wedge of the marine rocks standing as a horst-like structure in the Kuttung Series, which is faulted down on either side. The second area is at the head of Campbell’s Creek and to the eastward (see map), and is bounded on the south by a strong fault. The rocks are mostly olive-green mudstones and impure limestones in this province, but occasionally there is some very richly fossiliferous limestone with masses of crinoid stems. The northern part of the Razorback Ridge is formed of Burindi rocks and from here they pass over to the east, outcropping eventually in Carrow Brook and on the Paterson River. THE KuUTTUNG SERIES. General. The Kuttung Series outcrops in a belt eight miles wide which is continuous with the belt near Bridgeman. This was described in the earlier paper (Osborne, 1926) and it was pointed out that the Kuttung rocks showed a division into two voleanie series with associated sediments and a further distinctive series of sediments called the Main Clastic Zone. The rocks associated with the younger of the two volcanic series include glacial beds. In the paper referred to, very little was said regarding correlation with the type area of the Paterson- Clarencetown district. In the area now under discussion there are rocks corres- ponding to all groups represented in the Glendonbrook district, but the equivalents of the Main Clastic Zone occupy only a small portion of the area. The remainder of the rocks comprise two groups which are the equivalents (respectively) of the Volcanic Stage and Glacial Stage of the Paterson region. It is not possible to say very much of the petrographical details of the lavas and tuffs without some chemical analyses, as the microscopical examination is often not conclusive, and only permits of a general classification. In view of this it has been decided to adopt the policy used in describing the Glendonbrook area, by referring to the many fine-grained lavas as felsites, distinguishing the more important flows by giving locality names. The belt of lavas and tuffs near Bridgeman, which was described in this way, can be traced with ease in the field to the neighbourhood of Coalhole Creek, and it has been possible to retain some of the distinguishing names used for those felsites. Beyond Coalhole Creek, however, on the western side, there is a com- plicated faulted area where the glacial beds and the volcanic series are mixed up, and beyond this again is the Muscle Creek district where the Volcanic Stage is well developed. Here there is an apparent difference in the general facies of the volcanic succession, some types quite different from those at Bridgeman having come into the sequence. It is necessary, therefore, to discuss the Muscle Creek district separately, and to deal with the rocks from Bridgeman to Antiene in the manner adopted for the Mirannie area. Owing to a normal fault, described below as the Brushy Hill fault, there is a duplication of the Voleanic Stage between Glennies Creek and the head of Muscle Creek and one has not been able to correlate with certainty the lavas in the northern belt with those in the southern or down-thrown portion which, as explained above, is the continuation of the Bridgeman belt. For that reason locality names have been given to the more important units in the north. 568 CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS BETWEEN GLENNIES CREEK AND MUSCLE CREEK, Finally, it should be stated that in the Volcanic Stage there are two different horizons of sediment, which resemble varve-rocks, but there is no definite evidence to prove whether these rocks are of glacial origin or not. THE VOLCANIC STAGE. This Stage is in contact with the Permian System right along the faulted junction from Glennies Creek to Antiene, a distance of twelve miles. Nowhere has the base of the Stage been seen, but the top may be studied at Dawson’s Hill and near Owens Mount. A number of sections have been measured and these may now be considered, starting at the north-west end of the area. Muscle Creek Section (Line LM on map; Text-fig. 1). . This section begins at a point a little to the east of the Muscle Creek Road in portion 18, Parish of Balmoral, on Permian rocks, and in a short distance crosses the Hunter Overthrust (described below), and passes on to Kuttung conglomerate and tuff. Then follows a thick series of lavas, tuffs and conglomerates. The first lava is a soda felsite, pink in colour, with biotite and felspar phenocrysts. It is overlain by tuffaceous conglomerate and a decomposed lava. This is succeeded by tuff, almost free from pebbles and then some felsite lavas of a general light colour, which under the microscope appear to be dacitic pitchstones that have been devitrified. 'These rocks are followed by tuffaceous conglomerate, the pebbles of MUSCLE CREEK SECTION HUNTER OVERTHRUST ' MIDDLE CREEK : FELSITES CONGTE. WITH tae ju BANDED. TUFF ANDESITIC MATRIX DACITIC LAVA a 1 DACITIC LAVAS Gide tse HBANDESITE GLASS SUS ; ' . | - FELSITES m ea CONGTE ae cate hes TUFF CTE gee ah ; ' Ss . Teg ACD Ney ; Ekin ie} DACITIC LAVA) | CouRsE TUFF n Ss ‘ S . i) ~ 1 Soon FeusiTe | TUFF ; : "FINE. Tul 0 SS \FELSITE, | EE 5; ou 0.0 . - o- 3 CARBONIFEROUS e— PERMIAN ——+' f 0 20 40 et CHAINS Text-fig. 1.—Section LM on Map. which reach a maximum diameter of six inches. The next unit is a brown lava with hackly fracture, and a general andesitic or dacitic character. It is succeeded by acid tuff and a seriés of flows with intercalated tuff. Most of the lavas in this group are also of dacitic nature, although their exact identity is difficult to determine. They contain a certain amount of glassy material in the groundmass and show the presence of albitized plagioclase. They are followed by a mass of tuff and conglomerate, and then there is another flow of soda-felsite, overlying which is a tuffaceous conglomerate, the matrix being distinctly andesitic. Oo ie \ \ 200 | VARVE-ROCK , 1207} \ eed \ a ae [> 7. °, =_¢ [PeBBLY TUFF Sy SOM ee ® O| AND TKLITiC 100 © 22 OPO”) Concer omeRa Te , eer S ’ OES » 40 SE \ » SaaS 15 RSs FINE GLACIAL ROCK 100 N\\ oN Nw P| PEBBLY TUFF \ \) N DACITE -| TUFFS FELSITE LAVA FELSITE 100. > © 6 9, | ConcromeraTe FLUVIOGLACIAL — a CONGLOMERATE SOFT TT TTT TTT ©6257 FinE TUFFS TUFFS WITH so: >= ooo CONGLOME RATE BOULDERS A SS) CHERTY TUFF ZT] SHALY TUFF wiTH wz) PLANT STEMS CONGLOMERATE BANDED TUFFS VARVE - ROCK COARSE FLUVIO-\ Op} GuACIAL (ConcTeS ~ LACI 5 o 0 L \ N WITH occasionaL 2/2 N\ TUFF BANDS ‘ \ \ CONGLUMERATE, 450 PARTLY GLACIAL BANDED TUFFS VAR VE - ROCK GLUME RAT HB ANDESITE CONGL RATE Text-fig. 4. - side of Wells Mountain there is a section through some of the beds which overlie the last-named conglomerate. This section embraces some interesting cherty tuffs carrying plant stems—no actual leaf remains being seen. Above the rocks exposed in the creek there is more conglomerate and altogether five lavas. These outcrop on the shoulder and summit of the mountain. The lowest flow is a pale-coloured aphanitic rock with inclusions. The next, which follows after the intervention of some tuff, is a dacitic type, which has originally been partly glassy. This, after some more conglomerate, is overlain by the third flow, which is a distinctive dacite, with much phenocrystic plagioclase and some hornblende and biotite. The fourth type is a felsite containing some red felspars, many of which are quite large. After some conglomerate a vesicular felsite makes the fifth unit. This vesicular rock is full of inclusions and forms the capping to the mount. The details of the thicknesses in this section are shown on Text-fig. 4, which is a generalized section. ce BY G. D. OSBORNE. 57 Other Volcanic Stage Areas. In addition to the sections considered above it is instructive to consider certain localities where other interesting Volcanic Stage rocks occur. On the western side of Grasstree Ridge there is an area occupied almost entirely hy pyroxene-andesite. Here there appears to be a series of flows of both glassy and lithoidal andesite, which show the usual facies for this type of lava. In addition, however, there are some altered varieties which have probably suffered as a result of the operation of late-magmatic solutions. The lowest of the flows is intimately associated with a coarse conglomerate, pebbles of this being found in amongst the andesite. Near Owens Mount the Martin’s Creek type of andesite, the topmost lava in the Volcanic Stage, is developed in a trough-like structure. Associated with its glassy and lithoidal phases there is, especially at the north-eastern side of the basin, a group of peculiar andesites and dacites. These were probably originally very similar in character to the normal andesite, but magmatic waters have affected them and caused very marked changes. Some varieties are very much albitized and in some the groundmass has been chloritized to such an extent that the rock is now a tough greenish unit, quite dissimilar to any of the usual andesitic types. In the area to the north of Bowman’s Creek Village the Volcanic Stage com- prises many varieties of tuff and conglomerate as well as felsitic and dacitic lavas. The tuffs can be seen on the bridle-track between Bowman’s Creek and Muscle Creek, especially at Kelly’s Gap. There is often a fine grained tuff rich in biotite, and at other times.a coarse quartzose type with much ferruginous cement. Then right on the western side of the area just considered, there is a group of lavas underlying the tuffs of Kelly’s Gap. The most important of these is a blue andesite, which is probably related to the pyroxene-andesites of Grasstree, and an andesitic tuff which has some features in common with an andesitic tuff described from the lower part of the Bowman’s Creek section. On the eastern side of Bowman’s Creek there is quite a variety of lavas which are not at all persistent. Most of these are aphanitic, some having a dacitic composition, and representing devitrified glasses. One of these dacitic rocks is of unique-interest because it passes into a very fine volcanic conglomerate. This may be seen to advantage in the bed of Bowman’s Creek in Portion 153, Parish of Foy. Here it is fairly clear that the lava has flowed over a mass of uncompacted gravel which has been incorporated into the lower portion of the flow. While the under surface zone is full of undigested sediment there is an absence of this in the upper portion, showing that the mass is not a sill. e Some tuffs in this area are very fine-grained and of a dark green colour, and in one or two instances altered contacts, caused by the metamorphic action of an overlying flow, have been seen. In these cases the greenish tuff has been converted into a rock very similar in colour and texture to ordinary basalt. One outcrop of fine sediment in the south-east corner of Portion 237, probably a- tuff, has a distinct lamination and a variation in grainsize which give it much of the appearance of varve-rock, but the absence of other definitely glacial characteristics makes it very probable that the rocks were not connected with ice action. Some of the conglomerates become very coarse in this locality and show very imperfect sorting of the boulders, which at times are up to four feet in diameter. Cross’ Creek, a tributary of Campbell’s Creek, drains an area of Volcanic Stage rocks immediately to the north of the Brushy Hill Fault. In this locality 574 CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS BETWEEN GLENNIES CREEK AND MUSCLE CREEK, there are some types which do not occur anywhere else in the area. They are all porphyritic with cryptocrystalline groundmass and of a greenish or pinkish colour. Two of seven types collected are spherulitic, and sometimes the spherulitic structure shows out remarkably well if the rock has weathered a little. One good example of such a lava is found capping a hill in Portion 108, Parish of Foy. In the bed of Cross’ Creek also, there are some outcrops of jointed lavas, which have been altered by magmatic waters, and associated with these there are some extraordinarily coarse conglomerates, one or two boulders being more than eight feet in diameter. BRIEF DISCUSSION OF THE STRATIGRAPHY OF THE VOLCANIC STAGE. In no particular district has a complete section of the Stage been obtained. The lowest rocks stratigraphically are the pyroxene-andesites on the western side of the Grasstree Ridge and on the eastern bank of Bowman’s Creek. The andesites near Grasstree are surrounded by faults and their relations to the adjacent rocks are doubtful, but on Bowman’s Creek they are followed by higher members of the Volcanic Stage. Taken as a whole, the rocks exhibit a number of distinctive features. The main group of units in the Voleanic Stage extending across from Glennies Creek to Wells Mountain shows an interesting sequence and it has its equivalent in the belt stretching from Dawson’s Hill to Bowman’s Creek. In the latter belt there are two outstanding felsites which have been termed the Bowman’s Creek felsite and the Pinnacle felsite respectivly. From all the evidence available it is probable, though not proven, that these units are the equivalents respectively of the Sedgefield and Westbrook felsites in the southern belt. The highest unit in either belt is the hornblende-andesite and andesite glass. Now in the Muscle Creek area there are many acid flows, but while some ot these appear in certain ways to resemble some of the flows to the east, no definite correlation is possible, and, on the other hand, it is clear that a number of new types have come into the succession. In addition there is a flow of hornblende andesitic pitchstone, Martin’s Creek type, which is not the stratigraphical equiva- lent of the andesites at the top of the Volcanic Stage elsewhere, but is a second unit of this well-known type. The greatest thickness of the Stage occurs at Muscle Creek, namely 4,795 feet, and it is probable, from what has been seen in adjoining areas, that the faults, which occur at either end of the Muscle Creek section, have been responsible for cutting out about 2,000 feet of strata. Although detailed .petrographical work has not yet been done upon the lavas and tuffs, there are some general features regarding the broad succession that may be considered. In the two belts in the central and eastern portions of the areas, the sequence starts with pyroxene-andesites, which are succeeded by a great variety of dacites and felsites, many of the latter being sodic, and many of both sets being the devitrified equivalents of certain originally vitrophyrie types. The last rocks to be poured out, namely, the hornblende-andesites, were of more basic composition than the bulk of the series. In the Muscle Creek area the general sequence is somewhat different, as there are many andesitic and dacitic rocks near the base of the Stage, all of which are somewhat more acid than the pyroxene-andesite but distinctly less acid than the bulk of the felsites in the eastern portion. Of course, there are some of these more acidic types at Muscle Creek, but they are subordinate to the dacites and aa BY G. D. OSBORNE. 575 andesitic tuffs. The occurrence of the hornblende-andesite amongst the dacites is a fact that increases the interest of the Volcanic Stage in this district. Considering the whole of the area it is noticeable that the toscanites and dellenites, which are so prevalent in the Carboniferous areas between Gosforth and Clarencetown, are practically absent, unless some of the acid lavas are texturally different from, but chemically equivalent to these toscanitic types. GLACIAL STAGE. The rocks belonging to this Stage may be divided into two groups, the Lower Portion and the Main Glacial Beds. This subdivision is the same as that applied to the Kuttung Series over a region of 400 square miles between Mt. Tyraman and Limeburner’s Creek, which includes the type-area. In the account of the Mirannie-Dyrring area the beds corresponding to the Lower Portion of the Glacial Stage were referred to as the Main Clastic Zone, and succeeding these, in that area, there is a group of lavas and tuffs with sub- ordinate glacial beds. Chief among the lavas are some toscanites, not unlike the Paterson type occurring to the east, and these underlie the small group of glacial beds. In the present area the Lower Portion of the Stage is developed on the south- west side of the Razorback Ridge and at Owens Mount. In the former place there ‘are some 1,600 feet of tuffaceous sandstones and occasional bands of fluvioglacial conglomerate. The facies of these rocks is almost identical with that of the rocks in the Mirannie area. Near the top of the series there are some shaly tuffs which contain indeterminate plant remains. The Lower Portion just briefly described is succeeded by a toscanitic lava, which caps the northern part of the Razorback range. This is overlain by some representatives of the Main Glacial Beds, but these have not been studied in this locality. The Main Glacial Beds show a much better development at Owens Mount and near Grasstree, and two generalized sections for these localities are given in Text-figure 4. The Owens Mount Section. Following the hornblende-andesite at the top of the Volcanic Stage there is a very coarse conglomerate with a lithology somewhat different from that of the conglomerates of the underlying beds. The total thickness including a few bands of tuff is about 450 feet. The boulders in the deposit are very variable in size and reach a maximum of six feet in diameter. Many of the pebbles are sub- angular and some possess glacial striae. This basal conglomerate, in the opinion of the writer, was synchronous with the lowest of the clastic rocks occurring on the Razorback Ridge, from which, however, it differs strongly, lithologically. It would appear that while the Razorback area was receiving sediments from the north and north-west, the Owens Mount and Grasstree areas were the site of accumulation of bouldery deposits derived from the glaciated regions to the south- west. This basal conglomerate is the equivalent of a somewhat similar deposit recorded by the writer from the Paterson area (Osborne, 1922, p. 180), and of a mass of basal conglomerate described by Browne (1926, p. 226) for the Gosforth district. And further, the relationship, described above, between the lowest horizons in the Glacial Stage at Owens Mt. and Razorback Ridge is exactly analogous to the relationship discussed by the author for the basal beds of the Glacial Stage at Gosforth and Moonabung respectively (Osborne, 1927, p. 99). 576 CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS BETWEEN GLENNIES CREEK AND MUSCLE CREEK, There is no lava in this section equivalent to the toscanite on the Razorback Ridge and elsewhere, and a rather arbitrary line has to be drawn between the two divisions of the Glacial Stage. This is best placed at the top of the coarse basal conglomerate about 500 feet above the base of the Stage. The rocks following the conglomerate comprise varve-rocks, tillitic conglomerate and fine tuffs aggregating 600 feet. These are well exposed around the summit and shoulders of Owens Mount. The varve-rocks, of which there are two main horizons, are variously coloured, but some distinctive green and purplish varieties occur. Contempor- aneous contortions and dropped pebbles are not uncommon features. Frequently bands of fine tuff are interbedded with the upper horizon of varve-rock. Grasstree Section (Text-fig. 4). The Grasstree glacial beds belong entirely to the Main Glacial Beds, and it is probable that the Lower Portion of the Stage is faulted out of sight. Beds which are stratigraphically higher than any occurring on Owens Mount are to be seen near Grasstree Trig. The most complete section to be obtained is on the northern side of this eminence. Here there are many varieties of tuff, tillitic conglomerate and some varve-rocks. The last-named form an important horizon 150 feet thick, but are also present in thin bands interbedded with the tuffs succeeding the main mass of varve-rock. By correlation with the glacial beds exposed in the gullies of Coalhole Creek, it is seen that another and lower horizon occurs in this area and the details available hereabouts are incorporated in the section. The lowest unit in this district is a bed of conglomerate 100 feet thick which is different litho- logically from the thick basal conglomerate of the Owens Mount section. Above the upper varve-rock there is a series of conglomerates, some bands of which contain scratched and faceted pebbles and occasionally large erratics. Interbedded with this coarse clastic sediment is a felsitic lava. Regarding the correlation between the Owens Mount and Grasstree ae only the two horizons of varve-rock and the tillitic conglomerate in between these can be matched in the two sections, and this has been indicated in Text-figure 4. But nothing more than this is possible. The writer does not think it advisable to try and correlate over wide areas the many varve-rock units (some of which are of very small thickness), which occur throughout the Carboniferous belt of the Hunter Valley, but in the present case the sections are taken from localities which are in fairly close proximity, and there is justification for assuming that the conditions of deposition and the general order of accumulation were much the same at the two localities. STRUCTURE. GENERAL. Owens Mt. Basin. The area shown upon the map has been folded along a north-west axis and subsequently cross-warped in an east-north-east and west-south-west direction. These two sets of folding were phases of the same diastrophic movement which occurred at the close of the Palaeozoic Era. The result of this cross warping has been the production of flat basin-like depressions and irregular dome-shaped structures complementary to the former. In earlier papers the basin structures which occur in the country to the east of the present area were described, e.g. the Moonabung, Mirannie and Bridge- man Basins. The last of these is on the eastern margin of the area under present consideration, and it stands out well by reason of the outcrops of the andesite, BY G. D. OSBORNE. 577 which have affected very materially the topography in the Mt. Pleasant and Mt. Olive districts. To the west of the Bridgeman Basin the rocks are soon warped back into a simple dipping structure which continues to the southern part of the Greylands Station. Here, there is a very flat and irregular pitching anticline which joins the Bridgeman Basin with another to the west, which will be called the Owens Mt. Basin. The general dip referred to above, however, carries on in the northern section of the area. Owens Mt. Basin is the central structural feature of the southern belt of the Kuttung rocks, and a glance at the map shows it to be clearly defined by the plan of the outcrops of hornblende-andesite. The general trend of the axis of this elongated basin or trough is H. 15° N. Within the limit of the elliptical outcrop of the andesite the length of the major axis is six miles and that of the minor axis, one mile. These figures give some idea of the shape of the trough. To the north- east the structure is sharply truncated by the Brushy Hill fault, while on the other side, also, faults are seen cutting off the lower units of the basin. The lowest beds in the structure can be seen in the gorges at the head of the tributaries of Cedar Creek, and the lavas which outcrop in that locality can be traced right round through the south of the basin to the Greylands property. Some irregularities in the general disposition of the successive units or zones in this basin are apparent from a study of the rocks in the neighbourhood of Wells Mountain. Here there is a northerly trending projection or lip of the basin which dominates the arrangement of the strata. The top of Wells Mountain is a felsitic — lava which forms an outlier on account of the gentle dip in that area. Such structures are not common in the Carboniferous belt in the Lower Hunter because the dip of the beds, in general, is sufficiently large to give continuous outcrops. Even upon the Wells Mountain end of the basin there is a further irregularity in the shape of an anticlinal bulge which occurs in Portion 111, Parish of Herschell. The effect of the Brushy Hill fault in the central part of the area has been to conceal the lower beds of the Owens Mt. Basin, and also to hide from sight the zone where the beds turn over and resume the north-easterly dip, which is main- tained in the main northern belt. On the north-western part of the area mapped the trend begins to turn from NW. to NNW. and in the neighbourhood of ‘Albano’ Station, in the southern portion of the Parish of Tudor, the rocks are striking almost due north and south. The remarks upon the structure made in the foregoing paragraphs are almost wholly applicable to the Kuttung Series, but the same general trends are seen in the Burindi rocks, and this just emphasizes the conformable relationship between the two Series. The two areas of Burindi rocks are found in between the Kuttung provinces as a result of strike and oblique faulting. One area in the neighbour- hood of Yellow Rock, at the head of Muscle Creek, shows a variation in the direction of trend from N. 50° W. near Yellow Rock to due north near Fishhole Creek. A corresponding change is seen in the directions of strike in the Kuttung rocks which are adjacent to the Burindi rocks at each locality. On the north-east of the area, in the Campbell’s Creek-Goorangoola region, the Burindi terrane possesses a steeper dip than the associated Kuttung Series, but the strike is about the same in all places, except in one smajl area. Indeed, on the northern end of Razorback Ridge where the Goorangoola fault has become a dip fault, it is difficult to separate the Carboniferous series, as the dip values are about the same. 578 CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS BETWEEN GLENNIES CREEK AND MUSCLE CREEK, Structure-Section along Line ABC on map (Text-fig. 5). The section along the line ABC crosses the central portion of the area in a general northerly direction. It begins on the Permian sediments in Portion 23, Parish of Liddell and, after a short distance, crosses the Hunter overthrust fault. The Volcanic Stage beds are then traversed along a series of dip escarpments and ridges until the central zone of the Owens Mt. Basin is reached, where the Glacial OWENS [MOUNT BOWMANS CK ROAD 1 5 Fi . SEDGEFIELD FELSITt ‘ BOWMAN CREEK FELSITE \ WESTBROOK FELSITE Y BURINOI er PINNACLE FILS/TE = SERIES ORNBLENDE + AMDESITE CWENS HUNT CONGLOMERATE & TUFF GLENPONBROOK FELSITE ACiAL SERILS FELSITE 1000. WORM EOE Amorsi7e PIAOIENL ANDLSITE 5 CONGLOMERATI TY CARBONIFEROUS A 40 so SS CHAINS Text-fig. 5—Line ABC on Map. Stage is seen. There is evidently a certain amount of asymmetry in the basin because the basal conglomerate is much thicker on the southern side than on the northern side. Passing along the left bank of Bowman’s Creek the beds are dipping ‘south, until the Brushy Hill Fault is reached. This throws to the south-west, and immediately to the north of it the beds are found dipping to the north-north-east, and a long sequence, starting with the pyroxene-andesites, now begins, running through the Volcanic Stage to the hornblende-andesites near the Bowman’s Creek road, and beyond through the Lower Portion of the Glacial Stage to the Goor- angoola Fault. This fault also throws to the south-west, bringing Burindi rocks on the north-east against Kuttung rocks. The Burindi Series is dipping fairly steeply in Campbell’s Creek, but flattens out somewhat to the east. The section ends in the Burindi rocks which continue beyond the limit of the map. Structure-Section along Line DEF on map (Text-fig. 6). This section is very instructive, as it passes over the disturbed region in the environs of Grasstree Trigonometrical Station, and also shows the relation of the Bridgeman and Owens Mount Basins. After crossing the Hunter overthrust, lavas and conglomerates of the Volcanic Stage are seen. These are faulted and jointed strongly, but only the major faults are shown on the map and section. The hills GRASSTREE BOWMANS CK OWENS MOUNT “GREYLANDS® GOORANGOOLA BRIDGEMAN RIDGE : , ' CREE BASIN | 1 h { 1 ’ FT. ! ‘ ' ‘ ; ' 2000 HUNTER OVERTHRUST t \ ' 1 ‘ ‘ ; 1 MTROYAL RO 1 GLENOONBROOK FELSITE ' fi BRUSHYIHILL FAULT ' : ' ‘ 1 j 0 ' 1 — Ry 'FELSITE ' ae x & DACITE q U ' CONGLOMERATE / GRASSTREE Y “TUFF & FELSITE ~ GLACIAL BEDS a] 7 i ' HORNBLENDE ANDESI TE 1 ‘ GLACIAL BEDS 1% * — wesTaRoon FeLsiTE | 2 0 ae ' \ = O) NG Oren NU, 7 Oe snare Oh Ora he CONGLOMERATE & TUFF 9° Siig Whi Ae ne <—PERMAN > o 0 £0 160 > CHAINS CARBOMFEROUS —————_e ee @—_—_——— Text-fig. 6—Line DEF on Map. BY G. D. OSBORNE. 579 round about Grasstree form a senkungsfeld type of structure. There is a strong fault throwing to the north-east, and then, after passing over some glacial beds for one and a half miles, another fault throwing in the same direction is seen. The glacial beds still outcrop for some distance to the east, and then the third fault, which forms the eastern side of the senkungsfeld is encountered. Beyond this there are beds of the Volcanic Stage, which give characteristic topography, the Glendon- brook felsite in particular fofming a very decided line of hills. The top of this Stage is reached at the hornblende-andesite and the Glacial Stage leads up over Owens Mount, and down to the eastern side, where the basal conglomerate of the Stage is very coarse. After crossing the eastern andesite, the line of section changes a little and carries along obliquely to the strike, traversing the Greylands property and crossing the anticlinal bulge which is the complementary structure joining together the Owens Mount and Bridgeman Basins. This pitching anticline is most prominent a little to the north of Dawley’s Gully. Further on there is the flat land on the right bank of Goorangoola Creek, and under the alluvium of this stream is the Brushy Hill fault, which here is just near its point of initiation, the throw being relatively small. To the east a series of lavas, more or less equivalent to those on “Greylands’’, are seen in the creek beds and then the western side of the Bridgeman Basin is reached. This basin has been described in an earlier paper. Structure-Section along Line GHK on map (Text-fig. 7). An instructive traverse is that along the line GHK, because it takes in the horst-like mass of Burindi rocks near Kangaroo Mountain, and crosses four normal MUSCLE CK MUSCLE (K = LINCOLNS CA FISHHOLE CK. BOWMANS, CREEK 1 DIVIDE “& FAULT ! ' ' { GRUSHY HILL FAULT, : BOWMANS CREEK FELSITE WUSCLE CREEK 0 ; 4 ,~ VOLCANIC SERIES ni BURINDT ' A PINNACLE FELSITE 4 - \ = f SERIES Be: FELSITES ‘ LOWER PORTION OF ; a= 1 GLACIAL STAGE ' HB ANDESITE ' 1 1 t ry t FT. i a | HUNTER FAULT ' | BURINDI iN 1 SERIES ' t 1660 “HB. PITCHS TONE oOo rove) Ww BY G. D. OSBORNE. because the stratigraphy of the Burindi Series is obscure in this locality. How- ever, it is possible to place the minimum value of the throw at 6,000 feet. In the western part of the area considered the strike of the fault parallels that of the two series, but in the more easterly portion of the Razorback Ridge it is a true dip fault. Here it is difficult to draw the line between the Kuttung and Burindi Series, and this in spite of the fact that the latter rocks are fossiliferous. The difficulty arises because of the similarity in appearance of the soils derived from the calcareous tuffs of the Burindi Series, which only contains restricted fossiliferous horizons, and the tuffs of the Kuttung Series, and also because of the prevalence of talus material and scrubby undergrowth. The Grasstree Faults. There are three main faults near the Grasstree Trigonometrical Station and the ridge southward therefrom, which may be called Grasstree faults No. 1, No. 2, No. 3. In addition there are other small faults but their relations are not clear. Grasstree fault No. 1 is traceable right across the ridge from Portion 89, Parish of Herschell, to the place where Bowman’s Creek leaves the Carboniferous hills, the fault being truncated at either end by the Hunter overthrust. The strike is N 50° W and the dip steep to the south-west. The effect ef the fault has been to throw down the Glacial Stage below the level of the Volcanic Stage. The throw is not definitely known but is between 2,000 and 3,000 feet. Along the fault there is a zone of brecciation which has involved some of the varve-rocks. The No. 2 and No. 3 faults lie a little to the south-west of the No. 1 fault and appear to unite near the Bowman’s Creek gap, in Portion 4, Parish of Herschell. The former of the two throws to the south-west and the other to the north-east. Hach possesses a strike more or less parallel to the trend of the larger faults in the main fault-series. The No. 3 fault is the greater one and has set the Glacial Beds against the Volcanic Stage. The manner in which this fault has truncated various horizons in the Kuttung Series is very striking (see map). Associated with this fault are a number of small dislocations, some of the effects of which can be seen in the steep gullies on the south-west side of the Grasstree Ridge. The limit of the No. 2 fault to the north-west cannot be determined completely, but it is shown as far as it could be traced. In connection with these faults in this particular locality there is the problem of fitting in the pyroxene-andesites to the west of Grasstree Trigonometrical Station. These rocks are fairly low down in the Volcanic Stage and are probably separated from the rocks just to the north-east by another fault which is not shown on the map because its position could not be definitely determined. Second Series of Faults. An interesting fault occurs to the south of Owens Mt., which is cut off at either end by the Hunter overthrust. This fault strikes E 5° N and is practically vertical. It has thrown down the Glacial Stage rocks against the lower part of the Volcanic Stage, and the former are now lying with a very steep dip. A strong mass of glacial conglomerate in this downthrown block makes a dominant line of “whale-back” outcrops running east and west (see map). This fault is essentially parallel in trend to the axis of the Owens Mt. basin. Also conforming in general to this axis are some small faults which cut across the hornblende- andesite in the neighbourhood of the Bowman’s Creek road in the Parish of Foy. 584 CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS BETWEEN GLENNIES CREEK AND MUSCLE CREEK, Other Faults. “ishhole Creek Fault. This is a normal fault, with meridional trend, which occurs near the head of Sawyer’s Creek and runs along Fishhole Creek for a distance of four miles. It is cut off to the south by the Brushy Hill fault and must antedate it, as will be explained below. It serves to bring the Burindi Series against the Kuttung, and in Portion 33, Parish of Herschell, one can see in the right bank of Fishhole Creek fossiliferous mudstones, and on the other side of the stream, at the same level, the Kuttung rocks. The strike in the two series is constant, but the Burindi beds are dipping more steeply than the Kuttung beds. The divergence in trend between the Fishhole and Brushy Hill faults brings about an increase in the area of the Burindi rocks as one goes north-west, and after extending beyond Kangaroo Mountain the Burindi province swings away towards Rouchel Brook and the Upper Hunter River. An interesting fault which does not quite agree with any of the others in strike, although not very far removed from the trend of the second series, occurs near Dawson’s Hill. This cuts across the hornblende-andesite a little to the west of the Dawson’s Hill Post Office. It has a throw of about 600 feet and dips at an angle of 45° in a direction N 40° W. Its presence is indicated very clearly by the outcrops of the andesite, and by the existence of a fault breccia and a zone of intense splintering and jointing. Relation of the Faults to each other and to the Folding. The folding described above is continuous with that observed in the Carbon- iferous belt from Singleton to the eastern coast. The age of this folding has been shown by Professor Sir Edgeworth David to be late Palaeozoic. It has produced two sets of trend-lines in the area under discussion, and it has been found that the two main sets of normal faults possess trends which are essentially parallel to the directions of the fold axes. In the areas to the south-east and east the systems of normal faults which cut through the Carboniferous and Permian terranes are genetically related to the folding, because in some cases a fold passes into a fault and also because the Triassic rocks occurring south of the faulted Permian province show no effects of the faulting. As shown by the writer in earlier papers, the normal fault-systems show trends parallel to the axes of the late Palaeozoic folds, and the results of an analysis of the folding also indicate that the faults are almost certainly of the same general age as the folds. In tracing the Carboniferous structures from the Lower Hunter Valley towards the north-west the same relationships between the normal faults and the folding are found to exist. Further, many of the normal faults in the Carboniferous areas are truncated by the Hunter Overthrust, which, from a consideration of the geological history of the Hunter region, appears to be post-Palaeozoic but pre-Pliocene in age. Thus it is considered that the more important normal faults in the Glennies Creek-Muscle Creek region represent fractures which developed in the tensional stages following the periods of compression. In the present region there were two phases of compression and two corresponding periods when tensional conditions obtained, and during the latter the respective sets of faults developed. BY G. D. OSBORNE. or iv 2) Ot There are one or two small faults which do not fit in with the tectonic lines of the late Palaeozoic diastrophism, and the age of these is a matter of doubt. What has been said above provides for all the large faults, with the exception of the Fishhole Creek fault. An examination of the relations of this fracture shows that the area of Kuttung rocks to the east of Fishhole Creek has moved downwards a considerable amount. But this area is part of the northern belt of Volcanic Stage rocks which form the upthrow-block of the Brushy Hill Fault. Thus it is seen that the Fishhole Creek fault cannot be a branch of the other fault. And as it does not fit in with the trend of either fault-series we must conclude that it represents a displacement connected with the late Palaeozoic folding, but of earlier formation than the other series of fractures. The normal faults considered above do not pass into the Permian System, as far as one has been able to make out, but on the other hand where a strong fault in the Carboniferous System is striking for the Permian terrane, it becomes cut off along the line of the Hunter overthrust. This suggests that this overthrust is post-Palaeozoic, and there seems little doubt of this when one considers the contrast between the features of the late Palaeozoic folding and faulting, and the character of the overthrust. The exact age of the thrust is not yet known, but further work to the north will gradually throw light upon this question. BrigEF ACCOUNT OF THE SALIENT PHYSIOGRAPHY. The area as a whole has been widely dissected since the Kosciusko uplift at the beginning of the Pleistocene so that the general aspect is that of late- maturity, except in the head-water portions of some of the streams where almost youthful topography may be seen, and again where hard bars cross the course of the streams producing features not normally associated with a mature landscape. The divides between some of the larger creeks are very narrow, as for example that between Muscle Creek and Lincoln’s Creek. Most important among the facts derived from a general study of the physio- graphy is the conclusion that the area behaved as one unit in the uplift at the close of the Tertiary Period in New South Wales. There are no faults in the area, with perhaps the exception of one insignificant one, which are not older than the peneplanation that preceded that uplift. All the faults have been revealed during Pleistocene and present erosion, and one can see remnants of the plateau formed at the Kosciusko uplift in the eminences which occur in a number of places throughout the area, for example, Kangaroo Mountain (2,307 feet), Grasstree Trig. (1,725 feet), Wells Mountain (1,941 feet), and others. The differences in elevation of these hills are not due to the presence of late-Tertiary faults produced during the last great uplift, since careful mapping has proved the absence of these. On the other hand one can see in the varying heights of the eminences between Bells Mountain (Muswellbrook district) and the Paterson Region, and even beyond, definite evidence of a general tilt in the plateau surface which was produced by that uplift. A splendid view of the remnants of this tilted surface is obtainable from a low hill in Portion 66, Parish of Greta, between Allandale and Harper’s Hill. The main streams in the area are Glennies Creek or Fal Brook and Bowman’s Creek or Foy Brook, both of which belong to the Hunter Drainage System. The eastern part of the area is drained by the former and its tributaries, the chief of which is Goorangoola Creek. The central portion of the area is drained by the latter, which possesses important tributaries in Cedar Creek and Lincoln’s Creek. The chief stream in the west of the area is Muscle Creek. 586 CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS BETWEEN GLENNIES CREEK AND MUSCLE CREEK, The general trend of the main streams in the central and eastern portions of the area is a little west of south, but there do not appear to be any structural features to account for this. On the contrary the streams cut right across the strike of the rocks. The same is the case with Muscle Creek, which, however, possesses a south-westerly trend. Nevertheless, while the main creeks as a whole do not show adjustment to the geological structures, it is noticeable that locally such adjustment has taken place, and that some of the smaller tributaries owe their disposition entirely to such an adjustment. The fact that the larger streams do not show any definite relation to the trend-lines of the country, together with the fact that the interbedding of hard and weak units is conducive to an effective regulation of the evolution of the streams, suggests the possibility that the larger streams date back to the ancient drainage in pre-uplift times. The degree of resistance of the various units in the Kuttung terrane varies a good deal, producing, on account of the folding present, a series of dip-escarpment ridges. What has been written for the Mirannie-Dyrring area (Osborne, 1926, p. 405) about the behaviour of the various units towards the forces of erosion, applies to the present area and thus needs no repetition. The Burindi rocks form much of the higher and less dissected ground because they outcrop in the headwater tracts of the streams. Domestic river capture will occur relatively soon in a number of places. Thus at the head of Muscle Creek, the divide separating this stream from Sawyer’s Gully is very narrow, and the former is eroding at a greater rate than the latter, whose valley trend is about at right angles to that of Muscle Creek. Again, in the area to the east of Bowman’s Creek, some of the tributaries of that stream have only to erode back a short distance to capture some of the drainage which now belongs to the Glennies Creek system. The faults as a whole have played an indirect part in the production of the present topography, and of them the Hunter overthrust has been by far the most important. In general the Permian terrane to the south-west of the fault has been rapidly eroded to form part of the broad valley of the Middle and Lower Hunter River, while the Carboniferous belt to the north-east of the fault has been much more resistant. As exceptions to this generalization we have the Permian rocks, where locally strongly resistant, as near Antiene and Grasstree, producing rough country with a maximum altitude of 1,100 feet above sea-level. The over- thrust was most probably of earlier formation than the Kosciusko uplift, but the exact relations of these will not be discussed in the present paper. Summary. Stratigraphy. A general summary of the stratigraphy of the Carboniferous rocks of the Glennies Creek-Muscle Creek region is as follows:— Greatest observed Kuttung Series. Thickness in Feet. Glacial Stage. Wieuin, Gileyereul IRGC 65 of ob oa oo UGH MOSCAMIGC Fee sae hap) eh g cia) eae arse 50 Iboyiner IRON so: co Go 646,05 ao ,BOO WoleanicusStacerr-neae ea ries Les ect) | MERC EARN TAG Ey ISON ISMA B5| bo oo 8G Mod Toe ce oe Id) 9,890 BY G. D. OSBORNE. 587 It is not proposed in the present communication to discuss the relation of the stratigraphy of this area with that of the areas to the south and south-east, as this will be done when a greater portion of the Carboniferous belt is under review. Tectonic Geology. The most important aspects of the structural geology may be listed as follows :— 1. In late Palaeozoic times the Carboniferous rocks were broadly folded with a general north-westerly trend, and cross-warped in an east-north-east direction. 2. This folding produced Owens Mount Basin and a flatly-pitching anti- cline in the central southern portion of the area, and elsewhere arranged the Kuttung Series so as to lie in a general belt-like fashion, dipping to the north- north-east and north-east. 3. The area was strongly faulted during two periods of crustal activity. In the late Palaeozoic diastrophism two sets of normal faults were produced. each series having a trend respectively parallel to one of the two trend-lines in the folding. The major of these two sets of faults includes the Brushy Hill fault, the Goorangoola fault, and the Grasstree faults. Again, at a much later period the Hunter Overthrust developed, slicing through the Upper Palaeo- zoic rocks and pushing the Carboniferous rocks over the Permian terranes. The general direction of the movement in this case was from the north-east towards the south-west. 4. It is probable that peneplanation intervened between the two sets of movement mentioned in the last paragraph. 5. Following the Hunter thrust the whole of the area was reduced to a peneplain at the close of the Tertiary Period, and ultimately epeirogenic uplift ushered in the Pleistocene erosion-cycle which is stil! in progress. References. Browne, W. R., 1926.—The Geology of the Gosforth District. Jowrn. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., lx, pp. 213-277. Davin, T. W. E., 1886.—Ann. Rept. Dept. Mines, N.S.W., p. 145. OsBORNE, G. D., 1922.—The Geology and Petrography of the Clarencetown-Paterson District. Part I. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., vol. xlvii, pp. 167-198. , 1926.—Stratigraphical and Structural Geology of the Carboniferous Rocks in the Mt. Mirannie and Mt. Dyrring Districts, near Singleton, N.S.W. Proc. LInn. Soc. N.S.W., vol. li, pp. 387-407. , 1927.—The Geology of the Country between Lamb’s Valley and the Paterson River. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., vol. lii, pp. 85-103. PLATE NXXVII. Geological map of the Carboniferous System between Glennies Creek and Muscle Creek, Hunter River District. THE CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS IN THE MUSWELLBROOK-SCONE DISTRICT, WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO THEIR STRUCTURAL RELATIONS. By G. D. Ossorne, B.Sc., Lecturer in Geology, University of Sydney, late Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology. (Plate xxxviii and two Text-figures.) [Read 28th November, 1928.] Preliminary and Geographical. The Carboniferous rocks between Muswellbrook and Scone outcrop in a belt running in a more or less meridional direction. To the south-east of Muswellbrook these rocks continue to the Lower Hunter area, while further north than Scone, they can be traced with ease right into the northern part of the State, and even to the Queensland border. The area considered in this paper is a direct continuation of the area described in a recent paper (Osborne, 1928), and begins on the south-east at Muscle Creek and ends on the north at the Scone-Upper Hunter road. Between these limits the Carboniferous area is divisible into two main parts, the western division being composed of Kuttung rocks, and the eastern part consisting of the Burindi Series. The western boundary of the Kuttung Series, for almost the entire extent of the area, is the Hunter fault, a great overthrust against which occur the Permian rocks. The eastern boundary of the Kuttung belt is also a fault which, however, is normal in character. This is the Brushy Hill fault which has thrown the Kuttung Series down against the Burindi Series. The Burindi rocks outcrop right to the eastern margin of the area and their limit in that direction has not been determined. The Carboniferous rocks are responsible for a line of highlands which includes Bells Mountain, east of Muswellbrook, Colonel’s Mount, east of Aberdeen and the Segenhoe Hills between Pages River and the Great Northern Road. The Permian rocks on the west of the Kuttung belt have been eroded extensively by the Hunter River and its tributaries, and northward from Muswell- brook the main valley of the Upper Hunter, with its chief tributary, Pages River, is found crossing the Carboniferous rocks, and to the north-east of this locality, the Carboniferous and Devonian rocks have suffered extensive denudation by these streams. One notable exception to the general rapid removal of the Permian rocks is the preservation of a residual ridge which trends north between Muswellbrook and Aberdeen. This ridge is composed of conglomerates and sandstones containing plant stems. Where the Upper Hunter and its main tributary flow out from the Carbon- iferous area and enter the broad valley down-stream from Segenhoe, there is a BY G. D. OSBORNE. 589 marked gap in the Carboniferous highlands, and much alluviation has taken place up-stream from this point. There is evidence of valley-in-valley structure between Scone and the districts east and south-east therefrom, but the details of the physiography have not been worked out by the writer. One important point bearing upon the physiography of the present area is that there is no late Tertiary or Pleistocene faulting to account for the marked differences of level which exist in the region. One outstanding feature about the western and northern portions of the area under description is the prevalence of a heavy mantle of soil and drift, some of which is thirty feet deep. Much of this obscures the Palaeozoic terranes and the most critical area, from the point of view of fault relationships, is covered in this manner. Large areas in the region are cleared and the geological relationships in such places are relatively easy to determine, but in other districts, notably on Bells Mountain and on Colonel’s Mount, the prickly-pear growth is so great that the investigation of the rocks is practically impossible. The chief purpose of this paper is to consider the structure of the Carbon- iferous belt, particularly the portion of the belt composed of Kuttung rocks. The stratigraphy will be considered only in a general way, because the area imme- diately to the south has been fully described and the same general features are shown by the rocks in the area now under discussion. Very little geological observation has been carried out in this area in the past. J. EH. Carne (1914) recognized the existence of a faulted junction between the Permian and Carboniferous systems near Muswellbrook, and reference to this fault was also made by Professor David (1914). Descriptions of Lower Carbon- iferous fossils in the Burindi Series along Rouchel Brook have been given in publications issued from time to time by the Geological Survey of New South Wales, and these occurrences have been discussed in a very useful paper by Benson (1921). Brief mention has also been made of some of the structural features of the Carboniferous and Permian rocks, particularly near Scone and Wingen, by W. R. Browne (1924). In a number of papers dealing with the physiography of the Hunter Valley (Taylor, 1906, 1911; Andrews, 1914) very brief reference is made to the area considered in this paper. Summary of Lithology and Distribution of the Carboniferous rocks. Burindi Series. The Burindi rocks, of Lower Carboniferous age, which occur between Muscle Creek and Fishhole Creek in a horst-like mass, extend northward, increasing in extent until wide areas along the Upper Hunter Valley are occupied by them. The general structure in the Burindi belt is simple, consisting of a dip to the north- east and east-north-east, the degree of inclination varying a good deal. In this dipping belt there is a series of sediments and occasionally some lavas. The sediments embrace limestones, with a typically Lower Carboniferous fauna, tuffs, calcareous sandstones, shales, mudstones and conglomerates. The limestones are sometimes markedly oolitic, and particularly good examples are to be seen along Brushy Hill range and in portions 15 and 42, Parish of Russell. A very distinct belt of limestone outcrops at Yellow Rock and runs through the gap east of Colonel’s Mount and on to Brushy Hill. Where the Burindi rocks consist of calcareous tuffs, the erosion has been very extensive. The limestones, on the other hand, stand out fairly well and help to make some of the rugged country 590 CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS IN MUSWELLBROOK-SCONE DISTRICT, which occurs between Sandy Creek and Rouchel Brook, where also there are some lava flows. In the area mapped, a minimum thickness of 3,000 feet is indicated, but considering the extension of these rocks to the east, it is clear that the series must be very thick in this part of New South Wales. Kuttung Series. Situated between the Hunter Overthrust and the Brushy Hill Fault lies the Kuttung belt. This division comprises rocks belonging to the Volcanic and Glacial Stages of the Series, but it has not been possible, except near Scone, to determine definitely the extent of each stage, nor was there time to determine the details of the stratigraphy. This, however, is hardly necessary, as the general facies of the two Stages are very similar to those described for the Muscle Creek- Bowman’s Creek area. In the paper dealing with the last mentioned district, it was shown that the Volcanic Stage near Muscle Creek showed features that were distinct in many ways from those of the Volcanic Stage in the areas further to the south-east. This facies, typically shown in the Muscle Creek section, is continued in the rocks on Bells Mountain and on towards Segenhoe, especially in the low hills along the neighbourhood of the Rouchel Road and between the Hunter River and the line of the Hunter Overthrust. In the cuttings on the Rouchel Road there is a prevalence of felsites in the Volcanic Stage, many of which are devitrified dacites, and there is an almost complete absence of the andesitic types. The conglomerates associated, with the lavas are well sorted, containing boulders up to seven inches in diameter set in a tuffaceous matrix that weathers to produce a good soil. Sometimes the conglomerates, and the tuffs also, are very calcareous, due to the infiltration of lime-bearing solutions probably derived from the Burindi areas to the east. The Volcanic Stage makes up all the Kuttung terrane north of Colonel’s Mount, with the exception of the central portion of the Segenhoe syncline. On Bells Mountain and Colonel’s Mount the Volcanic Stage and the Glacial Stage are mixed up by minor faulting and it is almost impossible to do much in the elucidation of the relationships and extent of these rocks because of the prickly-pear growth. Between the point of confluence of the Hunter River and Rouchel Brook and Scone, the thickness of the Volcanic Stage is approximately 3,500 feet. Most of this thickness is made up of volcanic material, the conglomerates being sub- ordinate. The Glacial Stage comprises tillitic conglomerates, normal conglomerates, sandy tuffs, varve-rocks and occasional interbedded felsites. The best place to study these rocks is in the central portion of the Segenhoe Syncline, particularly along Bullock Creek. They also occur on the divide in the gap between Sandy Creek and Rouchel Brook, in portion 173, Parish of Balmoral, near the head of Muscle Creek, and on the north side of Bells Mountain along the Sandy Creek road. Two horizons of varve-rock have been noted in the Glacial Stage, one out- cropping on the Sandy Creek Road and the other on the track from McCully’s Gap to Rouchel Brook Road. The former unit possesses a very characteristic grey body-colour with darker layers, almost black in colour, which represent the summer accumulations in the deposit. BY G. D. OSBORNE. 591 A section through the upper part of the Volcanic Stage and the lower part of the Glacial Stage is exposed along Sandy Creek. This section may be generalized into the following summary, descending stratigraphically :— Thickness in feet. Banded felsite it ag ley onc oe het ese deh a 50 Pink tuff ee Re BC he il \giscs) tice acl, pO Felsite ies sels iota DA earns ee ays, ee A a OO Conglomerate and tuff et Mee US RE OWE 2 oo aOO Varve-rock .. .. ieee Mears Se ate oe She 80 Acid tuff ae ch WE meebbetes | becca icys yea es 75 Pebbly sandstone ci EsG SC Ses th he. eat 50 @herty itiatiee ss poe 2 ane, ies a dated Vere) ater POROO Conglomerate ee Pst NR tere |) aah tant aes OnE GO CGoarsetutie Shs PyAe ie t e oe ai ee hr ee ee 60 Conglomerate pitah eee eats tee sel tk ie ee lO Toscanite ee sO SBE MB ms 103) Li yba ah es ay a 50 Tuff yea MAE Rs Eee hue ee ane St SRSA WPM grey Sie OO Green; telsiterr. | oe) eetioe Ste nae ee oe ERR SO Tillitic conglomerate and tuffs Sel eer g Perea aD 0.0 Felsite ote t Rece PE OnE ok ee ton GOS © SoRpeenty c-gn mea KIND) Tuff See Bae Bee ee ae ean pe ss 2h Sik 2 tet ees 90 TOTAL .. Se eee Sia STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY. Folded Structures. The result of the late Palaeozoic folding in the present area is the existence of a number of broadly warped structures on the west and a general tilting on the east. The dip of the Kuttung Series at Muscle Creek is to the north-east, and this continues to the vicinity of the Brushy Hill fault, where there are reversals. Beyond the fault the Burindi rocks show the same general north-easterly dip, and these marine rocks maintain this direction of dip fairly constantly to the Scone- Gundy road. In the Kuttung Series there is much more variation in the structure. Bells Mountain is seen to be a very flat basin-like structure, the angle of dip of the rim being as low as five degrees in places. This depression is connected with the simply-tilted mass of Kuttung rocks running up Muscle Creek by a warp in the Volcanic Stage. It is also connected with another flat basin-like depression on Colonel’s Mount by a plunging anticline trending along Sandy Creek. The Bells Mountain structure is disturbed by steep minor faulting at the north-western end, and is eventually cut off altogether by the Hunter Overthrust. One can see the structure clearly delineated by the outcrop of a very conspicuous unit of con- glomerate which gives rise to a series of bluffs on Bells Mountain and Colonel’s Mount. There is also an outstanding felsite near the head of Rainbow Creek which acts as a good indicator horizon. Colonel’s Mount consists of a structure very similar to that on Bells Mountain. The synclinal disposition on the former, however, is more pronounced through the dips being high, in comparison with those of the latter area. The northern side of Colonel’s Mount shows the passing of the synelinal structure against the Hunter Overthrust and the development of a flat anticlinal bulge which links up with the Segenhoe syncline. This syncline comprises the remainder of the Carboniferous area northward from the Rouchel Road and westward from the Hunter River. The topography has been very definitely influenced by the arrange- ment of the Kuttung rocks in this syncline. Thus there is a series of dip-ridges 592 CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS IN MUSWELLBROOK-SCONE DISTRICT, flanking the area of the synecline, and in the central portion of the structure a region of less-marked physiography, due to the presence of the Glacial Stage rocks. : On the accompanying geological map the general plan of the syncline is made apparent by the line of dips, and it is seen that there is an irregular warping on the eastern side, producing a pronounced irregularity in the general basin- structure. It should be noted that, while the Hunter Overthrust is responsible for turning up the Kuttung strata in certain parts of the area, so as to give these a local dip to the east, in the Segenhoe area the thrust is dipping flatly and there is clear evidence that the synclinal structure was original in the Kuttung terrane. It is possible to link up the strata on either side of the Hunter and Pages Rivers near Segenhoe, in spite of the abundance of alluvium along these rivers and particularly near their junction. Certain of the felsites are distinctive and ean be traced across the alluvium, indicating that there is no great displacement, if indeed any at all, along the region of the confluence of these streams. This is a very important point, as one might easily consider, from a cursory examination of the outcrops, that there was displacement of the beds and of the Hunter Over- thrust hereabouts. The great sweep of the boundary between the Carboniferous and Permian systems is due to the fact that the fault is very gently inclined and the Hunter-Page erosion has been extensive. Superimposed upon the syncline there are at least two anticlinal variations, one to be seen near Segenhoe Trigonometrical Station, and the other to the east of Bullock Creek. The first of these is a small flat variation which is clearly manifested in the outcrop of the main felsite lava in the Volcanic Stage. The other anticline runs more or less east and west, producing a ridge which serves to limit the Glacial Stage outcrops near the head of Bullock Creek. The north-western end of the Segenhoe syncline is interrupted by the Wingen fault, which has broken across the Kuttung rocks and duplicated some of the horizons of the Glacial Stage which outcrop in the central portion of the syncline. The general structural features in the northern and southern parts of the area investigated are shown respectively in Text-figures 1 and 2. Faulting. Three important faults oecur in the area and the relationship between two of these endows the region with extreme interest in connection with the problems of the Upper Palaeozoic geology of New South Wales. In addition to these three faults there are many small dislocations, all of which appear to be normal in character. Strong jointing and upturning of the strata in a number of places are the chief evidences of the existence of these smaller faults, while stratigraphical displacements are generally insignificant. In one place along Sandy Creek road there are some slickensides and polished surfaces which have been produced by minor faulting. The Hunter Fault. This large overthrust fault bounds the Kuttung area on the west from Muscle Creek to within about three miles of Scone. The fault shows practically the same essential features as have been observed in the region between Muswell- brook and Sedgefield, and a full description of the fault and its relationships has been given for these districts by the writer (Osborne, 1928). After crossing Muscle Creek the thrust runs along through some country of mature aspect and soon shows a rather sudden turn in outcrop on account of the BY G. D. OSBORNE. 593 erosion by the large creek which leaves Bells Mountain in the northern part of portion 1438, Parish of Balmoral. From this locality to Sandy Creek the fault is fairly clearly indicated and at the latter place it has placed Kuttung felsite against some thinly-bedded shales with marine fossils and associated conglomerate, these last two being Permian in age. From Sandy Creek to the Hunter River the fault swings to the west of Colonel’s Mount and its position has been placed ‘upon the map with as much accuracy as possible, but on account of the difficulty of surveying in certain parts of the area, where prickly-pear is prevalent, some of the sinuosities in the plan f HUNTER RIVER Uae OVERTARUST PAGES RIVER BRUSHY Hie fi a ‘ AANGE ! : GEN FAULT Zone Ses eee ! BRUSHY HILL ; BYLLOCK CREEK FAULT ' t FT 000 i aad [= | | KUTTUNG VoLcANiC \ AND GLACIAL rae i} ALLUVIUNG ' | 1 BUKIN DI SERIES ae whleo> WS rs \ oO es CHAINS Text-fig. 1.—Wine A-B on Map. 1 SANDY CREEK 9 COUNTRY AT HEAD | HUNTER FAULT OF MUSCLE CK uy BELLS MOUNTAIN SADOLE SouTH | | Pe ? | be RAINBON cK | : BRUSHY HILL 2000 | \ MINOR i FAULT | PAULTING KUT TUNG FAULT KOT TENG : 10CO Text-fig. 2.—Line C-D on Map. of the outcrop represent approximate positions. Near the Hunter River there is a great amount of wash and drift in which many boulders occur, and this mantle obscures the outcrop of the fault-surface. Some of these pebbles are from adjacent Kuttung units, and some represent redistributed ancient gravels of the Hunter River. It is clear that the pebbles do not constitute the product of disintegration, in situ, of a Kuttung conglomerate, and on this assumption the fault has been placed as shown on the map. Where the thrust is crossed by the Hunter and Pages Rivers, there is a wide curve in the line of the fault. Beyond this locality it is traceable underneath Segenhoe Trigonometrical Station and some distance to the west and then it turns so as to trend more or less meridionally. From here 594 CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS IN MUSWELLBROOK-SCONE DISTRICT, to the north there is a large tract of fairly level country bounded on the west by the Main Northern Road, on the north by the Scone-Gundy road, and on the south by the Segenhoe Road. Most of this tract is covered with a thick deposit of alluvium which obscures the underlying Palaeozoic rocks. The eastern margin of this low lying country is the line of foot-hills of the Kuttung Series and it seems most probable that the fault runs along against these hills.. In fact an exposure at the northern end of the region shows the Permian sandstone and tuff in close proximity to the Kuttung rocks and here the position of the fault can be fairly closely fixed. Unfortunately in the neighbourhood of the junction of the Scone- Gundy Road with the Main Road, the extent of the drift and alluvium becomes so great that it is very difficult to find any outcrops of bed-rock, and it is here that the overthrust is apparently cut off by another fault which will be described below. The Brushy Hill Fault. The Brushy Hill fault, which is normal in character, was first encountered near “Greylands’”’ when the writer was investigating the structure of the country near Goorangoola Creek and Mt. Dyrring. From that locality the fault was traced right across from Glennies Creek to Muscle Creek and its occurrence in that region was discussed in a former paper (1928).. The mapping of that area carried the fault as far as the head of Muscle Creek. In the present area the fault can be followed right to the Scone-Gundy road, and at that locality it is probably of great magnitude. The details of the geology of this district are the subject of present investigation by Mr. C. A. Sussmilch. Brushy Hill range, composed of Burindi rocks, runs parallel to and at a small distance from the fracture-line as far south as portion 33, Parish of Macqueen, where theefault crosses the ridge, which is taken up in the Kuttung rocks. C The dip of the fault in the area to the south of Muscle Creek is fairly steep, but after crossing the eastern side of the depression known as “The Basin’’, the fracture plane takes on a less steeply inclined attitude and this accounts for the wide sweep which the fault makes to the south-west of Rainbow Creek. After crossing Sandy Creek, however, the Brushy Hill fault once again resumes its steep dip, and this is maintained right to the neighbourhood of Brushy Hill itself. In the gap between Sandy Creek and Rouchel Brook, there is very clear evidence of the existence of the fault, as there is a fault-breccia and the associated rocks are very strongly jointed and fractured into small pieces. The fault is a true strike fault and is related to the late Palaeozoic folding, as explained in the paper referred to above. ¢ The Wingen Fault and its relationship with the Hunter Overthrust. From Scone northward towards Blandford the eastern side of the valley of Kingdon Ponds and its tributaries is made up chiefly of Carboniferous rocks which, with cappings of Tertiary basalt, form highlands up to 3,500 feet above sea-level. The valley has been excavated out of the Permian strata which occur to the west of the Carboniferous belt and are clearly faulted against it. The writer examined this faulted junction near Scone and further north in the year 1922, and was of the opinion that the fault was a normal one with a fairly high angle of dip. At the time, it was thought probable that this fault-zone extended continuously along the Hunter Valley to the Singleton district. Professor Browne, who made a brief examination of the Scone-Upper Hunter district in 1924, described some of the BY G. D. OSBORNE. 595 outstanding features of the geology and physiography in a short but comprehensive paper (Browne, 1924), wherein he considered one or two of the problems connected with this fault and named it the Wingen Fault. He also assumed that the fault continued along the base of the Carboniferous highlands on their western side from Wingen to Muswellbrook. However, as has been shown above, this is not the case and the overthrust separating the Carboniferous and Permian has now been examined by the present writer right along the eastern margin of the main portion of the Hunter Valley to a point situated about three miles from Scone. Here, most unfortunately, the structural relations are obscured by heavy alluvial deposits, but a careful examination shows that the thrust cannot carry on very much further, as it does not cross the Scone-Gundy road, for there is no displace- ment of the Kuttung rocks here. The beds on the north have not been studied in detail, but examination has been made sufficiently carefully to warrant the statement that the glacial beds south of the road are continuous with those on the northern side. The Wingen fault, however, can be traced south from Wingen into Scone and a breccia, apparently occurring in the fault zone, is seen just south of the Scone Hospital, where also there is a Kuttung felsite outcropping right at the western margin of the Carboniferous belt. This felsite, in portion 14, Parish of Scone, shows strong jointing running in a direction S25°EH and it is considered that this jointing is connected with the movement along the fault. South of this point in the direction of prolongation of the Wingen fault there is the widespread alluvium just referred to, but about two and a half miles south- east from the junction of the Main Northern and Gundy Roads one again comes upon jointing and a fault breccia. These features are connected with a most remarkable fault-zone which runs from here towards Segenhoe Trigonometrical Station. The fault-zone can be followed between these two localities with compara- tive ease, except where there is some alluvium along Segenhoe Creek. The zone is excellently exposed and it would be difficult to imagine a more striking example of a fracture-zone. The examination of the rocks in the neighbourhood reveals that the fault begins some distance north of Segenhoe Trigonometrical Station (see map), because, although strong jointing is present on the small saddle just west of the Trigonometrical Station, no actual displacement is indicated until a point some distance to the north is reached. Proceeding in that direction the amount of downthrow increases and associated with this feature is an increase in intensity of the degree of fracturing and splintering of the rocks along the zone of movement. The trend of the joints and fracture-lines is remarkably constant, varying only to the extent of five degrees in a length of two and a half miles. The average direction which is maintained is S16°H, and where only small intermittent outcrops occur scattered through the alluvium, one finds the evidence of fracturing with the trend of the structures more or less constant. The most spectacular part of the zone is in a saddle-like area in the south-east part of Portion 16, Parish of Scone, near the divide between Bullock and Segenhoe Creeks. The fracture- zone here is about six chains in width and, beginning on the eastern side, there is a pronounced fault-breccia, which passes into a splintered zone. Then comes a strongly jointed zone, three feet wide, where the rocks of the Glacial Stage, cherty shales and varve-rocks, are jointed with almost vertical fractures into a number of elongated prismatic slabs. The disintegration of these produces a very striking apppearance, the whole zone, when outcropping along a spur or T 596 CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS IN MUSWELLBROOK-SCONE DISTRICT, ridge, resembling a wall-like mass standing up above the adjacent land. West- ward from this jointed zone is a second mass of breccia, and then about four chains of intensely fractured rock, which on disintegration makes a shed of chips. Such sheds, with the underlying parent masses, sometimes occupy areas up to 30 or 40 feet across, thus giving rise to distinctive features which assist in tracing the fault. While not so conspicuous away from the area just described, this fracture-zone is characterized by the same general association of features, allowing it to be followed to the north, and the writer feels sure that it is the direct continuation of the Wingen fault. Further south from the place described above, the fracture-zone is traceable along a ridge and then down a long spur leading to the large area of alluvium in Segenhoe Creek. In the small gutters through the alluvium the jointed and splintered rock is often to be seen and a small displacement is indicated by the rocks of the locality. After passing through the alluvium the jointing is seen again in the ferruginous tuffs which outcrop close to where Segenhoe Creek erosses the western boundary line of the Parish of Macqueen. Here the direction of the structures is still S16°E. Further south still, among the hills which form the high land on which Segenhoe Trigonometrical Station stands, there does not seem to be any displacement, but decided jointing is present, the dip of the joints being less steep than elsewhere. A felsite affected by this jointing outcrops on the south side of the hills, and can be seen very well from the Segenhoe road. The author has considered the possibility of the fault zone cutting right through the Carboniferous country and displacing a portion of the thrust flake, but the evidence on the south face of the Segenhoe ridge seems to admit of no other conclusion than that there has been no displacement just there, and that the Wingen fault begins within the Carboniferous terrane and gradually increases in magnitude northward, until ultimately it drops the Carboniferous rocks beneath the Permian strata. As was pointed out, it is extremely unfortunate that at the critical point, where the two faults intersect, there is a thick cloak of alluvium. The above description removes, therefore, the difficulty which has been in the minds of those who have considered the problem of the relation of the thrust and normal faults skirting the Carboniferous rocks in the areas respectively to the south and north of Scone. The implications raised by the recognition of the relationship discussed above for the faults are very important and far-reaching. These will be considered in a forthcoming paper which will deal with the tectonic history of the Carboniferous belt and some adjacent portions of the Permian areas. Summarizing, it is seen that in late Palaeozoic time folding took place in the Muswellbrook-Scone district, as elsewhere in the Hunter Valley, and associated with this deformation were developed some strike faults, one of which was the Brushy Hill Fault. At a later period of movement the Hunter Overthrust developed, cutting across the earlier structures. Still later, further movement affected the area and the Wingen fault was formed. This was characterized by the production of a large disturbed zone, which began near Segenhoe and ultimately truncated the thrust, and depressed a portion of the edge of the thrust-flake. The probable ages of the faults can be best considered when a greater area of the Carboniferous belt is under consideration, and accordingly this aspect will be deferred until the discussion in a later paper. BY G. D. OSBORNE. D97 The writer wishes to record his thanks to Assistant-Professor Browne for helpful criticism of this paper. List of References. ANDREWS, E. C., 1914.—Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci., N.S.W. Handbook, p. 527. Benson, W. N., 1921.—A Census and Index of the Burindi Fauna. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., X, part 1, pp. 12-74. Browne, W. R., 1924.—Notes on the Geology and Physiography of the Upper Hunter River. Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., lviii, pp. 128-144. CARNE, J. E., 1914.—Ann. Rept. Dept. Mines, N.S.W., p. 194. Davip, T. W. E., 1914.—Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci., N.S.W. Handbook, p. 572. OSBORNE, G. D., 1928.—The Carboniferous Rocks between Glennies Creek and Muscle Creek, Hunter River District, N.S.W. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., liii, 1928, 565. Taytor, T. G., 1906.—A Correlation of Contour, Climate and Coal. Proc. Linn. Soc. INES og WO Bil, wee Bs Ts HAZ , 1911.—Commonwealth Weather Bureau, Bull. No. 8. PLATE XXXVITI. Geological map of the Carboniferous rocks in the Muswellbrook-Scone District. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. No. xvii. By J. R. MALLocH. (Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) (Twelve Text-figures. ) {Read 31st October, 1928.] In this paper I offer some data upon a subfamily of Mycetophilidae, notes on the genus Pachyneres Greene belonging to Bombyliidae, a few notes on Asilidae, and notes on some already described species of Cyclorrhapha, most of the latter being in extension of matter already published in a previous part of this series of papers. There are systematists who believe that a genus is a concept and that what binds it is not the genotype but the author’s conception. What limits a genus is its genotype and, no matter how poorly the characters of the genotype may have been depicted by the original author of the genus, it stands to reason that all subsequently included species must conform to it in the essential generic characters, or else they are not congeneric. The data presented in this and other papers of this series have been acquired during the past quarter of a century in working over material from all over the world, and almost invariably are not available in published form in any magazine either in Australia or elsewhere. Frequently one finds that in a genus including many species from various faunal regions there are segregates which may readily be distinguished by structural characters and, when this is the case, it appears appropriate that these segregates should be given subgeneric or generic rank, so that the more closely related forms may the more readily be associated and in this manner form a ready basis for a generalization upon geographic distribution, a fad becoming more common than heretofore. It was with this end in view that I have already dealt with some Brachycera in this series of papers and, in extension of this line of thought, I present below some notes upon a subfamily of Mycetophilidae. How many species there may be in some of the genera related to Platyura Meigen one can not even hazard a guess, but it is not improbable that there are some hundreds which only wide and intensive collecting will disclose. Unfortunately the insects are mostly fungivorous and of little or no economic importance so far as we at present know and, consequently, are of purely academic interest so that most collectors pay no attention to them. They do play, however, a part in our scheme of classification and as such must be considered on a parity with others which, because of their pernicious or beneficial functions, are more favoured in systematic literature for these reasons alone. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 599 Suborder ORTHORRHAPHA. Division NEMATOCERA. Family Mycetophilidae. Subfamily CEROPLATIN AE. In working over some North American material in the family Mycetophilidae to make comparisons with a few specimens received from several sources in Australia, I discovered some characters of group significance that appear to be worth recording for the benefit of Australian students of Diptera who may be interested in arriving at an accurate determination of the associations of Australian species with those from other faunal regions. To make matters as clear as possible I present herein a key to the genera of the subfamily Ceroplatinae which includes all the known genera and is similar in part to that by Johannsen published in 1909 (Genera Insectorum, Fase. 20). Not having access to several of the Australian genera, I am unable to make use of some of the new classificatory characters, such as the metathoracic hairs, included in the key and applied to the North American genera. If the publication of these data induces some student to investigate the Australian members of this subfamily further, I shall be more than satisfied with the result attained. The subfamily Ceroplatinae belongs to the section of Mycetophilidae in which the medio-cubital crossvein of the wing is present, or in other words to that section in which there is a crossvein connecting the cubitus with media, usually beyond the furcation of the former. From the major portion of the subfamilies in - this division it is readily distinguished by the obliteration of the radio-medial crossvein due to the fusion of a section of the basal portion of radius with media at the point where the crossvein should be. These features may be readily appreciated by a comparison of Text-figures 1 and 2 herein. The only subfamily in which the venation of the wings is similar to that of the Ceroplatinae in its essential features is Macrocerinae, but in the latter the antennae are very long and slender, usually not shorter, and often much longer, than the entire insect, while in the Ceroplatinae the antennae are never very slender, frequently conspicuously flattened, or even pectinate, and always much shorter than the entire insect. Without access to a much larger amount of material than I have at present, I do not care to express a definite opinion as to the generic distinctness of the few Australian species I have before me, but am inclined to believe that when the species are carefully compared with those from the New World, some of them will be found to belong to different genera, for which new names will be required. Key to the Genera. 1. Face and proboscis prolonged downward beak-like, the proboscis about as long as heichtwotehead sor loner sthameiteyacucssm cists teas Scie creda cua cicero relcue ene custards 2 Face and proboscis not prolonged downward, sometimes a short elevation on lower portion of face projecting forward or slightly curved downward ............ 5 2. Vein R,,, much longer than the distance from its base to the ecrossvein; apex of Wn erupt vebr UM Gated! isos euccsnsrscre use ce Bicusue wile sr eis een cusmeneeays Arctoneuwra Hutton Vein R,,, shorter than the distance from its base to the crossvein; apex of wing NOLMVAbLuUptisyeKtriUnGacregy my is wee. Meee ee aI Peele! oy AU ect mo ed ae et ee ely 3 3. Antennae with 2415 segments, the apical one very small, papilla-like; subcosta crossvein present, the subcosta usually connecting with costa; prosternum, WAEUAIMO WII, ENGL MME VISVIRA, lo coocconccdaccoetoucsbos Asindulum WLatreille Antennae with 12 or 14 flagellar segments; subcostal crossvein lacking .......... 4 4. Subcosta short, connecting with costa; antennae with 2+12 segments .......... Pea oh ee cen eos ths come nepeiscics Meee, a mibeg eetaiber! Sas) ceareustener ening ox wuenomeRedotenena ges Antriadophila Skuse Subcosta free at apex; antennae 2+14 segmented .......... Helladepichoria Becker ENOUEINOES WACuborsne, A 4s y cassnensel Gosodcocdoccccvodcoun Platyroptilon Westwood FAME ENO tas pPeGtlMateren aie aecesucmee aka she siateloaan Sale eoteb al chara thamtlabercseaia ners o RUE So be 6 OT 600 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVii, Antennae much flattened, strap-like; palpi porrect, short, dilated, not incurved .. 7 Antennae not conspicuously flattened ; palpi slender apically, incurved, and moderately (2) KO) 0¥=¢2 210 ere enn ee Set cA ch otd CSE ne ORCC Re CLEA card Chalo CHORALE ee torr aah Oraccio oo Gold 10 7. Tibiae and tarsi of mid and hind legs much thickened .......... Heteropterna Skuse _ Tibiae and tarsi of mid and hind legs not thickened ......................... 8 8. Metapleura bare; mesopleura haired above; R,,, connecting with R, ............ Sea RELA OR EE ORCL ROMA D Olea CRIN re Orme chau aitro Gin kote eRe ar Cerotelion Rondani aS Metapleura haired; R,,, connecting with the costa ....,...................... 9 9. Upper portion of mesopleura haired ......................;. Ceroplatus Bosc., pt. Upper portion of mesopleura bare ...............2.20+0e2000 Ceroplatus Bosc., pt. 10. Media originating at base of wing, the basal section more or less evident ...... iL Media originating at the crossveins, its basal section lacking ................ 12 11. Ocelli lacking, the vertex prominently elevated; R,,, connecting with costa ...... PERRO EOeRG. CS. G OO OI Osos GCC ORE: CREO RERUN RT ern AR cee errs ies oe Hesperodes Coquillett Ocelli present, vertex not abnormally elevated; R,,, connecting with R, .......... Sihaeiak age rasiehtousireyceuraenemeurst tse ctecyreey teil ancch eres cepstlayel ol Se 's Hesse ueare ro eure Blot eich rel sa stee eutcnear tates Apemon Johannsen WA, 15 SHOE, HESS Wneo Ine ybe BS) WOME? OS Tiss coobocccc009s00000 0000s DDE F0DnS500000E0 13 Tong WOR] Wen abe QS NOME AS Wane cocpagcac09co Dan DDD sODd0oDaeODaODOOOONSDO OD Ly, 13. Antennae with 2+13 segments, almost cylindrical ........ Pseudoplatyura Skuse Antennae with 2414 segments, usually somewhat compresesd .............. 14 14. Metapleura and upper portion of mesopleura with black hairs; all tibiae with one long apical ventral bristle; subcostal crossvein lacking ...................... eR Ro mC Fe ee RRO OO rer ee eae EM RET RENE Garena eh c Calliplatyura, n. gen. Metapleura bare; mid and hind tibiae each with one long and one slightly shorter apical’ *ventral SSpuUe! Sp lee Rt ai hste aes halla Ss ea haves dbs LsMislcspreiretstysheuiseeel Sh te Pons) ear 15 15. Metanotum setulose; tibiae with 6 or more series of closely placed black spinules which form black lines from base to apex of each tibia; anal vein of wing distinct only at base, becoming evanescent outwardly, and never distinguishable Leon OCC Gr=abah KODE RNY 0 Chee inrts erecta cig. dackoac cuaror eae cic aucrciuch aacies oh okols taro ies-8a Platyura Meigen Metanotum bare; anal vein of wing distinct to, or almost to, margin of wing .... 16 16. Some erect black hairs behind prothoracic spiracle ............ Neoplatyura, n. gen. No erect black hairs behind prothoracie spiracle .......... Xenoplatyura, n. gen. iia -“Petioles of. Mediay Gistin ct wis scree a cree oO epore ane euen eee Nervijuncta Marshall Petiolé: of media. obliterated) cc. sc Seca os oo eee sosice Se eetel eaeenae lemon aro Casa Hutton Notes on the Genera. Arctoneura Hutton. One New Zealand species known, hudsoni Marshall, Asindulum Latreille. No Australian species Known to me. Antriadophila Skuse. Four known species, all Australian. Helladepichoria Becker. One species; Canary Islands. Platyroptilon Westwood. Type species from Brazil. The Ceylonese species Platyura talaroceroides Senior-White evidently belongs here also. Heteropterna Skuse. Two Australian species. Ceroplatus Bose. There are two segregates of this genus known to me which are distinguished as indicated in the foregoing key. The group in which the mesopleura is haired on upper portion is represented in Australia, from whence I have seen one species (mastersi Skuse). The same group occurs in North America. Cerotelion Rondani. One Australian species has been placed in this genus. Hesperodes Coquillett. The genotype and only species is North American. Apemon Johannsen. All the species of this genus so far recorded are from North America. Platyura Meigen. There are about nine Australian species recorded for this genus, but whether any of them belong to it or not I am unable to say. I have divided the genus into four segregates in the foregoing key on the basis of characters that are apparently of generic value and possibly all of the Australian species will fall in one or other of these groups, though it is not improbable that BY J. R. MALLOCH. 601 there may be present, in one or more of the species, structural characters which may indicate that they are entitled to separation from any of the included groups. I have but one Australian species which would be referred to Platyura in the old sense, but it does not belong to the genus as herein restricted. This limitation of the genus is based upon characters of the genotype as confirmed by Mr. J. HE. Collin. CALLOPLATYURA, Nl. gen. I have erected this genus for the reception of three species from the New World, the genotype being Platyura elegans Coquillett from North and Central America. The characters listed in the key form the basis of the genus. NEOPLATYURA, 1. gen. This genus is erected for the reception of those species in which the metanotum is bare. The distinction in the hairing of the mid and hind tibiae may be utilized as a subgeneric character. The genotype of Neoplatyura is Platyura setiger Johannsen, a North American species. Genus XENOPLATYURA NOV. I erect this genus for the reception of some Australian species which have the mesopleura bare behind the anterior spiracle, and the posterior branch of media and anterior branch of cubitus obsolete at apex. I have not enough material to go exhaustively into detail, but the group may contain a number of species of which I select conformis Skuse as genotype. Before me there are two specimens of a species which I consider as probably conformis. If I am correct in this identification there are some stiff hairs on the anterior margin of frons between and above the antennal insertions which I have not seen in any other species hitherto placed in Platywra. I find, however, one South American species which is evidently undescribed, that has these hairs. In the latter the tibial hairs are serially arranged on the entire extent, while in the Australian species before me they are indiscriminately arranged, except at apices of tibiae. Text-fig. 1.—Ditomyia sp., wing. Text-fig. 2.—Xenoplatyura sp., wing. Text-fig. 3.—Xenoplatyura sp. Ventral plate of male hypopygium. a, left side, from above, right side, from below; b, side view of apex. The hypopygia present many characters for the differentiation of the. species. Possibly the most valuable portion of these organs is the ventral plate and its 602 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVii, appendages, as shown in Text-figure 3. In addition to this plate there are two other portions of the male hypopygia, one internal, the other dorsal. I commend the study of these various parts of Platyurinae to Australian dipterists as a means towards the authentic identification of the species. The two males which I assign to conformis are from Roma, Qld. (F. H. Taylor), and Cairns, Qld. (J. F. Illingworth). Family Bibionidae. This family has been separated from Scatopsidae by recent writers on the basis of structures of all stages. The adults are distinguished from those of Scatopsidae by the presence of the second basal cell of the wing. The genera Plecia Wiedemann, Bibio Geoffroy, and Dilophus Meigen, are known to me from Australia. Skuse in 1888 dealt with the Australian species known to him (Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., (2), 3, p. 1362) and later published a supplement (Id., (2) 5, p. 633), in which he recorded another species. I give below a key for the separation of the three genera mentioned above, with some notes on the genus Plecia. Key to the Genera. I, “Abloubyel \iakaley \xethel 1eWHRERNTS, tLGo5 Thue WIMOSEME Goono nn sosodaoouesdooKae Plecia Wiedemann TPHIFG) wane | Vein: nota shu Castel: Was cidi aps we isas sca beep ectncuay = ethene keeles Mat pelea osae utente Na RTS E eam ene 2 Ms INOS Woe) WAI 2, Cla Cit Gowns AE ANE odcassuarcavcuvccbovauoe Dilophus Meigen Fore tibia with a very strong spine-like process at apex ............. Bibio Geoffroy Genus PrLecta Wiedemann. The species of this genus recorded by Skuse are amplipennis Skuse, which he afterwards synonymized with fulvicollis Fabricius, erebea Skuse, dimidiata Macquart, ornaticornis Skuse, and melanaspis Wiedemann. I have not seen erebea, but its entirely black thorax should be a good distinguishing character. Below I present a key to the species, with notes on those available. Key to the Species. 1. R,,, originating close to, or even at, the r-m crossvein, quite long, and extending almost parallel with R,,.; thorax black, posterior half to two-thirds of mesonotum reddish fulvous; mesopleura and hypopleura quite distinctly haired; hypopygium as Text-figure 4 .... (Subgenus Crapitula Gimm.) .... melanaspis Wiedemann. R,,, short, originating at much more than its length from the r-m crossvein and diverging from R,,, at, or almost at, a right angle; mesopleura bare or almost so, hypopleura usually bare (Subgenus Plecia Wiedemann) ................ 2 2. Thorax entirely reddish or ferruginous; eyes microscopically haired .............. 3 horaxlancelyaornmentine hyip lacks aey7e Sm aC) ielen toe iene nena ar ar eae 4 (JX) Second segment of scape of antenna reddish, the remainder black ............... BORON RARER Meriaear aL etch PSR eine Teg Harte rag SRN AD Aa PRELIRR GRUNT LS UN ad 8 ornaticornis Skuse Antennae: entirely MOlaG Kis spies ete rier one sles CNW Ao ay oken aCe ee amplipeniis Skuse 4. Thoracic dorsum ferruginous, black at anterior margin ........ dimidiata Macquart Thorax entirely Ho laiCke ses aes aie ea ee een an erebea Skuse PLECIA (CRAPITULA) MELANASPIS Wiedemann. This species belongs to the same group as heteroptera Say, a North American species, having the pleural hairing the same, and the male hypopygium with geniculated outer forceps. It has the vein R.,, much longer, however, and, though this species has been given generic status distinct from the typical forms in which the face is quite distinctly protruded, the hypopleura bare, and the outer forceps of the male hypopygium not geniculated, I do not believe there is much to be gained by the procedure. The genus Crapitula Gimm., was erected for the BY J. R. MALLOCH. 603 reception of melanaspis, as was also Plecomyia Brunetti. A character distinguish- ing it from heteroptera Say is the sessile media, the North American species having this vein pedunculate as in the remaining species occurring in Australia. Possibly subgeneric segregation would be the best course, as adopted herein, the basis of the segregation being the hairing of the hypopleura, and the form of the hypopygium. The genus Rhinoplecia Bellardi was erected for the reception of rostrata Bellardi (= rostellata Lw.), which has the face quite noticeably protruded, but this character is variable in the genus and can not be considered as of even subgeneric value. In any event the genotype of Plecia has the character rather evident so that it is synonymous with Plecia. The hind tibiae in the two species of this subgenus known to me are more conspicuously widened at apices, especially in the males, than they are in the typical forms. It is noteworthy that in Crapitula species the position of the medio-cubital crossvein is farther from the base of the anterior branch of cubitus than in the other group, the latter having the two forming a more or less angulate line, while in the former the basal section of the branch of cubitus is much longer than the crossvein and lies almost longitud- inally, instead of almost erect or transversely. I have seen this species from India and China, but have no Australian examples for comparison with them. I have before me a female of indica Brunetti from Kashmir, India, which leads me to consider that it belongs to the subgenus Crapitula though, as in the North American species, the media is petiolate. From melanaspis this species is readily separated by the entirely red mesonotum. PLECIA (PLECIA) AMPLIPENNIS Skuse. This species was sunk as a synonym of fulvicollis Fabricius by Skuse in his second paper on Plecia, but I have grave doubts as to the accuracy of the deter- mination of fulvicollis. Before me there are three specimens which may be referred to amplipennis as they have the antennae entirely black, and four specimens apparently referable to ornaticornis, having the second segment of the scape of antenna very noticeably reddish. Unfortunately neither of the two males I refer to amplipennis has the hypopygium present, so that I am unable to compare this organ with that of the species I accept as ornaticornis (Text-fig. 5). I have five species of this group from the Orient, all of them, with the possible exception of parva, agreeing closely with the description of fulvicollis, so that it is a matter of arbitrary decision as to which is really that species. It is to be regretted that the type specimen of fulvicollis is no longer in existence, and an accurate check upon its identity is thus no longer possible. It may be permissible to accept as the true fulvicollis a species from Java in the material before me, and this course I am adopting. Whether this species is the same as dorsalis Walker and subvarians Walker, which species are at present accepted as synonyms of fulvicollis, I have no means of ascertaining at this time, but probably it is not, and either or both of these may be distinct from the species now available to me, as the latter appear to be rather local in their distribution. A check up on the Walker types will establish the identity of his species as he had both sexes in his type series. The type of dorsalis is from Singapore, that of subvarians from Sarawak; none of my material is from these localities. What Penthetria thoracica Guérin may have been can not be decided, but it is at present ranked as a synonym of fulvicollis and may be left as such. Apart from the entirely black antennae there is no distinction between amplipennis and ornaticornis that I can make out. As these notes are intended 604 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVii, merely as guides to Australian students I leave the elucidation of the species on the basis of hypopygial characters, if these exist, to someone who has material for such a study. Localities —Vanikoro Is., Qld. (Dr. C. M. Deland), and Innisfail, Qld. (F. H. Taylor). PLECIA (PLECIA) ORNATICORNIS Skuse. This species I have before me in both sexes, one pair taken in copula. I figure the male hypopygium (Text-fig. 5), which is quite distinct from that of any of the Oriental species. Should there be but one species represented by this and the preceding species names, ornaticornis will fall as a synonym. Localities.—Cairns, N. Qld. (J. F. Illingworth), Townsville, Qld. (F. H. Taylor). PLECIA (PLECIA) FULVICOLLIS Fabricius. I accept as this species one which occurs in Java, the larvae living at the roots of plants. One male was found amongst orchids from Java on a ship at San Text-fig. 4.—Plecia (Crapitula) melanaspis, male hypopygium from above. Text-fig. 5—Plecia (Plecia) ornaticornis, male hypopygium and side view of inner forceps. Text-fig. 6.—Plecia (Plecia) fulvicollis, male hypopygium. Text-fig. 7.—Plecia (Plecia) bakeri, male hypopygium. Text-fig. 8.—Plecia (Plecia) philippinensis, male hypopygium. Text-fig. 9.—Plecia (Plecia) confusa, male hypopygium. Text-fig. 10.—Plecia (Plecia) parva, male hypopygium, rear and side views. Francisco, California, by O. H. Brenner, an inspector of the U.S. Federal Horti- culture Board, but the species has not found its way into the United States as far as we know. The head of the male is larger than in ornaticornis, and the ocelli are much less elevated, while the antennae are more slender, with the divisions between the BY J. R: MALLOCH. 605 segments much more prominent, and the eighth flagellar segment is almost indistinguishable. The hypopygium as seen from below is as Text-figure 6. Length, 7-8 mm. Locality —Buitenzorg, Java, at roots of Cacao theobroma (H. F. Deitz). The exact locality of the specimen found in San Francisco is unknown, but it came from Java. A female, apparently of this species and identified as such by Dr. de Meijere, is also from Java (Jacobson). The following four species are described now to permit comparison with examples of related species occurring in Australia and Oceania, of which there are possibly several unknown to me and confused with fulvicollis. PLECIA (PLECIA) BAKERI, Nl. SD. Male and female—Similar in coloration to fulvicollis, but the coxae are fulvous, not darkened, the mid and hind femora are yellowish at bases, and there is usually a dark central line-on apex of the scutellum. The eyes of the male are smaller than those of the male of fulvicollis, the ocelli are even more prominent than in the Australian species, and the antennae are 7-segmented in this sex, the apical papilla being indistinguishable with ordinary magnification. In the female the eighth flagellar segment is longer than the seventh, and while in all three species of this group discussed above, the distance from upper margin of eye to highest point of ocellar region seen from the side is less than half as great as the height of the eye, in bakeri it is fully as great as the eye. The male hypopygium as seen from below is as Text-figure 7. Length, 6-7-5 mm. Type, male, allotype, and two male paratypes, Baguio, Benquet, P.I.; one male and one female paratype, Limay, Batuan, P.I. The first series taken by Dr. C. F. Baker, in whose honour the species is named, the others taken by R. C. McGregor. In the United States National Museum Collection. PLECIA (PLECIA) PHILIPPINENSIS, 0. Sp. Male.—Similar in colour to bakeri, but shades a little deeper, with a dark central apical line on the scutellum. The head structures are the same as in Dbakeri, but the hypopygium is as Text-figure 8. Length, 7-7-5 mm. Type, male, and one paratype, Tangcolan, Bukidnon, P.I.; one paratype, Lamboanga, P.I. (C. F. Baker). United States National Museum. PLECIA (PLECIA) CONFUSA, 0. Sp. Male and female.—More similar in general colour and structure to fulvicollis, the thorax bright orange or fulvous. The eyes of the male are very large, and minutely haired, the ocelli are small and very slightly elevated, and the antennal flagellum is 7-segmented. The head of the female seen from the side is similar to that of ornaticornis, and the flagellum is 8-segmented, exclusive of the minute apical papilla. The hypopygium of the male seen from below is as Text-figure 9, the forceps being omitted in the drawing. Length, 8-8-5 mm. Type, male, and allotype, Peradeniya, Ceylon, 25.8.13 (A. Rutherford). British Museum. 606 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVil, PLECIA (PLECIA) PARVA, N. Sp. Male and female.—A more uniformly coloured species than any of the others of the group, the thorax being ochreous, and not much paler than the brownish fuscous abdomen. The legs are hardly darker than the thorax and about the same colour as the dull ochreous pleura. Wings pale brown. Halteres with the knobs dark brown. HKyes large, and microscopically haired, in male, ocelli large and very promin- ently elevated, antennal flagellum with but six segments, exclusive of the almost indistinguishable apical papilla; frons of female broader than long, bare, height of frons above eye in profile more than half as great as that of eye, antennal flagellum stout and uniformly thick, the segments closely adherent, apparently eight in number. Legs stouter than usual. Hypopygium large and stout, with an apical opening as shown in Text-fig. 10. Venation similar to that of ruficollis. Length, 4-5 mm. Type, male, and allotype, Los Banos, P.I.; one male paratype, Kolumbugan, Mindanao, P.I. (C. F. Baker). United States National Museum. None of the Australian species belonging to the other section is available to me at this time. I find that the wing venation in any species is quite variable, and no mention of any venational features is made in the descriptions of the species for this reason. The internal portions of the male hypopygium appear to be characteristic in the different species, but I had insufficient material to permit of an intensive study of these organs, merely figuring them as seen in the dry specimens, though I did take the pains to denude them so that the contours could be the better distin- guished. This denuding may be easily done by using a fine camel-hair brush, bringing it lightly to bear on the hypopygium and drawing it in the opposite direction from which the hairs are directed. Division BRACHYCERA. Family Bombyliidae. Genus PACHYNERES Greene. When I placed my species australis in this genus, I did not make an exhaustive examination of the literature of the family Bombyliidae, but after Mr. G. H. Hardy suggested referring the genus to the family Bibionidae without having seen the specimens I took the trouble to discover whether any other data upon its affinities were available. I now am able to report that the genus Pachyneres is a synonym of Glabellula Bezzi, and that for quite a number of years it has been firmly estab- lished as a Bombyliid, with the accord of Bezzi, Verrall, Wahlgren, and other Huropean authors. The synonymy of the genus is as follows, the Zetterstedt allocations being to the family Cyrtidae. GLABELLULA Bezzi. Zeitschr. f. Hymen. u. Dipt., vol. 2, 1902, p. 191, nn. for Glabella Loew. Platygaster Zetterstedt, Ins. Lapp., Diptera, 1838, p. 574, preoce. by Platygaster Latreille in Hymenoptera, 1809, and Platygaster Schill., in Hemiptera, 1829. Sphaerogaster Zetterstedt, Dipt. Scand., vol. 1, 1842, pp. 22. and 232, n.n. for Platygaster Zetterstedt. Preoccupied by Sphaerogaster Dejean, in Coleoptera, 1821. Glabella Loew, Beschr. Europ. Diptera, vol. 3, 1873, p. 210, preoccupied by Glabella Swains., in Mollusca, 1840. Pachyneres Greene, Proc. Ent. Soc. Washington, vol. 26, 1924, p. 62. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 607 In neither of the two specimens of australis which I had was there any indication of a short process at apex of the third antennal segment, such as is conspicuous in the two species referred to Glabellula in Europe. I have examined specimens which appear to be referable to these two species in the collection of Dr. A. L. Melander, and the apical process is very readily distinguished. I do not believe that this process had been broken off in the Australian examples and, even so, without a process, I consider it unnecessary to erect a new genus for the reception of the species without other differentiating characters of more significance. I have no doubt that with careful collecting this species will be found to be more common than is generally supposed. It very closely resembles femorata Loew in colour and general appearance. It interests me to note that in a paper just received Mr. G. H. Hardy accepts the species discussed above as a Bombyliid, having seen the type and another specimen. No.mention is made by him of the above synonymy so this note may stand as written. Family Asilidae. Subfamily DasyPoGgontIn an. Genus STENOPOGON Loew. The genotype of Stenopogon is sabaudus Fabricius, a European species. To determine the relations of the Australian species before me which have been referred to Stenopogon, I made a critical study of the American forms and the genotype. The notes presented below are the results of this study. Loew erected the genus Scleropogon in 1866 for the reception of picticornis Loew, a Californian species, distinguishing the genus from Stenopogon by the narrower face and frons, the shorter third antennal segment, with its longer style, the closed first, and the widened third, posterior cell of wing. Back, in 1909, discarded the genus, as did Coquillett before him, finding that the distinguishing characters were not stable; he stated, however, that he was confident subgeneric divisions could be made out when carefully collected material was brought together. My study of the genus indicates that there are at least four segregates which may be accepted as subgenera, and possibly as genera, when all the evidence is in. I append a key to these groups below, all segregates will run down to Stenopogon in Ricardo’s key to the genera of Asilidae. Ixey to the Subgenera. 1. Metapleura bare; all posterior cells of wings open; mesopleura bare 2 Metapleura haired or bristled in front of halteres and above spiracle Both sections of first abdominal sternite haired on entire extent ................ Ed OUAPOLEE NCHS 3 CHEECACTOTORE CRORE ESRI Case ROIS eae RTM ORT ache ean Ean Stenopogon, pt. (N.Amer.) Anterior section of first abdominal sternite haired on entire extent, posterior section bo haired in centre of anterior margin .................. Stenopogon, pt. (KHurope) 3. Posterior section of first abdominal sternite haired in middle of anterior margin; first posterior cell of wing normally closed and petiolate ...... Scleropogon, pt. _ ROSIEIIOP SSCulOM Cit TSE Lookoramiboeyl SereMe le sSasdoaoccacanbcoacvcccpaLooscuae 4 AMMEN SSOP OUI A a DIR erseyapiesssu sire stieeinsy eo: liolrsiistt onto) ental Vai elist (ov a's) fouies oudeh aoisy owe) io its Uaslen oiled aireuepeurente Scleropogon, pt. Mesopleura haired above and behind .................. Neoscleropogon, n. subgen. Subgenus NEOSCLEROPOGON Nov. This subgenus has the head a little wider than high, the facial swelling not extending much above middle of face, the upper half of face densely haired, and 608 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVii, the pleural hairs long. There is a variously formed dorsal process which projects backward over the hypopygium in the males, whereas in the other groups there is no such central process. Subgenotype, Dasypogon elongatus Macquart. There are at least two other Australian species. In all species known to me the tarsi are shorter and wider than is usual in Stenopogon. Possibly the group is entitled to full generic status, thus removing Stenopogon from the list of Australian genera. , Genus THEREUTRIA Loew. This genus does not belong to Laphriinae, having the prosternum disconnected from the propleura, a character pointed out in one of my preceding papers as important in distinguishing members of Dasypogoninae from those of Laphriinae. I note that in a paper by Hardy received after my manuscript of that paper was sent to press this genus was removed along with Metalaphria Ricardo to Dasy- pogoninae and placed in the tribe Saropogonini. This tribe contains, in Hardy’s sense, species in which the females possess genital spines, but the division is not a very sharp one, as is indicated by his key to the tribes, and it has the dis- advantage of being based upon a character of one sex alone. Thereutria undoubtedly belongs to Dasypogoninae, as does also Metalaphria, and the two genera are very closely related, possibly not entitled to separate generic rank. I have attempted to find characters other than those originally cited for their distinction, and have discovered at least one additional feature. This is the presence of sternopleural hairs in Thereutria and their absence in Metalaphria. Whether this character will hold throughout for the species involved in accord with the original definitions I am unable to say, but they hold in the material now before me. It appears worthy of note that there is evidently considerable difference in the coloration of the legs in the sexes of the same species in Thereutria. I make this statement because in a pair mounted in copula now in my possession, the male has the legs entirely black with the exception of the basal half of the hind metatarsus, which is whitish, while the female has the femora and tibiae testaceous yellow with the tips of former, and apices of tibiae more broadly, black; the base of hind metatarsus is whitish-yellow as in male. Two other male examples have the mid and hind tibiae whitish above (dorsally) except at apices, and the hind metatarsus coloured as in the other specimen. I accept these two last as normally coloured males of pulchra Schiner, and the first mentioned example as a dark legged variety. Miss Ricardo’s description of amaracus Walker, with its synonyms, appears to suggest that the female above mentioned is included amongst the forms, and that careful field work is required to establish the related sexes, if there are several species and not only one. Genus METALAPHRIA Ricardo. In addition to the character mentioned above for the distinction of this genus from Thereutria, possibly the hairing of the frons will be of value. In Metalaphria, or at least in the species before me, there are a few hairs on each side on the frons a short distance proximad of the anterior ocellus, situated on slightly raised areas, and no hairs on extreme lateral margins of frons close to eyes, while in Thereutria there are no hairs where they are present in Metalaphria and there is a series of hairs along each lateral margin of frons on its entire length close to the eyes. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 609 Subfamily LAPHRIIN AE. Genus LapHriA Meigen. This genus as at present accepted is, as I pointed out in my previous paper on the family, composite. One of the most striking digressions from type is found in notabilis Macquart, a species from the Aru Islands. In this species the metanotum has a group of bristles and hairs on each side, the hind coxae are produced in the form of thin plates at apices above, the hind trochanters are longer than their coxae, gradually thickened from bases to apices, and furnished with a group of bristles on ventral side at tips, and the mesopleura has an angular projection on hind margin above the series of bristles. I have seen only the female, so can not state whether these characters hold good in both sexes. In venation this species agrees with typical species of Laphria, having the apex of second basal cell as in Text-figure 11. The distinction between typical Laphriinae and typical Dasypogoninae, insofar as this character is concerned is shown in the te 11 Text-fig. 11.—Thereutria pulchra (a), and Laphria species (b), apex of discal ceil of wings. Text-fig. 12.—Laphria scapularis, apices of discal and fourth posterior cells of wing. figure mentioned. In another species, identified by Coquillett as Atomosia scapularis Wiedemann, from the same island, the veins closing discal and fourth posterior cells are in an almost continuous line (Text-fig. 12), but the species is an undoubted Laphria belonging to the group in which the metanotum is bare on the lateral regions. Subfamily ASILINAE. Genus OMMATIUS Wiedemann. Recently Mr. G. H. Hardy has proposed to give tribal rank to this genus and one or two others which agree with it in having the arista with long hairs on one side. I have several Australian species of the genus Ommatius before me and desire to draw the attention of students to some of the more important characters of the groups represented. Miss Ricardo’s paper serves to distinguish Ommatius and two closely related genera from others, on the basis of the pectinate arista. I have before me only species that would fall within the genus Ommatius in the sense of that paper, but chinensis Fabricius, because of the elongate third antennal segment, appears to give ground for the belief that the careful student might be tempted to consider the species belongs to the genus Allocotosia, though the segment is only equal to the combined lengths of first and second. Curran, in a recent paper on the African species (Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., vol. 57, 1928, 610 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVii, art. 6, p. 334), notes that Emphysomera Schiner is scarcely tenable, as there is every gradation in the shape of the femora from greatly swollen to rather slender. Miss Ricardo cites as the distinguishing feature of Hmphysomera the flat face, and makes no mention of the structure of the femora. Curran makes no mention of Allocotosia, but disregards some other generic segregations. In making a comparative study of the few Australian and American species that I have access to, I was struck by the fact that Ommatius has several features that serve to isolate it, in addition to the pectinate arista. One of the most striking of these structural characters consists of the chitinized plate above the hind coxae which extends entirely across the hind margin of the thorax and is furnished with fine hairs similar to those present on the abdominal sternites. Besides this there is, as usual in Asilinae, a divided basal abdominal sternite, the apical portion of which is bare and the basal portion haired. I can see no reason to distinguish even subgenerically the Australian and North American forms, but in the case of chinensis there are characters that appear to justify its segregation. These consist of the presence of a group of fine hairs on each side of the extreme base of first abdominal tergite and lying close against the metanotum, and a similar group close to scutellum on the line separating the postalar declivity and the metanotum. In addition to these features, the hypopygium of the male appears rather radically different from those of the other group, and the discal cell of wing is elongated and narrow at apex. In both segregates the hind coxae are haired above the bases of their femora on posterior sides. I rather suspect that chinensis may be referable to Allocotosia, but I have not access to the genotype of the latter for comparison. It appears pertinent to note that, in one Javanese species and another from Africa which I have before me, there is a long bristle on the middle of the ptero- pleura in addition to the normal soft hairs, which bristle is lacking in all other species now known to me. Genus Promacuus Loew. This genus is readily separated from the great bulk of genera in the sub- family by the venation of the wings. Every sclerite of the pleura, except the small subtriangular one at upper posterior angle of mesopleura, is partly haired, the metanotum is bare on the lateral swollen areas, the mesosternum and metasternum are haired, and there are some hairs on the membranous or semimembranous base of abdomen immediately above the bases of hind coxae; similar but more evident hairs are present in Ommatius, but the portion of abdomen on which they are situated in the latter is chitinized and not membranous. Two striking characters of the genus are the presence of hairs and bristles on the small sclerite directly below the anterior extremity of the base of wing, and the fact that the margin of scutellum has the strongest bristles above the usual depressed line and well removed from the lower edge, while there is a weaker series below these and almost on the edge. I have before me cnly doddi Ricardo, from Cairns, N. Queensland, and in it the characters agree with those of the North American species with which I have compared it. : Genus Asitus Linné. This genus has been subjected to much arbitrary subdivision, and unfor- tunately most of the segregates, the more outstanding of which are usually given subgeneric rank, are based upon characters of one sex, most frequently the female. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 611 I have taken the opportunity already in this series of papers to decry the use of characters of one sex for the segregation of groups of species no matter whether such segregates be considered genera, subgenera, or merely un-named groups. I have tried to assign the North American species of Asilus to subgenera, with rather unsatisfactory results. I do find, however, that there are several characters apparently of value for the grouping of species, some of which have not hereto- fore been made use of for segregations in this genus. In the North American material I find that there are three groups divisible as follows: iMeiictanotum Jbare:s ‘tarsi monmall gd ae cree oo ic iavst cho colds. halalsbeler stale. sbeda cians Group I Metanotum with bristles or hairs on each side ................0cceccerccrrcseece 2 Py VIBES Sra Vas 0012 fl URiea se merase Pacer, eR me Ree te erst UN EP OL aI eae Brae EE Group II All tarsi with an elongate oval depression in base of fifth segment on its ventral surface, apex of fourth with a rounded excavation connecting with same ...... Bopsyieka eye icy ae ceed apes “Sree eee sated Wesreo cn ck Shc ORs Re REN cra td we sirarte Grothe fauetvs, by cor week ta Be aisras Group III In Group I there are two North American species, one with, the other without, spines on the genitalia in the female. In Group II all of the species have the genitalia without spines; and in Group III one species has the genitalia of the female spinose, and eighteen have no genital spines. It is not appropriate to dilate herein upon the relationships of the American species, but it may be worth while to examine the Australian material in the light of these data. Amongst the comparatively few species of Asilus from Australia that I have, I find several that have the metanotum bare, and others that have a group of hairs on each side of metanotum. Both groups have the tarsi normal and thus they would appear to fall within Groups I and II as defined above. There are, however, so many other characters in which they differ from the North American species, such as the shape and bristling of the face, that it would be unwise to place them in the same groups either named or un-named. I have seen no Australian species with the peculiar fifth tarsal segment described in the above key, but such may exist. Suborder CYCLORRHAPHA. Family Sepsidae. In a previous paper in this series I drew attention to the fact that Dr. O. Duda’s first part of his monograph on the family Sepsidae bears the statement that it appeared in December, 1925, but suggested that verification was necessary as many continental Huropean magazines do not appear on the dates which they bear. I am now able to state on information given me by Dr. H. Zerny, custodian of Diptera in the Austrian National Museum, that the first part of that paper appeared on January 16, 1926, and the second part on December 10, 12926. The second part bears the notation that it appeared in November, 1926. My genus Australosepsis therefore has priority over Saltelliseps Duda. Genus PopANEMA Malloch. I have recently received from Dr. Duda the second part of his monograph and find that his description of Toxopoda Macquart agrees with that of Podanema. My genus thus falls as a synonym, but the Australian species is distinct from the only one he places therein, nitida Macquart (viduata Thomson). Family Ortalidae. Genus PoGonorTaLis Hendel. This genus is distinguished from any in the subfamily Platystominae by the very large mouth, which occupies almost two-thirds of the head width when seen K 612 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVii, from below, leaving only a narrow cheek between it and lower margin ci eye which is not half as wide as third antennal segment. Other distinguishing features are the presence of a number of long bristly hairs on the hind part of lower margin of cheek in the male and of one rather strong bristle about its middle in female; the mesopleura has a strong upper hind marginal bristle; scutellum bare except for the four bristles; first and third veins setulose above to apices, bases of second and third setulose below; anal cell shortest on its lower side, not pointed at lower apical angle; distance between apices of first and second veins about half as great as that between second and third. POGONORTALIS BARBIFERA Hendel. This is the only species known from Australia. It is distinguished from the other two species placed in the genus by the dark brown wing markings which consist of a central vitta extending from base to inner crossvein and filling the entire cell, a costal mark filling the cell between apices of auxiliary and first veins, a narrow fascia extending from apex of vein over disc of wing as far as third vein, a spot at apex beginning on costa above apex of third vein and extending below that vein, but less distinctly, to apex of fourth; and a cloud on vein closing posterior basal cell. Body fuscous to black. Legs brownish-yellow, sometimes with the femora and tibiae partly darker. Arista bare; each orbit with two bristles; ocellars very weak; all verticals strong; postverticals minute. Only the prescutellar dorsocentrals and acrostichals distinct. Length, 4 mm. Localities—Burpengary, S. Qld. (Dr. T. L. Bancroft); Sydney, N.S.W. (H. J. Carter). Hendel recorded the species from these same localities. Genus Euprosoprra Macquart. EUPROSOPIA TENUICORNIS Macquart. I have seen a pair of this species in the United States National Museum from the Baker collection, taken on Stradbroke Island, 5.12.13 (H. Hacker). ‘These were identified as australis Walker, but they do not agree with the description of that species. The male has two long slender flattened bristles at apex of basal segment of fore tarsus on its anterior side, which are curved downward and out- ward. The apices of first and second visible tergites in both sexes, and the whole of third and fourth tergites in male have pale yellow scale-like hairs. EXUPROSOPIA MACULIPENNIS Macquart. Two specimens from Brisbane (H. Hacker), from the same collection, have a faint greyish-brown fascia over the region of the outer crossvein of wing which is not shown in Hendel’s figure of the wing of this species. Abdomen as in tenuicornis, but with a few pale scales on third visible tergite in female. Family Calliphoridae. Subfamily RHINIINAE. Genus RuHINIA Robineau-Desvoidy. RHINIA XANTHOGASTER Wiedemann. In the material of this family submitted to me at my request by Dr. H. Zerny, of the Austrian National Museum, there are three specimens of this species from the old collection of that museum, two of which bear the label ‘New Holland”, ! BY J. R. MALLOCH. 613 and the other with the same label, but with the addition of a question mark (7?) after the locality. I have yet to see a specimen which is unquestionably from Australia, though I do not doubt that it occurs there. The specimens referred to above are identical in all respects with Javanese specimens from the Vienna Museum and in my own collection. It appears to be pertinent to note that the specimen sent me from Vienna, which bears the type label and the locality Java, is not xanthogaster, but a species of the genus Idiella, possibly mandarina Wiedemann. It is evidently mislabelled as it does not agree with Wiedemann’s description, the tibiae and bases of tarsi being yellow, and the apex of the abdomen blackened. Subfamily CALLIPHORIN AE. Genus CALLIPHORA Robineau-Desvoidy. CALLIPHORA OCHRACEA Schiner. Seven females from the type series in the Vienna Museum conform to my interpretation of this species already published in this series of papers in having the thorax obscured by ochreous dusting. These specimens bear the Novara label and the locality Sydney. CALLIPHORA STYGIA Fabricius. A series of 31 examples of this species, mostly from the Novara collection, and named by Schiner and Brauer and Bergenstamm, was sent for examination by Dr. Zerny. There is not a single specimen of hilli Patton in the series. Most of the specimens are from Sydney, but some are from Swan River. CALLIPHORA TIBIALIS Macquart. Two males of this species were misidentified as villosa by Schiner. They are from the old collection of the Vienna Museum and are labelled simply New Holland. CALLIPHORA AUGUR Linné. A dozen specimens of this species are in the Vienna Museum. Most of them were named oceania by Brauer and Bergenstamm; a few from the old Winthem collection are from Swan River, most of the others are from the Novara collection and labelled Sydney. CALLIPHORA CENTRALIS Malloch. One male of this species was confused with the preceding one and labelled oceania by Brauer and Bergenstamm also. It is evidently one of the specimens from Schiner’s material as it was collected at Rockhampton by Thorey in 1868. CALLIPHORA QUADRIMACULATA Swederus. A dozen specimens of this species named dasyophthalma Macquart, mostly from the Novara collection, all from New Zealand, are in the Vienna Museum material. J have seen no Australian specimens of this species. CALLIPHORA (XENOCALLIPHORA) HORTONA Walker. A dozen specimens of this species from the Novara collection, all from Auckland, N.Z., bear the identification aureopunctata Macquart by Brauer and Bergenstamm. 614 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVIil, Family Tachinidae. I am presenting below some additional data on Ameniini and Rutiliini with notes on the genus Microtropeza Macquart. This information was derived from an examination of material submitted by Dr. H. Zerny, some of which consisted of types of Brauer and Bergenstamm species, and of species identified by them, as well as types of some of Schiner’s species. I have now seen the genotypes of all the genera included in Engel’s paper, except that of Paramphibolia Brauer and Bergenstamm, which genus is unknown to me. Tribe Ameniini. Genus AMENIA Robineau-Desvoidy. AMENIA PARVA Schiner. I have before me a male and female of this species, apparently the types, and they confirm my previous identification of the species. They are labelled Sydney, and bear the printed label Novara R. The smaller of the two specimens is almost 7 mm. in length. Both specimens are in perfect condition. Genus PARAMENIA Brauer and Bergenstamm. I now have before me the type specimen of semiauriceps and can confirm my previous statement that it is the same as macularis Walker. The locality of the type is Port Denison (Thorey, 1868). I have also examined two males in the Baker collection, now in the United States National Museum, which differ from the females in having the frons linear and the frontal orbits and upper portion of parafacials yellow, and not white, dusted, hardly paler than the lower portions of parafacials. These last specimens are from Brisbane. Tribe Microtropezini. Genus MicrRoTROPEZA Macquart. This genus does not belong to the foregoing tribe, though the triangularly exposed abdominal sternites with their strongly spinose apices are the same as in that tribe. It differs from all three genera placed by me in Ameniini in having no hairs just below the lower calypter, many erect hairs on the supra- spiracular convexity, the postscutellum evenly rounded and convex and not with a broad shallow central apical concavity or emargination. The prosternal plate, postalar declivity, and suprasquamal ridge are bare, and the centre of propleura and apices of hind coxae above the bases of femora are haired. The pleural knob is not elevated as much as the portion above it, the arista is bare, and the parafacials are entirely haired. MICROTROPEZA SINUATA Donovan. Head yellow, and yellow dusted, interfrontalia and antennae orange, third segment of latter sometimes fuscous. Thorax fulvous testaceous, sternopleura and dorsum of thorax largely infuscated, the latter greyish dusted, with a slight metallic tinge and four narrow black vittae. Abdomen varying from castaneous to black, shining, with anterior margins of tergites 2 to 4 grey dusted, more broadly on 4, and on 3 and 4 with a central extension of the grey dust giving the tergite the appearance of having two large black apical spots; the black portions some- times tinged with metallic blue. Legs yellow, tarsi fuscous. Wings greyish hyaline, yellow at bases. Calyptrae yellow. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 615 Frons at vertex about one-fourth of the head width in male, about one-third of the head width in female; each orbit with some strong forwardly directed bristles in female, none in male; third antennal segment about 1:5 times as long as second; palpi slightly spatulate at apices. Thorax with 3+4 pairs of dorso- centrals, the presutural acrostichals well developed, and the sternopleurals 2 or 3+1. Bristles on apical margin of third abdominal tergite almost continuous, those on apex of fourth in two lateral groups. Fore tibia with an almost complete series of anterodorsal bristles in female, these less distinct apically in male. Length, 14-15 mm. I have before me a male labelled “New Holland’, and a female labelled Rock- hampton, the latter from the Schiner collection, both from the Vienna Museum. The supraspiracular hairs on metanotum distinguish the genus from its allies. Tribe Rutiliini. : In neither of my two previous papers on this tribe did I present a key for the identification of the genera. This was due to the fact that I lacked several of the genera usually referred here, but now having had an opportunity to examine all of those included by Engel in his paper, except one genus, I present a key for their identification which I hope may be of service to Australian students of the family. It is not a simple matter to define the tribe and at present I can only offer as distinguishing characters the presence of a pronounced vertical central carina on the face, hairs on centre of propleura, and of only a few short bristles on base of anterodorsal surface of fore tibia. Locally the species may generally be recognized by their large size and robust build, coupled with their bright colours and strongly bristled abdomen, but there are some large robust genera such as Huchaetogyne Townsend which may readily be confused with them. A thorough revision of the group based upon large series of specimens of each species is essential to a thorough understanding of the relationships and this can be best accomplished in Australia. Key to the Genera. (Pe SUDRAS GUA ari dees Mae Gs ya acc Bicone emesis ealiss Gu sae aris Shere (Se saycatins coe ua tcl A Hawa mucwationeuldortlenevane 2 SUprasquamiall seid ees WA Ee |, secs tees sear seociee eres aoe eahttoice esa oie. ee a eu ay emergl heh ere) clawenene el Gregg 5D 2. Second and third visible abdominal tergites each with a pair of short stout bristles in centre near anterior margin; parafacials bare below apex of second antennal FS(e¥es9 OOS) CU Gites oy aac 6 GeetGis DAG has BUG GEmEDES oct, DINED Iceman Germere it cera eae cn cae Amphibolia Macquart Second and third visible abdominal tergites without bristles, except sometimes at DID COS gente saci Pare elke Ou eee eee EES at een ei ralsonien a otal aecia ter el eeaete: coe atop ayaa tah sarees kan eae Coe matrapta hey eee ceet te 3 Facial carina narrowly rounded above, lower end almost sharp below; parafacials with rather long black setulose hairs to below lowest level of eye ............ BBO OT EORS 0 Lor Gad pees ve Oen Gh ote ROTORS aa oh OA EE rene eee Chrysopasta Brauer and Bergenstamm Facial carina broadly rounded, sometimes with a central sulcus above, flat below; parafacials with or without hairs, if these are present they are usually fine and (a) rather short ........ COREL otacee ees (Rutilia Robineau-Desvoidy, sens. lat.) .. 4 Ae Arista: pubescent (Ory DALE! sieiets cas ce aoe eee ee eh eee Rutilia Robineau-Desvoidy, s.s. Arista short haired, the longest hairs about half as long as width of third antennal SYSFSNa OWN ao Gyeratc. Gye Gore Ore tme a Oror or iittr Cac ceca) OF DERE PORE Oe TCR GTE MRO? clic Coma io Senostoma Macquart 5, I2osialeye cleelinntiny logis joevlon ioobawires soagnca-uoucaoscGnobaone Prodiaphania Townsend Postalar declivity haired in centre ..................... (Formosia Guérin, s.l.), 6 GaperAe S Cees] OTT Melee Ol peeve c cgay foes aa cece teurel ona sbacirSetmnsaclo) al ney tein, eereiseoslter ae eda Formosia Guérin, s.s. ATAStAMDUDESCEME. OI DANE ncn sets cits ee rec es ee) Seen ce eamueea tela Huamphibolia Townsend 616 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVii, Genus CuHrRysopastA Brauer and Bergenstamm. This genus is very similar to Rutilia, but the facial carina is much narrower, being only narrowly rounded above and not so high and almost sharp on lower portion. Although the hairing of the parafacials in Rutilia is very variable, not one of the species has the hairs as long and strong as does this monobasic genus. Although Engel, in his paper on Rutiliinae, stated that this genus has the abdominal sternites the same as in Ameniini, this is erroneous. The specimens before me, and presumably he had the same pair for examination, show some differences, as the male has the abdomen unduly extended, exhibiting the sternites on its entire length, while the female has the sternites, except the apical one, concealed by the overlapping tergites. Even a cursory examination of the male discloses the fact that the sternites are quite different from those of the other group, the latter being more broadly exposed at apices than at bases, sometimes almost triangular in exposed area, while in Chrysopasta they are narrowed at apices; the apical bristles are also much weaker than in Ameniini. CHRYSOPASTA VERSICOLOR Brauer and Bergenstamm. This species, the only one of the genus so far recorded, is metallic green or blue-green, with distinct whitish dusting on dorsum of thorax and abdomen, and on the mesonotum four quite conspicuous black vittae which are broken at suture and cease about midway between suture and hind margin. Head testaceous yellow, frontal orbits, parafacials, and cheeks, with variable checkerings of pale dust; third antennal segment fuscous except at base; arista pubescent, fuscous; palpi yellow; parafacial hairs strong, long, and black; occipital hairs yellow: upper occiput green. Dorsocentrals 3+4; all thoracic hairs black; scutellum yellowish in ground colour, suffused with metallic green. Basal tergite black, the others with black apices and a black central line, the green portions whitish dusted. Legs black; hind tibia with a few long bristles on anteroventral, antero- dorsal, and posterodorsal surfaces, the male with a fringe of anterodorsal bristles, one or two of which are longer than the others, the anteroventral and postero- dorsal surfaces as in female. Wings hyaline, veins yellowish basally. Length, 14-15 mm. Redescribed from type male and allotype, from Swan River, W. Australia, in the Winthem collection of the Vienna Museum. Genus Rutit1aA Robineau-Desvoidy. Subgenus SENostoma Macquart. I have before me one specimen in rather poor condition which is referable to this subgenus. I do not consider Senostoma as entitled to full generic rank as, apart from the smaller size and less strongly bristled abdomen of the species, only the presence of distinct hairs on the arista serves to separate it from typical species of the genus Rutilia. SENOSTOMA RUFICORNIS Macquart. Head yellow, with paler dusting on all parts except the interfrontalia; antennae and palpi yellow; parafacials bare; facial carina broad and almost flat; longest hairs on arista about half as long as width of third antennal segment. Thorax fulvous yellow, mesonotum metallic green, with whitish dust, and rather distinctly quadrivittate; humeri, pleura, and scutellum, fulvous yellow, with variable green shading. Abdomen metallic green, becoming fulvous below, dorsum with a BY J. R. MALLOCH. 617 blackish central line and slight white dust. Legs fulvous yellow, tarsi darker. Wings greyish hyaline, without a blackish basal mark. Calyptrae white. Thoracic dorsal bristles distinct, dorsocentrals 3+4, acrostichals well developed; scutellum not as much flattened as in most species of Rutilia, with 6 or 8 marginal and 4 or 6 submarginal bristles. Abdomen with rather long bristles at apex of third and on middle of fourth visible tergite. Hind tibia with one or two outstanding bristles in the series on anterodorsal surface, about four long postero- dorsal, and two shorter anteroventral bristles. Length, 12 mm. One specimen labelled “New Holland”, from the Austrian National Museum. The types of flavipes B. and B. ought to be in the Austrian National Museum, but they were not sent to me with the other material herein reported upon, and the specimen from which the above description was written was without a species name. Previous records include Cairns, Herberton, Katoomba, and West Australia. I have not yet had time to deal with the genus Formosia, but hope to do so at an early date. THE PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE WOLLONDILLY RIVER BASIN. By Frank A. Crart, B.Sc., Science Research Scholar, University of Sydney. (Plate xxxix, and twelve Text-figures. ) [Read 28th November, 1928.] Introduction: Literature ; General Considerations. Geology of the Area: Resistance to Erosion. Topographic Divisions: 1, Blue Plateau (South); 2, Jenolan Plateau; 3, Western W ollon- dilly—Abercrombie Block; 4, Shoalhaven Plateau; 5, Lake George Complex; 6, Nepean Ramp. Features of Special Interest: 1, Mt. Werong; 2, Burragorang Valley; 3, The Tonalli Valley; 4, The Cookbundoon Basin; 5, Upper Wollondilly Valley ; 6, Bredalbane Valley; 7, Lake George Area; (a) Lake Bathurst; 8, Wingecarribee—Nattai. Physiographic Types: 1, The Peneplain; 2, Valleys of the Plateau; 3, Monadnocks ; 4, Basalt as a Physiographic Problem. Warps and Faults of the Area: a, Kowmung Warp—Nepean Ramp; 0b, South Jenolan Warp; c, The Kanangra—Cookbundoon Fault; d, The Norwood Warp; e, The Cullarin Fault; f, Mulwaree Fault; g, Sassafras Fault; h, General Review of the Faulting. Streams of the Area. The research embodied in this paper was undertaken by the author during 1927, under the general supervision of Professor Griffith Taylor, as a Science Research Scholar in Sydney University. It is a continuation of similar work carried out in 1926 in the country immediately to the north in the Cox River Basin. The author is much indebted to Professor Taylor for his continual help and encouragement, and this paper owes not a little to him. Grateful acknowledg- ment is also made of the services of Mr. Bowler, of the Lands Department, Sydney, who placed maps and certain topographic information which that Department possessed at his disposal. This work should be read as a continuation of the author’s paper on the “Physiography of the Cox River Basin” (Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., liii, Part 3, 1928, 207). Literature.—With the exception of areas around Tallong, Mittagong, and Lakes George and Bathurst, no considerable physiographic work had been carried out in this area. A few leading references to works bearing on the area and the problems met therein are given at the end of the paper. General Considerations—The basin of the Wollondilly River comprises an area of approximately 2,000 square miles, and this paper deals to some extent with an additional area to the south, in and adjacent to the Shoalhaven Basin. The whole area is the southern slope of the Central Tableland ‘Massif’, whilst the central and southern portions also form Taylor’s “Lake George Geocol’, which has an elevation of 2,300 feet and lies between the Central and Southern Tablelands, which have respective altitudes of 4,400 and 6,500 feet. The eastern plateau blocks of Southern Queensland and New South Wales consist of three great masses, New England, the Blue Plateau, and the Canberra- BY F. A. CRAFT. 619 Kosciusko Highlands, separated from one another by the Cassilis and Lake George “Geocols” in the north and south respectively. Presumably there have been two great groups of epeirogenic uplifts during the Kosciusko epoch in this region, which produced the New England and Kosciusko Plateaus respectively. The crossing and mutual reinforcement of these uplifts produced the Blue Plateau. In localities where the forces of uplift died out before meeting, as in the Sydney Jenolan 4 x ) ShootersHill-*’ \ \ Sa Mt. Wero 8} ° \_YerranderieS BAY Bummarog - } % Abercrombie R. \~) % oe ich] IC; L ahd i: Moss Vale Robertson Kiama R. 290 Kort gel Si Baul Tarago Text-fig. 1—Locality Map. The Wollondilly Basin and surrounding areas are shown. Heavy lines refer to sections in Text-fig. 12. Basin, the low-lying, slightly-dissected surface of the old Late Tertiary peneplain is still met with. In the north of the Wollondilly area, then, the typical features of the Central Plateau, as exemplified by the Cox River area, are found; but further to the south a different type of topography is found. Geological and physiographic conditions right through the area are very complex. Geology of the Area. From a geological standpoint the Wollondilly Basin may be divided into two regions—one comprising the Triassic rocks on the north-east, and the other including the Lower Palaeozoic strata on the west and south (Text-fig. 2). Te, 620 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE WOLLONDILLY RIVER BASIN, The Triassic area includes Wianamatta Shale and Hawkesbury Sandstone. The shale area represents an outlier, and centres on Moss Vale. The character of the shale differs a little from place to place, but the formation is, as usual, not very resistant to erosion, and the preservation of such a comparatively large outlier on the tableland surface is due to a capping of Tertiary basalt, now largely eroded. This shale outlier is found in a local hollow in the Hawkesbury Sand- Baar eistorene i Ss \ = = m | ertiar asa LUA = ea wi eels GS e==) Hawkesbury -=. Upper Coal Marineé/ 30- Devonian £ 42° Vy, ittagong Y) mt PE ee, 2=RN Pe , a fj ae TAT NY les | AWS) Bs a 0 Y Text-fig. 2.—Geology of the Area. Younger rocks are found towards the north and north-west, those to the west being older. The area between Mt. Werong and Taralga is shown tentatively as Devonian. Basalt areas are numbered after the text. (Based on the Geological Map of New South Wales, 1914.) stone, and the altitude of its base varies from 2,050 feet at Mittagong to 2,200 feet in the vicinity of Berrima. To the north and west, Hawkesbury sandstones on the plateau surface are found at 2,400 feet and upwards to 2,600 feet near the Wollondilly canyon on the road from Mittagong to Wombeyan. To the south-west of Moss Vale the level of the Hawkesbury Sandstone on the plateau surface rises to 2,500 feet. Observations showed that the level of the base of the Robertson basalts, and of the various basalt outliers to the south and south-west of Berrima is 2,350 feet, or thereabouts. The base of the basalts at Wanganderry lies at 2,400 feet (approx.) above sea level. This general correspondence of levels would indicate that, in this district, the level of the Late Tertiary peneplain surface was of the order of 2,350 feet above (modern) sea level. y BY F. A. CRAFT. 621 In this area the Hawkesbury Sandstone is confined to the eastern side of the Wollondilly River, the topography of the sandstone surface being characteristic of this series. The most remarkable feature of the Hawkesbury beds is their folding into a syncline a little to the north of this area, over the’ Nepean River catchment (Text-fig. 12). This syncline would appear to be most pronounced between Bargo and Picton, and it gradually fades out towards the south. In the Moss Vale district a continuation of this fold is possibly seen in the hollow in the Hawkes- bury Sandstone in which the outlier of Wianamatta rocks occurs, and a good deal of the present topography of that district has been determined by differential erosion of the Wianamatta shales, as will be explained later. In this area the Permo-Carboniferous rocks are not very important from a physiographic point of view, because of the smallness of their surface outcrop. These rocks are found along the southern and western edges of the Hawkesbury Series, to which they have a marked resemblance on account of their littoral character. Their thickness increases very rapidly away from the periphery as one goes towards the coast. The Lower Palaeozoic rocks of the Wollondilly area have been classified for the most part as Devonian and Silurian. They consist of highly metamorphosed quartzites, slates, and claystones, together with some shales and intrusive granites. The general strike is about 10° east of north (magnetic), and they have been intensely folded into symmetrical anticlines and synclines. In the Goulburn district parts of these synclines stand up above the general level of the country as residual peaks, but further to the north the folded rocks have been bevelled off across the bedding planes to form the old peneplain surface. As a general rule the softer rocks occur in the western and southern parts of the area, and are responsible for a more subdued type of topography. Although large areas of rocks on the northern side of the area have been charted on the official geological map as being Silurian, it seems fairly certain that a strip of Devonian rocks occurs on the eastern edge of the Lower Palaeozoic, stretching from the Mudgee district in the north to Goulburn in the south. At Mt. Lambie and Mt. Walker, and also lower down the Cox Valley, strata of proved Devonian age occur. The two most characteristic types are a glassy white quartzite and a red slate, the two generally being associated. These rocks are found along the general strike line at Gangerang Range (Cox Basin), Mt. Werong and Yerranderie, whilst the white quartzite persists away to the south into the Goulburn and Lake George districts. In the Wombeyan Caves and Taralga districts on the eastern side of the Main Divide there are extensive outcrops of granitic rocks (principally felsites), whilst extensive areas of Tertiary basalts occur on the plateau surface. These interrupt and obscure the metamorphic rocks, which outcrop again to the east of Taralga, continuing thence southwards. Through this southern extension the white quartzite is very prominent, forming low ridges on the more level plateau, and residual peaks on the Goulburn Plains. In the latter district these strata have been identified as being of Devonian age, and there seems no reason to suppose that similar rocks along the same general strike line are of any but Devonian age. To the south of Mt. Werong, alternate layers of white quartzite and red slate dip westwards, and the head streams of the Abercrombie have eroded shallow valleys and passes in the slates, leaving the harder rocks as well-defined meridional 622 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE WOLLONDILLY RIVER BASIN, ridges. Further south, between Marulan and Goulburn, streams have taken advantage of anticlinal folds to cut other north-south valleys, leaving parts of the synclines as residuals. There are two considerable areas of intrusive rocks in the Wollondilly Basin, in the Marulan and Wombeyan districts. In the first case the main mass consists of grano-diorite and hornblende-biotite-granite, together with small peripheral areas of gabbro. In the second case, as at Yerranderie, the main mass is a very resistant felsite, and gives extremely rough topography. In some parts, however, granite is found, and with it a more subdued topography. An instance of this is found about four miles north-east of Wombeyan, near the great bend of the Wollondilly at Murruin Creek junction. Going southwards from the Wollondilly into the Shoalhaven Basin older rocks (Ordovician) are met with. The Shoalhaven valley to the east of Lake Bathurst is an extensive level plain, 2,100 feet above sea-level, carved for the most part in folded Silurian strata which offer no great resistance to erosion in most places. Sandstones and very pretty red and mauve shales are found along Windellama Creek and in its vicinity. On the Shoalhaven River, near Nerriga, reputed Ordovician strata occur, whilst to the east of Nerriga, Upper Marine sandstones are met with which extend to the coast near Nowra. In various parts of the Wollondilly basin considerable areas of Tertiary basalt are found, in general forming part of the plateau surface. The most notable occurrences are in the Taralga and Robertson districts, and many smaller areas are met with, being classified later in the paper. The wide occurrence and relative thickness of these basalt residuals indicate volcanic activity over the whole area, although it is not meant to imply that, at any time. a continuous sheet of basalt has covered the whole (ancient) surface of the area. Practically nothing is known of the mutual relationships of these isolated areas of olivine- basalt, and much geological work will be necessary in this connection. Resistance to Hrosion.—Whilst it is quite unsafe to attempt to lay down any hard and fast rules as regards the resistance to erosion of the rocks met with in the area, a few cases of special strength and resistance can be noted. The most resistant formations are the white quartzites which form part of the Devonian series, and outcrop along meridional lines. In many places these stand up above plain surfaces, and in any case are only eroded fairly readily by streams when underlying weak shales are exposed. The felsite area on the middle Wollondilly is also highly resistant owing to its high percentage of quartz and plagioclase, the relatively small size of its phenocrysts and the glassy nature of the groundmass, factors which tend to reduce mechanical and chemical weathering to a minimum. This intrusion stood up as part of the continental mass during the deposition of the Permo-Carboniferous and Hawkesbury rocks, which flank it on the east and north. Outstanding weak formations are met with in the case of Wianamatta Shales and the shales and sandstones of the Lower Palaeozoic rocks found in the Shoal- haven valley. The Devonian slates are moderately resistant to erosion, and are, in general, fairly dense and compact. Tertiary basalts which occur widely over the area are marked by great resistance to mechanical weathering, and are more resistant than the slates. In the Taralga district valleys become wider and deeper after passing from basalt to the underlying slates. On the east of the middle Wollondilly and in the Bundanoon district, on the Southern railway, resistant Hawkesbury Sandstones are met with, and have the effect of giving BY F, A. CRAFT, 623 a more youthful type of valley on the plateau surface than is the case with the slate, basalt, and shale formations. As one goes westward into the Palaeozoic rocks, as on the Abercrombie and the downs of the Upper Lachlan, the general character of the rocks appears to become weaker. In the former case, to the north-west of Taralga, deep and narrow canyons have been torn by juvenile streams. In the latter case, the topography is generally very subdued. Thus it may be stated that, as a whole, the Devonian rocks are more resistant to erosion than are the Silurian owing to their predominance of quartzites and massive slates. 2 Jenolan’ Plate au or i — Esk 3 aoe i ; ‘Wollondilly’ Pie B << l\o tee : / SS KCook. 14. Shoalhaven _—, \ DOTTY Soh EAL 2, © Te he) i Faults: OW arp Si seston oH Cul=Cullarin. Mul=Mulwaree. !Cook=Cookbundoon. _— oe ee Text-fig. 3.—Topographic Divisions and Features. Numbered section lines for Text-fig. 12 are shown. Note the meridional and transverse arrangement of the warps and faults. These separate the topographic divisions from one another. Topographic Divisions. The Wollondilly Basin falls naturally into several divisions, which are deter- mined primarily by altitude. An old peneplain surface has been differentially uplifted to form plateau blocks of varying elevation. Three of these divisions have been referred to in a previous paper (Cox River Basin), namely, the Blue and Jenolan Plateaus and the Nepean Ramp, and all can be readily followed on the map (Plate xxxix). 624 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE WOLLONDILLY RIVER BASIN, The divisions are as follows:— 1. Blue Plateau (South).—The Blue Plateau is a sandstone-capped area which has been trenched by swiftly-running streams. The presence of weaker Permo-Carboniferous strata beneath the sandstones has resulted in the formation of great escarpments along the valley sides. The typical features of the central (Cox River) section are repeated in this southern extension, which is drained by the Nattai and Lower Wollondilly Rivers. The altitude of this division varies from 2,000 to 3,200 feet, with a general rise from the north-east to the west and south-west. The surface presents an almost unbroken skyline typical of the upraised peneplain. Here and there it is broken by isolated basalt-capped hills, of which the most prominent are Mts. Colong (3,460 feet), Penang (2,603 feet), Nundialla (2,554 feet), Cumbertine (2,299 feet), and Jellore, a trachyte peak, which rises to 2,732 feet. Another area of basalt occurs at Wanganderry, between the Upper Nattai and the Wollondilly. On the southern side there is a distinct fall away to the Shoalhaven Tableland at 2,300 feet. The Wollondilly and Wingecarribee Rivers run against this southward fall, and are thus antecedent. On both sides of the Wollondilly to the south of Yerranderie, a mass of intrusive rocks occurs on the plateau surface, being continuous with the sand- stones. Both go to form part of the old peneplain surface. The plateau has been trenched by the two series of valleys, the great modern canyons up to 2,000 feet deep, and a series of shallower and more mature valleys incised to different depths in the surface. The Yerranderie valleys are cut to a depth of 800 feet. At Bullio the valleys are 200 feet to 300 feet deep. The valleys of the Upper Wingecarribee also belong to this series. To the west the Blue Plateau gives place to a higher mass—the Jenolan Plateau. 2. Jenolan Plateaw.—The southern edge of this section is associated with the Wollondilly area, although the main mass is drained by the Cox, Macquarie and Abercrombie systems. From the Blue Plateau near Yerranderie there is a sharp and definite rise to the Jenolan level at 4,000 to 4,200 feet to the east of Mt. Werong. There is a similar “step up” from the basalt plains around Taralga at 3,000 feet to Mt. Werong, lying to the north. These slopes represent part of the eastern and southern edges of a high dome. From Curraweela (near Richlands) and Wombeyan Caves over a distance of 15 miles there is a uniform rise of 1,100 feet, from 3,100 feet to 4,200 feet, on to the Jenolan Plateau, representing a grade of the order of 70 feet to the mile. Looking across this country from the east or west it appears to be a plain sloping gently to the south. Actually the surface is dissected by narrow valleys and canyons cut by Murruin Creek and the head streams of the Abercrombie, which have eroded right to their divides. These streams, flowing parallel to the rock strike and down the slope, have done far more work than the westward-flowing level streams to the south, such as the Bolong and Crookwell Rivers. : Although many basalt residuals are found on this surface none rises to a height of more than 200 feet above it, and so they do not form important landmarks. 3. Western Wollondilly-Abercrombie Block.—Passing to the south of Jenolan Plateau a great uplifted plain is reached. This has an elevation of some 3,000 feet, and is drained by the Upper Wollondilly, Cookbundoon, Crookwell and Abercrombie Rivers. The westward extent of this plain beyond Crookwell is unknown to the writer, but it must be considerable. Looking from the higher BY F. A. ‘CRAFT. 625 lands to the north, this country appears to be almost absolutely level. For many miles in the undissected portion near the Main Divide the only relief is afforded by occasional basalt hills. The skylines here are level and unbroken, and the streams flow in ancient valleys before plunging into deep juvenile canyons to flow over the edges of the plateau. On the eastern side the streams have bitten deeply into the plateau, hut on the west of the Main Divide there is a much greater extent of level country owing to its greater distance from the western edge and consequent remoteness from the head of erosion. Southwards this block gives place to the lower highlands of the Yass-Lake George-Goulburn district. A certain amount of warping and faulting between these two sections of the plateau is extremely probable. To the east of the Western Wollondilly Block lies the Shoalhaven Plateau. Along the Main Divide in this section there are notable areas of basalt, whose present extent along the Divide may represent the course of a Tertiary stream down which the lava flowed. This would indicate an entirely different drainage from that at present obtaining. 4. Shoalhaven Plateau.—Towards the coast lies the Shoalhaven Plateau, at an average elevation of 2,200 feet. This division extends from Mittagong on the north past Nerriga on the south, and from the Illawarra scarp inland to Goulburn and Lake Bathurst. This section is broken by two higher blocks, Sassafras Range and the hills around Robertson, both rising to 2,700 feet. The former is a horst which is prolonged southwards by the Budawang Range (Currockbilly Mts.), whilst the extra elevation of Robertson is due to sheets of basalt 350 feet thick which have been poured out on the surface of shale at 3,350 feet. Geologically, the Shoalhaven Plateau can be divided into two sections, Triassic rocks occurring to the north of the Lower Shoalhaven, and Lower Palaeozoic strata, together with some Upper Marine beds, being found to the south. All of the older rocks have been intensely folded, and bevelled off across their bedding planes to form a plain which is co-extensive with plains of horizontally-bedded young rocks to the north. The Upper Marine beds have not been greatly warped or folded. With the exception of the quartzite residual country in the Marulan and Goulburn districts the western part of this division presents an even appearance. The streams have not yet dissected the greater part of the plateau surface, only the Lower Shoalhaven and some of its tributaries being deeply entrenched. In general the stream valleys are very shallow and are late mature in type. 5. Lake George Complex.—Between the Western Wollondilly Block and the Canberra-Gourock Highlands there is an area of comparatively low country crossed by meridional ridges and faults. The continuity of the higher plateaus is broken by this “‘geocol”. Around Bredalbane and Lake George there are extensive plains at an elevation of 2,300 to 2,400 feet, corresponding to the slightly lower levels of the Shoalhaven Plateau to the east and the downs of the Upper Lachlan to the west. The western boundary of the Lake George Plains is a long narrow horst—the Cullarin Range—rising to 2,700 feet. The Molonglo and Upper Lachlan Rivers have cut gaps and passages through this horst, but other streams have been blocked and betrunked to form Lake George. On the eastern side these plains are bounded by another high, narrow ridge, which has been cut across by numerous small streams. Commencing six miles to the south-west of Goulburn this ridge rises fairly rapidly above the level of the plains, attaining an elevation of 3,227 feet at Mt. Allianyonyiga to the west of Tarago railway station. 626 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE WOLLONDILLY RIVER BASIN, This ridge extends far to the south, passing into the Goureck Ranges. It appears to pe a combination of residual ridge and horst. Other ridges and residuals mark the plain near the northern shore of the lake. Structurally, the Lake George Plains and allied plains on the head of the Lachlan form the trough of a syncline between the highland masses to the north and south. 6. Nepean Ramp.—From Botany Bay to Robertson the land surface rises steadily forming an inclined plane or “ramp”, which has been dissected by such consequent streams as the Avon, Cataract, Cordeaux, George’s and Woronora Rivers. The surface slopes down from the Illawarra coastal scarp to the north- west, forming a syncline with a north-south axis. The surface consists of Hawkes- bury Sandstone in which the streams, rising almost at the coast and flowing inland, have scored gorges some 500 feet deep. The inland slope ends against the eastern face of the Blue Mountain Monocline, which extends in this section from Wallacia to Mittagong. The downward northern slope of this ramp is continued in the southern section of the Blue Plateau further to the west. Owing to its extreme roughness this country can only be traversed with difficulty, and most of it is a water reserve. To Abercrombie rae ee Ry oom ji ‘a ys wi) S: = = Nin) iA é Ga =o Be ame ul Abercrombie Text-fig. 4.—The Mt. Werong District. The upper valleys of Ruby Creek (Kowmung System) and Murruin Creek are being attacked on all sides. The upper part of Ruby Creek—Lannigan’s Swamp—originally flowed to Murruin Creek. Deposition of alluvials along this valley is the result of faulting. Summing up, it is seen that the Wollondilly area consists of a number of distinct and somewhat dissimilar sections. The essential plain character of most of these sections suggests that. they were, at one time, co-extensive, and have been more recently separated by differential uplift. A further study of the area supports this view. Features of Special Interest. 1. Mt. Werong.—‘Werong” is the name given to a small rounded basalt hill located some twenty miles due south of Jenolan Caves (Text-fig. 4). The Main Divide runs close by, and is here very indefinite. The mount itself is very little above the flat swampy plateau relic on which it is located. To the north lies the main mass of the Jenolan Plateau, which rises to 4,400 feet around Shooter’s Hill. BY F. A. CRAFT. 627 Southward, as far as the eye can see, stretch the plains of the upper Abercrombie and Wollondilly Basins. Long, low ridges of much-eroded basalt hardly break the even surface, and the deep canyons that scar the country are marked only by faint lines. The Werong area at 3,800 feet is a “step-up” from the Western Wollondilly Block at 3,100 feet to the Jenolan Plateau at 4,400 feet. The locality is one of great geological and topographic interest. Tributaries of three streams head at this point—namely Abercrombie River and the Werong Branch, Murruin Creek, and Ruby Creek which flows to the Kowmung. The Abercrombie streams have cut steep canyons right to their divides, but a couple of miles of undissected country remain along the heads of the other two streams. A higher ridge, across which Ruby Creek breaks, bounds this area on the north, separating it from the Kowmung Canyon. The land to the south-east of the Mount is also somewhat higher, consisting as it does of hard quartzite ridges. Passing south of the Mount from the Murruin and Ruby Creek areas the ridge-tops between the Abercrombie streams have a gentle, definite slope south. Around the Mount, especially on the north-eastern side, the plateau valleys are flat and late mature, and sub-divides between the streams are represented by ridges rising 30 or 40 feet above the surface of the swamps. The whole of the level area between these ridges is covered with alluvium of doubtful depth, but whose thickness at the head of erosion on Murruin (or Limeburner’s) Creek would appear to be not less than 40 feet. Two series of alluvials have been noted, both of which carry gold. The lower and less extensive level has been formed as the result of terracing of the upper and more extensive level by stream action. The latter lies between 3,750 and 3,800 feet, whilst the surface of the former is from 10 to 30 feet below the lower parts of the upper terrace. The alluvials form a continuous line along the upper parts of both Ruby and Murruin Creeks and the upper level part of the former stream flowing on the tableland has been captured from the common line by the steep, swiftly flowing stream cutting back from the Kowmung side. Thus Ruby Creek leaves the level valley and plunges into a narrow gorge cut in the high northern ridge (Text-fig. 4). The basalt of the Mount has not, apparently, been poured out over these alluvials; although now, apart from the basalt area comprising the Mount itself, there is only a small kaolin deposit occurring on quartzite some 30 feet above the level of the alluvium. A patch of basalt also occurs immediately to the east of the Mount and may, in Mr. Grove’s opinion, .overlie a patch of alluvium at a slightly lower level than the base of the Mount. The late mature valleys which are a feature of this surface are obviously post-basaltic in age. The geology of this section is very interesting. The rocks are chiefly meta- morphic in character, quartzite, breccia, red and grey slates and metamorphic grit being prominent. The strata resemble the Devonian beds of Yerranderie and the Cox Valley very closely. The earth movements of the Kanimbla Epoch affected the region greatly, and were accompanied by intrusions of acid granites. The rocks have a strike of 10° east of north (magnetic), and have been planed off to form the Tertiary peneplain, in a shallow valley excavated on which the alluvial beds are deposited. Gold occurs sparsely in the grits and breccia, and has been concentrated somewhat in the lower parts of the soil as a result of weathering of . «yin the surface rock. of 628 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE WOLLONDILLY RIVER BASIN, On the ‘eastern side the alluvials end abruptly against granite and massive conglomerate. -This is, apparently, due to the development of a fault across Murruin (Limeburner’s) Creek, with a downthrow to the west. Excavations for mining purposes have shown that the conglomerates are fractured along a line which dips east at approximately 20°, and are sheared off against a granite surface in places. The higher upthrust side of the fault to the east has caused the partial blocking of Murruin Creek, and the deposition of the series of alluvials along Ruby and Murruin Creeks. As the stream has worn through the uplifted rock mass it has begun to trench the level valley and cut away the sediments. The capture of the former upper part of Murruin by Ruby Creek is assisting in the obliteration of the upland valleys. 2. Burragorang Valley.—‘Burragorang” is the name given to the lower thirty miles of the valley of the Wollondilly, which represents a distinct physiographic type. The valley, which is almost straight, is bounded on the east by great escarpments of Hawkesbury Sandstone which are also found on the western side between the Cox and Tonalli Rivers, but to the south of the latter stream the western valley wall consists of massive granitic rocks. The distance between the eastern and western sandstone scarps to the north of Tonalli River is approximately four miles, which represents the general width of the valley upstream to the Wanganderry bend. Below the Tonalli the valley narrows considerably, the average width between the Nattai and Cox junctions being of the order of two miles. Below the latter junction the valley continues to narrow, the last ten miles of the (Warragamba) gorge being almost precipitous. Burragorang thus appears to be a great trench, whose sides are notably broken in three places only, where the Tonalli and Nattai Rivers and Lacy’s Creek fall into the Wollondilly. The latter two valleys are of the same general form as Burragorang, and are bounded by precipices, their lower courses being flat- bottomed. The structure of the floor of the main valley is very interesting. Between the Cox River and Byrne’s Creek the greater part of the floor is composed of silt flats, part of which has been described in an earlier paper, where three terraces were recognized near the Cox junction at 160, 180, and 220 feet above sea level. In general, however, such series of silt terraces are not readily recognized in the valley, although there is a distinct rise in the silt flats as one proceeds up the valley. Thus at the Nattai junction these are found at 250 feet, and at 350 feet above the sea ten miles higher up, at the mouth of Byrne’s Creek. On the eastern side of the valley opposite the junction of Tonalli River a great bed of old river gravel is found on the talus slope from-50 to 75 feet above the modern silt flats on the river at 350 feet. These gravels are readily distinguished from the rounded sandstone pebbles typical of the talus slopes by the variety of rock types found in them, and they mark the position of an old river bed. They indicate clearly a slight lateral movement of the channel of the river and some vertical erosion in stages. The width of the silt flats varies between a couple of hundred yards and three-quarters of a mile. They are continuous between the Cox River and Byrne’s Creek, but above the latter point flats are only met with occasionally on a concave bend of the river or at the mouths of creeks. No silt flats of any consequence are found above Wanganderry bend, the few sidings that are met with above that point being very narrow and limited in extent. The depth of the valley varies from 1,400 feet near the Cox to 1,700 feet at the Nattai, which depth continues until the Tonalli River is reached. Above this BY F. A. CRAFT. 629 point a definite ‘‘valley in valley’ form is recognized. The entrenchment of the Wollondilly in the plateau increases somewhat to 1,900 feet at Wanganderry bend, but the topography of the valley undergoes a distinct change. The river no longer flows in a flat-bottomed valley, but in a gorge of increasing depth (Text-fig. 5). A distinct level up to two miles in width forms the floor of the main valley, which varies in altitude from 700 feet near Tonalli River to 1,300 feet near Wanganderry bend. There is not an absolutely uniform rise between the two points named, but the greater part of the floor lies between 900 and 1,100 feet above sea level. The Wollondilly has cut a precipitous gorge in this valley floor up to 700 feet deep, and the lower courses of its small tributaries are also deeply entrenched. The northern part of the old floor lies on the western side of the river, but the southern section lies to the east of the Wollondilly. The greater part of the terrace is composed of granitic rocks, including porphyritic quartz-felsites and felspar-porphyries, but a part also consists of sedimentary rocks, presumably Upper Marine sandstones. The surfaces of the two rock types are co-extensive. Bindooxcn, ‘tColong — ByrnesGap Tomat Ch. MurruwinCk. Yerranderie R. fig \Yoonss Wollondilly AM VSI IY 4 Murruin E| bow N (cire—Tonalli R. —— allondilly R. Wanganderry Bena Bora Chae Byrne's Ck. SCALES + Qgbng-Semee—F Miles-(Horiz.) NV:H=4. L_2 Ootes4 xlosFeet (Vert) Text-fig. 5—The Yerranderie District, showing the valleys of Tonalli River and Upper Burragorang. Note the terraces in the foreground and the change in valley section upstream from Wanganderry Bend. The outliers of horizontal rocks around Yerranderie mark a former continental edge. The fact that the hardness of the rocks forming this terrace varies considerably indicates that the terrace was formed at a temporary base-level, and subsequent uplift to the south has caused the terrace to slope downwards from the south to the north. Subsequently the modern smaller canyon of the river has been incised in the old valley floor. The idea of stages of uplift is supported by the terracing of alluvials in the lower part of Burragorang, and the occurrence of old river gravels as noted well above the modern channels. 3. The Tonalli Valley.—The valley of Tonalli River (Text-fig. 5) is the only great break in the side of Burragorang. The position here is very interesting, as the stream has cut along an old continental margin. To the south there is a great mass of felsite which is very resistant to both mechanical and chemical erosion. The small streams to the south of Tonalli River have cut short, steep gorges in the hard mass. To the north there is a great thickness of sub- 630 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE WOLLONDILLY RIVER BASIN, horizontal sedimentary rocks. At the head of the stream, to the west, these rocks are 700 feet thick, and thin out rapidly to zero to the south-west and south at the Bindook Pass and the head of Tomat Creek. But on the north the sedi- mentary beds reach a thickness of 1,900 feet. Right against the old granitic mass these rocks consist of resistant grits and sandstones, but to the north the Coal Measure and Upper Marine beds consist largely of soft shales and crumbling sandstones. The softness of these rocks has doubtless contributed to the erosion of such a wide valley along the lower part of the Tonalli, but it must be under- stood that similar, although narrower, mature-looking valleys have been incised in the uniformly hard rocks around Yerranderie. The floor of the main valley rises gradually from the bench in Burragorang to Yerranderie at 1,900 feet. The latter levels are also found in the Kowmung Basin, north-west of Yerranderie and along Colong Creek. The gaps and passes between the Tonalli Valley and the Kowmung and Colong Creek drainages have been cut down to the valley level. Masses of hard sandstones have been isolated by the cutting action of the streams, and appear as precipitous-sided residuals. By ‘y GapRa MOL | FF, ‘ 21.0 J, Ze Tarlo Gap AIS eet 7 ty Z Carrick / — = Ef Eats = {ze = _=¢ = acl AN PX S.R "pe ZS WI pre dis Z »» ; 7) Ss Miz 6 SG SSN hit FEE SoC Go Mion \ INS I%, ~ VW -, was AN} —— my SS SS NY n ZS —— Ni NG py : ) Co : a renee Ni Gz i B. Bredalbane Cullarin Scarp uae R. Norwood Warp Run of Waters C: Wologorong Lagoon PM PETIT TTPO Bre abe ane Text-fig. 8.—a. The Cullarin fault-scarp west of Bredalbane. View looking -west. b. Bredalbane Valley. showing the silt lake along Wologorong Creek, which flows in the middle-distance towards the right. Looking north-east. ce. Wologorong silt lake, tooking north-west from the Goulburn-Collector road. ad. Cookbundoon fault-scarp from near Greenwich Park station. View !ooking north-east. 7. Lake George Area.—Continuing south of Bredalbane Plains a very complex district is entered. The principal plains or valleys run from north to south and are crossed by high ridges and interrupted by residual peaks. Text-figures 7, 8, and 9 show the great diversity of topegraphy. To the west of the Main Divide the rolling downs of the Upper Lachlan Basin are found east and south-east of Gunning. Cullarin Range presents a low, broken scarp on the western side, but its eastern face is higher, straighter, and more definite, defining the limits of the Lake George Senkungsfeld very clearly. In the vicinity of the lake this scarp is practically unbroken, but further north, in the vicinity of the Fish River water gap it has been more dissected. Indeed the more southern section appears to be younger than the northern. M 636 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE WOLLONDILLY RIVER BASIN, Eastward of Cullarin are the plains draining to Lake George, the lake itself occupying a local depression. The plains are found at an altitude of 2,300 to 2,350 feet and are remarkably level over their whole extent, the divide between the lake drainage and Bredalbane Plains being almost imperceptible. The plain is interrupted to the south-east of Bredalbane by low ridges rising a hundred feet above it, but these extend only over a couple of miles. Further to the east Wologorong Lagoon occupies a local depression between north-south ridges. From A. Tarago Lagoon Collector T.S. Cullarin Scarp B. Mulwaree Block Collector Cullarin Scarp Vn MMMM GS Bangalore Ck. Covan Alliany Outlet. PZ ~F a ZT ~— > SY SEAT TILL LULL Mulwaree Ck. —_5 Allianyonyig: Text-fig. 9—a. Lake George from the north. Note the typical conical outline of Mt. Collector, which contrasts with the rectangular form of the Cullarin Secarp. b. Lake George from the north-west. Note fault-scarps to right and in background, and old residuals. c. Tarago Lagoon. Typical of the small lagoons on the plains near Lake George. View looking south-east. d, Lake Bathurst. The view shows the eastern bay. Note the broken scarps and the great gap in Mulwaree Scarp (background). View looking west. ~ the plain near Tarago Lagoon at 2,450 feet there is a steady slope into the Wologorong depression at 2,300 feet, the small plain south of Tarago Lagoon forming quite a distinct level which corresponds to other plain remnants in the vicinity along Bangalore and Crisp’s Creeks, the latter flowing south-east from Mt. Allianyonyiga. Both of these small streams drain to Mulwaree Creek, and a low meridional ridge separates them from the Lake George drainage. Eastwards of these small plains rises the high ridge extending from Yarra southwards past Mt. Allianyonyiga, which presents steep faces on either side, and whose eastern scarp forms the boundary of Goulburn Plains. This great ridge is cut across by several very small creeks, and it presents a striking contrast to the BY F. A. CRAFT. 637 low eastern branch of the Main Divide to the west of Bangalore Creek. The ridge is composed of highly-resistant quartzite and granite, whilst on the plains of Bangalore Creek shale is met with. The natural features of the residual ridge would appear to have been accentuated by faulting, giving rise to such features as Lake Bathurst and possibly the Wologorong depression. The ridge passes south- wards into the high block faults of the Gourock Ranges. The streams cutting through this ridge would be classed as antecedent. The reason for their original courses into the higher mass is probably found in the manner in which all these blocks of hard rock have split up in past geological time. The tendency has been for resistant outcrops to weather into a chain of separated peaks, this being shown in the district by such peaks as Collector and Terramungula near Lake George, and Mt. Towrang and its associated peaks in the vicinity of Goulburn. The gaps between the original peaks are gradually enlarged and made more level, and are eventually occupied by streams. The cause of these gaps may be found in local fracturing of the rocks during the original folding movements of the Kanimbla Epoch. The higher plain relics at 2,450 feet drain on to the lower lands over mature valleys on the western side, or through rather juvenile gullies to the east, through the high ridge. The plains around Lake George are marked by several high quartzite residuals such as Collector (Text-fig. 9), Terramungula, and Currowang (Text-fig. 7). Their conical shape differentiates them from the more rectangular outlines of the fault blocks. Lake George itself has been formed as the direct result of the uplifting of Cullarin Range (Taylor, 1907). On the Lake George Plains four lagoons are found. Wologorong occurs in 4. local depression; Tarago is perched on the edge of a high plain, and drains into Collector Creek during times of overflow by a wide valley; Wet Lagoon is just on the low divide between the Lake Plains and Fish River; whilst Dry Lagoon occupies a rather similar position a little further to the south. In each case the presence of the lagoon would appear to be due to slight folding or warping in the plain surface interrupting the former weak and indefinite drainage of the country by forming local depressions. The ease with which this could be done is appre- ciated when it is realized that there is a fall of less than 50 feet between Wet Lagoon and Lake George, a distance of 9 miles. The lake and its surrounding plains—all of which are covered with a thin veneer of recent wash—are due to the rising of Cullarin Range across the surface of the uplifted peneplain, of which the plains themselves are an essential part. The sharp “boathook” bend southwards, evidenced by such streams as Collector Creek, may be ascribed to the fault-block turning them aside from a former drainage to the north-west to Fish River. The steep line of hills found to the north of Bredalbane Valley—the northern extension of these plains—is described later as a sharply-warped or a faulted surface. a. Lake Bathurst (Text-fig. 9).—This small lake has been described by Taylor (1907), and its origin appears to be traceable to faulting. Uplift in the Vicinity of Tarago railway station has caused Mulwaree Creek to cut an early mature valley to a depth of 100 feet in the foothills of the residuals and possible fault area of the Mulwaree Block immediately to the west. A small tributary coming from the east appears to have been held up by uplift around Tarago, and has formed Lake Bathurst, whose outlet into Mulwaree Creek is through the rather narrow valley cut into the rising land by the tributary. 638 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE WOLLONDILLY RIVER BASIN, 8. Wingecarribee-Nattai—The Wingecarribee River rises at Robertson and flows westwards through an extensive swamp in basalt and Wianamatta Shale country to level plains at Moss Vale. Between the syenite mass of The Gib (Mt. Gibraltar) and the basalt residual of Tillynambulan the stream flows over the floor of a wide valley, coming down to the Hawkesbury Sandstones at Berrima. The whole of its upper course thus lies through swamps or over level valleys, but below Berrima the stream is running into higher sandstone country and becoming entrenched in deep canyons, through which it runs to the Wollondilly, « its mouth being in granite country. Flowing from the plains of Moss Vale to the higher sandstone country the river is distinctly antecedent. Other streams of this nature are found near Mittagong, the principal being the Nattai River and Gibber Gunyah Creek (Text-fig. 10). These flow into uplifted and folded sandstones, whilst the Winge- Text-fig. 10.—Northern edge of the Shoalhaven Plateau, showing rising ground to the north and north-west. This area of ancient topography is being attacked by streams on all sides. carribee runs from shale plains into a warped sandstone surface which rises to the west. At Mittagong the scarp into which the streams run has been formed by recent folding or faulting, but the more southern slope of the Wingecarribee area does not appear to be a continuation of this folding. The wide valleys of the Upper Wingecarribee may be due to comparatively rapid erosion of the Wianamatta Shale—the lower course of the stream being in resistant sandstones, and consequently in narrow valleys. The greater uplift which took place further to the west may have had some effect on the valley types. The presence of extensive swamps along the Upper Wingecarribee is remark- able. On various parts of the plateau surface small areas of swamps are found, but some special explanation is required for the case in point. At first I was inclined to think that uplift of land along the lower course of the stream had BY F. A. CRAFT. 639 caused partial blocking of the water, but the presence of very level and dry plains around Moss Vale, together with absence of any distinct evidence of warping or folding rather discounted the idea. The swamps, which extend from 2,400 feet near Robertson to 2,240 feet on their lower side at Sheepwash Bridge, are mainly on Wianamatta Shale, which is overlain by basalt. This shale weathers into a very stiff clay which is almost impervious to water: but the overlying basalts occur in columns and admit water much more freely. Rain falling on the hills soaks into the basalt soil, and percolates downwards until it meets the underlying clay and shales, through which it will not pass so readily. For this reason it soaks aleng near the top of the impervious strata, and seeps out along the floor of the main stream valley. The watertable thus comes to the surface of the ground causing swamps which are not found outside the limits of the basalt flow. The base of the basalt is found at 2,350 feet or there- abouts, but it cannot be determined readily in most places on account of a thick screening of soil. Physiographic Types. 1. The Peneplain.—The existence of a Late Tertiary peneplain over the greater part of South-eastern Australia has been generally recognized by various writers. In the Wollondilly area several distinct levels can be determined, which have been formed as a result of dissection of this original plain surface, rendering this latter very obscure in many places, and destroying its identity in others. The peneplain may be recognized typically in three districts—the plains around Richlands, the warped southern edge of Jenolan Plateau, and the plains of Lake George and of the Upper Lachlan Basin around Gunning. Around Richlands, on the Main Divide, the country is very flat and is drained by small, level streams. Burra Lake, a small lagoon at the head of one of the small Abercrombie streams, typifies this district and gives an illus- tration of the prevailing late mature valleys. Southwards towards Crookwell the level plains with their flat valleys continue, and are hardly broken by the slightly higher basalt hills around McAllister. This country forms the typical peneplain surface and post-dates the basalts, as it is cut partly in eroded basalt, the sides of the valleys in which these flows were originally poured out also being reduced. Viewed from a distance this land gives the level skyline so characteristic of an upraised peneplain. North of Richlands the slopes rising to Jenolan Plateau are very uniform, and represent the old peneplain at a different stage—where it has been cut into by rapid streams and trenched by juvenile canyons. The district of Gunning and Lake George Plains represents the plain broken and interrupted by faulting. Cullarin Range has risen across the gently-rolling downs, as the lake plains obviously could not have been formed by erosion under the existing conditions of inland drainage. In each case the old surface is very level and has been cut in a variety of rocks, most of which have been greatly folded in past ages. The northern part of the Shoalhaven Plateau, to the north of the Shoal- haven River, is part of the peneplain which has been cut in almost horizontal strata. The more western part of the peneplain surface is interrupted by a few residual peaks of very hard rocks—the monadnocks—but these occur in definite localities, and are not evenly distributed over the area. Northwards, in the Cox Basin and over the Lower Wollondilly, the surface of Hawkesbury Sandstones represents part of the old plain surface which is characterized by 640 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE WOLLONDILLY RIVER BASIN, flat valleys and by occasional swamps. The peneplain surface existed before the commencement of the series of Late Tertiary uplifts, which have caused its gradual dissection and destruction. 2. Valleys of the Plateau.—The peneplain is dissected by two series of valleys which are of diverse types—mature and juvenile. The mature valleys are found along the courses of the Upper Wollondilly and Cookbundoon and on the Middle Wollondilly, their depth depending on the amount of local warping and faulting of the peneplain. At Yerranderie, also, valleys of this type are found, somewhat deeper and rather less mature. The valleys are more remarkable by reason of the fact that they are not cut in horizontal rocks, but in intensely folded strata. They can be correlated with the valleys of Lithgow and Wallerawang in the Cox Basin to the north, which are cut in horizontal strata of varying hardness, and the presence of these valleys around the periphery of the Central Tableland indicates a common origin, namely, slight uplift of the peneplain followed by erosion at a constant base-level. Since the beginning of the uplift of the peneplain such streams as Mulwaree Creek have been doing a certain amount of erosive work, cutting into the plain surface. The level ridges rising 70 or 80 feet above the modern stream flats would appear to represent the original level of the peneplain here, which is well preserved further to the south, to the east of Lake Bathurst. There has also been a certain amount of modern erosion in the valleys of the Upper Wingecarribee, but the salient features of that section existed before the plateau was raised to its present altitude. Great canyons have been excavated by the Wollondilly, Abercrombie and Shoal- haven Rivers in the recently-uplifted plateau lands, the streams having accom- plished the greatest amount of dissection in the northern part of the area adjacent to the Cox Basin. Canyons of lesser size have been cut in the Cook- bundoon fault scarp and through Cullarin Range, these owing their existence to faulting and more local uplift and consequent revival of streams. 3. Monadnocks.—On the peneplain surface in the vicinity of Goulburn and in the vicinity of Lake George, there are a number of monadnocks or residual hills which survive from earlier geological periods and cycles of erosion. These are conical in shape and represent parts of synclines. North-south valleys between these residuals mark the presence of anticlines, and on the monadnocks themselves hard, glassy white quartzite is prominent, which not only resists erosion, but buttresses up softer strata and protects. them from the attacks of streams. The outcrops of hard quartzite are marked by the presence of small scarps. Goulburn is situated on one of the most notable of the anticlines along which the Wollondilly flows. The structure of a typical residual is shown in Text-fig. 11, d, the general appearance being given by Text-fig. 9, a, D. In the northern groups around Goulburn the principal peaks are Towrang (2,845 feet), Governor (2,397 feet), Bullamelita (2,584 feet), Gundary (2,767 feet), and Jerrara (2,530 feet). To the south, on Lake George Plains, Terramungula (3,141 feet), Collector (2,875 feet), and Currowang (2,915 feet) are prominent. On the highlands west of Mulwaree Creek, Bangalore (2,925 feet) and Allianyonyiga (3,327 feet) are the highest points. On the average the Goulburn group of peaks rises to 500 feet above the level of the surrounding’ plains and valley-floors, whilst those near the Lake are 650 feet higher than the lake plains. The profile of these conical residuals is quite different from the square outline of the fault blocks, and that alone would serve to distinguish them. They are- widely different physiographic forms. The fact that the monadnocks rise to a BY F. A. CRAFT. 641 constant height above the surrounding plains does not indicate that they are remnants of a former peneplain. Their existence, like that of Mts. Walker and Gangerang in the Cox Basin, can be traced back to the cycles of erosion followis.g the great orogenic movements of the Kanimbla Epoch. The size of the synclinal residuals of hard rocks has decreased gradually since that time until these small peaks only remain now, the greater part of the original masses having long since been eroded. The conical shape of the monadnocks reduces the rate of erosion and lowering to a minimum. Their constant average elevation above the surrounding plains depends on similarity of formation and of past erosion. Where we have peaks removed from the active work of many streams, as is the case with Mt. Allianyonyiga, the height is greater than usual. In this way the similarities in general form and the dissimilarities in altitude may be readily explained. 4. Basalt as a Physiographic Problem.—It is not within the scope of this paper to attempt a geological description of the Tertiary basalt flows of the Wollondilly area, but these have a special significance from a physiographic point of view which cannot be overlooked. The base of a basalt flow represents part of the land surface on which the molten lava was originally poured out, and some idea of the past disposition of topography may be gained by correlating these scattered relics of the ancient (Late Tertiary) surface. A classification of areas known to the writer is carried out in the appended table, numbers on which refer to the map (Text-fig. 2). The various occurrences agree well with the definition of physiographic areas given at the beginning of this paper. In the east, over the Shoalhaven Plateau, the general level of the base of the flows is found at 2,350 feet above sea-level. Towards the west the level of the base varies from 2,700 to 3,100 feet, but the lower sections also represent areas of relative depression on the modern land surface, and a more constant elevation is attained on the Main Divide and towards the Abercrombie River. Thus the Taralga flow, which has a base eleva- tion of 2,700 feet at Taralga, is not found below 3,000 feet on the Main Divide at Richlands in Area No. 2, where the plateau is somewhat higher and more uniformly level. There is, then, a minimum difference of 350 feet in the respective elevations of the bases of the Shoalhaven Plateau and the western basalts, whilst the maximum difference is of the order of 650 feet when we consider the extensive areas along the Main Divide. The constant base-elevation of the occurrences on the Shoalhaven Plateau (Numbers 7-15) indicates the relative level of parts of the Tertiary land surface, probably the floors of the valleys. In comparing this with other bases we are obviously comparing similar parts of the old land surface, so the actual part considered is not a matter of major importance. We find other parts of the basalt areas immediately to the west of the Shoalhaven Plateau at a somewhat higher elevation (2,500 to 2,700 feet), and still further westwards a constant level is met with at 3,000 feet or thereabouts. Thus the Tertiary surface is differentiated as regards present elevation. _ That this was not always the case is indicated by modern topography. The higher levels, both in the case of the Western Wollondilly Block and the levels of the bases of its basalts, end abruptly along a definite north-south line, giving place, in limited sections to intermediate levels, as at Bannaby and Greenwich Park. These in turn give place to the lower levels of the Shoalhaven Plateau. Flexing or faulting between these two major physiographic divisions may be safely inferred 642 / PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE WOLLONDILLY RIVER BASIN, from the break in the Tertiary surface, as represented by the bases of the basalt areas. If anything approaching the present topographic arrangement of a higher Altitude No. | Name. Locality. Occurrence. of Base. Thickness. | | Group “A” Feet. Feet ul | Taralga Bt Shien Taralga and district Extensive flow 2,700 350 2 Macalister Main Divide Extensive flow 3,150 159 3 Bannister ..|Near Main Divide Extensive flow PAPAS) 300 4 The Forest .. | Goulburn district Flow 2,350 8 5 Mt. Wayo West of the Forest Capping at 38,052 ft. -— — 6 Myrtle Creek]South of Taralga Flow 2,790 100 GROUP “B” 7 | Robertson Robertson district Flow 2,350 350 8 Exeter Sutton Forest district Flow 2,300 100 ) Wingello South of Wingello Flow 2,275 50 10 Tillynambulan | Moss Vale district Residual capping 2,350 275 ial Penang West of Bowral Residual capping at 2,603 ft. as == 12 Wanganderry | NW. of Mittagong Flow 2,400 300 183 | Cross Roads .| Moss Vale district Relies of flow 2,350 — 14 Lake Bathurst | On Divide of Shoalhaven | Small flow 2,350 50 U6) || BFC Saco o6 On Divide of Shoalhaven | Small residuals 2,350 — 16 INICEGIS a eee Hast of Shoalhaven Small flow 2,100 ? nner Sassafras On Sassafras Range Local flow 2,500 200 Group “C” : 18 Arthursleigh Wollondilly Valley Corer Elz ZORA itt, — — 19 Bannaby West of Bannaby Flow on plain 2,500 , 1 20 Carnicki i s4- 5 miles NE. of Carrick Flow—local 2,200 ? 21 Greenwich Pk.| 63 miles N. of Carrick Flow 2,500 100 22 Greenwich Pk.| East of No. 21 Flow—below plateau 2,275 Relic (Hast) 23 | Cookbundoon On eastern side of river | Relic of flow 1,940 Relic Group “D” 24 Mt. Werong Kowmung Divide Flow? 3,825 150 25 Mt. Shivering |Kowmung Divide Core? Rises to 3,678 Mt. Shivering fits — — (Fast ) | Kowmung Divide Small flow 3,450 Relic 26 Mt. Colong Yerranderie district Capping — relic of PAe| Yerranderie flow 3,125 300 Bealkee ya «he Yerranderie Dyke—top of peak at 2,780 ft. —— — 28 Abercrombie . | Southern side of river Flow 2908 Relic 29 Bummaroo Northern side of river Flow 2,950 300 30 Paling Yards|11 miles N. of Aber- cerombie - | Flow—mesas 3,525 Relic 31 Mt. Browne 13 miles N. of Aber- crombie Flow 3,850 Relic 32 Cae IaGtbE go 5 1h miles IN, oF Alar | | crombie Flow 3,950 Relic Notes.—Wlevations determined mainly by aneroid, and checked against heights of trig. stations and railway stations. Thickness of basalt is not given in the case of those areas not visited (Nos. 5 and 11); where the thickness is slight the word “Relic” is given; in the case of suspected cores and small surface deposits thickness is not indicated. General order of accuracy is + 25’, except in the case of Nos. 30 to 32. BY F. A. CRAFT. 643 western and a lower eastern area had obtained in the Tertiary period, the present grouping of basalt masses along the present Main Divide would have been quite impossible. The extruded lavas would have flowed to the lower country on either side, especially down the steeper eastern slopes. That such is not the case indicates that the great flows along the Main Divide owe their situation and extent to the existence of a Tertiary valley following that line. The differentiation between the eastern and western sections of the Tertiary levels has taken place since the pouring out of the basalts. In passing, the present maximum thickness of 350 feet attained by the basalts in widely separated parts of the area would indicate some uniformity in the extrusion of the lavas over the whole area. As regards the areas No. 28 to 32, the change in altitude between the major areas at Bummeroo and Shooter’s Hill, a difference between the respective bases of 1,200 feet is especially interesting. This line cuts across the modern valley of the Abercrombie, and was apparently formed along a Tertiary valley. It seems safe to conclude that the warping and uplift of the Jenolan Plateau has tilted these basalt areas, causing them to occur along their present slope. Two others of the occurrences deserve special mention, namely, Nos. 20 and 22. Both of these are situated below the level of surrounding hills, on opposite sides of the Wollondilly valley. In the case of the former the basalt occupies a depres- sion between granite hills to the east of the river, and possibly represents the line of an old tributary stream. On the other hand, the small basalt area to the east of Greenwich Park station (No. 22) is found on the brow of a hill below the local level of the plateau, and considerably below the more extensive area at Greenwich Park. The relationship between the two is not clear, but there is no modern connection between them. The past extent of these basalts can be inferred from their present distribution. The presence of a large area at Robertson and of smaller areas in that district at Exeter, Wingello, and Tillynambulan, together with the western extension at Wanganderry at much the same level, points to the fact that a considerable part of this side of the area has been covered by flows of basalt. This also applies to the district along the Main Divide. Intermediate areas were, apparently, not so greatly affected, probably on account of greater elevation, but it must also be remembered that, during the modern stream cycle, this intermediate area has been subject to great erosion, and has been more extensively reduced than those areas to the east and west. It is not suggested that all the basalts of this area are of approximately the same age. Detailed geological investigation will be necessary before the absolute age of the various occurrences can be determined at all. It is especially probable that the intermediate areas mentioned above will be found to be of different age from the greater areas lying on either side, and these may be specifically asso- ciated with the Cookbundoon Fault. A similar state of affairs has been suggested by Jensen (1908) in connection with the basalts associated with the Sassafras Range. ; 7. Warps and Faults of the Area. (Refer to Text-figs. 3 and 12.) In the Wollondilly Basin, as we have seen from the beginning, a number of maturely-dissected land surfaces are found at varying elevations, and streams are eroding from the lower levels, gradually attacking the more elevated portions. Under these circumstances differentiation of a common level by warping or faulting is suspected, and this idea is confirmed when it is found that the higher levels 644 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE WOLLONDILLY RIVER BASIN, end abruptly as steep scarps. At present recognition of these faults or flexures depends entirely on physiographic evidence, the impossibility of these various maturely-dissected surfaces being formed in situ under existing conditions, besides the evidence respecting the relationship of scarps and modern stream erosion. The principal warps and faults are:— a. Kowmung Warp-Nepean Ramp.—The existence of a warped land surface in the Nepean Basin to the south of Sydney is already well established, and the physiography of the Cox and Kowmung areas plainly indicates a continuation of this warp to the west (Craft, 1928). Tilting and uplift towards the south are also indicated in Burragorang Valley, and, viewing the country in that vicinity and to the west of the Upper Nepean River, it is difficult to see how it would be possible for the Nepean Ramp to end sharply along the meridional line of the Nepean and not to be continued westwards without notable faulting and shatter- ing of the rocks, which is certainly not in evidence. The face of the Blue Mountain Monocline extends southwards to Mittagong, and appears to die out towards the Wingecarribee River. This old feature is superimposed on the newer Nepean Ramp and Kowmung Warp. i 5 b. South Jenolan Warp.—The theory has already been advanced that the high plateau around Jenolan Caves is essentially a dome-shaped warp (Craft, 1928; see also Andrews, 1910). This is confirmed by the southern margin of the plateau which extends southwards from Mt. Werong to Wombeyan Caves and Richlands. The tilted plain surface has been dissected by swift southward-flowing streams, but as yet a good deal of the ancient peneplain is preserved. The development of an overthrust fault at Mt. Werong was an incident in the elevation of Jenolan Plateau. ce. The Kanangra-Cookbundoon Fault.—The existence of a fault at Kanangra Walls has already been indicated (Craft, 1928), and the continuation of the scarp of this fault across the southern part of the Jenolan Dome into the Cookbundoon Basin is evidence of the prolongation of this fault, which appears to die out in the vicinity of Goulburn. On the northern side of the Wollondilly the fault at Mt. Werong and the “step down” at Mt. Shivering represent two different phases of this faulting. In the deeply-dissected country drained by Murruin Creek, the character of the scarp is naturally lost, but it appears further to the south in the vicinity of Wombeyan Caves and Bannaby (Text-fig. 12; Plate xxxix). At the latter place there is a “step up’ from the level of the Shoalhaven Plateau at 2,300 feet imme- diately to the south of Bannaby (the country to the east of the Wollondilly is somewhat higher) to the plains of Bannaby at 2,500 feet, and a steep scarp leads to the higher plateau level at 3,000 feet to the east of Taralga. The height of this latter scarp is partly due to the fact that its crest is marked by an outcrop of resistant quartzite, but the three levels are unmistakable. The 2,400-2,500 feet level extends to the south, and comprises a great deal of the country between the Wollondilly and Cookbundoon Rivers. South of Bannaby a great escarpment is met with to the west of the Cook- bundoon River (Text-fig. 8, d@). This forms the edge of the Western Wollondilly Block, and is somewhat higher than the country immediately to its west, which consists largely of soft slates that have been eroded fairly readily by the streams, whilst a good deal of the scarp consists of more resistant quartzites. Steep gullies lead down from the higher levels near the Main Divide, but the scarp is, as yet, very little dissected. -This straight and prominent section is over 20 miles BY F. A. CRAFT. 645 long, and continues to the vicinity of Towrang, where it ends rather abruptly. The uniformly high plateau block does not continue to the south of the Wollon- dilly at Towrang, its place being taken by scattered quartzite monadnocks. Evidence favouring the theory that this is a fault scarp may be summed up under two headings. Firstly, the scarp forms the edge of a highland block. To the west is a higher plateau; to the east is a lower plateau (Text-fig. 11, c). Similar ancient topographic surfaces occur at different levels. Secondly, streams A. Cullarin Scarp Fish R Wollondilly 2600" | — 1 1 0 2—___—4 pes _, 1o — 12——_14 Be L George Wologorong Che og Wollondilly cay Ase CRoslyn “TarloCk. CookbundoonR = JunctionCk —- Wollondilly 1) $ 6 aa a D. Bungoma Jerrara T.S.2530 Goulburn | 900° aS o=— = > a: 16 Text-fig. 11.—a, b. Sections across the valley of the Upper Wollondilly and Lake George Plains. The wide plain surface to the south of the Wollondilly contrasts sharply with the early mature valley of the Wollondilly. The former surface is part of the old Tertiary peneplain. ec. The Cookbundoon Fault (Physiographic). eee aN at "BO (0) 6 30 WH) 30 ZOO SILURIAN,ZZZ) DEVONIAN. RXM SANDSTONE. E_SGRANIT ELS=a TERTIARY BASALT. == V:H=10°3. Text-fig. 12.—Sections at intervals across the area. Geology is indicated approximately. Note the differentiation of similar surfaces as one goes from east to west. Physiographic faults are indicated. F,= Kanangra-Cookbundoon Fault; F, = Cullarin Fault; F,, F, = Faults of Mulwaree Block; F, = Sassafras Fault. that Jensen’s paper recognizes a similar method of determining faults by physio- eraphic means to those used in this present paper, namely, the recognition of similar physiographic surfaces separated by scarps, with canyons cut into the higher masses and based on the lower or relatively downthrow lands. It will be seen that the valley of the Shoalhaven River between the Mulwaree and Gourock Blocks on one hand and the Sassafras and Currockbilly Highlands on the other is a rift valley. This will be treated in a future paper. h. General Review of the Faulting—The surface of the plateau in the Wollon- dilly Basin and contiguous areas is broken and diversified by warps and faults. 648 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE WOLLONDILLY RIVER BASIN, In the northern section the edge of the Jenolan Dome and the continuation of the old Blue Mountain Anticline have given more than the general elevation to that part of the plateau. Southwards, the uplift has been produced by normal forces, and the uplifted surface has split along meridional lines giving long faults and narrow fault blocks, one of the faults, Kanangra-Cookbundoon, extending north- wards into the Cox Basin. Going southwards into the Shoalhaven area and the country around Lake George the number of faults increases, giving rise to meridional horsts and rift valleys. Still further to the south the country rises into the Canberra, Kosciusko and Currockbilly Highlands, where the faulting has been more intense and the number of faults is still greater. In the Wollondilly area blocks of the plateau surface which have been raised above the general level by local uplift are bounded on their northern or southern sides, as the case might be, by east-west warps or faults. Norwood Warp and a warped surface to the north of Sassafras Range are examples. Slight warping has also taken place in the Lake George Basin. On the Pacific side the line of the eastern coast represents a major fault line. Behind this the Nepean Ramp has the form of a syncline. Streams of the Area. Most of the notable features of the valleys in which the Wollondilly and its tributaries flow have already been noted, but several points remain to be con- sidered. Taylor and Woolnough (1906) postulated a common line of flow for the Wollondilly and the Upper Shoalhaven, and breaking up of the stream line by reason of the capture of the Lower by the Upper Shoalhaven. I hope to discuss this question in a future paper on the Shoalhaven, and so will not commit myself on the matter at present. In considering the streams of this area it may be laid down as a fairly definite rule that the stream systems arranged materially as at present existed at the end of the Tertiary period. Since then continuous uplift has allowed streams to become entrenched in their old courses, and subsequent change of course has been the exception rather than the rule. It is necessary to go back into the Tertiary period in order to discuss the origin of the modern drainage. The streams to the east of the Middle Wollondilly have a typically normal flow over plains, their shape conforming to the “branching tree” pattern. In the western part of the area this is certainly not the case, and two modifying factors suggest themselves—the presence of Tertiary basalt and extensive faulting. To this latter cause the line of the Middle Cookbundoon and Bannaby Creek may be ascribed. Both these streams flow northwards parallel to, a little to the east of, the modern fault scarp. The Upper Wollondilly also shows the influence of faulting. Parallel to the Cookbundoon Fault we have the course of the Middle Wollondilly, situated on the western edge of the Shoalhaven Plateau. The presence of faulting, or a single fault as postulated previously by Taylor (1911), as existing during the Tertiary period, with a downthrow side to the east, added to the prevailing meridional rock strike, would naturally cause the formation of north-south streams, irrespective of original lines of drainage. 'To this complex cause I assign the meridional tendency of the streams of the Western Wollondilly (Text-fig. 3). BY F. A. CRAFT. 649 The headwaters of the Abercrombie and Tuglow Rivers, splayed against the Main Divide, also suggest that the original Wollondilly system, to the east, ended sharply against a north-south scarp, and the westward-flowing rivers extended into the present basins of the Tuglow and Middle Wollondilly. This theory implies that a divide between the eastward and westward flowing streams has been maintained approximately in the position of the present Main Divide over long periods of geological time by the continual elevation of land in this area. Such a state of affairs is indicated by the greatly disproportionate lengths of the two series of streams, even after allowing for a considerable area of recently-lost land to the east of the present coast, and also by the marvellous complexity of the streams to the west of the Main Divide. The courses of these streams have been determined before the beginning of the modern uplifts since the close of the Tertiary period, and must have taken long ages to evolve. Compared to the most complex stream system of such areas, the Cox and Wollon- dilly Basins are relatively simple. The effect of volcanic activity and the extrusion of lavas upon stream flow is a very difficult one to handle at all satisfactorily. The line of basalt along the Main Divide appears to indicate ancient stream courses, and the presence of forked and parallel head tributaries of certain eastward-flowing streams such as Taralga, ‘Myrtle and Kerrawary Creeks in all probability indicates the former existence of valleys along these lines, which were filled with basalt, causing the splitting of the original streams, which need not have flowed in their present direction. An assumption that the more or less continuous line of basalts on or near the Main Divide between Gurrunda and Shooter’s Hill represents the channel of a major stream is unsatisfactory, because of the greatly differing thickness of the basalt at various places, but more especially on account of the presence of ancient westward-flowing streams immediately to the west. The Wollondilly and Cook- bundoon stream lines certainly run perpendicular to the courses of these western streams, but a definite reason for this arrangement—faulting—may be advanced. There is no such apparent reason in the case of an assumed stream following the course of the Main Divide for long distances, and draining to the north or south. In conclusion, therefore, it may be stated that the meridional tendency of the main streams on the western side of the Wollondilly Basin is due to long- continued faulting. This anomalous drainage has not been greatly affected by the pouring out of Late Tertiary lavas. Basalt lines on or near the present Main Divide represent old stream courses which flowed directly into the westward- flowing streams, and did not constitute a single main stream. With regard to the development of meandering courses by many of the principal streams of the area, especially the Wollondilly, the present floors of many of their valleys are flat, or have been flat and are being dissected by the present cycle of erosion. These would favour the development of meandering courses. In the case of such flat-bottomed valleys as that of the Middle Wollon- dilly, it is seen that the greatest meanders are developed where these almost straight valleys are widest, and have a minimum depth. Meanders could be formed quite readily under existing conditions, or under conditions that have existed in the immediate past. It is not necessary to suppose that the meandering courses of such streams as the Wollondilly and Cookbundoon have been inherited from the Tertiary peneplain. This also applies to the streams of the Eastern Wollondilly Basin, such as the Wingecarribee. To the west of the Divide the prevailing highly complex streams are certainly more ancient than those further east. ; 650 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE WOLLONDILLY RIVER BASIN, As regards the course of the Wollondilly in the vicinity of Murruin Elbow, I have previously suggested that the Upper Wollondilly and the Kowmung at one time formed a common stream line, which has been subsequently split up by capture, the Lower Wollondilly being the pirate stream. It is also possible that there has been no capture in this section, but the highly abnormal drainage of the Yerranderie district is due to the deflection of the courses of the Wollon- dilly by the presence of the highly resistant mass of syenite to the south of Yerranderie. The fact that the streams flowing in all directions to the Wollon- dilly in this section have mature valleys along their upper courses (Text-tig. 5), and the possibility of the meanders of the Upper Wollondilly having been formed in the mature plateau valley since the inception of the modern uplifts would appear to support this idea. Conclusion. : This study of the plateau regions shows that the uplifted peneplain surface of the Wollondilly Basin has been raised to its present elevation in stages, the oldest uplifts indicated being those in the north (Blue Mountain Anticline). The forces causing the uplift have been normal in character, and have given rise to broad warps and meridional faults. It is probable that the uplifts to the north, already referred to, and those to the south, over the Shoalhaven Basin and the™ coastal area south of Nowra, began at much the same time, and the more southerly uplift has extended northwards to give such features as the Nepean Ramp and the Kowmung Warp. Stream change before and during the period of basalt flows is indicated, but the position of the Main Divide would appear to have remained approximately constant over long periods of time. As with the Cox River Basin the geology, as far as known, would appear to indicate that the western side of the area has been an area of relative uplift since Devonian time, whilst the eastern section has been relatively depressed, giving rise to the Triassic and Permo-Carboniferous Systems. References. ANDREWS, E. C., 1910.—Geographical Unity of Hastern Australia. Proc. Roy. Soe. N.S.W., xliv, 420. Crart, F. A., 1928.—The Physiography of the Cox River Basin. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Iti, Tevet Bi BOTs JENSEN, H. J., 1908.—Some Geological Notes on the Country behind Jervis Bay. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xiii, 296. TayLor, T. G., 1903.—The Geology of Mittagong. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xxxvii. —, 1907.—The Lake George Senkungsfeld, a study of the evolution of Lakes George and Bathurst, N.S.W. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxxii, Part 2. ,1910.—The Physiography of the proposed Federal Territory at Canberra. Bulletin 6, Commonwealth Meteorological Bureau. ,1911.—The Physiography of Eastern Australia. Bulletin 8, Commonwealth Meteorological Bureau. , 1923.—The Warped Littoral around Sydney. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., lvii, 58. WooLNouGH, W. G., and Taytor, T. G., 1906.—A Striking Example of River Capture in the Coastal District of N.S.W. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxx, Part 3. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XGXeXTX. Block Diagram of the Wollondilly Basin. A low plateau is crossed by residual ridges and faults. On the northern side it gives place to higher and more broken land. Streams are gradually cutting deep canyons in the level surfaces of an uplifted peneplain, and trenching the older and more mature valleys. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, No. xviii. By J. R. MALLOcH. (Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) [Read 28th November, 1928.] A PRELIMINARY CATALOGUE OF AUSTRALIAN TACHINIDAE. An essential prerequisite to work upon any group is a catalogue of the already described species belonging thereto. Realizing this and being well aware of the difficulties attendant upon obtaining access to many of the older works in which the Australian Tachinidae have been described, I assume that the preliminary catalogue of species presented herein will prove of value to anyone who intends to undertake any work upon the group, be it either merely the identification of a few species or a complete revision of the family. I have had the manuscript for some time and two or three years ago promised the late Dr. E. W. Ferguson that I would publish it in this series of papers, but until now have not had the time to go over the records again. I have exercised some care in my endeavour to make the list complete, but do not make the claim that I have entirely succeeded in this, and I have not attempted to include all of the references to the species in the papers quoted, only the principal descriptive matter being included as a rule, though I have tried to include all new generic references. j It will be seen that there is quite an array of species included, but it is not to be assumed that all names standing in this list as apparently valid species are in that category. I have not attempted to synonymize species, except where previous workers have already done so, but I know many of the included names will have to be sunk as synonyms of previously described forms appearing in the catalogue. The work of weeding out such synonyms can only be done by someone who will undertake a comprehensive study of the family, and definite identifications will usually depend upon an examination of the type specimens of the species. Alphabetical Catalogue of genera and species. I. Genus Acephana Townsend. 1. rubrifrons Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 85 (Masicera); Townsend, Canad. Ent., 48, 1916, 153. Tasmania. Genus not seen by describer. II. Genus Actia Robineau-Desvoidy. 2. eucosmae Bezzi, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 9, xvii, 1926, 239. Queensland. 3. fergusoni Bezzi, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 48, pt. 4, 1923, 657. (Subgenus Schizotachina) = Schizactiana Curran. N.S.W. 4. valida Curran, Hnt. Mitt., 16, No. 5, 1927, 336 (Subgenus Schizactiana). Queensland. Ill. Genus Alophora Robineau-Desvoidy. 5. auriventris Curran, Bull. Ent. Research, xviii, 1927, 165. Queensland. IV. Genus Amenia Robineau-Desvoidy. 6. dubitalis Malloch, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 52, pt. 3, 1927, 343. N.S.W. 7. imperialis Robineau-Desvoidy, Essai sur Myod., 1830, 443-4. Australia. N 652 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XViii, 8. leonina (Fabricius), Syst. Ent., 1775, 776; Ent. Syst., iv, 1794, 318; Syst. Anil, 1805, 290 (Musca); Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. iv (2), 1851, 195 (Ptylostylum albomaculatum). Australia. 9. parva Schiner, Novara Reise, Diptera, 1868, 316. N.S.W. 9a. stictica Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 114 (418). Australia. Nomen nuduin. 10. varia Walker, Ins. Saund., Dipt., 1852, 342 (Musca). Genus doubtful. §S. Aust. V. Genus Amphibolia Macquart. 11. speciosa Erichson, Arch. f. Naturges., 1842, vol. 2, p. 273, 254. Australia. 12. valentina Macquart, Dipt. Exot., ii, pt. 3, 1843, 279-80; Guérin, Rev. Zool., 6, 1843, 272, as fulvipes; Townsend, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 49, 1916, 618 (Huamphi- bolia, n. gen.). Australia. VI. Genus Amplipila Curran. 13. versicolor Curran, Ent. Mitt., 16, No. 6, 1927, 446. Queensland. VII. Genus Anagonia Brauer and von Bergenstamm. 14. spylosioides Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 37. Tasmania. VIII. Genus Anamastax Brauer and von Bergenstamm. 15. goniaeformis Macquart, Dipt. EHxot., Suppl. i, 1845, 157 (Blepharipeza) ; Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 45. Tasmania. IX. Genus Aprotheca Macquart. 16. rufipes Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv (2), 1851, 149. Not seen by Brauer and von Bergenstamm, but referred by them to the Micropalpus group. Tasmania. X. Genus Apsophana Townsend. 17. rufifacies Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 87 (Masicera); Townsend, Canad. Ent., 48, 1916, 153. Tasmania. Genus not seen by describer. XI. Genus Austrophryno Townsend. 18. densa Walker, Ins. Saund., Diptera, 1852, 288 (Tachina); Townsend, Canad. Ent., 48, 1916, 160. N.S.W. Genus not seen by describer. XII. Genus Ballardia Curran. 19. pallipes Curran, Buli. Ent. Research, xviii, 1927, 166. Queensland. XIII. Genus Carcelia Robineau-Desvoidy. 20. tasmanica Robineau-Desvoidy, Hist. Nat. Dipt., 1, 1863, 240. Says that it was labelled Phorocera scutellaris Macquart by Macquart. Tasmania. XIV. Genus Catharosia Rondani. 21. varicolor Curran, Bull. Ent. Research, xviii, 1927, 165. Queensland. XV. Genus Chaetophthalmus Brauer and von Bergenstamm. 22. bicolor Macquart, Dipt. EHxot., Suppl. iii, 1847, 204 (Micropalpus); Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 79 (383). Australia. 23. brevigaster Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. i, 1845, 149 (Wicropalpus); Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 79 (383); Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 156 (Nemoraea); Macquart, id., Suppl. v, 1855, 181. ? (Ochromyia nudistylum). Tasmania, Australia. ; 24. ruficeps Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 89 (Myobia); Brauer, Site. Akad. Wiss., cvi, 1897, 335. Tasmania. 25. similis Walker, Ins. Saund., Diptera, p. 266 (Tachina); Austen, Ann. Mag. NIGUEL Sie) (SCVa gp XX LO ONES o OHNE SAWa 26. tenuisetosa Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1891, 90 (Myobia); Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., cvi, 1897, 334. Tasmania, Australia. XVI. Genus Chetogaster Macquart. 27. violacea Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, p. 198. Not seen by Brauer. Australia. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 653 XVII. Genus Chlorogaster Macquart. 28. rufipes Schiner, Novara Reise, Diptera, 1868, 323; Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., i, 1889, 29 (97); ii, 1891, 37 (3841); iii, 1893, 35 (123), C. rufipes Macquart. New Zealand (Schiner), Australia (B. & B.). 29. tasmanensis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 157. Tasmania. XVIII. Genus Chlorodexia Townsend. 30. froggatiii Townsend, Canad. Ent., 48, 1916, 154. N.S.W. XIX. Genus Chlorotachina Townsend. 31. flaviceps Macquart, Dipt. Hzot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 158 (Chrysosoma) ; Townsend, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 28, 1921, 21. Australia. XX. Genus Chrysopasta Brauer and von Bergenstamm. 32. versicolor Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., i, 1891, 171. Australia. XXI. Genus Crypsina Brauer and von Bergenstamm. 33. prima Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Muse. Schiz., i, 1889, 29 (97). Australia. Doubtfully referred to Platytania, l.c., iii, 1893, 34 (122). XXII. Genus Degeeria Meigen. 34. australis Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 84. Possibly a Phorocera. Tasmania. 35. lateralis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 176. Oceania? Genus doubtful. XXIII. Genus Demoticus Macquart. 36. certima Curran, Ent. Mitt., 16, No. 5, 1927, 351. Queensland. XXIV. Genus Dexia Meigen. 37. appendiculata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 202. Tasmania. Genus doubtful. 37a. hyria Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 843. Adelaide. Genus doubtful. 38. notata Walker, Insec. Saund., Diptera, 1852, 309. N.S.W. Genus doubtful. 39. tessellata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 202. Says it may be female of next species. 40. testaceicornis Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 201. Genus doubt- ful in both cases. XXYV. Genus Doddiana Curran. 41. pallens Curran, Ent. Mitt., 16, No. 5, 1927, 353. Queensland. XXVI. Genus Hrythronychia Brauer and von Bergenstamm. 42. australensis Schiner, Novara Reise, Diptera, 1868, 325 (Demoticus); Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 56 (360). New Zealand (Schiner and B. & B.), Australia? (B. & B.). Genus Euamphibolia Townsend. Proc. U.S. National Museum, 49, 1916, 618. Synonym of Amphibolia. XXVII. Genus Huphasia Townsend. 43. picta Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., iii, p. 12 (100), 122 (210) (Neophasia); Townsend, Smiths. Misc. Coll., 51, No. 1803, 1908, p. 76. Western Australia. XXVIII. Genus Hurigaster Macquart. 44. lateralis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., ii, pt. 3, 1843. Australia. Genus doubtful. XXIX. Genus Eurygastropsis Townsend. 45. tasmaniae Walker, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., n.s. iv, 1857, 197 (Hurigaster) ; Austen, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, xix, 1907, 331, gen. n.; Townsend, Canad. Ent., 48, 1916, 158. Tasmania. This genus was erected by Townsend without access to specimens and merely from printed notes by Austen. 654 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XViii, XXX. Genus Hustacomyia Malloch. 46. breviseta Malloch, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 52, pt. 3, 1927, 337. N.S.W. XXXI. Genus Exechopalpus Macquart. 47. rujipalpus Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 92; Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., Cvii, 1898, 510, cites the genus. as near Genea and spathipalpus in the Pyrrhosia group. Australia. XXXII. Genus Hxzorista Meigen. 48. auriceps Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 158. Oceania? 49. dispar Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 159. Wastern Australia. XXXIII. Genus Formosia Guérin. 50. atribasis Walker, Proc. Linn. Soc., 5, 1860, 288. Australia. syn. pretiosa Snell. v. Vollen., Verslag. Med. K. Akad. Witensch., 15, 18638, 15. syn. smaragdifera Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France, 1874, 462. 51. callipygus Gerstacker, Stett. Ent. Zeit., 21, 1860, 178. Australia. syn. saturatissima Walker, Proc. Linn. Soc., 5, 1860, 287. 52. chrysame Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. 4, 1849, 866. Australia. Genus doubtful. 53. flavipennis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1843, 50. Australia. 54. hypsa Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. 4, 1849, 866, locality unknown; Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France, ser. 5, iv, 1874, 458 (Formosia). Sydney. 55. mirabilis Guérin, Voy. Coquille, Zool. ii, (2) (1), 1832, 297 (Musca); Guérin, Icon. Rég. anim., Ins. iii, 1843, 551, Pl. 102, fig. 5. Australia. syn. plumicornis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., ii, pt. 3, 1848, 239 (Rutilia). syn. fervens Walker, Proc. Linn. Soc., 5, 1860, 288. New Guinea. 56. moneta Gerstacker, Stett. Ent. Zeit., 21, 1863, 200. Australia. XXXIV. Genus Froggattimyia Townsend. 57. hirta Townsend, Canad. Ent., 48, 1916, 155. N.S.W. XXXV. Genus Gerotachina Townsend. 58. obtusa Walker, Ins. Saund., Diptera, 1852, 274 (Tachina); Austen, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, xix, 1907, 330 (Microtropeza?). Townsend, Canad. Ent., 48, 1916, 152. N.S.W. syn. stolida Walker, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., n.s. 4, 1857, 195 (Hchinomyia). XXXVI. Genus Gonia Meigen. 59. milias Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 799. Probably not this genus. Australia. XXXVII. Genus Gymnosoma Meigen. 60. rotundata Meigen. Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 97, says an individual from Tasmania is exactly like the European species, but there is reason to suspect this identification. XXXVIII. Genus Heterometopia Macquart. 61. analis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1847, 182. Tasmania. 62. argentea Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845, 170; Hardy, Rec. Austr. Mus., xiii, No. 5, 1922, 198. Redescription. Tasmania; N.S.W. 63. nitida Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845, 190 (Omalogaster); Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., cviii, 1899, 505, places it as probably a Heterometopia. Tasmania (Mcq.), N.S.W. (Brauer). é 64. rufipalpis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 90; Brauer and von Bergen- stamm, Musc. Schiz., i, 1889, 67 (185); ii, 1891, 69 (373). Australia. XXXIX. Genus Hyalomyia Robineau-Desvoidy. 65. rufiventris Macquart, Dipt. Ezot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 188. Possibly not this genus. Tasmania. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 655 XL. Genus Hyleorus Aldrich. 66. furcatus Aldrich, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., lii, 1926, 17. Queensland. XLI. Genus Masicera Macquart. 67. auriceps Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 168. Tasmania. 68. argenticeps, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 166. Oceania? 69. caesiofasciata Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 165. Hast Coast of Australia. 70. consanguinea Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 167. Oceania? 71. similis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 168. Tasmania. 72. simplex Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 87; Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., evi, 1897, 337, says this appears the same as M. oblonga Mcq., but it hardly appears probable to me that it is so. 73. varipes Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. i, 1845, 163. Tasmania. XLII. Genus Mesembrinomintho Townsend. 74. compressa Townsend, Canad. Ent., 48, 1916, 159. A dexiine with long haired arista, and strong bristles on disc and apex of each tergite from 2 to 4 inclusive. Hamilton, Queensland. XLIII. Genus Microceromasia Villeneuve. 75. sphenophori Villeneuve, Wien. Ent. Zeit., 30, 1911, 82. A widespread Old World species which has been introduced into Australia. Although the species appears as Ceromasia sphenophori in the paper in which it was originally described, a new genus is erected for its reception in the paragraph immediately above the species description. XLIV. Genus Micropalpus Macquart. 76. concavicornis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 146. Probably not this genus. East Coast of Australia. 77. pilifacies Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2. 1851, 146. Probably not this genus. Hast Coast of Australia. 78. vittatus Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845, 150. Possibly a Chaetophthalmus (B. & B.). Tasmania. XLV. Genus Microtropesa Macquart. 79. sinuata Donovan, Epit. N.H. Ins. New Holland, etc., Hym.-Dipt., 1798 (Musca) ; Wiedemann, Auss. Zweifl. Ins., ii, 1830, 384 (Musca); Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845, 186. Australia. : syn. nigricornis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 199. XLVI. Genus Myiotrixa Brauer and von Bergenstamm. 80. prosopina Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., iii, 1893, 8 (96). Western Australia. ‘ XLVII. Genus Nemoraea Robineau-Desvoidy. 81. brevisetosa Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845, 154. Possibly not this genus. Tasmania. 82. erythropus Walker, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., n.s. v, 1860, 298. Possibly not this genus. Tasmania. 83. nitidiventris Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 155. Possibly not this genus. Hast Coast of Australia. XLVIII. Genus Ochromyia Macquart. flavipennis Macquart, Dipt. Exzot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 218, nec Macquart, I.c., li, pt. 3, 1843, 291. Tasmania. This name has no standing, being a homonym of the second one listed above which is from Brazil. 84. hyalipennis Macquart, Hist. Nat. Dipt., ii, 1834, 250. Genus doubtful; reported as a Palpostoma. Tasm. 656 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVIii, 85. nigricornis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 218. Hast Coast of Australia. XLIX. Genus Ocyptera Latreille. 86. diversa Walker, Ins. Saund., Diptera, 1852, 262. Generic location doubtful. Tasmania. L. Genus Ocypteropsis Townsend. 87. bicolor Bigot, Bull. Soc. ent. France, 1885, p. lv (Glossidionophora). Australia. I do not know what the status of Glossidionophora is. 88. bimacula Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 694 (Ocyptera). Tasmania. 89. flavifrons Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 187 (Ocyptera) ; Towns- end, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xlix, 1916, 630. Australia, Tasmania. 90. tristis Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France, ser. 5, viii, 1878, 45 (Ocyptera); Brauer, Site. Akad. Wiss., cvii, 1898, 493 (Ocyptera). Australia. LI. Genus Omalogaster Macquart. 91. brevipalpis Macquart, Dipt. Ezot., Suppl. i, 1845, 189. Genus doubtful. Tasmania. 92. limbineuris Macquart, Dipt. Ezot., Suppl. i, 1845, 189. Genus doubtful. Tasmania. LII. Genus Palia Curran. 93. aureocauda Curran, Ent. Mitt., 16, No. 6, 1927, 444. Queensland. Lill. Genus Paliana Curran. 94. basalis Curran, Ent. Mitt., 16, No. 6, 1927, 445. Queensland. 95. intensa Curran, Ent. Mitt., 16, No. 6, 1927, 446. Queensland. LIV. Genus Palpostoma Robineau-Desvoidy. 96. apicalis Malloch, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 52, pt. 3, 1927, 339. N.S.W. 97. desvoidyi Aldrich, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 62, art. 11, 1922, 5. N. Queensland. 98. flava Coquillett, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1900, 390 (Myiophasia); Aldrich, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 62, art. 11, 1922, 4; Townsend, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 28, 1915, 22 (Opsophasiops); Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst., 1915, 111 (as P. testacea R.-D.). Tasmania. ; 99. testacea Robineau-Desyoidy, Essai Myod., 1830, 429. Australia. LV. Genus Parabrachelia Townsend. 100. rufipes Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 86 (Masicera); Townsend, Canad. Ent., 48, 1916, 159. Tasmania. Genus erected without access to specimens and from descriptions only. Brauer’s notes (Sitz. Akad. Wiss., cvi, 1897, 339) form the basis of Townsend’s generic name in this case and in the case of other genera erected in the paper cited in this paragraph. LVI. Genus Paraeupogona Townsend. 101. oblonga Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 86 (Masicera); Brauer, Site. Akad. Wiss., cvi, 1897, 338 (gen. n.); Townsend, Canad. Ent., 48, 1916, 157. Tasmania. See note under previous species. LVII. Genus Paramenia Brauer and von Bergenstamm. 102. macularis Walker, Proc. Linn. Soc., iii, 1857, 104 (Musca). Aru Is. syn. semiauriceps Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., i, 1889, 83 (151). Australia. LVIII. Genus Phorocera Robineau-Desvoidy. 103. acutangulata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iii, 1847, 208; Brauer, Site. Akad. Wiss, cvi, 1897, 347 (Setigena). Genus doubtful. Australia. 104. biserialis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 89; Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., cvi, 1897, 347. Genus doubtful. Tasmania. (Used by Townsend as the genotype of Austrophorocera, gen. n., Canad. Ent., 48, 1916, 157. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 657 105. cilipes Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 88; Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., cvi, 1897, 344. There were two specimens in the Macquart collection, a female with label “Australia” and a male without a label. It is evident that the female, which Brauer refers to the subgenus Ctenophorocera, is the type, the male belonging to a different species, and possibly a distinct genus. 106. flavipalpis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. v, 1855, 122; Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., cvi, 1897, 345. Same group as cilipes. N.S.W. 107. graciliseta Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 88; Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., evi, 1897, 347 (Setigena). Tasmania. 108. grandis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 171. East Coast of Australia. 109. hyalipennis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. v, 1855, 122. Genus doubtful. Adelaide. 110. lateralis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845, 165. Tasmania. 111. maculata Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 173. Hast Coast Australia. 112. mucrocornis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 174. Tasmania. 113. ornata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 172. Tasmania. 114. scutellata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845, 165. Tasmania. 115. subpubescens Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 172. Tasmania. 116. tessellata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845, 165; Brauer, Site. Akad. Wiss., evi, 1897, 345 (Setigena). Tasmania. LIX. Genus Phryno Robineau-Desvoidy. 117. calliphon Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 777 (Tachina); Austen, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, xix, 1907, 338, says the type bears the label “Picton”, but region of origin is doubtful. Possibly not Australian. 118. diversicolor Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 83 (H«xorista); Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., cvi, 1897, 342, says it belongs with Hzorista vetula Meigen, which is a Phryno. Tasmania. LX. Genus Platytainia Macquart. 119. maculata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 179; Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 99 (403); iii, 1893, 147 (235); doubt- fully identified with Crypsina B. & B., but not seen by them. Tasmania. LXI. Genus Platytropesa Macquart. 120. rubriceps Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 197. Oceania? LXII. Genus Polychaeta Macquart. 121. nigra Macquart, Dipt. Haot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 154; Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., iii, 18938, 148 (236), doubtfully refer it to Tritaxys, but not seen by them. Tasmania. LXIII. Genus Prodiaphania Townsend (= Diaphania Macquart preocc.). grisea Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 113 (417). Nomen nudum. Australia. 122. testacea Macquart, Dipt. Exot., ii, pt. 3, 1848, 278; Suppl. i, 1845, 176, refers to Rutilia; Suppl. ii, 94 (Rutilia); Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 198 (Diaphania), restores the genus. Australia, Tasmania. syn. echinomides Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France, ser. 5, iv, 1874, 466 (Formosia). LXIV. Genus Prosena St. Fargeau and Serville. 123. argentata Curran, Ent. Mitt., 16, No. 5, 1927, 348. N. Queensland. 124. bella Curran, Ent. Mitt., 16, No. 5, 1927, 349. N. Queensland. 125. conica Guérin, Voy. Coquille, Zool., ii (2) (1), 18302, 298. Genus uncertain. N.S.W. 658 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XViii, 126. dispar Macquart, Dipt. Evot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 203. Genus uncertain. Tasmania. 127. doddi Curran, Ent. Mitt., 16, No. 5, 1927, 347. Queensland. — 128. dorsalis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 97; Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., cviii, 1899, 507, confirms generic reference. Tasmania. longipes Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 113 (417), 128 (432). Nomen nudum. 129. macropus Thomson, Eugen. Resa, Diptera, 1868, 531. N.S.W. 130. nigripes Curran, Ent. Mitt., 16, No. 5, 1927, 347. N. Queensland. - 131. rufiventris Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 96; Brauer, Site. Akad. Wiss., cviii, 1899, 507, confirms generic reference. Tasmania. 132. vittata Guérin, Voy. Coquille Zool. ii (2) (1), 1830?, 299; Macquart, Dipt. Exot., ii, pt. 3, 1848, 249, suggests that this is the female of conica Guérin on the basis of specimens sent by the describer. N.S.W. LXV. Genus Protomeigenia Townsend. 133. aurea Townsend, Canad. Ent., 48, 1916, 156. NSW. Genus Pseudoformosia Brauer and von Bergenstamm. Musc. Schiz., ii, 1889, 126, syn. of Formosia Guérin. LXVI. Genus Rhinomyiobia Brauer and von Bergenstamm. 134. australis Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., iii, 1893, 52 (140). Australia. 135. flavipes Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 160. Oceania? 136. marginata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 161. Australia. 137. melas Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France, ser. 6, vii, 1887, 256. Tasmania. 138. rufomaculata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 160. Tasmania. 139. translucens Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 162. Tasmania. (Genera doubtful in all cases.) LXVII. Genus Rhynchiodexia Bigot. 140. brevipalpis Rondani, Arch. Zool. Modena, iii, 22 (Dexia). Generic assign- ment made on the basis of statement “Similis D. rubricarinatae Mecq.”, but it may not be congeneric. Australia. 141. longipes Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. i, 1845, 187 (Dexia); Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., eviii, 1899, 507; Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 851 (Dexia longipes var.?). Tasmania; Australia (Walker). 142. punctipennis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845, 187 (Dezia); Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., eviii, 1899, 507. Australia. 143. rubricarinata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845, 187 (Dezia); Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., cviii, 1899, 507. Tasmania; Australia (Brauer). LXVIII. Genus Rutilia Robineau-Desvoidy. ; 144. aditha Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 854 (Rutilia group, Dezvia). Swan River. 145. albopicta Thomson, Hugen. Resa, Dipt., 1868, 529. N.S.W. 146. analoga Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 191; Schiner, Novara Reise, Diptera, 1868, 318. Tasmania; Sydney, N.S.W. (Schiner). 147. argentifera Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France, ser. 5, iv, 1874, 464 (Formosia) ; Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., cviii, 1899, 512; Engel, Zool. Jahrb., 50, 1925, 365. N.S.W.; Queensland (Engel). 148. assimilis Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 192; Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 85 (389); iii, 1898, 88 (176) (Param- phibolia). East Coast of Australia; Tasmania. I have not seen this species and the validity of the genus Paramphibolia is doubtful. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 659 149. barcha Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 857 (Rutilia group, Dexia). Australia. 150. castanipes Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France, ser. 5, x, 1880, 87; Bigot, U.c., 1880, 88 (castanipous); Brauer, Site. Akad. Wiss., cviii, 1899, 512. Australia. 151. decorum Guérin, Rev. Zool., vi, 1848, 266. Australia. syn. dorsomaculatum Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 196 (Grapho- stylum). Tasmania. 152. desvoidyi Guérin, Rev. Zool., 6, 1843, 269; Engel, Zool. Jahrb., 50, 1925, 371. Australia. 153. durvillei Robineau-Desvoidy, Essai Myod., 1830, 321; Macquart, Dipt. Hzot., Suppl. i, 1845, 175, says this is only a variety of desvoidyi Guérin. Australia. 154. erichsoni Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Muse. Schiz., ii, 1891, 418. Swan River; Australia. 155. ethoda Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 856 (Rutilia group, Dexia). Swan River. Not since recognized. 156. flavipes Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., i, 1889, 58 (126); ii, 1891, 125 (429). Australia. Brauer (Site. Akad. Wiss., cviii) in 1899 expressed the opinion that this is a synonym of variegata Macquart, but there is some doubt as to this. 157. formosa Robineau-Desvoidy, Hssai Myod., 1830, 320; Engel, Zool. Jahro., 50, 1925, 361, redescription. Australia. frontosa Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 114 (418). Nomen nudum. Australia. : : 158. fulgida Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. i, 1845, 180. N.S.W. Ranked as a synonym of regalis Guérin by Engel in 1925. 159. fulvipes Guérin, Rev. Zool., vi, 1848, 273. Synonym of Amphibolia speciosa HErichson by Engel, which appears correct. 160. fulviventris Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France, ser. 5, iv, 1874, 465 (Formosia). Tasmania. 161. fuscotestacea Macquart, Dipt. Hzot., Suppl. i, 1845, 178. N.S.W. 162. idesa Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 858. Australia. 163. imperialis Guérin, Rev. Zool., vi, 1843, 265; Engel, Zool. Jahrb., 50, 1925, 364, redescription. Australia. incomparabilis Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 114 (418). Nomen nudum. Australia. 164. inornata Guérin, Rev. Zool., vi, 1843, 268; Engel, Zool. Jahrb., 50, 1925, 369, redescription. Australia. 165. lepida Guérin, Rev. Zool., vi, 1843, 268; Hngel, Zool. Jahrb., 50, 1925, 373, redescription. 166. leucosticta Schiner, Novara Reise, Diptera, 1868, 319; Engel, Zool. Jahro., 50, 1925, 363, redescription. New Zealand, as given by Schiner for this species, is evidently erroneous, as the specimen in the Austrian National Museum is from Australia. syn. variegata Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France, ser. 5, iv, 1874, 461 (Formosia). This synonymy is apparently correct. Australia. 167. media Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845, 182. Tasmania. 168. minor Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845, 182; Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., evili, 1899, 512 (Senostoma); Austen, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, xix, 1907, 345 (gen. n.); Townsend, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., xxviii, 1914, 23 (Wicrorutilia, gen. n.). Tasmania; N.S.W. Townsend did not see this species, and I am unaware of its characteristics so disregard the generic segregation. (6) 660 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVIii, syn. livis Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 882 (Musca), teste Austen, Lc. ; 169. nigrithorax Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 190. Oceania? 170. oblonga Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 92; Brauer, Site. Akad. Wiss., evili, 1899, 511 (Senostoma). Australia. 171. onoba Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus. pt. iv, 1849, 859 (Rutilia group, Dexia). Australia. 172. panthea’ Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 862 (Rutilia group, Dexia). Western Australia. 173. pectoralis Walker, Proc. Linn. Soc., 8, 1865, 114. New Guinea. 174. pellucens Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845, 177; Brauer and von Bergen- stamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 114 (418); Engel, Zool. Jahrb., 50, 1925, 372, redescription. Australia. Schiner’s New Zealand record is probably erroneous, and his reference to the species as a synonym of desvoidyi undoubtedly is wrong. 175. potina Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 857 (Rutilia group, Dexia). Tasmania. 176. pubicollis Thomson, Hugen. Resa, Diptera, 1868, 530. N.S.W. 177. punctum Walker, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., n.s., iv, 1857, 205 (Senostoma?). N.S. W. 178. regalis Guérin, Voy. Coquille, Zool., ii (2) (1), 1830?, 295 (Musca); Ibid., Pl. 21, fig. 1 (Rutilia); Guérin, Rev. Zool., vi, 1843, 265; Engel, Zool. Jahrb., 50, 1925, 370, redescription. Australia. : 179. retusa Fabricius, Hnt. Syst., iv, 1794, 316 (Musca); Wiedemann, Auss. Zweifl., ii, 1830, 420 (Musca); Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 861 (Rutilia group, Dexia). Australia. There is some doubt as to the generic position of this species. 180. rubriceps Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 92. Tasmania. 181. ruficornis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 193 (Diaphania) ; Engel, Zool. Jahrb., 50, 1925, 374 (Senostoma). Australia: Tasmania. syn. flavipes Brauer and von Bergenstamm, see previous citation. Engel places this as a synonym of rujicornis, while Brauer is of the opinion that it may be a synonym of variegata Macquart. ruficornis Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France, ser. 5, x, 1880, 88. Australia (Homonym). 182. sabrata Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 855. Australia. 185. semifulva Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France, ser. 5, x, 1880, 89. Australia. This is evidently the same as ruficornis Bigot and, if a good species, this name will have to be used for the species. 184. setosa Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 94; Suppl. i, 1845, 176 (testacea female). Tasmania. soror Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 114 (418). Nomen nudum. Australia. 185. spinipectus Thomson, Eugen. Resa, Diptera, 1868, 530. N.S.W. 186. spinolae Rondani, Arch. Zool. Modena, iii, 1864, 23. Australia. 187. splendida Donovan, Epit. N.H. Ins. New Holland, ete., Hymen. Dipt., 1798, pl.* (Musca); Guérin, Rev. Zool., vi, 1848, 267; Engel, Zool. Janrb., 50, 1925, 366, redescription. Australia, Tasmania. syn. australasiae Gray (in Griffith), Animal Kingdom Ins., 2, 1832, p. 793. syn. decora Guérin, Rev. Zool., vi, 1843, 266. 188. subtustomentosa Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 191. Tasm. 189. uzita Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 860 (Rutilia group, Dexia). Australia. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 661 190. variegata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 96 (Senostoma). Tasm. 191. velutina Bigot, Ann. Soc. ent. France, ser. 5, iv, 1874, 463 (Formosia), Brauer, Site. Akad. Wiss., cviii, 1899, 509. Tasmania. 192. viridinigra Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845, 179; iv, pt. 2, 1851, 192; Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 114 (418); Engel, Zool. Jahrob., 50, 1925, 372. Tasmania; N.S.W. 193. viriditestacea Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 190; Schiner, Novara Reise, Diptera, 1868, 318, says it is synonym of Jepida Guérin. 194. vittata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. v, 1855, 126. Australia. 195. vivipara Fabricius, Syst. Antl., 1805, 309 (Tachina); Robineau-Desvoidy, Essai Myod., 1830, 321; Engel, Zool. Jahrb., 50, 1925, 371, places it as a synonym of desvoidyi, ignoring the fact that the latter is a subsequent name. Australia, etc. 196. zabrina Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 863 (Rutilia group, Dexia). Western Australia. : LXIX. Genus Semisuturia Malloch. 197. australis Malloch, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 52, pt. 3, 1927, 340. Queensland. Genus Senostoma Brauer and von Bergenstamm (= Rutilia). LXX. Genus Sisyropa Brauer and von Bergenstamm. 198. cinerea Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 42. Rock- hampton, Australia: 199. lata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iii, 1847, 207 (Hxzorista); Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., cvi, 1897, 340. Australia, N.S.W. LXXI. Genus Stilbomyia (Silbomyia) Macquart. 200. costalis Walker, Proc. Linn. Soc., 5, 1861, 159; Engel, Zool. Jahrb., 50, 1925, 350. Australia. 201. opulenta Walker, l.c., 3, 1858, 104. Aru. Is.; Australia? LXXII. Genus Strongygaster Macquart. 202. normalis Curran, Ent. Mitt., 16, No. 5, 1927, 355 (Strongylogaster). Queens- land. 203. sensua Curran, Ent. Mitt., 16, No. 5, 1927, 354 (Strongylogaster). Queens- land. LXXIII. Genus Sumpigaster Macquart. 204. fasciatus Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. v, 1855, 125. Australia. LXXIV. Genus Jachina Meigen. (N.B.—The following species may not be refer- able here). 205. bura Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 760. Tasmania; Aust. 206. coras Walker, J.c., p. 785. Western Australia. 207. despicienda Walker, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond.. u.s., v, 1860, 306; Austen, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, xix, 1907, 331, says that it evidently belongs in section Pyrrhosia B. & B. 208. hebes Walker, Ins. Saund., Dipt., 1852, 289. Tasmania. 209. inusta Wiedemann, Ausser. Zweifl. Ins., ii, 1830, 306. N.S.W. 210. olmus Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 775. Australia. 211. orga Walker, l.c., p. 752. N.S.W. 212. remota Walker, Ins. Saund., Diptera, 1852, 280 (Tachina, Phryno?). N.S.W. 213. similis Walker, lI.c., p. 266. N.S.W. 214. zebina Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 772. India, Ceylon, Burma, Java, Australia. This is a very widely distributed and common species with the following possible synonyms. 662 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XVili, syn. fusciformis Walker, lLc., p. 1161—mutans Walker, Proc. Linn. Soc., v, 1861, 240 (Kurygaster)—amplicans Walker, l.c., iv, 1861, 122 (Nemoraea).—australis Walker, Ins. Saund., Diptera, 1852, 279—cilipes Macquart?, Dipt. Exot., ii, pt. 3, 1843, 219. LXXY. Genus Tasmaniomyia Townsend. 215. viridiventris Macquart, Dipt. Hzot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 84 (Masicera); Towns- end, Canad. Ent., 48, 1916, 152. Tasmania. Species not seen by the author of the genus. Original recorded locality of second description is Egypt, but very probably an error. The species was considered by Brauer to have been described twice by Macquart (Site. Akad. Wiss., evi, 1897, 336), the second time in Supplement iv, part 2, 1851, 163. LXXVI. Genus Teretrophora Macquart. 216. fasciata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 175. Tasmania. LXXVII. Genus Thelairia Robineau-Desvoidy. 217. australis Walker, Ins. Saund., Diptera, 1852, 314 (Demria); Austen, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, xix, 1907, 343. Australia. LXXVIII. Genus Toxocnemis Macquart. ; 218. vittata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. v, 1855, 124. Adelaide, Australia. LXXIX. Genus Thrycolyga Rondani. 219. flaviceps Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 83 (Hzorista); Brauer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss., cvi, 1897, 342 (Tricholyga). Tasmania. LXXX. Genus Trichostylum Macquart. 220. rufipalpis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 182. Hast Coast of Australia. LXXXI. Genus Tritaxys Macquart. 221. heterocera Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. i, 1845 (Gonia); Suppl. ii, 1847, 82 (Tritazys australis). Tasmania. LXXXII. Genus Ugimeigenia Townsend. 222. elzneri Townsend, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 51, 1916; 316. Banks Island. LXXXIII. Genus Ugimyia Rondani. 223. fulviventris Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 165 (Masicera); Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 98 (402) (Crossecosmia). LXXXIV. Genus Verreauxia Robineau-Desvoidy. 224. auripilis Robineau-Desvoidy, Hist. Nat. Dipt., i, 1863, 893. Tasmania. LXXXYV. Genus Winthemia Robineau-Desvoidy. 225. trichopareia Schiner, Novara Reise, Diptera, 1868, 327 (Hzorista); Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 98 (402) (Chaetolyga): Australia. varipes Robineau-Desvoidy, Hist. Nat. Dipt., i, 1863, 543 (Phryno), an ms. species of Macquart’s quoted as Hxorista varipes Mcq.; Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 98 (402) (Chaetolyga), quoted as Eaxorista varipes Meq. Tasmania. LXXXVI. Genus Zita Curran. 226. aureopyga Curran, Ent. Mitt., 16, No. 5, 1927, 351. Queensland. LXXXVII. Genus Zosteromyia Brauer and von Bergenstamm. 227. cingulata Macquart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. iv, pt. 2, 1851, 179 (Myobia); Brauer and von Bergenstamm, Musc. Schiz., ii, 1891, 72 (376). East Coast of Australia, Tasmania, Cape York (B. & B.). LXXXVIII. Genus Zosteromeigenia Townsend. 228. mima Townsend, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 56, 1919, 579. Queensland. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. JPALANISO) OOiTI Doryanthes excelsa. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. PLATE XXXTII. — Se Haifa), Polos iN Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. IDL AUB) SSS aa wpe ¢ rc) *« 5 Greer Route = \ ; = \ = \ ‘s z 9 a Bs % Q j= Manne y ‘\ % \ Ve 3, \e \ as \ %, ‘ Vj \ © Glaal Sage mts bere <4 f y v, t JN ics z > f / Y y | NN. ee :\ = Yi. ean Pine) —~ LD \, COLONELS MT» ZI f \ = < = . ) a 1 \ a | \ y ina \ | ce) LAR SS \ ST LEGEND CAINOZOIC [Tenth tae sod td poet ee er : PALAEOZOIC PERMIAN (Die Measees snd Marne sede CARBONIFEROUS ~ & muscee cRECK B05 -\ "=H >. 2 Wolraae Stage of Si a ¢ + ~ J BOUTANS Ck T)aurTun 6 Semies {han tals sed wdemenls Sone of hak am gel ESpunwor serves Limes both medline and eusiansl lve flows yauers fp] NOTE Navy cht the Kur rome Seite ave appapnaty weerded wr lbe map. Heights infest aber wa kel arr gir thes #609 SKELETAK was PLATE XXXIX. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1928. Y CAI SS Yj; \ SN a pe UN Y ITI 2 Sy Tin» 7f{\ = al] Wombeyan Caves Abercrombie R- Bolong R. Crookwell Cookbundoon R. Wollondilly R. Mulwaree Ck. Goulburn / PIE re SIE ff ‘ IN J Yr a7 / Moss Vale WY, SA acd oq a ex TIN Wy %, ISs Niy q IS [fh SS ( SF Q\' “4/ ay La aS VME Wns UW YA AS, SSN NASSS a . // y CpG Y= AZZ X ae ANOLLOND LLLY- SSS " i # A EER Se >> » wok Taeaeg ~ Se a = 2 Sapa ee. x - OTE Rt A MN At OD, * Se laa a st on SO : - — a ik eh ws (Issued 16th April, 1928.) PROCEEDINGS LINNEAN SOCIETY New SoutH WALES FOR THE YEAR 1928. Part I (Pages 1-£LLiV) CONTAINING THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ANNUAL MEETING. SYDNEY: i PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY THE AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO., LTD., Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney, and SOLD BY THE SOCIETY. 1928. PRICE 2/-. Agent in Hurope: Messrs. DuLAu & Co., 32. Old Bond Street, London, W.1. BN ae ee — 1928. ae 6 Anderson, M. A., D. Se. E. C. ‘Andrews, B.A, F-G.S. CNIS Browne, D ISG 2S sy Professor A. N. Burkitt M. B., B. Sc. Re H. Cambage, C.B.E.,- F. L. Ss. = an i Carter, B.A., F.E.S. a E.. Cheel. is NS Sir T. Ww. Edgeworth David, KB. E., ‘cy M.G., D.S.O.,. B.A.,-D.Se., cis B.S. Storie Dixson, . MB. ae c a : : r 28th March, ao Peta es Sess aaa Presidential Address, os the late Professor Elections S os Vice-Presidents @) and Hon. Treasurer ae be “electe at @ XXXili. ‘1OINSBAL], "WOR "8e61 ‘Arenuer y16 ‘AoupAS “LOFIPNV "826T ‘Areniqeyq Ig ‘Aoupsg ‘ASQOHYALVM 'V YD 6 SL tP8'cs 6 8 3r8's DS F 0 0 0S9°Sts 0 0 O08s‘9s 0 0 O&S 0 0 OFs‘s P's 3 ‘Vd0Ud ‘LNGWAVY “H W ‘poonpoid serjtimoeg ‘4091100 punoy pue poulWexy 6 SI GP8'°ss Gi OT S9LT oe oe e. se o- *. oe oe o/V [B19me4y) “cc 0 0 0gs . oe Cary ee ae eo oe oe ee o/V Te11deg é G7 € PL ee. ee o. oe oe . ee SeIpIsqns SMOTION “sé 4yselejuy, A LT 6L 690'T a Rate SMOTIOA ABSPOVIT WeouUUIT JO solleles Oj, DS F | ‘S.LOUSSV "226L “Aequisseq 3SLE pepuy uweaA "LNNODOV AWOONI 0 0 0g9°Sts esBs1IOJN WO SuvoT seinjueqed “—M°S'N O20? OGIO Se Se pestjeiides oeuloouy snidang SuUBOT YIIPOMUOUTUIOD 0 0 o00;scg “°° eaysent WM JIG Aq poyvenbeq JUuNOUTY mo) “Ss ¥ SULLITIGVIT "Z26L “Wequisseqd 3s1¢ 72 LAAHS AONV IVE "LNNOOOV SdIHSMO11S4 AVAIOVW NVANNIT “SCOE ‘Arenues yi6 ‘Aoupsg ‘JOPIPNY ‘861 ‘Adeniqey Wg ‘AoupéS “TINSBOLT, WORT “Vd0u ‘LNGWAVY "HW, ASNOHUMLVM “V DX ‘poonpoid seratimoeg yOO1100 PUNO puUe PoTLIMEXy ¥ 8: C6L'LS Vii8 COL ts k 9 OT P6LL ee 5 ec) ee os *- oe 8261 09 souRrleg ee , 0 0 9 oe ss ar oe oe ae =. Piso ie 810 F210) Ajyleg “ 0 9T GGL oe o. ee ee . oe oe e. =. 189 I9qUT ce i Z G 88 . s eo. oo. s. inky oe ee oe ee sostodxmy ee v-ST 680°T Beeplex ss Seats fy Les Tees enema ses 9261 wo1j souRled Aq a ered ES: GR OE tee aR ORS rea RS Ge SeseM pue selle[eg OL A eras eo Me Dib eo: "2261 ‘laquisceq 381g papuy wesA "“LNNODOV AWOONI SHOT POLGTR 9 9T P61 STS 9 91 76s = ——— | G GE 8er et Yue SsUlAeg JUSUUIOAOD 9 9T P6OTT Bohan eG een, LZ6T ‘teqmieseq 3STEg 7B 0/yY SsuODUT L £P- 99% AULD) SULYUSA [VIDLOULMOD :Y4seO 0 0 000% RS caR ener oe fos PoOst[eIdeo SMLOOUT po,e[NuUINdIYy 0 0 O008°FT : suBvOoT TWIPOMUOWULOD 0 0 000°@T ae eer eno cin UM IIS Aq poy}eenbeq JUuNOUYy D's 5 DoS F DS! F SLHSSV | SULLVITGAVIT XXXIV. < L . = "226. ‘Aequieceq 4s1¢ 78 LAAHS AONV IVa "LNNOOOV ADO1OldsaLOVa otc=> fi Vol. LIT. (Issued 15th May, 1928.) 1p No. 216. J Part 2. PROCEEDINGS LINNEAN SOCIETY OF New SoutH WALES FOR THE YEAR 1928. Part Il (Pages 1-150.) CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN MARCH-APRIL. With fourteen plates. [Plates i-xiv.] SYDNEY: PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY THE AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO., LTD., Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney, 2 and SOLD BY THE SOCIETY. 1928. PRICE 8/6. Agent in Hurope: -Messrs. Duzavu & Co., 32 Old Bond Street, London, W.1. fi aie Rees Vice wansiaeniee (s : a ns ; A RE Cambaes CBB, RLS) ) 3 202? he Hamilton. gee H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E:S. oe fa Bs A. a Basset “Hull. a a Hon. Riese G. A. “Waterhouse, D ce Se. en PE S. 1-5] iS hice : : ‘Counci ell: se . -C, Anderson, M.A., D.Sc. - W. W. Froggatt, F. aa E. C. Andrews, B.A., F.G.S. GME, |Goldminehy 94 tas : W. R. Browne, D.Sc. ASG. Hamiltomiep, 2 ess Professor A. N. Burkitt M.B.. B.Sc. A Ry Basset tulle {oo = 7 -—=s«&R. H. Cambage, C.B.E., F.LS. A. H. S. Lucas, M.A., B.Se. -H. J. Carter, B.A. F.E.S. I. M. Mackerras, M.B., Ch.M., BSc = Wj. Cheel. A. J. Nie holson, M.Sc. sir T. W. Edgeworth. David, K.B.E., A. -B. Walkom, D.Sc. a: C.M.G., D.S.O., B.A., D.Sc. F.R.S. H.S. H. Wardlaw, D.Sc. T. Storie Dr, M.B., Ch. Miswate. nt AG A. Waterhouse, Bee, BEL, Pr. ie * Bs ? ve Auditor: BR. ‘#. Rayment, F.CP.A. 16 College Street, syaney, at the following prices: — * os j FIRST (pe ie Proceedings for 1882, Vol. VII.—Part 1, 7s. 64.; Part 2, 1 : Proceedings for 1888, Vol. VIII.—Part wy LOs.5, Part a4 5 c - . Proceedings for 1884, Vol. IX. —Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, (12s Part 3 Wa Proceedings for 1885, Vol. X. -—Part alg HERR 2, Ts. 6a.; ‘Pa Pea: 17s. 6d. - f ; SPINAL ; i Fuk “eB ye ‘eh ¥ _ SECOND SERIES. Proceedings for 1886, Vol. I—Part dy 10s. 64.5 Part 2, 128,; Part 12s. 6d. : 5s aah '. Proceedings for 1887, Vol. II. —Part. 1, 18.5 Part Oe Ags ¢ 3 Part 3, Gb sO Proceedings for 1888, Vol. Iil.—Part eed OSes: Part 2, £1. 4s.; Part 3,-£ Proceedings for 1889, Vol. 1V.—Part 1, ils.; Part 2, i6s.; 3 Part 3, 19 Proceedings for 1890, Vol. V.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2, 9s.; ‘Part 3, 9s.; P ce Proceedings for 1891, Vol. Marae oi ils 108s5: Be 2, 9s. 64.5 Part 3, Ts. 6d. ; ; 3 Seexhens Proceedings for Vit. —Part i és. 6a. Part oe As. 64.5. Part-2, 8s, Proceedings for me Proceedings for eas oj ae ie 5; Part 2, “1es.; P Part 3, 10s.; Bare ‘e 10s. 6d. a) Part 2, 10s, Ga.5 Part 3, Aus 6d.; Part 4, 17s. 6d. see Date 1 ith Supplement, 7s. Part a See Part x ‘12s. 64.; ith Supplement, 10s. 6d. — S for 1906.—Part 1, 12s. 6d.; Part ya ‘12s. 6d.; Part 35 “12s. 64.5 Part 4, 15s. for 1907. —Part 1, 8s.; Part oye 8s. 60.5 ‘Part 33° 15s.; ; Part 4, 18s. le —Part lied Sex Part 2, 9s.; Part 2) 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. : Pt eioees Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. for 1910. Bas A; ll1s.; ; Part re Biss; 3 Panis 3; Bsc: ;sPart 4, 12s.°6d. |, for 1911.—Part 1} 9s. 6d.; Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s. for 1912, —Part TRS ISE 6d.; ‘Part 2, 258.5 Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. s for 1 1913. —Part al 148.5 © Part 2, qs. 6d.; Part 3, 6s.3 Part 4, 13s. s for 1914. —Part Hy 18s.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 25s.; Part 4,.19s. r 19 tls 178.5 Part 2, 12s, 6d.; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, 11s. rt-1, 10s.; ; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 15s.5-Part <4, 19s. Ba be dfs; ; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. ; t 1, 20s.; Part. 2; 14s.; Part 3, 21s.; Part 4, 19s. 1919,—Part_ db, 12s. 6455 Part 2, 11s. 6d-; Part 3, 17s. 6d.; Part 4, 13s. r 1920. porart 1, 10s. ‘9d:: Part 2, 7s. 64.; Part Dose Bart 4, 11s. x elise Se Part DeaBSos Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 9s. 6d. ; 122 Part L 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 13s. 6d.; Part 3, ats? Part. 4, AOS. pe ; ee ; , 12s.; Part 3, 16s.; Part 4, 18s. 6d. 18s. 6d.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, ae Pes han pee ate 8, 8s. 9d.; Part 4, 14s. 6d; “48s. 6a.; Part 3, 9s. 6d.; : Part 4, 15s. Memoria Youu “issued October 13th,. 1893]. Royal 4to. LI. and 308 Price £2 2s. ; Ta 3 Sune ote OF AUSTRALIAN FISHES. By William Seay F.L.S. [1881]. Price ae net. : Dae PROCEEDINGS, 1928, PART 2. CONTENTS. Notes on Australian Coleoptera, with Descriptions of New Species. Part i. By Charles Oke Pie eA Sm oe as Spee mera LAM te Dy rat Dc The Loranthaceae of Anabela: one vii. By W.F. Blakely. (Plates i-ix) Crane-flies (Tipulidae, Diptera) from Barrington Tops, N.S.W. By Charles P. Alexander, F.E.S. (Communicated by I. M. Mackerras, M.B., ChM., B.Sc.) Be The Growth Rings in the Wood of a NSRRaaEa Roane dae: Coniters. By W. D. Francis. - (Plates x-xi.) < A Review of the Australian Species of Corp adines (Oreninaceae)- By the Rev. H. M. R. Rupp, B.A., and W. H. Nicholls. (Plate xii.) .. ; A Revision of the Australian Bombyliidae (Diptera). Part i. By Frederick H.-S. Roberts, M.Sc. (Four Text-figures.) Fossil Plants from Plutoville, Cape York Peninsula. By A. B. Walker’, D.Sc. (Plates xiii-xiv and two Text-figures.) Pages. 1- 30 31-50 “B1- 70 T1- 79 80- 89 90-144 145-150 (Issued 16th July, 1928.) oc=> lo Vol. LIT. No. 217. . ae _ Part 3. cs THE PROCEEDINGS LINNEAN SOCIETY © Ile. New SouTH WALES E nck x ‘Se eae x Part III (Pages 151-317.) CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN MAY-JUNE. With ten plates. : [Plates xv-xxiv.] SYDNEY: PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY THE AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO., LTD., Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney, and SOLD. BY THE SOCINTY. 1928. \ PRICE 8/9. Agent in Hurope: Messrs. Dutav & Co., 32 Old Bond Street, London, W.1. H. Cambage, C.BE, ELS. 3. “es SEL Canter, B.A., F.E.S. Hon. Treasurer: G. BIAS Waterhouse, D. Se, B aaa gae a ee “Seeretary: A. B. “Walkom, D.Sc. Cc. Anderson, M.A., D.Sc. CA NN Ww. ‘Frogeal -. i. GC. Andrews, B.A., F.G.S. EcjeeGe Se aac, NV see we Browne, D.Sc. feline Ne rag ~ Professor A. N. Burkitt M.B., = Se. - *&R. H, Cambage, C.B.E., F.LS. eee EL oS Carter, B.A. F.E.S. re Son Cheel. ‘ Sir T. W. Edgeworth 1 David, KBE, C.M.G., DS.0., BA. D.Sc, FBS. Storie ‘Dixson, MéBGrCh: Mad #2 SG A.W Waterhouse, Dse. J 7 a: :) Auditor: ts H. “Rayment, PCP.A. Wie the excenuian of Volumes LVI of the Pacman ; rey % stock was totally destroyed in the Garden Palace Fire. Me Linnean Society of N.S.W. may be 2 from ie at the le prices: — eae pre ares Proceedings for 1882, Vol. VII. pare 1, 1s es Pare 2, : Proceedings for 1883, Vol. VIII.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, bs Proceedings for 1884, Vol. IX.—Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 12 Proceedings for 1885, Vol. X.—Part ate OYE? Part grag p 17s. 6d. Z , Proceedings for 1886, Vol. - 12s. 6d. s : aie os Proceedings for 1887, Vol. II.—Part. ape Ts.5 Part, 2, “gef * \ Proceedings for 1888, Vol. IfI.—Part 1, lis.; Part By! £1 re ‘Part 3 Proceedings for 1889, Vol. IV. —Part 1, lis: Part 2, 16s.; Part 3, Proceedings for 1890, Vol. V.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 98.3 P Proceedings for 1891, Vol. VI.—Part 1, 10s,; Part 2, 9s. ay t Ts. 6d. Proceedings for 1892, Vol. VII. —Part 1, 6s. 6d.; Part 2, ‘Proceedings for 1893, Vol. VIII. —Part ry Bees . Part Re ‘ Proceedings for 1894, Vol. « seed ne tar’ 1895, Vol. X.—Part ae 158.5 Part, 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s.; Supplement, ( Part se 12s. — ses = for 1896. —Part 1, 9s.; Supplement, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 6s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6.; t 1, 10s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 1, 8s.; Part 2, 6s.; Part 3, 12s.; Part 4, 14s. 2 athe “12s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, 10s. 6d. 1,. 85.3 Part 2, 10s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s. 6d.; Part 4, 17s. 6d. nes toh 1901. ~= part a 10s.;-Part MeO se Part 5,08); bart 4, 17s. 6d, ings for 1902. —Part 1, _Ts.; Part 2, 7s. 64.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Supplement, 3s.; ges for 180s Bact it 93.2 Part 2s ‘12s. 6a; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 15s. - 12s for 1904.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 10s. for 1905. —Part 1, with Supplement, isis: Part oe LOSc* ee 3, 12s. 6d.; , with Supplement, 10s. ys Rae 1gs for 1906.—Part 1, 12s. 64.; Part. 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. ings for 1907.—Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 18s. for 1908.—Part 1, 7s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 14s.; ; Part 4, 12s. 6d. :s for 1909.—Part 1, 128.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. gs for 1910—Part 1, 11s.; Part: 2, Jis;;') Part 3,-%s.; Part 4;12s. 6d/ for 1911. —Part t779's--6d_s Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s. for 1912.—Part 1, 8s. 6d.; Part 2; 25s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. for 1913.—Part 1, 14s.; Part 2.as..6d.; Part 3,-6s:; Part 4, 138. for 1914.—Part 1, 138.5 Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 25s.; Part 4, 19s. for 1915.—Part 1, 17s.; Part 2 12s-6d,; Part 8, 10s; Part 4;-11s. for -1916.—Part_ a, 10s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 199 's for 4917. —Part 41, 14s.; ; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. ; for 1918. —Part nals 20s.; Part 2, 14s.; Part 3, 21s.; Part 4, 19s. s Shor: 1919.—Part 1, 12s. 6d.; Part 2, 11s. 6d.; Part 3, 17s. 6d.; Part 4, 138s. s for 1920.—Part 1, 10s. 9d.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 11s. ngs for 1921.—Part 1, 9s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 9s. 6d. ee lings for (1922. —Part 1, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 138s. 64d.; Part 3, 1ls.; Part 4, 13s.; oceedings for 1923 —Part 5 (ae ‘2s, fad Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 16s.; Part 4, 13s. 6d.; ceedings for 1924.—Part 1, De jubarta2 aga: “6.5 Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s.; gs for 1925. —Part 1, #8; Part 2, 12s; Part 8; 8s. 9d.; Part 4, 14s. 64.; dings for 1926. Part Lets; s Part 2,513s: 6d; Part 3, 9s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s.; : { vik z ca ae a for 1928.—Part 1, 2s.; Part 2, 85. 6d.; ‘Part 3 3, 8s. 9d. ‘The Macizar ee Syiee ten pigeuee October 13th, 1893]. ' Royal 4to. LI. and 308 ages, with portrait, and forty-two Dares: Price £2 2s. : ee DuscriprivE ‘CATALOGUE OF AUSTRALIAN FISHES. By William Macleay, F.L.S. [1881]. few copies only. Price £1 net. $ ‘The ‘TRANSACTIONS or THE ENTOMOLOGICAL Society or NEW SouTH WALES, 2 vols., 8vo. Vol. ‘I (complete in five parts, -1863- -66), price 70s. net, Parts 2-5 10s. each; Vol. II omplete in five parts, 1869- 73), price 30s. net, or single Parts, 7s. 6d. each.] aF ROCEEDINGS, Eee CONTENTS, Linnean Macleay Hellow of the Society in ‘Geology. ee and four Text-ligures.) |... .. 4.4. Ea The Larva of Ee eae IE Selys (Odonata). ooh C. S., F. E. ‘Se ©. M.Z. s. (Thirteen eeehe wie a (2 ihe Physiography of the Cox River Basin: By Frank AL ‘ (Plates xix-xx, and seventeen Text-figures. ) Recep eee , ‘3 Fossil Plants from the Upper Palaeozoic Rocks of New South Wales. B. Walkom, D. ae 4 ot aes xxi-xxili and one /Text- Ba is mpipieray: By Charles P. Alexander. 4 Mackerras.) (Two Text- ‘figures. ae eae 2a peut cae Notes on Australian Diptera. No. xiv. eee R. Malloch. | Wommanicated : - by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) BERR IG oe CUL On is eR eae Lepidodendroid Remains on yataall N. S.W. By oe B. Walk m, (Plate &XiIV. ). rage iso te Spurs aia Sigh fe AINOM BEG Ain a oR Ra On the Life- history of Ceratodus. By Thos. ie Bancroft, MB. oe _ (Bdin.). (Communicated by) Dr. I. My “Mackerras.) ie. caer toh pos - Corrigenda (PROCEEDINGS, 1928, Part 2). Page 14, iine 22. for Tyramorphus, read Tyromorphus Page 35, line 39, for australe, read australis Ke nee 101, line 40, for sinuatifscia, read sinmatifascia \ Ret NS to, W ay WE FOR THE YEAR- (1928. ig i With seven plates. (Plates xXXV- -xxxi-] eet, Sa DNs 1G Sep enon, PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR nae Gio ee “THE AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO., LTD., : ar ee ee Seamer. Street, Glebe, Sydney, foie: . Son tek Bi oes sha ; Sarr ese _ SOLD BY THE SOCIETY. ors Fle ee i928. ee eee GRRE E107. = ie Be Agent in Europe: oS e so Messrs. Duzau & Co., 32 Old Bond Street, London, W.1. _ i = i 28 e : re Habs 2s = aia ; Bas ove aa alte Ronee ee ae ae ~ ea : Soe ASTISE OF OFFICERS AND CO PM Se ns | President: ; ae « _Assistant- Professor Ww. By ‘Browne, 5 Ree at pata eS s oS - Vice-Presidents : R. H. Cambage, C.B.E., F.LS. - Ae Ge eae ie H. J. Carter, B.A, FES. I ree ee: AL aS Basset Bull. Su5'f ~ — Hon. Ther ae: G. A. Waterhouse, D.Se, BE, 3 poe a! fa : Secretary: Ke B. Watkom, oe Se- y Peso Rees : Councit: oie ah ee st C. Anderson,-M.A., D.Sc. a ee OS hoes RLS BE. C. Andrews, B.A., F.G.S. — oP ae: Me Goldfinch. W. R. Browne, D.Sc. | ; Ae Ge See Professor A. N. Burkitt M.B.. B.Sc. A, R. H. Cambage, C.B.E., F.LS. ad Nee Ate tors H, J. Carter, BA. ES. | “ > o Be M. tree MI BE Cheel.2 2. ; eee NA Nicholson, M.Se. eae Sire ee VV ‘Edgeworth David, K.B.E., A= B: Walkom, -D.Se. C.M.G., D.S.O., B.A., D.Sc., PRS, NaS Sheer 8 i Wardlaw, Disc es ta Storie Dixson, M.B. ,-Ch.M. _ Ge G. A. eRe S D ae BE, F. Be Auditor: F. _H, BAP eNG: FOP.A. 16 College Street, Suen or from Dulau & Co., 32 ld Bond | at the following prices:— _ p * Bia ate “FIRST SERIES. Proceedings for 1882, Vol. VII. —Part aly, Ts. 6a.; Part. Pi 10s.; ; Part Proceedings for 1888, Vol. VIII.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 5s.; Part 3, Proceedings for 1884, Vol. IX.—Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 12s.; Pa 4 Proceedings for 1885, Vol. X.—Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, Ts. 6d.; Part 3, 17s. 6d. ee oe Ms es ro eS oc SECOND SERIES. Se Proceedings for 1886, Vol. I.—Part 1, 10s. 6d.; Part. 2, AS Se Part ae ~ e12s, 6d, ik ss Proceedings for 1887, Vol. II1.—Part is 18. 7 Part 2, 88.5, ieee 3, 12s.; Proceedings for 1888, Vol. IIJ.—Part 1, 158.5. Part 2, £1 4s.; Part Bias a hos Proceedings for 1889, Vol. IV.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2, 16s.; Part 3, 19s.; Part Proceedings for 1890, Vol. V.—Part 1, diss, Part 2, 9S8:; Part 3, Oa: s) Part: d Proceedings for 1891, Vol. VE eat ais ge ae oN as. pals Part 3, i Ts. 6d; e A * DG Proceedings for 1892, Vol. VII.—Part 1, 6s. Gd. Part bs 4s, 6a; Part 3, 88 Par Proceedings for 1893, Vol. ~ + Pa t Proceedings for 1894, Vol. B . 6d.; Rart 3, 9s.;' Part 4, 12s. 6d. ‘Part 3 128.; ; Rare 4, 14s. - 12s. 6d.; Pare 3 “14s.; BebPart. 4; 15s. 2, Ts. 6d.; Part 3, 98.5 aa 4, 10s. , 6d.; oo Be “12s. 6d.; ‘Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. : 1907. oohaee 1, ie Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Pant 3, 15s.; Part 4, 18s. ys pote r 1908. —Part 1, (Sof PETER A rs 98.5 Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. : : 1909. —Part mo 12s.; Part Posie Part 3, aici : Part 4, 16s. 6d. } i roa _iis.; Part 2, lis.; Part 3, Us.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 2 oy Sh 6d.; Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s. 6d.; Part 4,:10s. ; ; 60.3 Part 2, 25s.; Part oe 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 16s. ‘Part 2, Se 6d.; Part—3; 6s:; Part 4, 13s. Part an dese oe Part 8, 25s.; Part 4, 19s. ; Par 2, 12s. 6d.; ‘Part 3, 10s.; Part Scalise Part leone Spat 3, 15s.; Part 4; 19s. os Part 2, 9s.; ‘Part 8, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. 20s.; 7 Part 2, 14s.; Part 3, 21s.; Part 4, 19s. Le ‘f, 12s. 6d.; Part 2, 11s. 6d.; Part 3, 17s. 6d.; Part 4,\13s. le 10s. 9d.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, Hs. ay ses eae: 2, 8s.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 9s. 6d. iS as. fe Part 2, 13s. 6d.; Part 3, USS oo oe 4, 13s.; : + Bs, “6a.; Part 2, 128.5 Part 3, 16s.; Part 4, 13s. 64.; Wart ee 13s. 6d.; Part 3, “12s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s.; Cae eC { p28, “Part. 22s 1s, Part 3, 8s. 9d.; Part Wks 6d.; Part 2, ‘iss, 6a. Part 3, as. 6d.; - Part 4, gee 2, ‘Los. 64.5 Part Be Ms. Part. 4, 12s. ga.; t : Part 3, 8s: 9d. so E aings for +1928.—Part = 2s: ‘Part 2, 8s, “64.5 eae 3, oe 9d.; Part A 10582 = Vira he Macumay Memorran Vonuae [issued October 13th, 1893]. Royal 4to. x1. pee es BSCR RIPTIVE Cararogun oF AUSTRALIAN FISHES. By ‘William a F.L.S. [1881]. oe Notes on ‘Australian Diptera. No. xv. By Ji a “Malloch, (Oc = by I. mM. MOTT OS: » Rbive Text- figures). Rupp, AS ‘(Five Gesieme: Notes on Australian Diptera. No. xvi. By f R. Malo h. ( by I. M. Mackerras.) (Four Dont bees), ; The Tanyderidae Australia Sout gate ens OF M. Z. s. Cee Text- ieures ie 3 < Notes on Australian Lycaenidae. ei % =&BE,, F.E:S. (Plate XXvV.) Seve EEA Revision of the Australian” Bombyliidae _ (Diptera). . Frederick H. 8. Roberts, MSe. .. ..- é . A new Buprestid from Australia. By A Thery. ‘3 Carter.) (One Text- figure.) Ae Bec a Fossil Plants from the Esk District, Queensland. By A. B. Watiom, pd eee XXVi-XXVIil and et ‘Text- ee (Gmelina oe i). nine Text-figures.) ~... |<. ae cen aes William Aitcheson Haswell. Menorial Notice. peat ao aa ‘ : \ . u With eight plates. [Plates XXXii-Xxxix.] a SypNuy: tec PRINTED: AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY See “THE AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO., LTD., ee. Pe ose aa Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney, : . : Ceweee and Ps, SOLD BY THE SOCIETY. 1928. PRICE 9/-. ts Agent in Europe: Durav & Co., 32 Old Bond Street, London, W.1. i Sas at) ante H 2 Vice-Presidents: ee een H. J. Carter, B.A., EF.E.S. / a AY yet Basset ‘Hull. _ A. G. Hamilton. : : Hon. Treasurer: *E. Cheel. bn ee ’ Proceedings for 1893, Vol. VIII.—Part 1, 5s.; Part 2, lis.; “Part. 3, 6s. ; Pact 4, 9s. LIST OF OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1928-29) _ President: cana 7k a } Assistant-Professor AW Ta Browne, D. Se. ; if . 1 » The aden TST Br Dire pe ‘Secretary: A. B. Walkom, D.Se. Beta ~ . Council: © ee se SEIN te SOs, 3 7s SY ne’ ot Cc. Anderson, M.A., D,Sc. ey Soe ees NR Goldinche Mm CAndrews, B.A‘, 1.G.S. °, 0. 2 4 A, Ge Hamilton W. R. Browne, D.Sc. . _A. F. Basset Hull. cae Professor A. N, Burkitt M.B., B.Sc. A. HL S. Lucas, M.A., B.Sc. H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S. 5 I. Mackerras, M.B., Ch. M. M. E. Cheel. SN A. J. Nicholson, M.Sc. es Sir T. W. Edgeworth David, KBE, A. B. Walkom, D.Sc. | ee ae C.M.G., D.S.O., B.A., D.Se., mS H. S. H. Wardlaw, D.Sc. — i Storie Dixson, M.B., Ch.M. : G. A. Wate rite dees: DSc: BE, of. Bs. ee Ww. WIGeEatt F.L.S. pee 5 ai hee Rei tc ae! Auditor: F. “Er. Rayment, FOP.A, meen Soret *Blected 24th October, 1928, in place of AGE A. | Waterhouse, D. Se., BE, “resigned. 5 Sah | i = = ay: f. oe | _ Linnean Society of N.S.W. may be obtained from the aociely cea ae cass 16 College Street, Sydney, or from Dulau & Co., 382 Old Bond pared: London, Ww. at the follewing prices :— Sasori! yest : : eee SERIES. eed i te Proceedings for 1882, Proceedings for 1883, Proceedings for 1884, Vol. [X.—Part ile Bs.: ; Part 2, 12s.; : ‘Part’ 35 Fie. 5, co ‘ £ Pbse pace Proceedings for 1885, Vol. X.—Part Ico See Par ty 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, e ee & 5 17s. 6d. - Sie! 5 e) la pa eo a a SECOND SHRIBW So Uk ame eee Proceedings for 1886, Vol. I.—Part ios oaunearntics. ‘12s.; Part 3, 138. ‘Part 4, e 12s. 6d. > Proceedings for 1887, Vol. II.—Part 1, 7s.; Part 2 8s.; ; Part 3, 12s.; ‘2 “Part 4, £1 es Proceedings for 1888, Vol. II1I.—Part 1, 15s.; Part 2, £1 4s.; Part 3 £1; Part 4, 18s. Proceedings for 1889, Vol. IV.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2, 16s.; Part 3, 19s.; 3 Part 4, il Ss. Proceedings for 1890, Vol. V.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 9s. Proceedings for 1891, Vol. Vi.—Part ate Fos Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Set BS 17s.; . Part 4 7s. 6d. Proceedings for 1892, Vol. VII.—Part 1, 6s. 6d.5 Part 2, 4s. 6a.; Part 3; 8s.; Part 4: 8s. se Proceedings for 1894, Vol. IX.—Part 1, 12s.; Pane 2, 125% pate 3, 13s.; Pert 8s. ti "Proceedings for 1895, Vol. ais ks 1, isan Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s.; Supplement, ; ols Gaus bart. 4, 10s. j oe ‘Proceedings for 1896.—Part 1, 9s.; Supplement, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 6s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Reeen Part 4.618: 6d) ER Le Welohet 8 ce ; _ Proceedings for 1897.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. _ Proceedings for 1898.—Part 1, 3s.; Part 2, 6s.; Part 3, 12s.; Part 4, 14s. Proceedings for 1899.—Part 1, 12s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3,-10s.; Part 4, 10s. 6d. _ Proceedings for 1900.—Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 10s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s. 6d.; Part 4, 17s. 6d. 5 - Proceedings for 1901.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 5s.; Part 4, 17s. 6d. Proceedings for 1902.—Part 1, %s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Supplement, 3s.; Part 4, 15s. me : Proceedings for 1903.—Part 1, 9s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 15s. . Proceedings for 1904.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 10s. Proceedings for 1905.—Part 1, with Supplement, 78.3 oPart oAOSs Part o, L2S. 6d; Part 4, with Supplement, 10s. 6d. ~. Proceedings for 1906.—Part 1, 12s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. Proceedings for 1907.—Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 18s. _*Proceedings for 1908.—Part 1, 1s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. . Proceedings for 1909.—Part 1, 12s Part. 2; 17s.;\ Part ‘3, 14s.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. Proceedings for 1910.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2, 11is.; Part 3, 7s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. Proceedings for 1911.—Part 1, 9s. 6d.; Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s. _. Proceedings for 1912.—Part 1, 8s. 6d.; Part 2, 25s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. Proceedings for 1913.—Part I, 14s.; Part: 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 6s.; Part 4, 13s. : _ Proceedings for 1914.—Part 1, 18s.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 3; 25s.; Part 4, 19s. _ Proceedings for 1915.—Part 1, 17s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, 11s. rs Proceedings for 1916.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 19s. Proceedings for 1917:—Part 1, 14s.; Part 2, 9s); Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. __ Proceedings for 1918.—Part 1, 20s.; Part 2, 14s.; Part 3, 21s.; Part 4, 19s. es) Proceedings for 1919.—Part 1, 12s. 6d.; Part 2, 11s. 6d.; Part 3, 17s. 6d.; Part 4, 13s. Proceedings for 1920.—Part 1, 10s. 9d.; Part 2, Ts. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 11s. ate fine Be - Proceedings for 1921.—Part 1, 9s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 9s..6d._ 5 Proceedings for 1922.—Part 1, 2s. 6d.;. Part 2, 13s. 6d.; Part 3, 11s.; Part 4, 13s.; we Part 5, 28. Ser % Proceedings for 1923.—Part 1, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 16s.; Part 4, 13s. 64.; ‘ Part. 5, 2s. . : : p my 2 ~ Proceedings for 1924.—Part 1, 2s.; Part 2, 18s. 6d.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s; Pere Aer ty Ope as: : “3 race _ Proceedings for 1925.—Part 1, 2s.; Part 2; 12s.; Part 3, 8s. 9d; Part 4, 14s. 6d.; Part 5, 2s. ; “Proceedings for -1926'—Part 1, 25,5, Part 2, 13s. 6d/; Part> 3, 9s; 6d.; Part 4, 15s:; oe Part 5, 25) : EINES : Proceedings for 1927. ee 1, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 10s. 6d.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 34.; 4 Part-5, 2s. _Proceedings for 1928—Part 1, 2s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 8, 8s. 9d.; Part 4, 10s.; Part?5; 9s. ; - 2 3 The MacLEAY MEMORIAL VOLUME [issued October 13th, 1893]. Royal 4to. LI. and 308 pages, with portrait, and forty-two plates. - Price £2. 2s. : pe Si DuscriptivE CATALOGUE oF AUSTRALIAN FISHES. By William Macleay, F.L.S. [1881]. A few copies only. Price £1 net. : The TRANSACTIONS OF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SocieTY oF New SoutH WALES, 2 vols., 8vo. {Vol. I (complete in five parts, 1863-66), price 70s. net, Parts 2-5 10s. each; Vol, II (complete in five parts, 1869-73), price 30s, net, or single Parts, 7s. 6d. each.] CONTENTS. ies ca reet € Mew Australian “Mydaidae (Diptera): By 1 M. a eker ras, Ch. M. Dee cles i) of a new Genus and 1 Spec : ie the e Buprestidae, “By H Je. Car Seite ‘ By A. B. Walkom, DSc. be = 2 Nhe: Carboniferous. Rocks pobween. Giennies- Hunter River District, New. South Wales. (Plate XxXVii and seven Text- figures. Dae af "The Carboniferous Rocks in- the Muewellheo ok: Scone Dis ri % Reference to their Structural Relations. — a). Sake nee ae (Plate xxxviii and two Text-figures. Ne Notes on Australian Diptera. No. xvii. = J. R. “Malloe’ cated by Dr. rT M. Mackerras.) (Twelve. Text- figures eoehe Daeaiosraphy: of the Wollondilly River Basin. By. : (Plate xxxix and. twelve Text-figures. eS aoe Serine Notes on Australian ‘Diptera. No. xviii. i eee : cated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) eS : Rah Sie Ne (Issued 15th February, 1929.) Vol. LIT. a No. 220. Part 6. THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY oF New SoutH WALES FOR THE YEAR y | 1928. Part VI (Pages xrxrv-lexvevi). ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES, LIST OF: MEMBERS AND INDEX. SYDNEY: PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY THE AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO., LTD, : Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney, and © SOLD BY THE SOCIETY. 1929. PRICE 2/-. Agent in Hurope: Messrs. Dutau & Co., 32 Old Bond Street, London, W.1. The Linnean Society of New ; . SRY he We, OE PN 3s SS IST OR. OR HICERS, AND GOUNCHL, 1978-25:) * 2 Z eee 2 Bee aa i ees tee so rae Paneer’ a Bak G fos E President: i TES = a ed nf / ; ets : Assistant- Professor W.. R. Browne, 18: ae), Piao eth BSC ae “ os = a é i: vay aN Vice-Presidents: a & : Eerie 2 Hd: Carter BaNe , at Bes. cae ; ede A. F. Basset Hull. ~ eG eel annudtamen Ss eee cee ig Teas Set eae eee a ; x 2 ag i OF St eons Treasurer: +E, “Chel. x “ A ree _ Secretary: A. B. Walkom, D. Se. Rete iN : a Lo Vounetice is enone ss ‘@ Anderson, MeA., D,Se. <*>. ® : SS. Gan Goldfinch. saa, ni “HC: Andrews, B.A., I.G.S. fs oe ROG. Ekamielt gms ay og Ww. R. Browne, D.Se. Loe - A. F. Basset Hull. — aces ss “eee ae Professor A.N. Burkitt MB. B.Se. ues A. H..S, Lucas, M.A., B.Se. — oS S H, J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S. . J. M, Mackerras, M.B., cl ig E. Cheel.- — 3 ene A. J. Nicholson, MSc. oe Sin DW: ‘Hageworth David, K.B.E., i + Professor MGs B: “Osbony Se C.M.G:,, D.S.0.,, BA, D.Sc, ERS. > © A.B. Walkom, D.Sc. - cas -T. Storie Dixson, M.B., ChM. = H, S. H. Wardlaw, D.Se._ - W. W. Froggatt, F.LS. ; : y G. A. Waterhouse, D.Se., BE ; : Auditor: FE. i ‘Rayment, FCP.AL cs *Blected 24th opapen, 1928, in’ place ae G; = Waterhouse, D. Se. Bs I ) = - Linnean Society of N.S.W. may ‘be Sotained: 7 ie Soc 16 College Street, Sydney, or from Dulau & Co., 32 Old Bond rs) at the following prices: — : : . a : aes x FIRST SERIES. cs Proceedings for 1882, Vol. VIL —Part 1, 7s. 6d.; ‘Part 2, 10s.; Pare 3, °f Procéedings for 1883, Vol. VIII.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 5s.; Part oy qs. ‘Pa t Proceedings for 1884, Vol. IX.—Part. 1, 8s.; Part 2, tasis ‘Part 3 £1 psa “Part Proceedings for 1885, Vol. X.—Part 1, aoe Part 2, fs: 6d.4 Part. 3, 15 : 17s. 6d. aaa ; Pac aes deg eet tie ee! aaa _ SECOND series, ee eee. Proceedings 12s. 6d. Proceedings ‘Proceedings ar Proceedings AY, Spare 1 lis.y Part. 2, 16s.; Part + 8, joes Ban Proceedings bs ree ali rages Bae 2, 9s.; . ae Bi LES Part 4 Proceedings 5 Ts. 6d. Proceedings Proceedings Viti —Part 1, Es Part ri ag ie Part. 08, 685 J P Proceedings if —Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part: ap shogent 2 : . | x mh: 3 ae ; Se % x AS Ae 4, £1 is. 6d. pe s -s for 1897.—Part 1, Ades ‘Part 2, 8s, 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 12s. 64. . for 1898.—Part 1, 3s.; Part 2, 6s.; Part Soba siPart 4,7 14s. ss for 1899.—Part 1, 12s. 6d.; Part 2y 12s.4 Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, 10s. 6d. / for 1900.—Part 1, 85,3 Part 2, 10s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s. 6d.; Part 4, 17s. 6d. abs its (of dings for 1901. —Part 1, 10s.; , Part- 2, 9s.; Part 3, 5s.; Part 4, 17s. 6d. ro seedings | for 1902. —Part 78.5 Part: - Ts. 6d.5 prart oy See Gas: Semick Spier 35a eile 9s,; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part oe ‘14s.; Part 4: 15s. dings tor 1904—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, Ts. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 10s. 2a with- ‘Supplement, tS.) Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; 2 ae 1906.—Part ee “12s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s, 6d.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s.~ gs for 1907.—Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 8s. 64.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 18s. is for 1908. —Part Lis. Part 2; 9si; Part 3/ids.> Part. 4), 12s. 6d: ; for 1909.—Part 1, 12s.; ; Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 14s.; ; Part 4, 16s. 6d. for 1910.—Part A Meise Part 2, 1is.; Part 3, (s.;\ Part. 4, 12s. 6d. — for 1911.—Part 1, 9s. 6d.; Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s. for 1912.—Part 1, 8s. 6d.; Part 2, 25s.; part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. . for 1913.—Part 1, 14s.; He Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 6s.; Part 4, 13s. for 1914.—Part 1, SUB S35. Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 25s.; Part 4, 19s. for 1915.—Part. Bie 17s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, 11s. for 1916. —Part ii 208.3" Part 2 hess: Part 3. 15s.5 sPart.4, 19s. for A917. —Part sal 14s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. for 1918.—Part ak 20s.: Part.2, 14s.; Part 8, 21s.; Part 4, 19s. 'S for 1919 Part. if 12s. 6d.; Part 2, 11s. 6d.; Part 3, 17s. 6d.; Part 4, 13s. 5s for 1920. —Part 1, 10s. 9d.; Part 2, 7s. 6d. Page 3, .9s.5 bark A, AAs. for-1921.—Part 1 , 98.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 9s. 6d. ; for 1922.—Part ty 2s. 6d.; Part 2; 13s. 6d.; Part $e 11s.; : eee 52 sa WFP 7 for Ese 2s. 6d: Part PA 128.5 ant 3, 16s.; Part 4, 13s. 6d; roceedings for. 1924.—Part 1, 2s.; Part 2, 13s. 6d.; Part 3, 12s. 6d; ‘Part 4,” 10s.; ia Parts) 28500" ees : : ivi a ee : ee ins for 1925.—Part 2s) Part, 2, 12s.; Part 3, 8s. 9d.; ; ea ask ede Pee Part | 2, es. oe Part Os. 6a.; ‘Part 4, 15s. ; cee “for 1928. eee a enrASpainl Part 2, 8s. 6a; Part 3, 8s. aa. Part. AS ASH. > INDEX ¢ TO Vonumes It OF THE. SProGEnDIe es LUSS Het 15th February, 1929]. pp. 108. ae -MACLEAY Ae eRe VoLUME [issued October 13th, 1893]. Royal 4to. ui. and 308. cee with Portrait, and forty-two plates. | Price = 2s. ; _Duscriprive Caratoaue or “AUSTRALIAN eee By William” Macleay, F.L:S. este : “The TRANSACTIONS oF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF New SoutH ces 2 vols., 8vo. oe: I (complete in five Dans) 1863- Pee price is, net, Parts 2-5 10s. each; Vol. II Abstract of Proceedi ‘Donations and Exchanges ‘List of Members .. FN z SIPS Ir Seay Lah he Na Hay Ae. ‘ ere ee Petite AS Sedta Bie Gay nde Simo henge tt es ye adie " ats f : Spe tT Saganoeiner eee eras RLeapetbeey atailt let scrd 3 : peor cuna is Santen sel icabakens dala eens ‘ “Ee i” as n , “ athe td - 1 ieiadicae La sesiitna es Hoan as “ : “she Spr ¢ Se Pr Be a indie neh ee wa 3 : a pares Sane bg ep EE aie, svt Seed teed heh aie eetctee We rere: Nea me wr